College Physics

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF

THEORY AND PROBLEMS
OF

COLLEGE PHYSICS
Ninth Edition
.

FREDERICK J. BUECHE, Ph.D.
Distinguished Professor at Large University of Dayton

EUGENE HECHT, Ph.D.
Professor of Physics Adelphi University

.

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE SERIES
McGRAW-HILL New York St. Louis San Francisco Auckland BogotaÂ Caracas Lisbon London Madrid Mexico City Milan Montreal New Delhi San Juan Singapore Sydney Tokyo Toronto

McGraw-Hill

abc

Copyright © 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc All rights reserved. Manufactured in the United States of America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher. 0-07-1367497 The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: 0-07-008941-8.

All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after every occurrence of a trademarked name, we use names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement of the trademark. Where such designations appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps. McGraw-Hill eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and sales promotions, or for use in corporate training programs. For more information, please contact George Hoare, Special Sales, at george_hoare@mcgraw-hill.com or (212) 904-4069.

TERMS OF USE
This is a copyrighted work and The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. (“McGraw-Hill”) and its licensors reserve all rights in and to the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976 and the right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, reproduce, modify, create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any part of it without McGraw-Hill’s prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use of the work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply with these terms. THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”. McGRAW-HILL AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE WORK VIA HYPERLINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill and its licensors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions contained in the work will meet your requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill nor its licensors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in the work or for any damages resulting therefrom. McGraw-Hill has no responsibility for the content of any information accessed through the work. Under no circumstances shall McGraw-Hill and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, consequential or similar damages that result from the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of them has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply to any claim or cause whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise. DOI: 10.1036/0071367497

Preface
The introductory physics course, variously known as ``general physics'' or ``college physics,'' is usually a two-semester in-depth survey of classical topics capped o with some selected material from modern physics. Indeed the name ``college physics'' has become a euphemism for introductory physics without calculus. Schaum's Outline of College Physics was designed to uniquely complement just such a course, whether given in high school or in college. The needed mathematical knowledge includes basic algebra, some trigonometry, and a tiny bit of vector analysis. It is assumed that the reader already has a modest understanding of algebra. Appendix B is a general review of trigonometry that serves nicely. Even so, the necessary ideas are developed in place, as needed. And the same is true of the rudimentary vector analysis that's requiredÐit too is taught as the situation requires. In some ways learning physics is unlike learning most other disciplines. Physics has a special vocabulary that constitutes a language of its own, a language immediately transcribed into a symbolic form that is analyzed and extended with mathematical logic and precision. Words like energy, momentum, current, ¯ux, interference, capacitance, and so forth, have very speci®c scienti®c meanings. These must be learned promptly and accurately because the discipline builds layer upon layer; unless you know exactly what velocity is, you cannot know what acceleration or momentum are, and without them you cannot know what force is, and on and on. Each chapter in this book begins with a concise summary of the important ideas, de®nitions, relationships, laws, rules, and equations that are associated with the topic under discussion. All of this material constitutes the conceptual framework of the discourse, and its mastery is certainly challenging in and of itself, but there's more to physics than the mere recitation of its principles. Every physicist who has ever tried to teach this marvelous subject has heard the universal student lament, ``I understand everything; I just can't do the problems.'' Nonetheless most teachers believe that the ``doing'' of problems is the crucial culmination of the entire experience, it's the ultimate proof of understanding and competence. The conceptual machinery of de®nitions and rules and laws all come together in the process of problem solving as nowhere else. Moreover, insofar as the problems re¯ect the realities of our world, the student learns a skill of immense practical value. This is no easy task; carrying out the analysis of even a moderately complex problem requires extraordinary intellectual vigilance and un¯agging attention to detail above and beyond just ``knowing how to do it.'' Like playing a musical instrument, the student must learn the basics and then practice, practice, practice. A single missed note in a sonata is overlookable; a single error in a calculation, however, can propagate through the entire eort producing an answer that's completely wrong. Getting it right is what this book is all about. Although a selection of new problems has been added, the 9th-edition revision of this venerable text has concentrated on modernizing the work, and improving the pedagogy. To that end, the notation has been simpli®ed and made consistent throughout. For example, force is now symbolized by F and only F; thus centripetal force is FC, weight is FW, tension is FT, normal force is FN, friction is Ff, and so on. Work (W ) will never again be confused with weight (FW), and period iii
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

iv

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

(T ) will never be mistaken for tension (FT). To better match what's usually written in the classroom, a vector is now indicated by a boldface symbol with a tiny arrow above it. The idea of signi®cant ®gures is introduced (see Appendix A) and scrupulously adhered to in every problem. Almost all the de®nitions have been revised to make them more precise or to re¯ect a more modern perspective. Every drawing has been redrawn so that they are now more accurate, realistic, and readable. If you have any comments about this edition, suggestions for the next edition, or favorite problems you'd like to share, send them to E. Hecht, Adelphi University, Physics Department, Garden City, NY 11530. Freeport, NY EUGENE HECHT

Contents
Chapter

1

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalar quantity. Vector quantity. Resultant. Graphical addition of vectors (polygon method). Parallelogram method. Subtraction of vectors. Trigonometric functions. Component of a vector. Component method for adding vectors. Unit vectors. Displacement.

1

Chapter

2

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed. Velocity. Acceleration. Uniformly accelerated motion along a straight line. Direction is important. Instantaneous velocity. Graphical interpretations. Acceleration due to gravity. Velocity components. Projectile problems.

13

Chapter

3

NEWTON'S LAWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass. Standard kilogram. Force. Net external force. The newton. Newton's First Law. Newton's Second Law. Newton's Third Law. Law of universal gravitation. Weight. Relation between mass and weight. Tensile force. Friction force. Normal force. Coecient of kinetic friction. Coecient of static friction. Dimensional analysis. Mathematical operations with units.

27

Chapter

4

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Concurrent forces. An object is in equilibrium. First condition for equilibrium. Problem solution method (concurrent forces). Weight of an object. Tensile force. Friction force. Normal force.

47

Chapter

5

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque (or moment). Two conditions for equilibrium. Position of the axis is arbitrary. Center of gravity.

56

Chapter

6

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Work. Unit of work. Energy. Kinetic energy. Gravitational potential energy. Work-energy theorem. Conservation of energy. Power. Kilowatt-hour.

69

Chapter

7

SIMPLE MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A machine. Principle of work. Mechanical advantage. Eciency.

80

v
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

vi

PREFACE

Chapter

8

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear momentum. Impulse. Impulse causes change in momentum. Conservation of linear momentum. Collisions and explosions. Perfectly elastic collision. Coecient of restitution. Center of mass.

87

Chapter

9

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angular displacement. Angular speed. Angular acceleration. Equations for uniformly accelerated motion. Relations between angular and tangential quantities. Centripetal acceleration. Centripetal force.

99

Chapter 10

RIGID-BODY ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torque (or moment). Moment of inertia. Torque and angular acceleration. Kinetic energy of rotation. Combined rotation and translation. Work. Power. Angular momentum. Angular impulse. Parallel-axis theorem. Analogous linear and angular quantities.

111

Chapter 11

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Period. Frequency. Graph of a vibratory motion. Displacement. Restoring force. Simple harmonic motion. Hookean system. Elastic potential energy. Energy interchange. Speed in SHM. Acceleration in SHM. Reference circle. Period in SHM. Acceleration in terms of T. Simple pendulum. SHM.

126

Chapter 12

DENSITY; ELASTICITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass density. Speci®c gravity. Elasticity. Stress. Strain. Young's modulus. Bulk modulus. Shear modulus. Elastic limit.

138

Chapter 13

FLUIDS AT REST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Average pressure. Standard atmospheric pressure. Hydrostatic pressure. Pascal's principle. Archimedes' principle.

146

Chapter 14

FLUIDS IN MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid ¯ow or discharge. Equation of continuity. Shear rate. Viscosity. Poiseuille's Law. Work done by a piston. Work done by a pressure. Bernoulli's equation. Torricelli's theorem. Reynolds number.

157

Chapter 15

THERMAL EXPANSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature. expansion. Linear expansion of solids. Area expansion. Volume

166

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

vii

Chapter 16

IDEAL GASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ideal (or perfect) gas. One mole of a substance. Ideal Gas Law. Special cases. Absolute zero. Standard conditions or standard temperature and pressure (S.T.P.). Dalton's Law of partial pressures. Gas-law problems.

171

Chapter 17

KINETIC THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kinetic theory. Avogadro's number. Mass of a molecule. Average translational kinetic energy. Root mean square speed. Absolute temperature. Pressure. Mean free path.

179

Chapter 18

HEAT QUANTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal energy. Heat. Speci®c heat. Heat gained (or lost). Heat of fusion. Heat of vaporization. Heat of sublimation. Calorimetry problems. Absolute humidity. Relative humidity. Dew point.

185

Chapter 19

TRANSFER OF HEAT ENERGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Energy can be transferred. Radiation. Conduction. Thermal resistance. Convection.

193

Chapter 20

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat. Internal energy. Work done by a system. First Law of Thermodynamics. Isobaric process. Isovolumic process. Isothermal process. Adiabatic process. Speci®c heats of gases. Speci®c heat ratio. Work related to area. Eciency of a heat engine.

198

Chapter 21

ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second Law of Thermodynamics. Most probable state. Entropy. Entropy is a measure of disorder.

209

Chapter 22

WAVE MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propagating wave. Wave terminology. In-phase vibrations. Speed of a transverse wave. Standing waves. Conditions for resonance. Longitudinal (compressional) waves.

213

Chapter 23

SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound waves. Equations for sound speed. Speed of sound in air. Loudness. Intensity (or loudness) level. Beats. Doppler eect. Interference eects. Intensity.

223

viii

CONTENTS

Chapter 24

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coulomb's Law. Charge quantized. Conservation of charge. Test-charge concept. Electric ®eld. Strength of the electric ®eld. Electric ®eld due to a point charge. Superposition principle.

232

Chapter 25

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potential dierence. Absolute potential. Electrical potential energy. V related to E. Electron volt energy unit. Capacitor. Parallel-plate capacitor. Capacitors in parallel and series. Energy stored in a capacitor.

243

Chapter 26

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current. Battery. Resistance. Ohm's Law. Measurement of resistance by ammeter and voltmeter. Terminal potential dierence. Resistivity. Resistance varies with temperature. Potential changes.

256

Chapter 27

ELECTRICAL POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical work. Electrical power. Power loss in a resistor. generated in a resistor. Convenient conversions. Thermal energy

265

Chapter 28

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistors in series. Resistors in parallel.

270

Chapter 29

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kirchho's node (or junction) rule. equations obtained. Kirchho's loop (or circuit) rule. Set of

283

Chapter 30

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Magnetic ®eld. Magnetic ®eld lines. Magnet. Magnetic poles. Charge moving through a magnetic ®eld. Direction of the force. Magnitude of the force. Magnetic ®eld at a point. Force on a current in a magnetic ®eld. Torque on a ¯at coil.

289

Chapter 31

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic ®elds are produced. Direction of the magnetic ®eld. Ferromagnetic materials. Magnetic moment. Magnetic ®eld of a current element.

299

Chapter 32

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic eects of matter. Magnetic ®eld lines. Magnetic ¯ux. Faraday's Law for induced emf. Lenz's Law. Motional emf. Induced emf.

305

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

ix

Chapter 33

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric generators. Electric motors.

315

Chapter 34

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-inductance. Mutual inductance. Energy stored in an inductor. constant. R-L time constant. Exponential functions. R-C time

321

Chapter 35

ALTERNATING CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emf generated by a rotating coil. Meters. Thermal energy generated or power lost. Forms of Ohm's Law. Phase. Impedance. Phasors. Resonance. Power loss. Transformer.

329

Chapter 36

REFLECTION OF LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nature of light. Law of re¯ection. Plane mirrors. Mirror equation. Size of the image. Spherical mirrors.

338

Chapter 37

REFRACTION OF LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed of light. Index of refraction. total internal re¯ection. Prism. Refraction. Snell's Law.

Critical angle for

346

Chapter 38

THIN LENSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of lenses. Object and image relation. Lenses in contact. Lensmaker's equation.

Lens power.

353

Chapter 39

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination of thin lenses. Telescope. The eye. Magnifying glass. Microscope.

359

Chapter 40

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coherent waves. Relative phase. Interference eects. Diraction. Single-slit diraction. Limit of resolution. Diraction grating equation. Diraction of X-rays. Optical path length.

366

Chapter 41

RELATIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference frame. Special theory of relativity. Relativistic linear momentum. Limiting speed. Relativistic energy. Time dilation. Simultaneity. Length contraction. Velocity addition formula.

374

x

CONTENTS

Chapter 42

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quanta of radiation. Photoelectric eect. Momentum of a photon. Compton eect. De Broglie waves. Resonance of de Broglie waves. Quantized energies.

382

Chapter 43

THE HYDROGEN ATOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrogen atom. Electron orbits. Energy-level diagrams. Emission of light. Spectral lines. Origin of spectral series. Absorption of light.

390

Chapter 44

MULTIELECTRON ATOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral atom. Quantum numbers. Pauli exclusion principle.

396

Chapter 45

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nucleus. Nuclear charge and atomic number. Atomic mass unit. Mass number. Isotopes. Binding energies. Radioactivity. Nuclear equations.

399

Chapter 46

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Nuclear binding energies. Fission reaction. Fusion reaction. Radiation dose. Radiation damage potential. Eective radiation dose. High-energy accelerators. Momentum of a particle.

409

Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIGONOMETRY NEEDED FOR COLLEGE PHYSICS . . . . . . . . . . EXPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGARITHMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREFIXES FOR MULTIPLES OF SI UNITS; THE GREEK ALPHABET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FACTORS FOR CONVERSIONS TO SI UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PHYSICAL CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE OF THE ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

417 419 422 424 427 428 429 430

INDEX

......................................................

433

Chapter 1
Introduction to Vectors
A SCALAR QUANTITY, or scalar, is one that has nothing to do with spatial direction. Many physical concepts such as length, time, temperature, mass, density, charge, and volume are scalars; each has a scale or size, but no associated direction. The number of students in a class, the quantity of sugar in a jar, and the cost of a house are familiar scalar quantities. Scalars are speci®ed by ordinary numbers and add and subtract in the usual way. Two candies in one box plus seven in another give nine candies total.

A VECTOR QUANTITY is one that can be speci®ed completely only if we provide both its magnitude (size) and direction. Many physical concepts such as displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, and momentum are vector quantities. For example, a vector displacement might be a change in position from a certain point to a second point 2 cm away and in the x-direction from the ®rst point. As another example, a cord pulling northward on a post gives rise to a vector force on the post of 20 newtons (N) northward. One newton is 0.225 pound (1.00 N 0:225 lb). Similarly, a car moving south at 40 km/h has a vector velocity of 40 km/h-SOUTH. A vector quantity can be represented by an arrow drawn to scale. The length of the arrow is proportional to the magnitude of the vector quantity (2 cm, 20 N, 40 km/h in the above examples). The direction of the arrow represents the direction of the vector quantity. In printed material, vectors are often represented by boldface type, such as F. When written by hand, the designations ~ and are commonly used. A vector is not completely de®ned until we establish some F rules for its behavior.

THE RESULTANT, or sum, of a number of vectors of a particular type (force vectors, for example) is that single vector that would have the same eect as all the original vectors taken together.

GRAPHICAL ADDITION OF VECTORS (POLYGON METHOD): This method for ®nding the resultant ~ of several vectors (~, ~, and ~) consists in beginning at any convenient point and R A B C drawing (to scale and in the proper directions) each vector arrow in turn. They may be taken in any order of succession: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~. The tail end of each arrow is positioned at A B C C A B R the tip end of the preceding one, as shown in Fig. 1-1.

Fig. 1-1

1
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

2

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

The resultant is represented by an arrow with its tail end at the starting point and its tip end at the tip of the last vector added. If ~ is the resultant, R j~j is the size or magnitude of the resultant. R R PARALLELOGRAM METHOD for adding two vectors: The resultant of two vectors acting at any angle may be represented by the diagonal of a parallelogram. The two vectors are drawn as the sides of the parallelogram and the resultant is its diagonal, as shown in Fig. 1-2. The direction of the resultant is away from the origin of the two vectors.

Fig. 1-2

SUBTRACTION OF VECTORS: To subtract a vector ~ from a vector ~, reverse the direction B A of ~ and add individually to vector ~, that is, ~ À ~ ~ À ~: B A A B A B THE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS are de®ned in relation to a right angle. For the right triangle shown in Fig. 1-3, by de®nition sin opposite B ; hypotenuse C B C sin cos adjacent A ; hypotenuse C tan opposite B adjacent A

We often use these in the forms A C cos B A tan

Fig. 1-3

A COMPONENT OF A VECTOR is its eective value in a given direction. For example, the xcomponent of a displacement is the displacement parallel to the x-axis caused by the given displacement. A vector in three dimensions may be considered as the resultant of its component vectors resolved along any three mutually perpendicular directions. Similarly, a vector in two dimensions

CHAP. 1]

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

3

Fig. 1-4

may be resolved into two component vectors acting along any two mutually perpendicular directions. Figure 1-4 shows the vector ~ and its x and y vector components, ~x and ~y , which have R R R magnitudes j~x j j~j cos R R or equivalently Rx R cos and Ry R sin and j~y j j~j sin R R

COMPONENT METHOD FOR ADDING VECTORS: Each vector is resolved into its x-, y-, and z-components, with negatively directed components taken as negative. The scalar x-component R Rx of the resultant ~ is the algebraic sum of all the scalar x-components. The scalar y- and zcomponents of the resultant are found in a similar way. With the components known, the magnitude of the resultant is given by q R R2 R2 R2 x y z In two dimensions, the angle of the resultant with the x-axis can be found from the relation tan Ry Rx

UNIT VECTORS have a magnitude of one and are represented by a boldface symbol topped with a caret. The special unit vectors and k are assigned to the x-, y-, and z-axes, respeci, j, represents a three-unit vector in the x-direction, while À5k represents a ®ve tively. A vector 3i unit vector in the Àz-direction. A vector ~ that has scalar x-, y-, and z-components Rx , Ry , and R Rz , respectively, can be written as ~ Rx Ry Rz k. R i j

THE DISPLACEMENT: When an object moves from one point in space to another the displacement is the vector from the initial location to the ®nal location. It is independent of the actual distance traveled.

4

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

Solved Problems
1.1 Using the graphical method, ®nd the resultant of the following two displacements: 2.0 m at 408 and 4.0 m at 1278, the angles being taken relative to the x-axis, as is customary. Give your answer to two signi®cant ®gures. (See Appendix A on signi®cant ®gures.)
Choose x- and y-axes as shown in Fig. 1-5 and lay out the displacements to scale, tip to tail from the origin. Notice that all angles are measured from the x-axis. The resultant vector ~ points from starting R point to end point as shown. We measure its length on the scale diagram to ®nd its magnitude, 4.6 m. Using a protractor, we measure its angle to be 1018. The resultant displacement is therefore 4.6 m at 1018:

Fig. 1-5

Fig. 1-6

1.2

Find the x- and y-components of a 25.0-m displacement at an angle of 210:08:
The vector displacement and its components are shown in Fig. 1-6. The scalar components are x-component À25:0 m cos 30:08 À21:7 m y-component À25:0 m sin 30:08 À12:5 m Notice in particular that each component points in the negative coordinate direction and must therefore be taken as negative.

1.3

Solve Problem 1.1 by use of rectangular components.
We resolve each vector into rectangular components as shown in Fig. 1-7(a) and (b). (Place a crosshatch symbol on the original vector to show that it is replaced by its components.) The resultant has scalar components of Rx 1:53 m À 2:41 m À0:88 m Ry 1:29 m 3:19 m 4:48 m Notice that components pointing in the negative direction must be assigned a negative value. The resultant is shown in Fig. 1.7(c); there, we see that q 4:48 m R 0:88 m2 4:48 m2 4:6 m tan 0:88 m and 798, from which 1808 À 1018. Hence ~ 4:6 m Ð 1018 FROM X-AXIS; remember vectors R must have their directions stated explicitly.

CHAP. 1]

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

5

Fig. 1-7

1.4

Add the following two force vectors by use of the parallelogram method: 30 N at 308 and 20 N at 1408. Remember that numbers like 30 N and 20 N have two signi®cant ®gures.
The force vectors are shown in Fig. 1-8(a). We construct a parallelogram using them as sides, as shown in Fig. 1-8(b). The resultant ~ is then represented by the diagonal. By measurement, we ®nd that ~ is 30 N at R R 728:

Fig. 1-8

1.5

Four coplanar forces act on a body at point O as shown in Fig. 1-9(a). Find their resultant graphically.
Starting from O, the four vectors are plotted in turn as shown in Fig. 1-9(b). We place the tail end of each vector at the tip end of the preceding one. The arrow from O to the tip of the last vector represents the resultant of the vectors.

Fig. 1-9

6

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

We measure R from the scale drawing in Fig. 1-9(b) and ®nd it to be 119 N. Angle is measured by protractor and is found to be 378. Hence the resultant makes an angle 1808 À 378 1438 with the positive x-axis. The resultant is 119 N at 1438:

1.6

The ®ve coplanar forces shown in Fig. 1-10(a) act on an object. Find their resultant.
(1) First we ®nd the x- and y-components of each force. These components are as follows: Force 19.0 15.0 16.0 11.0 22.0 N N N N N x-Component 19.0 N 15:0 N) cos 60:08 7:50 N À16:0 N) cos 45:08 À11:3 N À11:0 N) cos 30:08 À9:53 N 0N y-Component 0N 15:0 N) sin 60:08 13:0 N 16:0 N) sin 45:08 11:3 N À11:0 N) sin 30:08 À5:50 N À22:0 N

Notice the and À signs to indicate direction. (2) The resultant ~ has components Rx Æ Fx and Ry Æ Fy , where we read Æ Fx as ``the sum of all the xR force components.'' We then have Rx 19:0 N 7:50 N À 11:3 N À 9:53 N 0 N 5:7 N Ry 0 N 13:0 N 11:3 N À 5:50 N À 22:0 N À3:2 N (3) The magnitude of the resultant is R (4) q R2 R2 6:5 N x y 3:2 N 0:56 5:7 N

Finally, we sketch the resultant as shown in Fig. 1-10(b) and ®nd its angle. We see that tan

from which 298. Then 3608 À 298 3318. The resultant is 6.5 N at 3318 (or À298) or ~ 6:5 N Ð 3318 FROM X-AXIS. R

Fig. 1-10

CHAP. 1]

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

7

1.7

Solve Problem 1.5 by use of the component method. Give your answer for the magnitude to two signi®cant ®gures.
The forces and their components are:

Force 80 100 110 160 N N N N

x-Component 80 N (100 N) cos 45 8 71 N À110 N) cos 308 À95 N À160 N) cos 20 8 À150 N

y-Component 0 (100 N) sin 458 71 N (110 N) sin 308 55 N À160 N) sin 208 À55 N

Notice the sign of each component. To ®nd the resultant, we have Rx Æ Fx 80 N 71 N À 95 N À 150 N À94 N Ry Æ Fy 0 71 N 55 N À 55 N 71 N The resultant is shown in Fig. 1-11; there, we see that q R 94 N2 71 N2 1:2 Â 102 N Further, tan 71 N=94 N, from which 378. Therefore the resultant is 118 N at 1808 À 378 1438 R or ~ 118 N Ð 1438 FROM X-AXIS.

Fig. 1-11

Fig. 1-12

1.8

A force of 100 N makes an angle of with the x-axis and has a scalar y-component of 30 N. Find both the scalar x-component of the force and the angle . (Remember that the number 100 N has three signi®cant ®gures whereas 30 N has only two.)
The data are sketched roughly in Fig. 1-12. We wish to ®nd Fx and . We know that sin 30 N 0:30 100 N

17:468, and thus, to two signi®cant ®gures, 178: Then, using the cos , we have Fx 100 N cos 17:468 95 N

1.9

A child pulls on a rope attached to a sled with a force of 60 N. The rope makes an angle of 408 to the ground. (a) Compute the eective value of the pull tending to move the sled along the ground. (b) Compute the force tending to lift the sled vertically.

8

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

As shown in Fig. 1-13, the components of the 60 N force are 39 N and 46 N. (a) The pull along the ground is the horizontal component, 46 N. (b) The lifting force is the vertical component, 39 N.

Fig. 1-13

Fig. 1-14

1.10

A car whose weight is FW is on a ramp which makes an angle to the horizontal. How large a perpendicular force must the ramp withstand if it is not to break under the car's weight?
As shown in Fig. 1-14, the car's weight is a force ~W that pulls straight down on the car. We take F components of ~ along the incline and perpendicular to it. The ramp must balance the force component F FW cos if the car is not to crash through the ramp.

1.11

Express the forces shown in Figs. 1-7(c), 1-10(b), 1-11, and 1-13 in the form ~ Rx Ry Rz k R i j (leave out the units).
Remembering that plus and minus signs must be used to show direction along an axis, we can write For Fig. 1-7(c): For Fig. 1-10(b): For Fig. 1-11: For Fig. 1-13: ~ À0:88 4:48 R i j ~ 5:7 À 3:2 R i j ~ À94 71 R i j ~ 46 39 R i j

1.12

Three forces that act on a particle are given by ~1 20 À 36 73k N, F i j ~2 À17 21 À 46k N, and ~3 À12k N. Find their resultant vector. Also ®nd the magF i j F nitude of the resultant to two signi®cant ®gures.
We know that Rx Æ Fx 20 N À 17 N 0 N 3 N Ry Æ Fy À36 N 21 N 0 N À15 N Rz Æ Fz 73 N À 46 N À 12 N 15 N i j Since ~ Rx Ry Rz k, we ®nd R ~ 3 À 15 15k R i j To two signi®cant ®gures, the three-dimensional pythagorean theorem then gives q p R R2 R2 R2 459 21 N x y z

CHAP. 1]

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

9

1.13

Perform graphically the following vector additions and subtractions, where ~, ~, and ~ are the A B C vectors shown in Fig. 1-15: (a) ~ ~; (b) ~ ~ ~; (c) ~ À ~; (d ) ~ ~ À ~: A B A B C A B A B C
See Fig. 1-15(a) through (d ). In (c), ~ À ~ ~ À~; that is, to subtract ~ from ~, reverse the A B A B B A direction of ~ and add it vectorially to ~. Similarly, in (d ), ~ ~ À ~ ~ ~ À~, where À~ is equal B A A B C A B C C in magnitude but opposite in direction to ~: C

Fig. 1-15

1.14

If ~ À12 25 13k and ~ À3 7k, ®nd the resultant when ~ is subtracted from ~: A i j B j A B
From a purely mathematical approach, we have ~ À ~ À3 7k À À12 25 13k B A j i j À3 7k 12 À 25 À 13k 12 À 28 À 6k j i j i j Notice that 12 À 25 À 13k is simply ~ reversed in direction. Therefore we have, in essence, reversed ~ and i j A A added it to ~. B

1.15

A boat can travel at a speed of 8 km/h in still water on a lake. In the ¯owing water of a stream, it can move at 8 km/h relative to the water in the stream. If the stream speed is 3 km/h, how fast can the boat move past a tree on the shore when it is traveling (a) upstream and (b) downstream?
(a) If the water was standing still, the boat's speed past the tree would be 8 km/h. But the stream is carrying it in the opposite direction at 3 km/h. Therefore the boat's speed relative to the tree is 8 km=h À 3 km=h 5 km=h: In this case, the stream is carrying the boat in the same direction the boat is trying to move. Hence its speed past the tree is 8 km=h 3 km=h 11 km=h:

(b)

1.16

A plane is traveling eastward at an airspeed of 500 km/h. But a 90 km/h wind is blowing southward. What are the direction and speed of the plane relative to the ground?
The plane's resultant velocity is the sum of two velocities, 500 km/h Ð EAST and 90 km/h Ð SOUTH. These component velocities are shown in Fig. 1-16. The plane's resultant velocity is then q R 500 km=h2 90 km=h2 508 km=h

10

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

Fig. 1-16

Fig. 1-17

The angle is given by tan 90 km=h 0:18 500 km=h

from which 108: The plane's velocity relative to the ground is 508 km/h at 108 south of east.

1.17

With the same airspeed as in Problem 1.16, in what direction must the plane head in order to move due east relative to the Earth?
The sum of the plane's velocity through the air and the velocity of the wind will be the resultant velocity of the plane relative to the Earth. This is shown in the vector diagram in Fig. 1-17. Notice that, as required, the resultant velocity is eastward. Keeping in mind that the wind speed is given to two signi®cant ®gures, it is seen that sin 90 km=h500 km=h, from which 108. The plane should head 108 north of east if it is to move eastward relative to the Earth. To ®nd the plane's eastward speed, we note in the ®gure that R 500 km=h cos 4:9 Â 105 m=h:

Supplementary Problems
1.18 Starting from the center of town, a car travels east for 80.0 km and then turns due south for another 192 km, at which point it runs out of gas. Determine the displacement of the stopped car from the center of town. Ans. 208 km Ð 67:48 SOUTH OF EAST A little turtle is placed at the origin of an xy-grid drawn on a large sheet of paper. Each grid box is 1.0 cm by 1.0 cm. The turtle walks around for a while and ®nally ends up at point (24, 10), that is, 24 boxes along the x-axis, and 10 boxes along the y-axis. Determine the displacement of the turtle from the origin at the point. Ans. 26 cm Ð 238 ABOVE X-AXIS A bug starts at point A, crawls 8.0 cm east, then 5.0 cm south, 3.0 cm west, and 4.0 cm north to point B. (a) How far north and east is B from A? (b) Find the displacement from A to B both graphically and algebraically. Ans. (a) 5.0 cm Ð EAST, 1:0 cm Ð NORTH; (b) 5.10 cm Ð 11:38 SOUTH OF EAST Find the scalar x- and y-components of the following displacements in the xy-plane: (a) 300 cm at 1278 and (b) 500 cm at 2208. Ans. (a) À180 cm, 240 cm; (b) À383 cm, À321 cm Two forces act on a point object as follows: 100 N at 170:08 and 100 N at 50:08. Find their resultant. Ans. 100 N at 1108 Starting at the origin of coordinates, the following displacements are made in the xy-plane (that is, the displacements are coplanar): 60 mm in the y-direction, 30 mm in the Àx-direction, 40 mm at 1508, and 50 mm at 2408. Find the resultant displacement both graphically and algebraically. Ans. 97 mm at 1588

1.19

1.20

1.21

1.22

1.23

CHAP. 1]

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

11

1.24

Compute algebraically the resultant of the following coplanar forces: 100 N at 308, 141.4 N at 458, and 100 N at 2408. Check your result graphically. Ans. 0.15 kN at 258 Compute algebraically the resultant of the following coplanar displacements: 20.0 m at 30:08, 40.0 m at 120:08, 25.0 m at 180:08, 42.0 m at 270:08, and 12.0 m at 315:08. Check your answer with a graphical solution. Ans. 20.1 m at 1978 Two forces, 80 N and 100 N acting at an angle of 608 with each other, pull on an object. (a) What single force would replace the two forces? (b) What single force (called the equilibrant) would balance the two forces? Solve algebraically. Ans. (a) ~: 0.16 kN at 348 with the 80 N force; (b) À~: 0.16 kN at 2148 with R R the 80 N force Find algebraically the (a) resultant and (b) equilibrant (see Problem 1.26) of the following coplanar forces: 300 N at exactly 08, 400 N at 308, and 400 N at 1508. Ans. (a) 0.50 kN at 538; (b) 0.50 kN at 2338 What displacement at 708 has an x-component of 450 m? What is its y-component? 1.2 km Ans. 1.3 km,

1.25

1.26

1.27

1.28

1.29

What displacement must be added to a 50 cm displacement in the x-direction to give a resultant displacement of 85 cm at 258? Ans. 45 cm at 538 ~ Refer to Fig. 1-18. In terms of vectors ~ and ~, express the vectors (a) ~, (b) ~, (c) ~, and (d ) Q. A B P R S Ans. (a) ~ ~; (b) ~; (c) À~; (d ) ~ À ~ A B B A A B

1.30

Fig. 1-18

Fig. 1-19

1.31

Refer to Fig. 1-19. In terms of vectors ~ and ~, express the vectors (a) ~, (b) ~ À ~, and (c) A B E D C ~ ~ À ~. E D C Ans. (a) À~ À ~ or À~ ~; (b) ~; (c) À~ A B A B A B A child is holding a wagon from rolling straight back down a driveway that is inclined at 208 to the horizontal. If the wagon weighs 150 N, with what force must the child pull on the handle if the handle is parallel to the incline? Ans. 51 N Repeat Problem 1.32 if the handle is at an angle of 308 above the incline. Ans. 59 N

1.32

1.33 1.34

A B C A B A C A i j, B i j, C i j. Find (a) ~ ~ ~, (b) ~ À ~, and (c) ~ À ~ if ~ 7 À 6 ~ À3 12 and ~ 4 À 4 Ans. (a) 8 2 (b) 10 À 18 (c) 3 À 2 i j; i j; i j

1.35

Find the magnitude and angle of ~ if ~ 7:0 À 12 R R i j.

Ans.

14 at À608

12

INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS

[CHAP. 1

1.36 1.37 1.38

Determine the displacement vector that must be added to the displacement 25 À 16 m to give a displacei j ment of 7.0 m pointing in the x-direction? Ans. À18 16 m i j A force 15 À 16 27k N is added to a force 23 À 40k N. What is the magnitude of the resultant? i j j Ans. 21 N A truck is moving north at a speed of 70 km/h. The exhaust pipe above the truck cab sends out a trail of smoke that makes an angle of 208 east of south behind the truck. If the wind is blowing directly toward the east, what is the wind speed at that location? Ans. 25 km/h A ship is traveling due east at 10 km/h. What must be the speed of a second ship heading 308 east of north if it is always due north of the ®rst ship? Ans. 20 km/h A boat, propelled so as to travel with a speed of 0.50 m/s in still water, moves directly across a river that is 60 m wide. The river ¯ows with a speed of 0.30 m/s. (a) At what angle, relative to the straight-across direction, must the boat be pointed? (b) How long does it take the boat to cross the river? Ans. (a) 378 upstream; (b) 1:5 Â 102 s A reckless drunk is playing with a gun in an airplane that is going directly east at 500 km/h. The drunk shoots the gun straight up at the ceiling of the plane. The bullet leaves the gun at a speed of 1000 km/h. According to someone standing on the Earth, what angle does the bullet make with the vertical? Ans. 26:68

1.39 1.40

1.41

Chapter 2
Uniformly Accelerated Motion
SPEED is a scalar quantity. If an object takes a time interval t to travel a distance l, then Average speed or vav l t total distance traveled time taken

Here the distance is the total (along-the-path) length traveled. This is what a car's odometer reads.

VELOCITY is a vector quantity. If an object undergoes a vector displacement ~ in a time interval s t, then Average velocity vector displacement time taken ~ s t

~av v

The direction of the velocity vector is the same as that of the displacement vector. The units of velocity (and speed) are those of distance divided by time, such as m/s or km/h.

ACCELERATION measures the time rate-of-change of velocity: Average acceleration change in velocity vector time taken ~f À~i v v t

~av a

where ~i is the initial velocity, ~f is the ®nal velocity, and t is the time interval over which the change v v occurred. The units of acceleration are those of velocity divided by time. Typical examples are (m/s)/s (or m/s2) and (km/h)/s (or km/hÁs). Notice that acceleration is a vector quantity. It has the direction of ~f À~i , the change in velocity. It is nonetheless commonplace to speak of the magnitude of the accelv v eration as just the acceleration, provided there is no ambiguity.

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE is an important situation. In this case, the acceleration vector is constant and lies along the line of the displacement vector, so that the directions of ~ and ~ can be speci®ed with plus and minus signs. If we reprev a sent the displacement by s (positive if in the positive direction, and negative if in the negative direction), then the motion can be described with the ®ve equations for uniformly accelerated motion: 13
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

14

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

s vav t vf vi vav 2 vf À vi a t v2 v2 2as i f s vi t 1 at2 2 Often s is replaced by x or y, and sometimes vf and vi are written as v and v0 , respectively.

DIRECTION IS IMPORTANT, and a positive direction must be chosen when analyzing motion along a line. Either direction may be chosen as positive. If a displacement, velocity, or acceleration is in the opposite direction, it must be taken as negative.

INSTANTANEOUS VELOCITY is the average velocity evaluated for a time interval that approaches zero. Thus, if an object undergoes a displacement Á~ in a time Át, then for that object s the instantaneous velocity is ~ lim v Á~ s Át30 Át

s where the notation means that the ratio Á~=Át is to be evaluated for a time interval Át that approaches zero.

GRAPHICAL INTERPRETATIONS for motion along a straight line (the x-axis) are as follows:
. The instantaneous velocity of an object at a certain time is the slope of the displacement versus time graph at that time. It can be positive, negative, or zero. . The instantaneous acceleration of an object at a certain time is the slope of the velocity versus time graph at that time. . For constant-velocity motion, the x-versus-t graph is a straight line. For constant-acceleration motion, the v-versus-t graph is a straight line. . In general (i.e., one-, two-, or three-dimensional motion) the slope at any moment of the distanceversus-time graph is the speed.

ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY g: The acceleration of a body moving only under the force of gravity is g, the gravitational (or free-fall) acceleration, which is directed vertically downward. On Earth, g 9:81 m/s2 i:e:; 32:2 ft/s2 ); the value varies slightly from place to place. On the Moon, the free-fall acceleration is 1.6 m/s2 .

VELOCITY COMPONENTS: Suppose that an object moves with a velocity ~ at some angle v up from the x-axis, as would initially be the case with a ball thrown into the air. That velocity then has x and y vector components (see Fig. 1-4) of ~x and ~y . The corresponding scalar compov v nents of the velocity are vx v cos and vy v sin

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

15

and these can turn out to be positive or negative numbers, depending on . As a rule, if ~ is in the ®rst v quadrant, vx > 0 and vy > 0; if ~ is in the second quadrant, vx < 0 and vy > 0; if ~ is in the third v v quadrant, vx < 0 and vy < 0; ®nally, if ~ is in the fourth quadrant, vx > 0 and vy < 0. Because these v quantities have signs, and therefore implied directions along known axes, it is common to refer to them as velocities. The reader will ®nd this usage in many texts, but it is not without pedagogical drawbacks. Instead, we shall avoid applying the term ``velocity'' to anything but a vector quantity (written in boldface with an arrow above) whose direction is explicitly stated. Thus for an object moving with a velocity ~ 100 m/s Ð WEST, the scalar value of the velocity along the x-axis is vx À100 m/s; and the v (always positive) speed is v 100 m/s.

PROJECTILE PROBLEMS can be solved easily if air friction can be ignored. One simply considers the motion to consist of two independent parts: horizontal motion with a 0 and vf vi vav (i.e., constant speed), and vertical motion with a g 9:81 m/s2 downward.

Solved Problems
2.1 Change the speed 0.200 cm/s to units of kilometers per year.
0:200 cm s cm km s h d km 0:200 10À5 3600 24 365 63:1 s cm h d y y

2.2

A runner makes one lap around a 200-m track in a time of 25 s. What were the runner's (a) average speed and (b) average velocity?
(a) From the de®nition, Average speed (b) distance traveled 200 m 8:0 m=s time taken 25 s

Because the run ended at the starting point, the displacement vector from starting pont to end point has v s zero length. Since ~av ~=t, v j~av j

0m 0 m=s 25 s

2.3

An object starts from rest with a constant acceleration of 8.00 m/s2 along a straight line. Find (a) the speed at the end of 5.00 s, (b) the average speed for the 5-s interval, and (c) the distance traveled in the 5.00 s.
We are interested in the motion for the ®rst 5.00 s. Take the direction of motion to be the x-direction (that is, s x). We know that vi 0, t 5:00 s, and a 8:00 m/s2 . Because the motion is uniformly accelerated, the ®ve motion equations apply. a b c vfx vix at 0 8:00 m=s2 5:00 s 40:0 m=s vav vix vfx 0 40:0 m=s 20:0 m=s 2 2 x vav t 20:0 m=s5:00 s 100 m

x vix t 1at2 0 1 8:00 m=s2 5:00 s2 100 m or 2 2

16

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

2.4

A truck's speed increases uniformly from 15 km/h to 60 km/h in 20 s. Determine (a) the average speed, (b) the acceleration, and (c) the distance traveled, all in units of meters and seconds.
For the 20 s trip under discussion, taking x to be in the direction of motion, we have km m 1 h 1000 4:17 m=s vix 15 h km 3600 s vfx 60 km=h 16:7 m=s a b c vav 1vix vfx 14:17 16:7 m=s 10 m=s 2 2 a vfx À vix 16:7 À 4:17 m=s 0:63 m=s2 20 s t

x vav t 10:4 m=s20 s 208 m 0:21 km

2.5

A car moves in a straight line and its odometer readings are plotted against time in Fig. 2-1. Find the instantaneous speed of the car at points A and B. What is the car's average speed? What is its acceleration?

Fig. 2-1 Because the speed is given by the slope Áx=Át of the tangent line, we take a tangent to the curve at point A. The tangent line is the curve itself in this case. For the triangle shown at A, we have Áx 4:0 m 0:50 m=s Át 8:0 s This is also the speed at point B and at every other point on the straight-line graph. It follows that a 0 and vx 0:50 m=s vav :

2.6

An object's one-dimensional motion along the x-axis is graphed in Fig. 2-2. Describe its motion.
The velocity of the object at any instant is equal to the slope of the displacement±time graph at the point corresponding to that instant. Because the slope is zero from exactly t 0 s to t 2:0 s, the object is standing still during this time interval. At t 2:0 s, the object begins to move in the x-direction with constant-velocity (the slope is positive and constant). For the interval t 2:0 s to t 4:0 s,

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

17

vav slope

rise xf À xi 3:0 m À 0 m 3:0 m 1:5 m=s run 4:0 s À 2:0 s 2:0 s tf À ti

v The average velocity is then ~av 1:5 m/s Ð POSITIVE X-DIRECTION. During the interval t 4:0 s to t 6:0 s, the object is at rest; the slope of the graph is zero and x does not change for that interval. From t 6:0 s to t 10 s and beyond, the object is moving in the Àx-direction; the slope and the velocity are negative. We have xf À xi À2:0 m À 3:0 m À5:0 m vav slope À1:3 m=s 10:0 s À 6:0 s 4:0 s tf À ti

The average velocity is then ~av 1:3 m/s Ð NEGATIVE X-DIRECTION. v

2.7

The vertical motion of an object is graphed in Fig. 2-3. Describe its motion qualitatively, and ®nd its instantaneous velocity at points A, B, and C:

Fig. 2-2

Fig. 2-3

Recalling that the instantaneous velocity is given by the slope of the graph, we see that the object is moving fastest at t 0. As it rises, it slows and ®nally stops at B. (The slope there is zero.) Then it begins to fall back downward at ever-increasing speed. At point A, we have Áy 12:0 m À 3:0 m 9:0 m 2:3 m=s Át 4:0 s À 0 s 4:0 s v The velocity at A is positive, so it is in the y-direction: ~A 2:3 m/s Ð UP. At points B and C, vA slope vB slope 0 m=s Áy 5:5 m À 13:0 m À7:5 m vC slope À1:2 m=s Át 15:0 s À 8:5 s 6:5 s v Because it is negative, the velocity at C is in the Ày-direction:~C 1:2 m/s Ð DOWN. Remember that velocity is a vector quantity and direction must be speci®ed explicitly.

2.8

A ball is dropped from rest at a height of 50 m above the ground. (a) What is its speed just before it hits the ground? (b) How long does it take to reach the ground?

18

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

If we can ignore air friction, the ball is uniformly accelerated until it reaches the ground. Its acceleration is downward and is 9.81 m/s2 . Taking down as positive, we have for the trip: y 50:0 m a (b) a 9:81 m=s2 vi 0

v2 v2 2ay 0 29:81 m=s2 50:0 m 981 m2 =s2 iy fy and so vf 31:3 m/s. From a vfy À viy =t, t vfy À viy 31:3 À 0 m=s 3:19 s a 9:81 m=s2

(We could just as well have taken up as positive. How would the calculation have been changed?)

2.9

A skier starts from rest and slides 9.0 m down a slope in 3.0 s. In what time after starting will the skier acquire a speed of 24 m/s? Assume that the acceleration is constant.
We must ®nd the skier's acceleration from the data concerning the 3.0 s trip. Taking the direction of motion as the x-direction, we have t 3:0 s, vix 0, and x 9:0 m. Then x vix t 1 at2 gives 2 a 2x 18 m 2:0 m=s2 t2 3:0 s2

We can now use this value of a for the longer trip, from the starting point to the place where vfx 24 m/s. For this trip, vix 0, vfx 24 m/s, a 2:0 m/s2 . Then, from vf vi at, t vfx À vix 24 m=s 12 s a 2:0 m=s2

2.10

A bus moving at a speed of 20 m/s begins to slow at a constant rate of 3.0 m/s each second. Find how far it goes before stopping.
Take the direction of motion to be the x-direction. For the trip under consideration, vi 20 m/s, vf 0 m/s, a À3:0 m/s2 . Notice that the bus is not speeding up in the positive motion direction. Instead, it is slowing in that direction and so its acceleration is negative (a deceleration). Use v2 v2 2ax ix fx to find x À20 m=s2 67 m 2À3:0 m=s2

2.11

A car moving at 30 m/s slows uniformly to a speed of 10 m/s in a time of 5.0 s. Determine (a) the acceleration of the car and (b) the distance it moves in the third second.
Let us take the direction of motion to be the x-direction. (a) For the 5.0 s interval, we have t 5:0 s, vix 30 m/s, vf 10 m/s. Using vfx vix at gives a b 10 À 30 m=s À4:0 m=s2 5:0 s

x (distance covered in 3:0 s À (distance covered in 2:0 s x vix t3 À t2 1at2 À t2 3 2 2 x vix t3 1at2 À vix t2 1 at2 2 3 2 2

Using vix 30 m/s, a À4:0 m/s2 , t2 2:0 s, t3 3:0 s gives x 30 m=s1:0 s À 2:0 m=s2 5:0 s2 2:0 m

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

19

2.12

The speed of a train is reduced uniformly from 15 m/s to 7.0 m/s while traveling a distance of 90 m. (a) Compute the acceleration. (b) How much farther will the train travel before coming to rest, provided the acceleration remains constant?
Let us take the direction of motion to be the x-direction. (a) We have vix 15 m/s, vfx 7:0 m/s, x 90 m. Then v2 v2 2ax gives ix fx a À0:98 m=s2 (b) We now have the new conditions vix 7:0 m/s, vf 0, a À0:98 m/s2 . Then v2 v2 2ax ix fx gives x 0 À 7:0 m=s2 25 m À1:96 m=s2

2.13

A stone is thrown straight upward and it rises to a height of 20 m. With what speed was it thrown?
Let us take up as the positive y-direction. The stone's velocity is zero at the top of its path. Then vfy 0, y 20 m, a À9:81 m/s2 . (The minus sign arises because the acceleration due to gravity is always downward and we have taken up to be positive.) We use v2 v2 2ay to ®nd iy fy q viy À2À9:81 m=s2 20 m 20 m=s

2.14

A stone is thrown straight upward with a speed of 20 m/s. It is caught on its way down at a point 5.0 m above where it was thrown. (a) How fast was it going when it was caught? (b) How long did the trip take?
The situation is shown in Fig. 2-4. Let us take up as positive. Then, for the trip that lasts from the instant after throwing to the instant before catching, viy 20 m/s, y 5:0 m (since it is an upward displacement), a À9:81 m/s2 :

Fig. 2-4

20

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

(a)

We use v2 v2 2ay to ®nd iy fy v2 20 m=s2 2À9:81 m=s2 5:0 m 302 m2 =s2 fy q vfy Æ 302 m2 =s2 À17 m=s We take the negative sign because the stone is moving downward, in the negative direction, at the ®nal instant.

(b)

We use a vfy À viy =t to ®nd t À17:4 À 20 m=s 3:8 s À9:81 m=s2

Notice that we retain the minus sign on vfy :

2.15

A ball that is thrown vertically upward on the Moon returns to its starting point in 4.0 s. The acceleration due to gravity there is 1.60 m/s2 downward. Find the ball's original speed.
Let us take up as positive. For the trip from beginning to end, y 0 (it ends at the same level it started at), a À1:60 m/s2 , t 4:0 s. We use y viy t 1 at2 to ®nd 2 0 viy 4:0 s 1 À1:60 m=s2 4:0 s2 2 from which viy 3:2 m=s:

2.16

A baseball is thrown straight upward on the Moon with an initial speed of 35 m/s. Compute (a) the maximum height reached by the ball, (b) the time taken to reach that height, (c) its velocity 30 s after it is thrown, and (d ) when the ball's height is 100 m.
Take up as positive. At the highest point, the ball's velocity is zero. (a) From v2 v2 2ay we have, since g 1:60 m/s2 on the Moon, iy fy 0 35 m=s2 2À1:60 m=s2 y (b) From vfy viy at we have 0 35 m=s À1:60 m=s2 t (c) From vfy viy at we have vfy 35 m=s À1:60 m=s2 30 s or vfy À13 m=s or t 22 s or y 0:38 km

Because vf is negative and we are taking up as positive, the velocity is directed downward. The ball is on its way down at t 30 s. (d ) From y viy t 1 at2 we have 2 100 m 35 m=st 1 À1:60 m=s2 t2 2 By use of the quadratic formula, x Àb Æ or 0:80t2 À 35t 100 0

p b2 À 4ac 2a

we ®nd t 3:1 s and 41 s. At t 3:1 s the ball is at 100 m and ascending; at t 41 s it is at the same height but descending.

2.17

A ballast bag is dropped from a balloon that is 300 m above the ground and rising at 13 m/s. For the bag, ®nd (a) the maximum height reached, (b) its position and velocity 5.0 s after it is released, and (c) the time at which it hits the ground.

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

21

The initial velocity of the bag when released is the same as that of the balloon, 13 m/s upward. Let us choose up as positive and take y 0 at the point of release. (a) At the highest point, vf 0. From v2 v2 2ay, iy fy 0 13 m=s2 2À9:81 m=s2 y The maximum height is 300 8:6 308:6 m or 0.31 km. (b) Take the end point to be its position at t 5:0 s: Then, from y viy t 1 at2 , 2 y 13 m=s5:0 s 1 À9:81 m=s2 5:0 s2 À57:5 m or À 58 m 2 So its height is 300 À 58 242 m. Also, from vfy viy at, vfy 13 m=s À9:81 m=s2 5:0 s À36 m=s It is on its way down with a velocity of 36 m/s Ð DOWNWARD. (c) Just as it hits the ground, the bag's displacement is À300 m. Then y viy t 1 at2 2 becomes À 300 m 13 m=st 1 À9:81 m=s2 t2 2 or 4:90t2 À 13t À 300 0. The quadratic formula gives t 9:3 s and À6:6 s. Only the positive time has physical meaning, so the required answer is 9.3 s. We could have avoided the quadratic formula by ®rst computing vf : v2 v2 2as iy fy becomes v2 13 m=s2 2À9:81 m=s2 À300 m fy or y 8:6 m

so that vfy Æ77:8 m/s. Then, using the negative value for vfy (why?) in vfy viy at gives t 9:3 s, as before.

2.18

As shown in Fig. 2-5, a projectile is ®red horizontally with a speed of 30 m/s from the top of a cli 80 m high. (a) How long will it take to strike the level ground at the base of the cli? (b) How far from the foot of the cli will it strike? (c) With what velocity will it strike?

Fig. 2-5 (a) The horizontal and vertical motions are independent of each other. Consider ®rst the vertical motion. Taking up as positive and y 0 at the top of the cli, we have y viy t 1 ay t2 2

or

À80 m 0 1 À9:81 m=s2 t2 2

from which t 4:04 s or 4.0 s. Notice that the initial velocity had zero vertical component and so vi 0 for the vertical motion.

22

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

(b)

Now consider the horizontal motion. For it, a 0 and so vx vix vfx 30 m/s. Then, using the value of t found in (a), we have x vx t 30 m=s4:04 s 121 m or 0:12 km The ®nal velocity has a horizontal component of 30 m/s. But its vertical component at t 4:04 s is given by vfy viy ay t as vfy 0 À9:8 m=s2 4:04 s À40 m=s v The resultant of these two components is labeled ~ in Fig. 2-5; we have q v 40 m=s2 30 m=s2 50 m=s

(c)

The angle as shown is given by tan 40=30 and is 538: Hence, ~ 50 m/s Ð 538 v

BELOW X-AXIS.

2.19

A stunt ¯ier is moving at 15 m/s parallel to the ¯at ground 100 m below, as shown in Fig. 2-6. How large must the distance x from plane to target be if a sack of ¯our released from the plane is to strike the target?

Fig. 2-6

Following the same procedure as in Problem 2.18, we use y viy t 1 ay t2 to get 2 À100 m 0 1 À9:81 m=s2 t2 2 Now x vx t 15 m=s4:52 s 67:8 m or 68 m. or t 4:52 s

2.20

A baseball is thrown with an initial velocity of 100 m/s at an angle of 30:08 above the horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2-7. How far from the throwing point will the baseball attain its original level?

Fig. 2-7 We divide the problem into horizontal and vertical parts, for which vix vi cos 30:08 86:6 m=s where up is being taken as positive. and viy vi sin 30:08 50:0 m=s

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

23

In the vertical problem, y 0 since the ball returns to its original height. Then y viy t 1 ay t2 2 or 0 50:0 m=s 1 À9:81 m=s2 t 2 and t 10:2 s: In the horizontal problem, vix vfx vx 86:6 m/s. Therefore, x vx t 86:6 m=s10:2 s 884 m

2.21

As shown in Fig. 2-8, a ball is thrown from the top of one building toward a tall building 50 m away. The initial velocity of the ball is 20 m/s Ð 408 ABOVE HORIZONTAL. How far above or below its original level will the ball strike the opposite wall?

Fig. 2-8

We have vix 20 m=s cos 408 15:3 m=s viy 20 m=s sin 408 12:9 m=s Consider ®rst the horizontal motion. For it, vix vfx vx 15:3 m=s Then x vx t gives 50 m 15:3 m=st or t 3:27 s For the vertical motion, taking down as positive, we have y viy t 1 ay t2 À12:9 m=s3:27 s 1 9:81 m=s2 3:27 s2 105 m 0:11 km 2 2 Since y is positive, and since down is positive, the ball will hit at 0.11 km below the original level.

2.22

(a) Find the range x of a gun which ®res a shell with muzzle velocity v at an angle of elevation . (b) Find the angle of elevation of a gun which ®res a shell with a muzzle velocity of 120 m/s and hits a target on the same level but 1300 m distant. (See Fig. 2-9.)
(a) Let t be the time it takes the shell to hit the target. Then, x vix t or t x=vix . Consider the vertical motion alone, and take up as positive. When the shell strikes the target, Vertical displacement 0 viy t 1 Àgt2 2 Solving this equation gives t 2viy =g. But t x=vix , so 2viy x vix g or x 2vix viy 2vi cos vi sin g g

24

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

Fig. 2-9

The formula 2 sin cos sin 2 can be used to simplify this. After substitution, we get x v2 sin 2 i g

The maximum range corresponds to 458, since sin 2 has a maximum value of 1 when 2 908 or 458: (b) From the range equation found in (a), we have sin 2 gx 9:81 m=s2 1300 m 0:885 v2 120 m=s2 i

Therefore, 2 arcsin 0:885 628 and so 318:

Supplementary Problems
2.23 Three kids in a parking lot launch a rocket that rises into the air along a 380-m long arc in 40 s. Determine its average speed. Ans. 9.5 m/s According to its computer, a robot that left its closet and traveled 1200 m, had an average speed of 20.0 m/s. How long did the trip take? Ans. 60.0 s A car's odometer reads 22 687 km at the start of a trip and 22 791 km at the end. The trip took 4.0 hours. What was the car's average speed in km/h and in m/s? Ans. 26 km/h, 7.2 m/s An auto travels at the rate of 25 km/h for 4.0 minutes, then at 50 km/h for 8.0 minutes, and ®nally at 20 km/h for 2.0 minutes. Find (a) the total distance covered in km and (b) the average speed for the complete trip in m/s. Ans. (a) 9.0 km; (b) 10.7 m/s or 11 m/s A runner travels 1.5 laps around a circular track in a time of 50 s. The diameter of the track is 40 m and its circumference is 126 m. Find (a) the average speed of the runner and (b) the magnitude of the runner's average velocity. Be careful here; average speed depends on the total distance traveled, whereas average velocity depends on the displacement at the end of the particular journey. Ans. (a) 3.8 m/s; (b) 0.80 m/s During a race on an oval track, a car travels at an average speed of 200 km/h. (a) How far did it travel in 45.0 min? (b) Determine its average velocity at the end of its third lap. Ans. (a) 150 km; (b) zero

2.24

2.25

2.26

2.27

2.28

CHAP. 2]

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

25

2.29

The following data describe the position of an object along the x-axis as a function of time. Plot the data, and ®nd the instantaneous velocity of the object at (a) t 5:0 s, (b) 16 s, and (c) 23 s. Ans. (a) 0.018 m/s in the positive x-direction; (b) 0 m/s; (c) 0.013 m/s in the negative x-direction t(s) x(cm) 0 0 2 4.0 4 7.8 6 11.3 8 14.3 10 16.8 12 18.6 14 19.7 16 20.0 18 19.5 20 18.2 22 16.2 24 13.5 26 10.3 28 6.7

2.30

For the object whose motion is described in Problem 2.29, ®nd its velocity at the following times: (a) 3.0 s, (b) 10 s, and (c) 24 s. Ans. (a) 1.9 cm/s in the positive x-direction; (b) 1.1 cm/s in the positive x-direction; (c) 1.5 cm/s in the negative x-direction For the object whose motion is plotted in Fig. 2-3, ®nd its instantaneous velocity at the following times: (a) 1.0 s, (b) 4.0 s, and (c) 10 s. Ans. (a) 3.3 m/s in the positive y-direction; (b) 1.0 m/s in the positive y-direction; (c) 0.83 m/s in the negative y-direction A body with initial velocity 8.0 m/s moves along a straight line with constant acceleration and travels 640 m in 40 s. For the 40 s interval, ®nd (a) the average velocity, (b) the ®nal velocity, and (c) the acceleration. Ans. (a) 16 m/s; (b) 24 m/s; (c) 0.40 m/s2 A truck starts from rest and moves with a constant acceleration of 5.0 m/s2 . Find its speed and the distance traveled after 4.0 s has elapsed. Ans. 20 m/s, 40 m A box slides down an incline with uniform acceleration. It starts from rest and attains a speed of 2.7 m/s in 3.0 s. Find (a) the acceleration and (b) the distance moved in the ®rst 6.0 s. Ans. (a) 0.90 m/s2 ; (b) 16 m A car is accelerating uniformly as it passes two checkpoints that are 30 m apart. The time taken between checkpoints is 4.0 s, and the car's speed at the ®rst checkpoint is 5.0 m/s. Find the car's acceleration and its speed at the second checkpoint. Ans. 1.3 m/s2 , 10 m/s An auto's velocity increases uniformly from 6.0 m/s to 20 m/s while covering 70 m in a straight line. Find the acceleration and the time taken. Ans. 2.6 m/s2 , 5.4 s A plane starts from rest and accelerates in a straight line along the ground before takeo. It moves 600 m in 12 s. Find (a) the acceleration, (b) speed at the end of 12 s, and (c) the distance moved during the twelfth second. Ans. (a) 8.3 m/s2 ; (b) 0.10 km/s; (c) 96 m A train running along a straight track at 30 m/s is slowed uniformly to a stop in 44 s. Find the acceleration and the stopping distance. Ans. À0:68 m/s2 , 0.66 km or 6:6 Â 102 m An object moving at 13 m/s slows uniformly at the rate of 2.0 m/s each second for a time of 6.0 s. Determine (a) its ®nal speed, (b) its average speed during the 6.0 s, and (c) the distance moved in the 6.0 s. Ans. (a) 1.0 m/s; (b) 7.0 m/s; (c) 42 m A body falls freely from rest. Find (a) its acceleration, (b) the distance it falls in 3.0 s, (c) its speed after falling 70 m, (d ) the time required to reach a speed of 25 m/s, and (e) the time taken to fall 300 m. Ans. (a) 9.81 m/s2 ; (b) 44 m; (c) 37 m/s; (d ) 2.6 s; (e) 7.8 s A marble dropped from a bridge strikes the water in 5.0 s. Calculate (a) the speed with which it strikes and (b) the height of the bridge. Ans. (a) 49 m/s; (b) 0.12 km or 1:2 Â 102 m A stone is thrown straight downward with initial speed 8.0 m/s from a height of 25 m. Find (a) the time it takes to reach the ground and (b) the speed with which it strikes. Ans. (a) 1.6 s; (b) 24 m/s

2.31

2.32

2.33

2.34

2.35

2.36

2.37

2.38

2.39

2.40

2.41

2.42

26

UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION

[CHAP. 2

2.43

A baseball is thrown straight upward with a speed of 30 m/s. (a) How long will it rise? (b) How high will it rise? (c) How long after it leaves the hand will it return to the starting point? (d ) When will its speed be 16 m/s? Ans. (a) 3.1 s; (b) 46 m; (c) 6.1 s; (d ) 1.4 s and 4.7 s A bottle dropped from a balloon reaches the ground in 20 s. Determine the height of the balloon if (a) it was at rest in the air and (b) it was ascending with a speed of 50 m/s when the bottle was dropped. Ans. 2.0 km; (b) 0.96 km Two balls are dropped to the ground from dierent heights. One is dropped 1.5 s after the other, but they both strike the ground at the same time, 5.0 s after the ®rst was dropped. (a) What is the dierence in the heights from which they were dropped? (b) From what height was the ®rst ball dropped? Ans. (a) 63 m; (b) 0.12 km A nut comes loose from a bolt on the bottom of an elevator as the elevator is moving up the shaft at 3.00 m/s. The nut strikes the bottom of the shaft in 2.00 s. (a) How far from the bottom of the shaft was the elevator when the nut fell o ? (b) How far above the bottom was the nut 0.25 s after it fell o? Ans. (a) 13.6 m; (b) 14 m A marble, rolling with speed 20 cm/s, rolls o the edge of a table that is 80 cm high. (a) How long does it take to drop to the ¯oor? (b) How far, horizontally, from the table edge does the marble strike the ¯oor? Ans. (a) 0.40 s; (b) 8.1 cm A body projected upward from the level ground at an angle of 508 with the horizontal has an initial speed of 40 m/s. (a) How long will it take to hit the ground? (b) How far from the starting point will it strike? (c) At what angle with the horizontal will it strike? Ans. (a) 6.3 s; (b) 0.16 km; (c) 508 A body is projected downward at an angle of 308 with the horizontal from the top of a building 170 m high. Its initial speed is 40 m/s. (a) How long will it take before striking the ground? (b) How far from the foot of the building will it strike? (c) At what angle with the horizontal will it strike? Ans. (a) 4.2 s; (b) 0.15 km; (c) 608 A hose lying on the ground shoots a stream of water upward at an angle of 408 to the horizontal. The speed of the water is 20 m/s as it leaves the hose. How high up will it strike a wall which is 8.0 m away? Ans. 5.4 m A World Series batter hits a home run ball with a velocity of 40 m/s at an angle of 268 above the horizontal. A ®elder who can reach 3.0 m above the ground is backed up against the bleacher wall, which is 110 m from home plate. The ball was 120 cm above the ground when hit. How high above the ®elder's glove does the ball pass? Ans. 6.0 m Prove that a gun will shoot three times as high when its angle of elevation is 608 as when it is 308, but the bullet will carry the same horizontal distance. A ball is thrown upward at an angle of 308 to the horizontal and lands on the top edge of a building that is 20 m away. The top edge is 5.0 m above the throwing point. How fast was the ball thrown? Ans. 20 m/s A ball is thrown straight upward with a speed v from a point h meters above the ground. Show that the time p taken for the ball to strike the ground is v=g1 1 2hg=v2 :

2.44

2.45

2.46

2.47

2.48

2.49

2.50

2.51

2.52 2.53

2.54

Chapter 3
Newton's Laws
THE MASS of an object is a measure of the inertia of the object. Inertia is the tendency of a body at rest to remain at rest, and of a body in motion to continue moving with unchanged velocity. For several centuries, physicists have found it useful to think of mass as a representation of the amount of or quantity-of-matter.

THE STANDARD KILOGRAM is an object whose mass is de®ned to be one kilogram. The masses of other objects are found by comparison with this mass. A gram mass is equivalent to exactly 0.001 kg.

FORCE, in general, is the agency of change. In mechanics it is that which changes the velocity of an object. Force is a vector quantity, having magnitude and direction. An external force is one whose source lies outside of the system being considered.

THE NET EXTERNAL FORCE acting on an object causes the object to accelerate in the direction of that force. The acceleration is proportional to the force and inversely proportional to the mass of the object. (We now know from the Special Theory of Relativity that this statement is actually an excellent approximation applicable to all situations where the speed is appreciably less than the speed of light, c.)

THE NEWTON is the SI unit of force. One newton (1 N) is that resultant force which will give a 1 kg mass an acceleration of 1 m/s2 . The pound is 4.45 N.

NEWTON'S FIRST LAW: An object at rest will remain at rest; an object in motion will continue in motion with constant velocity, except insofar as it is acted upon by an external force. Force is the changer of motion.

NEWTON'S SECOND LAW: As stated by Newton, the Second Law was framed in terms of the concept of momentum. This rigorously correct statement will be treated in Chapter 8. Here we focus on a less fundamental, but highly useful, variation. If the resultant (or net), force ~ actF ing on an object of mass m is not zero, the object accelerates in the direction of the force. The acceleration ~ is proportional to the force and inversely proportional to the mass of the object. a With ~ in newtons, m in kilograms, and ~ in m/s2 , this can be written as F a ~ a ~ F m or ~ m~ F a

The acceleration ~ has the same direction as the resultant force ~: a F The vector equation ~ m~ can be written in terms of components as F a Æ Fx max Æ Fy may 27
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

Æ Fz maz

where the forces are the components of the external forces acting on the object.

28

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

NEWTON'S THIRD LAW: Matter interacts with matter ± forces come in pairs. For each force exerted on one body, there is an equal, but oppositely directed, force on some other body interacting with it. This is often called the Law of Action and Reaction. Notice that the action and reaction forces act on the two dierent interacting objects.

THE LAW OF UNIVERSAL GRAVITATION: When two masses m and m H gravitationally interact, they attract each other with forces of equal magnitude. For point masses (or spherically symmetric bodies), the attractive force FG is given by FG G mm H r2

where r is the distance between mass centers, and where G 6:67 Â 10À11 NÁm2 =kg2 when FG is in newtons, m and m H are in kilograms, and r is in meters.

THE WEIGHT of an object FW is the gravitational force acting downward on the object. On the Earth, it is the gravitational force exerted on the object by the planet. Its units are newtons (in the SI) and pounds (in the British system). Because the Earth is not a perfect uniform sphere, and moreover because it's spinning, the weight measured by a scale will be very slightly dierent from that de®ned above.

RELATION BETWEEN MASS AND WEIGHT: An object of mass m falling freely toward the Earth is subject to only one force Ð the pull of gravity, which we call the weight FW of the object. The object's acceleration due to FW is the free-fall acceleration g. Therefore, ~ m~ proF a vides us with the relation between F FW , a g, and m; it is FW mg. Because, on average, g 9:81 m/s2 on Earth, a 1.00 kg object weighs 9.81 N at the Earth's surface.

THE TENSILE FORCE ~T acting on a string or chain or tendon is the applied force tending F to stretch it. The magnitude of the tensile force is the tension FT .

THE FRICTION FORCE ~f is a tangential force acting on an object that opposes the sliding F of that object on an adjacent surface with which it is in contact. The friction force is parallel to the surface and opposite to the direction of motion or of impending motion. Only when the applied force exceeds the maximum static friction force will an object begin to slide.

THE NORMAL FORCE ~N on an object that is being supported by a surface is the compoF nent of the supporting force that is perpendicular to the surface.

THE COEFFICIENT OF KINETIC FRICTION k is de®ned for the case in which one surface is sliding across another at constant speed. It is k friction force Ff normal force FN

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

29

THE COEFFICIENT OF STATIC FRICTION s is de®ned for the case in which one surface is just on the verge of sliding across another surface. It is s maximum friction force Ff max normal force FN

where the maximum friction force occurs when the object is just on the verge of slipping but is nonetheless at rest.

DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS: All mechanical quantities, such as acceleration and force, can be expressed in terms of three fundamental dimensions: length L, mass M, and time T. For example, acceleration is a length (a distance) divided by (time)2 ; we say it has the dimensions L=T 2 , which we write as LT À2 . The dimensions of volume are L3 , and those of velocity are LT À1 . Because force is mass multiplied by acceleration, its dimensions are MLT À2 . Dimensions are helpful in checking equations, since each term of an equation must have the same dimensions. For example, the dimensions of the equation s vi t are 1 at2 2

L 3 LT À1 T LT À2 T 2

so each term has the dimensions of length. Remember, all terms in an equation must have the same dimensions. As examples, an equation cannot have a volume L3 added to an area L2 , or a force MLT À2 subtracted from a velocity LT À1 ; these terms do not have the same dimensions.

MATHEMATICAL OPERATIONS WITH UNITS: In every mathematical operation, the units terms (for example, lb, cm, ft3 , mi/h, m/s2 ) must be carried along with the numbers and must undergo the same mathematical operations as the numbers. Quantities cannot be added or subtracted directly unless they have the same units (as well as the same dimensions). For example, if we are to add algebraically 5 m (length) and 8 cm (length), we must ®rst convert m to cm or cm to m. However, quantities of any sort can be combined in multiplication or division, in which the units as well as the numbers obey the algebraic laws of squaring, cancellation, etc. Thus: (1) 6 m2 2 m2 8 m2 (2) 5 cm Â 2 cm2 10 cm3 kg (3) 2 m3 Â 1500 3 3000 kg m (4) 2 s Â 3 (5) km km 6 2 s s m2 m2 3 m2 cm Â cm2 3 cm3 kg m3 Â 3 3 kg m km km sÂ 2 3 s s 2 3 g cm3 3 3 cm 3gÂ g g=cm3

15 g 5 cm3 3 g=cm3

30

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

Solved Problems
3.1 Find the weight on Earth of a body whose mass is (a) 3.00 kg, (b) 200 g.
The general relation between mass m and weight FW is FW mg. In this relation, m must be in kilograms, g in meters per second squared, and FW in newtons. On Earth, g 9:81 m/s2 . The acceleration due to gravity varies from place to place in the universe. (a) (b) FW 3:00 kg9:81 m=s2 29:4 kgÁm=s2 29:4 N FW 0:200 kg9:81 m=s2 1:96 N

3.2

A 20.0 kg object that can move freely is subjected to a resultant force of 45.0 N in the Àx-direction. Find the acceleration of the object.
We make use of the second law in component form, Æ Fx max , with Æ Fx À45:0 N and m 20:0 kg. Then ax Æ Fx À45:0 N À2:25 N=kg À2:25 m=s2 m 20:0 kg

where we have used the fact that 1 N 1 kgÁm=s2 . Because the resultant force on the object is in the Àx-direction, its acceleration is also in that direction.

3.3

The object in Fig. 3-1(a) weighs 50 N and is supported by a cord. Find the tension in the cord.
We mentally isolate the object for discussion. Two forces act on it, the upward pull of the cord and the downward pull of gravity. We represent the pull of the cord by FT , the tension in the cord. The pull of gravity, the weight of the object, is FW 50 N. These two forces are shown in the free-body diagram in Fig. 3-1(b).

Fig. 3-1 The forces are already in component form and so we can write the ®rst condition for equilibrium at once, taking up and to the right as positive directions:
3 Æ Fx 0

becomes becomes

00 FT À 50 N 0

4 Æ Fy 0

from which FT 50 N. Thus, when a single vertical cord supports a body at equilibrium, the tension in the cord equals the weight of the body.

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

31

3.4

A 5.0 kg object is to be given an upward acceleration of 0.30 m/s2 by a rope pulling straight upward on it. What must be the tension in the rope?
The free-body diagram for the object is shown in Fig. 3-2. The tension in the rope is FT , and the weight of the object is FW mg 5:0 kg9:81 m=s2 49:1 N. Using Æ Fy may with up taken as positive, we have FT À mg may or FT À 49:1 N 5:0 kg0:30 m=s2 from which FT 50:6 N 51 N. As a check, we notice that FT is larger than FW as it must be if the object is to accelerate upward.

Fig. 3-2

Fig. 3-3

3.5

A horizontal force of 140 N is needed to pull a 60.0 kg box across the horizontal ¯oor at constant speed. What is the coecient of friction between ¯oor and box? Determine it to three signi®cant ®gures even though that's quite unrealistic.
The free-body diagram for the box is shown in Fig. 3-3. Because the box does not move up or down, ay 0. Therefore, Æ Fy may gives FN À mg m0 m=s2

from which we ®nd that FN mg 60:0 kg9:81 m=s2 588:6 N. Further, because the box is moving horizontally at constant speed, ax 0 and so Æ Fx max gives 140 N À Ff 0

from which the friction force is Ff 140 N. We then have k Ff 140 N 0:238 FN 588:6 N

3.6

The only force acting on a 5.0 kg object has components Fx 20 N and Fy 30 N. Find the acceleration of the object.
We make use of Æ Fx max and Æ Fy may to obtain

32

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

ax ay

Æ Fx 20 N 4:0 m=s2 m 5:0 kg Æ Fy 30 N 6:0 m=s2 m 5:0 kg

These components of the acceleration are shown in Fig. 3-4. From the ®gure, we see that q a 4:02 6:02 m=s2 7:2 m=s2 and arctan 6:0=4:0 568:

Fig. 3-4

3.7

A 600 N object is to be given an acceleration of 0.70 m/s2 . How large an unbalanced force must act upon it?
Notice that the weight, not the mass, of the object is given. Assuming the weight was measured on the Earth, we use FW mg to ®nd m FW 600 N 61 kg g 9:81 m=s2

Now that we know the mass of the object (61 kg) and the desired acceleration (0.70 m/s2 ), we have F ma 61 kg0:70 m=s2 43 N

3.8

A constant force acts on a 5.0 kg object and reduces its velocity from 7.0 m/s to 3.0 m/s in a time of 3.0 s. Find the force.
We must ®rst ®nd the acceleration of the object, which is constant because the force is constant. Taking the direction of motion as positive, from Chapter 2 we have a vf À vi À4:0 m=s À1:33 m=s2 3:0 s t

Now we can use F ma with m 5:0 kg: F 5:0 kgÀ1:33 m=s2 À6:7 N The minus sign indicates that the force is a retarding force, directed opposite to the motion.

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

33

3.9

A 400-g block with an initial speed of 80 cm/s slides along a horizontal tabletop against a friction force of 0.70 N. (a) How far will it slide before stopping? (b) What is the coecient of friction between the block and the tabletop?
(a) We take the direction of motion as positive. The only unbalanced force acting on the block is the friction force, À0:70 N. Therefore, Æ F ma
2

becomes

À 0:70 N 0:400 kga

from which a À1:75 m=s . (Notice that m is always in kilograms.) To ®nd the distance the block slides, we have vix 0:80 m/s, vfx 0, and a À1:75 m/s2 . Then v2 À v2 2ax gives ix fx x (b) v2 À v2 0 À 0:64 m2 =s2 fx ix 0:18 m 2a 2À1:75 m=s2

Because the vertical forces on the block must cancel, the upward push of the table FN must equal the weight mg of the block. Then k friction force 0:70 N 0:18 FN 0:40 kg9:81 m=s2

3.10

A 600-kg car is moving on a level road at 30 m/s. (a) How large a retarding force (assumed constant) is required to stop it in a distance of 70 m? (b) What is the minimum coecient of friction between tires and roadway if this is to be possible? Assume the wheels are not locked, in which case we are dealing with static friction ± there's no sliding.
(a) We must ®rst ®nd the car's acceleration from a motion equation. It is known that vix 30 m/s, vfx 0, and x 70 m. We use v2 v2 2ax to ®nd ix fx a Now we can write F ma 600 kgÀ6:43 m=s2 À3860 N À3:9 kN (b) The force found in (a) is supplied as the friction force between the tires and roadway. Therefore, the magnitude of the friction force on the tires is Ff 3860 N. The coecient of friction is given by s Ff =FN , where FN is the normal force. In the present case, the roadway pushes up on the car with a force equal to the car's weight. Therefore, FN FW mg 600 kg9:81 m=s2 5886 N F 3860 0:66 s f FN 5886 v2 À v2 0 À 900 m2 =s2 ix fx À6:43 m=s2 2x 140 m

so that

The coecient of friction must be at least 0.66 if the car is to stop within 70 m.

3.11

An 8000-kg engine pulls a 40 000-kg train along a level track and gives it an acceleration a1 1:20 m/s2 . What acceleration a2 would the engine give to a 16 000-kg train?
For a given engine force, the acceleration is inversely proportional to the total mass. Thus a2 m1 8000 kg 40 000 kg a 1:20 m=s2 2:40 m=s2 m2 1 8000 kg 16 000 kg

3.12

As shown in Fig. 3-5(a), an object of mass m is supported by a cord. Find the tension in the cord if the object is (a) at rest, (b) moving at constant velocity, (c) accelerating upward with acceleration a 3g=2, and (d ) accelerating downward at a 0:75g:

34

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

Two forces act on the object: the tension FT upward and the downward pull of gravity mg. They are shown in the free-body diagram in Fig. 3-5(b). We take up as the positive direction and write Æ Fy may in each case. (a) (b) (c) (d ) ay 0: ay 0: ay 3g=2: ay À3g=4: FT À mg may 0 FT À mg may 0 FT À mg m3g=2 FT À mg mÀ3g=4 or or or or FT mg FT mg FT 2:5mg FT 0:25mg

Notice that the tension in the cord is less than mg in part (d ); only then can the object have a downward acceleration. Can you explain why FT 0 if ay Àg?

Fig. 3-5

Fig. 3-6

3.13

A tow rope will break if the tension in it exceeds 1500 N. It is used to tow a 700-kg car along level ground. What is the largest acceleration the rope can give to the car? (Remember that 1500 has four signi®cant ®gures; see Appendix A.)
The forces acting on the car are shown in Fig. 3-6. Only the x-directed force is of importance, because the y-directed forces balance each other. Indicating the positive direction with a sign and a little arrow we write, Æ F max becomes 1500 N 700 kga 3 x from which a 2:14 m=s2 :

3.14

Compute the least acceleration with which a 45-kg woman can slide down a rope if the rope can withstand a tension of only 300 N.
The weight of the woman is mg 45 kg9:81 m=s2 441 N. Because the rope can support only 300 N, the unbalanced downward force F on the woman must be at least 441 N À 300 N 141 N. Her minimum downward acceleration is then a F 141 N 3:1 m=s2 m 45 kg

3.15

A 70-kg box is slid along the ¯oor by a 400-N force as shown in Fig. 3-7. The coecient of friction between the box and the ¯oor is 0.50 when the box is sliding. Find the acceleration of the box.

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

35

Fig. 3-7

Since the y-directed forces must balance, FN mg 70 kg9:81 m=s2 687 N But the friction force Ff is given by Ff k FN 0:50687 N 344 N Now write Æ Fx max for the box, taking the direction of motion as positive: 400 N À 344 N 70 kga or a 0:80 m=s2

3.16

Suppose, as shown in Fig. 3-8, that a 70-kg box is pulled by a 400-N force at an angle of 308 to the horizontal. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.50. Find the acceleration of the box.

Fig. 3-8

Because the box does not move up or down, we have Æ Fy may 0. From Fig. 3-8, we see that this equation is FN 200 N À mg 0 But mg 70 kg9:81 m=s2 687 N, and it follows that FN 486 N: We next ®nd the friction force acting on the box: Ff k FN 0:50486 N 243 N Now let us write Æ Fx max for the box. It is 346 À 243 N 70 kgax from which ax 1:5 m/s2 :

36

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

3.17

A car moving at 20 m/s along a horizontal road has its brakes suddenly applied and eventually comes to rest. What is the shortest distance in which it can be stopped if the friction coecient between tires and road is 0.90? Assume that all four wheels brake identically. If the brakes don't lock the car stops via static friction.
The friction force at one wheel, call it wheel 1, is Ff1 s FN1 FW1 where FW1 is the weight carried by wheel 1. We obtain the total friction force Ff by adding such terms for all four wheels: Ff s FW1 s FW2 s FW3 s FW4 s FW1 FW2 FW3 FW4 s FW where FW is the total weight of the car. (Notice that we are assuming optimal braking at each wheel.) This friction force is the only unbalanced force on the car (we neglect wind friction and such). Writing F ma for the car with F replaced by Às FW gives Às FW ma, where m is the car's mass and the positive direction is taken as the direction of motion. However, FW mg; so the car's acceleration is s F W mg Às g À0:909:81 m=s2 À8:8 m=s2 À s m m We can ®nd how far the car went before stopping by solving a motion problem. Knowing that vi 20 m/s, vf 0, and a À8:8 m/s2 , we ®nd from v2 À v2 2ax that i f aÀ x 0 À 400 m2 =s2 23 m À17:6 m=s2

If the four wheels had not all been braking optimally, the stopping distance would have been longer.

3.18

As shown in Fig. 3-9, a force of 400 N pushes on a 25-kg box. Starting from rest, the box achieves a velocity of 2.0 m/s in a time of 4.0 s. Find the coecient of kinetic friction between box and ¯oor.

Fig. 3-9 We will need to ®nd f by use of F ma. But ®rst we must ®nd a from a motion problem. We know that vi 0, vf 2:0 m/s, t 4:0 s. Using vf vi at gives a vf À vi 2:0 m=s 0:50 m=s2 t 4:0 s or Ff 245 N

Now we can write Æ Fx max , where ax a 0:50 m/s2 . From Fig. 3-9, this equation becomes 257 N À Ff 25 kg0:50 m=s2 We now wish to use Ff =FN . To ®nd FN we write Æ Fy may 0, since no vertical motion occurs. From Fig. 3-9, FN À 306 N À 259:81 N 0 or FN 551 N

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

37

Then k Ff 245 0:44 FN 551

3.19

A 200-N wagon is to be pulled up a 308 incline at constant speed. How large a force parallel to the incline is needed if friction eects are negligible?
The situation is shown in Fig. 3-10(a). Because the wagon moves at a constant speed along a straight line, its velocity vector is constant. Therefore the wagon is in translational equilibrium, and the ®rst condition for equilibrium applies to it. We isolate the wagon as the object. Three nonnegligible forces act on it: (1) the pull of gravity FW (its weight), directed straight down; (2) the force F exerted on the wagon parallel to the incline to pull it up the incline; (3) the push FN of the incline that supports the wagon. These three forces are shown in the free-body diagram in Fig. 3-10(b). For situations involving inclines, it is convenient to take the x-axis parallel to the incline and the y-axis perpendicular to it. After taking components along these axes, we can write the ®rst condition for equilibrium:

3 Æ Fx 0

becomes becomes

F À 0:50 FW 0 FN À 0:87 FW 0

Solving the ®rst equation and recalling that FW 200 N, we ®nd that F 0:50 FW . The required pulling force to two signi®cant ®gures is 0.10 kN.

3

Æ Fy 0

Fig. 3-10

3.20

A 20-kg box sits on an incline as shown in Fig. 3-11. The coecient of kinetic friction between box and incline is 0.30. Find the acceleration of the box down the incline.
In solving inclined-plane problems, we take x- and y-axes as shown in the ®gure, parallel and perpendicular to the incline. We shall ®nd the acceleration by writing Æ Fx max . But ®rst we must ®nd the friction force Ff . Using the fact that cos 308 0:866, Fy may 0 gives FN À 0:87mg 0

from which FN 0:8720 kg9:81 m=s2 171 N. Now we can ®nd Ff from Ff k FN 0:30171 N 51 N

38

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

Fig. 3-11

Writing Æ Fx max , we have Ff À 0:50mg max or 51 N À 0:50209:81 N 20 kgax

from which ax À2:35 m/s2 . The box accelerates down the incline at 2.4 m/s2 .

3.21

When a force of 500 N pushes on a 25-kg box as shown in Fig. 3-12, the acceleration of the box up the incline is 0.75 m/s2 . Find the coecient of kinetic friction between box and incline.
The acting forces and their components are shown in Fig. 3-12. Notice how the x- and y-axes are taken. Since the box moves up the incline, the friction force (which always acts to retard the motion) is directed down the incline. Let us ®rst ®nd Ff by writing Æ Fx max . From Fig. 3-12, using sin 408 0:643, 383 N À Ff À 0:64259:81 N 25 kg0:75 m=s2 from which Ff 207 N. We also need FN . Writing Æ Fy may 0, and using cos 408 0:766, we get FN À 321 N À 0:77259:81 N 0 Then k Ff 207 0:41 FN 510 or FN 510 N

Fig. 3-12

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

39

3.22

Two blocks, of masses m1 and m2 , are pushed by a force F as shown in Fig. 3-13. The coecient of friction between each block and the table is 0.40. (a) What must be the value of F if the blocks are to have an acceleration of 200 cm/s2 ? How large a force does m1 then exert on m2 ? Use m1 300 g and m2 500 g. Remember to work in SI units.
The friction forces on the blocks are Ff1 0:4m1 g and Ff2 0:4m2 g. We take the two blocks in combination as the object for discussion; the horizontal forces on the object from outside (i.e. the external forces on it) are F, Ff1 , and Ff2 . Although the two blocks do push on each other, the pushes are internal forces; they are not part of the unbalanced external force on the two-mass object. For that object, Æ Fx max (a) becomes F À Ff1 À Ff2 m1 m2 ax

Solving for F and substituting known values, we ®nd F 0:40 gm1 m2 m1 m2 ax 3:14 N 1:60 N 4:7 N

(b)

Now consider block m2 alone. The forces acting on it in the x-direction are the push of block m1 on it (which we represent by Fb ) and the retarding friction force Ff2 0:4m2 g. Then, for it, Æ Fx max We know that ax 2:0 m/s and so Fb Ff2 m2 ax 1:96 N 1:00 N 2:96 N 3:0 N
2

becomes

Fb À Ff2 m2 ax

Fig. 3-13

Fig. 3-14

3.23

A cord passing over an easily turned pulley (one that is both massless and frictionless) has a 7.0-kg mass hanging from one end and a 9.0-kg mass hanging from the other, as shown in Fig. 3-14. (This arrangement is called Atwood's machine.) Find the acceleration of the masses and the tension in the cord.
Because the pulley is easily turned, the tension in the cord will be the same on each side. The forces acting on each of the two masses are drawn in Fig. 3-14. Recall that the weight of an object is mg. It is convenient in situations involving objects connected by cords to take the direction of motion as the positive direction. In the present case, we take up positive for the 7.0-kg mass, and down positive for the 9.0-kg mass. (If we do this, the acceleration will be positive for each mass. Because the cord doesn't stretch, the accelerations are numerically equal.) Writing Æ Fy may for each mass in turn, we have FT À 7:09:81 N 7:0 kga and 9:09:81 N À FT 9:0 kga

40

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

If we add these two equations, the unknown FT drops out, giving 9:0 À 7:09:81 N 16 kga for which a 1:23 m/s . We can now substitute 1.23 m/s2 for a in either equation and obtain FT 77 N.
2

3.24

In Fig. 3-15, the coecient of kinetic friction between block A and the table is 0.20. Also, mA 25 kg, mB 15 kg. How far will block B drop in the ®rst 3.0 s after the system is released?

Fig. 3-15

Since, for block A, there is no motion vertically, the normal force is and FN mA g 25 kg9:81 m=s2 245 N Ff k FN 0:20245 N 49 N

We must ®rst ®nd the acceleration of the system and then we can describe its motion. Let us apply F ma to each block in turn. Taking the motion direction as positive, we have FT À Ff mA a and mB g À FT mB a or or FT À 49 N 25 kga À FT 159:81 N 15 kga

We can eliminate FT by adding the two equations. Then, solving for a, we ®nd a 2:45 m/s2 : Now we can work a motion problem with a 2:45 m/s2 , vi 0, t 3:0 s: y viy t 1 at2 2 as the distance B falls in the ®rst 3.0 s. gives y 0 1 2:45 m=s2 3:0 s2 11 m 2

3.25

How large a horizontal force in addition to FT must pull on block A in Fig. 3-15 to give it an acceleration of 0.75 m/s2 toward the left? Assume, as in Problem 3.24, that k 0:20, mA 25 kg, and mB 15 kg.
If we were to redraw Fig 3-15 for this case, we would show a force F pulling toward the left on A. In addition, the retarding friction force Ff should be reversed in direction in the ®gure. As in Problem 3.24, Ff 49 N.

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

41

We write F ma for each block in turn, taking the direction of motion to be positive. We have F À FT À 49 N 25 kg0:75 m=s2 and FT À 159:81 N 15 kg0:75 m=s2 We solve the last equation for FT and substitute in the previous equation. We can then solve for the single unknown F, and we ®nd it to be 226 N or 0.23 kN.

3.26

The coecient of static friction between a box and the ¯at bed of a truck is 0.60. What is the maximum acceleration the truck can have along level ground if the box is not to slide?
The box experiences only one x-directed force, the friction force. When the box is on the verge of slipping, Ff s FW , where FW is the weight of the box. As the truck accelerates, the friction force must cause the box to have the same acceleration as the truck; otherwise, the box will slip. When the box is not slipping, Æ Fx max applied to the box gives Ff max . However, if the box is on the verge of slipping, Ff s FW so that s FW max . Because FW mg, this gives mg s g 0:609:81 m=s2 5:9 m=s2 ax s m as the maximum acceleration without slipping.

3.27

In Fig. 3-16, the two boxes have identical masses of 40 kg. Both experience a sliding friction force with k 0:15. Find the acceleration of the boxes and the tension in the tie cord.

Fig. 3-16 Using Ff FN , we ®nd that the friction forces on the two boxes are FfA 0:15mg and FfB 0:150:87mg

But m 40 kg, so FfA 59 N and FfB 51 N. Let us now apply Æ Fx max to each block in turn, taking the direction of motion as positive. This gives FT À 59 N 40 kga and 0:5mg À FT À 51 N 40 kga

Solving these two equations for a and FT gives a 1:1 m=s2 and FT 0:10 kN.

42

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

3.28

In the system shown in Fig. 3-17(a), force F accelerates block m1 to the right. Find its acceleration in terms of F and the coecient of friction k at the contact surfaces.

Fig. 3-17 The horizontal forces on the blocks are shown in Fig. 3-17(b) and (c). Block m2 is pressed against m1 by its weight m2 g. This is the normal force where m1 and m2 are in contact, so the friction force there is Ff 2 k m2 g. At the bottom surface of m1 , however, the normal force is m1 m2 g. Hence, FfH k m1 m2 g. We now write Æ Fx max for each block, taking the direction of motion as positive: FT k m2 g m2 a and F À FT À m2 g À k m1 m2 g m1 a We can eliminate FT by adding the two equations to obtain F À 2k m2 g À k m1 m2 g m1 m2 a from which a F À 2k m2 g À k g m1 m2

3.29

In the system of Fig. 3-18, friction and the mass of the pulley are both negligible. Find the acceleration of m2 if m1 300 g, m2 500 g, and F 1:50 N.

Fig. 3-18 Notice that m1 has twice as large an acceleration as m2 . (When the pulley moves a distance d, m1 moves a distance 2d.) Also notice that the tension FT1 in the cord pulling m1 is half FT 2 , that in the cord pulling the pulley, because the total force on the pulley must be zero. F ma tells us that this is so because the mass of the pulley is zero.) Writing Æ Fx max for each mass, we have FT1 m1 2a and F À FT2 m2 a However, we know that FT1 1 FT2 and so the ®rst equation gives FT2 4m1 a. Substitution in the second 2 equation yields F 4m1 m2 a or a F 1:50 N 0:882 m=s2 4m1 m2 1:20 kg 0:50 kg

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

43

3.30

In Fig. 3-19, the weights of the objects are 200 N and 300 N. The pulleys are essentially frictionless and massless. Pulley P1 has a stationary axle, but pulley P2 is free to move up and down. Find the tensions FT1 and FT2 and the acceleration of each body.

Fig. 3-19

Mass B will rise and mass A will fall. You can see this by noticing that the forces acting on pulley P2 are 2FT2 up and FT1 down. Since the pulley has no mass, it can have no acceleration, and so FT1 2FT2 (the inertialess object transmits the tension). Twice as large a force is pulling upward on B as on A. Let a be the downward acceleration of A. Then a=2 is the upward acceleration of B. (Why?) We now write Æ Fy may for each mass in turn, taking the direction of motion as positive in each case. We have FT1 À 300 N mB 1 a 2 and 200 N À FT2 mA a

But m FW =g and so mA 200=9:81 kg and mB 300=9:81 kg. Further FT1 2FT2 . Substitution of these values in the two equations allows us to compute FT2 and then FT1 and a. The results are FT1 327 N FT2 164 N a 1:78 m=s2

3.31

Compute the mass of the Earth, assuming it to be a sphere of radius 6370 km. Give your answer to three signi®cant ®gures.
Let M be the mass of the Earth, and m the mass of an object on the Earth's surface. The weight of the object is equal to mg. It is also equal to the gravitational force GMm=r2 , where r is the Earth's radius. Hence, mg G Mm r2

from which

M

gr2 9:81 m=s2 6:37 Â 106 m2 5:97 Â 1024 kg G 6:67 Â 10À11 NÁ m2 =kg2

44

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

Supplementary Problems
3.32 Once ignited, a small rocket motor on a spacecraft exerts a constant force of 10 N for 7.80 s. During the burn the rocket causes the 100-kg craft to accelerate uniformly. Determine that acceleration. Ans. 0.10 m/s2 Typically, a bullet leaves a standard 45-caliber pistol (5.0-in. barrel) at a speed of 262 m/s. If it takes 1 ms to traverse the barrel, determine the average acceleration experienced by the 16.2-g bullet within the gun and then compute the average force exerted on it. Ans. 3 Â 105 m=s2 ; 0:4 Â 102 N A force acts on a 2-kg mass and gives it an acceleration of 3 m/s2 . What acceleration is produced by the same force when acting on a mass of (a) 1 kg? (b) 4 kg? (c) How large is the force? Ans. (a) 6 m/s2 ; (b) 2 m/s2 ; (c) 6 N An object has a mass of 300 g. (a) What is its weight on Earth? (b) What is its mass on the Moon? (c) What will be its acceleration on the Moon when a 0.500 N resultant force acts on it? Ans. (a) 2.94 N; (b) 0.300 kg; (c) 1.67 m/s2 A horizontal cable pulls a 200-kg cart along a horizontal track. The tension in the cable is 500 N. Starting from rest, (a) How long will it take the cart to reach a speed of 8.0 m/s? (b) How far will it have gone? Ans. (a) 3.2 s; (b) 13 m A 900-kg car is going 20 m/s along a level road. How large a constant retarding force is required to stop it in a distance of 30 m? (Hint: First ®nd its deceleration.) Ans. 6.0 kN A 12.0-g bullet is accelerated from rest to a speed of 700 m/s as it travels 20.0 cm in a gun barrel. Assuming the acceleration to be constant, how large was the accelerating force? (Be careful of units.) Ans. 14.7 kN A 20-kg crate hangs at the end of a long rope. Find its acceleration (magnitude and direction) when the tension in the rope is (a) 250 N, (b) 150 N, (c) zero, (d ) 196 N. Ans. (a) 2.7 m/s2 up; (b) 2.3 m/s2 down; 2 (c) 9.8 m/s down; (d ) zero A 5.0-kg mass hangs at the end of a cord. Find the tension in the cord if the acceleration of the mass is Ans. (a) 57 N; (b) 42 N; (c) zero (a) 1.5 m/s2 up, (b) 1.5 m/s2 down, (c) 9.8 m/s2 down. A 700-N man stands on a scale on the ¯oor of an elevator. The scale records the force it exerts on whatever is on it. What is the scale reading if the elevator has an acceleration of (a) 1.8 m/s2 up? (b) 1.8 m/s2 down? (c) 9.8 m/s2 down? Ans. (a) 0.83 kN; (b) 0.57 kN; (c) zero Using the scale described in Problem 3.41, a 65.0 kg astronaut weighs himself on the Moon, where Ans. 104 N g 1:60 m/s2 . What does the scale read? A cord passing over a frictionless, massless pulley has a 4.0-kg object tied to one end and a 12-kg object tied to the other. Compute the acceleration and the tension in the cord. Ans. 4.9 m/s2 , 59 N An elevator starts from rest with a constant upward acceleration. It moves 2.0 m in the ®rst 0.60 s. A passenger in the elevator is holding a 3.0-kg package by a vertical string. What is the tension in the string during the accelerating process? Ans. 63 N Just as her parachute opens, a 60-kg parachutist is falling at a speed of 50 m/s. After 0.80 s has passed, the chute is fully open and her speed has dropped to 12.0 m/s. Find the average retarding force exerted upon the chutist during this time if the deceleration is uniform. Ans. 2850 N 588 N 3438 N 3:4 kN

3.33

3.34

3.35

3.36

3.37

3.38

3.39

3.40

3.41

3.42

3.43

3.44

3.45

CHAP. 3]

NEWTON'S LAWS

45

3.46

A 300-g mass hangs at the end of a string. A second string hangs from the bottom of that mass and supports a 900-g mass. (a) Find the tension in each string when the masses are accelerating upward at 0.700 m/s2 : (b) Find the tension in each string when the acceleration is 0.700 m/s2 downward. Ans. (a) 12.6 N and 9.45 N; (b) 10.9 N and 8.19 N A 20-kg wagon is pulled along the level ground by a rope inclined at 308 above the horizontal. A friction force of 30 N opposes the motion. How large is the pulling force if the wagon is moving with (a) constant speed and (b) an acceleration of 0.40 m/s2 ? Ans. (a) 35 N; (b) 44 N A 12-kg box is released from the top of an incline that is 5.0 m long and makes an angle of 408 to the horizontal. A 60-N friction force impedes the motion of the box. (a) What will be the acceleration of the box and (b) how long will it take to reach the bottom of the incline? Ans. (a) 1.3 m/s2 ; (b) 2.8 s For the situation outlined in Problem 3.48, what is the coecient of friction between box and incline? Ans. 0.67 An inclined plane makes an angle of 308 with the horizontal. Find the constant force, applied parallel to the plane, required to cause a 15-kg box to slide (a) up the plane with acceleration 1.2 m/s2 and (b) down the incline with acceleration 1.2 m/s2 . Neglect friction forces. Ans. (a) 92 N; (b) 56 N A horizontal force F is exerted on a 20-kg box to slide it up a 308 incline. The friction force retarding the motion is 80 N. How large must F be if the acceleration of the moving box is to be (a) zero and (b) 0.75 m/s2 ? Ans. (a) 0.21 kN; (b) 0.22 kN An inclined plane making an angle of 258 with the horizontal has a pulley at its top. A 30-kg block on the plane is connected to a freely hanging 20-kg block by means of a cord passing over the pulley. Compute the distance the 20-kg block will fall in 2.0 s starting from rest. Neglect friction. Ans. 2.9 m Repeat Problem 3.52 if the coecient of friction between block and plane is 0.20. Ans. 0.74 m

3.47

3.48

3.49

3.50

3.51

3.52

3.53 3.54

A horizontal force of 200 N is required to cause a 15-kg block to slide up a 208 incline with an acceleration of 25 cm/s2 . Find (a) the friction force on the block and (b) the coecient of friction. Ans. (a) 0.13 kN; (b) 0.65 Find the acceleration of the blocks in Fig. 3-20 if friction forces are negligible. What is the tension in the cord connecting them? Ans. 3.3 m/s2 , 13 N

3.55

Fig. 3-20

3.56

Repeat Problem 3.55 if the coecient of kinetic friction between the blocks and the table is 0.30. Ans. 0.39 m/s2 , 13 N How large a force F is needed in Fig. 3-21 to pull out the 6.0-kg block with an acceleration of 1.50 m/s2 if the coecient of friction at its surfaces is 0.40? Ans. 48 N

3.57

46

NEWTON'S LAWS

[CHAP. 3

Fig. 3-21

Fig. 3-22

3.58

In Fig. 3-22, how large a force F is needed to give the blocks an acceleration of 3.0 m/s2 if the coecient of kinetic friction between blocks and table is 0.20? How large a force does the 1.50-kg block then exert on the 2.0-kg block? Ans. 22 N, 15 N (a) What is the smallest force parallel to a 378 incline needed to keep a 100-N weight from sliding down the incline if the coecients of static and kinetic friction are both 0.30? (b) What parallel force is required to keep the weight moving up the incline at constant speed? (c) If the parallel pushing force is 94 N, what will be the acceleration of the object? (d ) If the object in (c) starts from rest, how far will it move in 10 s? Ans. (a) 36 N; (b) 84 N; (c) 0.98 m/s2 up the plane; (d ) 49 m A 5.0-kg block rests on a 308 incline. The coecient of static friction between the block and the incline is 0.20. How large a horizontal force must push on the block if the block is to be on the verge of sliding (a) up the incline and (b) down the incline? Ans. (a) 43 N; (b) 16.6 N Three blocks with masses 6.0 kg, 9.0 kg, and 10 kg are connected as shown in Fig. 3-23. The coecient of friction between the table and the 10-kg block is 0.20. Find (a) the acceleration of the system and (b) the tension in the cord on the left and in the cord on the right. Ans. (a) 0.39 m/s2 ; (b) 61 N, 85 N

3.59

3.60

3.61

Fig. 3-23

3.62

The Earth's radius is about 6370 km. An object that has a mass of 20 kg is taken to a height of 160 km above the Earth's surface. (a) What is the object's mass at this height? (b) How much does the object weigh (i.e., how large a gravitational force does it experience) at this height? Ans. (a) 20 kg; (b) 0.19 kN The radius of the Earth is about 6370 km, while that of Mars is about 3440 km. If an object weighs 200 N on Earth, what would it weigh, and what would be the acceleration due to gravity, on Mars? The mass of Mars Ans. 75 N, 3.7 m/s2 is 0.11 that of Earth.

3.63

Chapter 4
Equilibrium Under the Action of Concurrent Forces
CONCURRENT FORCES are forces whose lines of action all pass through a common point. The forces acting on a point object are concurrent because they all pass through the same point, the point object.

AN OBJECT IS IN EQUILIBRIUM under the action of concurrent forces provided it is not accelerating.

THE FIRST CONDITION FOR EQUILIBRIUM is the requirement that Æ ~ 0 or, in compoF nent form, that Æ Fx Æ Fy Æ Fz 0 That is, the resultant of all external forces acting on the object must be zero. This condition is sucient for equilibrium when the external forces are concurrent. A second condition must also be satis®ed if an object is to be in equilibrium under nonconcurrent forces; it is discussed in Chapter 5.

PROBLEM SOLUTION METHOD (CONCURRENT FORCES): (1) Isolate the object for discussion. (2) Show the forces acting on the isolated object in a diagram (the free-body diagram). (3) Find the rectangular components of each force. (4) Write the ®rst condition for equilibrium in equation form. (5) Solve for the required quantities.

THE WEIGHT OF AN OBJECT ~W is essentially the force with which gravity pulls downward F upon it.

THE TENSILE FORCE ~T acting on a string or cable or chain (or indeed, on any structural F member) is the applied force tending to stretch it. The scalar magnitude of the tensile force is the tension FT .

THE FRICTION FORCE ~f is a tangential force acting on an object that opposes the sliding F of that object across an adjacent surface with which it is in contact. The friction force is parallel to the surface and opposite to the direction of motion or of impending motion.

THE NORMAL FORCE ~N on an object that is being supported by a surface is the compoF nent of the supporting force that is perpendicular to the surface. 47
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

48

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

[CHAP. 4

Solved Problems
4.1 In Fig. 4-1(a), the tension in the horizontal cord is 30 N as shown. Find the weight of the object.
The tension in cord 1 is equal to the weight of the object hanging from it. Therefore FT1 FW , and we wish to ®nd FT1 or FW . Notice that the unknown force FT1 and the known force of 30 N both pull on the knot at point P. It therefore makes sense to isolate the knot at P as our object. The free-body diagram showing the forces on the knot is drawn as in Fig. 4-1(b). The force components are also shown there. We next write the ®rst condition for equilibrium for the knot. From the free-body diagram,
3 Æ Fx 0

becomes becomes

30 N À FT2 cos 408 0 FT2 sin 408 À FW 0

4 Æ Fy 0

Solving the ®rst equation for FT2 gives FT2 39:2 N. Substituting this value in the second equation gives FW 25 N as the weight of the object.

Fig. 4-1

4.2

A rope extends between two poles. A 90-N boy hangs from it as shown in Fig. 4-2(a). Find the tensions in the two parts of the rope.
We label the two tensions FT1 and FT2 , and isolate the rope at the boy's hands as the object. The freebody diagram for the object is shown in Fig. 4-2(b). After resolving the forces into their components as shown, we can write the ®rst condition for equilibrium:
3 Æ Fx 0

becomes becomes

FT2 cos 5:08 À FT1 cos 108 0 FT2 sin 5:08 FT1 sin 108 À 90 N 0

4 Æ Fy 0

When we evaluate the sines and cosines, these equations become 0:996FT2 À 0:985FT1 0 and 0:087FT2 0:174FT1 À 90 0

Solving the ®rst for FT2 gives FT2 0:990FT1 . Substituting this in the second equation gives 0:086FT1 0:174FT1 À 90 0 from which FT1 0:35 kN. Then, because FT2 0:990FT 1 , we have FT2 0:34 kN:

CHAP. 4]

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

49

Fig. 4-2

4.3

A 50-N box is slid straight across the ¯oor at constant speed by a force of 25 N, as shown in Fig. 4-3(a). How large a friction force impedes the motion of the box? (b) How large is the normal force? (c) Find k between the box and the ¯oor.
Notice the forces acting on the box, as shown in Fig. 4-3(a). The friction force is Ff and the normal force, the supporting force exerted by the ¯oor, is FN . The free-body diagram and components are shown in Fig. 4-3(b). Because the box is moving with constant velocity, it is in equilibrium. The ®rst condition for equilibrium, taking to the right as positive, tells us that
3 Æ Fx 0

or

25 cos 408 À Ff 0

(a) (b)

We can solve for the friction force Ff at once to ®nd that Ff 19:2 N, or to two signi®cant ®gures, Ff 19 N: To ®nd FN we use the fact that

4 Æ Fy 0

or

FN 25 sin 408 À 50 0

Solving gives the normal force as FN 33:9 N or, to two signi®cant ®gures, FN 34 N. (c) From the de®nition of k , we have k Ff 19:2 N 0:57 FN 33:9 N

Fig. 4-3

50

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

[CHAP. 4

4.4

Find the tensions in the ropes shown in Fig. 4-4(a) if the supported object weighs 600 N.
Let us select as our object the knot at A because we know one force acting on it. The weight pulls down on it with a force of 600 N, and so the free-body diagram for the knot is as shown in Fig. 4-4(b). Applying the ®rst condition for equilibrium to that diagram, we have
3 Æ Fx 0

or or

FT2 cos 608 À FT1 cos 608 0 FT1 sin 608 FT2 sin 608 À 600 0

4 Æ Fy 0

The ®rst equation yields FT1 FT 2 . (We could have inferred this from the symmetry of the system. Also symmetry, FT3 FT4 .) Substitution of FT 1 for FT2 in the second equation gives FT1 346 N, and so FT2 346 N also. Let us now isolate knot B as our object. Its free-body diagram is shown in Fig. 4-4(c). We have already found that FT2 346 N or 0.35 kN and so the equilibrium equations are
3 Æ Fx 0

or or

FT3 cos 208 À FT5 À 346 sin 308 0 FT3 sin 208 À 346 cos 308 0

4 Æ Fy 0

The last equation yields FT3 877 N or 0.88 kN. Substituting this in the prior equation gives FT5 651 N or 0.65 kN. As stated previously from symmetry FT4 FT3 877 N or 0.88 kN. How could you have found FT4 without recourse to symmetry? (Hint: See Fig. 4.4(d ).)

Fig. 4-4

CHAP. 4]

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

51

4.5

Each of the objects in Fig. 4-5 is in equilibrium. Find the normal force FN in each case.

Fig. 4-5

We apply Æ Fy 0 in each case. (a) (b) (c) FN 200 N sin 30:08 À 500 0 FN À 200 N sin 30:08 À 150 0 FN À 200 N cos 0 from which from which from which FN 400 N FN 250 N FN 200 cos N

4.6

For the situations of Problem 4.5, ®nd the coecient of kinetic friction if the object is moving with constant speed. Round o your answers to two signi®cant ®gures.
We have already found FN for each case in Problem 4.5. To ®nd Ff , the sliding-friction force, we use Æ Fx 0. Then we use the de®nition of k : (a) (b) (c) We have 200 cos 30:08 À Ff 0 so that Ff 173 N. Then, k Ff =FN 173=400 0:43: We have 200 cos 30:08 À Ff 0 so that Ff 173 N. Then, k Ff =FN 173=250 0:69: We have À200 sin Ff 0 so that Ff 200 sin N. Then, k Ff =FN 200 sin =200 cos tan :

4.7

Suppose that in Fig. 4-5(c) the block is at rest. The angle of the incline is slowly increased. At an angle 428, the block begins to slide. What is the coecient of static friction between the block and the incline? (The block and surface are not the same as in Problems 4.5 and 4.6.)
At the instant the block begins to slide, the friction has its critical value. Therefore, s Ff =FN at that instant. Following the method of Problems 4.5 and 4.6, we have FN FW cos Therefore, when sliding just starts, s Ff F sin tan W FN FW cos and Ff FW sin

But was found by experiment to be 428. Therefore, s tan 428 0:90:

4.8

Pulled by the 8.0-N block shown in Fig. 4-6(a), the 20-N block slides to the right at a constant velocity. Find k between the block and the table. Assume the pulley to be frictionless.
Because it is moving at a constant velocity, the 20-N block is at equilibrium. Since the pulley is frictionless, the tension in the continuous rope is the same on both sides of the pulley. Thus, we have FT1 FT 2 8:0 N.

52

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

[CHAP. 4

Fig. 4-6

Looking at the free-body diagram in Fig. 4-6(b) and recalling that the block is at equilibrium, we have
3 Æ Fx 0

or or

Ff FT2 8:0 N FN 20 N

4 Æ Fy 0

Then, from the de®nition of k ; k Ff 8:0 N 0:40 20 N FN

Supplementary Problems
4.9 For the situation shown in Fig. 4-7, ®nd the values of FT1 and FT 2 if the object's weight is 600 N. Ans. 503 N, 783 N

Fig. 4-7

4.10

The following coplanar forces pull on a ring: 200 N at 30:08, 500 N at 80:08, 300 N at 2408, and an unknown force. Find the magnitude and direction of the unknown force if the ring is to be in equilibrium. Ans. 350 N at 2528

CHAP. 4]

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

53

4.11

In Fig. 4-8, the pulleys are frictionless and the system hangs at equilibrium. If FW3 , the weight of the object on the right, is 200 N, what are the values of FW1 and FW2 ? Ans. 260 N, 150 N

Fig. 4-8

Fig. 4-9

4.12

Suppose FW1 in Fig. 4-8 is 500 N. Find the values of FW2 and FW3 if the system is to hang in equilibrium as shown. Ans. 288 N, 384 N If in Fig. 4-9 the friction between the block and the incline is negligible, how much must the object on the right weigh if the 200-N block is to remain at rest? Ans. 115 N The system in Fig. 4-9 remains at rest when FW 220 N. What are the magnitude and direction of the friction force on the 200-N block? Ans. 105 N down the incline Find the normal force acting on the block in each of the equilibrium situations shown in Fig. 4-10. Ans. (a) 34 N; (b) 46 N; (c) 91 N

4.13

4.14

4.15

Fig. 4-10

4.16

The block shown in Fig. 4-10(a) slides with constant speed under the action of the force shown. (a) How large is the retarding friction force? (b) What is the coecient of kinetic friction between the block and the ¯oor? Ans. (a) 12 N; (b) 0.34

54

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

[CHAP. 4

4.17

The block shown in Fig. 4-10(b) slides at a constant speed down the incline. (a) How large is the friction force that opposes its motion? (b) What is the coecient of sliding (kinetic) friction between the block and the plane? Ans. (a) 39 N; (b) 0.84 The block in Fig. 4-10(c) just begins to slide up the incline when the pushing force shown is increased to 70 N. (a) What is the critical static friction force on it? (b) What is the value of the coecient of static friction? Ans. (a) 15 N; (b) 0.17 If FW 40 N in the equilibrium situation shown in Fig. 4-11, ®nd FT1 and FT2 . Ans. 58 N, 31 N

4.18

4.19

Fig. 4-11

4.20

Refer to the equilibrium situation shown in Fig. 4-11. The cords are strong enough to withstand a maximum Ans. 55 N tension of 80 N. What is the largest value of FW that they can support as shown? The object in Fig. 4-12 is in equilibrium and has a weight FW 80 N. Find FT1 , FT2 , FT3 , and FT4 . Give all answers to two signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 37 N, 88 N, 77 N, 0.14 kN

4.21

Fig. 4-12

CHAP. 4]

EQUILIBRIUM UNDER THE ACTION OF CONCURRENT FORCES

55

4.22

The pulleys shown in Fig. 4-13 have negligible weight and friction. What is the value of FW if the system is at equilibrium? Ans. 185 N

Fig. 4-13

4.23

In Fig. 4-14, the system is in equilibrium. (a) What is the maximum value that FW can have if the friction force on the 40-N block cannot exceed 12.0 N? (b) What is the coecient of static friction between the block and the tabletop? Ans. (a) 6.9 N; (b) 0.30

Fig. 4-14

4.24

The system in Fig. 4-14 is just on the verge of slipping. If FW 8:0 N, what is the coecient of static friction between the block and tabletop? Ans. 0.35

Chapter 5
Equilibrium of a Rigid Body Under Coplanar Forces
THE TORQUE (OR MOMENT) about an axis, due to a force, is a measure of the eectiveness of the force in producing rotation about that axis. It is de®ned in the following way: Torque t rF sin where r is the radial distance from the axis to the point of application of the force, and is the acute angle between the lines-of-action of ~ and ~, as shown in Fig. 5-1(a). Often this de®nition is written in r F terms of the lever arm of the force, which is the perpendicular distance from the axis to the line of the force, as shown in Fig. 5-1(b). Because the lever arm is simply r sin , the torque becomes t F(lever arm) The units of torque are newton-meters (NÁm). Plus and minus signs can be assigned to torques; for example, a torque that tends to cause counterclockwise rotation about the axis is positive, whereas one causing clockwise rotation is negative.

Fig. 5-1

THE TWO CONDITIONS FOR EQUILIBRIUM of a rigid object under the action of coplanar forces are (1) The ®rst or force condition: The vector sum of all forces acting on the body must be zero: Æ Fx 0 Æ Fy 0

where the plane of the coplanar forces is taken to be the xy-plane. (2) The second or torque condition: Take an axis perpendicular to the plane of the coplanar forces. Call the torques that tend to cause clockwise rotation about the axis negative, and counterclockwise torques positive; then the sum of all the torques acting on the object must be zero: Æt 0 56
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

57

THE CENTER OF GRAVITY of an object is the point at which the entire weight of the object may be considered concentrated; i.e., the line-of-action of the weight passes through the center of gravity. A single vertically upward directed force, equal in magnitude to the weight of the object and applied through its center of gravity, will keep the object in equilibrium. THE POSITION OF THE AXIS IS ARBITRARY: If the sum of the torques is zero about one axis for a body that obeys the force condition, it is zero about all other axes parallel to the ®rst. We can choose the axis in such a way that the line of an unknown force passes through the intersection of the axis and the plane of the forces. The angle between ~ and ~ is then zero; r F hence, that particular unknown force exerts zero torque and therefore does not appear in the torque equation.

Solved Problems
5.1 Find the torque about axis A in Fig. 5-2 due to each of the forces shown.

Fig. 5-2

We use t rF sin , recalling that clockwise torques are negative while counterclockwise torques are positive. The torques due to the three forces are For 10 N: For 25 N: For 20 N: t À0:80 m)(10 N)(sin 908 À8:0 NÁm t 0:80 m)(25 N)(sin 258 8:5 NÁm t Æ0:80 m)(20 N)(sin 08 0

The line of the 20-N force goes through the axis and so 08 for it. Or, put another way, because the line of the force passes through the axis, its lever arm is zero. Either way, the torque is zero for this (and any) force whose line passes through the axis.

5.2

A uniform beam of length L weighs 200 N and holds a 450-N object as shown in Fig. 5-3. Find the magnitudes of the forces exerted on the beam by the two supports at its ends. Assume the lengths are exact.
Rather than draw a separate free-body diagram, we show the forces on the object being considered (the beam) in Fig. 5-3. Because the beam is uniform, its center of gravity is at its geometric center. Thus the weight of the beam (200 N) is shown acting at the beam's center. The forces F1 and F2 are exerted on the beam by the supports. Because there are no x-directed forces acting on the beam, we have only two equations to write for this equilibrium situation: Æ Fy 0 and Æ t 0:

58

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

Fig. 5-3 4 Æ Fy 0 becomes F1 F2 À 200 N À 450 N 0

Before the torque equation is written, an axis must be chosen. We choose it at A, so that the unknown force F1 will pass through it and exert no torque. The torque equation is then Æ t ÀL=2200 Nsin 908 À 3L=4450 Nsin 908 LF2 sin 908 0 Dividing through the equation by L and solving for F2 , we ®nd that F2 438 N. To ®nd F1 we substitute the value of F2 in the force equation, obtaining F1 212 N.

5.3

A uniform, 100-N pipe is used as a lever, as shown in Fig. 5-4. Where must the fulcrum (the support point) be placed if a 500-N weight at one end is to balance a 200-N weight at the other end? What is the reaction force exerted by the support on the pipe?
The forces in question are shown in Fig. 5-4, where FR is the reaction force of the support on the pipe. We assume that the support point is at a distance x from one end. Let us take the axis to be at the support point. Then the torque equation, Æ t 0, becomes x200 Nsin 908 x À L=2100 Nsin 908 À L À x500 Nsin 908 0 This simpli®es to 800 Nx 550 NL and so x 0:69L. The support should be placed 0.69 of the way from the lighter-loaded end. To ®nd the load FR held by the support, we use 4 Æ Fy 0, which gives À200 N À 100 N À 500 N 0 from which FR 800 N:

Fig. 5-4

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

59

5.4

Where must a 0.80-kN object be hung on a uniform, horizontal, rigid 100-N pole so that a girl pushing up at one end supports one-third as much as a woman pushing up at the other end?
The situation is shown in Fig. 5-5. We represent the force exerted by the girl as F, and that by the woman as 3F. Take the axis point at the left end. Then the torque equation becomes Àx800 Nsin 908 À L=2100 Nsin 908 LFsin 908 0 A second equation we can write is Æ Fy 0, or 3F À 800 N À 100 N F 0 from which F 225 N. Substitution of this value in the torque equation gives 800 Nx 225 NL À 100 NL=2 from which x 0:22L. The load should be hung 0.22 of the way from the woman to the girl.

Fig. 5-5

Fig. 5-6

5.5

A uniform, 0.20-kN board of length L has two objects hanging from it: 300 N at exactly L=3 from one end, and 400 N at exactly 3L=4 from the same end. What single additional force acting on the board will cause the board to be in equilibrium?
The situation is shown in Fig. 5-6, where F is the force we wish to ®nd. For equilibrium, Æ Fy 0 and so F 400 N 200 N 300 N 900 N Because the board is to be in equilibrium, we are free to choose the axis anywhere. Choose it at point A. Then Æ t 0 gives xFsin 908 À 3L=4400 Nsin 908 À L=2200 Nsin 908 À L=3300 Nsin 908 0 Using F 900 N, we ®nd that x 0:56L. The required force is 0.90 kN upward at 0:56L from the left end.

5.6

The right-angle rule (or square) shown in Fig. 5-7 hangs at rest from a peg as shown. It is made of a uniform metal sheet. One arm is L cm long, while the other is 2L cm long. Find (to two signi®cant ®gures) the angle at which it will hang.
If the rule is not too wide, we can approximate it as two thin rods of lengths L and 2L joined perpendicularly at A. Let g be the weight of each centimeter of rule. Then the forces acting on the rule are as indicated in Fig. 5-7, where FR is the upward reaction force of the peg.

60

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

Fig. 5-7

Let us write the torque equation using point A as the axis. Because t rF sin and because the torque about A due to FR is zero, the torque equation becomes L=2gLsin 908 À À L2gLsin 0 Recall that sin 908 À cos . After making this substitution and dividing by 2gL2 cos , we ®nd that sin 1 tan cos 4 which yields 148:

5.7

Consider the situation shown in Fig. 5-8(a). The uniform 0.60-kN beam is hinged at P. Find the tension in the tie rope and the components of the reaction force exerted by the hinge on the beam. Give your answers to two signi®cant ®gures.
The reaction forces acting on the beam are shown in Fig. 5-8(b), where the force exerted by the hinge is represented by its components, FRH and FRV . The torque equation about P as axis is 3L=4Tsin 408 À L800 Nsin 908 À L=2600 Nsin 908 0

Fig. 5-8

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

61

(We take the axis at P because then FRH and FRV do not appear in the torque equation.) Solution of this equation yields FT 2280 N or to two signi®cant ®gures FT 2:3 kN. To ®nd FRH and FRV we write
3 Æ Fx 0

or or

À FT cos 408 FRH 0 FT sin 408 FRV À 600 À 800 0

4 Æ Fy 0

Since we know FT , these equations give FRH 1750 N or 1.8 kN and FRV 65:6 N or 66 N.

5.8

A uniform, 0.40-kN boom is supported as shown in Fig. 5-9(a). Find the tension in the tie rope and the force exerted on the boom by the pin at P. then The forces acting on the boom are shown in Fig. 5-9(b). Take the pin as axis. The torque equation is 3L=4FT sin 508 À L=2400 Nsin 408 À L2000 Nsin 408 0 from which FT 2460 N or 2.5 kN. We now write:
3 Æ Fx 0

or

FRH À FT 0

and so FRH 2:5 kN. Also Æ Fy 0 or FRV À 2000 N À 400 N 0 and so FRV 2:4 kN. FRV and FRH are the components of the reaction force at the pin. The magnitude of this force is q 24002 24602 3:4 kN The tangent of the angle it makes with the horizontal is tan 2400=2460, and so 448:

Fig. 5-9

5.9

As shown in Fig. 5-10, hinges A and B hold a uniform, 400-N door in place. If the upper hinge happens to support the entire weight of the door, ®nd the forces exerted on the door at both hinges. The width of the door is exactly h=2, where h is the distance between the hinges.

62

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

Fig. 5-10

The forces acting on the door are shown in Fig. 5-10. Only a horizonal force acts at B, because the upper hinge is assumed to support the door's weight. Let us take torques about point A as axis: Æt 0 becomes hFsin 90:08 À h=4400 Nsin 90:08 0 or or F À FRH 0 FRV À 400 N 0 from which F 100 N. We also have
3 Æ Fx 0

4 Æ Fy 0

We ®nd from these that FRH 100 N and FRV 400 N. For the resultant reaction force FR on the hinge at A, we have q FR 4002 1002 412 N
F The tangent of the angle that ~R makes with the negative x-direction is FRV =FRH and so the angle is

arctan 4:00 76:08

5.10

A ladder leans against a smooth wall, as shown in Fig. 5-11. (By a ``smooth'' wall, we mean that the wall exerts on the ladder only a force that is perpendicular to the wall. There is no friction force.) The ladder weighs 200 N and its center of gravity is 0:40L from the base, where L is the ladder's length. (a) How large a friction force must exist at the base of the ladder if it is not to slip? (b) What is the necessary coecient of static friction?
(a) We wish to ®nd the friction force Ff . Notice that no friction force exists at the top of the ladder. Taking torques about point A gives the torque equation Æ tA À0:40L200 Nsin 408 LFN2 sin 508 0 Solving gives FN2 67:1 N. We can also write Æ Fx 0 Æ Fy 0 and so Ff 67 N and FN1 0:20 kN. or or Ff À FN2 0 FN1 À 200 0

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

63

Fig. 5-11 Ff 67:1 0:34 200 FN1

b

s

5.11

For the situation shown in Fig. 5-12(a), ®nd FT1 , FT2 , and FT3 . The boom is uniform and weighs 800 N.
Let us ®rst apply the force condition to point A. The appropriate free-body diagram is shown in Fig. 5-12(b). We then have FT2 cos 50:08 À 2000 N 0 and FT1 À FT 2 sin 50:08 0

From the ®rst of these we ®nd FT2 3:11 kN; then the second equation gives FT1 2:38 kN. Let us now isolate the boom and apply the equilibrium conditions to it. The appropriate free-body diagram is shown in Fig. 5-12(c). The torque equation, for torques taken about point C, is Æ tc LFT3 sin 20:08 À L3110 Nsin 90:08 À L=2800 Nsin 40:08 0 Solving for FT3 , we ®nd it to be 9.84 kN. If it were required, we could ®nd FRH and FRV by using the x- and y-force equations.

Fig. 5-12

64

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

Supplementary Problems
5.12 As shown in Fig. 5-13, two people sit in a car that weighs 8000 N. The person in front weighs 700 N, while the one in the back weighs 900 N. Call L the distance between the front and back wheels. The car's center of gravity is a distance 0.400L behind the front wheels. How much force does each front wheel and each back wheel support if the people are seated along the centerline of the car? Ans. 2.09 kN, 2.71 kN

Fig. 5-13

5.13

Two people, at the ends of a uniform beam that weighs 400 N, hold the beam at an angle of 25:08 to the horizontal. How large a vertical force must each person furnish to the beam? Ans. 200 N Repeat Problem 5.13 if a 140-N child sits on the beam at a point one-fourth of the way along the beam from its lower end. Ans. 235 N, 305 N As shown in Fig. 5-14, the uniform, 1600-N beam is hinged at one end and held by a tie rope at the other. Ans. FT 0:67 kN, Determine the tension FT in the rope and the force components at the hinge. FRH 0:67 kN, FRV 1:6 kN

5.14

5.15

Fig. 5-14

Fig. 5-15

5.16

The uniform beam shown in Fig. 5-15 weighs 500 N and supports a 700-N load. Find the tension in the tie rope and the force of the hinge on the beam. Ans. 2.9 kN, 2.0 kN at 358 below the horizontal

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

65

5.17

The arm shown in Fig. 5-16 supports a 4.0-kg sphere. The mass of the hand and forearm together is 3.0 kg and its weight acts at a point 15 cm from the elbow. Determine the force exerted by the biceps muscle. Ans. 0.13 kN

Fig. 5-16

5.18

The mobile shown in Fig. 5-17 hangs at equilibrium. It consists of objects held by vertical strings. Object 3 weighs 1.40 N, while each of the identical uniform horizontal bars weighs 0.50 N. Find (a) the weights of objects 1 and 2, and (b) the tension in the upper string. Ans. (a) 1.5 N, 1.4 N; (b) 5.3 N

Fig. 5-17 5.19 The hinges of a uniform door weighing 200 N are 2.5 m apart. One hinge is a distance d from the top of the door, while the other is a distance d from the bottom. The door is 1.0 m wide. The weight of the door is Ans. The supported by the lower hinge. Determine the forces exerted by the hinges on the door. horizontal force at the upper hinge is 40 N. The force at the lower hinge is 0.20 kN at 798 above the horizontal.

66

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

5.20

The uniform bar shown in Fig. 5-18 weighs 40 N and is subjected to the forces shown. Find the magnitude, location, and direction of the force needed to keep the bar in equilibrium. Ans. 0.11 kN, 0:68L from right end, at 498

Fig. 5-18

Fig. 5-19

5.21

The uniform, 120-N board shown in Fig. 5-19 is supported by two ropes as shown. A 0.40-kN weight is suspended one-quarter of the way from the left end. Find FT1 , FT2 , and the angle made by the left rope. Ans. 0.19 kN, 0.37 kN, 148 The foot of a ladder rests against a wall and its top is held by a tie rope, as shown in Fig. 5-20. The ladder weighs 100 N, and its center of gravity is 0.40 of its length from the foot. A 150-N child hangs from a rung that is 0.20 of the length from the top. Determine the tension in the tie rope and the components of the force on the foot of the ladder. Ans. FT 0:12 kN, FRH 0:12 kN, FRV 0:25 kN

5.22

Fig. 5-20

Fig. 5-21

5.23

A truss is made by hinging two uniform, 150-N rafters as shown in Fig. 5-21. They rest on an essentially frictionless ¯oor and are held together by a tie rope. A 500-N load is held at their apex. Find the tension in the tie rope. Ans. 0.28 kN

CHAP. 5]

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

67

5.24

A 900-N lawn roller is to be pulled over a 5.0-cm high curb as shown in Fig. 5-22. The radius of the roller is 25 cm. What minimum pulling force is needed if the angle made by the handle is (a) 08 and (b) 308? (Hint: Find the force needed to keep the roller balanced against the edge of the curb, just clear of the ground.) Ans. (a) 0.68 kN; (b) 0.55 kN

Fig. 5-22

Fig. 5-23

5.25

In Fig. 5-23, the uniform beam weighs 500 N. If the tie rope can support 1800 N, what is the maximum value Ans. 0.93 kN the load FW can have? The beam in Fig. 5-24 has negligible weight. If the system hangs in equilibrium when FW1 500 N, what is the value of FW2 ? Ans. 0.64 kN

5.26

Fig. 5-24

5.27

Repeat Problem 5.26, but now ®nd FW1 if FW2 is 500 N. The beam weighs 300 N and is uniform. Ans. 0.56 kN An object is subjected to the forces shown in Fig. 5-25. What single force F applied at a point on the x-axis will balance these forces? (First ®nd its components, and then ®nd the force.) Where on the x-axis should the force be applied? Ans. Fx 232 N, Fy À338 N; F 410 N at À55:58; at x 2:14 m

5.28

68

EQUILIBRIUM OF A RIGID BODY UNDER COPLANAR FORCES

[CHAP. 5

Fig. 5-25

5.29

The solid uniform disk of radius b shown in Fig. 5-26 can turn freely on an axle through its center. A hole of diameter D is drilled through the disk; its center is a distance r from the axle. The weight of the material drilled out is FWh . Find the weight FW of an object hung from a string wound on the disk that will hold the disk at equilibrium in the position shown. Ans. FW FWh r=b cos

Fig. 5-26

Chapter 6
Work, Energy, and Power
THE WORK done by a force is de®ned as the product of that force times the parallel distance over which it acts. Consider the simple case of straight-line motion shown in Fig. 6-1, where a force ~ acts on a body that simultaneously undergoes a vector displacement ~. The component of F s ~ in the direction of ~ is F cos . The work W done by the force ~ is de®ned to be the compoF s F nent of ~ in the direction of the displacement, multiplied by the displacement: F W F cos s Fs cos Notice that is the angle between the force and displacement vectors. Work is a scalar quantity. F s F s If ~ and ~ are in the same direction, cos cos 08 1 and W Fs. But, if ~ and ~ are in opposite directions, then cos cos 1808 À1 and W ÀFs; the work is negative. Forces such as friction often slow the motion of an object and are then opposite in direction to the displacement. Such forces usually do negative work. Inasmuch as the friction force opposes the motion of an object the work done in overcoming friction (along any path, curved or straight) equals the product of Ff and the path-length traveled. Thus, if an object is dragged against friction, back to the point where the journey started, work is done even if the net displacement is zero. Work is the transfer of energy from one entity to another by way of the action of a force applied over a distance. The point of application of the force must move if work is to be done. THE UNIT OF WORK in the SI is the newton-meter, called the joule (J). One joule is the work done by a force of 1 N when it displaces an object 1 m in the direction of the force. Other units sometimes used for work are the erg, where 1 erg 10À7 J, and the foot-pound (ftÁlb), where 1 ftÁlb 1:355 J. ENERGY is a measure of the change imparted to a system. It is given to an object when a force does work on the object. The amount of energy transferred to the object equals the work done. Further, when an object does work, it loses an amount of energy equal to the work it does. Energy and work have the same units, joules. Energy, like work, is a scalar quantity. An object that is capable of doing work possesses energy. KINETIC ENERGY (KE) is the energy possessed by an object because it is in motion. If an object of mass m is moving with a speed v, it has translational KE given by KE 1 mv2 2 When m is in kg and v is in m/s, the units of KE are joules. GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL ENERGY (PEG ) is the energy possessed by an object because of the gravitational interaction. In falling through a vertical distance h, a mass m can do work in the amount mgh. We de®ne the PEG of an object relative to an arbitrary zero level, often the Earth's surface. If the object is at a height h above the zero (or reference) level, its PEG mgh where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Notice that mg is the weight of the object. The units of PEG are joules when m is in kg, g is in m/s2 , and h is in m. 69
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

70

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

[CHAP. 6

THE WORK-ENERGY THEOREM: When work is done on a point mass or a rigid body, and there is no change in PE, the energy imparted can only appear as KE. Insofar as a body is not totally rigid, however, energy can be transferred to its parts and the work done on it will not precisely equal its change in KE. CONSERVATION OF ENERGY: Energy can neither be created nor destroyed, but only transformed from one kind to another. (Mass can be regarded as one form of energy. Ordinarily, the conversion of mass into energy, and vice versa, predicted by the Special Theory of Relativity can be ignored. This subject is treated in Chapter 41.) POWER is the time rate of doing work: Average power work done by a force force Â speed time taken to do this work

where the speed is measured in the direction of the force applied to the object. More generally, power is the rate of transfer of energy. In the SI, the unit of power is the watt (W), and 1 W 1 J=s. Another unit of power often used is the horsepower: 1 hp 746 W: THE KILOWATT-HOUR is a unit of energy. If a force is doing work at a rate of 1 kilowattt (which is 1000 J/s), then in 1 hour it will do 1 kWÁh of work: 1 kWÁh 3:6 Â 106 J 3:6 MJ

Solved Problems
6.1 In Fig. 6-1, assume that the object is being pulled along the ground by a 75-N force directed 288 above the horizontal. How much work does the force do in pulling the object 8.0 m?

Fig. 6-1

The work done is equal to the product of the displacement, 8.0 m, and the component of the force that is parallel to the displacement, (75 N)(cos 288. Thus, W 75 Ncos 2888:0 m 0:53 kJ

CHAP. 6]

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

71

6.2

A block moves up a 308 incline under the action of certain forces, three of which are shown in Fig. 6-2. ~1 is horizontal and of magnitude 40 N. ~2 is normal to the plane and of magnitude F F 20 N. ~3 is parallel to the plane and of magnitude 30 N. Determine the work done by each force F as the block (and point of application of each force) moves 80 cm up the incline.

Fig. 6-2 The component of ~1 along the direction of the displacement is F F1 cos 308 40 N0:866 34:6 N
F Hence the work done by ~1 is (34.6 N)(0.80 m) 28 J. (Notice that the distance must be expressed in meters.) Because it has no component in the direction of the displacement, ~2 does no work. F The component of ~3 in the direction of the displacement is 30 N. Hence the work done by ~3 is F F (30 N)(0.80 m) 24 J.

6.3

A 300-g object slides 80 cm along a horizontal tabletop. How much work is done in overcoming friction between the object and the table if the coecient of kinetic friction is 0.20?
We ®rst ®nd the friction force. Since the normal force equals the weight of the object, Ff k FN 0:200:300 kg9:81 m=s2 0:588 N The work done overcoming friction is Ff s cos : Because the friction force is opposite in direction to the displacement, 1808. Therefore, Work Ff s cos 1808 0:588 N0:80 mÀ1 À0:47 J The work is negative because the friction force slows the object; it decreases the object's kinetic energy.

6.4

How much work is done against gravity in lifting a 3.0-kg object through a vertical distance of 40 cm?
An external force is needed to lift an object. If the object is lifted at constant speed, the lifting force must equal the weight of the object. The work done by the lifting force is what we refer to as work done against gravity. Because the lifting force is mg, where m is the mass of the object, we have Work mghcos 3:0 kg Â 9:81 N0:40 m1 12 J In general, the work done against gravity in lifting an object of mass m through a vertical distance h is mgh.

6.5

How much work is done on an object by the force that supports it as the object is lowered through a vertical distance h? How much work does the gravitational force on it do in this same process?

72

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

[CHAP. 6

The supporting force is mg, where m is the mass of the object. It is directed upward while the displacement is downward. Hence the work it does is Fs cos mghcos 1808 Àmgh The force of gravity acting on the object is also mg, but it is directed downward in the same direction as the displacement. The work done on the object by the force of gravity is therefore Fs cos mghcos 08 mgh

6.6

A ladder 3.0 m long and weighing 200 N has its center of gravity 120 cm from the bottom. At its top end is a 50-N weight. Compute the work required to raise the ladder from a horizontal position on the ground to a vertical position.
The work done (against gravity) consists of two parts, the work to raise the center of gravity 1.20 m and the work to raise the weight at the end through 3.0 m. Therefore Work done 200 N1:20 m 50 N3:0 m 0:39 kJ

6.7

Compute the work done against gravity by a pump that discharges 600 liters of fuel oil into a tank 20 m above the pump's intake. One cubic centimeter of fuel oil has a mass of 0.82 g. One liter is 1000 cm3 :
The mass lifted is 3 cm3 g 600 liters 1000 0:82 492 000 g 492 kg 3 liter cm Work mgh 492 kg Â 9:81 m=s2 20 m 96 kJ 2

The lifting work is then

6.8

A 2.0-kg mass falls 400 cm. (a) How much work was done on it by the gravitational force? (b) How much PEG did it lose?
Gravity pulls with a force mg on the object, and the displacement is 4 m in the direction of the force. The work done by gravity is therefore mg4:00 m 2:0 kg Â 9:81 N4:00 m 78 J The change in PEG of the object is mghf À mghi , where hi and hf are the initial and ®nal heights of the object above the reference level. We then have Change in PEG mghf À mghi mghf À hi 2:0 kg Â 9:81 NÀ4:0 m À78 J The loss in PEG is 78 J.

6.9

A force of 1.50 N acts on a 0.20-kg cart so as to accelerate it along an air track. The track and force are horizontal and in line. How fast is the cart going after acceleration from rest through 30 cm, if friction is negligible?
The work done by the force causes, and is equal to, the increase in KE of the cart. Therefore, Work done KEend À KEstart Substituting gives 1:50 N0:30 m 1 0:20 kgv2 f 2 from which vf 2:1 m/s. or Fs cos 08 1 mv2 À 0 f 2

CHAP. 6]

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

73

6.10

A 0.50-kg block slides across a tabletop with an initial velocity of 20 cm/s and comes to rest in a distance of 70 cm. Find the average friction force that retarded its motion.
The KE of the block is decreased because of the slowing action of the friction force. That is, Change in KE of block = work done on block by friction force
2 1 2 mvf

À 1 mv2 Ff s cos i 2

Because the friction force on the block is opposite in direction to the displacement, cos À1. Using vf 0, vi 0:20 m/s, and s 0:70 m, we ®nd 0 À 1 0:50 kg0:20 m=s2 Ff 0:70 mÀ1 2 from which Ff 0:014 N.

6.11

A car going 15 m/s is brought to rest in a distance of 2.0 m as it strikes a pile of dirt. How large an average force is exerted by seatbelts on a 90-kg passenger as the car is stopped?
We assume the seatbelts stop the passenger in 2.0 m. The force F they apply acts through a distance of 2.0 m and decreases the passenger's KE to zero. So Change in KE of passenger work done by F 0 À 190 kg15 m=s2 F2:0 mÀ1 2 where cos À1 because the restraining force on the passenger is opposite in direction to the displacement. Solving, we ®nd F 5:1 kN.

6.12

A projectile is shot upward from the earth with a speed of 20 m/s. How high is it when its speed is 8.0 m/s? Ignore air friction.
Because the projectile's energy is conserved, we have Change in KE+change in PEG 0
2 1 2 mvf

À 1mv2 mghf À hi 0 i 2

We wish to ®nd hf À hi . After a little algebra, we obtain hf À hi À v2 À v2 8:0 m=s2 À 20 m=s2 f i À 17 m 2g 29:81 m=s2

6.13

In an Atwood machine (see Problem 3.23) the two masses are 800 g and 700 g. The system is released from rest. How fast is the 800-g mass moving after it has fallen 120 cm?
The 700-g mass rises 120 cm while the 800-g mass falls 120 cm, so the net change in PEG is Change in PEG 0:70 kg9:81 m=s2 1:20 m À 0:80 kg9:81 m=s2 1:20 m À1:18 J which is a loss in PEG. Because energy is conserved, the KE of the masses must increase by 1.18 J. Therefore, Change in KE 1:18 J 1 0:70 kgv2 À v2 1 0:80 kgv2 À v2 i i f f 2 2 The system started from rest, so vi 0. We solve the above equation for vf and ®nd vf 1:25 m/s.

6.14

Figure 6-3 shows a bead sliding on a wire. If friction forces are negligible and the bead has a speed of 200 cm/s at A, what will be its speed (a) at point B? (b) At point C?
We know the energy of the bead is conserved, so we can write Change in KE change in PEG 0

74

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

[CHAP. 6

Fig. 6-3
2 1 2 mvf

À 1 mv2 mghf À hi 0 i 2

(a) (b)

Here, vi 2:0 m/s, hi 0:80 m, and hf 0. Using these values, while noticing that m cancels out, gives vf 4:4 m/s. Here, vi 2:0 m/s, hi 0:80 m, and hf 0:50 m. Using these values gives vf 3:1 m/s.

6.15

Suppose the bead in Fig. 6-3 has a mass of 15 g and a speed of 2.0 m/s at A, and it stops as it reaches point C. The length of the wire from A to C is 250 cm. How large an average friction force opposed the motion of the bead?
When the bead moves from A to C, it experiences a change in its total energy: it loses both KE and PEG . This total energy change is equal to the work done on the bead by the friction force. Therefore, Change in PEG change in KE work done by friction force mghC À hA 1 mv2 À v2 Ff s cos C A 2 Notice that cos À1, vC 0, vA 2:0 m/s, hC À hA À0:30 m, s 2:50 m, and m 0:015 kg. Using these values, we ®nd that Ff 0:030 N.

6.16

A 1200-kg car is coasting down a 308 hill as shown in Fig. 6-4. At a time when the car's speed is 12 m/s, the driver applies the brakes. What constant force F (parallel to the road) must result if the car is to stop after traveling 100 m?

Fig. 6-4

The change in total energy of the car KE PEG is equal to the work done on it by the braking force F. This work is Fs cos 1808 because F retards the car's motion. We have
2 1 2 mvf

À v2 mghf À hi FsÀ1 i

CHAP. 6]

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

75

where

m 1200 kg vf 0 vi 12 m=s hf À hi 100 m sin 308 s 100 m

With these values, the equation yields F 6:7 kN.

6.17

A ball at the end of a 180-cm long string swings as a pendulum as shown in Fig. 6-5. The ball's speed is 400 cm/s as it passes through its lowest position. (a) To what height h above this position will it rise before stopping? (b) What angle does the pendulum then make to the vertical?
(a) The pull of the string on the ball is always perpendicular to the ball's motion, and therefore does no work on the ball. Consequently, the ball's total energy remains constant; it loses KE but gains a like amount of PEG . That is, Change in KE change in PEG 0
2 1 2mvf

À 1mv2 mgh 0 i 2

Since vf 0 and vi 4:00 m/s, we ®nd h 0:816 m as the height to which the ball rises. (b) From Fig. 6-5, cos which gives 56:98: LÀh 0:816 1À L 1:80

Fig. 6-5

Fig. 6-6

6.18

A 500-g block is shot up the incline in Fig. 6-6 with an initial speed of 200 cm/s. How far up the incline will it go if the coecient of friction between it and the incline is 0.150?
We ®rst ®nd the friction force on the block as Ff FN À mg cos 258 As the block slides up the incline a distance D, it rises a distance D sin 25:08. Because the change in energy of the block equals the work done on it by the friction force, we have Change in KE change in PEG Ff D cos 1808
2 1 2mvf

À v2 mgD sin 25:08 ÀFf D i

76

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

[CHAP. 6

We calculated Ff above, and we know vi 2:00 m/s and vf 0. Notice that the mass of the block cancels out in this case (but only because Ff is given in terms of it). Substitution gives D 0:365 m.

6.19

A 60 000-kg train is being pulled up a 1.0 percent grade (it rises 1.0 m for each horizontal 100 m) by a drawbar pull of 3.0 kN. The friction force opposing the motion of the train is 4.0 kN. The train's initial speed is 12 m/s. Through what horizontal distance s will the train move before its speed is reduced to 9.0 m/s?
The change in total energy of the train is due to the work of the friction force and the drawbar pull: Change in KE change in PEG Wdrawbar Wfriction
2 1 2 mvf

À v2 mg0:010s 3000 Ns1 4000 NsÀ1 i

from which s 275 m 0:28 km:

6.20

An advertisement claims that a certain 1200-kg car can accelerate from rest to a speed of 25 m/s in a time of 8.0 s. What average power must the motor produce to cause this acceleration? Ignore friction losses.
The work done in accelerating the car is given by Work done change in KE 1 mv2 À v2 f i 2 The time taken for this work is 8.0 s. Therefore,
2 work 1 1200 kg25 m=s 2 47 kW time 8:0 s Converting from watts to horsepower, we have 1 hp 63 hp Power 46 900 W 746 W

Power

6.21

A 0.25-hp motor is used to lift a load at the rate of 5.0 cm/s. How great a load can it lift at this constant speed?
We assume the power output of the motor to be 0.25 hp 186:5 W. In 1.0 s, the load mg is lifted a distance of 0.050 m. Therefore, Work done in 1:0 s (weight)(height change in 1:0 s mg0:050 m By de®nition, power work/time, so that mg0:050 m 1:0 s Using g 9:81 m/s2 , we ®nd that m 381 kg. The motor can lift a load of about 0:38 Â 103 kg at this speed. 186:5 W

6.22

Repeat Problem 6.20 if the data apply to a car going up a 208 incline.
Work must be done to lift the car as well as to accelerate it: Work done change in KE change in PEG 1 mv2 À v2 mghf À hi i f 2 where hf À hi s sin 208 and s is the total distance the car travels in the 8 s under consideration. Knowing vi 0, vf 25 m/s, and t 8:0 s, we have s vav t 1 vi vf t 100 m 2 Then Work done 1 1200 kg625 m2 =s2 1200 kg9:81 m=s2 100 msin 208 0:78 Â 103 kJ 2

CHAP. 6]

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

77

from which

Power

777 kJ 97 kW 0:13 Â 103 hp 8:0 s

6.23

In unloading grain from the hold of a ship, an elevator lifts the grain through a distance of 12 m. Grain is discharged at the top of the elevator at a rate of 2.0 kg each second, and the discharge speed of each grain particle is 3.0 m/s. Find the minimum-horsepower motor that can elevate grain in this way.
The power output of the motor is change in KE change in PEG 1 mv2 À v2 mgh f i 2 t time taken Ã m Â1 2 2 2 29:0 m =s 9:81 m=s 12 m t The mass transported per second, m=t, is 2.0 kg/s. Using this value gives the power as 0.24 kW. Power

Supplementary Problems
6.24 A force of 3.0 N acts through a distance of 12 m in the direction of the force. Find the work done. Ans. 36 J A 4.0-kg object is lifted 1.5 m. (a) How much work is done against the Earth's gravity? (b) Repeat if the object is lowered instead of lifted. Ans. (a) 59 J; (b) À59 J A uniform rectangular marble slab is 3.4 m long and 2.0 m wide. It has a mass of 180 kg. If it is originally lying on the ¯at ground, how much work is needed to stand it on end? Ans. 3.0 kJ How large a force is required to accelerate a 1300-kg car from rest to a speed of 20 m/s in a distance of 80 m? Ans. 3.3 kN A 1200-kg car going 30 m/s applies its brakes and skids to rest. If the friction force between the sliding tires and the pavement is 6000 N, how far does the car skid before coming to rest? Ans. 90 m A proton m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg) that has a speed of 5:0 Â 106 m/s passes through a metal ®lm of thickness 0.010 mm and emerges with a speed of 2:0 Â 106 m/s. How large an average force opposed its motion through the ®lm? Ans. 1:8 Â 10À9 N A 200-kg cart is pushed slowly up an incline. How much work does the pushing force do in moving the cart up to a platform 1.5 m above the starting point if friction is negligible? Ans. 2.9 kJ Repeat Problem 6.30 if the distance along the incline to the platform is 7.0 m and a friction force of 150 N opposes the motion. Ans. 4.0 kJ A 50 000-kg freight car is pulled 800 m up along a 1.20 percent grade at constant speed. (a) Find the work done against gravity by the drawbar pull. (b) If the friction force retarding the motion is 1500 N, ®nd the total work done. Ans. (a) 4.70 MJ; (b) 5.90 MJ A 60-kg woman walks up a ¯ight of stairs that connects two ¯oors 3.0 m apart. (a) How much lifting work is done on the woman? (b) How much lifting work is done by the woman? (c) By how much does the woman's PEG change? Ans. (a) 1.8 kJ; (b) 1.8 kJ; (c) 1.8 kJ

6.25

6.26

6.27

6.28

6.29

6.30

6.31

6.32

6.33

78

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

[CHAP. 6

6.34

A pump lifts water from a lake to a large tank 20 m above the lake. How much work against gravity does the pump do as it transfers 5.0 m3 of water to the tank? One cubic meter of water has a mass of 1000 kg. Ans. 9:8 Â 105 J Just before striking the ground, a 2.0-kg mass has 400 J of KE. If friction can be ignored, from what height was it dropped? Ans. 20.0 m A 0.50-kg ball falls past a window that is 1.50 m in vertical length. (a) How much did the KE of the ball increase as it fell past the window? (b) If its speed was 3.0 m/s at the top of the window, what was its speed at the bottom? Ans. (a) 7.4 J; (b) 6.2 m/s At sea level a nitrogen molecule in the air has an average translational KE of 6:2 Â 10À21 J. Its mass is 4:7 Â 10À26 kg. (a) If the molecule could shoot straight up without striking other air molecules, how high would it rise? (b) What is the molecule's initial speed? Ans. 14 km; (b) 0.51 km/s The coecient of sliding friction between a 900-kg car and the pavement is 0.80. If the car is moving at 25 m/s along level pavement when it begins to skid to a stop, how far will it go before stopping? Ans. 40 m Consider the simple pendulum shown in Fig. 6-7. (a) If it is released from point A, what will be the speed of Ans. (a) 3.8 m/s; the ball as it passes through point C? (b) What is the ball's speed at point B? (b) 3.4 m/s

6.35

6.36

6.37

6.38

6.39

Fig. 6-7

Fig. 6-8

6.40

A 1200-kg car coasts from rest down a driveway that is inclined 208 to the horizontal and is 15 m long. How fast is the car going at the end of the driveway if (a) friction is negligible and (b) a friction force of 3000 N opposes the motion? Ans. (a) 10 m/s; (b) 5.1 m/s

6.41

The driver of a 1200-kg car notices that the car slows from 20 m/s to 15 m/s as it coasts a distance of 130 m along level ground. How large a force opposes the motion? Ans. 0.81 kN

6.42

A 2000-kg elevator rises from rest in the basement to the fourth ¯oor, a distance of 25 m. As it passes the fourth ¯oor, its speed is 3.0 m/s. There is a constant frictional force of 500 N. Calculate the work done by the lifting mechanism. Ans. 0.51 MJ

6.43

Figure 6-8 shows a bead sliding on a wire. How large must height h1 be if the bead, starting at rest at A, is to have a speed of 200 cm/s at point B? Ignore friction. Ans. 20.4 cm

CHAP. 6]

WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER

79

6.44

In Fig. 6-8, h1 50:0 cm, h2 30:0 cm, and the length along the wire from A to C is 400 cm. A 3.00-g bead released at A coasts to point C and stops. How large an average friction force opposed its motion? Ans. 1.47 mN In Fig. 6-8, h1 200 cm, h2 150 cm, and at A the 3.00-g bead has a downward speed along the wire of 800 cm/s. (a) How fast is the bead moving as it passes point B if friction is negligible? (b) How much energy did the bead lose to friction work if it rises to a height of 20.0 cm above C after it leaves the wire? Ans. (a) 10.2 m/s; (b) 105 mJ Calculate the average horsepower required to raise a 150-kg drum to a height of 20 m in a time of 1.0 minute. Ans. 0.66 hp Compute the power output of a machine that lifts a 500-kg crate through a height of 20.0 m in a time of 60.0 s. Ans. 1.63 kW An engine expends 40.0 hp in propelling a car along a level track at 15.0 m/s. How large is the total retarding force acting on the car? Ans. 1.99 kN A 1000-kg auto travels up a 3.0 percent grade at 20 m/s. Find the horsepower required, neglecting friction. Ans. 7.9 hp A 900-kg car whose motor delivers a maximum power of 40.0 hp to its wheels can maintain a steady speed of 130 km/h on a horizontal roadway. How large is the friction force that impedes its motion at this speed? Ans. 826 N Water ¯ows from a reservoir at the rate of 3000 kg/min, to a turbine 120 m below. If the eciency of the turbine is 80 percent, compute the horsepower output of the turbine. Neglect friction in the pipe and the small KE of the water leaving the turbine. Ans. 63 hp Find the mass of the largest box that a 40-hp engine can pull along a level road at 15 m/s if the friction coecient between road and box is 0.15. Ans. 1:4 Â 103 kg A 1300-kg car is to accelerate from rest to a speed of 30.0 m/s in a time of 12.0 s as it climbs a 15:08 hill. Assuming uniform acceleration, what minimum horsepower is needed to accelerate the car in this way? Ans. 132 hp

6.45

6.46 6.47 6.48 6.49 6.50

6.51

6.52 6.53

Chapter 7
Simple Machines
A MACHINE is any device by which the magnitude, direction, or method of application of a force is changed so as to achieve some advantage. Examples of simple machines are the lever, inclined plane, pulley, crank and axle, and jackscrew.

THE PRINCIPLE OF WORK that applies to a continuously operating machine is as follows: Work input useful work output work to overcome friction In machines that operate for only a short time, some of the input work may be used to store energy within the machine. An internal spring might be stretched, or a movable pulley might be raised, for example.

MECHANICAL ADVANTAGE:

The actual mechanical advantage (AMA) of a machine is force exerted by machine on load force used to operate machine distance moved by input force distance moved by load

AMA force ratio

The ideal mechanical advantage (IMA) of a machine is IMA distance ratio

Because friction is always present, the AMA is always less than the IMA. In general, both the AMA and IMA are greater than one.

THE EFFICIENCY of a machine is Efficiency work output power output work input power input

The eciency is also equal to the ratio AMA/IMA.

Solved Problems
7.1 In a particular hoist system, the load is lifted 10 cm for each 70 cm of movement of the rope that operates the device. What is the smallest input force that could possibly lift a 5.0-kN load?
The most advantageous situation possible is that in which all the input work is used to lift the load, i.e., in which friction and other loss mechanisms are negligible. In that case, Work input lifting work If the load is lifted a distance s, the lifting work is (5.0 kN)(s). The input force F, however, must work through a distance 7.0s. The above equation then becomes F7:0s 5:0 kNs which gives F 0:71 kN as the smallest possible force required.

80
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 7]

SIMPLE MACHINES

81

7.2

A hoisting machine lifts a 3000-kg load a height of 8.00 m in a time of 20.0 s. The power supplied to the engine is 18.0 hp. Compute (a) the work output, (b) the power output and power input, and (c) the eciency of the engine and hoist system.
(a) b Work output (lifting force) Â (height) 3000 Â 9:81 N8:00 m 235 kJ Power output work output 235 kJ 11:8 kW time taken 20:0 s 0:746 kW Power input 18:0 hp 13:4 kW 1 hp

c or

power output 11:8 kW 0:881 88:17 power input 13:4 kW work output 235 kJ 0:877 87:77 Efficiency work input 13:4 kJ=s20:0 s Efficiency

The eciency is 88%; the dierences arise from the rounding o process.

7.3

What power in kW is supplied to a 12.0-hp motor having an eciency of 90.0 percent when it is delivering its full rated output?
From the de®nition of eciency, Power input power output 12:0 hp0:746 kW=hp 9:95 kW efficiency 0:900

7.4

For the three levers shown in Fig. 7-1, determine the vertical forces F1 , F2 , and F3 required to support the load FW 90 N. Neglect the weights of the levers. Also ®nd the IMA, AMA, and eciency for each system.

Fig. 7-1

In each case, we take torques about the fulcrum point as axis. If we assume that the lifting is occurring slowly at constant speed, then the systems are in equilibrium; the clockwise torques balance the counterclockwise torques. (Recall that torque rF sin :) (a) (b) (c) Clockwise torque counterclockwise torque 2:0 m90 N1 4:0 mF1 1 from which 1:0 m90 N1 3:0 mF2 1 2:0 m90 N1 5:0 mF3 sin 608 from which from which F1 45 N F2 30 N F3 42 N

To ®nd the IMA of the system in Fig. 7-1(a), we notice that the load moves only half as far as the input force, and so IMA distance ratio 2:0

82

SIMPLE MACHINES

[CHAP. 7

Similarly, in Fig. 7-1(b). IMA 3=1 3. In Fig. 7-1(c), however, the lever arm is 5:0 m sin 608 4:33 m and so the distance ratio is 4:33=2 2:16. To summarize,

Lever (a) IMA AMA E. 2.0 90 N 2:0 45 N 1.0

Lever (b) 3.0 90 N 3:0 30 N 1.0

Lever (c) 2.2 90 N 2:2 41:6 N 1.0

The eciencies are 1.0 because we have neglected friction at the fulcrums.

7.5

Determine the force F required to lift a 100-N load FW with each of the pulley systems shown in Fig. 7-2. Neglect friction and the weights of the pulleys.

Fig. 7-2 (a) Load FW is supported by two ropes; each rope exerts an upward pull of FT 1 FW . Because the rope is 2 continuous and the pulleys are frictionless, FT F. Then F FT 1 FW 1 100 N 50 N 2 2 (b) Here, too, the load is supported by the tensions in two ropes, FT and F, where FT F. Then FT F FW (c) or F 1 FW 50 N 2

Let FT1 and FT2 be tensions around pulleys A and B, respectively. Pulley A is in equilibrium, so FT1 FT1 À FW 0 Pulley B, too, is in equilibrium, so FT2 FT2 À FT1 0 But F FT2 and so F 1 FW 25 N. 4 or FT2 1 FT1 1 FW 2 4 or FT1 1 FW 2

CHAP. 7]

SIMPLE MACHINES

83

(d ) Four ropes, each with the same tension FT , support the load FW . Therefore, 4FT1 FW (e) and so F FT1 1 FW 25 N 4

We see at once F FT1 . Because the pulley on the left is in equilibrium, we have FT2 À FT1 À F 0 But FT1 F and so FT2 2F. The pulley on the right is also in equilibrium, and so FT1 FT2 FT1 À FW 0 Recalling that FT1 F and that FT2 2F gives 4F FW , so F 25 N.

7.6

Using the wheel and axle shown in Fig. 7-3, a 400-N load can be raised by a force of 50 N applied to the rim of the wheel. The radii of the wheel and axle are 85 cm and 6.0 cm, respectively. Determine the IMA, AMA, and eciency of the machine.
We know that in one turn of the wheel-axle system, a length of cord equal to the circumference of the wheel or axle will be wound or unwound. distance moved by F 2R 85 cm 14 distance moved by FW 2r 6:0 cm 400 N AMA force ratio 8:0 50 N AMA 8:0 0:56 567 Efficiency IMA 14:2 IMA

Fig. 7-3

Fig. 7-4

7.7

The inclined plane shown in Fig. 7-4 is 15 m long and rises 3.0 m. (a) What force F parallel to the plane is required to slide a 20-kg box up the plane if friction is neglected? (b) What is the IMA of the plane? (c) Find the AMA and eciency if a 64-N force is actually required.
(a) There are several ways to approach this. Let us consider energy. Since there is no friction, the work done by the pushing force, F(15 m), must equal the lifting work done, (20 kg)(9.81 m/s2 )(3.0 m). Equating these two expressions and solving for F gives F 39 N. IMA distance moved by F 15 m 5:0 distance FW is lifted 3:0 m

b

84

SIMPLE MACHINES

[CHAP. 7

c

AMA force ratio Efficiency Or, as a check, Efficiency

AMA 3:06 0:61 617 IMA 5:0

FW 196 N 3:06 3:1 F 64 N

work output FW 3:0 m 0:61 617 work input F15 m

7.8

As shown in Fig. 7-5, a jackscrew has a lever arm of 40 cm and a pitch of 5.0 mm. If the eciency is 30 percent, what horizontal force F applied perpendicularly at the end of the lever arm is required to lift a load FW of 270 kg?

Fig. 7-5

When the jack handle is moved around one complete circle, the input force moves a distance 2r 20:40 m while the load is lifted a distance of 0.005 0 m. The IMA is therefore IMA distance ratio Since eciency = AMA/IMA, we have AMA (eciency)(IMA) 0:30502 0:15 Â 103 But AMA (load lifted)/(input force) and so F load lifted 270 kg9:81 m=s2 18 N AMA 151 20:40 m 0:50 Â 103 0:005 0 m

7.9

A dierential pulley (chain hoist) is shown in Fig. 7-6. Two toothed pulleys of radii r 10 cm and R 11 cm are fastened together and turn on the same axle. A continuous chain passes over the smaller (10 cm) pulley, then around the movable pulley at the bottom, and ®nally around the 11 cm pulley. The operator exerts a downward force F on the chain to lift the load FW . (a) Determine the IMA. (b) What is the eciency of the machine if an applied force of 50 N is required to lift a load of 700 N?

CHAP. 7]

SIMPLE MACHINES

85

Fig. 7-6

(a)

Suppose that the force F moves down a distance sucient to cause the upper rigid system of pulleys to turn one revolution. Then the smaller upper pulley unwinds a length of chain equal to its circumference, 2r, while the larger upper pulley winds a length 2R. As a result, the chain supporting the lower pulley is shortened by a length 2R À 2r. The load FW is lifted half this distance, or
1 2 2R

À 2r R À r

when the input force moves a distance 2R. Therefore, IMA (b) From the data, AMA and Efficiency AMA 14 0:64 647 IMA 22 load lifted 700 N 14 input force 50 N distance moved by F 2R 2R 22 cm 22 distance moved by FW R À r R À r 1:0 cm

Supplementary Problems
7.10 A motor furnishes 120 hp to a device that lifts a 5000-kg load to a height of 13.0 m in a time of 20 s. Find the eciency of the machine. Ans. 36% Refer back to Fig. 7-2(d ). If a force of 200 N is required to lift a 50-kg load, ®nd the IMA, AMA, and eciency for the system. Ans. 4, 2.5, 61%

7.11

86

SIMPLE MACHINES

[CHAP. 7

7.12

In Fig. 7-7, the 300-N load is balanced by a force F in both systems. Assuming eciencies of 100 percent, how large is F in each system? Assume all ropes to be vertical. Ans. (a) 100 N; (b) 75.0 N

Fig. 7-7

7.13

With a certain machine, the applied force moves 3.3 m to raise a load 8.0 cm. Find the (a) IMA and (b) AMA if the eciency is 60 percent. What load can be lifted by an applied force of 50 N if the eciency is (c) 100 percent and (d ) 60 percent? Ans. (a) 41; (b) 25; (c) 2.1 kN; (d ) 1.2 kN With a wheel and axle, a force of 80 N applied to the rim of the wheel can lift a load of 640 N. The diameters of the wheel and axle are 36 cm and 4.0 cm, respectively. Determine the AMA, IMA, and eciency of the machine. Ans. 8.0, 9.0, 89% A certain hydraulic jack in a gas station lifts a 900-kg car a distance of 0.25 cm when a force of 150 N pushes a piston through a distance of 20 cm. Find the IMA, AMA, and eciency. Ans. 80, 59, 74% The screw of a certain press has a pitch of 0.20 cm. The diameter of the wheel to which a tangential turning force F is applied is 55 cm. If the eciency is 40 percent, how large must F be to produce a force of 12 kN in the press? Ans. 35 N The diameters of the two upper pulleys of a chain hoist (Fig. 7-6) are 18 cm and 16 cm. If the eciency of the hoist is 45 percent, what force is required to lift a 400-kg crate? Ans. 0.48 kN

7.14

7.15 7.16

7.17

Chapter 8
Impulse and Momentum
THE LINEAR MOMENTUM ~ of a body is the product of its mass m and velocity (~: p v Linear momentum (mass of body) (velocity of body) ~ m~ p v Momentum is a vector quantity whose direction is that of the velocity. The units of momentum are kgÁm/s in the SI.

F AN IMPULSE is the product of a force ~ and the time interval Át over which the force acts:

Impulse (force) (length of time the force acts) Impulse is a vector quantity whose direction is that of the force. Its units are NÁ s in the SI.

AN IMPULSE CAUSES A CHANGE IN MOMENTUM: The change of momentum produced by an impulse is equal to the impulse in both magnitude and direction. Thus, if a constant force ~ acting for a time Át on a body of mass m changes its velocity from an initial value ~i to a F v ®nal value ~f , then v Impulse change in momentum ~ Át m~f À~i F v v Newton's Second Law, as he gave it, is ~ Á~=Át from which it follows that ~ Át Á~. Moreover, F p F p ~ Át Ám~ and if m is constant ~ Át m~f À~i : F v F v v

CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM: If the net external force acting on a system of objects is zero, the vector sum of the momenta of the objects will remain constant.

IN COLLISIONS AND EXPLOSIONS, the vector sum of the momenta just before the event equals the vector sum of the momenta just after the event. The vector sum of the momenta of the objects involved does not change during the collision or explosion. Thus, when two bodies of masses m1 and m2 collide, Total momentum before impact total momentum after impact m1~1 m2~2 m1~1 m2~2 u u v v where ~1 and ~2 are the velocities before impact, and ~1 and ~2 are the velocities after. In one dimension, u u v v in component form, m1 u1x m2 u2x m1 v1x m2 v2x and similarly for the y- and z-components. Remember that vector quantities are always boldfaced and velocity is a vector. On the other hand, u1x , u2x , v1x , and v2x are the scalar values of the velocities (they can be positive or negative). A positive direction is initally selected and vectors pointing opposite to this have negative numerical scalar values. 87
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

88

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

A PERFECTLY ELASTIC COLLISION is one in which the sum of the translational KEs of the objects is not changed during the collision. In the case of two bodies,
2 1 2 m 1 u1

1 m2 u2 1 m1 v2 1 m2 v2 2 1 2 2 2 2

COEFFICIENT OF RESTITUTION: For any collision between two bodies in which the bodies move only along a single straight line (e.g., the x-axis), a coecient of restitution e is de®ned. It is a pure number given by e v2x À v1x u1x À u2x

where u1x and u2x are values before impact, and v1x and v2x are values after impact. Notice that ju1x À u2x j is the relative speed of approach and jv2x À v1x j is the relative speed of recession. For a perfectly elastic collision, e 1. For inelastic collisions, e < 1. If the bodies stick together after collision, e 0:

THE CENTER OF MASS of an object (of mass m) is the single point that moves in the same way as a point mass (of mass m) would move when subjected to the same external forces that act on the object. That is, if the resultant force acting on an object (or system of objects) of mass m is ~, the acceleration of the center of mass of the object (or system) is given by F ~cm ~=m. a F If the object is considered to be composed of tiny masses m1 , m2 , m3 , and so on, at coordinates x1 ; y1 ; z1 , x2 ; y2 ; z2 , and so on, then the coordinates of the center of mass are given by xcm Æ xi m i Æ mi ycm Æ yi m i Æ mi zcm Æ zi mi Æ mi

where the sums extend over all masses composing the object. In a uniform gravitational ®eld, the center of mass and the center of gravity coincide.

Solved Problems
8.1 An 8.0-g bullet is ®red horizontally into a 9.00-kg cube of wood, which is at rest, and sticks in it. The cube is free to move and has a speed of 40 cm/s after impact. Find the initial velocity of the bullet.
Consider the system (cube bullet). The velocity, and hence the momentum, of the cube before impact is zero. Take the bullet's initial motion to be positive in the positive x-direction. The momentum conservation law tells us that Momentum of system before impact momentum of system after impact (momentum of bullet) (momentum of cube (momentum of bullet cube mB vBx mC vCx mB mC vx 0:008 0 kgvBx 0 9:008 kg0:40 m=s Solving gives vBx 0:45 km/s and so ~B 0:45 km/s Ð POSITIVE X-DIRECTION. v

CHAP. 8]

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

89

8.2

A 16-g mass is moving in the x-direction at 30 cm/s while a 4.0-g mass is moving in the Àx-direction at 50 cm/s. They collide head on and stick together. Find their velocity after the collision.
Let the 16-g mass be m1 and the 4.0-g mass be m2 . Take the x-direction to be positive. That means that the velocity of the 4.0-g mass has a scalar value of À50 cm/s. We apply the law of conservation of momentum to the system consisting of the two masses: Momentum before impact momentum after impact m1 v1x m2 v2x m1 m2 vx 0:016 kg0:30 m=s 0:004 0 kgÀ0:50 m=s 0:020 kgvx vx 0:14 m=s (Notice that the 4.0-g mass has negative momentum.) Hence, ~ 0:14 m/s Ð POSITIVE X-DIRECTION. v

v2x

8.3

A 2.0-kg brick is moving at a speed of 6.0 m/s. How large a force F is needed to stop the brick in a time of 7:0 Â 10À4 s?
Let us solve this by use of the impulse equation: Impulse on brick change in momentum of brick F Át mvf À mvi F7:0 Â 10À4 s 0 À 2:0 kg6:0 m=s from which F À1:7 Â 104 N. The minus sign indicates that the force opposes the motion.

8.4

A 15-g bullet moving at 300 m/s passes through a 2.0 cm thick sheet of foam plastic and emerges with a speed of 90 m/s. What average force impeded its motion through the plastic?
Use the impulse equation to ®nd the force F on the bullet as it takes a time Át to pass through the plastic. Taking the initial direction of motion to be positive, FÁt mvf À mvi We can ®nd Át by assuming uniform deceleration and using x vav t, where x 0:020 m and vav 1 vi vf 195 m/s. This gives Át 1:026 Â 10À4 s. Then 2 F1:026 Â 10À4 s 0:015 kg90 m=s À 0:015 kg300 m=s which gives F À3:1 Â 104 N as the average retarding force. How could this problem have been solved using F ma instead of the impulse equation? By using energy methods?

8.5

The nucleus of an atom has a mass of 3:80 Â 10À25 kg and is at rest. The nucleus is radioactive and suddenly ejects a particle of mass 6:6 Â 10À27 kg and speed 1:5 Â 107 m/s. Find the recoil speed of the nucleus that is left behind.
Take the direction of the ejected particle as positive. We are given, mni 3:80 Â 10À25 kg, mp 6:6 Â 10À27 kg, mnf mni À mp 3:73 Â 10À25 kg, and vpf 1:5 Â 107 m/s; ®nd the ®nal speed of the nucleus, vnf . The momentum of the system is conserved during the explosion. Momentum before momentum after 0 mnf vnf mp vpf 0 3:73 Â 10À25 kgvnf 6:6 Â 10À27 kg1:5 Â 107 m=s

90

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

Solving gives Àvnf 6:6 Â 10À27 kg1:5 Â 107 m=s 10:0 Â 10À20 2:7 Â 105 m=s 3:73 Â 10À25 3:73 Â 10À25 kg

The fact that this is negative tells us that the velocity vector of the nucleus points in the negative direction, opposite to the velocity of the particle.

8.6

A 0.25-kg ball moving in the x-direction at 13 m/s is hit by a bat. Its ®nal velocity is 19 m/s in the Àx-direction. The bat acts on the ball for 0.010 s. Find the average force F exerted on the ball by the bat.
We have vi 13 m/s and vf À19 m/s. Taking the initial direction of motion as positive, the impulse equation then gives F Át mvf À mvi F0:010 s 0:25 kgÀ19 m=s À 0:25 kg13 m=s from which F À0:80 kN.

8.7

Two girls (masses m1 and m2 ) are on roller skates and stand at rest, close to each other and face to face. Girl 1 pushes squarely against girl 2 and sends her moving backward. Assuming the girls move freely on their skates, with what speed does girl 1 move?
We take the two girls to comprise the system under consideration. The problem states that girl 2 moves ``backward,'' so let that be the negative direction; therefore the ``forward'' direction is positive. There is no resultant external force on the system (the push of one girl on the other is an internal force), and so momentum is conserved: Momentum before momentum after 0 m1 v1 m2 v2 from which v1 À m2 v m1 2

Girl 1 recoils with this speed. Notice that if m2 =m1 is very large, v1 is much larger than v2 . The velocity of girl 1, ~1 , points in the positive forward direction. The velocity of girl 2, ~2 , points in the negative backward v v direction. If we put numbers into the equation, v2 would have to be negative and v1 would come out positive.

8.8

As shown in Fig. 8-1, a 15-g bullet is ®red horizontally into a 3.000-kg block of wood suspended by a long cord. The bullet sticks in the block. Compute the speed of the bullet if the impact causes the block to swing 10 cm above its initial level.

Fig. 8-1

CHAP. 8]

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

91

Consider ®rst the collision of block and bullet. During the collision, momentum is conserved, so Momentum just before momentum just after 0:015 kgv 0 3:015 kgV where v is the initial speed of the bullet, and V is the speed of block and bullet just after collision. We have two unknowns in this equation. To ®nd another equation, we can use the fact that the block swings 10 cm high. If we let PEG 0 at the initial level of the block, energy conservation gives KE just after collision final PEG
1 2 3:015

kgV 2 3:015 kg9:81 m=s2 0:10 m

From this we ®nd V 1:40 m/s. Substituting this in the previous equation gives v 0:28 km/s for the speed of the bullet. Notice that we cannot write the conservation of energy equation 1 mv2 m Mgh, where 2 m 0:015 kg and M 3:000 kg because energy is lost (through friction) in the collision process.

8.9

Three masses are placed on the x-axis: 200 g at x 0, 500 g at x 30 cm, and 400 g at x 70 cm. Find their center of mass. xcm Æ xi mi 00:20 kg 0:30 m0:50 kg 0:70 m0:40 kg 0:39 m 0:20 0:50 0:40 kg Æ mi

The y- and z-coordinates of the mass center are zero.

8.10

A system consists of the following masses in the xy-plane: 4.0 kg at coordinates x 0, y 5:0 m), 7.0 kg at (3.0 m, 8.0 m), and 5.0 kg at À3:0 m, À6:0 m. Find the position of its center of mass. xcm ycm and zcm 0: Æ xi mi 04:0 kg 3:0 m7:0 kg À3:0 m5:0 kg 0:38 m Æ mi 4:0 7:0 5:0 kg Æ yi mi 5:0 m4:0 kg 8:0 m7:0 kg À6:0 m5:0 kg 2:9 m 16 kg Æ mi

8.11

Two identical railroad cars sit on a horizontal track, with a distance D between their centers. By means of a cable between them, a winch on one is used to pull the two together. (a) Describe their relative motion. (b) Repeat if the mass of one car is three times that of the other.
The forces due to the cable on the two cars are internal forces for the two-car system. The net external force on the system is zero, and so its center of mass does not move, even though each car moves toward the other. Taking the origin of coordinates at the mass center, we have xcm 0 Æ mi xi m1 x1 m2 x2 Æ mi m1 m2

where x1 and x2 are the positions of the centers of the two cars. (a) If m1 m2 , this equation becomes 0 x1 x2 2 or x1 Àx2

The two cars approach the center of mass, which is originally midway between the two cars (that is, D=2 from each), in such a way that their centers are always equidistant from it. (b) If m1 3m2 , then we have 0 3m2 x1 m2 x2 3x1 x2 3m2 m2 4

92

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

from which x1 Àx2 =3. The two cars approach each other in such a way that the mass center remains motionless and the heavier car is always one-third as far away from it as the lighter car. Originally, because jx1 j jx2 j D, we had x2 =3 x2 D. So m2 was originally a distance x2 3D=4 from the mass center, and m1 was a distance D=4 from it.

8.12

A pendulum consisting of a ball of mass m is released from the position shown in Fig. 8-2 and strikes a block of mass M. The block slides a distance D before stopping under the action of a steady friction force 0.20Mg. Find D if the ball rebounds to an angle of 208:

Fig. 8-2

The pendulum ball falls through a height L À L cos 378 0:201L and rebounds to a height L À L cos 208 0:060 3L. Because mghtop 1 mv2 bottom for the ball, its speed at the bottom is 2 p v 2gh: Although KE is not conserved in the collision, momentum is. Therefore, for the collision, Momentum just before momentum just after p p m 2g0:201L 0 Àm 2g0:060 3L MV where V is the velocity of the block just after the collision. (Notice the minus sign on the momentum of the rebounding ball.) Solving this equation, we ®nd V p m 0:981 gL M m 2 M

The block uses up its translational KE doing work against friction as it slides a distance D. Therefore,
2 1 2 MV

Ff D

or

1 2 M0:963gL

0:2MgD

from which D 2:4m=M2 L:

8.13

Two balls of equal mass approach the coordinate origin, one moving downward along the y-axis at 2.00 m/s and the other moving to the right along the Àx-axis at 3.00 m/s. After they collide, one ball moves out to the right along the x-axis at 1.20 m/s. Find the scalar x and y velocity components of the other ball.
Take up and to the right as positive. Momentum is conserved in the collision, so we can write

CHAP. 8]

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

93

(momentum before)x (momentum after)x or and or m3:00 m=s 0 m1:20 m=s mvx (momentum before)y (momentum after)y 0 mÀ2:00 m=s 0 mvy

(Why the minus sign?) Solving, we ®nd that vx 1:80 m/s and vy À2:00 m/s.

8.14

A 7500-kg truck traveling at 5.0 m/s east collides with a 1500-kg car moving at 20 m/s in a direction 308 south of west. After collision, the two vehicles remain tangled together. With what speed and in what direction does the wreckage begin to move?
The original momenta are shown in Fig. 8-3(a), while the ®nal momentum M~ is shown in Fig. 8-3(b). v Momentum must be conserved in both the north and east directions. Therefore, (momentum before)E (momentum after)E 7500 kg5:0 m=s À 1500 kg20 m=s cos 308 MvE where M 7500 kg 1500 kg 9000 kg, and vE is the scalar eastward component of the velocity of the wreckage. (momentum before)N (momentum after)N 7500 kg0 À 1500 kg20 m=s sin 308 MvN The ®rst equation gives vE 1:28 m/s, and the second gives vN À1:67 m/s. The resultant is q v 1:67 m=s2 1:28 m=s2 2:1 m=s The angle in Fig. 8-3(b) is arctan 1:67 538 1:28

Fig. 8-3

8.15

Two identical balls collide head-on. The initial velocity of one is 0.75 m/s Ð EAST, while that of the other is 0.43 m/s Ð WEST. If the collision is perfectly elastic, what is the ®nal velocity of each ball?
Since the collision is head-on, all motion takes place along a straight line. Take east as positive and call the mass of each ball m. Momentum is conserved in a collision, so we can write

94

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

Momentum before momentum after m0:75 m=s mÀ0:43 m=s mv1 mv2 where v1 and v2 are the ®nal values. This equation simpli®es to 0:32 m=s v1 v2 Because the collision is assumed to be perfectly elastic, KE is also conserved. Thus, KE before KE after
1 2 m0:75

1

m=s

2

1 2 m0:43

m=s2 1 mv2 1 mv2 1 2 2 2 2

This equation can be simpli®ed to 0:747 v2 v2 1 2 We can solve for v2 in (1) to get v2 0:32 À v1 and substitute this in (2). This yields 0:747 0:32 À v1 2 v2 1 from which 2v2 À 0:64v1 À 0:645 0 1 q 0:642 5:16

Using the quadratic formula, we ®nd that v1 0:64 Æ

0:16 Æ 0:59 m=s 4 from which v1 0:75 m/s or À0:43 m/s. Substitution back into Eq. (1) gives v2 À0:43 m/s or 0.75 m/s. Two choices for answers are available: v1 0:75 m=s; v2 À0:43 m=s and v1 À0:43 m=s; v2 0:75 m=s We must discard the ®rst choice because it implies that the balls continue on unchanged; that is to say, no collision occurred. The correct answer is therefore v1 À0:43 m/s and v2 0:75 m/s, which tells us that in a perfectly elastic, head-on collision between equal masses, the two bodies simply exchange velocities. Hence ~1 0:43 m/s Ð WEST and ~2 0:75 m/s Ð EAST. v v Alternative Method If we recall that e 1 for a perfectly elastic head-on collision, then v À v1 v2 À v1 becomes 1 e 2 u1 À u2 0:75 m=s À À0:43 m=s which gives v2 À v1 1:18 m=s Equations (1) and (3) determine v1 and v2 uniquely. 3

8.16

A 1.0-kg ball moving at 12 m/s collides head-on with a 2.0-kg ball moving in the opposite direction at 24 m/s. Determine the motion of each after impact if (a) e 2=3, (b) the balls stick together, and (c) the collision is perfectly elastic.
In all three cases momentum is conserved, and so we can write Momentum before momentum after 1:0 kg12 m=s 2:0 kgÀ24 m=s 1:0 kgv1 2:0 kgv2 which becomes À36 m=s v1 2v2 (a) When e 2=3, e v2 À v1 u1 À u2 becomes 2 v2 À v1 3 12 m=s À À24 m=s

CHAP. 8]

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

95

from which 24 m=s v2 À v1 . Combining this with the momentum equation found above gives v2 À4:0 m=s and v1 À28 m/s. (b) (c) In this case v1 v2 v and so the momentum equation becomes 3v À36 m=s Here e 1, so e v2 À v1 u1 À u2 becomes 1 v2 À v1 12 m=s À À24 m=s or v À12 m=s

from which v2 À v1 36 m/s. Adding this to the momentum equation gives v2 0. Using this value for v2 then gives v1 À36 m/s.

8.17

A ball is dropped from a height h above a tile ¯oor and rebounds to a height of 0:65h. Find the coecient of restitution between ball and ¯oor.
The initial and ®nal velocities of the ¯oor, u1 and v1 , are zero. Therefore, v À v1 v À 2 e 2 u1 À u2 u2 But we can write equations for the interchange of PEG and KE both before and after the bounce: and mg0:65h 1 mv2 2 2 p p Therefore, taking down as positive, we have u2 2gh and v2 À 1:30gh. Substitution gives p 1:30gh p e p 0:65 0:81 2gh mgh 1 mu2 2 2

8.18

The two balls shown in Fig. 8-4 collide and bounce o each other as shown. (a) What is the ®nal velocity of the 500-g ball if the 800-g ball has a speed of 15 cm/s after the collision? (b) Is the collision perfectly elastic?

Fig. 8-4

(a)

Take motion to the right as positive. From the law of conservation of momentum, (momentum before)x (momentum after)x 0:80 kg0:30 m=s 0:50 kgÀ0:5 m=s 0:80 kg0:15 m=s cos 308 0:50 kgvx from which vx À0:228 m/s. Taking motion upward as positive, (momentum before)y (momentum after)y 0 0:80 kgÀ0:15 m=s sin 308 0:50 kgvy

96

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

from which vy 0:120 m/s. Then q q v v2 v2 À0:228 m=s2 0:120 m=s2 0:26 m=s x y v and ~ 0:26 m/s Ð RIGHT.

Also, for the angle shown in Fig. 8-4, arctan b

0:120 288 0:228

Total KE before 1 0:80 kg0:30 m=s2 1 0:50 kg0:50 m=s2 0:099 J 2 2 Total KE after 1 0:80 kg0:15 m=s2 1 0:50 kg0:26 m=s2 0:026 J 2 2 Because KE is lost in the collision, it is not perfectly elastic.

8.19

What force is exerted on a stationary ¯at plate held perpendicular to a jet of water as shown in Fig. 8-5? The horizontal speed of the water is 80 cm/s, and 30 mL of the water hits the plate each second. Assume the water moves parallel to the plate after striking it. One milliliter (mL) of water has a mass of 1.00 g.

Fig. 8-5

The plate exerts an impulse on the water and changes its horizontal momentum. Taking the direction to the right as positive, (impulse)x change in x-directed momentum Fx Át mvx final À mvx initial Let us take t to be 1.00 s so that m will be the mass that strikes in 1.00 s, namely 30 g. Then the above equation becomes Fx 1:00 s 0:030 kg0 m=s À 0:030 kg0:80 m=s from which Fx À0:024 N. This is the force of the plate on the water. The law of action and reaction tells us that the jet exerts an equal but opposite force on the plate.

8.20

A rocket standing on its launch platform points straight upward. Its jet engines are activated and eject gas at a rate of 1500 kg/s. The molecules are expelled with a speed of 50 km/s. How much mass can the rocket initially have if it is slowly to rise because of the thrust of the engines?
Because the motion of the rocket itself is negligible in comparison to the speed of the expelled gas, we can assume the gas to be accelerated from rest to a speed of 50 km/s. The impulse required to provide this acceleration to a mass m of gas is

CHAP. 8]

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

97

F Át mvf À mvi m50 000 m=s À 0 m from which F 50 000 m=s Át But we are told that the mass ejected per second m=Át is 1500 kg/s, and so the force exerted on the expelled gas is F 50 000 m=s1500 kg=s 75 MN An equal but opposite reaction force acts on the rocket, and this is the upward thrust on the rocket. The engines can therefore support a weight of 75 MN, so the maximum mass the rocket could have is Mrocket weight 75 Â 106 N 7:7 Â 106 kg g 9:81 m=s2

Supplementary Problems
8.21 Typically, a tennis ball hit during a serve travels away at about 51 m/s. If the ball is at rest mid-air when struck, and it has a mass of 0.058 kg, what is the change in its momentum on leaving the racket? Ans. 3.0 kgÁm/s During a soccer game a ball (of mass 0.425 kg), which is initially at rest, is kicked by one of the players. The ball moves o at a speed of 26 m/s. Given that the impact lasted for 8.0 ms, what was the average force exerted on the ball? Ans. 1.4 kN A 40 000-kg freight car is coasting at a speed of 5.0 m/s along a straight track when it strikes a 30 000-kg stationary freight car and couples to it. What will be their combined speed after impact? Ans. 2.9 m/s An empty 15 000-kg coal car is coasting on a level track at 5.00 m/s. Suddenly 5000 kg of coal is dumped into it from directly above it. The coal initially has zero horizontal velocity. Find the ®nal speed of the car. Ans. 3.75 m/s. Sand drops at a rate of 2000 kg/min from the bottom of a hopper onto a belt conveyer moving horizontally at 250 m/min. Determine the force needed to drive the conveyer, neglecting friction. Ans. 139 N Two bodies of masses 8 kg and 4 kg move along the x-axis in opposite directions with velocities of 11 m/s Ð and 7 m/s Ð NEGATIVE X-DIRECTION, respectively. They collide and stick together. Find their velocity just after collision. Ans. 5 m/s Ð POSITIVE X-DIRECTION
POSITIVE X-DIRECTION

8.22

8.23

8.24

8.25

8.26

8.27

A 1200-kg gun mounted on wheels shoots an 8.00-kg projectile with a muzzle velocity of 600 m/s at an angle of 30:08 above the horizontal. Find the horizontal recoil speed of the gun. Ans. 3.46 m/s Three masses are placed on the y-axis: 2 kg at y 300 cm, 6 kg at y 150 cm, and 4 kg at y À75 cm. Find their center of mass. Ans. y 1 m Four masses are positioned in the xy-plane as follows: 300 g at x 0, y 2:0 m), 500 g at À2:0 m, À3:0 m), 700 g at (50 cm, 30 cm), and 900 g at À80 cm, 150 cm). Find their center of mass. Ans. x À0:57 m, y 0:28 m A ball of mass m sits at the coordinate origin when it explodes into two pieces that shoot along the x-axis in opposite directions. When one of the pieces (which has mass 0.270m) is at x 70 cm, where is the other piece? (Hint: What happens to the mass center?) Ans. at x À26 cm

8.28

8.29

8.30

98

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM

[CHAP. 8

8.31

A ball of mass m at rest at the coordinate origin explodes into three equal pieces. At a certain instant, one piece is on the x-axis at x 40 cm and another is at x 20 cm, y À60 cm. Where is the third piece at that instant? Ans. at x À60 cm, y 60 cm A 2.0-kg block of wood rests on a long tabletop. A 5.0-g bullet moving horizontally with a speed of 150 m/s is shot into the block and sticks in it. The block then slides 270 cm along the table and stops. (a) Find the speed of the block just after impact. (b) Find the friction force between block and table. Ans. (a) 0.37 m/s; (b) 0.052 N A 2.0-kg block of wood rests on a tabletop. A 7.0-g bullet is shot straight up through a hole in the table beneath the block. The bullet lodges in the block, and the block ¯ies 25 cm above the tabletop. How fast was the bullet going initially? Ans. 0.64 km/s A 6000-kg truck traveling north at 5.0 m/s collides with a 4000-kg truck moving west at 15 m/s. If the two trucks remain locked together after impact, with what speed and in what direction do they move immediately after the collision? Ans. 6.7 m/s at 278 north of west What average resisting force must act on a 3.0-kg mass to reduce its speed from 65 cm/s to 15 cm/s in 0.20 s? Ans. 7.5 N A 7.00-g bullet moving horizontally at 200 m/s strikes and passes through a 150-g tin can sitting on a post. Just after impact, the can has a horizontal speed of 180 cm/s. What was the bullet's speed after leaving the can? Ans. 161 m/s Two balls of equal mass, moving with speeds of 3 m/s, collide head-on. Find the speed of each after impact if (a) they stick together, (b) the collision is perfectly elastic, (c) the coecient of restitution is 1/3. Ans. (a) 0 m/s; (b) each rebounds at 3 m/s; (c) each rebounds at 1 m/s A 90-g ball moving at 100 cm/s collides head-on with a stationary 10-g ball. Determine the speed of each after impact if (a) they stick together, (b) the collision is perfectly elastic, (c) the coecient of restitution is 0.90. Ans. (a) 90 cm/s; (b) 80 cm/s, 1.8 m/s; (c) 81 cm/s, 1.7 m/s A ball is dropped onto a horizontal ¯oor. It reaches a height of 144 cm on the ®rst bounce, and 81 cm on the second bounce. Find (a) the coecient of restitution between the ball and ¯oor and (b) the height it attains Ans. (a) 0.75; (b) 46 cm on the third bounce. Two identical balls undergo a collision at the origin of coordinates. Before collision their scalar velocity components are ux 40 cm/s, uy 0) and (ux À30 cm/s, uy 20 cm/s). After collision, the ®rst ball is standing still. Find the scalar velocity components of the second ball. Ans. vx 10 cm/s, vy 20 cm/s Two identical balls traveling parallel to the x-axis have speeds of 30 cm/s and are oppositely directed. They collide perfectly elastically. After collision, one ball is moving at an angle of 308 above the x-axis. Find its speed and the velocity of the other ball. Ans. 30 cm/s, 30 cm/s at 308 below the Àx-axis (opposite to the ®rst ball) (a) What minimum thrust must the jet engines of a 2:0 Â 105 kg rocket have if the rocket is to be able to rise from the Earth when aimed straight upward? (b) If the engines eject fuel at the rate of 20 kg/s, how fast must the gaseous fuel be moving as it leaves the engines? Neglect the small change in the mass of the rocket due to the ejected fuel. Ans. (a) 20 Â 105 N; (b) 98 km/s

8.32

8.33

8.34

8.35 8.36

8.37

8.38

8.39

8.40

8.41

8.42

Chapter 9
Angular Motion in a Plane
ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT is usually expressed in radians, in degrees, or in revolutions: 1 rev 3608 2 rad or 1 rad 57:38

One radian is the angle subtended at the center of a circle by an arc equal in length to the radius of the circle. Thus an angle in radians is given in terms of the arc length l it subtends on a circle of radius r by l r

The radian measure of an angle is a dimensionless number. Radians, like degrees, are not a physical unit ± the radian is not expressable in meters, kilograms, or seconds. Nonetheless, we will use the abbreviation rad to remind us that we are working with radians.

THE ANGULAR SPEED ! of an object whose axis of rotation is ®xed is the rate at which its angular coordinate, the angular displacement , changes with time. If changes from i to f in a time t, then the average angular speed is !av f À i t

The units of !av are exclusively rad/s. Since each complete turn or cycle of a revolving system carries it through 2 rad ! 2f where f is the frequency in revolutions per second, rotations per second, or cycles per second. Accordingly, ! is also called the angular frequency. We can associate a direction with ! and thereby create a ~ vector quantity x. Thus if the ®ngers of the right hand curve around in the direction of rotation, the ~ thumb points along the axis of rotation in the direction of x, the angular velocity vector.

THE ANGULAR ACCELERATION of an object whose axis of rotation is ®xed is the rate at which its angular speed changes with time. If the angular speed changes uniformly from !i to !f in a time t, then the angular acceleration is constant and !f À !i t

The units of are typically rad/s2 , rev/min2 , and such. It is possible to associate a direction with Á!, and therefore with , thereby specifying the angular acceleration vector ~, but we will have no need to do so a here.

EQUATIONS FOR UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED ANGULAR MOTION are exactly analogous to those for uniformly accelerated linear motion. In the usual notation we have: 99
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

100

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

Linear vf vav s vav t vf vi at v2 f v2 i 2as
1 2 2 at 1 2vi

Angular !av 1!i !f 2 !av t !f !i t !2 !2 2 i f !i t 1t2 2

s vi t

Taken alone, the second of these equations is just the de®nition of average speed, so it is valid whether the acceleration is constant or not.

RELATIONS BETWEEN ANGULAR AND TANGENTIAL QUANTITIES: When a wheel of radius r rotates about an axis whose direction is ®xed, a point on the rim of the wheel is described in terms of the circumferential distance l it has moved, its tangential speed v, and its tangential acceleration aT . These quantities are related to the angular quantities , !, and , which describe the rotation of the wheel, through the relations l r v r! aT r

provided radian measure is used for , !, and . By simple reasoning, l can be shown to be the length of belt wound on the wheel or the distance the wheel would roll (without slipping) if free to do so. In such cases, v and aT refer to the tangential speed and acceleration of a point on the belt or of the center of the wheel.

CENTRIPETAL ACCELERATION aC : A point mass m moving with constant speed v around a circle of radius r is undergoing acceleration. Although the magnitude of its linear velocity is not changing, the direction of the velocity is continually changing. This change in velocity gives rise to an acceleration aC of the mass, directed toward the center of the circle. We call this acceleration the centripetal acceleration; its magnitude is given by aC (tangential speed)2 v2 radius of circular path r

where v is the speed of the mass around the perimeter of the circle. Because v r!, we also have aC r!2 , where ! must be in rad/s. Notice that the word ``acceleration'' is commonly used in physics as either a scalar or a vector quantity. Fortunately, there's usually no ambiguity.

THE CENTRIPETAL FORCE ~C is the force that must act on a mass m moving in a circular F path of radius r to give it the centripetal acceleration v2 =r. From F ma, we have FC mv2 mr!2 r

where ~C is directed toward the center of the circular path. F

CHAP. 9]

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

101

Solved Problems
9.1 Express each of the following in terms of the other angular measures: (a) 288, (b) (c) 2.18 rad/s2 :
a 1 rev 0:078 rev 360 deg 2 rad 0:49 rad 28 deg 360 deg 1 rev rev 360 deg deg 0:25 90 4 s s 1 rev s rev 2 rad rad 0:25 s 1 rev 2 s rad rad 360 deg deg 125 2 2:18 2 2:18 2 2 rad s s s rad 1 rev rev 0:347 2 2:18 2 2 rad s s 288 28 deg
1 4

rev=s,

b

c

9.2

The bob of a pendulum 90 cm long swings through a 15-cm arc, as shown in Fig. 9-1. Find the angle , in radians and in degrees, through which it swings.

Fig. 9-1

Recall that l r applies only to angles in radian measure. Therefore, in radians l 0:15 m 0:167 rad 0:17 rad r 0:90 m 360 deg 0:167 rad 9:68 2 rad

Then in degrees

9.3

A fan turns at a rate of 900 rpm (i.e., rev/min). (a) Find the angular speed of any point on one of the fan blades. (b) Find the tangential speed of the tip of a blade if the distance from the center to the tip is 20.0 cm.

102

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

a and since ! 2f

f 900

rev rev 15:0 min s rad s

! 94:2 for all points of the fan blade. (b)

The tangential speed is !r, where ! must be in rad/s. Therefore, v !r 94:2 rad=s0:200 m 18:8 m=s Notice that the rad does not carry through the equations properly ± we insert it and delete it as needed.

9.4

A belt passes over a wheel of radius 25 cm, as shown in Fig. 9-2. If a point on the belt has a speed of 5.0 m/s, how fast is the wheel turning?

Fig. 9-2

!

v 5:0 m=s rad 20 r 0:25 m s

As a rule, ! comes out in units of sÀ1 and the rad must be inserted ad hoc.

9.5

A wheel of 40-cm radius rotates on a stationary axle. It is uniformly speeded up from rest to a speed of 900 rpm in a time of 20 s. Find (a) the constant angular acceleration of the wheel and (b) the tangential acceleration of a point on its rim.
(a) Because the acceleration is constant, we can use the de®nition !f À !i =t to get rad 900 rev rad rev 2 À 2 0 rad rev 60 s rev s 4:7 2 20 s s rad m b Then aT r 0:40 m 4:7 2 1:88 2 1:9 m=s2 s s

9.6

A pulley of 5.0-cm radius, on a motor, is turning at 30 rev/s and slows down uniformly to 20 rev/s in 2.0 s. Calculate (a) the angular acceleration of the motor, (b) the number of revolutions it makes in this time, and (c) the length of belt it winds in this time.

CHAP. 9]

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

103

a b (c) With 314 rad

!f À !i 20 À 30 rad=s À10 rad=s2 2 2:0 s t

!av t 1 !f !i t 1 100 rad=s2:0 s 100 rad 2 2 l r 0:050 m314 rad) 16 m

9.7

A car has wheels of radius 30 cm. It starts from rest and accelerates uniformly to a speed of 15 m/s in a time of 8.0 s. Find the angular acceleration of its wheels and the number of rotations one wheel makes in this time.
We know that aT vf À vi =t, and so aT Then a r gives aT 1:875 m=s2 6:2 rad=s2 r 0:30 m Notice that we must introduce the proper angular measure, radians. Now we can use !i t 1 t2 to ®nd 2 0 1 6:2 rad=s2 8:0 s2 200 rad 2 and 200 rad 1 rev 2 rad 32 rev 15 m=s 1:875 m=s2 8:0 s

9.8

The spin-drier of a washing machine revolving at 900 rpm slows down uniformly to 300 rpm while making 50 revolutions. Find (a) the angular acceleration and (b) the time required to turn through these 50 revolutions.
We easily ®nd that 900 rev/min 15:0 rev/s 30:0 rad/s and 300 rev/min 5:00 rev/s 10:0 rad/s. (a) From !2 !2 2, we have i f (b) !2 À !2 10:0 rad=s2 À 30:0 rad=s2 i f À4:0 rad=s2 2 2100 rad 100 rad 5:0 s !av 20:0 rad=s

Because !av 1 !i !f 20:0 rad/s, !av t yields 2 t

9.9

A 200-g object is tied to the end of a cord and whirled in a horizontal circle of radius 1.20 m at a constant 3.0 rev/s. Assume that the cord is horizontal, i.e., that gravity can be neglected. Determine (a) the acceleration of the object and (b) the tension in the cord.
(a) The object is not accelerating tangentially to the circle but is undergoing a radial, or centripetal, acceleration given by aC v2 r !2 r

104

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

where ! must be in rad/s. Since 3.0 rev/s 6:0 rad/s, aC 6:0 rad/s)2 (1.20 m) 426 m/s2 0:43 km/s2 (b) To cause the acceleration found in (a), the cord must pull on the 0.200-kg mass with a centripetal force given by FC maC 0:200 kg)(426 m/s2 ) 85 N This is the tension in the cord.

9.10

What is the maximum speed at which a car can round a curve of 25-m radius on a level road if the coecient of static friction between the tires and road is 0.80?
The radial force required to keep the car in the curved path (the centripetal force) is supplied by the force of friction between the tires and the road. If the mass of the car is m, then the maximum friction (and centripetal) force is 0:80mg; this arises when the car is on the verge of skidding sideways. Therefore, the maximum speed is given by p q mv2 0:80mg or v 0:80gr 0:809:81 m=s2 25 m 14 m=s r

9.11

A spaceship orbits the Moon at a height of 20 000 m. Assuming it to be subject only to the gravitational pull of the Moon, ®nd its speed and the time it takes for one orbit. For the Moon, mm 7:34 Â 1022 kg and r 1:738 Â 106 m.
The gravitational force of the Moon on the ship supplies the required centripetal force: ms mm ms v2 R R2 where R is the radius of the orbit. Solving, we ®nd that r s Gmm 6:67 Â 10À11 N Á m2 =kg2 7:34 Â 1022 kg v 1:67 km=s R 1:738 0:020 0 Â 106 m G from which we ®nd that Time for one orbit 2R 6:62 Â 103 s 110 min v

9.12

As shown in Fig. 9-3, a ball B is fastened to one end of a 24-cm string, and the other end is held ®xed at point Q. The ball whirls in the horizontal circle shown. Find the speed of the ball in its circular path if the string makes an angle of 308 to the vertical.
The only forces acting on the ball are the ball's weight mg and the tension FT in the cord. The tension must do two things: (1) balance the weight of the ball by means of its vertical component, FT cos 308; (2) supply the required centripetal force by means of its horizontal component, FT sin 308. Therefore we can write mv2 r Solving for FT in the ®rst equation and substituting it in the second gives FT cos 308 mg and FT sin 308 p mg sin 308 mv2 or v rg0:577 r cos 308 However, r BC 0:24 m) sin 308 0:12 m and g 9:81 m/s2 , from which v 0:82 m/s.

CHAP. 9]

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

105

Fig. 9-3

9.13

As shown in Fig. 9-4, a 20-g bead slides from rest at A along a frictionless wire. If h is 25 cm and R is 5.0 cm, how large a force must the wire exert on the bead when it is at (a) point B and (b) point D?

Fig. 9-4

(a)

As a general rule, remember to keep a few more numerical ®gures in the intermediate steps of the calculation than are to be found in the answer. This will avoid round-o errors. Let us ®rst ®nd the speed of the bead at point B. It has fallen through a distance h À 2R and so its loss in PEG is mgh À 2R. This must equal its KE at point B:
2 1 2 mv

mgh À 2R

where v is the speed of the bead at point B. Hence, v p q 2gh À 2R 29:81 m=s2 0:15 m 1:716 m=s

As shown in Fig. 9-4(b), two forces act on the bead when it is at B: (1) the weight of the bead mg and (2) the (assumed downward) force F of the wire on the bead. Together, these two forces must supply the required centripetal force, mv2 =R, if the bead is to follow the circular path. We therefore write

106

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

mg F or

mv2 R 3 42 5 mv2 1:7162 2 À mg 0:020 kg À 9:81 m=s 0:98 N F R 0:050

The wire must exert a 0.98 N downward force on the bead to hold it in a circular path. (b) The situation is similar at point D, but now the weight is perpendicular to the direction of the required centripetal force. Therefore the wire alone must furnish it. Proceeding as before, we have p q v 2gh À R 29:81 m=s2 0:20 m 1:98 m=s and F mv2 0:020 kg1:98 m=s2 1:6 N R 0:050 m

9.14

As shown in Fig. 9-5, a 0.90-kg body attached to a cord is whirled in a vertical circle of radius 2.50 m. (a) What minimum speed vt must it have at the top of the circle so as not to depart from the circular path? (b) Under condition (a), what speed vb will the object have at the bottom of the circle? (c) Find the tension FTb in the cord when the body is at the bottom of the circle and moving with the critical speed vb :

Fig. 9-5

(a)

As Fig. 9-5 shows, two radial forces act on the object at the top: (1) its weight mg and (2) the tension FTt . The resultant of these two forces must supply the required centripetal force. mv2 mg FTt r For a given r, v will be smallest when FTt 0. In that case, mv2 t mg r or vt p rg

Using r 2:50 m and g 9:81 m/s2 gives vt 4:95 m/s as the speed at the top. (b) In traveling from bottom to top, the body rises a distance 2r. Therefore, with vt 4:95 m/s as the speed at the top and with vb as the speed at the bottom, conservation of energy gives KE at bottom KE at top PEG at top
2 1 2 mvb

1 mv2 mg2r t 2

CHAP. 9]

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

107

where we have chosen the bottom of the circle as the zero level for PEG . Notice that m cancels. Using vt 4:95 m/s, r 2:50 m, and g 9:81 m/s2 gives vb 11:1 m/s. (c) When the object is at the bottom of its path, we see from Fig. 9-5 that the unbalanced radial force on it is FTb À mg. This force supplies the required centripetal force: FTb À mg mv2 b r

Using m 0:90 kg, g 9:81 m/s2 , vb 11:1 m/s, and r 2:50 m gives 2 3 v2 b 53 N FTb m g r

9.15

A curve of radius 30 m is to be banked so that a car may make the turn at a speed of 13 m/s without depending on friction. What must be the slope of the curve (the banking angle)?
The situation is shown in Fig. 9-6 if friction is absent. Only two forces act upon the car: (1) the weight mg of the car and (2) the normal force FN exerted by the pavement on the car. The force FN must do two things: (1) its vertical component, FN cos , must balance the car's weight; (2) its horizontal component, FN sin , must supply the required centripetal force. We can therefore write FN cos mg and FN sin mv2 r

Dividing the second equation by the ®rst causes FN and m to cancel and gives tan v2 13 m=s2 0:575 gr 9:81 m=s2 30 m

From this we ®nd that , the banking angle, must be 308:

Fig. 9-6

9.16

As shown in Fig. 9-7, a cylindrical shell of inner radius r rotates at angular speed !. A wooden block rests against the inner surface and rotates with it. If the coecient of static friction between block and surface is s , how fast must the shell be rotating if the block is not to slip and fall? Assume r 150 cm and s 0:30:
The surface holds the block in place by pushing on it with centripetal force m!2 r. This force is perpendicular to the surface; it is the normal force that supplies a friction force to the block so it will not slide down. Because Ff s FN and FN mr!2 , we have

108

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

Fig. 9-7 Ff À s FN s mr!2 This friction force must balance the weight mg of the block if it is not to slip. Therefore, r g or ! mg s mr!2 s r Inserting the given values, we ®nd s 9:81 m=s2 4:7 rad=s 0:74 rev=s ! 0:301:50 m

Supplementary Problems
9.17 Convert (a) 50.0 rev to radians, (b) 48 rad to revolutions, (c) 72.0 rps to rad/s, (d ) 1:50 Â 103 rpm to rad/s, (e) 22.0 rad/s to rpm, ( f ) 2.000 rad/s to deg/s. Ans. (a) 314 rad; (b) 24 rev; (c) 452 rad/s; (d ) 157 rad/s; (e) 210 rev/min; ( f ) 114.6 deg/s Express 40.0 deg/s in (a) rev/s, (b) rev/min, and (c) rad/s. 0.698 rad/s Ans. (a) 0.111 rev/s; (b) 6.67 rev/min; (c)

9.18

9.19

A ¯ywheel turns at 480 rpm. Compute the angular speed at any point on the wheel and the tangential speed 30.0 cm from the center. Ans. 50.3 rad/s, 15.1 m/s It is desired that the outer edge of a grinding wheel 9.0 cm in radius move at a rate of 6.0 m/s. (a) Determine the angular speed of the wheel. (b) What length of thread could be wound on the rim of the wheel in 3.0 s when it is turning at this rate? Ans. (a) 67 rad/s; (b) 18 m Through how many radians does a point on the Earth's surface move in 6.00 h as a result of the Earth's rotation? What is the speed of a point on the equator? Take the radius of the Earth to be 6370 km. Ans. 1.57 rad, 463 m/s A wheel 25.0 cm in radius turning at 120 rpm increases its frequency to 660 rpm in 9.00 s. Find (a) the constant angular acceleration in rad/s2 , and (b) the tangential acceleration of a point on its rim. Ans. (a) 6.28 rad/s2 ; (b) 157 cm/s2

9.20

9.21

9.22

CHAP. 9]

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

109

9.23

The angular speed of a disk decreases uniformly from 12.00 to 4.00 rad/s in 16.0 s. Compute the angular acceleration and the number of revolutions made in this time. Ans. À0:500 rad/s2 , 20.4 rev A car wheel 30 cm in radius is turning at a rate of 8.0 rev/s when the car begins to slow uniformly to rest in a time of 14 s. Find the number of revolutions made by the wheel and the distance the car goes in the 14 s. Ans. 56 rev, 0.11 km A wheel revolving at 6.00 rev/s has an angular acceleration of 4.00 rad/s2 . Find the number of turns the wheel must make to reach 26.0 rev/s, and the time required. Ans. 502 rev, 31.4 s A string wound on the rim of a wheel 20 cm in diameter is pulled out at a rate of 75 cm/s. Through how many revolutions will the wheel have turned by the time that 9.0 m of string has been unwound? How long will it take? Ans. 14 rev, 12 s A mass of 1.5 kg moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at a constant 2.0 rev/s. Calculate (a) the tangential speed, (b) the acceleration, and (c) the required centripetal force for the motion. Ans. (a) 3.1 m/s; (b) 39 m/s2 radially inward; (c) 59 N (a) Compute the radial acceleration of a point at the equator of the Earth. (b) Repeat for the north pole of the Earth. Take the radius of the Earth to be 6:37 Â 106 m. Ans. (a) 0.033 7 m/s2 ; (b) zero A car moving at 5.0 m/s tries to round a corner in a circular arc of 8.0 m radius. The roadway is ¯at. How large must the coecient of friction be between wheels and roadway if the car is not to skid? Ans. 0.32 A box rests at a point 2.0 m from the axis of a horizontal circular platform. The coecient of static friction between box and platform is 0.25. As the rate of rotation of the platform is slowly increased from zero, at what angular speed will the box ®rst slide? Ans. 1.1 rad/s A stone rests in a pail that is moved in a vertical circle of radius 60 cm. What is the least speed the stone must have as it rounds the top of the circle if it is to remain in contact with the pail? Ans. 2.4 m/s A pendulum 80.0 cm long is pulled to the side, so that its bob is raised 20.0 cm from its lowest position, and is then released. As the 50.0 g bob moves through its lowest position, (a) what is its speed and (b) what is the tension in the pendulum cord? Ans. (a) 1.98 m/s; (b) 0.735 N Refer back to Fig. 9-4. How large must h be (in terms of R) if the frictionless wire is to exert no force on the bead as it passes through point B? Assume the bead is released from rest at A. Ans. 2:5R If, in Fig. 9-4 and in Problem 9.33, h 2:5R, how large a force will the 50-g bead exert on the wire as it Ans. 2.9 N passes through point C? A satellite orbits the Earth at a height of 200 km in a circle of radius 6570 km. Find the speed of the satellite and the time taken to complete one revolution. Assume the Earth's mass is 6:0 Â 1024 kg. (Hint: The gravitational force provides the centripetal force.) Ans. 7.8 km/s, 88 min A roller coaster is just barely moving as it goes over the top of the hill. It rolls nearly without friction down the hill and then up over a lower hill that has a radius of curvature of 15 m. How much higher must the ®rst hill be than the second if the passengers are to exert no force on the seat as they pass over the top of the lower hill? Ans. 7.5 m The human body can safely stand an acceleration 9.00 times that due to gravity. With what minimum radius of curvature may a pilot safely turn the plane upward at the end of a dive if the plane's speed is 770 km/h? Ans. 519 m

9.24

9.25

9.26

9.27

9.28

9.29

9.30

9.31

9.32

9.33

9.34

9.35

9.36

9.37

110

ANGULAR MOTION IN A PLANE

[CHAP. 9

9.38

A 60.0 kg glider pilot traveling in a glider at 40.0 m/s wishes to turn an inside vertical loop such that he exerts a force of 350 N on the seat when the glider is at the top of the loop. What must be the radius of the loop under these conditions? (Hint: Gravity and the seat exert forces on the pilot.) Ans. 102 m Suppose the Earth is a perfect sphere with R 6370 km. If a person weighs exactly 600.0 N at the north pole, how much will the person weigh at the equator? (Hint: The upward push of the scale on the person is what the scale will read and is what we are calling the weight in this case.) Ans. 597.9 N A mass m hangs at the end of a pendulum of length L which is released at an angle of 40:08 to the vertical. Find the tension in the pendulum cord when it makes an angle of 20:08 to the vertical. (Hint: Resolve the weight along and perpendicular to the cord.) Ans. 1.29mg

9.39

9.40

Chapter 10
Rigid-Body Rotation
THE TORQUE (OR MOMENT) due to a force about an axis was de®ned in Chapter 5. THE MOMENT OF INERTIA I of a body is a measure of the rotational inertia of the body. If an object that is free to rotate about an axis is dicult to set into rotation, its moment of inertia about that axis is large. An object with small I has little rotational inertia. If a body is considered to be made up of tiny masses m1 , m2 , m3 F F F, at respective distance r1 , r2 , r3 , F F F, from an axis, its moment of inertia about the axis is I m1 r2 m2 r2 m3 r2 Á Á Á mi r2 1 2 3 i The units of I are kg Á m2 . It is convenient to de®ne a radius of gyration k for an object about an axis by the relation I Mk2 where M is the total mass of the object. Hence k is the distance a point mass M must be from the axis if the point mass is to have the same I as the object. TORQUE AND ANGULAR ACCELERATION: A torque , acting on a body of moment of inertia I, produces in it an angular acceleration given by I Here, , I, and are all computed with respect to the same axis. As for units, is in N Á m, I is in kg Á m2 , and must be in rad/s2 . THE KINETIC ENERGY OF ROTATION KEr of a mass whose moment of inertia about an axis is I, and which is rotating about the axis with angular velocity !, is KEr 1 I!2 2 where the energy is in joules and ! must be in rad/s. COMBINED ROTATION AND TRANSLATION: The KE of a rolling ball or other rolling object of mass M is the sum of (1) its rotational KE about an axis through its center of mass (Chapter 8) and (2) the translational KE of an equivalent point mass moving with the center of mass. In symbols, KEtotal 1 I!2 1 Mv2 2 2 Note that I is the moment of inertia of the object about an axis through its mass center. THE WORK W done on a rotating body during an angular displacement by a constant torque is given by W where W is in joules and must be in radians. 111
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

112

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

THE POWER (P) transmitted to a body by a torque is given by P ! where is the applied torque about the axis of rotation, and ! is the angular speed, about that same axis. Radian measure must be used for !:

ANGULAR MOMENTUM is a vector quantity that has magnitude I! and is directed along the axis of rotation. If the net torque on a body is zero, its angular momentum will remain unchanged in both magnitude and direction. This is the Law of Conservation of Angular Momentum.

ANGULAR IMPULSE has magnitude t, where t is the time during which the constant torque acts on the object. In analogy to the linear case, an angular impulse t on a body causes a change in angular momentum of the body given by t I!f À I!i

PARALLEL-AXIS THEOREM: The moment of inertia I of a body about an axis parallel to an axis through the center of mass is I Icm Mh2 where Icm moment of inertia about an axis through the center of mass M total mass of the body h perpendicular distance between the two parallel axes

The moments of inertia (about an axis through the center of mass) of several uniform objects, each of mass M, are shown in Fig. 10-1.

Fig. 10-1

ANALOGOUS LINEAR AND ANGULAR QUANTITIES: Linear displacement Linear speed Linear acceleration Mass (inertia) Force Linear momentum Linear impulse s v aT m F mv Ft 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 angular displacement angular speed angular acceleration moment of inertia torque angular momentum angular impulse ! I I! t

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

113

If, in the equations for linear motion, we replace linear quantities by the corresponding angular quantities, we get the corresponding equations for angular motion. Thus, we have Linear: Angular: F ma I KE 1 mv2 2 KEr W Fs W P Fv P !
2 1 2 I!

In these equations, , !, and must be expressed in radian measure.

Solved Problems
10.1 A wheel of mass 6.0 kg and radius of gyration 40 cm is rotating at 300 rpm. Find its moment of inertia and its rotational KE.
I Mk2 6:0 kg0:40 m2 0:96 kg Á m2 The rotational KE is 1 I!2 , where ! must be in rad/s. We have 2 rev 1 min 2 rad 31:4 rad=s ! 300 min 60:0 s 1 rev so KEr 1 I!2 1 0:96 kg Á m2 31:4 rad=s2 0:47 kJ 2 2

10.2

A 500-g uniform sphere of 7.0-cm radius spins at 30 rev/s on an axis through its center. Find its (a) KEr , (b) angular momentum, and (c) radius of gyration.
We need the moment of inertia of a uniform sphere about an axis through its center. From Fig. 10-1, I 2 Mr2 0:400:50 kg0:070 m2 0:000 98 kg Á m2 5 (a) Knowing that ! 30 rev=s 188 rad/s, we have KEr 1 I!2 1 0:000 98 kg Á m2 188 rad=s2 0:017 kJ 2 2 Notice that ! must be in rad/s. (b) Its angular momentum is I! 0:000 98 kg Á m2 188 rad=s 0:18 kg Á m2 =s (c) For any object, I Mk2 , where k is the radius of gyration. Therefore, r s I 0:000 98 kg Á m2 0:044 m 4:4 cm k 0:50 kg M Notice that this is a reasonable value in view of the fact that the radius of the sphere is 7.0 cm.

10.3

An airplane propeller has a mass of 70 kg and a radius of gyration of 75 cm. Find its moment of inertia. How large a torque is needed to give it an angular acceleration of 4.0 rev/s2 ?
I Mk2 70 kg0:75 m2 39 kg Á m2 To use I, we must have in rad/s2 : rev rad 4:0 2 2 8:0 rad=s2 rev s Then I 39 kg Á m2 8:0 rad=s2 0:99 kN Á m

114

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

10.4

As shown in Fig. 10-2, a constant force of 40 N is applied tangentially to the rim of a wheel with 20-cm radius. The wheel has a moment of inertia of 30 kg Á m2 . Find (a) the angular acceleration, (b) the angular speed after 4.0 s from rest, and (c) the number of revolutions made in that 4.0 s. (d ) Show that the work done on the wheel in the 4.0 s is equal to the KEr of the wheel after 4.0 s.

Fig. 10-2

(a)

Using I, we have 40 N0:20 m 30 kg Á m2 from which 0:267 rad/s2 or 0.27 rad/s2 .

(b)

We use !f !i t to ®nd !f 0 0:267 rad=s2 4:0 s 1:07 rad=s 1:1 rad=s

(c)

Because !av t 1 !f !i t, we have 2 1 1:07 rad=s4:0 s 2:14 rad 2 which is equivalent to 0.34 rev.

(d ) We know that work torque Â , and so Work 40 N Â 0:20 m2:14 rad 17 J Notice that radian measure must be used. The ®nal KEr is 1 I!2 and so f 2 KEr 1 30 kg Á m2 1:07 rad=s2 17 J 2 The work done equals KEr .

10.5

The wheel on a grinder is a uniform 0.90-kg disk of 8.0-cm radius. It coasts uniformly to rest from 1400 rpm in a time of 35 s. How large a friction torque slows its motion?
We will ®rst ®nd from a motion problem; then we will use I to ®nd . We know that f 1400 rev/min 23:3 rev/s, and since ! 2f , !i 146 rad/s and !f 0. Therefore, !f À !i À146 rad=s À4:2 rad=s2 35 s t

We also need I. For a uniform disk, Then I 0:002 9 kg Á m2 À4:2 rad=s2 À1:2 Â 10À2 N Á m I 1 Mr2 1 0:90 kg0:080 m2 2:9 Â 10À3 kg Á m2 2 2

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

115

10.6

Rework Problem 10.5 using the relation between work and energy.
The wheel originally had KEr , but, as the wheel slowed, this energy was lost doing friction work. We therefore write Initial KEr work done against friction torque
2 1 2 I!i

To ®nd , we note that !av t 1 !i !f t 1 146 rad=s35 s 2550 rad 2 2 From Problem 10.5, I 0:002 9 kg Á m2 and so the work-energy equation is from which 0:012 N Á m or 1:2 Â 10
2 1 2 0:002 9 kg Á m 146 À2

rad=s2 2550 rad

N Á m:

10.7

A ¯ywheel has a moment of inertia of 3.8 kg Á m2 . What constant torque is required to increase its frequency from 2.0 rev/s to 5.0 rev/s in 6.0 revolutions?
Given 12 rad we can write Work done on wheel change in KEr of wheel 12 rad 1 3:8 kg Á m2 1002 À 162 rad=s2 2 which gives 42 N Á m. Notice in all of these problems that radians and seconds must be used. 1 I!2 À 1 I!2 i f 2 2 !i 4:0 rad=s !f 10 rad=s

10.8

As shown in Fig. 10-3, a mass m 400 g hangs from the rim of a wheel of radius r 15 cm. When released from rest, the mass falls 2.0 m in 6.5 s. Find the moment of inertia of the wheel.

Fig. 10-3

116

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

We will write I for the wheel and F ma for the mass. But ®rst we ®nd a from a motion problem, using y vi t 1 at2 : 2 2:0 m 0 1 a6:5 s2 2 which gives a 0:095 m=s2 . Then, from aT r, aT 0:095 m=s2 0:63 rad=s2 r 0:15 m The net force on the mass m is mg À FT and so F ma becomes mg À FT maT 0:40 kg9:81 m=s2 À FT 0:40 kg0:095 m=s2 from which FT 3:88 N: Now we write I for the wheel: FT r I from which I 0:92 kg Á m2 : or 3:88 N0:15 m I0:63 rad=s2

10.9

Repeat Problem 10.8 using energy considerations.
Originally the mass m had PEG mgh, where h 2:0 m. It loses all this PEG , and an equal amount of KE results. Part of this KE is translational KE of the mass, and the rest is KEr of the wheel: Original PEG final KE of m final KEr of wheel mgh 1 mv2 1 I!2 f f 2 2 To ®nd vf , we note that vi 0, y 2 m, and t 6:5 s. (Observe that a T g for the mass, because it does not fall freely.) Then vav and vav 1 vi vf with vi 0 gives 2 vf 2vav 0:616 m=s Moreover, v !r gives vf 0:616 m=s 4:1 rad=s r 0:15 m Substitution in the energy equation gives !f 0:40 kg9:81 m=s2 2:0 m 1 0:40 kg0:62 m=s2 1 I4:1 rad=s2 2 2 from which I 0:92 kg Á m2 . y 2:0 m 0:308 m=s t 6:5 s

10.10 The moment of inertia of the pulley system in Fig. 10-4 is I 1:70 kg Á m2 , while r1 50 cm and r2 20 cm. Find the angular acceleration of the pulley system and the tensions FT1 and FT2 :
Note at the beginning that a r gives 1 0:50 m and a2 0:20 m. We shall write F ma for both masses and I for the wheel, taking the direction of motion to be the positive direction: 2:09:81 N À FT1 2a1 FT2 À 1:89:81 N 1:8a2 FT1 r1 À FT2 r2 I or or or 19:6 N À FT1 1:0 m FT2 À 17:6 N 0:36 m 0:50 mFT1 À 0:20 mFT2 1:70 kg Á m2

These three equations have three unknowns. We solve for FT1 in the ®rst equation and substitute it in the third to obtain 9:81 N Á m À 0:50 m À 0:20 mFT2 1:70 kg Á m2

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

117

Fig. 10-4

We solve this equation for FT2 and substitute in the second equation to obtain À11 49 À 17:6 0:36 from which 2:8 rad/s . We can now go back to the ®rst equation to ®nd FT1 17 N, and to the second to ®nd FT2 19 N.
2

10.11 Use energy methods to ®nd how fast the 2.0-kg mass in Fig. 10-4 is falling after it has fallen 1.5 m from rest. Use the same values for I, r1 , and r2 as in Problem 10.10.
If the angular speed of the wheel is !, then v1 r1 ! and v2 r2 !. As the wheel turns through an angle , the 2.0-kg mass falls through a distance s1 and the 1.8-kg mass rises a distance s2 : s s r from which s2 s1 2 1 2 r1 r2 r1 From energy conservation, because PEG is lost and KE is gained, m1 gs1 À m2 gs2 1 m1 v2 1 m2 v2 1 I!2 1 2 2 2 2 Since s2 20=501:5 m 0:60 m we can solve to ®nd ! 4:07 rad/s. Then v1 r1 ! 0:50 m4:07 rad=s 2:0 m=s v1 0:50 m ! v2 0:20 m !

10.12 A motor runs at 20 rev/s and supplies a torque of 75 N Á m. What horsepower is it delivering?
Using ! 20 rev=s 40 rad=s, we have P ! 75 N Á m40 rad=s 9:4 kW 13 hp

118

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

10.13 The driving wheel of a belt drive attached to an electric motor has a diameter of 38 cm and operates at 1200 rpm. The tension in the belt is 130 N on the slack side, and 600 N on the tight side. Find the horsepower transmitted to the wheel by the belt. have and therefore We make use of P !. In this case two torques, due to the two parts of the belt, act on the wheel. We f 1200 rev=min 20 rev=s ! 40 rad=s P 600 À 1300:19 N Á m40 rad=s 11 kW 15 hp

10.14 A 0.75-hp motor acts for 8.0 s on an initially nonrotating wheel having a moment of inertia 2.0 kg Á m2 . Find the angular speed developed in the wheel, assuming no losses.
Work done by motor in 8:0 s KE of wheel after 8:0 s 0:75 hp746 W=hp Â 8:0 s 1 2:0 kg Á m2 !2 2 from which ! 67 rad/s. power Â time 1 I!2 2

10.15 As shown in Fig. 10-5, a uniform solid sphere rolls on a horizontal surface at 20 m/s and then rolls up the incline. If friction losses are negligible, what will be the value of h where the ball

Fig. 10-5

stops?
The rotational and translational KE of the sphere at the bottom will be changed to PEG when it stops. We therefore write 1 Mv2 1 I!2 start Mghend 2 2 But for a solid sphere, I 2 Mr2 . Also, ! v=r. The above equation becomes 5 v2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 Mgh or Mv2 Mr2 v v 9:81 m=s2 h 2 2 5 r 2 5 Using v 20 m/s gives h 29 m. Notice that the answer does not depend upon the mass of the ball or the angle of the incline.

10.16 Starting from rest, a hoop of 20-cm radius rolls down a hill to a point 5.0 m below its starting point. How fast is it rotating at that point?
PEG at start KEr KEt at end Mgh 1 I!2 1 Mv2 2 2

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

119

But I Mr2 for a hoop and v !r. The above equation becomes Mgh 1 M!2 r2 1 M!2 r2 2 2 r s gh 9:81 m=s2 5:0 m ! 35 rad=s 2 r 0:20 m2

from which

10.17 As a solid disk rolls over the top of a hill on a track, its speed is 80 cm/s. If friction losses are negligible, how fast is the disk moving when it is 18 cm below the top?
At the top, the disk has translational and rotational KE, plus its PEG relative to the point 18 cm lower. At the ®nal point, the PEG has been transformed to more KE of rotation and translation. We therefore write, with h 18 cm KEt KEr start Mgh KEt KEr end
2 1 2 Mvi

1 I!2 Mgh 1 Mv2 1 I!2 i f f 2 2 2 1 v2 gh 1 v2 1 v2 4 i 2 f 4 f

For a solid disk, I 1 Mr2 . Also, ! v=r. Substituting these values and simplifying give 2
1 2 2 vi

But vi 0:80 m/s and h 0:18 m. Substitution gives vf 1:7 m/s.

10.18 Find the moment of inertia of the four masses shown in Fig. 10-6 relative to an axis perpendicular to the page and extending (a) through point A and (b) through point B.

Fig. 10-6

(a)

From the de®nition of moment of inertia, I m1 r2 m2 r2 Á Á Á mN r2 2:0 kg 3:0 kg 4:0 kg 5:0 kgr2 1 2 N where r is half the length of the diagonal: r1 2 Thus, I 27 kg Á m2 : q 1:20 m2 2:50 m2 1:39 m

(b)

We cannot use the parallel-axis theorem here because neither A nor B is at the center of mass. Hence we proceed as before. Because r 1:25 m for the 2.0- and 3.0-kg masses, while q r 1:202 1:252 1:733 for the other two masses, IB 2:0 kg 3:0 kg1:25 m2 5:0 kg 4:0 kg1:733 m2 33 kg Á m2

120

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

10.19 The uniform circular disk in Fig. 10-7 has mass 6.5 kg and diameter 80 cm. Compute its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to the page (a) through G and (b) through A:
a (b) IG 1 Mr2 1 6:5 kg0:40 m2 0:52 kg Á m2 2 2 By the result of (a) and the parallel-axis theorem, IA IG Mh2 0:52 kg Á m2 6:5 kg0:22 m2 0:83 kg Á m2

Fig. 10-7

Fig. 10-8

10.20

A large roller in the form of a uniform cylinder is pulled by a tractor to compact earth; it has a 1.80-m diameter and weighs 10 kN. If frictional losses can be ignored, what average horsepower must the tractor provide to accelerate it from rest to a speed of 4.0 m/s in a horizontal distance of 3.0 m?
The power is equal to the work done by the tractor divided by the time it takes. The tractor does the following work: Work ÁKEr ÁKEt 1 I!2 1 mv2 f f 2 2 We have vf 4:0 m/s, !f vf =r 4:44 rad/s, and m 10 000=9:81 1019 kg. The moment of inertia of the cylinder is I 1 mr2 1 1019 kg0:90 m2 413 kg Á m2 2 2 Substituting these values, we ®nd the work required to be 12.23 kJ. We still need the time taken to do this work. Because the roller went 3.0 m with an average velocity vav 1 4 0 2:0 m/s, we have 2 s 3:0 m 1:5 s vav 2:0 m=s work 12 230 J 1 hp Power 8150 W 11 hp time 1:5 s 746 W t

Then

10.21 As shown in Fig. 10-8, a thin uniform rod AB of mass M and length L is hinged at end A to the level ¯oor. It originally stands vertically. If allowed to fall to the ¯oor as shown, with what angular speed will it strike the ¯oor?

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

121

The moment of inertia about a transverse axis through end A is 2 1 L ML2 IA IG Mh2 ML2 M 3 12 2 As the rod falls to the ¯oor, the center of mass G falls a distance L=2. We can write PEG lost by rod KEr gained by rod 2 3 L 1 ML2 2 Mg ! 2 2 3

from which !

p 3g=L:

10.22 A man stands on a freely rotating platform, as shown in Fig. 10-9. With his arms extended, his rotation frequency is 0.25 rev/s. But when he draws them in, his frequency is 0.80 rev/s. Find the ratio of his moment of inertia in the ®rst case to that in the second.

Fig. 10-9

that

Because there is no torque on the system (why?), the law of conservation of angular momentum tells us Angular momentum before angular momentum after Ii !i If !f

Or, since we desire Ii =If , Ii !f 0:80 rev=s 3:2 If !i 0:25 rev=s

122

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

10.23 A disk of moment of inertia I1 is rotating freely with angular speed !1 when a second, nonrotating, disk with moment of inertia I2 is dropped on it (Fig. 10-10). The two then rotate as a unit. Find the ®nal angular speed.
From the law of conservation of angular momentum, Angular momentum before angular momentum after I1 !1 I2 0 I1 ! I2 ! Solving gives ! I1 !1 I1 I2

Fig. 10-10

10.24 A disk like the lower one in Fig. 10-10 has moment of inertia I1 about the axis shown. What will be its new moment of inertia if a tiny mass M is set on it at a distance R from its center?
The de®nition of moment of inertia tells us that, for the disk plus added mass, I mi r2 MR2 i disk where the sum extends over all the masses composing the original disk. Since the value of that sum is given as I1 , the new moment of inertia is I I1 MR2 :

10.25 A disk like the lower one in Fig. 10-10 has I 0:015 0 kg Á m2 and is turning at 3.0 rev/s. A trickle of sand falls onto the disk at a distance of 20 cm from the axis and builds a 20-cm radius ring of sand on it. How much sand must fall on the disk for it to slow to 2.0 rev/s?
When a mass Ám of sand falls onto the disk, the moment of inertia of the disk is increased by an amount r2 Ám, as shown in the preceding problem. After a mass m has fallen on the disk, its moment of inertia has increased to I mr2 . Because the sand originally had no angular momentum, the law of conservation of momentum gives (momentum before) (momentum after) from which m I!i À !f 0:015 0 kg Á m2 6:0 À 4:0 rad=s 0:19 kg r2 !f 0:040 m2 4:0 rad=s or I!i I mr2 !f

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

123

Supplementary Problems
10.26 10.27 10.28 10.29 10.30 10.31 A force of 200 N acts tangentially on the rim of a wheel 25 cm in radius. (a) Find the torque. (b) Repeat if the force makes an angle of 408 to a spoke of the wheel. Ans. (a) 50 N Á m; (b) 32 N Á m A certain 8.0-kg wheel has a radius of gyration of 25 cm. (a) What is its moment of inertia? (b) How large a torque is required to give it an angular acceleration of 3.0 rad/s2 ? Ans. (a) 0:50 kg Á m2 ; (b) 1:5 N Á m Determine the constant torque that must be applied to a 50-kg ¯ywheel, with radius of gyration 40 cm, to give it a frequency of 300 rpm in 10 s if it's initially at rest. Ans. 25 N Á m A 4.0-kg wheel of 20 cm radius of gyration is rotating at 360 rpm. The retarding frictional torque is 0:12 N Á m. Compute the time it will take the wheel to coast to rest. Ans. 50 s Compute the rotational KE of a 25-kg wheel rotating at 6.0 rev/s if the radius of gyration of the wheel is 22 cm. Ans. 0.86 kJ A cord 3.0 m long is coiled around the axle of a wheel. The cord is pulled with a constant force of 40 N. When the cord leaves the axle, the wheel is rotating at 2.0 rev/s. Determine the moment of inertia of the wheel and axle. Neglect friction. (Hint: The easiest solution is by the energy method.) Ans. 1:5 kg Á m2 A 500-g wheel that has a moment of inertia of 0:015 kg Á m2 is initially turning at 30 rev/s. It coasts to rest after 163 rev. How large is the torque that slowed it? Ans. 0.26 N Á m When 100 J of work is done upon a ¯ywheel, its angular speed increases from 60 rev/min to 180 rev/min. Ans. 0.63 kg Á m2 What is its moment of inertia? A 5.0-kg wheel with radius of gyration 20 cm is to be given a frequency of 10 rev/s in 25 revolutions from rest. Find the constant unbalanced torque required. Ans. 2.5 N Á m An electric motor runs at 900 rpm and delivers 2.0 hp. How much torque does it deliver? Ans. 16 N Á m

10.32 10.33 10.34 10.35 10.36

The driving side of a belt has a tension of 1600 N, and the slack side has 500 N tension. The belt turns a pulley 40 cm in radius at a rate of 300 rpm. This pulley drives a dynamo having 90 percent eciency. How many kilowatts are being delivered by the dynamo? Ans. 12 kW A 25-kg wheel has a radius of 40 cm and turns freely on a horizontal axis. The radius of gyration of the wheel is 30 cm. A 1.2-kg mass hangs at the end of a cord that is wound around the rim of the wheel. This mass falls and causes the wheel to rotate. Find the acceleration of the falling mass and the tension in the cord. Ans. 0.77 m/s2 , 11 N A wheel and axle having a total moment of inertia of 0.002 0 kg Á m2 is caused to rotate about a horizontal axis by means of an 800-g mass attached to a cord wrapped around the axle. The radius of the axle is 2.0 cm. Starting from rest, how far must the mass fall to give the wheel a rotational rate of 3.0 rev/s? Ans. 5.3 cm A 20-kg solid disk I 1 Mr2 rolls on a horizontal surface at the rate of 4.0 m/s. Compute its total 2 KE. Ans. 0.24 kJ A 6.0-kg bowling ball I 2Mr 2 =5 starts from rest and rolls down a gradual slope until it reaches a point 80 cm lower than its starting point. How fast is it then moving? Ignore friction losses. Ans. 3.3 m/s A tiny solid ball I 2Mr 2 =5 rolls without slipping on the inside surface of a hemisphere as shown in Fig. 10-11. (The ball is much smaller than shown.) If the ball is released at A, how fast is it moving as it passes (a) point B, and (b) point C? Ans. (a) 2.65 m/s; (b) 2.32 m/s

10.37

10.38

10.39 10.40 10.41

124

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

[CHAP. 10

Fig. 10-11

10.42

Compute the radius of gyration of a solid disk of diameter 24 cm about an axis through its center of mass and perpendicular to its face. Ans. 8.5 cm In Fig. 10-12 are shown four masses that are held at the corners of a square by a very light frame. What is the moment of inertia of the system about an axis perpendicular to the page (a) through A and (b) through B? Ans. (a) 1.4 kg Á m2 ; (b) 2.1 kg Á m2

10.43

Fig. 10-12

Fig. 10-13

10.44

Determine the moment of inertia (a) of a vertical thin hoop of mass 2 kg and radius 9 cm about a horizontal, parallel axis at its rim; (b) of a solid sphere of mass 2 kg and radius 5 cm about an axis tangent to the sphere. Ans. (a) I Mr 2 Mr 2 0:03 kg Á m2 ; (b) I 2 Mr 2 Mr 2 7 Â 10À3 kg Á m2 5 Rod OA in Fig. 10-13 is a meterstick. It is hinged at O so that it can turn in a vertical plane. It is held horizontally and then released. Compute the angular speed of the rod and the linear speed of its free end as it passes through the position shown in the ®gure. (Hint: Show that I mL2 =3: Ans. 5.0 rad/s, 5.0 m/s Suppose that a satellite ship orbits the Moon in an elliptical orbit. At its closest point to the Moon it has a speed vc and a radius rc from the center of the Moon. At its farthest point, it has a speed vf and a radius rf . Find the ratio vc =vf . (Hint: At the closest and farthest points, the relation v r ! is valid.) Ans. rf =rc

10.45

10.46

CHAP. 10]

RIGID-BODY ROTATION

125

10.47

A large horizontal disk is rotating on a vertical axis through its center; for the disk, I 4000 kg Á m2 . The disk is coasting at a rate of 0.150 rev/s when a 90.0-kg person drops onto the disk from an overhanging tree limb. The person lands and remains at a distance of 3.00 m from the axis of rotation. What will be the rate of rotation after the person has landed? Ans. 0.125 rev/s A neutron star is formed when an object such as our Sun collapses. Suppose a uniform spherical star of mass M and radius R collapses to a uniform sphere of radius 10À5 R. If the original star has a rotation rate of 1 rev each 25 days (as does the Sun), what will be the rotation rate of the neutron star? Ans. 5 Â 103 rev/s A 90-kg person stands at the edge of a stationary children's merry-go-round (essentially a disk) at a distance of 5.0 m from its center. The person starts to walk around the perimeter of the disk at a speed of 0.80 m/s relative to the ground. What rotation rate does this motion give to the disk if Idisk 20 000 kg Á m2 ? (Hint: For the person, I mr2 : Ans. 0.018 rad/s

10.48

10.49

Chapter 11
Simple Harmonic Motion and Springs
THE PERIOD T of a cyclic system, one that is vibrating or rotating in a repetitive fashion, is the time required for the system to complete one full cycle. In the case of vibration it is the total time for the combined back and forth motion of the system. The period is the number of seconds per cycle.

THE FREQUENCY f is the number of vibrations made per unit time or the number of cycles per second. Because T is the time for one cycle, f 1=T. The unit of frequency is the hertz where one cycle/s is one hertz (Hz).

THE GRAPH OF A VIBRATORY MOTION shown in Fig. 11-1 depicts the up-and-down oscillation of a mass at the end of a spring. One complete cycle is from a to b, or from c to d, or from e to f . The time taken for one cycle is T, the period.

Fig. 11-1

THE DISPLACEMENT x or y) is the distance of the vibrating object from its equilibrium position (normal rest position), i.e., from the center of its vibration path. The maximum displacement is called the amplitude (see Fig. 11-1).

A RESTORING FORCE is one that opposes the displacement of the system; it is necessary if vibration is to occur. In other words, a restoring force is always directed so as to push or pull the system back to its equilibrium (normal rest) position. For a mass at the end of a spring, the stretched spring pulls the mass back toward the equilibrium position, while the compressed spring pushes the mass back toward the equilibrium position. 126
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

127

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION (SHM) is the vibratory motion which a system that obeys Hooke's Law undergoes. The motion illustrated in Fig. 11-1 is SHM. Because of the resemblance of its graph to a sine or cosine curve, SHM is frequently called sinusoidal motion. A central feature of SHM is that the system oscillates at a single constant frequency. That's what makes it ``simple'' harmonic. A HOOKEAN SYSTEM (a spring, wire, rod, etc.) is one that returns to its original con®guration after being distorted and then released. Moreover, when such a system is stretched a distance x (for compression, x is negative), the restoring force exerted by the spring is given by Hooke's Law F Àkx The minus sign indicates that the restoring force is always opposite in direction to the displacement. The spring constant k has units of N/m and is a measure of the stiness of the spring. Most springs obey Hooke's Law for small distortions. It is sometimes useful to express Hooke's Law in terms of Fext , the external force needed to stretch the spring a given amount x. This force is the negative of the restoring force, and so Fext kx

THE ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY stored in a Hookean spring (PEe that is distorted a distance x is 1 kx2 . If the amplitude of motion is x0 for a mass at the end of a spring, then the 2 energy of the vibrating system is 1 kx2 at all times. However, this energy is completely stored in 0 2 the spring only when x Æx0 , that is, when the mass has its maximum displacement. ENERGY INTERCHANGE between kinetic and potential energy occurs constantly in a vibrating system. When the system passes through its equilibrium position, KE maximum and PEe 0. When the system has its maximum displacement, then KE 0 and PEe maximum. From the law of conservation of energy, in the absence of friction-type losses, KE PEe constant For a mass m at the end of a spring (whose own mass is negligible), this becomes
2 1 2 mv

1 kx2 1 kx2 0 2 2

where x0 is the amplitude of the motion. SPEED IN SHM is determined via the above energy equation as r k jvj x2 À x2 0 m

ACCELERATION IN SHM is determined via Hooke's Law, F Àkx, and F ma; once displaced and released the restoring force drives the system. Equating these two expressions for F gives aÀ k x m

The minus sign indicates that the direction of ~ (and ~) is always opposite to the direction of the a F displacement ~. Keep in mind that neither ~ nor ~ are constant. x F a

128

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

[CHAP. 11

REFERENCE CIRCLE: Suppose that a point P moves with constant speed v0 around a circle, as shown in Fig. 11-2. This circle is called the reference circle for SHM. Point A is the projection of point P on the x-axis, which coincides with the horizontal diameter of the circle. The motion of point A back and forth about point O as center is SHM. The amplitude of the motion is x0 , the radius of the circle. The time taken for P to go around the circle once is the period T of the motion. The velocity, ~0 , of point A has a scalar x-component of v vx Àv0 sin When this quantity is positive ~x points in the positive x-direction, when it's negative ~x points in the v v negative x-direction.

Fig. 11-2

PERIOD IN SHM: The period T of a SHM is the time taken for point P to go once around the reference circle in Fig. 11-2. Therefore, T 2r 2x0 v0 v0

But v0 is the maximum speed of point A in Fig. 11-2, that is, v0 is the value of jvx j in SHM when x 0: r r k 2 2 k gives v0 x0 jvx j x0 À x m m This then gives the period of SHM to be r m T 2 k

for a Hookean spring system.

ACCELERATION IN TERMS OF T: Eliminating the quantity k=m between the two equations p a Àk=mx and T 2 m=k, we ®nd aÀ 42 x T2

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

129

THE SIMPLE PENDULUM very nearly undergoes SHM if its angle of swing is not too large. The period of vibration for a pendulum of length L at a location where the gravitational acceleration is g is given by s L T 2 g

SHM can be expressed in analytic form by reference to Fig. 11-2 where we see that the horizontal displacement of point P is given by x x0 cos . Since !t 2ft, where the angular frequency ! 2f is the angular velocity of the reference point on the circle, we have x x0 cos 2ft x0 cos !t Similarly, the vertical component of the motion of point P is given by y x0 sin 2ft x0 sin !t Also from the ®gure, vx v0 sin 2ft:

Solved Problems
11.1 For the motion shown in Fig. 11-3, what are the amplitude, period, and frequency?

Fig. 11-3

The amplitude is the maximum displacement from the equilibrium position and so is 0.75 cm. The period is the time for one complete cycle, the time from A to B, for example. Therefore the period is 0.20 s. The frequency is f 1 1 5:0 cycles=s 5:0 Hz T 0:20 s

11.2

A spring makes 12 vibrations in 40 s. Find the period and frequency of the vibration.
T elapsed time 40 s 3:3 s vibrations made 12 f vibrations made 12 0:30 Hz elapsed time 40 s

130

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

[CHAP. 11

11.3

When a 400-g mass is hung at the end of a vertical spring, the spring stetches 35 cm. What is the spring constant of the spring, and how much further will it stretch if an additional 400-g mass is hung from it?
We use Fext ky, where Fext mg 0:400 kg9:81 m=s2 3:92 N F 3:92 N 11 N=m k y 0:35 m F 7:84 N 0:70 m 2 Â 35 cm k 11:2 N=m

to get

With an additional 400-g load, the total force stretching the spring is 7.84 N. Then y

Provided it's Hookean, each 400-g load stretches the spring by the same amount, whether or not the spring is already loaded.

11.4

A 200-g mass vibrates horizontally without friction at the end of a horizontal spring for which k 7:0 N/m. The mass is displaced 5.0 cm from equilibrium and released. Find (a) its maximum speed and (b) its speed when it is 3.0 cm from equilibrium. (c) What is its acceleration in each of these cases?
From the conservation of energy,
2 1 2 kx0

1 mv2 1 kx2 2 2

where k 7:0 N/m, x0 0:050 m, and m 0:200 kg. Solving for v gives r k 2 v x À x2 m 0 (a) The speed is a maximum when x 0; that is, when the mass is passing through the equilibrium position: s r k 7:0 N=m 0:050 m 0:30 m=s v x0 m 0:200 kg When x 0:030 m, s 7:0 N=m 0:0502 À 0:0302 m2 0:24 m=s v 0:200 kg

(b)

(c)

By use of F ma and F kx, we have a k x 35 sÀ2 x m

which yields a 0 when the mass is at x 0 and a 1:1 m/s2 when x 0:030 m.

11.5

A 50-g mass vibrates in SHM at the end of a spring. The amplitude of the motion is 12 cm, and the period is 1.70 s. Find: (a) the frequency, (b) the spring constant, (c) the maximum speed of the mass, (d ) the maximum acceleration of the mass, (e) the speed when the displacement is 6.0 cm, and ( f ) the acceleration when x 6:0 cm.
a (b) p Since T 2 m=k; f 1 1 0:588 Hz T 1:70 s

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

131

k

42 m 42 0:050 kg 0:68 N=m T2 1:70 s2

c

s r k 0:68 N=m v0 x0 0:12 m 0:44 m=s m 0:050 kg

(d ) From a Àk=mx it is seen that a has maximum magnitude when x has maximum magnitude, that is, at the endpoints x Æx0 . Thus, a0 (e) From jvj k 0:68 N=m x 0:12 m 1:6 m=s2 m 0 0:050 kg

q x2 À x2 k=m; 0 s 0:12 m2 À 0:06 m2 0:68 N=m 0:38 m=s jvj 0:050 kg aÀ k 0:68 N=m xÀ 0:060 m À0:82 m=s2 m 0:050 kg

f

11.6

A 50-g mass hangs at the end of a Hookean spring. When 20 g more is added to the end of the spring, it stretches 7.0 cm more. (a) Find the spring constant. (b) If the 20 g is now removed, what will be the period of the motion?
(a) Under the weight of the 50-g mass, Fext 1 kx1 , where x1 is the original stretching of the spring. When 20 g more is added, the force becomes Fext 1 Fext 2 kx1 x2 , where Fext 2 is the weight of 20 g and x2 is the stretching it causes. Subtracting the two force equations gives Fext 2 kx2 (Note that this is the same as Fext kx, where Fext is the additional stretching force and x is the amount of stretch due to it. Hence we could have ignored the fact that the spring had the 50-g mass at its end to begin with.) Solving for k, we get k Fext 2 0:020 kg9:81 m=s2 2:8 N=m x2 0:070 m s r m 0:050 kg 2 T 2 0:84 s k 2:8 N=m

b

11.7

As shown in Fig. 11-4, a long, light piece of spring steel is clamped at its lower end and a 2.0-kg ball is fastened to its top end. A horizontal force of 8.0 N is required to displace the ball 20 cm to one side as shown. Assume the system to undergo SHM when released. Find (a) the force constant of the spring and (b) the period with which the ball will vibrate back and forth.
a k external force Fext 8:0 N 40 N=m displacement x 0:20 m s r m 2:0 kg 2 1:4 s T 2 k 40 N=m

b

132

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

[CHAP. 11

Fig. 11-4

11.8

When a mass m is hung on a spring, the spring stretches 6.0 cm. Determine its period of vibration if it is then pulled down a little and released.
Since Fext mg x 0:060 m s r m 0:060 m 2 0:49 s T 2 k g k

we have

11.9

Two identical springs have k 20 N/m. A 0.30-kg mass is connected to them as shown in Fig. 11-5(a) and (b). Find the period of motion for each system. Ignore friction forces.
(a) Consider what happens when the mass is given a displacement x > 0. One spring will be stretched x and the other will be compressed x. They will each exert a force of magnitude (20 N/m)x on the mass in the direction opposite to the displacement. Hence the total restoring force will be F À20 N=mx À 20 N=mx À40 N=mx Comparison with F Àkx tells us that the system has a spring constant of k 40 N/m. Hence, s r m 0:30 kg T 2 2 0:54 s k 40 N=m

Fig. 11-5

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

133

(b)

When the mass is displaced a distance y downward, each spring is stretched a distance y. The net restoring force on the mass is then F À20 N=my À 20 N=my À40 N=my Comparison with F Àky shows k to be 40 N/m, the same as in (a). Hence the period in this case is also 0.54 s.

11.10 In a certain engine, a piston undergoes vertical SHM with amplitude 7.0 cm. A washer rests on top of the piston. As the motor speed is slowly increased, at what frequency will the washer no longer stay in contact with the piston?
The maximum downward acceleration of the washer will be that for free fall, g. If the piston accelerates downward faster than this, the washer will lose contact. In SHM, the acceleration is given in terms of the displacement and the period as 42 x T2 p (To see this, notice that a ÀF=m Àkx=m. But from T 2 m=k, we have k 42 m=T 2 , which then gives the above expression for a.) With the upward direction chosen as positive, the largest downward (most negative) acceleration occurs for x x0 0:070 m; it is aÀ 42 0:070 m T2 The washer will separate from the piston when a0 ®rst becomes equal to g. Therefore, the critical period for the SHM, Tc , is given by s 42 0:070 m 0:53 s 0:070 m g or Tc 2 2 g Tc a0 This corresponds to the frequency fc 1=Tc 1:9 Hz. The washer will separate from the piston if the piston's frequency exceeds 1.9 cycles/s.

11.11 A 20-kg electric motor is mounted on four vertical springs, each having a spring constant of 30 N/cm. Find the period with which the motor vibrates vertically.
As in Problem 11.9, we may replace the springs by an equivalent single spring. Its force constant will be 4(3000 N/m) or 12 000 N/m. Then s r m 20 kg 2 T 2 0:26 s k 12 000 N=m

11.12 Mercury is poured into a glass U-tube. Normally, the mercury stands at equal heights in the two columns, but, when disturbed, it oscillates back and forth from arm to arm. (See Fig. 11-6.) One centimeter of the mercury column has a mass of 15.0 g. Suppose the column is displaced as shown and released, and it vibrates back and forth without friction. Compute (a) the eective spring constant of the motion and (b) its period of oscillation.
(a) When the mercury is displaced x m from equilibrium as shown, the restoring force is the weight of the unbalanced column of length 2x. The mercury has a mass of 1.50 kilograms per meter. The mass of the column is therefore 2x(1.50 kg), and so its weight is mg 29:4 kg Á m=s2 x. Therefore, the restoring force is F 29:4 N=mx which is of the form F kx with k 29:4 N/m. This is the eective spring constant for the motion.

134

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

[CHAP. 11

Fig. 11-6

Fig. 11-7

(b)

The period of motion is T 2

r p M 1:16 M s k

where M is the total mass of mercury in the U-tube, i.e., the total mass being moved by the restoring force.

11.13 Compute the acceleration due to gravity at a place where a simple pendulum 150.3 cm long makes 100.0 cycles in 246.7 s.
246:7 s 2:467 s 100:0 p Squaring T 2 L=g and solving for g gives us We have T g 42 L 9:749 m=s2 T2

11.14 The 200-g mass shown in Fig. 11-7 is pushed to the left against the spring and compresses the spring 15 cm from its equilibrium position. The system is then released, and the mass shoots to the right. If friction can be ignored, how fast will the mass be moving as it shoots away? Assume the mass of the spring to be very small.
When the spring is compressed, energy is stored in it. That energy is 1 kx2 , where x0 0:15 m. After 0 2 release, this energy will be given to the mass as KE. When the spring passes through the equilibrium position, all the PEe will be changed to KE. (Since the mass of the spring is small, its KE can be ignored.) Therefore, Original PEe final KE of mass
1 2 400 2 1 2 kx0 2

1 mv2 2

N=m0:15 m 1 0:200 kgv2 2

from which v 6:7 m/s.

11.15 Suppose that, in Fig. 11-7, the 200-g mass initially moves to the left at a speed of 8.0 m/s. It strikes the spring and becomes attached to it. (a) How far does it compress the spring? (b) If the system then oscillates back and forth, what is the amplitude of the oscillation? Ignore friction and the small mass of the spring.

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

135

(a)

Because the spring can be considered massless, all the KE of the mass will go into compressing the spring. We can therefore write Original KE of mass final PEe
2 1 2 mv0

1 kx2 0 2

where v0 8:0 m/s and x0 is the maximum compression of the spring. For m 0:200 kg and k 400 N/m, the above relation gives x0 0:179 m 0:18 m. (b) The spring compresses 0.179 m from its equilibrium position. At that point, all the energy of the spring±mass system is PEe . As the spring pushes the mass back toward the right, the mass moves through the equilibrium position. The mass stops at a point to the right of the equilibrium position where the energy is again all PEe . Since no losses occurred, the same energy must be stored in the stretched spring as in the compressed spring. Therefore, it will be stretched x0 0:18 m from the equilibrium point. The amplitude of oscillation is therefore 0.18 m.

11.16 In Fig. 11-8, the 2.0-kg mass is released when the spring is unstretched. Neglecting the inertia and friction of the pulley and the mass of the spring and string, ®nd (a) the amplitude of the resulting oscillation and (b) its center or equilibrium point.

Fig. 11-8 (a) Suppose the mass falls a distance h before stopping. At that time, the PEG it lost mgh will be stored in the spring, so that 1 mgh kh2 2 or h2 mg 0:13 m k

The mass will stop in its upward motion when the energy of the system is all recovered as PEG . Therefore it will rise 0.13 m above its lowest position. The amplitude is thus 0:13=2 0:065 m. (b) The center point of the motion is a distance of 0.065 m below the point from which the mass was released, i.e., a distance equal to half the total travel below the highest point.

11.17 A 3.0-g particle at the end of a spring moves according to the equation y 0:75 sin 63t where y is in centimeters and t is in seconds. Find the amplitude and frequency of its motion, its position at t 0:020 s, and the spring constant.
The equation of motion is y y0 sin 2ft. By comparison, we see that the amplitude is y0 0:75 cm. Also, 2f 63 sÀ1 from which f 10 Hz

136

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

[CHAP. 11

(Note that the argument of the sine must be dimensionless; because t is in seconds, 2f must have the unit 1/s.) When t 0:020 s, we have y 0:75 sin 1:26 rad 0:750:952 0:71 cm Notice that the argument of the sine is in radians, not degrees. p To ®nd the spring constant, we use f 1=2 k=m to get k 42 f 2 m 11:9 N=m 12 N=m

Supplementary Problems
11.18 A pendulum is timed as it swings back and forth. The clock is started when the bob is at the left end of its swing. When the bob returns to the left end for the 90th return, the clock reads 60.0 s. What is the period of vibration? The frequency? Ans. 0.667 s, 1.50 Hz A 300-g mass at the end of a Hookean spring vibrates up and down in such a way that it is 2.0 cm above the tabletop at its lowest point and 16 cm above at its highest point. Its period is 4.0 s. Determine (a) the amplitude of vibration, (b) the spring constant, (c) the speed and acceleration of the mass when it is 9 cm above the table top, (d ) the speed and acceleration of the mass when it is 12 cm above the tabletop. Ans. (a) 7.0 cm; (b) 0.74 N/m; (c) 0.11 m/s; zero; (d ) 0.099 m/s, 0.074 m/s2 A coiled Hookean spring is stretched 10 cm when a 1.5-kg mass is hung from it. Suppose a 4.0-kg mass hangs from the spring and is set into vibration with an amplitude of 12 cm. Find (a) the force constant of the spring, (b) the maximum restoring force acting on the vibrating body, (c) the period of vibration, (d ) the maximum speed and the maximum acceleration of the vibrating object, and (e) the speed and acceleration when the displacement is 9 cm. Ans. (a) 0.15 kN/m; (b) 18 N; (c) 1.0 s; (d ) 0.73 m/s, 4.4 m/s2 ; (e) 0.48 m/s, 3.3 m/s2 A 2.5-kg mass undergoes SHM and makes exactly 3 vibrations each second. Compute the acceleration and the restoring force acting on the body when its displacement from the equilibrium position is 5.0 cm. Ans. 18 m/s2 , 44 N A 300-g mass at the end of a spring oscillates with an amplitude of 7.0 cm and a frequency of 1.80 Hz. (a) Find its maximum speed and maximum acceleration. (b) What is its speed when it is 3.0 cm from its equilibrium position? Ans. (a) 0.79 m/s, 8.9 m/s2 ; (b) 0.72 m/s A certain Hookean spring is stretched 20 cm when a given mass is hung from it. What is the frequency of vibration of the mass if pulled down a little and released? Ans. 1.1 Hz A 300-g mass at the end of a spring executes SHM with a period of 2.4 s. Find the period of oscillation of a 133-g mass attached to the same spring. Ans. 1.6 s With a 50-g mass at its end, a spring undergoes SHM with a frequency of 0.70 Hz. How much work is done in stretching the spring 15 cm from its unstretched length? How much energy is then stored in the spring? Ans. 0.011 J, 0.011 J In a situation similar to that shown in Fig. 11-7, a mass is pressed back against a light spring for which k 400 N/m. The mass compresses the spring 8.0 cm and is then released. After sliding 55 cm along the ¯at table from the point of release, the mass comes to rest. How large a friction force opposed its motion? Ans. 2.3 N

11.19

11.20

11.21

11.22

11.23

11.24

11.25

11.26

CHAP. 11]

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND SPRINGS

137

11.27

A 500-g mass is attached to the end of an initially unstretched vertical spring for which k 30 N/m. The mass is then released, so that it falls and stretches the spring. How far will it fall before stopping? (Hint: The PEG lost by the mass must appear as PEe .) Ans. 33 cm A popgun uses a spring for which k 20 N/cm. When cocked, the spring is compressed 3.0 cm. How high can the gun shoot a 5.0-g projectile? Ans. 18 m A cubical block vibrates horizontally in SHM with an amplitude of 8.0 cm and a frequency of 1.50 Hz. If a smaller block sitting on it is not to slide, what is the minimum value that the coecient of static friction between the two blocks can have? Ans. 0.72 Find the frequency of vibration on Mars for a simple pendulum that is 50 cm long. Objects weigh 0.40 as much on Mars as on the Earth. Ans. 0.45 Hz A ``seconds pendulum'' beats seconds; that is, it takes 1 s for half a cycle. (a) What is the length of a simple ``seconds pendulum'' at a place where g 9:80 m/s2 ? (b) What is the length there of a pendulum for which T 1:00 s? Ans. (a) 99.3 cm; (b) 24.8 cm Show that the natural period of vertical oscillation of a mass hung on a Hookean spring is the same as the period of a simple pendulum whose length is equal to the elongation the mass causes when hung on the spring. A particle that is at the origin of coordinates at exactly t 0 vibrates about the origin along the y-axis with a frequency of 20 Hz and an amplitude of 3.0 cm. Give its equation of motion in centimeters. Ans. y 3:0 sin 125:6t A particle vibrates according to the equation x 20 cos 16t, where x is in centimeters. Find its amplitude, frequency, and position at exactly t 0 s. Ans. 20 cm, 2.6 Hz, x 20 cm A particle oscillates according to the equation y 5:0 cos 23t, where y is in centimeters. Find its frequency of oscillation and its position at t 0:15 s. Ans. 3.7 Hz, À4:8 cm

11.28 11.29

11.30 11.31

11.32

11.33

11.34 11.35

Chapter 12
Density; Elasticity
THE MASS DENSITY of a material is its mass per unit volume: mass of body m volume of body V

The SI unit for mass density is kg/m3 , although g/cm3 is also used: 1000 kg/m3 1 g/cm3 . The density of water is close to 1000 kg/m3 .

THE SPECIFIC GRAVITY (sp gr) of a substance is the ratio of the density of the substance to the density of some standard substance. The standard is usually water (at 48C) for liquids and solids, while for gases, it is usually air. sp gr standard Since sp gr is a dimensionless ratio, it has the same value for all systems of units.

ELASTICITY is the property by which a body returns to its original size and shape when the forces that deformed it are removed.

THE STRESS experienced within a solid is the magnitude of the force acting F, divided by the area A over which it acts: Stress force area of surface on which force acts

F A Its SI unit is the pascal (Pa), where 1 Pa 1 N=m2 . Thus, if a cane supports a load the stress at any point within the cane is the load divided by the cross-sectional area at that point; the narrowest regions experience the greatest stress.

STRAIN " is the fractional deformation resulting from a stress. It is measured as the ratio of the change in some dimension of a body to the original dimension in which the change occurred. Strain change in dimension original dimension ÁL L0

Thus, the normal strain under an axial load is the change in length ÁL over the original length L0 : "

Strain has no units because it is a ratio of like quantities. The exact de®nition of strain for various situations is given later. 138
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 12]

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

139

THE ELASTIC LIMIT of a body is the smallest stress that will produce a permanent distortion in the body. When a stress in excess of this limit is applied, the body will not return exactly to its original state after the stress is removed.

YOUNG'S MODULUS Y or the modulus of elasticity, is de®ned as Modulus of elasticity stress strain

The modulus has the same units as stress. A large modulus means that a large stress is required to produce a given strain ± the object is rigid. Accordingly, Y F=A FL0 ÁL=L0 A ÁL

Its SI unit is Pa. Unlike the constant k in Hooke's Law, the value of Y depends only on the material of the wire or rod, and not on its dimensions or con®guration. Consequently, Young's modulus is an important basic measure of the mechanical behavior of materials.

THE BULK MODULUS B describes the volume elasticity of a material. Suppose that a uniformly distributed compressive force acts on the surface of an object and is directed perpendicular to the surface at all points. Then if F is the force acting on and perpendicular to an area A, we de®ne Pressure on A P F A

The SI unit for pressure is Pa. Suppose that the pressure on an object of original volume V0 is increased by an amount ÁP. The pressure increase causes a volume change ÁV, where ÁV will be negative. We then de®ne Volume stress ÁP Volume strain À stress strain ÁV V0

Then

Bulk modulus

BÀ

ÁP V ÁP À 0 ÁV=V0 ÁV

The minus sign is used so as to cancel the negative numerical value of ÁV and thereby make B a positive number. The bulk modulus has the units of pressure. The reciprocal of the bulk modulus is called the compressibility K of the substance.

THE SHEAR MODULUS S describes the shape elasticity of a material. Suppose, as shown in Fig. 12-1, that equal and opposite tangential forces F act on a rectangular block. These shearing forces distort the block as indicated, but its volume remains unchanged. We de®ne

140

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

[CHAP. 12

Shearing stress s Shearing strain "s Then Shear modulus S

tangential force acting area of surface being sheared F A distance sheared distance between surfaces ÁL L0 stress strain F=A FL0 ÁL=L0 A ÁL

Since ÁL is usually very small, the ratio ÁL=L0 is equal approximately to the shear angle in radians. In that case S F A

Fig. 12-1

Solved Problems
12.1 Find the density and speci®c gravity of gasoline if 51 g occupies 75 cm3 .
Density sp gr or sp gr mass 0:051 kg 6:8 Â 102 kg=m3 volume 75 Â 10À6 m3 density of gasoline 6:8 Â 102 kg=m3 0:68 density of water 1000 kg=m3 mass of 75 cm3 gasoline 51 g 0:68 75 g mass of 75 cm3 water

12.2

What volume does 300 g of mercury occupy? The density of mercury is 13 600 kg/m3 .
From m=V,

CHAP. 12]

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

141

V

m 0:300 kg 2:21 Â 10À5 m3 22:1 cm3 13 600 kg=m3

12.3

The speci®c gravity of cast iron is 7.20. Find its density and the mass of 60.0 cm3 of it.
We make use of sp gr From the ®rst equation, Density of iron (sp gr)(density of water) 7:201000 kg=m3 7200 kg=m3 so Mass of 60.0 cm3 V 7200 kg=m3 60:0 Â 10À6 m3 0:432 kg density of substance density of water and m V

12.4

The mass of a calibrated ¯ask is 25.0 g when empty, 75.0 g when ®lled with water, and 88.0 g when ®lled with glycerin. Find the speci®c gravity of glycerin.
From the data, the mass of the glycerin in the ¯ask is 63.0 g, while an equal volume of water has a mass of 50.0 g. Then sp gr mass of glycerin 63:0 g 1:26 mass of water 50:0 g

12.5

A calibrated ¯ask has a mass of 30.0 g when empty, 81.0 g when ®lled with water, and 68.0 g when ®lled with an oil. Find the density of the oil.
We ®rst ®nd the volume of the ¯ask from m=V, using the water data: V Then, for the oil, oil moil 68:0 À 30:0 Â 10À3 kg 745 kg=m3 V 51:0 Â 10À6 m3 m 81:0 À 30:0 Â 10À3 kg 51:0 Â 10À6 m3 1000 kg=m3

12.6

A solid cube of aluminum is 2.00 cm on each edge. The density of aluminum is 2700 kg/m3 . Find the mass of the cube.
Mass of cube V 2700 kg=m3 0:020 0 m3 0:0216 kg 21:6 g

12.7

What is the mass of one liter (1000 cm3 ) of cottonseed oil of density 926 kg/m3 ? How much does it weigh? m V 926 kg=m3 1000 Â 10À6 m3 0:926 kg Weight mg 0:926 kg9:81 m=s2 9:08 N

12.8

An electrolytic tin-plating process gives a tin coating that is 7:50 Â 10À5 cm thick. How large an area can be coated with 0.500 kg of tin? The density of tin is 7300 kg/m3 .
The volume of 0.500 kg of tin is given by m=V to be V m 0:500 kg 6:85 Â 10À5 m3 7300 kg=m3

142

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

[CHAP. 12

The volume of a ®lm with area A and thickness t is V At. Solving for A, we ®nd A as the area that can be covered. V 6:85 Â 10À5 m3 91:3 m2 t 7:50 Â 10À7 m

12.9

A thin sheet of gold foil has an area of 3.12 cm2 and a mass of 6.50 mg. How thick is the sheet? The density of gold is 19 300 kg/m3 .
One milligram is 10À6 kg, so the mass of the sheet is 6:50 Â 10À6 kg. Its volume is V area Â thickness 3:12 Â 10À4 m2 where is the thickness of the sheet. We equate this expression for the volume to m= to get 3:12 Â 10À4 m2 from which 1:08 Â 10À6 m 1:08 m: 6:50 Â 10À6 kg 19 300 kg=m3

12.10 The mass of a liter of milk is 1.032 kg. The butterfat that it contains has a density of 865 kg/m3 when pure, and it constitutes exactly 4 percent of the milk by volume. What is the density of the fat-free skimmed milk?
Volume of fat in 1000 cm3 of milk 47 Â 1000 cm3 40:0 cm3 Mass of 40:0 cm3 fat V 40:0 Â 10À6 m3 865 kg=m3 0:034 6 kg mass 1:032 À 0:0346 kg 1:04 Â 103 kg=m3 Density of skimmed milk volume 1000 À 40:0 Â 10À6 m3

12.11 A metal wire 75.0 cm long and 0.130 cm in diameter stretches 0.0350 cm when a load of 8.00 kg is hung on its end. Find the stress, the strain, and the Young's modulus for the material of the wire.
" Y F 8:00 kg9:81 m=s2 5:91 Â 107 N=m2 5:91 Â 107 Pa A 6:50 Â 10À4 m2 ÁL 0:0350 cm 4:67 Â 10À4 L0 75:0 cm 5:91 Â 107 Pa 1:27 Â 1011 Pa 127 GPa " 4:67 Â 10À4

12.12 A solid cylindrical steel column is 4.0 m long and 9.0 cm in diameter. What will be its decrease in length when carrying a load of 80 000 kg? Y 1:9 Â 1011 Pa:
We ®rst ®nd Cross-sectional area of column r2 0:045 m2 6:36 Â 10À3 m2 Then, from Y F=A=ÁL=L0 we have ÁL FL0 8:00 Â 104 9:81 N4:0 m 2:6 Â 10À3 m 2:6 mm AY 6:36 Â 10À3 m2 1:9 Â 1011 Pa

12.13 Atmospheric pressure is about 1:01 Â 105 Pa. How large a force does the atmosphere exert on a 2.0 cm2 area on the top of your head?

CHAP. 12]

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

143

Because P F=A, where F is perpendicular to A, we have F PA. Assuming that 2.0 cm2 of your head is ¯at (nearly correct) and that the force due to the atmosphere is perpendicular to the surface (as it is), we have F PA 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 2:0 Â 10À4 m2 20 N

12.14 A 60-kg woman stands on a light, cubical box that is 5.0 cm on each edge. The box sits on the ¯oor. What pressure does the box exert on the ¯oor?
P F 609:81 N 2:4 Â 105 N=m2 A 5:0 Â 10À2 m2

12.15 The bulk modulus of water is 2.1 GPa. Compute the volume contraction of 100 mL of water when subjected to a pressure of 1.5 MPa.
From B ÀÁP=ÁV=V0 , we get ÁV À V0 ÁP 100 mL1:5 Â 106 Pa À À0:071 mL B 2:1 Â 109 Pa

12.16 A box-shaped piece of gelatin dessert has a top area of 15 cm2 and a height of 3.0 cm. When a shearing force of 0.50 N is applied to the upper surface, the upper surface displaces 4.0 mm relative to the bottom surface. What are the shearing stress, the shearing strain, and the shear modulus for the gelatin?
s "s S tangential force 0:50 N 0:33 kPa area of face 15 Â 10À4 m2 displacement 0:40 cm 0:13 height 3:0 cm 0:33 kPa 2:5 kPa 0:13

12.17 A 15-kg ball of radius 4.0 cm is suspended from a point 2.94 m above the ¯oor by an iron wire of unstretched length 2.85 m. The diameter of the wire is 0.090 cm, and its Young's modulus is 180 GPa. If the ball is set swinging so that its center passes through the lowest point at 5.0 m/s, by how much does the bottom of the ball clear the ¯oor?
Call the tension in the wire FT when the ball is swinging through the lowest point. Since FT must supply the centripetal force as well as balance the weight, mv2 25 m 9:81 FT mg r r all in proper SI units. This is complicated, because r is the distance from the pivot to the center of the ball when the wire is stretched, and so it is r0 Ár, where r0 , the unstretched length of the pendulum, is r0 2:85 m 0:040 m 2:89 m and where Ár is as yet unknown. However, the unstretched distance from the pivot to the bottom of the ball is 2:85 m 0:080 m 2:93 m, and so the maximum possible value for Ár is 2:94 m À 2:93 m 0:01 m We will therefore incur no more than a 1/3 percent error in r by using r r0 2:89 m. This gives FT 277 N. Under this tension, the wire stretches by

144

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

[CHAP. 12

ÁL Hence the ball misses by

FL0 277 N2:85 m 6:9 Â 10À3 m AY 4:5 Â 10À4 m2 1:80 Â 1011 Pa

2:94 m À 2:85 0:006 9 0:080 m 0:0031 m 3:1 mm To check the approximation we have made, we could use r 2:90 m, its maximum possible value. Then we ®nd that ÁL 6:9 mm, showing that the approximation has caused negligible error.

12.18 A vertical wire 5.0 m long and of 0.008 8 cm2 cross-sectional area has Y 200 GPa. A 2.0-kg object is fastened to its end and stretches the wire elastically. If the object is now pulled down a little and released, the object undergoes vertical SHM. Find the period of its vibration.
The force constant of the wire acting as a vertical spring is given by k F=ÁL, where ÁL is the deformation produced by the force (weight) F. But, from F=A YÁL=L0 , k F AY 8:8 Â 10À7 m2 2:00 Â 1011 Pa 35 kN=m ÁL L0 5:0 m s r m 2:0 kg T 2 0:047 s 2 k 35 Â 103 N=m

Then for the period we have

Supplementary Problems
12.19 12.20 12.21 12.22 Find the density and speci®c gravity of ethyl alcohol if 63.3 g occupies 80.0 mL. Determine the volume of 200 g of carbon tetrachloride, for which sp gr 1:60. The density of aluminum is 2.70 g/cm3 . What volume does 2.00 kg occupy? Ans. 791 kg/m3 , 0.791 Ans. 125 mL Ans. 740 cm3

Determine the mass of an aluminum cube that is 5.00 cm on each edge. The density of aluminum is 2700 kg/m2 . Ans. 0.338 kg A drum holds 200 kg of water or 132 kg of gasoline. Determine for the gasoline (a) its sp gr and (b) in Ans. (a) 0.660; (b) 660 kg/m3 kg/m3 . Air has a density of 1.29 kg/m3 under standard conditions. What is the mass of air in a room with dimensions 10:0 m Â 8:00 m Â 3:00 m? Ans. 310 kg What is the density of the material in the nucleus of the hydrogen atom? The nucleus can be considered to be a sphere of radius 1:2 Â 10À15 m, and its mass is 1:67 Â 10À27 kg. The volume of a sphere is 4=3r3 . Ans. 2:3 Â 1017 kg/m3 To determine the inner radius of a uniform capillary tube, the tube is ®lled with mercury. A column of mercury 2.375 cm long is found to have a mass of 0.24 g. What is the inner radius r of the tube? The density Ans. 0.49 mm of mercury is 13 600 kg/m3 , and the volume of a right circular cylinder is r2 h. Battery acid has sp gr 1:285 and is 38.0 percent sulfuric acid by weight. What mass of sulfuric acid is contained in a liter of battery acid? Ans. 488 g

12.23

12.24

12.25

12.26

12.27

CHAP. 12]

DENSITY; ELASTICITY

145

12.28

A thin, semitransparent ®lm of gold 19 300 kg=m3 has an area of 14.5 cm2 and a mass of 1.93 mg. (a) What is the volume of 1.93 mg of gold? (b) What is the thickness of the ®lm in angstroms, where 1 A 10À10 m? (c) Gold atoms have a diameter of about 5 A . How many atoms thick is the ®lm? Ans. (a) 1:00 Â 10À10 m3 ; (b) 690 A ; (c) 138 atoms thick In an unhealthy, dusty cement mill, there were 2:6 Â 109 dust particles (sp gr 3:0) per cubic meter of air. Assuming the particles to be spheres of 2:0 m diameter, calculate the mass of dust (a) in a 20 m Â 15 m Â 8:0 m room and (b) inhaled in each average breath of 400-cm3 volume. Ans. (a) 78 g; (b) 13 g An iron rod 4.00 m long and 0.500 cm2 in cross-section stretches 1.00 mm when a mass of 225 kg is hung from its lower end. Compute Young's modulus for the iron. Ans. 176 GPa A load of 50 kg is applied to the lower end of a steel rod 80 cm long and 0.60 cm in diameter. How much will the rod stretch? Y 190 GPa for steel. Ans. 73 m A platform is suspended by four wires at its corners. The wires are 3.0 m long and have a diameter of 2.0 mm. Young's modulus for the material of the wires is 180 GPa. How far will the platform drop (due to elongation of the wires) if a 50-kg load is placed at the center of the platform? Ans. 0.65 mm Determine the fractional change in volume as the pressure of the atmosphere 1 Â 105 Pa around a metal block is reduced to zero by placing the block in vacuum. The bulk modulus for the metal is 125 GPa. Ans. 8 Â 10À7 Compute the volume change of a solid copper cube, 40 mm on each edge, when subjected to a pressure of 20 MPa. The bulk modulus for copper is 125 GPa. Ans. À10 mm3 The compressibility of water is 5:0 Â 10À10 m2 =N. Find the decrease in volume of 100 mL of water when subjected to a pressure of 15 MPa. Ans. 0.75 mL Two parallel and opposite forces, each 4000 N, are applied tangentially to the upper and lower faces of a cubical metal block 25 cm on a side. Find the angle of shear and the displacement of the upper surface relative to the lower surface. The shear modulus for the metal is 80 GPa. Ans. 8:0 Â 10À7 rad, À7 2:0 Â 10 m A 60-kg motor sits on four cylindrical rubber blocks. Each cylinder has a height of 3.0 cm and a crosssectional area of 15 cm2 . The shear modulus for this rubber is 2.0 MPa. (a) If a sideways force of 300 N is applied to the motor, how far will it move sideways? (b) With what frequency will the motor vibrate back and forth sideways if disturbed? Ans. (a) 0.075 cm; (b) 13 Hz

12.29

12.30 12.31 12.32

12.33

12.34 12.35 12.36

12.37

Chapter 13
Fluids at Rest
THE AVERAGE PRESSURE on a surface of area A is found as force divided by area, where it is stipulated that the force must be perpendicular (normal) to the area: Average pressure force acting normal to an area area over which the force is distributed P F A

Recall that the SI unit for pressure is the pascal (Pa), and 1 Pa 1 N/m2 .

STANDARD ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE is 1:01 Â 105 Pa, and this is equivalent to 14.7 lb/in:2 . Other units used for pressure are 1 atmosphere (atm) 1:013 Â 105 Pa 1 torr 1 mm of mercury (mmHg) 133:32 Pa 1 lb/in.2 6:895 kPa

THE HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE due to a column of ¯uid of height h and mass density is P gh

PASCAL'S PRINCIPLE: When the pressure on any part of a con®ned ¯uid (liquid or gas) is changed, the pressure on every other part of the ¯uid is also changed by the same amount.

ARCHIMEDES' PRINCIPLE: A body wholly or partly immersed in a ¯uid is buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the ¯uid it displaces. The buoyant force can be considered to act vertically upward through the center of gravity of the displaced ¯uid. FB buoyant force weight of displaced ¯uid The buoyant force on an object of volume V that is totally immersed in a ¯uid of density f is f Vg, and the weight of the object is 0 Vg, where 0 is the density of the object. Therefore, the net upward force on the submerged object is Fnet upward Vgf À 0

Solved Problems
13.1 An 80-kg metal cylinder, 2.0 m long and with each end of area 25 cm2 , stands vertically on one end. What pressure does the cylinder exert on the ¯oor? 146
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 13]

FLUIDS AT REST

147

P

normal force 80 kg9:81 m=s2 3:1 Â 105 Pa area 25 Â 10À4 m2

13.2

Atmospheric pressure is about 1:0 Â 105 Pa. How large a force does the still air in a room exert on the inside of a window pane that is 40 cm Â 80 cm?
The atmosphere exerts a force normal to any surface placed in it. Consequently, the force on the window pane is perpendicular to the pane and is given by F PA 1:0 Â 105 N=m2 0:40 Â 0:80 m2 3:2 Â 104 N Of course, a nearly equal force due to the atmosphere on the outside keeps the window from breaking.

13.3

Find the pressure due to the ¯uid at a depth of 76 cm in still (a) water (w 1:00 g/cm3 ) and (b) mercury ( 13:6 g/cm3 ).
a b P w gh 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:76 m 7450 N=m2 7:5 kPa P gh 13 600 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:76 m 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 % 1:0 atm

13.4

When a submarine dives to a depth of 120 m, to how large a total pressure is its exterior surface subjected? The density of seawater is about 1.03 g/cm3 .
P atmospheric pressure pressure of water 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 gh 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 1030 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 120 m 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 12:1 Â 105 N=m2 13:1 Â 105 N=m2 1:31 MPa

13.5

How high would water rise in the pipes of a building if the water pressure gauge shows the pressure at the ground ¯oor to be 270 kPa (about 40 lb/in.2 )?
Water pressure gauges read the excess pressure due to the water, that is, the dierence between the pressure in the water and the pressure of the atmosphere. The water pressure at the bottom of the highest column that can be supported is 270 kPa. Therefore, P w gh gives h P 2:70 Â 105 N=m2 27:5 m w g 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2

13.6

A reservoir dam holds an 8.00-km2 lake behind it. Just behind the dam, the lake is 12.0 m deep. What is the water pressure (a) at the base of the dam and (b) at a point 3.0 m down from the lake's surface?
The area of the lake behind the dam has no eect on the pressure against the dam. At any point, P w gh: a b P 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 12:0 m 118 kPa P 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 3:0 m 29 kPa

13.7

A weighted piston con®nes a ¯uid density in a closed container, as shown in Fig. 13.1. The combined weight of piston and weight is 200 N, and the cross-sectional area of the piston is A 8:0 cm2 . Find the total pressure at point B if the ¯uid is mercury and h 25 cm Hg 13 600 kg/m3 ). What would an ordinary pressure gauge read at B?

148

FLUIDS AT REST

[CHAP. 13

Notice what Pascal's principle tells us about the pressure applied to the ¯uid by the piston and atmosphere: This added pressure is applied at all points within the ¯uid. Therefore the total pressure at B is composed of three parts: Pressure of atmosphere 1:0 Â 105 Pa F 200 N Pressure due to piston and weight W 2:5 Â 105 Pa A 8:0 Â 10À4 m2 Pressure due to height h of fluid hg 0:33 Â 105 Pa In this case, the pressure of the ¯uid itself is relatively small. We have Total pressure at B 3:8 Â 105 Pa The gauge pressure does not include atmospheric pressure. Therefore, Gauge pressure at B 2:8 Â 105 Pa

Fig. 13-1

Fig. 13-2

13.8

In a hydraulic press such as the one shown in Fig. 13-2, the large piston has cross-sectional area A1 200 cm2 and the small piston has cross-sectional area A2 5:0 cm2 . If a force of 250 N is applied to the small piston, ®nd the force F1 on the large piston.
By Pascal's principle, Pressure under large piston pressure under small piston so that F1 A1 200 F 250 N 10 kN A2 2 5:0 or F1 F2 A1 A2

13.9

For the system shown in Fig. 13-3, the cylinder on the left, at L, has a mass of 600 kg and a crosssectional area of 800 cm2 . The piston on the right, at S, has a cross-sectional area of 25 cm2 and a negligible weight. If the apparatus is ®lled with oil 0:78 g/cm3 ), ®nd the force F required to hold the system in equilibrium as shown.
The pressures at points H1 and H2 are equal because they are at the same level in a single connected ¯uid. Therefore,

CHAP. 13]

FLUIDS AT REST

149

Fig. 13-3

Pressure at H1 pressure at H2 pressure due to pressure due to F pressure due to 8.0 m of oil) left piston and right piston 6009:81 N F 8:0 m780 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:080 0 m2 25 Â 10À4 m2

from which F 31 N.

13.10 A barrel will rupture when the gauge pressure within it reaches 350 kPa. It is attached to the lower end of a vertical pipe, with the pipe and barrel ®lled with oil 890 kg/m3 ). How long can the pipe be if the barrel is not to rupture?
From P gh we have h P 350 Â 103 N=m2 40:1 m g 9:81 m=s2 890 kg=m3

13.11 A vertical test tube has 2.0 cm of oil 0:80 g/cm3 ) ¯oating on 8.0 cm of water. What is the pressure at the bottom of the tube due to the ¯uid in it?
P 1 gh1 2 gh2 800 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:020 m 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:080 m 0:94 kPa

13.12 As shown in Fig. 13-4, a column of water 40 cm high supports a 31-cm column of an unknown ¯uid. What is the density of the unknown ¯uid?
The pressures at point A due to the two ¯uids must be equal (or the one with the higher pressure would push the lower-pressure ¯uid away). Therefore, Pressure due to water pressure due to unknown fluid 1 gh1 2 gh2 from which 2 h1 40 1 1000 kg=m3 1290 kg=m3 1:3 Â 103 kg=m3 31 h2

150

FLUIDS AT REST

[CHAP. 13

Fig. 13-4

Fig. 13-5

13.13 The U-tube device connected to the tank in Fig. 13-5 is called a manometer. As you can see, the mercury in the tube stands higher in one side than the other. What is the pressure in the tank if atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury? The density of mercury is 13.6 g/cm3 :
Pressure at A1 pressure at A2 P in tank P due to 5 cm mercury) P due to atmosphere P 0:05 m13 600 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:76 m13 600 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 from which P 95 kPa: Or, more simply perhaps, we could note that the pressure in the tank is 5.0 cm of mercury lower than atmospheric. So the pressure is 71 cm of mercury, which is 94.6 kPa.

13.14 The mass of a block of aluminum is 25.0 g. (a) What is its volume? (b) What will be the tension in a string that suspends the block when the block is totally submerged in water? The density of aluminum is 2700 kg/m3 .
(a) Because m=V, we have V (b) m 0:025 0 kg 9:26 Â 10À6 m3 9:26 cm3 2700 kg=m3

The block displaces 9:26 Â 10À6 m3 of water when submerged, so the buoyant force on it is FB weight of displaced water (volume) of water)g 9:26 Â 10À6 m3 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:090 8 N The tension in the supporting cord plus the buoyant force must equal the weight of the block if it is to be in equilibrium (see Fig. 13-6). That is, FT FB mg, from which FT mg À FB 0:025 0 kg9:81 m=s2 À 0:090 8 N 0:154 N

13.15 A piece of alloy has a measured mass of 86 g in air and 73 g when immersed in water. Find its volume and its density.
Figure 13-6 shows the situation when the object is in water. From the ®gure, FB FT mg, so FB 0:0869:81 N À 0:0739:81 N 0:0139:81 N But FB must be equal to the weight of the displaced water.

CHAP. 13]

FLUIDS AT REST

151

Fig. 13-6

FB weight of water (mass of water)g (volume of water)(density of water)g or 0:0139:81 N V1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 mass 0:086 kg 6:6 Â 103 kg=m3 volume 1:3 Â 10À5 m3 from which V 1:3 Â 10À5 m3 . This is also the volume of the piece of alloy. Therefore, of alloy

13.16 A solid aluminum cylinder with 2700 kg/m3 has a measured mass of 67 g in air and 45 g when immersed in turpentine. Determine the density of turpentine.
The FB acting on the immersed cylinder is FB 0:067 À 0:0459:81 N 0:0229:81 N This is also the weight of the displaced turpentine. The volume of the cylinder is, from m=V, V of cylinder m 0:067 kg 2:5 Â 10À5 m3 2700 kg=m3

This is also the volume of the displaced turpentine. We therefore have, for the turpentine, mass weight=g 0:0229:81=9:81 kg 8:9 Â 102 kg=m3 volume volume 2:48 Â 10À5 m3

13.17 A glass stopper has a mass of 2.50 g when measured in air, 1.50 g in water, and 0.70 g in sulfuric acid. What is the density of the acid? Its speci®c gravity?
The FB on the stopper in water is 0:002 50 À 0:001 509:81 N. This is the weight of the displaced water. Since m=V, or g FW =V, we have Volume of stopper volume of displaced water V The buoyant force in acid is 2:50 À 0:70 Â 10À3 9:81 N 0:001 809:81 N weight g

0:001 009:81 N 1:00 Â 10À6 m3 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2

152

FLUIDS AT REST

[CHAP. 13

But this is equal to the weight of displaced acid, mg. Since m=V, and since m 0:001 80 kg and V 1:00 Â 10À6 m3 , we have of acid Then, for the acid, sp gr Alternative Method Weight of displaced water 2:50 À 1:50 Â 10À3 9:81 N Weight of displaced acid 2:50 À 0:70 Â 10À3 9:81 N so sp gr of acid weight of displaced acid 1:80 1:8 weight of equal volume of displaced water 1:00 of acid 1800 1:8 of water 1000 0:001 80 kg 1:8 Â 103 kg=m3 1:00 Â 10À6 m3

Then, since sp gr of acid = of acid)/( of water), we have of acid (sp gr of acid)( of water)=(1.8)(1000 kg/m3 ) 1:8 Â 103 kg/m3

13.18 The density of ice is 917 kg/m3 . What fraction of the volume of a piece of ice will be above water when ¯oating in fresh water?
The piece of ice will ¯oat in the water, since its density is less than 1000 kg/m3 , the density of water. As it does, FB weight of displaced water weight of piece of ice But the weight of the ice is ice gV, where V is the volume of the piece. In addition, the weight of the displaced water is w gV H , where V H is the volume of the displaced water. Substituting in the above equation gives ice gV w gV H 917 V 0:917V V H ice V 1000 w The fraction of the volume that is above water is then V À V H V À 0:917V 1 À 0:917 0:083 V V

13.19 A 60-kg rectangular box, open at the top, has base dimensions 1.0 m by 0.80 m and depth 0.50 m. (a) How deep will it sink in fresh water? (b) What weight FWb of ballast will cause it to sink to a depth of 30 cm?
(a) Assuming that the box ¯oats, we have FB weight of displaced water weight of box 1000 kg=m 9:81 m=s2 1:0 m Â 0:80 m Â y 60 kg9:81 m=s2 where y is the depth the box sinks. Solving gives y 0:075 m. Because this is smaller than 0.50 m, our assumption is shown to be correct. b FB weight of box weight of ballast But the FB is equal to the weight of the displaced water. Therefore, the above equation becomes 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 1:0 m Â 0:80 m Â 0:30 m 609:81 N FWb from which FWb 1760 N 1:8 kN. So the ballast must have a mass of (1760/9.81) kg 180 kg.
3

CHAP. 13]

FLUIDS AT REST

153

13.20 A foam plastic p 0:58 g=cm3 is to be used as a life preserver. What volume of plastic must be used if it is to keep 20 percent (by volume) of an 80-kg man above water in a lake? The average density of the man is 1.04 g/cm3 .
At equilibrium we have FB on man FB on plastic weight of man weight of plastic w 0:80Vm g w Vp g m Vm g p Vp g w À p Vp m À 0:80w Vm

or

where subscripts m, w, and p refer to man, water, and plastic, respectively. But m Vm 80 kg and so Vm 80=1040 m3 . Substitution gives 1000 À 580 kg/m3 ]Vp 1040 À 800 kg/m3 ][(80/1040) m3 ] from which Vp 0:044 m3 :

13.21 A partly ®lled beaker of water sits on a scale, and its weight is 2.30 N. When a piece of metal suspended from a thread is totally immersed in the beaker (but not touching bottom), the scale reads 2.75 N. What is the volume of the metal?
The water exerts an upward buoyant force on the metal. According to the law of action and reaction, the metal exerts an equal downward force on the water. It is this force that increases the scale reading from 2.30 N to 2.75 N. Hence the buoyant force is 2:75 À 2:30 0:45 N. Then, because FB weight of displaced water w gV 1000 kg/m3 )(9.81 m/s2 V we have the volume of the displaced water, and of the piece of metal, as V 0:45 N 46 Â 10À6 m3 46 cm3 9810 kg=m2 Á s2

13.22 A piece of pure gold 19:3 g/cm3 ) is suspected to have a hollow center. It has a mass of 38.25 g when measured in air and 36.22 g in water. What is the volume of the central hole in the gold?
From m=V, Volume of 38.25 g of pure gold Volume of displaced water 0:038 25 kg 1:982 Â 10À6 m3 19 300 kg=m3 38:25 À 36:22 Â 10À3 kg 2:030 Â 10À6 m3 1000 kg=m3

Volume of hole 2:030 À 1:982 cm3 0:048 cm3

13.23 A wooden cylinder has mass m and base area A. It ¯oats in water with its axis vertical. Show that the cylinder undergoes SHM if given a small vertical displacement. Find the frequency of its motion.
When the cylinder is pushed down a distance y, it displaces an additional volume Ay of water. Because this additional displaced volume has mass Ayw , an additional buoyant force Ayw g acts on the cylinder, where w is the density of water. This is an unbalanced force on the cylinder and is a restoring force. In addition, the force is proportional to the displacement and so is a Hooke's Law force. Therefore the cylinder will undergo SHM, as described in Chapter 11. Comparing FB Aw gy with Hooke's Law in the form F ky, we see that the spring constant for the motion is k Aw g. This, acting on the cylinder of mass m, causes it to have a vibrational frequency of r r 1 k 1 Aw g f 2 m 2 m

154

FLUIDS AT REST

[CHAP. 13

13.24 What must be the volume V of a 5.0-kg balloon ®lled with helium He 0:178 kg/m3 ) if it is to lift a 30-kg load? Use air 1:29 kg/m3 :
The buoyant force, Vair g, must lift the weight of the balloon, its load, and the helium within it: which gives Vair g 35 kgg VHe g 35 kg 35 kg V 32 m3 air À He 1:11 kg=m3

13.25 Find the density of a ¯uid at a depth h in terms of its density 0 at the surface.
If a mass m of ¯uid has volume V0 at the surface, then it will have volume V0 À ÁV at a depth h. The density at depth h is then m m while 0 V0 À ÁV V0 which gives V0 1 0 V0 À ÁV 1 À ÁV=V0

However, from Chapter 12, the bulk modulus is B P=ÁV=V0 and so ÁV=V0 P=B. Making this substitution, we obtain 1 0 1 À P=B If we assume that is close to 0 , then the pressure at depth h is approximately 0 gh, and so 1 0 1 À 0 gh=B

Supplementary Problems
13.26 A 60-kg performer balances on a cane. The end of the cane in contact with the ¯oor has an area of 0.92 cm2 . Find the pressure exerted on the ¯oor by the cane. (Neglect the weight of the cane.) Ans. 6.4 MPa A certain town receives its water directly from a water tower. If the top of the water in the tower is 26.0 m above the water faucet in a house, what should be the water pressure at the faucet? (Neglect the eects of other water users.) Ans. 255 kPa At a height of 10 km (33 000 ft) above sea level, atmospheric pressure is about 210 mm of mercury. What is the resultant normal force on a 600 cm2 window of an airplane ¯ying at this height? Assume the pressure Ans. 4.4 kN inside the plane is 760 mm of mercury. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg/m3 . A narrow tube is sealed onto a tank as shown in Fig. 13-7. The base of the tank has an area of 80 cm2 . (a) Find the force on the bottom of the tank due to oil when the tank and capillary are ®lled with oil 0:72 g/cm3 to the height h1 . (b) Repeat for h2 : Ans. (a) 11 N downward; (b) 20 N downward Repeat Problem 13.29, but now ®nd the force on the top wall of the tank due to the oil. upward; (b) 9.6 N upward Ans. (a) 1.1 N

13.27

13.28

13.29

13.30

13.31

Compute the pressure required for a water supply system that will raise water 50.0 m vertically. Ans. 490 kPa

CHAP. 13]

FLUIDS AT REST

155

Fig. 13-7 13.32 The area of a piston of a force pump is 8.0 cm2 . What force must be applied to the piston to raise oil 0:78 g/cm2 to a height of 6.0 m? Assume the upper end of the oil is open to the atmosphere. Ans. 37 N The diameter of the large piston of a hydraulic press is 20 cm, and the area of the small piston is 0.50 cm2 . If a force of 400 N is applied to the small piston, (a) what is the resulting force exerted on the large piston? (b) What is the increase in pressure underneath the small piston? (c) Underneath the large piston? Ans. (a) 2:5 Â 105 N; (b) 8.0 MPa; (c) 8.0 MPa A metal cube, 2.00 cm on each side, has a density of 6600 kg/m3 . Find its apparent mass when it is totally submerged in water. Ans. 44.8 g A solid wooden cube, 30.0 cm on each edge, can be totally submerged in water if it is pushed downward with a force of 54.0 N. What is the density of the wood? Ans. 800 kg/m3 A metal object ``weighs'' 26.0 g in air and 21.48 g when totally immersed in water. What is the volume of the object? Its mass density? Ans. 4.55 cm3 , 5:72 Â 103 kg/m3 A solid piece of aluminum 2:70 g/cm3 ) has a mass of 8.35 g when measured in air. If it is hung from a thread and submerged in a vat of oil 0:75 g/cm3 ), what will be the tension in the thread? Ans. 0.059 N A beaker contains oil of density 0.80 g/cm3 . By means of a thread, a 1.6-cm cube of aluminum 2:70 g/cm3 ) is submerged in the oil. Find the tension in the thread. Ans. 0.076 N A tank containing oil of sp gr 0:80 rests on a scale and weighs 78.6 N. By means of a wire, a 6.0 cm cube of aluminum, sp gr 2:70, is submerged in the oil. Find (a) the tension in the wire and (b) the scale reading if none of the oil over¯ows. Ans. (a) 4.0 N; (b) 80 N Downward forces of 45.0 N and 15.0 N, respectively, are required to keep a plastic block totally immersed in Ans. 620 kg/m3 water and in oil. If the volume of the block is 8000 cm3 , ®nd the density of the oil. Determine the unbalanced force acting on an iron ball r 1:5 cm, 7:8 g/cm3 ) when just released while totally immersed in (a) water and (b) mercury 13:6 g/cm3 ). What will be the initial acceleration of the ball in each case? Ans. (a) 0.94 N down, 8.6 m/s2 down; (b) 0.80 N up, 7.3 m/s2 up

13.33

13.34

13.35

13.36

13.37

13.38

13.39

13.40

13.41

156

FLUIDS AT REST

[CHAP. 13

13.42

A 2.0 cm cube of metal is suspended by a thread attached to a scale. The cube appears to have a mass of 47.3 g when measured submerged in water. What will its mass appear to be when submerged in glycerin, sp gr 1:26? (Hint: Find too.) Ans. 45 g A balloon and its gondola have a total (empty) mass of 2:0 Â 102 kg. When ®lled, the balloon contains 900 m3 of helium at a density of 0.183 kg/m3 . Find the added load, in addition to its own weight, that the balloon can lift. The density of air is 1.29 kg/m3 . Ans. 7.8 kN A certain piece of metal has a measured mass of 5.00 g in air, 3.00 g in water, and 3.24 g in benzene. Determine the mass density of the metal and of the benzene. Ans. 2:50 Â 103 kg/m3 , 880 kg/m3 A spring, which may be either bronze (sp gr 8.8) or brass (sp gr 8.4), has a mass of 1.26 g when measured in air and 1.11 g in water. Which is it? Ans. brass What fraction of the volume of a piece of quartz 2:65 g/cm3 ) will be submerged when it is ¯oating in a container of mercury 13:6 g/cm3 )? Ans. 0.195 A cube of wood ¯oating in water supports a 200-g mass resting on the center of its top face. When the mass is removed, the cube rises 2.00 cm. Determine the volume of the cube. Ans. 1:00 Â 103 cm3 A cork has a measured mass of 5.0 g in air. A sinker has a measured mass of 86 g in water. The cork is attached to the sinker and both together have a measured mass of 71 g when under water. What is the density of the cork? Ans. 2:5 Â 102 kg=m3 A glass of water has a 10-cm3 ice cube ¯oating in it. The glass is ®lled to the brim with cold water. By the time the ice cube has completely melted, how much water will have ¯owed out of the glass? The sp gr of ice is 0.92. Ans. none A glass tube is bent into the form of a U. A 50.0 cm height of olive oil in one arm is found to balance 46.0 cm of water in the other. What is the density of the olive oil? Ans. 920 kg/m3 On a day when the pressure of the atmosphere is 1:000 Â 105 Pa, a chemist distills a liquid under slightly reduced pressure. The pressure within the distillation chamber is read by an oil-®lled manometer (density of oil 0:78 g/cm3 ). The dierence in heights on the two sides of the manometer is 27 cm. What is the pressure in the distillation chamber? Ans. 98 kPa

13.43

13.44 13.45 13.46 13.47 13.48

13.49

13.50 13.51

Chapter 14
Fluids in Motion
FLUID FLOW OR DISCHARGE J: When a ¯uid that ®lls a pipe ¯ows through the pipe with an average speed v, the ¯ow or discharge J is J Av where A is the cross-sectional area of the pipe. The units of J are m3 /s in the SI and ft3 /s in U.S. customary units. Sometimes J is called the rate of ¯ow or the discharge rate.

EQUATION OF CONTINUITY: Suppose an incompressible (constant-density) ¯uid ®lls a pipe and ¯ows through it. Suppose further that the cross-sectional area of the pipe is A1 at one point and A2 at another. Since the ¯ow through A1 must equal the ¯ow through A2 , one has J A1 v1 A2 v2 constant where v1 and v2 are the average ¯uid speeds over A1 and A2 , respectively.

THE SHEAR RATE of a ¯uid is the rate at which the shear strain within the ¯uid is changing. Because strain has no units, the SI unit for shear rate is sÀ1 .

THE VISCOSITY of a ¯uid is a measure of how large a shear stress is required to produce unit shear rate. Its unit is that of stress per unit shear rate, or Pa Á s in the SI. Another SI unit is the N Á s=m2 (or kg/m Á s, called the poiseuille (Pl): 1 Pl 1 kg/m Á s 1 Pa Á s. Other units used are the poise (P), where 1 P 0:1 , and the centipoise (cP), where 1 cP 10À3 Pl. A viscous ¯uid, such as tar, has large :

POISEUILLE'S LAW: radius R is given by

The ¯uid ¯ow through a cylindrical pipe of length L and cross-sectional J R4 Pi À Po 8L

where Pi À Po is the pressure dierence between the two ends of the pipe (input minus output).

THE WORK DONE BY A PISTON in forcing a volume V of ¯uid into a cylinder against an opposing pressure P is given by PV:

THE WORK DONE BY A PRESSURE P acting on a surface of area A as the surface moves through a distance Áx normal to the surface (thereby displacing a volume A Áx ÁV) is Work PA Áx P ÁV 157
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

158

FLUIDS IN MOTION

[CHAP. 14

BERNOULLI'S EQUATION for the steady ¯ow of a continuous stream of ¯uid: Consider two dierent points along the stream path. Let point 1 be at a height h1 , and let v1 , 1 , and P1 be the ¯uid-speed, density, and pressure at that point. Similarly de®ne h2 , v2 , 2 , and P2 for point 2. Then, provided the ¯uid is incompressible and has negligible viscosity, P1 1 v2 h1 g P2 1 v2 h2 g 1 2 2 2 where 1 2 and g is the acceleration due to gravity.

TORRICELLI'S THEOREM: Suppose that a tank contains liquid and is open to the atmosphere at its top. If an ori®ce (opening) exists in thep at a distance h below the top of the tank liquid, then the speed of out¯ow from the ori®ce is 2gh, provided the liquid obeys Bernoulli's equation and the top of the liquid may be regarded as motionless.

THE REYNOLDS NUMBER NR is a dimensionless number that applies to a ¯uid of viscosity and density ¯owing with speed v through a pipe (or past an obstacle) with diameter D: NR vD

For systems of the same geometry, ¯ows will usually be similar provided their Reynolds numbers are close. Turbulent ¯ow occurs if NR for the ¯ow exceeds about 2000 for pipes or about 10 for obstacles.

Solved Problems
14.1 Oil ¯ows through a pipe 8.0 cm in diameter, at an average speed of 4.0 m/s. What is the ¯ow J in m3 /s and m3 /h?
J Av 0:040 m2 4:0 m=s 0:020 m3 =s 0:020 m3 =s3600 s=h 72 m3 =h

14.2

Exactly 250 mL of ¯uid ¯ows out of a tube whose inner diameter is 7.0 mm in a time of 41 s. What is the average speed of the ¯uid in the tube?
From J Av, since 1 mL 10À6 m3 , v J 250 Â 10À6 m3 =41 s 0:16 m=s A 0:003 5 m2

14.3

A 14 cm inner diameter (i.d.) water main furnishes water (through intermediate pipes) to a 1.00 cm i.d. faucet pipe. If the average speed in the faucet pipe is 3.0 cm/s, what will be the average speed it causes in the water main?
The two ¯ows are equal. From the continuity equation, we have J A 1 v1 A 2 v2

CHAP. 14]

FLUIDS IN MOTION

159

Letting 1 be the faucet and 2 be the water main, we have v2 v1

2 A1 r2 1 v1 1 3:0 cm=s 0:015 cm=s 2 A2 14 r2

14.4

How much water will ¯ow in 30.0 s through 200 mm of capillary tube of 1.50 mm i.d., if the pressure dierential across the tube is 5.00 cm of mercury? The viscosity of water is 0.801 cP and for mercury is 13 600 kg/m3 .
We shall make use of Poiseuille's Law with Pi À Po gh 13 600 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:050 0 m 6660 N=m2 kg=m Á s 8:01 Â 10À4 kg=m Á s 0:801 cP 10À3 cP r4 Pi À Po 7:5 Â 10À4 m4 6660 N=m2 5:2 Â 10À6 m3 =s 5:2 mL=s 8L 88:01 Â 10À4 kg=m Á s0:200 m

and Thus, we have J

In 30.0 s, the quantity that would ¯ow out of the tube is (5.2 mL/s)(30 s) 1:6 Â 102 mL.

14.5

An artery in a certain person has been reduced to half its original inside diameter by deposits on the inner artery wall. By what factor will the blood ¯ow through the artery be reduced if the pressure dierential across the artery has remained unchanged?
From Poiseuille's Law, J G r4 . Therefore, 4 Jfinal rfinal 4 1 0:062 5 Joriginal roriginal 2

14.6

Under the same pressure dierential, compare the ¯ow of water through a pipe to the ¯ow of SAE No. 10 oil. for water is 0.801 cP; for the oil is 200 cP.
From Poiseuille's Law, J G 1=. Therefore, Jwater 200 cP 250 Joil 0:801 cP so the ¯ow of water is 250 times as large as that of the oil under the same pressure dierential.

14.7

Calculate the power output of the heart if, in each heartbeat, it pumps 75 mL of blood at an average pressure of 100 mmHg. Assume 65 heartbeats per minute.
The work done by the heart is P ÁV. In one minute, ÁV 6575 Â 10À6 m3 . Also P 100 mmHg so Power 1:01 Â 105 Pa 1:33 Â 104 Pa 760 mmHg

work 1:33 Â 104 Pa6575 Â 10À6 m3 1:1 W time 60 s

14.8

What volume of water will escape per minute from an open-top tank through an opening 3.0 cm in diameter that is 5.0 m below the water level in the tank? (See Fig. 14-1.)
We can use Bernoulli's equation, with 1 representing the top level and 2 the ori®ce. Then P1 P2 and h1 5:0 m, h2 0.

160

FLUIDS IN MOTION

[CHAP. 14

Fig. 14-1 P1 1 v2 h1 g P2 1 v2 h2 g 1 2 2 2
2 1 2 v1

h1 g 1 v2 h2 g 2 2

If the tank is large, v1 can be approximated as zero. Then, solving for v2 , we obtain Torricelli's equation: p q v2 2gh1 À h2 29:81 m=s2 5:0 m 9:9 m=s and the ¯ow is given by J v2 A2 9:9 m=s1:5 Â 10À2 m2 7:0 Â 10À3 m3 =s 0:42 m3 =min

14.9

A water tank springs a leak at position 2 in Fig. 14-2, where the water pressure is 500 kPa. What is the velocity of escape of the water through the hole?

Fig. 14-2 We use Bernoulli's equation with P1 À P2 5:00 Â 105 N/m2 , h1 h2 , and the approximation v1 0. Then P1 À P2 h1 À h2 g 1 v2 2 2 whence s s 2P1 À P2 25:00 Â 105 N=m2 31:6 m=s v2 1000 kg=m3

14.10 Water ¯ows at the rate of 30 mL/s through an opening at the bottom of a tank in which the water is 4.0 m deep. Calculate the rate of escape of the water if an added pressure of 50 kPa is applied to the top of the water.

CHAP. 14]

FLUIDS IN MOTION

161

From Bernoulli's equation in the case where v1 is essentially zero, P1 À P2 h1 À h2 g 1 v2 2 2 We can write this twice, before the pressure is added and after. P1 À P2 before 5 Â 104 N=m2 h1 À h2 g 1 v2 after 2 2 P1 À P2 before 0 and division of the second equation by the ®rst gives v2 after 5 Â 104 N=m2 h1 À h2 g 2 2 h1 À h2 g v2 before But Therefore; h1 À h2 g 4:0 m1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 3:9 Â 104 N=m2 s v2 after 8:9 Â 104 N=m2 1:51 v2 before 3:9 Â 104 N=m2 Jafter 1:51 Jbefore P1 À P2 before h1 À h2 g 1 v2 before 2 2

If the opening and the top of the tank are originally at atmospheric pressure, then

Since J Av, this can be written as or Jafter 30 mL=s1:51 45 mL=s

14.11 How much work W is done by a pump in raising 5.00 m3 of water 20.0 m and forcing it into a main at a gauge pressure of 150 kPa?
W (work to raise water) (work to push it in) mgh P ÁV W 5:00 m3 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 20:0 m 1:50 Â 105 N=m2 5:00 m3 1:73 Â 106 J

14.12 A horizontal pipe has a constriction in it, as shown in Fig. 14-3. At point 1 the diameter is 6.0 cm, while at point 2 it is only 2.0 cm. At point 1, v1 2:0 m/s and P1 180 kPa. Calculate v2 and P2 :
We have two unknowns and will need two equations. Using Bernoulli's equation with h1 h2 , we have P1 1 v2 P2 1 v2 1 2 2 2 or P1 1 v2 À v2 P2 1 2 2

Fig. 14-3 Furthermore, v1 2:0 m/s, and the equation of continuity tells us that v2 v1 2 A1 r 2:0 m=s 1 2:0 m=s9:0 18 m=s A2 r2

162

FLUIDS IN MOTION

[CHAP. 14

Substituting then gives 1:80 Â 105 N/m2 1 1000 kg/m3 2:0 m/s)2 À 18 m/s)2 P2 2 from which P2 0:20 Â 105 N/m2 20 kPa.

14.13 What must be the gauge pressure in a large ®re hose if the nozzle is to shoot water straight upward to a height of 30.0 m?

p To rise to a height h, a projectile must have an initial speed 2gh. (We obtain this by equating 1 mv2 to 0 2 mgh.) We can ®nd this speed in terms of the dierence between the pressures inside and outside the hose (the gauge pressure) by writing Bernoulli's equation for points just inside and outside the nozzle: Pin 1 v2 hin g Pout 1 v2 hout g out in 2 2 Here hout % hin and because the hose is large vin % 0, therefore p Substitution of 2gh for vout gives Pin À Pout 1 v2 out 2

Pin À Pout gh 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 30:0 m 294 kPa How could you obtain this latter equation directly from Torricelli's Theorem?

14.14 At what rate does water ¯ow from a 0.80 cm i.d. faucet if the water pressure is 200 kPa?
We use Bernoulli's equation for points just inside and outside the faucet: Pin 1 v2 hin g Pout 1 v2 hout g in out 2 2 Taking hout hin and Pin À Pout 200 kPa, we have v2 À v2 200 Â 103 Pa out in 2

Assuming v2 ( v2 , we solve to obtain vout 20 m/s. The ¯ow rate is then out in J vA 20 m=sr2 20 m=s0:16 Â 10À4 m2 1:0 Â 10À3 m3 =s

14.15 The pipe shown in Fig. 14-4 has a diameter of 16 cm at section 1 and 10 cm at section 2. At section 1 the pressure is 200 kPa. Point 2 is 6.0 m higher than point 1. When oil of density 800 kg/m3 ¯ows at a rate of 0.030 m3 /s, ®nd the pressure at point 2 if viscous eects are negligible.
From J v1 A1 v2 A2 we have v1 v2 We can now use Bernoulli's equation: P1 1 v2 gh1 À h2 P2 1 v2 1 2 2 2 Setting P1 2:00 Â 105 N=m2 ; h2 À h1 6 m and 800 kg=m3 gives P2 2:00 Â 105 N=m3 1 800 kg=m3 1:49 m=s2 À 3:82 m=s2 À 800 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 6:0 m 2 1:48 Â 105 N=m2 1:5 Â 105 kPa. J 0:030 m3 =s 1:49 m=s A1 8:0 Â 10À2 m2 J 0:030 m3 =s 3:82 m=s A2 5:0 Â 10À2 m2

CHAP. 14]

FLUIDS IN MOTION

163

Fig. 14-4

Fig. 14-5

14.16 A venturi meter equipped with a dierential mercury manometer is shown in Fig. 14-5. At the inlet, point 1, the diameter is 12 cm, while at the throat, point 2, the diameter is 6.0 cm. What is the ¯ow J of water through the meter if the mercury manometer reading is 22 cm? The density of mercury is 13.6 g/cm3 :
From the manometer reading we obtain P1 À P2 gh 13 600 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2 0:22 m 2:93 Â 104 N=m2 Since J v1 A1 v2 A2 , we have v1 J=A1 and v2 J=A2 . Using Bernoulli's equation with h1 À h2 0 gives P1 À P2 1 v2 À v2 0 1 2 2 2:93 Â 10 N=m where A1 r2 0:0602 m2 0:011 31 m2 1 Substitution then gives J 0:022 m3 /s. and A2 r2 0:0302 m2 0:002 8 m2 2
4 2 1 21000

1 1 kg=m 2 À 2 J 2 0 A1 A2
3

14.17 A wind tunnel is to be used with a 20 cm high model car to approximately reproduce the situation in which a 550 cm high car is moving at 15 m/s. What should be the wind speed in the tunnel? Is the ¯ow likely to be turbulent?
We want the Reynolds number NR to be the same in both cases, so that the situations will be similar. That is, we want vD vD NR tunnel air Both and are the same in the two cases, so we have vt Dt va Da from which vt va Da 15 m=s550=20 0:41 km=s Dt

To investigate turbulence, we evaluate NR using 1:29 kg/m3 and 1:8 Â 10À5 Pa Á s for air. We ®nd that NR 5:9 Â 106 , a value far in excess of that required for turbulent ¯ow. The ¯ow will obviously be turbulent.

164

FLUIDS IN MOTION

[CHAP. 14

Supplementary Problems
14.18 Oil ¯ows through a 4.0 cm i.d. pipe at an average speed of 2.5 m/s. Find the ¯ow in m3 /s and cm3 /s. Ans. 3:1 Â 10À3 m3 =s 3:1 Â 103 cm3 =s Compute the average speed of water in a pipe having an i.d. of 5.0 cm and delivering 2.5 m3 of water per hour. Ans. 0.35 m/s The speed of glycerin ¯owing in a 5.0 cm i.d. pipe is 0.54 m/s. Find the ¯uid's speed in a 3.0 cm i.d. pipe that connects with it, both pipes ¯owing full. Ans. 1.5 m/s How long will it take for 500 mL of water to ¯ow through a 15 cm long, 3.0 mm i.d. pipe, if the pressure dierential across the pipe is 4.0 kPa? The viscosity of water is 0.80 cP. Ans. 7.5 s A molten plastic ¯ows out of a tube that is 8.0 cm long at a rate of 13 cm3 /min when the pressure dierential between the two ends of the tube is 18 cm of mercury. Find the viscosity of the plastic. The i.d. of the tube is 1.30 mm. The density of mercury is 13.6 g/cm3 . Ans. 0.097 kg/m Á s 97 cP In a horizontal pipe system, a pipe (i.d. 4.0 mm) that is 20 cm long connects in line to a pipe (i.d. 5.0 mm) that is 30 cm long. When a viscous ¯uid is being pushed through the pipes at a steady rate, what is the ratio of the pressure dierence across the 20-cm pipe to that across the 30-cm pipe? Ans. 1.6 A hypodermic needle of length 3.0 cm and i.d. 0.45 mm is used to draw blood 4:0 mPl). Assuming the pressure dierential across the needle is 80 cmHg, how long does it take to draw 15 mL? Ans. 17 s In a blood transfusion, blood ¯ows from a bottle at atmospheric pressure into a patient's vein in which the pressure is 20 mmHg higher than atmospheric. The bottle is 95 cm higher than the vein, and the needle into the vein has a length of 3.0 cm and an i.d. of 0.45 mm. How much blood ¯ows into the vein each minute? For blood, 0:004 0 Pa Á s and 1005 kg/m3 . Ans. 3.4 cm3 How much work does the piston in a hydraulic system do during one 2.0-cm stroke if the end area of the piston is 0.75 cm2 and the pressure in the hydraulic ¯uid is 50 kPa? Ans. 75 mJ A large open tank of nonviscous liquid springs a leak 4.5 m below the top of the liquid. What is the theoretical velocity of out¯ow from the hole? If the area of the hole is 0.25 cm2 , how much liquid would escape in exactly 1 minute? Ans. 9.4 m/s, 0.014 1 m3 Find the ¯ow in liters/s of a nonviscous liquid through an opening 0.50 cm2 in area and 2.5 m below the level of the liquid in an open tank. Ans. 0.35 liter/s Calculate the theoretical velocity of eux of water from an aperture that is 8.0 m below the surface of water in a large tank, if an added pressure of 140 kPa is applied to the surface of the water. Ans. 21 m/s What horsepower is required to force 8.0 m3 of water per minute into a water main at a pressure of 220 kPa? Ans. 39 hp A pump lifts water at the rate of 9.0 liters/s from a lake through a 5.0 cm i.d. pipe and discharges it into the air at a point 16 m above the level of the water in the lake. What are the theoretical (a) velocity of the water at the point of discharge and (b) power delivered by the pump. Ans. (a) 4.6 m/s; (b) 2.0 hp Water ¯ows steadily through a horizontal pipe of varying cross-section. At one place the pressure is 130 kPa and the speed is 0.60 m/s. Determine the pressure at another place in the same pipe where the speed is 9.0 m/s. Ans. 90 kPa.

14.19

14.20

14.21

14.22

14.23

14.24

14.25

14.26

14.27

14.28

14.29

14.30

14.31

14.32

CHAP. 14]

FLUIDS IN MOTION

165

14.33

A pipe of varying inner diameter carries water. At point 1 the diameter is 20 cm and the pressure is 130 kPa. At point 2, which is 4.0 m higher than point 1, the diameter is 30 cm. If the ¯ow is 0.080 m3 /s, what is the pressure at the second point? Ans. 93 kPa Fuel oil of density 820 kg/m3 ¯ows through a venturi meter having a throat diameter of 4.0 cm and an entrance diameter of 8.0 cm. The pressure drop between entrance and throat is 16 cm of mercury. Find the ¯ow. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg/m3 . Ans. 9:3 Â 10À3 m3 /s Find the maximum amount of water that can ¯ow through a 3.0 cm i.d. pipe per minute without turbulence. Take the maximum Reynolds number for nonturbulent ¯ow to be 2000. For water at 208C, 1:0 Â 10À3 Pa Á s. Ans. 0.002 8 m3 How fast can a raindrop r 1:5 mm) fall through air if the ¯ow around it is to be close to turbulent, i.e., for NR close to 10? For air, 1:8 Â 10À5 Pa Á s and 1:29 kg/m3 . Ans. 4.6 cm/s

14.34

14.35

14.36

Chapter 15
Thermal Expansion
TEMPERATURE may be measured on the Celsius scale, on which the freezing point of water is at 0 8C, and the boiling point (under standard conditions) is at 100 8C. The Kelvin (or absolute) scale is displaced 273.15 Celsius-size degrees from the Celsius scale, so that the freezing point of water is 273.15 K and the boiling point is 373.15 K. Absolute zero, a temperature discussed further in Chapter 16, is at 0 K À273:15 8C). The still-used Fahrenheit scale is related to the Celsius scale by Fahrenheit temperature 9 (Celsius temperature) 32 5

LINEAR EXPANSION OF SOLIDS: When a solid is subjected to a rise in temperature ÁT, its increase in length ÁL is very nearly proportional to its initial length L0 multiplied by ÁT. That is, ÁL L0 ÁT where the proportionality constant is called the coecient of linear expansion. The value of depends on the nature of the substance. For our purposes we can take to be constant independent of T, although that's rarely, if ever, exactly true. From the above equation, is the change in length per unit initial length per degree change in temperature. For example, if a 1.000 000 cm length of brass becomes 1.000 019 cm long when the temperature is raised 1:0 8C, the linear expansion coecient for brass is ÁL 0:000 019 cm 1:9 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 L0 ÁT 1:0 cm1:0 8C

AREA EXPANSION: ÁT, then

If an area A0 expands to A0 ÁA when subjected to a temperature rise ÁA
A0 ÁT

where is the coecient of area expansion. For isotropic solids (those that expand in the same way in all directions), 2 approximately.

VOLUME EXPANSION: If a volume V0 changes by an amount ÁV when subjected to a temperature change of ÁT, then ÁV V0 ÁT where is the coecient of volume expansion. This can be either an increase or decrease in volume. For isotropic solids, 3 approximately. 166
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 15]

THERMAL EXPANSION

167

Solved Problems
15.1 A copper bar is 80 cm long at 15 8C. What is the increase in length when it is heated to 35 8C? The linear expansion coecient for copper is 1:7 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 .
ÁL L0 ÁT 1:7 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 0:80 m35 À 15 8C 2:7 Â 10À4 m

15.2

A cylinder of diameter 1.000 00 cm at 30 8C is to be slid into a hole in a steel plate. The hole has a diameter of 0.999 70 cm at 30 8C. To what temperature must the plate be heated? For steel, 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 .
The plate will expand in the same way whether or not there is a hole in it. Hence the hole expands in the same way a circle of steel ®lling it would expand. We want the diameter of the hole to change by ÁL 1:000 00 À 0:999 70 cm 0:000 30 cm Using ÁL L0 ÁT, we ®nd ÁT ÁL 0:000 30 cm 27 8C L0 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 0:999 70 cm

The temperature of the plate must be 30 27 57 8C

15.3

A steel tape is calibrated at 20 8C. On a cold day when the temperature is À15 8C, what will be the percent error in the tape? steel 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 .
For a temperature change from 20 8C to À15 8C, we have ÁT À35 8C. Then, ÁL ÁT 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 À35 8C À3:9 Â 10À4 À0:0397 L0

15.4

A copper rod 1:70 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 is 20 cm longer than an aluminum rod 2:20 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 . How long should the copper rod be if the dierence in their lengths is to be independent of temperature?
For their dierence in lengths not to change with temperature, ÁL must be the same for both rods under the same temperature change. That is, L0 ÁTcopper L0 ÁTaluminum or 1:70 Â 10
À5

8CÀ1 L0 ÁT 2:20 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 L0 À 0:20 m ÁT

where L0 is the length of the copper rod, and ÁT is the same for both rods. Solving, we ®nd that L0 0:88 m.

15.5

At 20:0 8C a steel ball 1:10 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 has a diameter of 0.900 0 cm, while the diameter of a hole in an aluminum plate 2:20 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 is 0.899 0 cm. At what temperature (the same for both) will the ball just pass through the hole?
At a temperature ÁT higher than 20:0 8C, we wish the diameters of the hole and of the ball to be equal: 0:900 0 cm 0:900 0 cm1:10 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 ÁT 0:899 0 cm 0:899 0 cm2:20 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 ÁT Solving for ÁT, we ®nd ÁT 101 8C. Because the original temperature was 20:0 8C, the ®nal temperature must be 121 8C:

15.6

A steel tape measures the length of a copper rod as 90.00 cm when both are at 10 8C, the calibration temperature for the tape. What would the tape read for the length of the rod when both are at 30 8C? steel 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 ; copper 1:7 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 .

168

THERMAL EXPANSION

[CHAP. 15

At 30 8C, the copper rod will be of length L0 1 c ÁT while adjacent ``centimeter'' marks on the steel tape will be separated by a distance of 1:000 cm1 s ÁT Therefore, the number of ``centimeters'' read on the tape will be L0 1 c ÁT 90:00 cm1 1:7 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 20 8C 1 3:4 Â 10À4 90:00 À1 1 cm1 s ÁT 1:000 cm1 1:1 Â 10À5 8C 20 8C 1 2:2 Â 10À4 Using the approximation 1 %1Àx 1x for x small compared to 1, we have 90:00 1 3:4 Â 10À4 % 90:001 3:4 Â 10À4 1 À 2:2 Â 10À4 % 90:001 3:4 Â 10À4 À 2:2 Â 10À4 1 2:2 Â 10À4 90:00 0:010 8

The tape will read 90.01 cm.

15.7

A glass ¯ask is ®lled ``to the mark'' with 50.00 cm3 of mercury at 18 8C. If the ¯ask and its contents are heated to 38 8C, how much mercury will be above the mark? glass 9:0 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 and mercury 182 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 .
We shall take glass 3glass as a good approximation. The ¯ask interior will expand just as though it were a solid piece of glass. Thus, Volume of mercury above mark ÁV for mercury À ÁV for glass m V0 ÁT À g V0 ÁT m À g V0 ÁT 182 À 27 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 50:00 cm3 38 À 18 8C 0:15 cm3

15.8

The density of mercury at exactly 0 8C is 13 600 kg/m3 , and its volume expansion coecient is 1:82 Â 10À4 8CÀ1 . Calculate the density of mercury at 50:0 8C.
Let 0 density of mercury at 0 8C 1 density of mercury at 50 8C V0 volume of m kg of mercury at 0 8C V1 volume of m kg of mercury at 50 8C By conservation of mass, m 0 V0 1 V1 , from which 1 0 But V0 V0 1 0 0 V1 V0 ÁV 1 ÁV=V0

ÁV ÁT 1:82 Â 10À4 8CÀ1 50:0 8C 0:009 10 V0 1 13 600 kg=m3 1 13:5 Â 103 kg=m3 1 0:009 10

Substitution into the ®rst equation then gives

CHAP. 15]

THERMAL EXPANSION

169

15.9

Show that the density of a liquid or solid changes in the following way with temperature: Á À ÁT.
Consider a mass m of liquid in a volume V0 , for which 0 m=V0 . After a temperature change ÁT, the volume will be V V0 V0 ÁT and the density will be But m=V0 0 , and so this can be written as 1 ÁT 0 Thus we ®nd that Á À 0 À ÁT In practice, is close enough to 0 so that we can say Á % À0 ÁT: m m V V0 1 ÁT

15.10 Solve Problem 15.8 using the result of Problem 15.9.
We have Á À13 600 kg=m3 182 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 50:0 8C À124 kg=m3 so 50 8C 0 8C À 124 kg=m3 13:5 Â 103 kg=m3

15.11 A steel wire of 2.0 mm2 cross-section is held straight (but under no tension) by attaching it ®rmly to two points a distance 1.50 m apart at 30 8C. If the temperature now decreases to À10 8C, and if the two tie points remain ®xed, what will be the tension in the wire? For steel, 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 and Y 2:0 Â 1011 N/m2 .
If it were free to do so, the wire would contract a distance ÁL as it cooled, where ÁL L0 ÁT 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 1:5 m40 8C 6:6 Â 10À4 m But the ends are ®xed. As a result, forces at the ends must, in eect, stretch the wire this same length ÁL. Therefore, from Y F=AÁL=L0 , we have Tension F YA ÁL 2:0 Â 1011 N=m2 2:0 Â 10À6 m2 6:6 Â 10À4 m 176 N 0:18 kN L0 1:50 m

Strictly, we should have substituted 1:5 À 6:6 Â 10À4 m for L in the expression for the tension. However, the error incurred in not doing so is negligible.

15.12 When a building is constructed at À10 8C, a steel beam (cross-sectional area 45 cm2 ) is put in place with its ends cemented in pillars. If the sealed ends cannot move, what will be the compressional force in the beam when the temperature is 25 8C? For this kind of steel, 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 and Y 2:0 Â 1011 N=m2 .
We proceed much as in Problem 15.11: ÁL ÁT 1:1 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 35 8C 3:85 Â 10À4 L0 ÁL F YA 2:0 Â 1011 N=m2 45 Â 10À4 m2 3:85 Â 10À4 3:5 Â 105 N L0

so

170

THERMAL EXPANSION

[CHAP. 15

Supplementary Problems
15.13 15.14 15.15 Compute the increase in length of 50 m of copper wire when its temperature changes from 12 8C to 32 8C. For copper, 1:7 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 . Ans. 1.7 cm A rod 3.0 m long is found to have expanded 0.091 cm in length after a temperature rise of 60 8C. What is for the material of the rod? Ans. 5:1 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 At 15:0 8C, a bare wheel has a diameter of 30.000 cm, and the inside diameter of a steel rim is 29.930 cm. To what temperature must the rim be heated so as to slip over the wheel? For this type of steel, 1:10 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 . Ans. 227 8C An iron ball has a diameter of 6 cm and is 0.010 mm too large to pass through a hole in a brass plate when the ball and plate are at a temperature of 30 8C. At what temperature (the same for ball and plate) will the ball just pass through the hole? 1:2 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 and 1:9 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 for iron and brass, respectively. Ans. 54 8C (a) An aluminum measuring rod, which is correct at 5:0 8C, measures a certain distance as 88.42 cm at 35:0 8C. Determine the error in measuring the distance due to the expansion of the rod. (b) If this aluminum rod measures a length of steel as 88.42 cm at 35:0 8C, what is the correct length of the steel at 35 8C? The coecient of linear expansion of aluminum is 22 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 . Ans. (a) 0.058 cm; (b) 88 cm A solid sphere of mass m and radius b is spinning freely on its axis with angular velocity !0 . When heated by an amount ÁT, its angular velocity changes to !. Find !0 =! if the linear expansion coecient for the material of the sphere is . Ans. 1 2 ÁT ÁT2 Calculate the increase in volume of 100 cm3 of mercury when its temperature changes from 10 8C to 35 8C. The volume coecient of expansion of mercury is 0:000 18 8CÀ1 . Ans. 0.45 cm3 The coecient of linear expansion of glass is 9:0 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 . If a speci®c gravity bottle holds 50.000 mL at 15 8C, ®nd its capacity at 25 8C. Ans. 50.014 mL Determine the change in volume of a block of cast iron 5:0 cm Â 10 cm Â 6:0 cm, when the temperature changes from 15 8C to 47 8C. The coecient of linear expansion of cast iron is Ans. 0.29 cm3 0:000 010 8CÀ1 . A glass vessel is ®lled with exactly 1 liter of turpentine at 20 8C. What volume of the liquid will over¯ow if the temperature is raised to 86 8C? The coecient of linear expansion of the glass is 9:0 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 ; the coecient of volume expansion of turpentine is 97 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 . Ans. 62 mL The density of gold is 19.30 g/cm3 at 20:0 8C, and the coecient of linear expansion is 14:3 Â 10À6 8CÀ1 . Compute the density of gold at 90:08C. Ans. 19.2 g/cm3

15.16

15.17

15.18

15.19 15.20 15.21

15.22

15.23

Chapter 16
Ideal Gases
AN IDEAL (OR PERFECT) GAS is one that obeys the Ideal Gas Law, given below. At low to moderate pressures, and at temperatures not too low, the following common gases can be considered ideal: air, nitrogen, oxygen, helium, hydrogen, and neon. Almost any chemically stable gas behaves ideally if it is far removed from conditions under which it will liquefy or solidify. In other words, a real gas behaves like an ideal gas when its atoms or molecules are so far apart that they do not appreciably interact with one another.

ONE MOLE OF A SUBSTANCE is the amount of the substance that contains as many particles as there are atoms in exactly 12 grams (0.012 kg) of the isotope carbon-12. It follows that one kilomole (kmol) of a substance is the mass (in kg) that is numerically equal to the molecular (or atomic) mass of the substance. For example, the molecular mass of hydrogen gas, H2 is 2 kg/kmol; hence there are 2 kg in 1 kmol of H2 . Similarly, there are 32 kg in 1 kmol of O2 , and 28 kg in 1 kmol of N2 . We shall always use kilomoles and kilograms in our calculations. Sometimes the term molecular (or atomic) weight is used, rather than molecular mass, but the latter is correct.

IDEAL GAS LAW: The absolute pressure P of n kilomoles of gas contained in a volume V is related to the absolute temperature T by PV nRT where R 8314 J/kmol Á K is called the universal gas constant. If the volume contains m kilograms of gas that has a molecular (or atomic) mass M, then n m=M:

SPECIAL CASES of the Ideal Gas Law, obtained by holding all but two of its parameters constant, are PV constant V Charles' Law n; P constant X constant T P constant Gay-Lussac's Law n; V constant X T Boyle's Law n; T constant X

ABSOLUTE ZERO: With n and P constant (Charles' Law), the volume decreases linearly with T and (if the gas remained ideal) would reach zero at T 0 K. Similarly, with n and V constant (Gay-Lussac's Law), the pressure would decrease to zero with the temperature. This unique temperature, at which P and V would reach zero, is called absolute zero.

STANDARD CONDITIONS OR STANDARD TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE (S.T.P.) are de®ned to be T 273:15 K 0 8C P 1:013 Â 105 Pa 1 atm 171
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

172

IDEAL GASES

[CHAP. 16

Under standard conditions, 1 kmol of ideal gas occupies a volume of 22.4 m3 . Therefore, at S.T.P., 2 kg of H2 occupies the same volume as 32 kg of O2 or 28 kg of N2 , namely 22.4 m3 .

DALTON'S LAW OF PARTIAL PRESSURES: De®ne the partial pressure of one component of a gas mixture to be the pressure the component gas would exert if it alone occupied the entire volume. Then, the total pressure of a mixture of ideal, nonreactive gases is the sum of the partial pressures of the component gases.

GAS-LAW PROBLEMS involving a change of conditions from P1 ; V1 ; T1 to P2 ; V2 ; T2 are usually easily solved by writing the gas law as P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2 at constant n

Solved Problems
16.1 A mass of oxygen occupies 0.0200 m3 at atmospheric pressure, 101 kPa, and 5:0 8C. Determine its volume if its pressure is increased to 108 kPa while its temperature is changed to 30 8C.
From P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2 we have P T2 V2 V1 1 P2 T1

But T1 5 273 278 K and T2 30 273 303 K, so 101 303 0:020 4 m3 V2 0:020 0 m3 108 278

16.2

On a day when atmospheric pressure is 76 cmHg, the pressure gauge on a tank reads the pressure inside to be 400 cmHg. The gas in the tank has a temperature of 9 8C. If the tank is heated to 31 8C by the Sun, and if no gas exits from it, what will the pressure gauge read?
P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2 so P2 P1 T2 T1 V1 V2

But gauges on tanks usually read the dierence in pressure between inside and outside; this is called the gauge pressure. Therefore, P1 76 cmHg 400 cmHg 476 cmHg Also, V1 V2 . We then have P2 476 cmHg 273 31 1:00 513 cmHg 273 9

The gauge will read 513 cmHg À 76 cmHg 437 cmHg:

16.3

The gauge pressure in a car tire is 305 kPa when its temperature is 15 8C. After running at high speed, the tire has heated up and its pressure is 360 kPa. What is then the temperature of the gas in the tire? Assume atmospheric pressure to be 101 kPa.

CHAP. 16]

IDEAL GASES

173

P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2 with Then P1 305 kPa 101 kPa 406 kPa

or

T2 T1

P2 V2 P1 V1

and P2 360 kPa 101 kPa 461 kPa 461 1:00 327 K T2 273 15 406

So the ®nal temperature of the tire is 327 À 273 54 8C:

16.4

Gas at room temperature and pressure is con®ned to a cylinder by a piston. The piston is now pushed in so as to reduce the volume to one-eighth of its original value. After the gas temperature has returned to room temperature, what is the gauge pressure of the gas in kPa? Local atmospheric pressure is 740 mm of mercury.
P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2 or P2 P1 V1 T2 V2 T1

But T1 T2 , P1 740 mmHg, V2 V1 =8. Substitution gives P2 740 mmHg81 5920 mmHg Gauge pressure is the dierence between actual and atmospheric pressure. Therefore, Gauge pressure 5920 mmHg À 740 mmHg 5180 mmHg Since 760 mmHg 101 kPa, the gauge reading in kPa is 101 kPa 5180 mmHg 690 kPa 760 mmHg

16.5

An ideal gas has a volume of exactly 1 liter at 1.00 atm and À20 8C. To how many atmospheres pressure must it be subjected to be compressed to 0.500 liter when the temperature is 40 8C?
P1 V1 P2 V2 V1 T2 or P2 P1 T1 T2 V2 T1 1:00 L 273 K 40 K 2:47 atm P2 1:00 atm 0:500 L 273 K À 20 K

from which

16.6

A certain mass of hydrogen gas occupies 370 mL at 16 8C and 150 kPa. Find its volume at À21 8C and 420 kPa.
P1 V1 P2 V2 P T2 gives V2 V1 1 T1 T2 P2 T1 150 kPa 273 K À 21 K 115 mL V2 370 mL 420 kPa 273 K 16 K

16.7

The density of nitrogen is 1.25 kg/m3 at S.T.P. Determine the density of nitrogen at 42 8C and 730 mm of mercury.
Since m=V, we have V1 m=1 and V2 m=2 for a given mass of gas under two sets of conditions. Then P 1 V1 P 2 V2 T1 T2 gives P1 P 2 1 T1 2 T2

174

IDEAL GASES

[CHAP. 16

Since S.T.P. are 760 mmHg and 273 K, P T1 730 mmHg 273 K 1:04 kg=m3 2 1 2 1:25 kg=m3 760 mmHg 273 K 42 K P1 T2 Notice that pressures in mmHg can be used here because the units cancel in the ratio P2 =P1 :

16.8

A 3.0-liter tank contains oxygen gas at 20 8C and a gauge pressure of 25 Â 105 Pa. What mass of oxygen is in the tank? The molecular mass of oxgyen gas is 32 kg/kmol. Assume atmospheric pressure to be 1 Â 105 Pa.
The absolute pressure of the gas is P gauge pressure atmospheric pressure 25 1 Â 105 N=m2 26 Â 105 N=m2 From the gas law, with M 32 kg/kmol, PV 26 Â 105 N=m2 3:0 Â 10À3 m3 m M RT

m J 8314 293 K 32 kg=kmol kmol Á K

Solving gives m, the mass of gas in the tank, as 0.10 kg.

16.9

Determine the volume occupied by 4.0 g of oxygen M 32 kg/kmol) at S.T.P.
Method 1 Use the gas law directly: m PV RT M 1 m 4:0 Â 10À3 kg8314 J=kmol Á K273 K RT V 2:8 Â 10À3 m3 P M 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 32 kg=kmol Method 2 Under S.T.P., 1 kmol occupies 22.4 m3 . Therefore, 32 kg occupies 22.4 m3 , and so 4 g occupies 4:0 g 22:4 m3 2:8 Â 10À3 m3 32 000 g

16.10 A 2.0-mg droplet of liquid nitrogen is present in a 30 mL tube as it is sealed o at very low temperature. What will be the nitrogen pressure in the tube when it is warmed to 20 8C? Express your answer in atmospheres. (M for nitrogen is 28 kg/kmol.)
We use PV m=MRT to ®nd P mRT 2:0 Â 10À6 kg8314 J=kmol Á K293 K 5800 N=m2 MV 28 kg=kmol30 Â 10À6 m3 1:0 atm 0:057 atm 5800 N=m2 1:01 Â 105 N=m2

16.11 A tank of volume 590 liters contains oxygen at 20 8C and 5.0 atm pressure. Calculate the mass of oxygen in the tank. M 32 kg/kmol for oxygen.
We use PV m=MRT to get m PVM 5 Â 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 0:59 m3 32 kg=kmol 3:9 kg RT 8314 J=kmol Á K293 K

CHAP. 16]

IDEAL GASES

175

16.12 At 18 8C and 765 mmHg, 1.29 liters of an ideal gas has a mass of 2.71 g. Compute the molecular mass of the gas.
We use PV m=MRT and the fact that 760 mmHg 1:00 atm to obtain M mRT 0:00271 kg8314 J=kmol Á K291 K 50:0 kg=kmol PV 765=7601:01 Â 105 N=m2 0:001 29 m3

16.13 Compute the volume of 8.0 g of helium M 4:0 kg/kmol) at 15 8C and 480 mmHg.
We use PV m=MRT to obtain V mRT 0:0080 kg8314 J=kmol Á K288 K 0:075 m3 75 liters MP 4:0 kg=kmol480=7601:01 Â 105 N=m2

16.14 Find the density of methane M 16 kg/kmol) at 20 8C and 5.0 atm.
We use PV m=MRT and m=V to get PM 5:0 Â 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 16 kg=kmol 3:3 kg=m3 RT 8314 J=kmol Á K293 K

16.15 A ®sh emits a 2.0 mm3 bubble at a depth of 15 m in a lake. Find the volume of the bubble as it reaches the surface. Assume its temperature does not change.
The absolute pressure in the bubble at depth h is P gh atmospheric pressure where 1000 kg=m and atmospheric pressure is about 100 kPa. At 15 m, P1 1000 kg=m3 9:8 m=s2 15 m 100 kPa 247 kPa and at the surface, P2 100 kPa. Following the usual procedure, we get P T2 247 V2 V1 1 2:0 mm3 1:0 4:9 mm3 P2 T1 100
3

16.16 A 15 cm long test tube of uniform bore is lowered, open end down, into a fresh-water lake. How far below the surface of the lake must the water level be in the tube if one-third of the tube is to be ®lled with water?
Let h be the depth of the water in the tube below the lake's surface. The air pressure P2 in the tube at depth h must equal atmospheric pressure Pa plus the pressure of water at that depth: P2 Pa gh The gas law gives us the value of P2 as V T2 3 P2 P1 1 1:01 Â 105 Pa 1:00 1:50 Â 105 Pa V2 T1 2 Then, from the relation between P2 and h, h P2 À Pa 0:50 Â 105 Pa 5:1 m g 1000 kg=m3 9:81 m=s2

where atmospheric pressure has been taken as 100 kPa.

16.17 A tank contains 18 kg of N2 gas M 28 kg/kmol) at a pressure of 4.50 atm. How much H2 gas M 2:0 kg/kmol) at 3.50 atm would the same tank contain?

176

IDEAL GASES

[CHAP. 16

We write the gas law twice, once for each gas: PN V nN RT and PH V nH RT Division of one equation by the other eliminates V, R, and T: nH PH 3:50 atm 0:778 nN PN 4:50 atm m 18 kg 0:643 kmol nN M 28 kg=kmol nH nN 0:778 0:643 kmol0:778 0:500 kmol mH 0:500 kmol2:0 kg=kmol 1:0 kg

But so

Then, from n m=M, we have

16.18 In a gaseous mixture at 20 8C the partial pressures of the components are as follows: hydrogen, 200 mmHg; carbon dioxide, 150 mmHg; methane, 320 mmHg; ethylene, 105 mmHg. What are (a) the total pressure of the mixture and (b) the mass fraction of hydrogen? MH 2:0 kg=kmol, MCO2 44 kg=kmol, Mmethane 16 kg=kmol, Methylene 30 kg=kmol:
(a) (b) According to Dalton's Law, From the Gas Law, m MPV=RT. The mass of hydrogen gas present is V mH MH PH RT The total mass of gas present, mt , is the sum of similar terms: V mt MH PH MCO2 PCO2 Mmethane Pmethane Methylene Pethylene RT mH MH PH mt MH PH MCO2 PCO2 Mmethane Pmethane Methylene Pethylene mH 2:0 kg=kmol200 mmHg 0:026 2:0 kg=kmol200 mmHg 44 kg=kmol150 mmHg 16 kg=kmol320 mmHg 30 kg=kmol105 mmHg mt

Total pressure sum of partial pressures 200 mmHg 150 mmHg 320 mmHg 105 mmHg 775 mmHg

The required fraction is then

Supplementary Problems
16.19 A certain mass of an ideal gas occupies a volume of 4.00 m3 at 758 mmHg. Compute its volume at 635 mmHg if the temperature remains unchanged. Ans. 4.77 m3 A given mass of ideal gas occupies 38 mL at 20 8C. If its pressure is held constant, what volume does it occupy at a temperature of 45 8C? Ans. 41 mL On a day when atmospheric pressure is 75.83 cmHg, a pressure gauge on a tank of gas reads a pressure of 258.5 cmHg. What is the absolute pressure (in atmospheres and kPa) of the gas in the tank? Ans. 334.3 cmHg 4:398 atm 445:6 kPa A tank of ideal gas is sealed o at 20 8C and 1.00 atm pressure. What will be the pressure (in kPa and mmHg) in the tank if the gas temperature is decreased to À35 8C? Ans. 82 kPa 6:2 Â 102 mmHg

16.20

16.21

16.22

CHAP. 16]

IDEAL GASES

177

16.23

Given 1000 mL of helium at 15 8C and 763 mmHg, determine its volume at À6 8C and 420 mmHg. Ans. 1:68 Â 103 mL One kilomole of ideal gas occupies 22.4 m3 at 0 8C and 1 atm. (a) What pressure is required to compress 1.00 kmol into a 5.00 m3 container at 100 8C? (b) If 1.00 kmol was to be sealed in a 5.00 m3 tank that could withstand a gauge pressure of only 3.00 atm, what would be the maximum temperature of the gas if the tank was not to burst? Ans. (a) 6.12 atm; (b) À30 8C Air is trapped in the sealed lower end of a capillary tube by a mercury column as shown in Fig. 16-1. The top of the tube is open. The temperature is 14 8C, and atmospheric pressure is 740 mmHg. What length would the trapped air column have if the temperature were 30 8C and atmospheric pressure were 760 mmHg? Ans. 12.4 cm

16.24

16.25

Fig. 16-1

16.26

Air is trapped in the sealed lower part of the vertical capillary tube shown in Fig. 16-1 by an 8.0 cm long mercury column. The top is open, and the system is at equilibrium. What will be the length of the trapped air column if the tube is now tilted so it makes an angle of 658 to the vertical? Take Pa 76 cmHg. Ans. 0.13 m On a day when the barometer reads 75.23 cm, a reaction vessel holds 250 mL of ideal gas at 20:0 8C. An oil manometer 810 kg/m3 ) reads the pressure in the vessel to be 41.0 cm of oil and below atmospheric pressure. What volume will the gas occupy under S.T.P.? Ans. 233 mL A 5000-cm3 tank contains an ideal gas M 40 kg/kmol) at a gauge pressure of 530 kPa and a temperature of 25 8C. Assuming atmospheric pressure to be 100 kPa, what mass of gas is in the tank? Ans. 0.051 kg The pressure of air in a reasonably good vacuum might be 2:0 Â 10À5 mmHg. What mass of air exists in a 250 mL volume at this pressure and 25 8C? Take M 28 kg/kmol for air. Ans. 7:5 Â 10À12 kg What volume will 1.216 g of SO2 gas M 64:1 kg/kmol) occupy at 18:0 8C and 755 mmHg if it acts like an ideal gas? Ans. 457 mL Compute the density of H2 S gas M 34:1 kg/kmol) at 27 8C and 2.00 atm, assuming it to be ideal. Ans. 2.76 kg/m3 A 30-mL tube contains 0.25 g of water vapor M 18 kg/kmol) at a temperature of 340 8C. Assuming the gas to be ideal, what is its pressure? Ans. 2.4 MPa

16.27

16.28

16.29

16.30

16.31

16.32

178

IDEAL GASES

[CHAP. 16

16.33

One method for estimating the temperature at the center of the Sun is based on the Ideal Gas Law. If the center is assumed to consist of gases whose average M is 0.70 kg/kmol, and if the density and pressure are 90 Â 103 kg/m3 and 1:4 Â 1011 atm, respectively, calculate the temperature. Ans. 1:3 Â 107 K A 500-mL sealed ¯ask contains nitrogen at a pressure of 76.00 cmHg. A tiny glass tube lies at the bottom of the ¯ask. Its volume is 0.50 mL and it contains hydrogen gas at a pressure of 4.5 atm. Suppose the glass tube is now broken so that the hydrogen ®lls the ¯ask. What is the new pressure in the ¯ask? Ans. 76.34 cmHg As shown in Fig. 16-2, two ¯asks are connected by an initially closed stopcock. One ¯ask contains krypton gas at 500 mmHg, while the other contains helium at 950 mmHg. The stopcock is now opened so that the gases mix. What is the ®nal pressure in the system? Assume constant temperature. Ans. 789 mmHg

16.34

16.35

Fig. 16-2

16.36

An air bubble of volume V0 is released near the bottom of a lake at a depth of 11.0 m. What will be its new volume at the surface? Assume its temperature to be 4:0 8C at the release point and 12 8C at the surface. The water has a density of 1000 kg/m3 , and atmospheric pressure is 75 cmHg. Ans. 2:1V0 A cylindrical diving bell (a vertical cylinder with open bottom end and closed top end) 12.0 m high is lowered in a lake until water within the bell rises 8.0 m from the bottom end. Determine the distance from the top of the bell to the surface of the lake. (Atmospheric pressure 1:00 atm.) Ans. 20:6 m À 4:0 m 16:6 m

16.37

Chapter 17
Kinetic Theory
THE KINETIC THEORY considers matter to be composed of discrete particles or molecules in continual motion. In a gas, the molecules are in random motion with a wide distribution of speeds ranging from zero to very large values.

AVOGADRO'S NUMBER NA is the number of particles (molecules or atoms) in 1 kmol of substance. For all substances, NA 6:022 Â 1026 particles/kmol As examples, M 2 kg/kmol for H2 and M 32 kg/kmol for O2 . Therefore, 2 kg of H2 and 32 kg of O2 each contain 6:02 Â 1026 molecules.

THE MASS OF A MOLECULE (or atom) can be found from the molecular (or atomic) mass M of the substance and Avogadro's number NA . Since M kg of substance contains NA particles, the mass m0 of one particle is given by m0 M NA

THE AVERAGE TRANSLATIONAL KINETIC ENERGY of a gas molecule is 3kB T=2, where T is the absolute temperature of the gas and kB R=NA 1:381 Â 10À23 J/K is Boltzmann's constant. In other words, for a molecule of mass m0 , À average of 1 m0 v2 3 kB T 2 2 Note that Boltzmann's constant is also given as k (with no subscript) in the literature.

THE ROOT MEAN SQUARE SPEED of a gas molecule is the square root of the average of v2 for a molecule over a prolonged time. Equivalently, the average may be taken over all molecules of the gas at a given instant. From the expression for the average kinetic energy, the rms speed is s 3kB T vrms m0

1 2 2 m0 vrms

THE ABSOLUTE TEMPERATURE of an ideal gas has a meaning that is found by solving 3 kB T. It gives 2 2 1 2 m v T 3kB 2 0 rms

The absolute temperature of an ideal gas is a measure of its average translational kinetic energy (KE) per molecule. 179
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

180

KINETIC THEORY

[CHAP. 17

THE PRESSURE of an ideal gas was given in Chapter 16 in the form PV m=MRT. Noticing that m Nm0 , where N is the number of molecules in the volume V, and replacing T by the value determined above, we have PV 1 Nm0 v2 rms 3 Further, since Nm0 =V , the density of the gas, P 1 v2 rms 3

THE MEAN FREE PATH (m.f.p.) of a gas molecule is the average distance such a molecule moves between collisions. For an ideal gas of spherical molecules with radius b, m:f:p: 1 p 4 2b2 N=V

where N=V is the number of molecules per unit volume.

Solved Problems
17.1 Ordinary nitrogen gas consists of molecules of N2 . Find the mass of one such molecule. The molecular mass is 28 kg/kmol. m0 M 28 kg=kmol 4:7 Â 10À26 kg NA 6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1

17.2

Helium gas consists of separate He atoms rather than molecules. How many helium atoms, He, are there in 2.0 g of helium? M 4:0 kg/kmol for He.
Method 1 One kilomole of He is 4.0 kg, and it contains NA atoms. But 2.0 g is equivalent to 0:002 0 kg 0:000 50 kmol 4:0 kg=kmol of helium. Therefore, Number of atoms in 2:0 g 0:000 50 kmolNA 0:000 50 kmol6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 3:0 Â 1023 Method 2 The mass of a helium atom is m0 so Number in 2.0 g M 4:0 kg=kmol 6:64 Â 10À27 kg NA 6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 0:002 0 kg 3:0 Â 1023 6:64 Â 10À27 kg

17.3

A droplet of mercury has a radius of 0.50 mm. How many mercury atoms are in the droplet? For Hg, M 202 kg/kmol and 13 600 kg/m3 .
The volume of the droplet is

CHAP. 17]

KINETIC THEORY

181

V The mass of the droplet is

4r3 3

4 5:0 Â 10À4 m3 5:24 Â 10À10 m3 3

m V 13 600 kg=m3 5:24 Â 10À10 m3 7:1 Â 10À6 kg The mass of a mercury atom is m0 M 202 kg=kmol 3:36 Â 10À25 kg NA 6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 m 7:1 Â 10À6 kg 2:1 Â 1019 m0 3:36 Â 10À25 kg

The number of atoms in the droplet is then Number

17.4

How many molecules are there in 70 mL of benzene? For benzene, 0:88 g/cm3 and M 78 kg/kmol.
Mass of 70 cm3 m V 880 kg=m3 70 Â 10À6 m3 0:061 6 kg M 78 kg=kmol m0 1:30 Â 10À25 kg NA 6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 m 0:0616 kg 4:8 Â 1023 Number in 70 cm3 m0 1:30 Â 10À25 kg

17.5

Find the rms speed of a nitrogen molecule M 28 kg/kmol) in air at 0 8C:
We know that 1 m0 v2 3 kB T and so rms 2 2 vrms But m0 vrms s 3kB T m0

Therefore

M 28 kg=kmol 4:65 Â 10À26 kg NA 6:02 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 s 31:38 Â 10À23 J=K273 K 0:49 km=s 4:65 Â 10À26 kg

17.6

A gas molecule at the surface of the Earth happens to have the rms speed for that gas at exactly 0 8C. If it were to go straight up without colliding with other molecules, how high would it rise?
The molecule's KE is initially KE 1 m0 v2 3 kB T rms 2 2 The molecule will rise until its KE has been changed to PEG . Therefore, calling the height h, we have
3 2 kB T

m0 gh 31:38 Â 10À23 J=K273 K 29:81 m=s2 5

Solving gives h

1 m0

3kB T 2g

1 m0

4

5:76 Â 10À22 kg Á m m0

where m0 is in kg. The height varies inversely with the mass of the molecule. For an N2 molecule, m0 4:65 Â 10À26 kg (Problem 17.5), and in this case h turns out to be 12.4 km.

182

KINETIC THEORY

[CHAP. 17

17.7

Air at room temperature has a density of about 1.29 kg/m3 . Assuming it to be entirely one gas, ®nd vrms for its molecules.
Because P 1 v2 , we have rms 3 vrms s s 3P 3100 Â 103 Pa % 480 m=s 1:29 kg=m3

where we assumed atmospheric pressure to be 100 kPa.

17.8

Find the translational kinetic energy of one gram mole of any ideal gas at 0 8C:
For any ideal gas, 3 kB T 1 m0 v2 , which is the KE of each molecule. One gram mole contains rms 2 2 NA Â 10À3 molecules. Hence the total KE per mole is 3 RT 3:4 kJ KEtotal NA Â 10À3 kB T 3 Â 10À3 2 2 where T was taken as 273 K, and use was made of the fact that kB NA R:

17.9

There is about one hydrogen atom per cm3 in outer space, where the temperature (in the shade) is about 3.5 K. Find the rms speed of these atoms and the pressure they exert. vrms s s r 3kB T 3kB T 3RT % 295 m=s or 0:30 km=s m0 M=NA M

where M for hydrogen is 1.0 kg/kmol and T 3:5 K. We can now use P v2 =3 to ®nd the pressure. rms Since the mass m0 of a hydrogen atoms is (1.0 kg/kmol)/NA , and because there are N 106 atoms/m3 , we have Nm0 N 1 kg=m3 m0 106 V V NA 2 3 1 106 1 2 and P 3vrms 2952 5 Â 10À17 Pa 3 6:02 Â 1026

17.10 Find the following ratios for hydrogen M 2:0 kg/kmol) and nitrogen M 28 kg/kmol) gases at the same temperature: (a) (KE)H =KEN and (b) (rms speed)H /(rms speed)N :
The average translational KE of a molecule, 3 kB T, depends only on temperature. Therefore the ratio is 2 unity. s r vrms H 3kB T=m0H m0N b vrms N 3kB T=m0N m0H (a) But m0 M=NA , so vrms H vrms N s r MN 28 3:7 MH 2:0

17.11 Certain ideal gas molecules behave like spheres of radius 3:0 Â 10À10 m. Find the mean free path of these molecules under S.T.P.
Method 1 We know that at S.T.P. 1.00 kmol of substance occupies 22.4 m3 . The number of molecules per unit volume, N=V, can be found from the fact that in 22.4 m3 there are NA 6:02 Â 1026 molecules. The mean free path is given by

CHAP. 17]

KINETIC THEORY

183
2 3 2:4 Â 10À8 m

1 1 p m:f:p: p 2 4 2b N=V 4 23:0 Â 10À10 m2 Method 2 Because M m0 NA m0 R=kB and m Nm0 , m RT becomes PV M and so

22:4 m3 6:02 Â 1026

PV NkB T

N P 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 2:68 Â 1025 mÀ3 V kB T 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K273 K

We then use the mean free path equation as in method 1.

17.12 At what pressure will the mean free path be 50 cm for spherical molecules of radius 3:0 Â 10À10 m? Assume an ideal gas at 20 8C:
From the expression for the mean free path, we obtain N 1 p V 4 2b2 m:f:p: Combining this with the Ideal Gas Law in the form PV NkB T (see Problem 17.11) gives P kB T 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K293 K p 2 p 5:1 mPa 4 2b m:f:p: 4 23:0 Â 10À10 m2 0:50 m

Supplementary Problems
17.13 17.14 Find the mass of a neon atom. The atomic mass of neon is 20.2 kg/kmol. Ans. 3:36 Â 10À26 kg

A typical polymer molecule in polyethylene might have a molecular mass of 15 Â 103 . (a) What is the mass in kilograms of such a molecule? (b) How many such molecules would make up 2 g of polymer? Ans. (a) 2:5 Â 10À23 kg; (b) 8 Â 1019 A certain strain of tobacco mosaic virus has M 4:0 Â 107 kg/kmol. How many molecules of the virus are present in 1.0 mL of a solution that contains 0.10 mg of virus per mL? Ans. 1:5 Â 1012 An electronic vacuum tube was sealed o during manufacture at a pressure of 1:2 Â 10À7 mmHg at 27 8C. Its volume is 100 cm3 . (a) What is the pressure in the tube (in Pa)? (b) How many gas molecules remain in the tube? Ans. (a) 1:6 Â 10À5 Pa; (b) 3:8 Â 1011 The pressure of helium gas in a tube is 0.200 mmHg. If the temperature of the gas is 20 8C, what is the density of the gas? (Use MHe 4:0 kg/kmol.) Ans. 4:4 Â 10À5 kg/m3 At what temperature will the molecules of an ideal gas have twice the rms speed they have at 20 8C? Ans. 1170 K % 900 8C An object must have a speed of at least 11.2 km/s to escape from the Earth's gravitational ®eld. At what temperature will vrms for H2 molecules equal the escape speed? Repeat for N2 molecules. MH2 2:0 kg/ kmol and MN2 28 kg/kmol.) Ans. 1:0 Â 104 K; 1:4 Â 105 K

17.15

17.16

17.17

17.18

17.19

184

KINETIC THEORY

[CHAP. 17

17.20 17.21

In a certain region of outer space there are an average of only ®ve molecules per cm3 . The temperature there is about 3 K. What is the average pressure of this very dilute gas? Ans. 2 Â 10À16 Pa A cube of aluminum has a volume of 1.0 cm3 and a mass of 2.7 g. (a) How many aluminum atoms are there in the cube? (b) How large a volume is associated with each atom? (c) If each atom were a cube, what would be its edge length? M 108 kg/kmol for aluminum. Ans. (a) 1:5 Â 1022 ; (b) 6:6 Â 10À29 m3 ; (c) À10 4:0 Â 10 m The rms speed of nitrogen molecules in the air at S.T.P. is about 490 m/s. Find their mean free path and the average time between collisions. The radius of a nitrogen molecule can be taken to be 2:0 Â 10À10 m. Ans. 5:2 Â 10À8 m, 1:1 Â 10À10 s What is the mean free path of a gas molecule (radius 2:5 Â 10À10 m) in an ideal gas at 500 8C when the pressure is 7:0 Â 10À6 mmHg? Ans. 10 m

17.22

17.23

Chapter 18
Heat Quantities
THERMAL ENERGY is the random kinetic energy of the particles (usually electrons, ions, atoms, and molecules) composing a system. HEAT is thermal energy in transit from a system (or aggregate of electrons, ions, and atoms) at one temperature to a system that is in contact with it, but is at a lower temperature. Its SI unit is the joule. Other units used for heat are the calorie (1 cal 4:184 J) and the British thermal unit (1 Btu 1054 J). The ``Calorie'' used by nutritionists is called the ``large calorie'' and is actually a kilocalorie (1 Cal 1 kcal 103 cal). THE SPECIFIC HEAT (or speci®c heat capacity, c) of a substance is the quantity of heat required to change the temperature of unit mass of the substance by one degree. If a quantity of heat ÁQ is required to produce a temperature change ÁT in a mass m of substance, then the speci®c heat is c ÁQ m ÁT or ÁQ cm ÁT

In the SI, c has the unit J/kg Á K, which is equivalent to J/kg Á8C. Also widely used is the unit cal/g Á8C, where 1 cal/g Á8C 4184 J/kg Á8C. Each substance has a characteristic value of speci®c heat, which varies slightly with temperature. For water, c 4180 J=kg Á8C 1:00 cal=g Á8C. THE HEAT GAINED (OR LOST) by a body (whose phase does not change) as it undergoes a temperature change ÁT, is given by ÁQ mc ÁT

THE HEAT OF FUSION Lf of a crystalline solid is the quantity of heat required to melt a unit mass of the solid at constant temperature. It is also equal to the quantity of heat given o by a unit mass of the molten solid as it crystallizes at this same temperature. The heat of fusion of water at 0 8C is about 335 kJ/kg or 80 cal/g. THE HEAT OF VAPORIZATION Lv of a liquid is the quantity of heat required to vaporize a unit mass of the liquid at constant temperature. For water at 100 8C, Lv is about 2.26 MJ/kg or 540 cal/g. THE HEAT OF SUBLIMATION of a solid substance is the quantity of heat required to convert a unit mass of the substance from the solid to the gaseous state at constant temperature. CALORIMETRY PROBLEMS involve the sharing of thermal energy among initially hot objects and cold objects. Since energy must be conserved, one can write the following equation: 185
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

186

HEAT QUANTITIES

[CHAP. 18

Sum of heat changes for all objects 0 Here the heat ¯owing out of the high temperature system ÁQout < 0 numerically equals the heat ¯owing into the low temperature system ÁQin > 0 and so the sum is zero. This, of course, assumes that no thermal energy is otherwise lost from the system. ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY is the mass of water vapor present per unit volume of gas (usually the atmosphere). Typical units are kg/m3 and g/cm3 . RELATIVE HUMIDITY (R.H.) is the ratio obtained by dividing the mass of water vapor per unit volume present in the air by the mass of water vapor per unit volume present in saturated air at the same temperature. When it is expressed in percent, the ratio is multiplied by 100. DEW POINT: Cooler air at saturation contains less water than warmer air does at saturation. When air is cooled, it eventually reaches a temperature at which it is saturated. This temperature is called the dew point. At temperatures lower than this, water condenses out of the air.

Solved Problems
18.1 (a) How much heat is required to raise the temperature of 250 mL of water from 20:0 8C to 35:0 8C? (b) How much heat is lost by the water as it cools back down to 20:0 8C?
Since 250 mL of water has a mass of 250 g, and since c 1:00 cal/g Á8C for water, we have a b ÁQ mc ÁT 250 g1:00 cal=g Á8C15:0 8C 3:75 Â 103 cal 15:7 kJ ÁQ mc ÁT 250 g1:00 cal=g Á8CÀ15:0 8C À3:75 Â 103 cal À15:7 kJ

18.2

How much heat does 25 g of aluminum give o as it cools from 100 8C to 20 8C? For aluminum, c 880 J=kg Á8C:
ÁQ mc ÁT 0:025 kg880 J=kg Á8CÀ80 8C À1:8 kJ À0:42 kcal

18.3

A certain amount of heat is added to a mass of aluminum c 0:21 cal/g Á8C, and its temperature is raised 57 8C. Suppose that the same amount of heat is added to the same mass of copper c 0:093 cal=g Á8C. How much does the temperature of the copper rise?
Because ÁQ is the same for both, we have mcA1 ÁTA1 mcCu ÁTCu c 0:21 57 8C 1:3 Â 102 8C A1 ÁTA1 0:093 cCu

or

ÁTCu

18.4

Two identical metal plates (mass m, speci®c heat c) have dierent temperatures; one is at 20 8C, and the other is at 90 8C. They are placed in good thermal contact. What is their ®nal temperature?

CHAP. 18]

HEAT QUANTITIES

187

Because the plates are identical, we would guess the ®nal temperature to be midway between 20 8C and 90 8C, namely 55 8C. This is correct, but let us show it mathematically. From the law of conservation of energy, the heat lost by one plate must equal the heat gained by the other. Thus the total heat change of the system is zero. In equation form, (heat change of hot plate) (heat change of cold plate) 0 mcÁThot mcÁTcold 0 Be careful about ÁT: It is the ®nal temperature (which we denote by Tf in this case) minus the initial temperature. The above equation thus becomes mcTf À 90 8C mcTf À 20 8C 0 After canceling mc from each term, we solve and ®nd Tf 55 8C, the expected answer.

18.5

A thermos bottle contains 250 g of coee at 90 8C. To this is added 20 g of milk at 5 8C. After equilibrium is established, what is the temperature of the liquid? Assume no heat loss to the thermos bottle.
Water, coee, and milk all have the same value of c, 1.00 cal/g Á8C. The law of energy conservation allows us to write (heat change of coffee) (heat change of milk 0 cm ÁTcoffee cm ÁTmilk 0 If the ®nal temperature of the liquid is Tf , then ÁTcoffee Tf À 90 8C Substituting and canceling c give 250 gTf À 90 8C 20 gTf À 5 8C 0 Solving gives Tf 84 8C: ÁTmilk Tf À 5 8C

18.6

A thermos bottle contains 150 g of water at 4 8C. Into this is placed 90 g of metal at 100 8C. After equilibrium is established, the temperature of the water and metal is 21 8C. What is the speci®c heat of the metal? Assume no heat loss to the thermos bottle.
(heat change of metal) (heat change of water) 0 cm ÁTmetal cm ÁTwater 0 cmetal 90 gÀ79 8C 1:00 cal=g Á8C150 g17 8C 0 Solving gives cmetal 0:36 cal=g Á8C. Notice that ÁTmetal 21 À 90 À79 8C:

18.7

A 200-g copper calorimeter can contains 150 g of oil at 20 8C. To the oil is added 80 g of aluminum at 300 8C. What will be the temperature of the system after equilibrium is established? cCu 0:093 cal=g Á8C, cA1 0:21 cal=g Á8C, coil 0:37 cal=g Á8C:
(heat change of aluminum) (heat change of can and oil) 0 cm ÁTA1 cm ÁTCu cm ÁToil 0 With given values substituted, this becomes cal cal 80 gTf À 300 8C 0:093 200 gTf À 20 8C 0:21 g Á8C g Á8C cal 150 gTf À 20 8C 0 0:37 g Á8C Solving gives Tf as 72 8C.

188

HEAT QUANTITIES

[CHAP. 18

18.8

Exactly 3.0 g of carbon was burned to CO2 in a copper calorimeter. The mass of the calorimeter is 1500 g, and there is 2000 g of water in the calorimeter. The initial temperature was 20 8C, and the ®nal temperature is 31 8C. Calculate the heat given o per gram of carbon. cCu 0:093 cal=g Á8C. Neglect the small heat capacity of the carbon and carbon dioxide.
The law of energy conservation tells us that (heat change of carbon (heat change of calorimeter) (heat change of water 0 (heat change of carbon) 0:093 cal=g Á8C1500 g11 8C 1 cal=g Á8C2000 g11 8C 0 (heat change of carbon) À23 500 cal Therefore, the heat given o by one gram of carbon as it burns is 23 500 cal 7:8 kcal=g 3:0 g

18.9

Determine the temperature Tf that results when 150 g of ice at 0 8C is mixed with 300 g of water at 50 8C:
From energy conservation, (heat change of ice) (heat change of water) 0 (heat to melt ice) (heat to warm ice water) (heat change of water) 0 mLf ice cm ÁTice water cm ÁTwater 0 150 g80 cal=g 1:00 cal=g Á8C150 gTf À 0 8C 1:00 cal=g Á8C300 gTf À 50 8C 0 from which Tf 6:7 8C:

18.10 How much heat is given up when 20 g of steam at 100 8C is condensed and cooled to 20 8C?
Heat change (condensation heat change) (heat change of water during cooling) mLv cm ÁT 20 gÀ540 cal=g 1:00 cal=g Á8C20 g20 8C À 100 8C À12 400 cal À12 kcal

18.11 A 20-g piece of aluminum c 0:21 cal=g Á8C at 90 8C is dropped into a cavity in a large block of ice at 0 8C. How much ice does the aluminum melt?
(heat change of Al as it cools to 0 8C (heat change of mass m of ice melted 0 mc ÁTA1 Lf mice 0 20 g0:21 cal=g Á8C0 8C À 90 8C 80 cal=gm 0 from which m 4:7 g is the quantity of ice melted.

18.12 In a calorimeter can (which behaves thermally as if it were equivalent to 40 g of water) are 200 g of water and 50 g of ice, all at exactly 0 8C. Into this is poured 30 g of water at 90 8C. What will be the ®nal condition of the system?
Let us start by assuming (perhaps incorrectly) that the ®nal temperature is Tf > 0 8C. Then heat change of heat to heat to warm heat to warm 0 hot water melt ice 250 g of water calorimeter 30 g1:00 cal=g Á8CTf À 90 8C 50 g80 cal=g 250 g1 cal=g Á8CTf À 0 8C 40 g1:00 cal=g Á8CTf À 0 8C 0

CHAP. 18]

HEAT QUANTITIES

189

Solving gives Tf À4:1 8C, contrary to our assumption that the ®nal temperature is above 0 8C. Apparently, not all the ice melts. Therefore, Tf 0 8C. To ®nd how much ice melts, we write Heat lost by hot water heat gained by melting ice 30 g1:00 cal=g Á8C90 8C 80 cal=gm where m is the mass of ice that melts. Solving gives m 34 g. The ®nal system has 50 g À 34 g 16 g of ice not melted.

18.13 An electric heater that produces 900 W of power is used to vaporize water. How much water at 100 8C can be changed to steam in 3.00 min by the heater? (For water at 100 8C, Lv 2:26 Â 106 J/kg.)
The heater produces 900 J of heat energy per second. So the heat produced in 3.00 min is ÁQ 900 J=s180 s 162 kJ The heat required to vaporize a mass m of water is ÁQ mLv m2:26 Â 106 J=kg Equating these two expressions for ÁQ and solving for m gives m 0:0717 kg 71:7 g as the mass of water vaporized.

18.14 A 3.00-g bullet c 0:0305 cal=g Á8C 128 J=kg Á8C moving at 180 m/s enters a bag of sand and stops. By what amount does the temperature of the bullet change if all its KE becomes thermal energy that is added to the bullet?
The bullet loses KE in the amount KE 1 mv2 1 3:00 Â 10À3 kg180 m=s2 48:6 J 2 2 This results in the addition of ÁQ 48:6 J of thermal energy to the bullet. Then, since ÁQ mc ÁT, we can ®nd ÁT for the bullet: ÁT ÁQ 48:6 J 127 8C mc 3:00 Â 10À3 kg128 J=kg Á8C

Notice that we had to use c in J/kg Á8C, and not in cal/g Á8C:

18.15 Suppose a 60-kg person consumes 2500 Cal of food in one day. If the entire heat equivalent of this food were retained by the person's body, how large a temperature change would it cause? (For the body, c 0:83 cal/g Á8C:) Remember that 1 Cal 1 kcal 1000 cal.
The equivalent amount of heat added to the body in one day is ÁQ 2500 Cal1000 cal=Cal 2:5 Â 106 cal Then, by use of ÁQ mc ÁT, ÁT ÁQ 2:5 Â 106 cal 50 8C mc 60 Â 103 g0:83 cal=g Á8C

18.16 A thermometer in a 10 m Â 8:0 m Â 4:0 m room reads 22 8C and a humidistat reads the R.H. to be 35 percent. What mass of water vapor is in the room? Saturated air at 22 8C contains 19.33 g H2 O/m3 .

190

HEAT QUANTITIES

[CHAP. 18

7R:H: 35

mass of water/m3 Â 100 mass of water/m3 of saturated air mass/m3 Â 100 0:019 33 kg=m3

from which mass/m3 6:77 Â 10À3 kg/m3 . But the room in question has a volume of 10 m Â 8:0 m Â 4:0 m 320 m3 . Therefore, the total mass of water in it is 320 m3 6:77 Â 10À3 kg=m3 2:2 kg

18.17 On a certain day when the temperature is 28 8C, moisture forms on the outside of a glass of cold drink if the glass is at a temperature of 16 8C or lower. What is the R.H. on that day? Saturated air at 28 8C contains 26.93 g/m3 of water, while, at 16 8C, it contains 13.50 g/m3 .
Dew forms at a temperature of 16 8C or lower, so the dew point is 16 8C. The air is saturated at that temperature and therefore contains 13.50 g/m3 . Then R:H: mass present/m3 13:50 0:50 507 mass/m3 in saturated air 26:93

18.18 Outside air at 5 8C and 20 percent relative humidity is introduced into a heating and air conditioning plant where it is heated to 20 8C and its relative humidity is increased to a comfortable 50 percent. How many grams of water must be evaporated into a cubic meter of outside air to accomplish this? Saturated air at 5 8C contains 6.8 g/m3 of water, and at 20 8C it contains 17.3 g/m3 .
Mass/m3 of water vapor in air at 5 8C 0:20 Â 6:8 g=m3 1:36 g=m3 Comfortable mass/m3 at 20 8C 0:50 Â 17:3 g=m3 8:65 g=m3 1 m3 of air at 5 8C expands to (293/278) m3 1:054 m3 at 20 8C Mass of water vapor in 1.054 m3 at 20 8C 1:054 m3 Â 8:65 g=m3 9:12 g Mass of water to be added to each m3 of air at 5 8C 9:12 À 1:36 g 7:8 g

Supplementary Problems
18.19 How many calories are required to heat each of the following from 15 8C to 65 8C? (a) 3.0 g of aluminum, (b) 5.0 g of pyrex glass, (c) 20 g of platinum. The speci®c heats, in cal/g Á 8C, for aluminum, pyrex, and platinum are 0.21, 0.20, and 0.032, respectively. Ans. (a) 32 cal; (b) 50 cal; (c) 32 cal When 5.0 g of a certain type of coal is burned, it raises the temperature of 1000 mL of water from 10 8C to 47 8C. Calculate the thermal energy produced per gram of coal. Neglect the small heat capacity of the coal. Ans. 7.4 kcal/g Furnace oil has a heat of combustion of 44 MJ/kg. Assuming that 70 percent of the heat is useful, how many kilograms of oil are required to raise the temperature of 2000 kg of water from 20 8C to Ans. 22 kg 99 8C? What will be the ®nal temperature if 50 g of water at exactly 0 8C is added to 250 g of water at 90 8C? Ans. 75 8C

18.20

18.21

18.22

CHAP. 18]

HEAT QUANTITIES

191

18.23

A 50-g piece of metal at 95 8C is dropped into 250 g of water at 17:0 8C and warms it to 19:4 8C. What is the speci®c heat of the metal? Ans. 0.16 cal/g Á8C How long does it take a 2.50-W heater to boil away 400 g of liquid helium at its boiling point (4.2 K)? For helium, Lv 5:0 cal/g. Ans. 56 min A 55-g copper calorimeter c 0:093 cal/g Á8C contains 250 g of water at 18:0 8C. When 75 g of an alloy at 100 8C is dropped into the calorimeter, the resulting temperature is 20:4 8C. What is the speci®c heat of the alloy? Ans. 0.10 cal/g Á8C Determine the temperature that results when 1.0 kg of ice at exactly 0 8C is mixed with 9.0 kg of water at 50 8C. Ans 37 8C How much heat is required to change 10 g of ice at exactly 0 8C to steam at 100 8C? Ans. 7.2 kcal

18.24

18.25

18.26

18.27 18.28

Ten kilograms of steam at 100 8C is condensed in 500 kg of water at 40:0 8C. What is the resulting temperature? Ans. 51:8 8C The heat of combustion of ethane gas is 373 kcal/mole. Assuming that 60.0 percent of the heat is useful, how many liters of ethane, measured at standard temperature and pressure, must be burned to convert 50.0 kg of water at 10:0 8 C to steam at 100:0 8C? One mole of a gas occupies 22.4 liters at precisely 0 8C and 1 atm. Ans. 3:15 Â 103 liters Calculate the heat of fusion of ice from the following data for ice at 0 8C added to water: Mass of calorimeter Mass of calorimeter plus water Mass of calorimeter plus water and ice Initial temperature of water Final temperature of mixture Speci®c heat of calorimeter Ans. 80 cal/g 60 g 460 g 618 g 38:0 8C 5:0 8C 0.10 cal/g Á8C

18.29

18.30

18.31

Determine the result when 100 g of steam at 100 8C is passed into 200 g of water and 20 g of ice at exactly 0 8C in a calorimeter which behaves thermally as if it were equivalent to 30 g of water. Ans. 49 g of steam condensed, ®nal temperature 100 8C Determine the result when 10 g of steam at 100 8C is passed into 400 g of water and 100 g of ice at exactly 0 8C in a calorimeter which behaves thermally as if it were equivalent to 50 g of water. Ans. 80 g of ice melted, ®nal temperature 0 8C Suppose a person who eats 2500 Cal of food each day loses the heat equivalent of the food through evaporation of water from the body. How much water must evaporate each day? At body temperature, Lv for water is about 600 cal/g. Ans. 4.17 kg How long will it take a 500-W heater to raise the temperature of 400 g of water from 15:0 8C to 98:0 8C. Ans. 278 s A 0.250-hp drill causes a dull 50.0-g steel bit to heat up rather than to deepen a hole in a block of hard wood. Assuming that 75.0 percent of the friction-loss energy causes heating of the bit, by what amount will its temperature change in 20.0 s? For steel, c 450 J/kg Á8C. Ans. 124 8C On a certain day the temperature is 20 8C and the dew point is 5:0 8C. What is the relative humidity? Saturated air at 20 8C and 5:0 8C contains 17.12 and 6.80 g/m3 of water, respectively. Ans. 40%

18.32

18.33

18.34

18.35

18.36

192

HEAT QUANTITIES

[CHAP. 18

18.37

How much water vapor exists in a 105-m3 room on a day when the relative humidity in the room is 32 percent and the room temperature is 20 8C? Saturated air at 20 8C contains 17.12 g/m3 of water. Ans. 0.58 kg Air at 30 8C and 90 percent relative humidity is drawn into an air conditioning unit and cooled to 20 8C. The relative humidity is simultaneously reduced to 50 percent. How many grams of water are removed from a cubic meter of air at 30 8C by the air conditioner? Saturated air contains 30.4 g/m3 and 17.1 g/m3 of water at 30 8C and 20 8C, respectively. Ans. 19 g

18.38

Chapter 19
Transfer of Heat Energy
ENERGY CAN BE TRANSFERRED by conduction, convection, and radiation. Remember that heat is the energy transferred from a system at a higher temperature to a system at a lower temperature (with which it is in contact) via the collisions of their constituent particles.

CONDUCTION occurs when thermal energy moves through a material as a result of collisions between the free electrons, ions, atoms, and molecules of the material. The hotter a substance, the higher the average KE of its atoms. When a temperature dierence exists between materials in contact, the higher-energy atoms in the warmer substance transfer energy to the lower-energy atoms in the cooler substance when atomic collisions occur between the two. Heat thus ¯ows from hot to cold. Consider the slab of material shown in Fig. 19-1. Its thickness is L, and its cross-sectional area is A. The temperatures of its two faces are T1 and T2 , so the temperature dierence across the slab is ÁT T1 À T2 . The quantity ÁT=L is called the temperature gradient. It is the rate-of-change of temperature with distance.

Fig. 19-1

The quantity of heat ÁQ transmitted from face 1 to face 2 in time Át is given by ÁQ ÁT kT A Át L where kT depends on the material of the slab and is called the thermal conductivity of the material. In the SI, kT has the unit W=m Á K, and ÁQ=Át is in J/s (i.e., W). Other units sometimes used to express kT are related to W=m Á K as follows: 1 cal/s Á cm Á 8C 418:4 W/m Á K and 1 Btu Á in:=h Á ft2 Á 8F 0:144 W/m Á K

THE THERMAL RESISTANCE (or R value) of a slab is de®ned by the heat-¯ow equation in the form ÁQ A ÁT Át R where 193
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

R

L kT

194

TRANSFER OF HEAT ENERGY

[CHAP. 19

Its SI unit is m2 ÁK=W. Its customary unit is ft2 Á h Á 8F=Btu, where 1 ft2 Á h Á8F=Btu 0:176 m2 Á K=W. (It is unlikely that you will have occasion to confuse this symbol R with the symbol for the universal gas constant.) For several slabs of the same surface area in series, the combined R value is R R1 R2 Á Á Á RN where R1 ; F F F, are the R values of the individual slabs.

CONVECTION of thermal energy occurs in a ¯uid when warm material ¯ows so as to displace cooler material. Typical examples are the ¯ow of warm air from a register in a heating system and the ¯ow of warm water in the Gulf Stream.

RADIATION is the mode of transport of radiant electromagnetic energy through vacuum and the empty space between atoms. Radiant energy is distinct from heat, though both correspond to energy in transit. Heat is heat; electromagnetic radiation is electromagnetic radiation ± don't confuse the two. A blackbody is a body that absorbs all the radiant energy falling on it. At thermal equilibrium, a body emits as much energy as it absorbs. Hence, a good absorber of radiation is also a good emitter of radiation. Suppose a surface of area A has absolute temperature T and radiates only a fraction as much energy as would a blackbody surface. Then is called the emissivity of the surface, and the energy per second (i.e., the power) radiated by the surface is given by the Stefan±Boltzmann Law: P AT 4 where 5:67 Â 10À8 W=m2 Á K4 is the Stefan±Boltzmann constant, and T is the absolute temperature. The emissivity of a blackbody is unity. All objects whose temperature is above absolute zero radiate energy. When an object at absolute temperature T is in an environment where the temperature is Te , the net energy radiated per second by the object is
4 P AT 4 À Te

Solved Problems
19.1 An iron plate 2 cm thick has a cross-sectional area of 5000 cm2 . One face is at 150 8C, and the other is at 140 8C. How much heat passes through the plate each second? For iron, kT 80 W=m Á K:
ÁQ ÁT 10 8C kT A 80 W=m Á K0:50 m2 20 kJ=s Át L 0:02 m

19.2

A metal plate 4.00 mm thick has a temperature dierence of 32:0 8C between its faces. It transmits 200 kcal/h through an area of 5.00 cm2 . Calculate the thermal conductivity of this metal in W/m Á K:

CHAP. 19]

TRANSFER OF HEAT ENERGY

195

kT

ÁQ L 2:00 Â 105 cal4:184 J=cal 4:00 Â 10À3 m Át AT1 À T2 1:00 h3600 s=h 5:00 Â 10À4 m2 32:0 K 58:5 W=m ÁK

19.3

Two metal plates are soldered together as shown in Fig. 19-2. It is known that A 80 cm2 , L1 L2 3:0 mm, T1 100 8C, T2 0 8C. For the plate on the left, kT1 48:1 W=m Á K; for the plate on the right kT2 68:2 W=m Á K. Find the heat ¯ow rate through the plates and the temperature T of the soldered junction.
We assume equilibrium conditions so that the heat ¯owing through plate 1 equals that through plate 2. Then kT1 A T1 À T T À T2 kT2 A L1 L2

Fig. 19-2

But L1 L2 , so this becomes kT1 100 8C À T kT2 T À 0 8C kT1 48:1 100 8C 41:4 8C T 100 8C kT1 kT2 48:1 68:2 ÁQ T ÀT kT1 A 1 Át L1 W 100 À 41:4K 48:1 0:008 0 m2 7:5 kJ=s mÁK 0:003 0 m

from which The heat ¯ow rate is then

19.4

A beverage cooler is in the shape of a cube, 42 cm on each inside edge. Its 3.0-cm thick walls are made of plastic kT 0:050 W=m Á K. When the outside temperature is 20 8C, how much ice will melt inside the cooler each hour?
The cubical box has six sides, each with an area of about (0.42 m)2 . Then, from ÁQ=Át kT A ÁT=L, we have, with the ice inside at 0 8C ÁQ 20 8C 0:050 W=m Á k0:42 m2 6 35:3 J=s 8:43 cal=s Át 0:030 m

196

TRANSFER OF HEAT ENERGY

[CHAP. 19

In one hour, ÁQ 602 8:43 30 350 cal. To melt 1.0 g of ice requires 80 cal, so the mass of ice melted in one hour is m 30 350 cal 0:38 kg 80 cal=g

19.5

A copper tube (length, 3.0 m; inner diameter, 1.500 cm; outer diameter, 1.700 cm) passes through a vat of rapidly circulating water maintained at 20 8C. Live steam at 100 8C passes through the tube. (a) What is the heat ¯ow rate from the steam into the vat? (b) How much steam is condensed each minute? For copper, kT 1:0 cal/s Á cm Á 8C.
Because the thickness of the tube is much smaller than its radius, the inner surface area of the tube, 2ri L 20:750 cm300 cm 1410 cm2 nearly equals its outer surface area, 2ro L 20:850 cm300 cm 1600 cm2 As an approximation, we can consider the tube to be a plate of thickness 0.100 cm and area given by A 1 1410 cm2 1600 cm2 1500 cm2 2 a (b) ÁQ ÁT kT A Át L 1:0 cal 1500 cm2 80 8C 1:2 Â 106 cals=s s Á cm Á8C 0:100 cm

In one minute, the heat conducted from the tube is ÁQ 1:2 Â 106 cal=s60 s 72 Â 106 cal It takes 540 cal to condense 1.0 g of steam at 100 8C. Therefore Steam condensed per min 72 Â 106 cal 13:3 Â 104 g 1:3 Â 102 kg 540 cal=g

In practice, various factors would greatly reduce this theoretical value.

19.6

(a) Calculate the R value for a wall consisting of the following layers: concrete block R 1:93, 1.0 inch of insulating board R 4:3, and 0.50 inch of drywall R 0:45, all in U.S. Customary Units. (b) If the wall has an area of 15 m2 , ®nd the heat ¯ow per hour through it when the temperature just outside is 20 8C lower than inside.
a R R1 R2 Á Á Á RN 1:93 4:3 0:45 6:7 in U.S. Customary Units. Using the fact that 1 U.S. Customary Unit of R 0:176 m2 Á K=W, we get R 1:18 m2 Á K=W: b ÁQ A ÁT 15 m2 20 8C Át 3600 s 0:915 MJ 2:2 Â 102 kcal R 1:18 m2 Á K=W

19.7

A spherical body of 2.0 cm diameter is maintained at 600 8C. Assuming that it radiates as if it were a blackbody, at what rate (in watts) is energy radiated from the sphere?
A surface area 4r 2 40:01 m2 1:26 Â 10À3 m2 P AT 4 1:26 Â 10À3 m2 5:67 Â 10À8 W=m2 Á K4 873 K4 41 W

CHAP. 19]

TRANSFER OF HEAT ENERGY

197

19.8

An unclothed person whose body has a surface area of 1.40 m2 with an emissivity of 0.85 has a skin temperature of 37 8C and stands in a 20 8C room. How much energy does the person lose per minute?
From P AT 4 À T 4 , we have the energy loss e AT 4 À T 4 Át 0:851:40 m2 T 4 À T 4 60 s e e Using 5:67 Â 10À8 W/m2 Á K4 , T 273 37 310 K, and Te 273 20 293 K gives an energy loss of 7:6 kJ 1:8 kcal

Supplementary Problems
19.9 19.10 What temperature gradient must exist in an aluminum rod for it to transmit 8.0 cal per second per cm2 of cross section down the rod? kT for aluminum is 210 W/K Á m. Ans. 16 8C=cm A single-thickness glass window on a house actually has layers of stagnant air on its two surfaces. But if it did not, how much heat would ¯ow out of an 80 cm Â 40 cm Â 3.0 mm window each hour on a day when the outside temperature was precisely 0 8C and the inside temperature was 18 8C? For glass, kT is 0.84 W/K Á m. Ans. 1:4 Â 103 kcal/h How many grams of water at 100 8C can be evaporated per hour per cm2 by the heat transmitted through a steel plate 0.20 cm thick, if the temperature dierence between the plate faces is 100 8C? For steel, kT is 42 W/K Á m. Ans. 0:33 kg=h Á cm2 A certain double-pane window consists of two glass sheets, each 80 cm Â 80 cm Â 0.30 cm, separated by a 0.30-cm stagnant air space. The indoor surface temperature is 20 8C, while the outdoor surface temperature is exactly 0 8C. How much heat passes through the window each second? kT 0:84 W/K Á m for glass and about 0.080 W/K Á m for air. Ans. 69 cal/s A small hole in a furnace acts like a blackbody. Its area is 1.00 cm2 , and its temperature is the same as that of the interior of the furnace, 1727 8C. How many calories are radiated out of the hole each second? Ans. 21.7 cal/s An incandescent lamp ®lament has area 50 mm2 and operates at a temperature of 2127 8C. Assume that all the energy furnished to the bulb is radiated from it. If the ®lament's emissivity is 0.83, how much power must be furnished to the bulb when it is operating? Ans. 78 W A sphere of 3.0 cm radius acts like a blackbody. It is in equilibrium with its surroundings and absorbs 30 kW of power radiated to it from the surroundings. What is the temperature of the sphere? Ans. 2:6 Â 103 K A 2.0 cm thick brass plate (kT 105 W=K Á m is sealed to a glass sheet (kT 0:80 W=K Á m, and both have the same area. The exposed face of the brass plate is at 80 8C, while the exposed face of the glass is at 20 8C. How thick is the glass if the glass±brass interface is at 65 8C? Ans. 0.46 mm

19.11

19.12

19.13

19.14

19.15 19.16

Chapter 20
First Law of Thermodynamics
HEAT ÁQ is the thermal energy that ¯ows from one body or system to another, which is in contact with it, because of their temperature dierence. Heat always ¯ows from hot to cold. For two objects in contact to be in thermal equilibrium with each other (i.e., for no net heat transfer from one to the other), their temperatures must be the same. If each of two objects is in thermal equilibrium with a third body, then the two are in thermal equilibrium with each other. (This fact is often referred to as the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics.) THE INTERNAL ENERGY U of a system is the total energy content of the system. It is the sum of all forms of energy possessed by the atoms and molecules of the system. THE WORK DONE BY A SYSTEM ÁW is positive if the system thereby loses energy to its surroundings. When the surroundings do work on the system so as to give it energy, ÁW is a negative quantity. In a small expansion ÁV, a ¯uid at constant pressure P does work given by ÁW P ÁV

THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS is a statement of the law of conservation of energy. It states that if an amount of heat ÁQ ¯ows into a system, then this energy must appear as increased internal energy ÁU for the system and/or work ÁW done by the system on its surroundings. As an equation, the First Law is ÁQ ÁU ÁW

AN ISOBARIC PROCESS is a process carried out at constant pressure. AN ISOVOLUMIC PROCESS is a process carried out at constant volume. When a gas undergoes such a process, ÁW P ÁV 0 and so the First Law of Thermodynamics becomes ÁQ ÁU Any heat that ¯ows into the system appears as increased internal energy of the system. AN ISOTHERMAL PROCESS is a constant-temperature process. In the case of an ideal gas where the constituent atoms or molecules do not interact when separated, ÁU 0 in an isothermal process. However, this is not true for many other systems. For example, ÁU T 0 as ice melts to water at 0 8C, even though the process is isothermal. For an ideal gas, ÁU 0 in an isothermal change and so the First Law becomes ÁQ ÁW 198
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

(ideal gas)

CHAP. 20]

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

199

For an ideal gas changing isothermally from P1 ; V1 to P2 ; V2 , where P1 V1 P2 V2 , V V ÁQ ÁW P1 V1 ln 2 2:30P1 V1 log 2 V1 V1 Here, ln and log are logarithms to the base e and base 10 respectively.

AN ADIABATIC PROCESS is one in which no heat is transferred to or from the system. For such a process, ÁQ 0. Hence, in an adiabatic process, the ®rst law becomes 0 ÁU ÁW Any work done by the system is done at the expense of the internal energy. Any work done on the system serves to increase the internal energy. For an ideal gas changing from conditions P1 ; V1 ; T1 to P2 ; V2 ; T2 in an adiabatic process, P1 V P2 V 1 2 where cp =cn is discussed below. and T1 V
À1 T2 V
À1 1 2

SPECIFIC HEATS OF GASES: When a gas is heated at constant volume, the heat supplied goes to increase the internal energy of the gas molecules. But when a gas is heated at constant pressure, the heat supplied not only increases the internal energy of the molecules but also does mechanical work in expanding the gas against the opposing constant pressure. Hence the speci®c heat of a gas at constant pressure cp , is greater than its speci®c heat at constant volume, cv . It can be shown that for an ideal gas of molecular mass M, cp À cv R M (ideal gas)

where R is the universal gas constant. In the SI, R 8314 J/kmol Á K and M is in kg/kmol; then cp and cv must be in J=kg Á K J=kg Á8C. Some people use R 1:98 cal=mol Á8C and M in g/mol, in which case cp and cv are in cal=g Á8C:

SPECIFIC HEAT RATIO cp =cv : As discussed above, this ratio is greater than unity for a gas. The kinetic theory of gases indicates that for monatomic gases (such as He, Ne, Ar), 1:67. For diatomic gases (such as O2, N2), 1:40 at ordinary temperatures.

WORK IS RELATED TO AREA in a P±V diagram. The work done by a ¯uid in an expansion is equal to the area beneath the expansion curve on a P±V diagram. In a cyclic process, the work output per cycle done by a ¯uid is equal to the area enclosed by the P±V diagram representing the cycle.

THE EFFICIENCY OF A HEAT ENGINE is de®ned as eff work output heat input

The Carnot cycle is the most ecient cycle possible for a heat engine. An engine that operates in accordance to this cycle between a hot reservoir Th and a cold reservoir Tc has eciency

200

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

[CHAP. 20

eff max 1 À Kelvin temperatures must be used in this equation.

Tc Th

Solved Problems
20.1 In a certain process, 8.00 kcal of heat is furnished to the system while the system does 6.00 kJ of work. By how much does the internal energy of the system change during the process?
We have ÁQ 8000 cal4:184 J=cal 33:5 kJ Therefore, from the First Law ÁQ ÁU ÁW; ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 33:5 kJ À 6:00 kJ 27:5 kJ and ÁW 6:00 kJ

20.2

The speci®c heat of water is 4184 J=kg Á K. By how many joules does the internal energy of 50 g of water change as it is heated from 21 8C to 37 8C?
The heat added to heat the water is ÁQ cm ÁT 4184 J=kg Á K0:050 kg16 8C 3:4 Â 103 J If we ignore the slight expansion of the water, no work was done on the surroundings and so ÁW 0. Then, the ®rst law, ÁQ ÁU ÁW, tells us that ÁU ÁQ 3:4 kJ

20.3

How much does the internal energy of 5.0 g of ice at precisely 0 8C increase as it is changed to water at 0 8C? Neglect the change in volume.
The heat needed to melt the ice is ÁQ mLf 5:0 g80 cal=g 400 cal No external work is done by the ice as it melts and so ÁW 0. Therefore, the First Law, ÁQ ÁU ÁW, tells us that ÁU ÁQ 400 cal4:184 J=cal 1:7 kJ

20.4

A spring k 500 N=m supports a 400-g mass which is immersed in 900 g of water. The speci®c heat of the mass is 450 J/kg Á K. The spring is now stretched 15 cm and, after thermal equilibrium is reached, the mass is released so it vibrates up and down. By how much has the temperature of the water changed when the vibration has stopped?
The energy stored in the spring is dissipated by the eects of friction and goes to heat the water and mass. The energy stored in the stretched spring was PEe 1 kx2 1 500 N=m0:15 m2 5:625 J 2 2 This energy appears as heat that ¯ows into the water and the mass. Using ÁQ cm ÁT, we have 5:625 J 4184 J=kg Á K0:900 kg ÁT 450 J=kg Á K0:40 kg ÁT which gives ÁT 5:625 J 0:001 4 K 3950 J=K

CHAP. 20]

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

201

20.5

Find ÁW and ÁU for a 6.0-cm cube of iron as it is heated from 20 8C to 300 8C at atmospheric pressure. For iron, c 0:11 cal/g Á8C and the volume coecient of thermal expansion is 3:6 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 . The mass of the cube is 1700 g.
ÁQ cm ÁT 0:11 cal=g Á8C1700 g280 8C 52 kcal The volume of the cube is V 6:0 cm3 216 cm3 . Using ÁV=V ÁT gives ÁV V ÁT 216 Â 10À6 m3 3:6 Â 10À5 8CÀ1 280 8C 2:18 Â 10À6 m3 Then, assuming atmospheric pressure to be 1:0 Â 105 Pa, we have ÁW P ÁV 1:0 Â 105 N=m2 2:18 Â 10À6 m3 0:22 J But the First Law tells us that ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 52 000 cal4:184 J=cal À 0:22 J 218 000 J À 0:22 J % 2:2 Â 105 J Notice how very small the work of expansion against the atmosphere is in comparison to ÁU and ÁQ. Often ÁW can be neglected when dealing with liquids and solids.

20.6

A motor supplies 0.4 hp to stir 5 kg of water. Assuming that all the work goes into heating the water by friction losses, how long will it take to increase the temperature of the water 6 8C?
The heat required to heat the water is ÁQ mc ÁT 5000 g1 cal=g Á8C6 8C 30 kcal This is actually supplied by friction work, so Friction work done ÁQ 30 kcal4:184 J=cal 126 kJ and this equals the work done by the motor. But Work done by motor in time t powert 0:4 hp Â 746 W=hpt Equating this to our previous value for the work done gives t 1:26 Â 105 J 420 s 7 min 0:4 Â 746 W

20.7

In each of the following situations, ®nd the change in internal energy of the system. (a) A system absorbs 500 cal of heat and at the same time does 400 J of work. (b) A system absorbs 300 cal and at the same time 420 J of work is done on it. (c) Twelve hundred calories is removed from a gas held at constant volume. Give your answers in kilojoules.
a b c ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 500 cal4:184 J=cal À 400 J 1:69 kJ ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 300 cal4:184 J=cal À À420 J 1:68 kJ ÁU ÁQ À ÁW À1200 cal4:184 J=cal À 0 À5:02 kJ

Notice that ÁQ is positive when heat is added to the system, and ÁW is positive when the system does work. In the reverse cases, ÁQ and ÁW must be taken negative.

20.8

For each of the following adiabatic processes, ®nd the change in internal energy. (a) A gas does 5 J of work while expanding adiabatically. (b) During an adiabatic compression, 80 J of work is done on a gas.
During an adiabatic process, no heat is transferred to or from the system. a ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 0 À 5 J À5 J

202

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

[CHAP. 20

b

ÁU ÁQ À ÁW 0 À À80 J 80 J

20.9

The temperature of 5.00 kg of N2 gas is raised from 10:0 8C to 130:0 8C: If this is done at constant pressure, ®nd the increase in internal energy ÁU and the external work ÁW done by the gas. For N2 gas, cv 0:177 cal/g Á8C and cp 0:248 cal=g Á8C:
If the gas had been heated at constant volume, then no work would have been done during the process. In that case ÁW 0, and the ®rst law would tell us that ÁQv ÁU. Because ÁQv cv m ÁT, we would have ÁU ÁQv 0:177 cal=g Á8C5000 g120 8C 106 kcal 443 kJ The temperature change is a manifestation of the internal energy change. When the gas is heated by 120 8C at constant pressure, the same change in internal energy occurs. In addition, however, work is done. The ®rst law then becomes ÁQp ÁU ÁW 443 kJ ÁW But so ÁQp cp m ÁT 0:248 cal=g Á8C5000 g120 8C 149 kcal 623 kJ ÁW ÁQp À ÁU 623 kJ À 443 kJ 180 kJ

20.10 One kilogram of steam at 100 8C and 101 kPa occupies 1.68 m3 . (a) What fraction of the observed heat of vaporization of water is accounted for by the expansion of water into stream? (b) Determine the increase in internal energy of 1.00 kg of water as it is vaporized at 100 8C.
(a) One kilogram of water expands from 1000 cm3 to 1.68 m3 , so ÁV 1:68 À 0:001 % 1:68 m3 . Therefore, the expansion work done is ÁW P ÁV 101 Â 103 N=m2 1:68 m3 169 kJ The heat of vaporization of water is 540 cal/g, which is 2.26 MJ/kg. The required fraction is therefore ÁW 169 kJ 0:074 8 mLv 1:00 kg2260 kJ=kg (b) From the First Law, ÁU ÁQ À ÁW, so ÁU 2:26 Â 106 J À 0:169 Â 106 J 2:07 MJ

20.11 For nitrogen gas, cv 740 J/kg Á K. Find its speci®c heat at constant pressure. (The molecular mass of nitrogen gas is 28.0 kg/kmol.)
Method 1 cp cv Method 2 Since N2 is a diatomic gas, and since cp =cv 1:40 for such a gas, cp 1:40cv 1:40740 J=kg Á K 1:04 kJ=kg Á K R 740 J 8314 J=kmol Á K 1:04 kJ=kg Á K M kg Á K 28:0 kg=kmol

20.12 How much work is done by an ideal gas in expanding isothermally from an initial volume of 3.00 liters at 20.0 atm to a ®nal volume of 24.0 liters?

CHAP. 20]

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

203

For an isothermal expansion by an ideal gas, V2 V ÁW P1 V1 ln 2:30P1 V1 log 2 V1 V1

24:0 2:3020:0 Â 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 3:00 Â 10À3 m3 log 12:6 kJ 3:00

20.13 The P±V diagram in Fig. 20-1 applies to a gas undergoing a cyclic change in a piston±cylinder arrangement. What is the work done by the gas in (a) portion AB of the cycle? (b) Portion BC? (c) Portion CD? (d ) Portion DA?
In expansion, the work done is equal to the area under the pertinent portion of the P±V curve. In contraction, the work is numerically equal to the area but is negative.

Fig. 20-1

a b (c)

Work = area ABFEA 4:0 À 1:5 Â 10À6 m3 4:0 Â 105 N=m2 1:0 J Work = area under BC 0 In portion BC, the volume does not change; therefore P ÁV 0: This is a contraction, ÁV is negative and so the work is negative: W Àarea CDEFC À2:5 Â 10À6 m3 2:0 Â 105 N=m2 À0:50 J

d

W 0

20.14 For the thermodynamic cycle shown in Fig. 20-1, ®nd (a) the net work output of the gas during the cycle and (b) the net heat ¯ow into the gas per cycle.
Method 1 (a) From Problem 20.13, the net work done is 1:0 J À 0:50 J 0:5 J:

Method 2 The net work done is equal to the area enclosed by the P±V diagram: Work = area ABCDA 2:0 Â 105 N=m2 2:5 Â 10À6 m3 0:50 J

204

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

[CHAP. 20

(b)

Suppose the cycle starts at point A. The gas returns to this point at the end of the cycle, so there is no dierence in the gas at its start and end points. For one complete cycle, ÁU is therefore zero. We have then, if the ®rst law is applied to a complete cycle, ÁQ ÁU ÁW 0 0:50 J 0:50 J 0:12 cal

20.15 What is the net work output per cycle for the thermodynamic cycle in Fig. 20-2?

Fig. 20-2

We know that the net work output per cycle is the area enclosed by the P±V diagram. We estimate that in area ABCA there are 22 squares, each of area 0:5 Â 105 N=m2 0:1 m3 5 kJ Therefore, Area enclosed by cycle % 225 kJ 1 Â 102 kJ The net work output per cycle is 1 Â 102 kJ.

20.16 Twenty cubic centimeters of monatomic gas at 12 8C and 100 kPa is suddenly (and adiabatically) compressed to 0.50 cm3 . What are its new pressure and temperature?
For an adiabatic change involving an ideal gas, P1 V P2 V where 1:67 for a monatomic gas. 1 2 Hence, P2 P1 V1 V2 20 1:67 1:00 Â 105 N=m2 4:74 Â 107 N=m2 47 MPa 0:50

To ®nd the ®nal temperature, we could use P1 V1 =T1 P2 V2 =T2 . Instead, let us use T1 V
À1 T2 V
À1 1 2
À1 V1 20 0:67 285 K 285 K11:8 3:4 Â 103 K 0:50 V2

or

T2 T1

CHAP. 20]

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

205

As a check, P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2

1 Â 105 N=m2 20 cm3 4:74 Â 107 N=m2 0:50 cm3 285 K 3370 K 7000 7000 [

20.17 Compute the maximum possible eciency of a heat engine operating between the temperature limits of 100 8C and 400 8C:
The most ecient engine is the Carnot engine, for which Efficiency 1 À Tc 373 K 0:446 44:67 1À 673 K Th

20.18 A steam engine operating between a boiler temperature of 220 8C and a condenser temperature of 35:0 8C delivers 8.00 hp. If its eciency is 30.0 percent of that for a Carnot engine operating between these temperature limits, how many calories are absorbed each second by the boiler? How many calories are exhausted to the condenser each second?
308 K Actual efficiency 0:30Carnot efficiency 0:300 1 À 0:113 493 K But the relation Efficiency gives Input heat/s output work/s efficiency 8:00 hp746 W=hp 0:113 output work input heat 1:00 cal=s 4:184 W

12:7 kcal=s

To ®nd the energy rejected to the condenser, we use the law of conservation of energy: Input energy (output work (rejected energy Thus; Rejected energy/s (input energy/s À (output work/s) (input energy/s)1 À efficiency 12:7 kcal=s1 À 0:113 11:3 kcal=s

20.19 Three kilomoles (6.00 kg) of hydrogen gas at S.T.P. expands isobarically to precisely twice its volume. (a) What is the ®nal temperature of the gas? (b) What is the expansion work done by the gas? (c) By how much does the internal energy of the gas change? (d ) How much heat enters the gas during the expansion? For H2 , cv 10:0 kJ=kg Á K:
(a) From P1 V1 =T1 P2 V2 =T2 with P1 P2 ; V2 273 K2:00 546 K T2 T1 V1 Because 1 kmol at S.T.P. occupies 22.4 m3 , we have V1 67:2 m3 . Then ÁW P ÁV PV2 À V1 1:01 Â 105 N=m2 67:2 m3 6:8 MJ (c) To raise the temperature of this ideal gas by 273 K at constant volume requires ÁQ cv m ÁT 10:0 kJ=kg Á K6:00 kg273 K 16:4 MJ

(b)

206

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

[CHAP. 20

This is also the internal energy that must be added to the 6.00 kg of H2 to change its temperature from 273 K to 546 K. Therefore, ÁU 16:4 MJ: (d ) Because the system obeys the First Law during the process, ÁQ ÁU ÁW 16:4 MJ 6:8 MJ 23:2 MJ

20.20 A cylinder of ideal gas is closed by an 8.00 kg movable piston (area 60:0 cm2 as shown in Fig. 20-3. Atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa. When the gas is heated from 30:0 8C to 100:0 8C, the piston rises 20.0 cm. The piston is then fastened in place, and the gas is cooled back to 30:0 8C. Calling ÁQ1 the heat added to the gas in the heating process, and ÁQ2 the heat lost during cooling, ®nd the dierence between ÁQ1 and ÁQ2 .

Fig. 20-3

During the heating process, the internal energy changed by ÁU1 , and work ÁW1 was done. The gas pressure was P Therefore; 8:009:81 N 1:00 Â 105 N=m2 1:13 Â 105 N=m2 60:0 Â 10À4 m2

ÁQ1 ÁU1 ÁW1 ÁU1 P ÁV ÁU1 1:13 Â 105 N=m2 0:200 Â 60:0 Â 10À4 m3 ÁU1 136 J

During the cooling process, ÁW 0 and so (since ÁQ2 is heat lost) ÀÁQ2 ÁU2 But the ideal gas returns to its original temperature, and so its internal energy is the same as at the start. Therefore ÁU2 ÀÁU1 , or ÁQ2 ÁU1 . It follows that ÁQ1 exceeds ÁQ2 by 136 J 32:5 cal.

Supplementary Problems
20.21 A 2.0 kg metal block c 0:137 cal/g Á8C is heated from 15 8C to 90 8C. By how much does its internal energy change? Ans. 86 kJ

20.22

By how much does the internal energy of 50 g of oil c 0:32 cal=g Á8C change as the oil is cooled from 100 8C to 25 8C. Ans. À1:2 kcal

CHAP. 20]

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

207

20.23

A 70-g metal block moving at 200 cm/s slides across a tabletop a distance of 83 cm before it comes to rest. Assuming 75 percent of the thermal energy developed by friction goes into the block, how much does the temperature of the block rise? For the metal, c 0:106 cal/g Á8C. Ans. 3:4 Â 10À3 8C If a certain mass of water falls a distance of 854 m and all the energy is eective in heating the water, what will be the temperature rise of the water? Ans. 2:00 8C How many joules of heat per hour are produced in a motor that is 75.0 percent ecient and requires 0.250 hp to run it? Ans. 168 kJ A 100-g bullet c 0:030 cal=g Á8C is initially at 20 8C. It is ®red straight upward with a speed of 420 m/s, and on returning to the starting point strikes a cake of ice at exactly 0 8C. How much ice is melted? Neglect air friction. Ans. 26 g To determine the speci®c heat of an oil, an electrical heating coil is placed in a calorimeter with 380 g of the oil at 10 8C. The coil consumes energy (and gives o heat) at the rate of 84 W. After 3.0 min, the oil temperature is 40 8C. If the water equivalent of the calorimeter and coil is 20 g, what is the speci®c heat of the oil? Ans. 0.26 cal/g Á8C How much external work is done by an ideal gas in expanding from a volume of 3.0 liters to a volume of 30.0 liters against a constant pressure of 2.0 atm? Ans. 5.5 kJ As 3.0 liters of ideal gas at 27 8C is heated, it expands at a constant pressure of 2.0 atm. How much work is done by the gas as its temperature is changed from 27 8C to 227 8C? Ans. 0.40 kJ An ideal gas expands adiabatically to three times its original volume. In doing so, the gas does 720 J of work. (a) How much heat ¯ows from the gas? (b) What is the change in internal energy of the gas? (c) Does its temperature rise or fall? Ans. (a) none; (b) À720 J; (c) it falls An ideal gas expands at a constant pressure of 240 cmHg from 250 cm3 to 780 cm3 . It it then allowed to cool at constant volume to its original temperature. What is the net amount of heat that ¯ows into the gas during the entire process? Ans. 40.4 cal As an ideal gas is compressed isothermally, the compressing agent does 36 J of work. How much heat ¯ows from the gas during the compression process? Ans. 8.6 cal The speci®c heat of air at constant volume is 0.175 cal/g Á8C. (a) By how much does the internal energy of 5.0 g of air change as it is heated from 20 8C to 400 8C? (b) Suppose that 5.0 g of air is adiabatically compressed so as to rise its temperature from 20 8C to 400 8C. How much work must be done on the air to compress it? Ans. (a) 0.33 kcal; (b) 1.4 kJ or since work done on the system is negative, À1:4 kJ Water is boiled at 100 8C and 1.0 atm. Under these conditions, 1.0 g of water occupies 1.0 cm3 , 1.0 g of steam occupies 1670 cm3 , and Lv 540 cal/g. Find (a) the external work done when 1.0 g of steam is formed at 100 8C and (b) the increase in internal energy. Ans. (a) 0.17 kJ; (b) 0.50 kcal The temperature of 3.0 kg of krypton gas is raised from À20 8C to 80 8C. (a) If this is done at constant volume, compute the heat added, the work done, and the change in internal energy. (b) Repeat if the heating process is at constant pressure. For the monatomic gas Kr, cv 0:035 7 cal/g Á8C and cp 0:059 5 cal/g Á8C. Ans. (a) 11 kcal, 0, 45 kJ; (b) 18 kcal, 30 kJ, 45 kJ (a) Compute cv for the monatomic gas argon, given cp 0:125 cal/g Á8C and 1:67. (b) Compute cp for the diatomic gas nitric oxide (NO), given cv 0:166 cal/g Á8C and 1:40. Ans. (a) 0.074 9 cal/g Á8C; (b) 0.232 cal/g Á8C

20.24

20.25

20.26

20.27

20.28

20.29

20.30

20.31

20.32

20.33

20.34

20.35

20.36

208

FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

[CHAP. 20

20.37

Compute the work done in an isothermal compression of 30 liters of ideal gas at 1.0 atm to a volume of 3.0 liters. Ans. 7.0 kJ Five mole of neon gas at 2.00 atm and 27:0 8C is adiabatically compressed to one-third its initial volume. Find the ®nal pressure, ®nal temperature, and external work done on the gas. For neon, 1:67, cv 0:148 cal/g Á8C, and M 20:18 kg/kmol. Ans. 1.27 MPa, 626 K, 20.4 kJ Determine the work done by the gas in portion AB of the thermodynamic cycle in Fig. 20-2. Repeat for portion CA. Give answers to one signi®cant ®gure. Ans. 0.4 MJ, À0:3 MJ Find the net work output per cycle for the thermodynamic cycle in Fig. 20-4. Give your answer to two signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 2.1 kJ

20.38

20.39

20.40

Fig. 20-4

20.41

Four grams of gas, con®ned to a cylinder, is carried through the cycle shown in Fig. 20-4. At A the temperature of the gas is 400 8C. (a) What is its temperature at B? (b) If, in the portion from A to B, 2.20 kcal ¯ows into the gas, what is cv for the gas? Give your answers to two signi®cant ®gures. Ans. (a) 2:0 Â 103 K; (b) 0.25 cal/g Á8C Figure 20-4 is the P±V diagram for 25.0 g of an enclosed ideal gas. At A the gas temperature is 200 8C. The value of cv for the gas is 0.150 cal/g Á8C. (a) What is the temperature of the gas at B? (b) Find ÁU for the portion of the cycle from A to B. (c) Find ÁW for this same portion. (d ) Find ÁQ for this same portion. Ans. (a) 1:42 Â 103 K; (b) 3.55 kcal 14:9 kJ; (c) 3.54 kJ; (d ) 18.4 kJ

20.42

Chapter 21
Entropy and the Second Law
THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS can be stated in three equivalent ways: (1) Heat ¯ows spontaneously from a hotter to a colder object, but not vice versa. (2) No heat engine that cycles continuously can change all its heat-in to useful work-out. (3) If a system undergoes spontaneous change, it will change in such a way that its entropy will increase or, at best, remain constant. The Second Law tells us the manner in which a spontaneous change will occur, while the First Law tells us whether or not the change is possible. The First Law deals with the conservation of energy; the Second Law deals with the dispersal of energy.

ENTROPY S is a state variable for a system in equilibrium. By this is meant that S is always the same for the system when it is in a given equilibrium state. Like P, V, and U, the entropy is a characteristic of the system at equilibrium. When heat ÁQ enters a system at an absolute temperature T, the resulting change in entropy of the system is ÁS ÁQ T

provided the system changes in a reversible way. The SI unit for entropy is J/K. A reversible change (or process) is one in which the values of P, V, T, and U are well-de®ned during the change. If the process is reversed, then P, V, T, and U will take on their original values when the system is returned to where it started. To be reversible, a process must usually be slow, and the system must be close to equilibrium during the entire change. Another, fully equivalent, de®nition of entropy can be given from a detailed molecular analysis of the system. If a system can achieve a particular state (i.e., particular values of P, V, T, and U) in (omega) dierent ways (dierent arrangements of the molecules, for example), then the entropy of the state is S kB ln where ln is the logarithm to base e, and kB is Boltzmann's constant, 1:38 Â 10À23 J/K.

ENTROPY IS A MEASURE OF DISORDER: A state that can occur in only one way (one arrangement of its molecules, for example) is a state of high order. But a state that can occur in many ways is a more disordered state. One way to associate a number with disorder, is to take the disorder of a state as being proportional to , the number of ways the state can occur. Because S kB ln , entropy is a measure of disorder. Spontaneous processes in systems that contain many molecules always occur in a direction from a state that can exist state that can exist 3 in only a few ways in many ways Hence, when left to themselves, systems retain their original state of order or else increase their disorder. 209
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

210

ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW

[CHAP. 21

THE MOST PROBABLE STATE of a system is the state with the largest entropy. It is also the state with the most disorder and the state that can occur in the largest number of ways.

Solved Problems
21.1 Twenty gram of ice at precisely 0 8C melts to water with no change in temperature. By how much does the entropy of the 20-g mass change in this process?
By slowly adding heat to the ice, we can melt it in a reversible way. The heat needed is ÁQ mLf 20 g80 cal=g 1600 cal ÁQ 1600 cal ÁS so 5:86 cal=K 25 J=K T 273 K Notice that melting increases the entropy (and disorder).

21.2

As shown in Fig. 21-1, an ideal gas is con®ned to a cylinder by a piston. The piston is pushed down slowly so that the gas temperature remains at 20:0 8C. During the compression, 730 J of work is done on the gas. Find the entropy change of the gas.
The First Law tells us that ÁQ ÁU ÁW Because the process was isothermal, the internal energy of the ideal gas did not change. Therefore, ÁU 0 and ÁQ ÁW À730 J (Because the gas was compressed, the gas did negative work, hence the minus sign.) Now we can write ÁQ À730 J À2:49 J=K T 293 K Notice that the entropy change is negative. The disorder of the gas decreased as it was pushed into a smaller volume. ÁS

Fig. 21-1

Fig. 21-2

21.3

As shown in Fig. 21-2, a container is separated into two equal-volume compartments. The two compartments contain equal masses of the same gas, 0.740 g in each, and cv for the gas is 745 J/kg Á K. At the start, the hot gas is at 67:0 8C, while the cold gas is at 20:0 8C. No heat can leave or

CHAP. 21]

ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW

211

enter the compartments except slowly through the partition AB. Find the entropy change of each compartment as the hot gas cools from 67:0 8C to 65:0 8C:
The heat lost by the hot gas in the process is ÁQ mcv ÁT 0:000 740 kg745 J=kg ÁKÀ2:0 8C À1:10 J For the hot gas (approximately the temperature as 66 8C, ÁSh ÁQ À1:10 J À3:2 Â 10À3 J=K % Th 273 66 K ÁQ 1:10 J 3:8 Â 10À3 J=K % Tc 273 21 K

For the cold gas, since it will gain 1.10 J, ÁSc

As you can see, the entropy changes were dierent for the two compartments; more was gained than was lost. The total entropy of the universe increased as a result of this process.

21.4

The ideal gas in the cylinder in Fig. 21-1 is initially at conditions P1 , V1 , T1 . It is slowly expanded at constant temperature by allowing the piston to rise. Its ®nal conditions are P2 , V2 , T1 , where V2 3V1 . Find the change in entropy of the gas during this expansion. The mass of gas is 1.5 g, and M 28 kg/kmol for it.
Recall from Chapter 20 that, for an isothermal expansion of an ideal gas (where ÁU 0, V2 ÁW ÁQ P1 V1 ln V1 ÁQ P1 V1 V2 m V2 Consequently; R ln ln ÁS T M T1 V1 V1 where we have used the Ideal Gas Law. Substituting the data gives 2 3 1:5 Â 10À3 kg J ÁS 8314 ln 3 0:49 J=K 28 kg=kmol kmol ÁK

21.5

Two vats of water, one at 87 8C and the other at 14 8C, are separated by a metal plate. If heat ¯ows through the plate at 35 cal/s, what is the change in entropy of the system that occurs in a second?
The higher-temperature vat loses entropy, while the cooler one gains entropy: ÁSh ÁQ À35 cal4:184 J=cal À0:41 J=K Th 360 K ÁQ 35 cal4:184 J=cal ÁSc 0:51 J=K Tc 287 K

Therefore 0:51 J=K À 0:41 J=K 0:10 J=K:

21.6

A system consists of 3 coins that can come up either heads or tails. In how many dierent ways can the system have (a) all heads up? (b) All tails up? (c) One tail and two heads up? (d ) Two tails and one head up?
(a) (b) (c) There is only one way all the coins can be heads-up: Each coin must be heads-up. Here, too, there is only one way. There are three ways, corresponding to the three choices for the coin showing the tail.

(d ) By symmetry with (c), there are three ways.

212

ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW

[CHAP. 21

21.7

Find the entropy of the three-coin system described in Problem 21.6 if (a) all coins are heads-up, (b) two coins are heads-up.
We use the Boltzmann relation S kB ln , where is the number of ways the state can occur, and kB 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K: (a) Since this state can occur in only one way, S kB ln 1 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K0 0 (b) Since this state can occur in three ways, S 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K ln 3 1:52 Â 10À23 J=K

Supplementary Problems
21.8 21.9 21.10 Compute the entropy change of 5.00 g of water at 100 8C as it changes to steam at 100 8C under standard pressure. Ans. 7.24 cal/K 30:3 J/K By how much does the entropy of 300 g of a metal c 0:093 cal/g Á8C change as it is cooled from 90 8C to Ans. À6:6 J/K 70 8C? You may approximate T 1 T1 T2 : 2 An ideal gas was slowly expanded from 2.00 m3 to 3.00 m3 at a constant temperature of 30 8C. The entropy change of the gas was 47 J/K during the process. (a) How much heat was added to the gas during the process? (b) How much work did the gas do during the process? Ans. (a) 3.4 kcal; (b) 14 kJ Starting at standard conditions, 3.0 kg of an ideal gas M 28 kg/kmol) is isothermally compressed to one®fth of its original volume. Find the change in entropy of the gas. Ans. À1:4 kJ/K Four poker chips are red on one side and white on the other. In how many dierent ways can (a) only 3 reds come up? (b) Only two reds come up? Ans. (a) 4; (b) 6 When 100 coins are tossed, there is one way in which all can come up heads. There are 100 ways in which only one tail comes up. There are about 1 Â 1029 ways that 50 heads can come up. One hundred coins are placed in a box with only one head up. They are shaken and then there are 50 heads up. What was the change in entropy of the coins caused by the shaking? Ans. 9 Â 10À22 J/K

21.11 21.12 21.13

Chapter 22
Wave Motion
A PROPAGATING WAVE is a self-sustaining disturbance of a medium that travels from one point to another, carrying energy and momentum. Mechanical waves are aggregate phenomena arising from the motion of constituent particles. The wave advances, but the particles of the medium only oscillate in place. A wave has been generated on the string in Fig. 22-1 by the sinusoidal vibration of the hand at its end. The wave furnishes a record of earlier vibrations of the source. Energy is carried by the wave from the source to the right, along the string. This direction, the direction of energy transport, is called the direction (or line) of propagation of the wave.

Fig. 22-1

Each particle of the string (such as the one at point C) vibrates up and down, perpendicular to the line of propagation. Any wave in which the vibration direction is perpendicular to the direction of propagation is called a transverse wave. Typical transverse waves, besides those on a string, are electromagnetic waves ± light and radio waves. By contrast, in sound waves the vibration direction is parallel to the direction of propagation, as you will see in Chapter 23. Such a wave is called a longitudinal (or compressional) wave.

WAVE TERMINOLOGY: The period T of a wave is the time it takes the wave to go through one complete cycle. It is the time taken for a particle such as the one at A to move through one complete vibration or cycle, down from point A and then back to A. The period is the number of seconds per cycle. The frequency f of a wave is the number of cycles per second: Thus, f 1 T

If T is in seconds, then f is in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz 1 sÀ1 . The period and frequency of the wave are the same as the period and frequency of the vibration. The top points on the wave, such as A and C, are called wave crests. The bottom points, such as B and D, are called troughs. As time goes on, the crests and troughs move to the right with speed v, the speed of the wave. The amplitude of a wave is the maximum disturbance undergone during a vibration cycle, distance y0 in Fig. 22-1. 213
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

214

WAVE MOTION

[CHAP. 22

The wavelength j is the distance along the direction of propagation between corresponding points on the wave, distance AC for example. In a time T, a crest moving with speed v will move a distance j to the right. Therefore, s vt gives v j vT f and v fj This relation holds for all waves, not just for waves on a string.

IN-PHASE VIBRATIONS exist at two points on a wave if those points undergo vibrations that are in the same direction, in step. For example, the particles of the string at points A and C in Fig. 22-1 vibrate in-phase, since they move up together and down together. Vibrations are inphase if the points are a whole number of wavelengths apart. The pieces of the string at A and B vibrate opposite to each other; the vibrations there are said to be 1808, or half a cycle, out-ofphase.

THE SPEED OF A TRANSVERSE WAVE on a stretched string or wire is s tension in string v mass per unit length of string

STANDING WAVES: At certain vibrational frequencies, a system can undergo resonance. That is to say, it can eciently absorb energy from a driving source in its environment which is oscillating at that frequency (Fig. 22-2). These and similar vibration patterns are called standing waves, as compared to the propagating waves considered above. These might better not be called waves at all since they do not transport energy and momentum. The stationary points (such as B and

Fig. 22-2

CHAP. 22]

WAVE MOTION

215

D) are called nodes; the points of greatest motion (such as A, C, and E) are called antinodes. The distance between adjacent nodes (or antinodes) is 1 j. We term the portion of the string between 2 adjacent nodes a segment, and the length of a segment is also 1 j: 2

CONDITIONS FOR RESONANCE: A string will resonate only if the vibration wavelength has certain special values: the wavelength must be such that a whole number of wave segments (each 1 2 j long) exactly ®t on the string. A proper ®t occurs when nodes and antinodes exist at positions demanded by the constraints on the string. In particular, the ®xed ends of the string must be nodes. Thus, as shown in Fig. 22-2, the relation between the wavelength j and the length L of the resonating string is L n1 j, where n is any integer. Because j vT v=f , the shorter the 2 wave segments at resonance, the higher will be the resonance frequency. If we call the fundamental resonance frequency f1 , then Fig. 22-2 shows that the higher resonance frequencies are given by fn nf1 .

LONGITUDINAL (COMPRESSIONAL) WAVES occur as lengthwise vibrations of air columns, solid bars, and the like. At resonance, nodes exist at ®xed points, such as the closed end of an air column in a tube, or the location of a clamp on a bar. Diagrams such as Fig. 22-2 are used to display the resonance of longitudinal waves as well as transverse waves. However, for longitudinal waves, the diagrams are mainly schematic and are used simply to indicate the locations of nodes and antinodes. In analyzing such diagrams, we use the fact that the distance between node and adjacent antinode is 1 j: 4

Solved Problems
22.1 Suppose that Fig. 22-1 represents a 50-Hz wave on a string. Take distance y0 to be 3.0 mm, and distance AE to be 40 cm. Find the following for the wave: (a) amplitude, (b) wavelength, (c) speed.
(a) (b) (c) By de®nition, the amplitude is distance y0 and is 3.0 mm. The distance between adjacent crests is the wavelength, and so j 20 cm. v jf 0:20 m50 sÀ1 10 m=s

22.2

Measurements show that the wavelength of a sound wave in a certain material is 18.0 cm. The frequency of the wave is 1900 Hz. What is the speed of the sound wave?
From j vT v=f , which applies to all waves, v jf 0:180 m1900 sÀ1 342 m=s

22.3

A horizontal cord 5.00 m long has a mass of 1.45 g. What must be the tension in the cord if the wavelength of a 120 Hz wave on it is to be 60.0 cm? How large a mass must be hung from its end (say, over a pulley) to give it this tension?
We know that v jf 0:600 m120 sÀ1 72:0 m=s

216

WAVE MOTION

[CHAP. 22

Further, since v

p (tension)/(mass per unit length);
2

2

Tension mass per unit lengthv

3 1:45 Â 10À3 kg 72:0 m=s2 1:50 N 5:00 m

The tension in the cord balances the weight of the mass hung at its end. Therefore, FT mg or m FT 1:50 N 0:153 kg g 9:81 m=s2

22.4

A uniform ¯exible cable is 20 m long and has a mass of 5.0 kg. It hangs vertically under its own weight and is vibrated from its upper end with a frequency of 7.0 Hz. (a) Find the speed of a transverse wave on the cable at its midpoint. (b) What are the frequency and wavelength at the midpoint?
(a)

p We shall use v (tension)/(mass per unit length). The midpoint of the cable supports half its weight, so the tension there is FT 1 5:0 kg9:81 m=s2 24:5 N 2 Further so that Mass per unit length 5:0 kg 0:25 kg=m 20 m s 24:5 N 9:9 m=s v 0:25 kg=m

(b)

Because wave crests do not pile up along a string or cable, the number passing one point must be the same as that for any other point. Therefore the frequency, 7.0 Hz, is the same at all points. To ®nd the wavelength at the midpoint, we must use the speed we found for that point, 9.9 m/s. That gives us j v 9:9 m=s 1:4 m f 7:0 Hz

22.5

Suppose that Fig. 22-2 shows a metal string under a tension of 88.2 N. Its length is 50.0 cm and its mass is 0.500 g. (a) Compute v for transverse waves on the string. (b) Determine the frequencies of its fundamental, ®rst overtone, and second overtone.
a (b) s s tension 88:2 N 297 m=s v mass per unit length 5:00 Â 10À4 kg=0:500 m We recall that the length of the segment is j=2 and we use j v=f . For the fundamental: j 1:00 m For the ®rst overtone: j 0:500 m For the second overtone: j 0:333 m and f 297 m=s 891 Hz 0:333 m and f 297 m=s 594 Hz 0:500 m and f 297 m=s 297 Hz 1:00 m

22.6

A string 2.0 m long is driven by a 240-Hz vibrator at its end. The string resonates in four segments. What is the speed of transverse waves on the string?

CHAP. 22]

WAVE MOTION

217

Since each segment is j=2 long, we have j L or 4 2 Then, using j vT v=f , we have

j

L 2:0 m 1:0 m 2 2

v f j 240 sÀ1 1:0 m 0:24 km=s

22.7

A banjo string 30 cm long resonates in its fundamental to a frequency of 256 Hz. What is the tension in the string if 80 cm of the string have a mass of 0.75 g?
First we shall ®nd v and then ®nd the tension. We know that the string vibrates in one segment when f 256 Hz. Therefore, from Fig. 22-2, j L 2 and or j 0:30 m2 0:60 m

v f j 256 sÀ1 0:60 m 154 m=s The mass per unit length of the string is

0:75 Â 10À3 kg 9:4 Â 10À4 kg=m 0:80 m p Then, from v (tension)/(mass per unit length); FT 154 m=s2 9:4 Â 10À4 kg=m 22 N

22.8

A string vibrates in ®ve segments to a frequency of 460 Hz. (a) What is its fundamental frequency? (b) What frequency will cause it to vibrate in three segments?
Detailed Method If the string is n segments long, then from Fig. 22-2 we have n1 j L. But j v=fn , so L nv=2fn . 2 Solving for fn gives v fn n 2L We are told that f5 460 Hz, and so v v 460 Hz 5 or 92:0 Hz 2L 2L Substituting this in the above relation gives fn n92:0 Hz (a) (b) f1 92:0 Hz: f3 392 Hz 276 Hz

Alternative Method We recall that for a string held at both ends, fn nf1 . Knowing that f5 460 Hz, we ®nd f1 92:0 Hz and f3 276 Hz.

22.9

A string fastened at both ends resonates at 420 Hz and 490 Hz with no resonance frequencies in between. Find its fundamental resonance frequency.
In general, fn nf1 . We are told that fn 420 Hz and fn1 490 Hz. Therefore, 420 Hz nf1 and 490 Hz n 1f1 We subtract the ®rst equation from the second to obtain f1 70:0 Hz.

218

WAVE MOTION

[CHAP. 22

22.10 A violin string resonates in its fundamental at 196 Hz. Where along the string must you place your ®nger so its fundamental becomes 440 Hz?
In the fundamental, L 1 j. Since j v=f , we have f1 v=2L. Originally, the string of length L1 2 resonated to a frequency of 196 Hz, and so v 196 Hz 2L1 We want it to resonate to 440 Hz, so we have 440 Hz v 2L2

We eliminate v from these two simultaneous equations and ®nd L2 196 Hz 0:445 L1 440 Hz To obtain the desired resonance, the ®nger must shorten the string to 0.445 of its original length.

22.11 A 60 cm long bar, clamped at its middle, is vibrated lengthwise by an alternating force at its end. (See Fig. 22-3.) Its fundamental resonance frequency is found to be 3.0 kHz. What is the speed of longitudinal waves in the bar?
Because its ends are free, the bar must have antinodes there. The clamp point at its center must be a node. Therefore, the fundamental resonance is as shown in Fig. 22-3. Because the distance from node to antinode is always 1 j, we see that L 21 j. Since L 0:60 m, we ®nd j 1:20 m. 4 4 Then, from the basic relation (p. 214) j v=f , we have v jf 1:20 m3:0 kHz 3:6 km=s

22.12 Compressional waves (sound waves) are sent down an air-®lled tube 90 cm long and closed at one end. The tube resonates to several frequencies, the lowest of which is 95 Hz. Find the speed of sound waves in air.
The tube and several of its resonance forms are shown in Fig. 22-4. Recall that the distance between a node and an adjacent antinode is j=4. In our case, the top resonance form applies, since the segments are longest for it and its frequency is therefore lowest. For that form, L j=4, so j 4L 40:90 m 3:6 m Using j vT v=f gives v jf 3:6 m95 sÀ1 0:34 km=s

22.13 To what other frequencies will the tube described in Problem 22.12 resonate?
The ®rst few resonances are shown in Fig. 22-4. We see that, at resonance, L n1 jn 4 where n 1; 3; 5; 7; F F F, is an odd integer, and jn is the resonance wavelength. But jn v=fn , and so v v Ln or fn n nf1 4fn 4L where, from Problem 22.12, f1 95 Hz. The ®rst few resonance frequencies are thus 95 Hz, 0.29 kHz, 0.48 kHz, F F F.

CHAP. 22]

WAVE MOTION

219

Fig. 22-3

Fig. 22-4

22.14 A metal rod 40 cm long is dropped, end ®rst, onto a wooden ¯oor and rebounds into the air. Compressional waves of many frequencies are thereby set up in the bar. If the speed of compressional waves in the bar is 5500 m/s, to what lowest-frequency compressional wave will the bar resonate as it rebounds?
Both ends of the bar will be free, and so antinodes will exist there. In the lowest resonance form (i.e., the one with the longest segments), only one node will exist on the bar, at its center, as shown in Fig. 22-5. We will then have j L2 or j 2L 20:40 m 0:80 m 4 Then, from j vT v=f , f v 5500 m=s 6875 Hz 6:9 kHz j 0:80 m

22.15 A rod 200 cm long is clamped 50 cm from one end, as shown in Fig. 22-6. It is set into longitudinal vibration by an electrical driving mechanism at one end. As the frequency of the driver is slowly increased from a very low value, the rod is ®rst found to resonate at 3 kHz. What is the speed of sound (compressional waves) in the rod?

Fig. 22-5

Fig. 22-6

220

WAVE MOTION

[CHAP. 22

The clamped point remains stationary, and so a node exists there. Since the ends of the rod are free, antinodes exist there. The lowest-frequency resonance occurs when the rod is vibrating in its longest possible segments. In Fig. 22-6 we show the mode of vibration that corresponds to this condition. Since a segment is the length from one node to the next, then the length from A to N in the ®gure is one-half segment. Therefore, the rod is two segments long. This resonance form satis®es our restrictions about positions of nodes and antinodes, as well as the condition that the bar vibrate in the longest segments possible. Since one segment is j=2 long, L 2j=2 Then, from j vT v=f , v jf 2:00 m3 Â 103 sÀ1 6 km=s or j L 200 cm

22.16 (a) Determine the shortest length of pipe closed at one end that will resonate in air to a sound source of frequency 160 Hz. Take the speed of sound in air to be 340 m/s. (b) Repeat for a pipe open at both ends.
(a) Figure 22-4(a) applies in this case. The shortest pipe will be j=4 long. Therefore, 1 1 v 340 m=s 0:531 m L j 4 4 f 4160 sÀ1 In this case the pipe will have antinodes at both ends and a node at its center. Then, 1 1 v 340 m=s 1:06 m L2 j 4 2 f 2160 sÀ1

(b)

22.17 A pipe 90 cm long is open at both ends. How long must a second pipe, closed at one end, be if it is to have the same fundamental resonance frequency as the open pipe?
The two pipes and their fundamental resonances are shown in Fig. 22-7. As we see, Lo 21 j 4 from which Lc 1 Lo 45 cm. 2 Lc 1 j 4

22.18 A glass tube that is 70.0 cm long is open at both ends. Find the frequencies at which it will resonate to sound waves that have a speed of 340 m/s.
A pipe that is open at both ends must have an antinode at each end. It will therefore resonate as in Fig. 22-8. We see that the resonance wavelengths jn are given by j 2L Ln n or jn 2 n

Fig. 22-7

Fig. 22-8

CHAP. 22]

WAVE MOTION

221

where n is an integer. But jn v=fn , so n 340 m=s v n 243n Hz fn 2L 2 Â 0:700 m

Supplementary Problems
22.19 The average person can hear sound waves ranging in frequency from about 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Determine the wavelengths at these limits, taking the speed of sound to be 340 m/s. Ans. 17 m, 1.7 cm Radio station WJR in Detroit broadcasts at 760 kHz. The speed of radio waves is 3:00 Â 108 m/s. What is the wavelength of WJR's waves? Ans. 395 m Radar waves with 3.4 cm wavelength are sent out from a transmitter. Their speed is 3:00 Â 108 m/s. What is their frequency? Ans. 8:8 Â 109 Hz 8:8 GHz When driven by a 120 Hz vibrator, a string has transverse waves of 31 cm wavelength traveling along it. (a) What is the speed of the waves on the string? (b) If the tension in the string is 1.20 N, what is the mass of 50 cm of the string? Ans. (a) 37 m/s; (b) 0.43 g The wave shown in Fig. 22-9 is being sent out by a 60 cycle/s vibrator. Find the following for the wave: (a) amplitude, (b) frequency, (c) wavelength, (d ) speed, (e) period. Ans. (a) 3.0 mm; (b) 60 Hz; (c) 2.00 cm; (d ) 1.2 m/s; (e) 0.017 s

22.20

22.21

22.22

22.23

Fig. 22-9

22.24

A copper wire 2.4 mm in diameter is 3.0 m long and is used to suspend a 2.0 kg mass from a beam. If a transverse disturbance is sent along the wire by striking it lightly with a pencil, how fast will the disturbance travel? The density of copper is 8920 kg/m3 . Ans. 22 m/s A string 180 cm long resonates in three segments to transverse waves sent down it by a 270 Hz vibrator. What is the speed of the waves on the string? Ans. 324 m/s A string resonates in three segments to a frequency of 165 Hz. What frequency must be used if it is to resonate in four segments? Ans. 220 Hz A ¯exible cable, 30 m long and weighing 70 N, is stretched between two poles by a force of 2.0 kN. If the cable is struck sideways at one end, how long will it take the transverse wave to travel to the other end and return? Ans. 0.65 s

22.25

22.26

22.27

222

WAVE MOTION

[CHAP. 22

22.28 22.29

A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental frequency of 256 Hz. What would be the fundamental frequency if the wire were half as long, twice as thick, and under one-fourth the tension? Ans. 128 Hz Steel and silver wires of the same diameter and same length are stretched with equal tension. Their densities are 7.80 g/cm3 and 10.6 g/cm3 , respectively. What is the fundamental frequency of the silver wire if that of the steel is 200 Hz? Ans. 172 Hz A string has a mass of 3.0 gram and a length of 60 cm. What must be the tension so that when vibrating transversely its ®rst overtone has frequency 200 Hz? Ans. 72 N (a) At what point should a stretched string be plucked to make its fundamental tone most prominent? At what point should it be plucked and then at what point touched (b) to make its ®rst overtone most prominent and (c) to make its second overtone most prominent? Ans. (a) center; (b) plucked at 1/4 of its length from one end, then touched at center; (c) plucked at 1/6 of its length from one end, then touched at 1/3 of its length from that end What must be the length of an iron rod that has the fundamental frequency 320 Hz when clamped at its center? Assume longitudinal vibration at a speed of 5.00 km/s. Ans. 7.81 m A rod 120 cm long is clamped at the center and is stroked in such a way as to give its ®rst overtone. Make a drawing showing the location of the nodes and antinodes, and determine at what other points the rod might be clamped and still emit the same tone. Ans. 20.0 cm from either end A metal bar 6.0 m long, clamped at its center and vibrating longitudinally in such a manner that it gives its ®rst overtone, vibrates in unison with a tuning fork marked 1200 vibration/s. Compute the speed of sound in the metal. Ans. 4.8 km/s Determine the length of the shortest air column in a cylindrical jar that will strongly reinforce the sound of a tuning fork having a vibration rate of 512 Hz. Use v 340 m/s for the speed of sound in air. Ans 16.6 cm A long, narrow pipe closed at one end does not resonate to a tuning fork having a frequency of 300 Hz until the length of the air column reaches 28 cm. (a) What is the speed of sound in air at the existing room temperature? (b) What is the next length of column that will resonate to the fork? Ans. (a) 0.34 km/s; (b) 84 cm An organ pipe closed at one end is 61.0 cm long. What are the frequencies of the ®rst three overtones if v for sound is 342 m/s? Ans. 420 Hz, 700 Hz, 980 Hz

22.30 22.31

22.32 22.33

22.34

22.35

22.36

22.37

Chapter 23
Sound
SOUND WAVES are compression waves in a material medium such as air, water, or steel. When the compressions and rarefactions of the waves strike the eardrum, they result in the sensation of sound, provided the frequency of the waves is between about 20 Hz and 20 000 Hz. Waves with frequencies above 20 kHz are called ultrasonic waves. Those with frequencies below 20 Hz are called infrasonic waves.

EQUATIONS FOR SOUND SPEED: In an ideal gas of molecular mass M and absolute temperature T, the speed of sound v is given by r
RT v (ideal gas) M where R is the gas constant, and is the ratio of speci®c heats cp =cv . is about 1.67 for monatomic gases (He, Ne, Ar), and about 1.40 for diatomic gases (N2 , O2 , H2 ). The speed of compression waves in other materials is given by s modulus v density If the material is in the form of a bar, Young's modulus Y is used. For liquids, one must use the bulk modulus.

THE SPEED OF SOUND IN AIR at 0 8C is 331 m/s. The speed increases with temperature by about 0.61 m/s for each 1 8C rise. More precisely, sound speeds v1 and v2 at absolute temperatures T1 and T2 are related by s v1 T1 v2 T2 The speed of sound is essentially independent of pressure, frequency, and wavelength.

THE INTENSITY I of any wave is the energy per unit area, per unit time; in practice, it is the average power carried by the wave through a unit area erected perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave. Suppose that in a time Át an amount of energy ÁE is carried through an area ÁA that is perpendicular to the propagation direction of the wave. Then I ÁE P av ÁA Át ÁA

It may be shown that for a sound wave with amplitude a0 and frequency f , traveling with speed v in a material of density , I 22 f 2va2 0 If f is in Hz, is in kg/m3 , v is in m/s, and a0 (the maximum displacement of the atoms or molecules of the medium) is in m, then I is in W/m2 . 223
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

224

SOUND

[CHAP. 23

LOUDNESS is a measure of the human perception of sound. Although a sound wave of high intensity is perceived as louder than a wave of lower intensity, the relation is far from linear. The sensation of sound is roughly proportional to the logarithm of the sound intensity. But the exact relation between loudness and intensity is complicated and not the same for all individuals. INTENSITY (OR LOUDNESS) LEVEL is de®ned by an arbitrary scale that corresponds roughly to the sensation of loudness. The zero on this scale is taken at the sound-wave intensity I0 1:00 Â 10À12 W/m2 , which corresponds roughly to the weakest audible sound. The intensity level, in decibels, is then de®ned by I 10 log I0 The decibel (dB) is a dimensionless unit. The normal ear can distinguish between intensities that dier by an amount down to about 1 dB. BEATS: The alternations of maximum and minimum intensity produced by the superposition of two waves of slightly dierent frequencies are called beats. The number of beats per second is equal to the dierence between the frequencies of the two waves that are combined. DOPPLER EFFECT: Suppose that a moving sound source emits be the speed of sound, and let the source approach the listener or relative to the medium conducting the sound. Suppose further that the source at speed vo also measured relative to the medium. Then of frequency fo given by v vo fo fs v À vs a sound of frequency fs . Let v observer at speed vs , measured the observer is moving toward the observer will hear a sound

If either the source or observer is moving away from the other, the sign on its speed in the equation must be changed. When the source and observer are approaching each other, more wave crests strike the ear each second than when both are at rest. This causes the ear to perceive a higher frequency than that emitted by the source. When the two are receding, the opposite eect occurs; the frequency appears to be lowered. Because v vo is the speed of a wave crest relative to the observer, and because v À vs is the speed of a wave crest relative to the source, an alternative form is fo fs crest speed relative to observer crest speed relative to source

INTERFERENCE EFFECTS: Two sound waves of the same frequency and amplitude may give rise to easily observed interference eects at a point through which they both pass. If the crests of one wave fall on the crests of the other, the two waves are said to be in-phase. In that case, they reinforce each other and give rise to a high intensity at that point. However, if the crests of one wave fall on the troughs of the other, the two waves will exactly cancel each other. No sound will then be heard at the point. We say that the two waves are then 1808 (or a half wavelength) out-of-phase. Intermediate eects are observed if the two waves are neither in-phase nor 1808 out-of-phase, but have a ®xed phase relationship somewhere in between.

CHAP. 23]

SOUND

225

Solved Problems
23.1 An explosion occurs at a distance of 6.00 km from a person. How long after the explosion does the person hear it? Assume the temperature is 14:0 8C.
Because the speed of sound increases by 0.61 m/s for each 1:0 8C, we have v 331 m=s 0:6114 m=s 340 m=s Using s vt, we ®nd that the time taken is t s 6000 m 17:6 s v 340 m=s

23.2

To ®nd how far away a lightning ¯ash is, a rough rule is the following: ``Divide the time in seconds between the ¯ash and the sound, by three. The result equals the distance in km to the ¯ash.'' Justify this.
The speed of sound is v % 333 m/s % 1 km/s, so the distance to the ¯ash is 3 t s vt % 3 where t, the travel time of the sound, is in seconds and s is in kilometers. The light from the ¯ash travels so fast, 3 Â 108 m/s, that it reaches the observer almost instantaneously. Hence t is essentially equal to the time between seeing the ¯ash and hearing the thunder. Thus the rule.

23.3

Compute the speed of sound in neon gas at 27:0 8C. For neon, M 20:18 kg/kmol.
Neon, being monatomic, has % 1:67. Therefore, r s
RT 1:678314 J=kmol Á K300 K v 454 m=s M 20:18 kg=kmol

23.4

Find the speed of sound in a diatomic ideal gas that has a density of 3.50 kg/m3 and a pressure of 215 kPa.
We know that v p
RT=M . From the gas law PV m=MRT, so RT V P M m However, m=V, and so the expression for the speed becomes s s
P 1:40215 Â 103 Pa v 293 m=s 3:50 kg=m3 We used the fact that % 1:40 for a diatomic ideal gas.

23.5

A metal rod 60 cm long is clamped at its center. It resonates in its fundamental to longitudinal waves of 3.00 kHz. What is Young's modulus for the material of the rod? The density of the metal is 8700 kg/m3 .
This same rod was discussed in Problem 22.11. We found there that the speed of longitudinal waves in it p is 3.6 km/s. We know that v Y=, and so Y v2 8700 kg=m3 3600 m=s2 1:1 Â 1011 N=m2

226

SOUND

[CHAP. 23

23.6

What is the speed of compression waves (sound waves) in water? The bulk modulus for water is 2:2 Â 109 N/m2 . s s bulk modulus 2:2 Â 109 N=m2 1:5 km=s v density 1000 kg=m3

23.7

A tuning fork oscillates at 284 Hz in air. Compute the wavelength of the tone emitted at 25 8C.
At 25 8C; Using j vT v=f gives j v 346 m=s 1:22 m f 284 sÀ1 v 331 m=s 0:6125 m=s 346 m=s

23.8

An organ pipe whose length is held constant resonates at a frequency of 224.0 Hz when the air temperature is 15 8C. What will be its resonant frequency when the air temperature is 24 8C?
The resonant wavelength must have the same value at each temperature because it depends only on the length of the pipe. (Its nodes and antinodes must ®t properly within the pipe.) But j v=f , and so v=f must be the same at the two temperatures. We thus have v1 v v 2 or f2 224 Hz 2 224 Hz f2 v1 At temperatures near room temperature, v 331 0:61t m/s, where t is the celsius temperature. Then we have ! 331 0:6124 f2 224:0 Hz 0:228 kHz 331 0:6115

23.9

An uncomfortably loud sound might have an intensity of 0.54 W/m2 . Find the maximum displacement of the molecules of air in a sound wave if its frequency is 800 Hz. Take the density of air to be 1.29 kg/m3 and the speed of sound to be 340 m/s.
From I 22 f 2va2 , 0 s s 1 I 1 0:54 W=m2 9:9 Â 10À6 m 9:9 m a0 À1 f 2v 800 s 21:29 kg=m3 340 m=s

23.10 A sound has an intensity of 3:00 Â 10À8 W/m2 . What is the sound level in dB?
2 10 log 2 I 3 1:00 Â 10À12 W=m2 3 3:00 Â 10À8 10 log 3:00 Â 104 104 log 3:00 10 log 1:00 Â 10À12

104 0:477 44:8 dB

23.11 A noise-level meter reads the sound level in a room to be 85.0 dB. What is the sound intensity in the room?

CHAP. 23]

SOUND

227

2 10 log 2 log I 1:00 Â 10À12 W=m2 I 1:00 Â 10À12 W=m2 3

I

3 85:0 dB

1:00 Â 10À12 W=m2

85:0 8:50 10

antilog 8:50 3:16 Â 108

I 1:00 Â 10À12 W=m2 3:16 Â 108 3:16 Â 10À4 W=m2

23.12 Two sound waves have intensities of 10 and 500 W/cm2 . What is the dierence in their intensity levels?
Call the 10 W/cm2 sound A, and the other B. Then I A 10 log A 10log IA À log I0 I 0 IB 10log IB À log I0 B 10 log I0 Subtracting gives I B À A 10log IB À log IA 10 log B IA 500 10 log 50 101:70 10 log 10 17 dB

23.13 Find the ratio of the intensities of two sounds if one is 8.0 dB louder than the other.
We saw in Problem 23.12 that I B À A 10 log B IA IB antilog 0:80 6:3 IA

In the present case this becomes

I 8:0 10 log B IA

or

23.14 A tiny sound source emits sound uniformly in all directions. The intensity level at a distance of 2.0 m is 100 dB. How much sound power is the source emitting?
The energy emitted by a point source can be considered to ¯ow out through a spherical surface which has the source at its center. Hence, if we ®nd the rate of ¯ow through such a surface, it will equal the ¯ow from the source. Take a concentric sphere of radius 2.0 m. We know that the sound level on its surface is 100 dB. You can show that this corresponds to I 0:010 W/m2 . Thus, the energy ¯owing each second through each m2 of surface is 0.010 W. The total energy ¯ow through the spherical surface is then I4r2 , where I 0:010 W/m2 and r 2:0 m: Power from source 0:010 W/m2 )42 m2 0:50 W Notice how little power issues as sound from even such an intense source.

23.15 One typist typing furiously in a room gives rise to an average sound level of 60.0 dB. What will be the decibel level when three equally noisy typists are working?

228

SOUND

[CHAP. 23

If each typist emits the same amount of sound energy, then the ®nal sound intensity If should be three times the initial intensity Ii . We have If f log log If À log I0 I0 and Subtraction yields f À i log If À log Ii If 60:0 dB log 3 60:5 dB f i log Ii i log Ii À log I0

from which

The sound level, being a logarithmic measure, rises very slowly with the number of typists.

23.16 An automobile moving at 30.0 m/s is approaching a factory whistle that has a frequency of 500 Hz. (a) If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s, what is the apparent frequency of the whistle as heard by the driver? (b) Repeat for the case of the car leaving the factory at the same speed.
a b fo fs fo fs v vo 340 m=s 30:0 m=s 500 Hz 544 Hz v À vs 340 m=s À 0

v vo 340 m=s À30:0 m=s 456 Hz 500 Hz 340 m=s À 0 v À vs

23.17 A car moving at 20 m/s with its horn blowing f 1200 Hz) is chasing another car going at 15 m/s. What is the apparent frequency of the horn as heard by the driver being chased? Take the speed of sound to be 340 m/s. fo fs v vo 340 À15 1:22 kHz 1200 Hz 340 À 20 v À vs

23.18 When two tuning forks are sounded simultaneously, they produce one beat every 0.30 s. (a) By how much do their frequencies dier? (b) A tiny piece of chewing gum is placed on a prong of one fork. Now there is one beat every 0.40 s. Was this tuning fork the lower- or the higher-frequency fork?
The number of beats per second equals the frequency dierence. a b Frequency difference Frequency difference 1 3:3 Hz 0:30 s 1 2:5 Hz 0:40 s

Adding gum to the prong increases its mass and thereby decreases its vibrational frequency. This lowering of frequency caused it to come closer to the frequency of the other fork. Hence the fork in question had the higher frequency.

23.19 A tuning fork of frequency 400 Hz is moved away from an observer and toward a ¯at wall with a speed of 2.0 m/s. What is the apparent frequency (a) of the unre¯ected sound waves coming directly to the observer, and (b) of the sound waves coming to the observer after re¯ection? (c) How many beats per second are heard? Assume the speed of sound in air to be 340 m/s.
(a) The fork is receding from the observer, so

CHAP. 23]

SOUND

229

fo fs (b)

v vo 340 m=s 0 400 Hz 397:7 Hz 398 Hz v À vs 340 m=s À À2:0 m=s

The wave crests reaching the wall are closer together than normally because the fork is moving toward the wall. Therefore, the re¯ected wave appears to come from an approaching source: fo fs v vo 340 m=s 0 400 Hz 402:4 Hz 402 Hz v À vs 340 m=s À 2:0 m=s

c

Beats per second difference between frequencies 402:4 À 397:7 Hz 4:7 beats per second

23.20 In Fig. 23-1, S1 and S2 are identical sound sources. They send out their wave crests simultaneously (the sources are in phase). For what values of L1 À L2 will constructive interference obtain and a loud sound be heard at point P?

Fig. 23-1

If L1 L2 , the waves from the two sources will take equal times to reach P. Crests from one will arrive there at the same times as crests from the other. The waves will therefore be in phase at P and an interference maximum will result. If L1 L2 j, then the wave from S1 will be one wavelength behind the one from S2 when they reach P. But because the wave repeats each wavelength, a crest from S1 will still reach P at the same time a crest from S2 does. Once again the waves are in phase at P and an interference maximum will exist there. In general, a loud sound will be heard at P when L1 À L2 Æ n j, where n is an integer.

23.21 The two sound sources in Fig. 23-1 vibrate in-phase. A loud sound is heard at P when L1 L2 . As L1 is slowly increased, the weakest sound is heard when L1 À L2 has the values 20.0 cm, 60.0 cm, and 100 cm. What is the frequency of the sound source if the speed of sound is 340 m/s?
The weakest sound will be heard at P when a crest from S1 and a trough from S2 reach there at the same time. This will happen if L1 À L2 is 1 j, or j 1 j, or 2j 1 j, and so on. Hence the increase in L1 between 2 2 2 weakest sounds is j, and from the data we see that j 0:400 m. Then, from j v=f , f v 340 m=s 850 Hz j 0:400 m

Supplementary Problems
23.22 Three seconds after a gun is ®red, the person who ®red the gun hears an echo. How far away was the surface that re¯ected the sound of the shot? Use 340 m/s for the speed of sound. Ans. 510 m

230

SOUND

[CHAP. 23

23.23 23.24 23.25

What is the speed of sound in air when the air temperature is 31 8C?

Ans. 0.35 km/s

A shell ®red at a target 800 m distant was heard to strike it 5.0 s after leaving the gun. Compute the average horizontal velocity of the shell. The air temperature is 20 8C. Ans. 0.30 km/s In an experiment to determine the speed of sound, two observers, A and B, were stationed 5.00 km apart. Each was equipped with gun and stopwatch. Observer A heard the report of B's gun 15.5 s after seeing its ¯ash. Later, A ®red his gun and B heard the report 14.5 s after seeing the ¯ash. Determine the speed of sound and the component of the speed of the wind along the line joining A to B. Ans. 334 m/s, 11.1 m/s A disk has 40 holes around its circumference and is rotating at 1200 rpm. Determine the frequency and wavelength of the tone produced by the disk when a jet of air is blown against it. The temperature is 15 8C. Ans. 0.80 kHz, 0.43 m Determine the speed of sound in carbon dioxide M 44 kg/kmol, 1:30) at a pressure of 0.50 atm and a temperature of 400 8C. Ans. 0.41 km/s Compute the molecular mass M of a gas for which 1:40 and in which the speed of sound is 1260 m/s at Ans. 2.00 kg/kmol (hydrogen) precisely 0 8C. At S.T.P., the speed of sound in air is 331 m/s. Determine the speed of sound in hydrogen at S.T.P. if the speci®c gravity of hydrogen relative to air is 0.069 0 and if 1:40 for both gases. Ans. 1.26 km/s Helium is a monatomic gas that has a density of 0.179 kg/m3 at a pressure of 76.0 cm of mercury and a temperature of precisely 0 8C. Find the speed of compression waves (sound) in helium at this temperature and pressure. Ans. 970 m/s A bar of dimensions 1:00 cm2 Â 200 cm and mass 2.00 kg is clamped at its center. When vibrating longitudinally it emits its fundamental tone in unison with a tuning fork making 1000 vibration/s. How much will the bar be elongated if, when clamped at one end, a stretching force of 980 N is applied at the other end? Ans. 0.123 m Find the speed of compression waves in a metal rod if the material of the rod has a Young's modulus of 1:20 Â 1010 N/m2 and a density of 8920 kg/m3 . Ans. 1.16 km/s An increase in pressure of 100 kPa causes a certain volume of water to decrease by 5 Â 10À3 percent of its original volume. (a) What is the bulk modulus of water? (b) What is the speed of sound (compression waves) in water? Ans. (a) 2 Â 109 N/m2 ; (b) 1 km/s A sound has an intensity of 5:0 Â 10À7 W/m2 . What is its intensity level? Ans. 57 dB

23.26

23.27

23.28 23.29 23.30

23.31

23.32

23.33

23.34 23.35

A person riding a power mower may be subjected to a sound of intensity 2:00 Â 10À2 W/m2 . What is the intensity level to which the person is subjected? Ans. 103 dB A rock band might easily produce a sound level of 107 dB in a room. To two signi®cant ®gures, what is the sound intensity at 107 dB? Ans. 0.050 0 W/m2 A whisper has an intensity level of about 15 dB. What is the corresponding intensity of the sound? Ans. 3:2 Â 10À11 W/m2 What sound intensity is 3.0 dB louder than a sound of intensity of 10 W/cm2 ? Ans. 20 W/cm2

23.36

23.37

23.38 23.39

Calculate the intensity of a sound wave in air at precisely 0 8C and 1.00 atm if its amplitude is 0.002 0 mm and its wavelength is 66.2 cm. The density of air at S.T.P. is 1.293 kg/m3 . Ans. 8.4 mW/m2

CHAP. 23]

SOUND

231

23.40 23.41 23.42

What is the amplitude of vibration in a 8000 Hz sound beam if its intensity level is 62 dB? Assume that the air is at 15 8C and its density is 1.29 kg/m3 . Ans. 1:7 Â 10À9 m One sound has an intensity level of 75.0 dB while a second has an intensity level of 72.0 dB. What is the intensity level when the two sounds are combined? Ans. 76.8 dB A certain organ pipe is tuned to emit a frequency of 196.00 Hz. When it and the G string of a violin are sounded together, ten beats are heard in a time of exactly 8 s. The beats become slower as the violin string is slowly tightened. What was the original frequency of the violin string? Ans. 194.75 Hz A locomotive moving at 30.0 m/s approaches and passes a person standing beside the track. Its whistle is emitting a note of frequency 2.00 kHz. What frequency will the person hear (a) as the train approaches and (b) as it recedes? The speed of sound is 340 m/s. Ans. (a) 2.19 kHz; (b) 1.84 kHz Two cars are heading straight at each other with the same speed. The horn of one f 3:0 kHz) is blowing, and is heard to have a frequency of 3.4 kHz by the people in the other car. Find the speed at which each car is moving if the speed of sound is 340 m/s. Ans. 21 m/s To determine the speed of a harmonic oscillator, a beam of sound is sent along the line of the oscillator's motion. The sound, which is emitted at a frequency of 8000.0 Hz, is re¯ected straight back by the oscillator to a detector system. The detector observes that the re¯ected beam varies in frequency between the limits of 8003.1 Hz and 7996.9 Hz. What is the maximum speed of the oscillator? Take the speed of sound to be 340 m/s. Ans. 0.132 m/s In Fig. 23-1 are shown two identical sound sources sending waves to point P. They send out wave crests simultaneously (they are in-phase), and the wavelength of the wave is 60 cm. If L2 200 cm, give the values of L1 for which (a) maximum sound is heard at P and (b) minimum sound is heard at P. Ans. (a) 200 Æ 60n cm, where n 0; 1; 2; F F F; (b) 230 Æ 60n cm, where n 0; 1; 2; F F F . The two sources shown in Fig. 23-2 emit identical beams of sound j 80 cm) toward one another. Each sends out a crest at the same time as the other (the sources are in-phase). Point P is a position of maximum intensity, that is, loud sound. As one moves from P toward Q, the sound decreases in intensity. (a) How far from P will a sound minimum ®rst be heard? (b) How far from P will a loud sound be heard once again? Ans. (a) 20 cm; (b) 40 cm

23.43

23.44

23.45

23.46

23.47

Fig. 23-2

Chapter 24
Coulomb's Law and Electric Fields
COULOMB'S LAW: Suppose that two point charges, q and q H , are a distance r apart in vacuum. If q and q H have the same sign, the two charges repel each other; if they have opposite signs, they attract each other. The force experienced by either charge due to the other is called a Coulomb or electric force and it is given by Coulomb's Law, FE k qq H r2 (in vacuum)

As always in the SI, distances are measured in meters, and forces in newtons. The SI unit for charge q is the coulomb (C). The constant k in Coulomb's Law has the value k 8:988 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 which we shall usually approximate as 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 . Often, k is replaced by 1=40 , where 0 8:85 Â 10À12 C2 =NÁm2 is called the permittivity of free space. Then Coulomb's Law becomes, FE 1 qq H 40 r2 (in vacuum)

When the surrounding medium is not a vacuum, forces caused by induced charges in the material reduce the force between point charges. If the material has a dielectric constant K, then 0 in Coulomb's Law must be replaced by Ko , where is called the permittivity of the material. Then FE 1 qq H k qq H 2 4 r K r2

For vacuum, K 1; for air, K 1:000 6: Coulomb's Law also applies to uniform spherical shells or spheres of charge. In that case, r, the distance between the centers of the spheres, must be larger than the sum of the radii of the spheres.

CHARGE IS QUANTIZED: The magnitude of the smallest charge ever measured is denoted by e (called the quantum of charge), where e 1:602 18 Â 10À19 C. All free charges, ones that can be isolated and measured, are integer multiples of e. The electron has a charge of Àe, while the proton's charge is e. Although there is good reason to believe that quarks carry charges of magnitude e=3 and 2e=3, they only exist in bound systems that have a net charge equal to an integer multiple of e.

CONSERVATION OF CHARGE: The algebraic sum of the charges in the universe is constant. When a particle with charge e is created, a particle with charge Àe is simultaneously created in the immediate vicinity. When a particle with charge e disappears, a particle with charge Àe also disappears in the immediate vicinity. Hence the net charge of the universe remains constant.

THE TEST-CHARGE CONCEPT: A test-charge is a very small charge that can be used in making measurements on an electric system. It is assumed that such a charge, which is tiny both in magnitude and physical size, has a negligible eect on its environment. 232
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 24]

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

233

AN ELECTRIC FIELD is said to exist at any point in space when a test charge, placed at that point, experiences an electrical force. The direction of the electric ®eld at a point is the same as the direction of the force experienced by a positive test charge placed at the point. Electric ®eld lines can be used to sketch electric ®elds. The line through a point has the same direction at that point as the electric ®eld. Where the ®eld lines are closest together, the electric ®eld is largest. Field lines come out of positive charges (because a positive charge repels a positive test charge) and come into negative charges (because they attract the positive test charge). THE STRENGTH OF THE ELECTRIC FIELD ~ at a point is equal to the force experienced E by a unit positive test charge placed at that point. Because the electric ®eld strength is a force per unit charge, it is a vector quantity. The units of ~ are N/C or (see Chapter 25) V/m. E If a charge q is placed at a point where the electric ®eld due to other charges is ~, the charge will E experience a force ~E given by F ~E q~ F E If q is negative, ~E will be opposite in direction to ~. F E
E ELECTRIC FIELD DUE TO A POINT CHARGE: To ®nd E (the signed magnitude of ~) due to a point charge q, we make use of Coulomb's Law. If a point charge q H is placed at a distance r from the charge q, it will experience a force 1 qq H 1 q H FE q 4 r2 4 r2

But if a point charge q H is placed at a position where the electric ®eld is E, then the force on q H is FE q H E Comparing these two expressions for FE , we see that E 1 q 4 r2

This is the electric ®eld at a distance r from a point charge q. The same relation applies at points outside a ®nite spherical charge q. For q positive, E is positive and ~ is directed radially outward from q; for q E negative, E is negative and ~ is directed radially inward. E

SUPERPOSITION PRINCIPLE: The force experienced by a charge due to other charges is the vector sum of the Coulomb forces acting on it due to these other charges. Similarly, the electric E intensity ~ at a point due to several charges is the vector sum of the intensities due to the individual charges.

Solved Problems
24.1 Two coins lie 1.5 m apart on a table. They carry identical charges. Approximately how large is the charge on each if a coin experiences a force of 2 N?
The diameter of a coin is small compared to the 1.5 m separation. We may therefore approximate the coins as point charges. Coulomb's Law, FE k=Kq1 q2 =r2 , gives (with K approximated as 1.00)

234

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 24

q1 q2 q2 from which q 2 Â 10À5 C.

FE r 2 2 N1:5 m2 5 Â 10À10 C2 k 9 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2

24.2

Repeat Problem 24.1 if the coins are separated by a distance of 1.5 m in a large vat of water. The dielectric constant of water is about 80.
From Coulomb's Law, FE k q2 K r2

where K, the dielectric constant, is now 80. Then r s F E r2 K 2 N1:5 m2 80 q 2 Â 10À4 C k 9 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2

24.3

A helium nucleus has charge 2e, and a neon nucleus 10e, where e is the quantum of charge, 1:60 Â 10À19 C. Find the repulsive force exerted on one by the other when they are 3.0 nanometers 1 nm 10À9 m apart. Assume the system to be in vacuum.
Nuclei have radii of order 10À15 m. We can assume them to be point charges in this case. Then FE k qq H 2101:6 Â 10À19 C2 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 5:1 Â 10À10 N 0:51 nN 2 r 3:0 Â 10À9 m2

24.4

In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, an electron q Àe circles a proton q H e in an orbit of radius 5:3 Â 10À11 m. The attraction of the proton for the electron furnishes the centripetal force needed to hold the electron in orbit. Find (a) the force of electrical attraction between the particles and (b) the electron's speed. The electron mass is 9:1 Â 10À31 kg.
a (b) FE k qq H 1:6 Â 10À19 C2 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 8:2 Â 10À8 N 82 nN 2 r 5:3 Â 10À11 m2 mv2 r

The force found in (a) is the centripetal force, mv2 =r. Therefore, 8:2 Â 10À8 N from which

r s 8:2 Â 10À8 Nr 8:2 Â 10À8 N5:3 Â 10À11 m 2:2 Â 106 m=s v m 9:1 Â 10À31 kg

24.5

Three point charges are placed on the x-axis as shown in Fig. 24-1. Find the net force on the À5 C charge due to the two other charges.
Because unlike charges attract, the forces on the À5C charge are as shown. The magnitudes of ~E3 and F ~E8 are given by Coulomb's Law: F FE3 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 FE8 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 3:0 Â 10À6 C5:0 Â 10À6 C 0:20 m2 8:0 Â 10À6 C5:0 Â 10À6 C 0:30 m2 3:4 N

4:0 N

CHAP. 24]

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

235

Fig. 24-1

Fig. 24-2

Notice two things about the computation: (1) Proper units (coulombs and meters) must be used. (2) Because we want only the magnitudes of the forces, we do not carry along the signs of the charges. (That is, we use their absolute values.) The direction of each force is given by the diagram, which we drew from inspection of the situation. From the diagram, the resultant force on the center charge is FE FE8 À FE3 4:0 N À 3:4 N 0:6 N and it is in the x-direction.

24.6

Find the ratio of the Coulomb electric force FE to the gravitational force FG between two electrons in vacuum.
From Coulomb's Law and Newton's Law of gravitation, FE k Therefore FE kq2 =r2 kq2 FG Gm2 =r2 Gm2 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 1:6 Â 10À19 C2 6:67 Â 10À11 NÁm2 =kg2 9:1 Â 10À31 kg2 4:2 Â 1042 q2 r2 and FG G m2 r2

As you can see, the electric force is much stronger than the gravitational force.

24.7

As shown in Fig. 24-2, two identical balls, each of mass 0.10 g, carry identical charges and are suspended by two threads of equal length. At equilibrium they position themselves as shown. Find the charge on either ball.
Consider the ball on the left. It is in equilibrium under three forces: (1) the tension FT in the thread; (2) the force of gravity, mg 1:0 Â 10À4 kg9:81 m=s2 9:8 Â 10À4 N and (3) the Coulomb repulsion FE : Writing Fx 0 and Fy 0 for the ball on the left, we obtain FT cos 608 À FE 0 From the second equation, and FT sin 608 À mg 0

236

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 24

mg 9:8 Â 10À4 N 1:13 Â 10À3 N sin 608 0:866 Substituting in the ®rst equation gives FT FE FT cos 608 1:13 Â 10À3 N0:50 5:7 Â 10À4 N But this is the Coulomb force, kqq H =r2 . Therefore, qq H q2 from which q 0:10 C: FE r2 5:7 Â 10À4 N0:40 m2 k 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2

24.8

The charges shown in Fig. 24-3 are stationary. Find the force on the 4:0 C charge due to the other two.

Fig. 24-3

From Coulomb's Law we have FE2 k FE3 k qq H 2:0 Â 10À6 C4:0 Â 10À6 C 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 1:8 N 2 r 0:20 m2 qq H 3:0 Â 10À6 C4:0 Â 10À6 C 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 2:7 N 2 r 0:20 m2

The resultant force on the 4 C charge has components FEx FE2 cos 608 À FE3 cos 608 1:8 À 2:70:50 N À0:45 N FEy FE2 sin 608 FE3 sin 608 1:8 2:70:866 N 3:9 N q q 2 2 FE FEx FEy 0:452 3:92 N 3:9 N

so

The resultant makes an angle of tanÀ1 0:45=3:9 78 with the positive y-axis, that is, 978:

CHAP. 24]

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

237

24.9

Two charges are placed on the x-axis: 3:0 C at x 0 and À5:0 C at x 40 cm. Where must a third charge q be placed if the force it experiences is to be zero?
The situation is shown in Fig. 24-4. We know that q must be placed somewhere on the x-axis. (Why?) Suppose that q is positive. When it is placed in interval BC, the two forces on it are in the same direction and cannot cancel. When it is placed to the right of C, the attractive force from the À5 C charge is always larger than the repulsion of the 3:0 C charge. Therefore, the force on q cannot be zero in this region. Only in the region to the left of B can cancellation occur. (Can you show that this is also true if q is negative?) For q placed as shown, when the net force on it is zero, we have F3 F5 and so, for distances in meters, k q3:0 Â 10À6 C q5:0 Â 10À6 C k 2 d 0:40 m d2

After canceling q, k, and 10À6 C from each side, we cross-multiply to obtain 5d 2 3:00:40 d2 or d 2 À 1:2d À 0:24 0

Using the quadratic formula, we ®nd p p Àb Æ b2 À 4ac 1:2 Æ 1:44 0:96 0:60 Æ 0:775 m d 2 2a Two values, 1.4 m and À0:18 m, are therefore found for d. The ®rst is the correct one; the second gives the point in BC where the two forces have the same magnitude but do not cancel.

Fig. 24-4

24.10 Compute (a) the electric ®eld E in air at a distance of 30 cm from a point charge q1 5:0 Â 10À9 C, (b) the force on a charge q2 4:0 Â 10À10 C placed 30 cm from q1 , and (c) the force on a charge q3 À4:0 Â 10À10 C placed 30 cm from q1 (in the absence of q2 ).
a Ek directed away from q1 . b FE Eq2 500 N=C4:0 Â 10À10 C 2:0 Â 10À7 N 0:20 N directed away from q1 : c FE Eq3 500 N=CÀ4:0 Â 10À10 C À0:20 N This force is directed toward q1 : q1 5:0 Â 10À9 C 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 0:50 kN=C r2 0:30 m2

238

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 24

24.11 For the situation shown in Fig. 24-5, ®nd (a) the electric ®eld E at point P, (b) the force on a À4:0 Â 10À8 C charge placed at P, and (c) where in the region the electric ®eld would be zero (in the absence of the À4:0 Â 10À8 C charge).

Fig. 24-5

(a)

A positive test charge placed at P will be repelled to the right by the positive charge q1 and attracted to the right by the negative charge q2 . Because ~1 and ~2 have the same direction, we can add their E E magnitudes to obtain the magnitude of the resultant ®eld: E E1 E2 k jq1 j jq j k k 2 2 jq1 j jq2 j r2 r2 r1 1 2

where r1 r2 0:05 m, and jq1 j and jq2 j are the absolute values of q1 and q2 . Hence, E 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 0:050 m2 25 Â 10À8 C 9:0 Â 105 N=C

directed toward the right. (b) A charge q placed at P will experience a force Eq. Therefore, FE Eq 9:0 Â 105 N=CÀ4:0 Â 10À8 C À0:036 N The negative sign tells us the force is directed toward the left. This is correct because the electric ®eld represents the force on a positive charge. The force on a negative charge is opposite in direction to the ®eld. (c) Reasoning as in Problem 24.9, we conclude that the ®eld will be zero somewhere to the right of the À5:0 Â 10À8 C charge. Represent the distance to that point from the À5:0 Â 10À8 C charge by d. At that point, E1 À E2 0 because the ®eld due to the positive charge is to the right, while the ®eld due to the negative charge is to the left. Thus 4 5 jq1 j jq2 j 20 Â 10À8 C 5:0 Â 10À8 C 9 2 2 k 2 À 2 9:0 Â 10 NÁm =C À 0 r1 r2 d2 d 0:10 m2 Simplifying, we obtain 3d 2 À 0:2d À 0:01 0 which gives d 0:10 m and À0:03 m. Only the plus sign has meaning here, and therefore d 0:10 m. The point in question is 10 cm to the right of the negative charge.

24.12 Three charges are placed on three corners of a square, as shown in Fig. 24-6. Each side of the square is 30.0 cm. Compute ~ at the fourth corner. What would be the force on a 6:00 C charge E placed at the vacant corner?

CHAP. 24]

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

239

Fig. 24-6

The contributions of the three charges to the ®eld at the vacant corner are as indicated. Notice in particular their directions. Their magnitudes are given by E kq=r2 to be E4 4:00 Â 105 N=C E8 4:00 Â 105 N=C E5 5:00 Â 105 N=C Because the E8 vector makes an angle of 45:08 to the horizontal, we have Ex E8 cos 45:08 À E4 À1:17 Â 105 N=C Ey E5 À E8 cos 45:08 2:17 Â 105 N=C q 2 2 Using E Ex Ey and tan Ey =Ex , we ®nd E 2:47 Â 105 N at 1188: The force on a charge placed at the vacant corner would be simply FE Eq. Since q 6:00 Â 10À6 C, we have FE 1:48 N at an angle of 1188:

24.13 Two charged metal plates in vacuum are 15 cm apart as shown in Fig. 24-7. The electric ®eld between the plates is uniform and has a strength of E 3000 N/C. An electron q Àe, me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg) is released from rest at point P just outside the negative plate. (a) How long will it take to reach the other plate? (b) How fast will it be going just before it hits?

Fig. 24-7

240

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 24

The electric ®eld lines show the force on a positive charge. (A positive charge would be repelled to the right by the positive plate and attracted to the right by the negative plate.) An electron, being negative, will experience a force in the opposite direction, toward the left, of magnitude FE jqjE 1:6 Â 10À19 C3000 N=C 4:8 Â 10À16 N Because of this force, the electron experiences an acceleration toward the left given by a FE 4:8 Â 10À16 N 5:3 Â 1014 m=s2 m 9:1 Â 10À31 kg x 0:15 m a 5:3 Â 1014 m=s2

In the motion problem for the electron released at the negative plate and traveling to the positive plate, vi 0 (a) From x vi t 1 at2 we have 2

r s 2x 20:15 m 2:4 Â 10À8 s t a 5:3 Â 1014 m=s2

b

v vi at 0 5:3 Â 1014 m=s2 2:4 Â 10À8 s 1:30 Â 107 m=s As you will see in Chapter 41, relativistic eects begin to become important at speeds above this. Therefore, this approach must be modi®ed for very fast particles.

24.14 Suppose in Fig. 24-7 an electron is shot straight upward from point P with a speed of 5:0 Â 106 m/s. How far above A will it strike the positive plate?
This is a projectile problem. (Since the gravitational force is so small compared to the electrical force, we ignore gravity.) The only force acting on the electron after its release is the horizontal electric force. We found in Problem 24.13(a) that under the action of this force the electron has a time-of-¯ight of 2:4 Â 10À8 s. The vertical displacement in this time is 5:0 Â 106 m=s2:4 Â 10À8 s 0:12 m The electron strikes the positive plate 12 cm above point A:

24.15 In Fig. 24-7 a proton q e, m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg) is shot with speed 2:00 Â 105 m/s toward P from A. What will be its speed just before hitting the plate at P? a FE qE 1:60 Â 10À19 C3000 N=C 2:88 Â 1011 m=s2 m m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg x 0:15 m a 2:88 Â 1011 m=s2

For the problem involving horizontal motion, vi 2:00 Â 105 m=s We use v2 v2 2ax to ®nd i f q q vf v2 2ax 2:00 Â 105 m=s2 22:88 Â 1011 m=s2 0:15 m 356 km=s i

24.16 Two identical tiny metal balls have charges q1 and q2 . The repulsive force one exerts on the other when they are 20 cm apart is 1:35 Â 10À4 N. After the balls are touched together and then separated once again to 20 cm, the repulsive force is found to be 1:406 Â 10À4 N. Find q1 and q2 :
Because the force is one of repulsion, q1 and q2 are of the same sign. After the balls are touched, they share charge equally, so each has a charge 1 q1 q2 . Writing Coulomb's Law for the two situations 2 described, we have

CHAP. 24]

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

241

0:000 135 N k and 0:000 140 6 N k

q1 q2 0:040 m2 1 q1 q2 2 2 0:040 m2 q1 q2 5:00 Â 10À8 C

After substitution for k, these equations reduce to q1 q2 6:00 Â 10À16 C2 and Solving these equations simultaneously gives q1 20 nC and q2 30 nC (or vice versa). Alternatively, both charges could have been negative.

Supplementary Problems
24.17 How many electrons are contained in 1.0 C of charge? What is the mass of the electrons in 1.0 C of charge? Ans. 6:2 Â 1018 electrons, 5:7 Â 10À12 kg If two equal charges, each of 1 C, were separated in air by a distance of 1 km, what would be the force between them? Ans. 9 kN repulsion Determine the force between two free electrons spaced 1.0 angstrom 10À10 m) apart. repulsion Ans. 23 nN

24.18

24.19

24.20

What is the force of repulsion between two argon nuclei that are separated by 1.0 nm 10À9 m)? The charge on an argon nucleus is 18e. Ans. 75 nN Two equally charged balls are 3 cm apart in air and repel each other with a force of 40 N. Compute the charge on each ball. Ans. 2 nC Three point charges are placed at the following points on the x-axis: 2:0 C at x 0, À3:0 C at x 40 cm, À5:0 C at x 120 cm. Find the force (a) on the À3:0 C charge, (b) on the À5:0 C charge. Ans. (a) À0:55 N; (b) 0.15 N Four equal point charges of 3:0 C are placed at the four corners of a square that is 40 cm on a side. Find the force on any one of the charges. Ans. 0.97 N outward along the diagonal Four equal-magnitude point charges 3:0 C are placed at the corners of a square that is 40 cm on a side. Two, diagonally opposite each other, are positive, and the other two are negative. Find the force on either negative charge. Ans. 0.46 N inward along the diagonal Charges of 2:0, 3:0, and À8:0 C are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 10 cm. Calculate the magnitude of the force acting on the À8:0 C charge due to the other two charges. Ans. 31 N One charge of 5:0 C is placed at exactly x 0, and a second charge 7:0 C at x 100 cm. Where can a third be placed so as to experience zero net force due to the other two? Ans. at x 46 cm Two identical tiny metal balls carry charges of 3 nC and À12 nC. They are 3 m apart. (a) Compute the force of attraction. (b) The balls are now touched together and then separated to 3 cm. Describe the forces on them now. Ans. (a) 4 Â 10À4 N attraction; (b) 2 Â 10À4 N repulsion A charge of 6:0 C experiences a force of 2.0 mN in the x-direction at a certain point in space. (a) What was the electric ®eld there before the charge was placed there? (b) Describe the force a À 2:0 C charge would

24.21

24.22

24.23

24.24

24.25

24.26

24.27

24.28

242

COULOMB'S LAW AND ELECTRIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 24

experience if it were used in place of the 6:0 C charge. 0.67 mN in Àx-direction 24.29

Ans.

(a) 0.33 kN/C in x-direction; (b)

A point charge of À3:0 Â 10À5 C is placed at the origin of coordinates. Find the electric ®eld at the point x 5:0 m on the x-axis. Ans. 11 kN/C in Àx-direction Four equal-magnitude 4:0 C charges are placed at the four corners of a square that is 20 cm on each side. Find the electric ®eld at the center of the square (a) if the charges are all positive, (b) if the charges alternate in sign around the perimeter of the square, (c) if the charges have the following sequence around the square: plus, plus, minus, minus. Ans. (a) zero; (b) zero; (c) 5.1 MN/C toward the negative side A 0.200-g ball hangs from a thread in a vertical electric ®eld of 3.00 kN/C directed upward. What is the charge on the ball if the tension in the thread is (a) zero and (b) 4.00 mN? Ans. (a) 653 nC; (b) À680 nC Determine the acceleration of a proton q e, m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg) in an electric ®eld of strength 0.50 kN/C. How many times is this acceleration greater than that due to gravity? Ans. 4:8 Â 1010 2 9 m/s , 4:9 Â 10 A tiny, 0.60-g ball carries a charge of magnitude 8:0 C. It is suspended by a thread in a downward 300 N/C electric ®eld. What is the tension in the thread if the charge on the ball is (a) positive, (b) negative? Ans. (a) 8.3 mN; (b) 3.5 mN The tiny ball at the end of the thread shown in Fig. 24-8 has a mass of 0.60 g and is in a horizontal electric ®eld of strength 700 N/C. It is in equilibrium in the position shown. What are the magnitude and sign of the charge on the ball? Ans. À3:1 C

24.30

24.31

24.32

24.33

24.34

Fig. 24-8

24.35

An electron q Àe, me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg) is projected out along the x-axis with an initial speed of 3:0 Â 106 m/s. It goes 45 cm and stops due to a uniform electric ®eld in the region. Find the magnitude and direction of the ®eld. Ans. 57 N/C in x-direction A particle of mass m and charge Àe is projected with horizontal speed v into an electric ®eld E directed downward. Find (a) the horizontal and vertical components of its acceleration, ax and ay ; (b) its horizontal and vertical displacements, x and y, after time t; (c) the equation of its trajectory. Ans. (a) ax 0, ay Ee=m; (b) x vt, y 1 ay t2 1 Ee=mt2 ; (c) y 1 Ee=mv2 x2 (a parabola) 2 2 2

24.36

Chapter 25
Potential; Capacitance
THE POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE between point A and point B is the work done against electrical forces in carrying a unit positive test-charge from A to B. We represent the potential dierence between A and B by VB À VA or by V. Its units are those of work per charge (joules/ coulomb) and are called volts (V): 1 V 1 J=C Because work is a scalar quantity, so too is potential dierence. Like work, potential dierence may be positive or negative. The work W done in transporting a charge q from one point A to a second point B is W qVB À VA qV where the appropriate sign or À must be given to the charge. If both VB À VA and q are positive (or negative), the work done is positive. If VB À VA and q have opposite signs, the work done is negative.

ABSOLUTE POTENTIAL: The absolute potential at a point is the work done against electric forces in carrying a unit positive test-charge from in®nity to that point. Hence the absolute potential at a point B is the dierence in potential from A I to B. Consider a point charge q in vacuum and a point P at a distance r from the point charge. The absolute potential at P due to the charge q is V k q r

where k 8:99 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 is the Coulomb constant. The absolute potential at in®nity (at r I is zero. Because of the superposition principle and the scalar nature of potential dierence, the absolute potential at a point due to a number of point charges is qi Vk ri where the ri are the distances of the charges qi from the point in question. Negative q's contribute negative terms to the potential, while positive q's contribute positive terms. The absolute potential due to a uniformly charged sphere, at points outside the sphere or on its surface is V kq=r, where q is the charge on the sphere. This potential is the same as that due to a point charge q placed at the position of the sphere's center.

ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL ENERGY PEE : To carry a charge q from in®nity to a point where the absolute potential is V, work in the amount qV must be done on the charge. This work appears as electrical potential energy (PEE ) stored in the charge. Similarly, when a charge q is carried through a potential dierence V, work in the amount qV must be done on the charge. This work results in a change qV in the PEE of the charge. For a potential rise, V will be positive and the PEE will increase if q is positive. But for a potential drop, V will be negative and the PEE of the charge will decrease if q is positive. 243
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

244

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

V RELATED TO E: Suppose that in a certain region the electric ®eld is uniform and is in the x-direction. Call its magnitude Ex . Because Ex is the force on a unit positive test-charge, the work done in moving the test-charge through a distance x is (from W Fx x) V Ex x The ®eld between two large, parallel, oppositely charged metal plates is uniform. We can therefore use this equation to relate the electric ®eld E between the plates to the plate separation d and their potential dierence V: For parallel plates, V Ed

ELECTRON VOLT ENERGY UNIT: The work done in carrying a charge e (coulombs) through a potential rise of exactly 1 volt is de®ned to be 1 electron volt (eV). Therefore, 1 eV 1:602 Â 10À19 C1 V 1:602 Â 10À19 J Equivalently, Work or energy (in eV) work (in joules) e

A CAPACITOR is a device that stores charge. Often, although certainly not always, it consists of two conductors separated by an insulator or dielectric. The capacitance C of a capacitor is de®ned as Capacitance magnitude of charge on either conductor magnitude of potential difference between conductors

For q in coulombs and V in volts, C is in farads (F). PARALLEL-PLATE CAPACITOR: The capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor whose opposing plate faces, each of area A, are separated by a small distance d is given by C K0 A d

where K =0 is the dimensionless dielectric constant (see Chapter 24) of the nonconducting material (the dielectric) between the plates, and 0 8:85 Â 10À12 C2 =NÁm2 8:85 Â 10À12 F=m For vacuum, K 1, so that a dielectric-®lled parallel-plate capacitor has a capacitance K times larger than the same capacitor with vacuum between its plates. This result holds for a capacitor of arbitrary shape. CAPACITORS IN PARALLEL AND SERIES: As shown in Fig. 25-1, capacitances add for capacitors in parallel, whereas reciprocal capacitances add for capacitors in series. ENERGY STORED IN A CAPACITOR: The energy (PEE ) stored in a capacitor of capacitance C that has a charge q and a potential dierence V is 1 1 1 q2 PEE qV CV 2 2 2 2 C

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

245

Fig. 25-1

Solved Problems
25.1 In Fig. 25-2, the potential dierence between the metal plates is 40 V. (a) Which plate is at the higher potential? (b) How much work must be done to carry a 3:0 C charge from B to A? From A to B? (c) How do we know that the electric ®eld is in the direction indicated? (d ) If the plate separation is 5.0 mm, what is the magnitude of ~? E

Fig. 25-2

(a) (b)

A positive test charge between the plates is repelled by A and attracted by B. Left to itself, the positive test charge will move from A to B, and so A is at the higher potential. The magnitude of the work done in carrying a charge q through a potential dierence V is qV. Thus the magnitude of the work done in the present situation is W 3:0 C40 V 0:12 kJ Because a positive charge between the plates is repelled by A, positive work 120 J) must be done to drag the 3:0 C charge from B to A. To restrain the charge as it moves from A to B, negative work À120 J) is done.

246

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

(c)

A positive test-charge between the plates experiences a force directed from A to B and this is, by de®nition, the direction of the ®eld. V 40 V 8:0 kV=m d 0:005 0 m

(d ) For parallel plates, V Ed. Therefore, E

Notice that the SI units for electric ®eld, V/m and N/C, are identical.

25.2

How much work is required to carry an electron from the positive terminal of a 12-V battery to the negative terminal?
Going from the positive to the negative terminal, one passes through a potential drop. In this case it is V À12 V. Then W qV À1:6 Â 10À19 CÀ12 V 1:9 Â 10À18 J As a check, we notice that an electron, if left to itself, will move from negative to positive because it is a negative charge. Hence positive work must be done to carry it in the reverse direction as required here.

25.3

How much electrical potential energy does a proton lose as it falls through a potential drop of 5 kV?
The proton carries a positive charge. It will therefore move from regions of high potential to regions of low potential if left free to do so. Its change in potential energy as it moves through a potential dierence V is Vq. In our case, V À5 kV. Therefore, Change in PEE Vq À5 Â 103 V1:6 Â 10À19 C À8 Â 10À16 J

25.4

An electron starts from rest and falls through a potential rise of 80 V. What is its ®nal speed?
Positive charges tend to fall through potential drops; negative charges, such as electrons, tend to fall through potential rises. Change in PEE Vq 80 VÀ1:6 Â 10À19 C À1:28 Â 10À17 J This lost PEE appears as KE of the electron: PEE lost KE gained 1:28 Â 10À17 J 1 mv2 À 1 mv2 1 mv2 À 0 f i f 2 2 2 s 1:28 Â 10À17 J2 5:3 Â 106 m=s vf 9:1 Â 10À31 kg

25.5

(a) What is the absolute potential at each of the following distances from a charge of 2:0 C: r 10 cm and r 50 cm? (b) How much work is required to carry a 0:05 C charge from the point at r 50 cm to that at r 10 cm?
a q 2:0 Â 10À6 C 1:8 Â 105 V V10 k 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 r 0:10 m 10 V50 V10 36 kV 50 Work qV10 À V50 5 Â 10À8 C1:44 Â 105 V 7:2 mJ

b

25.6

Suppose, in Problem 25.5(a), that a proton is released at r 10 cm. How fast will it be moving as it passes a point at r 50 cm?

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

247

As the proton moves from one point to the other, there is a potential drop of Potential drop 1:80 Â 105 V À 0:36 Â 105 V 1:44 Â 105 V The proton acquires KE as it falls through this potential drop: KE gained PEE lost
1 2 1:67 2 1 2 mvf À27

Â 10

kgv2 À 0 1:6 Â 10À19 C1:44 Â 105 V f

À 1 mv2 qV i 2

from which vf 5:3 Â 106 m/s.

25.7

In Fig. 25-2, let E 2:0 kV/m and d 5:0 mm. A proton is shot from plate B toward plate A with a speed of 100 km/s. What will be its speed just before it strikes plate A?
The proton, being positive, is repelled by A and will therefore be slowed down. We need the potential dierence between the plates, which is V Ed 2:0 kV=m0:005 0 m 10 V Now, from the conservation of energy, for the proton, KE lost PEE gained
2 1 2 mvB

À 1 mv2 qV A 2 q 1:60 Â 10À19 C, and V 10 V gives

Substituting m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg, vB 1:00 Â 105 m/s, vA 90 km/s. As we see, the proton is indeed slowed.

25.8

A tin nucleus has a charge 50e. (a) Find the absolute potential V at a radius of 1:0 Â 10À12 m from the nucleus. (b) If a proton is released from this point, how fast will it be moving when it is 1.0 m from the nucleus?
a (b) q 501:6 Â 10À19 C V k 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 72 kV r 10À12 m The proton is repelled by the nucleus and ¯ies out to in®nity. The absolute potential at a point is the potential dierence between the point in question and in®nity. Hence there is a potential drop of 72 kV as the proton ¯ies to in®nity. Usually we would simply assume that 1.0 m is far enough from the nucleus to consider it to be at in®nity. But, as a check, let us compute V at r 1:0 m: q 501:6 Â 10À19 C V1 m k 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 7:2 Â 10À8 V r 1:0 m which is essentially zero in comparison with 72 kV. As the proton falls through 72 kV, KE gained PEE lost
1 2 1:67 2 1 2 mvf À27

Â 10

kgv2 À 0 1:6 Â 10À19 C72 000 V f

À 1 mv2 qV i 2

from which vf 3:7 Â 106 m/s.

25.9

The following point charges are placed on the x-axis: 2:0 C at x 20 cm, À3:0 C at x 30 cm, À4:0 C at x 40 cm. Find the absolute potential on the axis at x 0.

248

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

Potential is a scalar, and so Vk qi ri 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2

2

3 2:0 Â 10À6 C À3:0 Â 10À6 C À4:0 Â 10À6 C 0:20 m 0:30 m 0:40 m

9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 10 Â 10À6 C=m À 10 Â 10À6 C=m À 10 Â 10À6 C=m À90 kV

25.10 Two point charges, q and Àq, are separated by a distance d. Where, besides at in®nity, is the absolute potential zero?
At the point (or points) in question, 0k q Àq k r1 r2 or r1 r2

This condition holds everywhere on a plane which is the perpendicular bisector of the line joining the two charges. Therefore the absolute potential is zero everywhere on that plane.

25.11 Four point charges are placed at the four corners of a square that is 30 cm on each side. Find the potential at the center of the square if (a) the four charges are each 2:0 C and (b) two of the four charges are 2:0 C and two are À2:0 C.
a V k qi ri k r qi 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 42:0 Â 10À6 C 3:4 Â 105 V 0:30 mcos 458

b

V 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2

2:0 2:0 À 2:0 À 2:0 Â 10À6 C 0 0:30 mcos 458

25.12 In Fig. 25-3, the charge at A is 200 pC, while the charge at B is À100 pC. (a) Find the absolute potentials at points C and D. (b) How much work must be done to transfer a charge of 500 C from point C to point D?
a 3 2:00 Â 10À10 C 1:00 Â 10À10 C À À2:25 V À2:3 V VC k 9:0 Â 10 NÁm =C 0:80 m 0:20 m ri 2 3 2:00 Â 10À10 C 1:00 Â 10À10 C À 7:88 V 7:9 V VD 9:0 Â 109 NÁm2 =C2 0:20 m 0:80 m qi
9 2 2

2

(b)

There is a potential rise from C to D of V VD À VC 7:88 V À À2:25 V 10:13 V: So W Vq 10:13 V5:00 Â 10À4 C 5:1 mJ

Fig. 25-3

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

249

25.13 Find the electrical potential energy of three point charges placed as follows on the x-axis: 2:0 C at x 0, 3:0 C at x 20 cm, and 6:0 C at x 50 cm. Take the PEE to be zero when the charges are far separated.
Let us compute how much work must be done to bring the charges from in®nity to their places on the axis. We bring in the 2:0 C charge ®rst; this requires no work because there are no other charges in the vicinity. Next we bring in the 3:0 C charge, which is repelled by the 2:0 C charge. The potential dierence between in®nity and the position to which we bring it is due to the 2:0 C charge and is 2 3 2:0 C 2 Â 10À6 C 9 2 2 Vx 0:2 k 9:0 Â 10 NÁm =C 9:0 Â 104 V 0:20 m 0:20 m Therefore the work required to bring in the 3 C charge is W3 C qVx 0:2 3:0 Â 10À6 C9:0 Â 104 V 0:270 J Finally we bring the 6:0 C charge in to x 0:50 m. The potential there due to the two charges already present is 2 3 2:0 Â 10À6 C 3:0 Â 10À6 C 12:6 Â 104 V Vx 0:5 k 0:50 m 0:30 m Therefore the work required to bring in the 6:0 C charge is W6 C qVx 0:5 6:0 Â 10À6 C12:6 Â 104 V 0:756 J Adding the amounts of work required to assemble the charges gives the energy stored in the system: PEE 0:270 J 0:756 J 1:0 J Can you show that the order in which the charges are brought in from in®nity does not aect this result?

25.14 Two protons are held at rest, 5:0 Â 10À12 m apart. When released, they ¯y apart. How fast will each be moving when they are far from each other?
Their original PEE will be changed to KE. We proceed as in Problem 25.13. The potential at 5:0 Â 10À12 m from the ®rst charge due to that charge alone is 2 3 1:60 Â 10À19 C 9 2 2 V 9:0 Â 10 NÁm =C 288 V 5 Â 10À12 m The work needed to bring in the second proton is then W qV 1:60 Â 10À19 C288 V 4:61 Â 10À17 J and this is the PEE of the original system. From the conservation of energy, Original PEE final KE 4:61 Â 10À17 J 1 m1 v2 1 m2 v2 1 2 2 2 Since the particles are identical, v1 v2 v. Solving, we ®nd that v 1:7 Â 105 m=s when the particles are far apart.

25.15 In Fig. 25-4 we show two large metal plates connected to a 120-V battery. Assume the plates to be in vacuum and to be much larger than shown. Find (a) E between the plates, (b) the force experienced by an electron between the plates, (c) the PEE lost by an electron as it moves from plate B to plate A, and (d ) the speed of the electron released from plate B just before striking plate A:
(a) E is directed from the positive plate A to the negative plate B. It is uniform between large parallel plates and is given by

250

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

E directed from left to right. b

V 120 V 6000 V=m 6:0 kV=m d 0:020 m

FE qE À1:6 Â 10À19 C6000 V=m À9:6 Â 10À16 N
F E The minus sign tells us that ~E is directed oppositely to ~. Since plate A is positive, the electron is attracted by it. The force on the electron is toward the left.

c

Change in PEE Vq 120 VÀ1:6 Â 10À19 C À1:92 Â 10À17 J À1:9 Â 10À17 J Notice that V is a potential rise from B to A:

d

PEE lost KE gained 1:92 Â 10À17 J 1 9:1 Â 10À31 kgv2 À 0 f 2 from which vf 6:5 Â 106 m/s. 1:92 Â 10À17 J 1 mv2 À 1 mv2 i f 2 2

Fig. 25-4

25.16 As shown in Fig. 25-5, a charged particle remains stationary between the two horizontal charged plates. The plate separation is 2.0 cm, and m 4:0 Â 10À13 kg and q 2:4 Â 10À18 C for the particle. Find the potential dierence between the plates.

Fig. 25-5

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

251

Since the particle is in equilibrium, the weight of the particle is equal to the upward electrical force. That is, mg qE or E mg 4:0 Â 10À13 kg9:81 m=s2 1:63 Â 106 V=m q 2:4 Â 10À18 C V Ed 1:63 Â 106 V=m0:020 m 33 kV

But for a parallel-plate system,

25.17 An alpha particle q 2e, m 6:7 Â 10À27 kg) falls from rest through a potential drop of 3:0 Â 106 V (3.0 MV). (a) What is its KE in electron volts? (b) What is its speed?
a b Energy in eV qV 2e3:0 Â 106 6:0 Â 106 eV 6:0 MeV e e PEE lost KE gained 21:6 Â 10À19 C3:0 Â 106 V 1 6:7 Â 10À27 kgv2 À 0 f 2 from which vf 1:7 Â 107 m/s. qV 1 mv2 À 1 mv2 i f 2 2

25.18 What is the speed of a 400 eV (a) electron, (b) proton, and (c) alpha particle?
In each case we know that the particle's kinetic energy is 2 3 1:60 Â 10À19 J 2 1 6:40 Â 10À17 J 2mv 400 eV 1:00 eV Substituting me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg for the electron, mp 1:67 Â 10À27 kg for the proton, and m 41:67 Â 10À27 kg) for the alpha particle gives their speeds as (a) 1:186 Â 107 m/s, (b) 2:77 Â 105 m/s, and (c) 1:38 Â 105 m/s.

25.19 A capacitor has a capacitance of 8:0 F with air between its plates. Determine its capacitance when a dielectric with dielectric constant 6.0 is placed between its plates.
C with dielectric KC with air 6:08:0 F 48 F

25.20 What is the charge on a 300 pF capacitor when it is charged to a voltage of 1.0 kV? q CV 300 Â 10À12 F1000 V 3:0 Â 10À7 C 0:30 C

25.21 A metal sphere mounted on an insulating rod carries a charge of 6.0 nC when its potential is 200 V higher than its surroundings. What is the capacitance of the capacitor formed by the sphere and its surroundings?
C q 6:0 Â 10À9 C 30 pF V 200 V

252

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

25.22 A 1:2 F capacitor is charged to 3.0 kV. Compute the energy stored in the capacitor.
Energy 1 qV 1 CV 2 1 1:2 Â 10À6 F3000 V2 5:4 J 2 2 2

25.23 The series combination of two capacitors shown in Fig. 25-6 is connected across 1000 V. Compute (a) the equivalent capacitance Ceq of the combination, (b) the magnitudes of the charges on the capacitors, (c) the potential dierences across the capacitors, and (d ) the energy stored in the capacitors.
a from which C 2:0 pF: (b) In a series combination, each capacitor carries the same charge, which is the charge on the combination. Thus, using the result of (a), we have q1 q2 q Ceq V 2:0 Â 10À12 F1000 V 2:0 nC c V1 q1 2:0 Â 10À9 C 667 V 0:67 kV C1 3:0 Â 10À12 F q 2:0 Â 10À9 C V2 2 333 V 0:33 kV C2 6:0 Â 10À12 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ceq C1 C2 3:0 pF 6:0 pF 2:0 pF

d

Energy in combination 6:7 3:3 Â 10À7 J 10 Â 10À7 J 1:0 J The last result is also directly given by 1 qV or 1 Ceq V 2 . 2 2

Energy in C2 1 q2 V2 1 2:0 Â 10À9 C333 V 3:3 Â 10À7 J 0:33 J 2 2

Energy in C1 1 q1 V1 1 2:0 Â 10À9 C667 V 6:7 Â 10À7 J 0:67 J 2 2

Fig. 25-6

Fig. 25-7

25.24 The parallel capacitor combination shown in Fig. 25-7 is connected across a 120 V source. Determine the equivalent capacitance Ceq , the charge on each capacitor, and the charge on the combination.
For a parallel combination, Ceq C1 C2 2:0 pF 6:0 pF 8:0 pF

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

253

Each capacitor has a 120 V potential dierence impressed on it. Therefore, q1 C1 V1 2:0 Â 10À12 F120 V 0:24 nC q2 C2 V2 6:0 Â 10À12 F120 V 0:72 nC The charge on the combination is q1 q2 960 pC. Or, we could write q Ceq V 8:0 Â 10À12 F120 V 0:96 nC

25.25 A certain parallel-plate capacitor consists of two plates, each with area 200 cm2 , separated by a 0.40-cm air gap. (a) Compute its capacitance. (b) If the capacitor is connected across a 500 V source, ®nd the charge on it, the energy stored in it, and the value of E between the plates. (c) If a liquid with K 2:60 is poured between the plates so as to ®ll the air gap, how much additional charge will ¯ow onto the capacitor from the 500 V source?
(a) For a parallel-plate capacitor with air gap, C K0 b A 200 Â 10À4 m2 18:85 Â 10À12 F=m 4:4 Â 10À11 F 44 pF d 4:0 Â 10À3 m q CV 4:4 Â 10À11 F500 V 2:2 Â 10À8 C 22 nC Energy 1qV 12:2 Â 10À8 C500 V 5:5 Â 10À6 J 5:5 J 2 2 E (c) V 500 V 1:3 Â 105 V=m d 4:0 Â 10À3 m

The capacitor will now have a capacitance K 2:60 times larger than before. Therefore, q CV 2:60 Â 4:4 Â 10À11 F500 V 5:7 Â 10À8 C 57 nC

The capacitor already had a charge of 22 nC and so 57 nC À 22 nC or 35 nC must have been added to it.

25.26 Two capacitors, 3:0 F and 4:0 F, are individually charged across a 6.0-V battery. After being disconnected from the battery, they are connected together with a negative plate of one attached to the positive plate of the other. What is the ®nal charge on each capacitor?
The situation is shown in Fig. 25-8. Before being connected, their charges are q3 CV 3:0 Â 10À6 F6:0 V 18 C q4 CV 4:0 Â 10À6 F6:0 V 24 C These charges partly cancel when the capacitors are connected together. Their ®nal charges are given by
H H q3 q4 q4 À q3 6:0 C

Fig. 25-8

254

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

[CHAP. 25

Also, the potentials across them are now the same, so that V q=C gives
H H q3 q4 À6 3:0 Â 10 F 4:0 Â 10À6 F Substitution in the previous equation gives H H 0:75q4 q4 6:0 C H H Then q3 0:75q4 2:6 C:

or

H H q3 0:75q4

or

H q4 3:4 C

Supplementary Problems
25.27 Two metal plates are attached to the two terminals of a 1.50-V battery. How much work is required to carry a 5:0-C charge (a) from the negative to the positive plate, (b) from the positive to the negative plate? Ans. (a) 7:5 J, (b) À7:5 J The plates described in Problem 25.27 are in vacuum. An electron q Àe, me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg) is released at the negative plate and falls freely to the positive plate. How fast is it going just before it strikes the plate? Ans. 7:3 Â 105 m/s A proton q e, mp 1:67 Â 10À27 kg) is accelerated from rest through a potential dierence of 1.0 MV. What is its ®nal speed? Ans. 1:4 Â 107 m/s An electron gun shoots electrons q Àe, me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg) at a metal plate that is 4.0 mm away in vacuum. The plate is 5.0 V lower in potential than the gun. How fast must the electrons be moving as they leave the gun if they are to reach the plate? Ans. 1:3 Â 106 m/s The potential dierence between two large parallel metal plates is 120 V. The plate separation is 3.0 mm. Find the electric ®eld between the plates. Ans. 40 kV/m toward negative plate An electron q Àe, me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg) is shot with speed 5:0 Â 106 m/s parallel to a uniform electric ®eld of strength 3.0 kV/m. How far will the electron go before it stops? Ans. 2.4 cm A potential dierence of 24 kV maintains a downward-directed electric ®eld between two horizontal parallel plates separated by 1.8 cm. Find the charge on an oil droplet of mass 2:2 Â 10À13 kg that remains stationary in the ®eld between the plates. Ans. 1:6 Â 10À18 C 10e Determine the absolute potential in air at a distance of 3.0 cm from a point charge of 500 C. Ans. 15 kV Compute the magnitude of the electric ®eld and the absolute potential at a distance of 1.0 nm from a helium nucleus of charge 2e. What is the potential energy (relative to in®nity) of a proton at this position? Ans. 2:9 Â 109 N=C, 2.9 V, 4:6 Â 10À19 J A charge of 0:20 C is 30 cm from a point charge of 3:0 C in vacuum. What work is required to bring the 0:20-C charge 18 cm closer to the 3:0-C charge? Ans. 0.027 J A point charge of 2:0 C is placed at the origin of coordinates. A second, of À3:0 C, is placed on the x-axis at x 100 cm. At what point (or points) on the x-axis will the absolute potential be zero? Ans. x 40 cm and x À0:20 m In Problem 25.37, what is the dierence in potential between the following two points on the x-axis: point A at x 0:1 m and point B at x 0:9 m? Which point is at the higher potential? Ans. 4 Â 105 V, point A

25.28

25.29

25.30

25.31

25.32

25.33

25.34

25.35

25.36

25.37

25.38

CHAP. 25]

POTENTIAL; CAPACITANCE

255

25.39 25.40

An electron is moving in the x-direction with a speed of 5:0 Â 106 m/s. There is an electric ®eld of 3.0 kV/m in the x-direction. What will be the electron's speed after it has moved 1.00 cm? Ans. 3:8 Â 106 m/s An electron has a speed of 6:0 Â 105 m/s as it passes point A on its way to point B. Its speed at B is 12 Â 105 m/s. What is the potential dierence between A and B, and which is at the higher potential? Ans. 3.1 V, B A capacitor with air between its plates has capacitance 3:0 F. What is its capacitance when wax of dielectric constant 2.8 is placed between the plates? Ans. 8:4 F Determine the charge on each plate of a 0.050-F capacitor when the potential dierence between the plates is 200 V. Ans. 10 C A capacitor is charged with 9.6 nC and has a 120 V potential dierence between its terminals. Compute its capacitance and the energy stored in it. Ans. 80 pF, 0:58 J Compute the energy stored in a 60-pF capacitor (a) when it is charged to a potential dierence of 2.0 kV and (b) when the charge on each plate is 30 nC. Ans. (a) 12 mJ; (b) 7:5 J Three capacitors, each of capacitance 120 pF, are each charged to 0.50 kV and then connected in series. Determine (a) the potential dierence between the end plates, (b) the charge on each capacitor, and (c) the energy stored in the system. Ans. (a) 1.5 kV; (b) 60 nC; (c) 45 J Three capacitors 2:00 F, 5.00 F, and 7:00 F are connected in series. What is their equivalent capacitance? Ans. 1:19 F Three capacitors 2:00 F, 5.00 F, and 7:00 F are connected in parallel. What is their equivalent capacitance? Ans. 14:00 F The capacitor combination in Problem 25.46 is connected in series with the combination in Problem 25.47. What is the capacitance of this new combination? Ans. 1:09 F Two capacitors (0.30 and 0:50 F are connected in parallel. (a) What is their equivalent capacitance? A charge of 200 C is now placed on the parallel combination. (b) What is the potential dierence across it? (c) What are the charges on the capacitors? Ans. (a) 0:80 F; (b) 0:25 kV; (c) 75 C, 0.13 mC A 2:0-F capacitor is charged to 50 V and then connected in parallel (positive plate to positive plate) with a 4:0-F capacitor charged to 100 V. (a) What are the ®nal charges on the capacitors? (b) What is the potential dierence across each? Ans. (a) 0.17 mC, 0.33 mC, (b) 83 V Repeat Problem 25.50 if the positive plate of one capacitor is connected to the negative plate of the other. Ans. (a) 0.10 mC, 0.20 mC; (b) 50 V (a) Calculate the capacitance of a capacitor consisting of two parallel plates separated by a layer of paran wax 0.50 cm thick, the area of each plate being 80 cm2 . The dielectric constant for the wax is 2.0. (b) If the capacitor is connected to a 100-V source, calculate the charge on the capacitor and the energy stored in the capacitor. Ans. (a) 28 pF; (b) 2.8 nC, 0:14 J

25.41 25.42 25.43 25.44 25.45

25.46 25.47 25.48 25.49

25.50

25.51 25.52

Chapter 26
Current, Resistance, and Ohm's Law
A CURRENT I of electricity exists in a region when a net electric charge is transported from one point to another in that region. Suppose the charge is moving through a wire. If a charge q is transported through a given cross section of the wire in a time t, then the current through the wire is q I t Here, q is in coulombs, t is in seconds, and I is in amperes (1 A 1 C/s). By custom the direction of the current is taken to be in the direction of ¯ow of positive charge. Thus, a ¯ow of electrons to the right corresponds to a current to the left.

A BATTERY is a source of electrical energy. If no internal energy losses occur in the battery, then the potential dierence (see Chapter 25) between its terminals is called the electromotive force (emf) of the battery. Unless otherwise stated, it will be assumed that the terminal potential dierence of a battery is equal to its emf. The unit for emf is the same as the unit for potential dierence, the volt.

THE RESISTANCE R of a wire or other object is a measure of the potential dierence V that must be impressed across the object to cause a current of one ampere to ¯ow through it: R V I

The unit of resistance is the ohm, for which the symbol (Greek omega) is used. 1 1 V/A.

OHM'S LAW originally contained two parts. Its ®rst part was simply the de®ning equation for resistance, V IR. We often refer to this equation as being Ohm's Law. However, Ohm also stated that R is a constant independent of V and I. This latter part of the Law is only approximately correct. The relation V IR can be applied to any resistor, where V is the potential dierence (p.d.) between the two ends of the resistor, I is the current through the resistor, and R is the resistance of the resistor under those conditions.

MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE BY AMMETER AND VOLTMETER: A series circuit consisting of the resistance to be measured, an ammeter, and a battery is used. The current is measured by the (low-resistance) ammeter. The potential dierence is measured by connecting the terminals of a (high-resistance) voltmeter across the resistance, i.e., in parallel with it. The resistance is computed by dividing the voltmeter reading by the ammeter reading according to Ohm's Law, R V=I. (If the exact value of the resistance is required, the resistances of the voltmeter and ammeter must be considered parts of the circuit.)

THE TERMINAL POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE (or voltage) of a battery or generator when it delivers a current I is related to its electromotive force e and its internal resistance r as follows: 256
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 26]

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

257

(1) When delivering current (on discharge): Terminal voltage emf À (voltage drop in internal resistance) V e À Ir (2) When receiving current (on charge): Terminal voltage emf (voltage drop in internal resistance) V e Ir (3) When no current exists: Terminal voltage = emf of battery or generator

RESISTIVITY:

The resistance R of a wire of length L and cross-sectional area A is R L A

where is a constant called the resistivity. The resistivity is a characteristic of the material from which the wire is made. For L in m, A in m2 , and R in , the units of are Á m:

RESISTANCE VARIES WITH TEMPERATURE: If a wire has a resistance R0 at a temperature T0 , then its resistance R at a temperature T is R R0 R0 T À T0 where is the temperature coecient of resistance of the material of the wire. Usually varies with temperature and so this relation is applicable only over a small temperature range. The units of are KÀ1 or 8CÀ1 . A similar relation applies to the variation of resistivity with temperature. If 0 and are the resistivities at T0 and T, respectively, then 0 0 T À T0

POTENTIAL CHANGES: The potential dierence across a resistor R through which a current I ¯ows is, by Ohm's Law, IR. The end of the resistor at which the current enters is the highpotential end of the resistor. Current always ¯ows ``downhill,'' from high to low potential, through a resistor. The positive terminal of a battery is always the high-potential terminal if internal resistance of the battery is negligible or small. This is true irrespective of the direction of the current through the battery.

Solved Problems
26.1 A steady current of 0.50 A ¯ows through a wire. How much charge passes through the wire in one minute?
Because I q=t, we have q It 0:50 A60 s 30 C: (Recall that 1 A 1 C/s.)

258

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

[CHAP. 26

26.2

How many electrons ¯ow through a light bulb each second if the current through the light bulb is 0.75 A?
From I q=t, the charge ¯owing through the bulb in 1.0 s is q It 0:75 A1:0 s 0:75 C But the magnitude of the charge on each electron is e 1:6 Â 10À19 C. Therefore, Number charge 0:75 C 4:7 Â 1018 charge=electron 1:6 Â 10À19 C

26.3

A light bulb has a resistance of 240 when lit. How much current will ¯ow through it when it is connected across 120 V, its normal operating voltage?
I V 120 V 0:500 A R 240

26.4

An electric heater uses 5.0 A when connected across 110 V. Determine its resistance.
R V 110 V 22 I 5:0 A

26.5

What is the potential drop across an electric hot plate that draws 5.0 A when its hot resistance is 24 ? V IR 5:0 A24 0:12 kV

26.6

The current in Fig. 26-1 is 0.125 A in the direction shown. For each of the following pairs of points, what is their potential dierence, and which point is at the higher potential? (a) A, B; (b) B, C; (c) C, D; (d ) D, E; (e) C, E; ( f ) E, C:

Fig. 26-1 Recall the following facts: (1) The current is the same (0.125 A) at all points in this circuit because the charge has no other place to ¯ow. (2) Current always ¯ows from high to low potential through a resistor. (3) The positive terminal of a pure emf (the long side of its symbol) is always the high-potential terminal. Therefore, taking potential drops as negative, we have the following: (a) VAB ÀIR À0:125 A10:1 À1:25 V; A is higher.

CHAP. 26]

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

259

(b) (c) (e)

VBC Àe À9:00 V; B is higher. VCD À0:125 A5:00 À 0:125 A6:00 À1:38 V; C is higher. VCE À0:125 A5:00 À 0:125 A6:00 12:0 V 10:6 V; E is higher.

(d ) VDE e 12:0 V; E is higher. ( f ) VEC À0:125 A3:00 À 0:125 A10:0 À 9:00 V À10:6 V; E is higher. Notice that the answers to (e) and ( f ) agree with each other.

26.7

A current of 3.0 A ¯ows through the wire shown in Fig. 26-2. What will a voltmeter read when connected from (a) A to B, (b) A to C, (c) a to D?

Fig. 26-2 (a) (b) Point A is at the higher potential because current always ¯ows ``downhill'' through a resistor. There is a potential drop of IR 3:0 A6:0 18 V from A to B. The voltmeter will read À18 V. In going from B to C one goes from the positive to the negative side of the battery; hence there is a potential drop of 8.0 V from B to C. The drop adds to the drop of 18 V from A to B, found in (a), to give a 26 V drop from A to C. The voltmeter will read À26 V from A to C. From C to D, there is ®rst a drop of IR 3:0 A3:0 9:0 V through the resistor. Then, because one goes from the negative to the positive terminal of the 7.0 V battery, there is a 7.0 V rise through the battery. The voltmeter connected from A to D will read À18 V À 8:0 V À 9:0 V 7:0 V À28 V

(c)

26.8

Repeat Problem 26.7 if the 3.0 A current is ¯owing from right to left instead of from left to right. Which point is at the higher potential in each case?
Proceeding as before, we have (a) (b) (c) VAB 3:06:0 18 V; B is higher. VAC 3:06:0 À 8:0 10 V; C is higher. VAD 3:06:0 À 8:0 3:03:0 7:0 26 V; D is higher.

26.9

A dry cell has an emf of 1.52 V. Its terminal potential drops to zero when a current of 25 A passes through it. What is its internal resistance?
As is shown in Fig. 26-3, the battery acts like a pure emf e in series with a resistor r. We are told that, under the conditions shown, the potential dierence from A to B is zero. Therefore, 0 e À Ir or 0 1:52 V À 25 Ar from which the internal resistance is r 0:061 :

26.10 A direct-current generator has an emf of 120 V; that is, its terminal voltage is 120 V when no current is ¯owing from it. At an output of 20 A the terminal potential is 115 V. (a) What is the internal resistance r of the generator? (b) What will be the terminal voltage at an output of 40 A?
The situation is much like that shown in Fig. 26-3. Now, however, e 120 V and I is no longer 25 A.

260

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

[CHAP. 26

Fig. 26-3

Fig. 26-4

(a)

In this case, I 20 A and the p.d. from A to B is 115 V. Therefore, 115 V 120 V À 20 Ar from which r 0:25 :

(b)

Now I 40 A. So Terminal p.d. e À Ir 120 V À 40 A0:25 110 V

26.11 As shown in Fig. 26-4 the ammeter±voltmeter method is used to measure an unknown resistance R. The ammeter reads 0.3 A, and the voltmeter reads 1.50 V. Compute the value of R if the ammeter and voltmeter are ideal.
R V 1:50 V 5 I 0:3 A

26.12 A metal rod is 2 m long and 8 mm in diameter. Compute its resistance if the resistivity of the metal is 1:76 Â 10À8 Á m.
R L 2m 1:76 Â 10À8 Á m 7 Â 10À4 A 4 Â 10À3 m2

26.13 Number 10 wire has a diameter of 2.59 mm. How many meters of number 10 aluminum wire are needed to give a resistance of 1:0 ? for aluminum is 2:8 Â 10À8 Á m:
From R L=A, we have L RA 1:0 2:59 Â 10À3 m2 =4 0:19 km 2:8 Â 10À8 Á m

26.14 (This problem introduces a unit sometimes used in the United States.) Number 24 copper wire has diameter 0.020 1 in. Compute (a) the cross-sectional area of the wire in circular mils and (b) the resistance of 100 ft of the wire. The resistivity of copper is 10:4 Á circular mils/ft.
The area of a circle in circular mils is de®ned as the square of the diameter of the circle expressed in mils, where 1 mil 0:001 in.

CHAP. 26]

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

261

a b

Area in circular mils 20:1 mil2 404 circular mils R L 10:4 Á circular mil/ft) 100 ft 2:57 A 404 circular mils

26.15 The resistance of a coil of copper wire is 3:35 at 0 8C. What is its resistance at 50 8C? For copper, 4:3 Â 10À3 8CÀ1 :
R R0 R0 T À T0 3:35 4:3 Â 10À3 8CÀ1 3:35 50 8C 4:1

26.16 A resistor is to have a constant resistance of 30:0 , independent of temperature. For this, an aluminum resistor with resistance R01 at 0 8C is used in series with a carbon resistor with resistance R02 at 0 8C. Evaluate R01 and R02 , given that 1 3:9 Â 10À3 8CÀ1 for aluminum and 2 À0:50 Â 10À3 8CÀ1 for carbon.
The combined resistance at temperature T will be R R01 1 R01 T À T0 R02 2 R02 T À T0 R01 R02 1 R01 2 R02 T À T0 We thus have the two conditions R01 R02 30:0 R01 3:4 and 1 R01 2 R02 0 R02 27 Substituting the given values of 1 and 2 , then solving for R01 and R02 , we ®nd

26.17 In the Bohr model, the electron of a hydrogen atom moves in a circular orbit of radius 5:3 Â 10À11 m with a speed of 2:2 Â 106 m/s. Determine its frequency f and the current I in the orbit. f v 2:2 Â 106 m=s 6:6 Â 1015 rev=s 2r 25:3 Â 10À11 m

Each time the electron goes around the orbit, it carries a charge e around the loop. The charge passing a point on the loop each second is I ef 1:6 Â 10À19 C6:6 Â 1015 sÀ1 1:1 mA

26.18 A wire that has a resistance of 5:0 is passed through an extruder so as to make it into a new wire three times as long as the original. What is the new resistance?
We shall use R L=A to ®nd the resistance of the new wire. To ®nd , we use the original data for the wire: 5:0 L0 =A0 or A0 =L0 5:0 We were told that L 3L0 . To ®nd A in terms of A0 , we note that the volume of the wire cannot change. Hence, V0 L0 A0 from which Therefore; LA L0 A0 R or and V0 LA L0 A A0 0 A L0 3

L A0 =L0 5:0 3L0 95:0 45 A A0 =3

262

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

[CHAP. 26

26.19 It is desired to make a wire that has a resistance of 8:0 from 5.0 cm3 of metal that has a resistivity of 9:0 Â 10À8 Á m. What should the length and cross-sectional area of the wire be?
We use R L=A with R 8:0 and 9:0 Â 10À8 Á m. We know further that the volume of the wire (which is LA) is 5:0 Â 10À6 m3 . Therefore we have two equations to solve for L and A: L 8:0 9:0 Â 10À8 Á m and LA 5:0 Â 10À6 m3 A From them, we get L 21 m and A 2:4 Â 10À7 m2 .

Supplementary Problems
26.20 How many electrons per second pass through a section of wire carrying a current of 0.70 A? Ans. 4:4 Â 1018 electrons/s An electron gun in a TV set shoots out a beam of electrons. The beam current is 1:0 Â 10À5 A. How many electrons strike the TV screen each second? How much charge strikes the screen in a minute? Ans. 6:3 Â 1013 electrons/s, À6:0 Â 10À4 C=min What is the current through an 8.0- toaster when it is operating on 120 V? What potential dierence is required to pass 3.0 A through 28 ? Ans. 15 A

26.21

26.22 26.23 26.24

Ans. 84 V

Determine the potential dierence between the ends of a wire of resistance 5:0 if 720 C passes through it per minute. Ans. 60 V A copper bus bar carrying 1200 A has a potential drop of 1.2 mV along 24 cm of its length. What is the resistance per meter of the bar? Ans. 4:2 =m An ammeter is connected in series with an unknown resistance, and a voltmeter is connected across the terminals of the resistance. If the ammeter reads 1.2 A and the voltmeter reads 18 V, compute the value of the resistance. Assume ideal meters. Ans. 15 An electric utility company runs two 100 m copper wires from the street mains up to a customer's premises. If the wire resistance is 0:10 per 1000 m, calculate the line voltage drop for an estimated load current of 120 A. Ans. 2.4 V When the insulation resistance between a motor winding and the motor frame is tested, the value obtained is 1.0 megohm 106 . How much current passes through the insulation of the motor if the test voltage is 1000 V? Ans. 1.0 mA Compute the internal resistance of an electric generator which has an emf of 120 V and a terminal voltage of 110 V when supplying 20 A. Ans. 0:50 A dry cell delivering 2 A has a terminal voltage of 1.41 V. What is the internal resistance of the cell if its open-circuit voltage is 1.59 V? Ans. 0:09 A cell has an emf of 1.54 V. When it is in series with a 1.0- resistance, the reading of a voltmeter connected across the cell terminals is 1.40 V. Determine the cell's internal resistance. Ans. 0:10

26.25

26.26

26.27

26.28

26.29

26.30

26.31

CHAP. 26]

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

263

26.32

The internal resistance of a 6.4-V storage battery is 4.8 m. What is the theoretical maximum current on short circuit? (In practice the leads and connections have some resistance, and this theoretical value would not be attained.) Ans. 1.3 kA A battery has an emf of 13.2 V and an internal resistance of 24.0 m. If the load current is 20.0 A, ®nd the terminal voltage. Ans. 12.7 V A storage battery has an emf of 25.0 V and an internal resistance of 0.200 . Compute its terminal voltage (a) when it is delivering 8.00 A and (b) when it is being charged with 8.00 A. Ans. (a) 23.4 V; (b) 26.6 V A battery charger supplies a current of 10 A to charge a storage battery which has an open-circuit voltage of 5.6 V. If the voltmeter connected across the charger reads 6.8 V, what is the internal resistance of the battery at this time? Ans. 0.12 Find the potential dierence between points A and B in Fig. 26-5 if R is 0:70 . Which point is at the higher potential? Ans. À5:1 V, point A

26.33

26.34

26.35

26.36

Fig. 26-5

26.37

Repeat Problem 26.36 if the current ¯ows in the opposite direction and R 0:70 . B In Fig. 26-5, how large must R be if the potential drop from A to B is 12 V?

Ans.

11.1 V, point

26.38 26.39

Ans. 3:0

For the circuit of Fig. 26-6, ®nd the potential dierence from (a) A to B; (b) B to C, and (c) C to A. Notice that the current is given as 2.0 A. Ans. (a) À48 V; (b) 28 V; (c) 20 V Compute the resistance of 180 m of silver wire having a cross-section of 0.30 mm2 . The resistivity of silver is 1:6 Â 10À8 Á m. Ans. 9:6 The resistivity of aluminum is 2:8 Â 10À8 Á m. How long a piece of aluminum wire 1.0 mm in diameter is needed to give a resistance of 4:0 ? Ans. 0.11 km

26.40

26.41

Fig. 26-6

264

CURRENT, RESISTANCE, AND OHM'S LAW

[CHAP. 26

26.42

Number 6 copper wire has a diameter of 0.162 in. (a) Calculate its area in circular mils. (b) If 10:4 Á circular mils/ft, ®nd the resistance of 1:0 Â 103 ft of the wire. (Refer to Problem 26.14.) Ans. (a) 26:0 Â 103 circular mils; (b) 0:40 A coil of wire has a resistance of 25:00 at 20 8C and a resistance of 25:17 at 35 8C. What is its temperature coecient of resistance? Ans. 4:5 Â 10À4 8CÀ1

26.43

Chapter 27
Electrical Power
THE ELECTRICAL WORK (in joules) required to transfer a charge q (in coulombs) through a potential dierence V (in volts) is given by W qV When q and V are given their proper signs (i.e., voltage rises positive, and drops negative), the work will have its proper sign. Thus, to carry a positive charge through a potential rise, a positive amount of work must be done on the charge.

THE ELECTRICAL POWER (in watts) delivered by an energy source as it carries a charge q (in coulombs) through a potential rise V (in volts) in a time t (in seconds) is Power finished P Because q=t I, this can be rewritten as P VI where I is in amperes. work time Vq t

THE POWER LOSS IN A RESISTOR is found by replacing V in VI by IR, or by replacing I in VI by V=R, to obtain P VI I 2 R V2 R

THE THERMAL ENERGY GENERATED IN A RESISTOR per second is equal to the power loss in the resistor: P VI I 2 R

CONVENIENT CONVERSIONS: 1 W 1 J=s 0:239 cal=s 0:738 ft Á lb=s 1 kW 1:341 hp 56:9 Btu=min 1 hp 746 W 33 000 ft Á lb=min 42:4 Btu=min 1 kW Á h 3:6 Â 106 J 3:6 MJ 265
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

266

ELECTRICAL POWER

[CHAP. 27

Solved Problems
27.1 Compute the work and the average power required to transfer 96 kC of charge in one hour (1.0 h) through a potential rise of 50 V.
W qV 96 000 C50 V 4:8 Â 106 J 4:8 MJ P W 4:8 Â 106 J 1:3 kW t 3600 s

27.2

How much current does a 60 W light bulb draw when connected to its proper voltage, 120 V?
From P VI, I P 60 W 0:50 A V 120 V

27.3

An electric motor takes 5.0 A from a 110 V line. Determine the power input and the energy, in J and kW Á h, supplied to the motor in 2.0 h.
Power P VI 110 V5:0 A 0:55 kW Energy Pt 550 W7200 s 4:0 MJ 0:55 kW2:0 h 1:1 kW Á h

27.4

An electric iron of resistance 20 takes a current of 5.0 A. Calculate the thermal energy, in joules, developed in 30 s.
Energy I 2 Rt 5 A2 20 30 s 15 kJ

27.5

An electric heater of resistance 8:0 draws 15 A from the service mains. At what rate is thermal energy developed, in W? What is the cost of operating the heater for a period of 4.0 h at 10 ==kW Á h? c
W I 2 R 15 A2 8:0 1800 W 1:8 kW Cost 1:8 kW4:0 h10 ==kW Á h 72 = c c

27.6

A coil develops 800 cal/s when 20 V is supplied across its ends. Compute its resistance.
P 800 cal=s4:184 J=cal 3347 J=s Then, because P V 2 =R, R 20 V2 0:12 3347 J=s

27.7

A line having a total resistance of 0:20 delivers 10.00 kW at 250 V to a small factory. What is the eciency of the transmission?

CHAP. 27]

ELECTRICAL POWER

267

We use P VI to ®nd I P=V. Then 2 P 10 000 W 2 Power lost in line I 2 R R 0:20 0:32 kW V 250 V power delivered by line 10:00 kW 0:970 97:07 Efficiency power supplied to line 10:00 0:32 kW

27.8

A hoist motor supplied by 240 V requires 12.0 A to lift an 800-kg load at a rate of 9.00 m/min. Determine the power input to the motor and the power output, both in horsepower, and the overall eciency of the system.
Power input IV 12:0 A240 V 2880 W 2:88 kW1:34 hp=kW 3:86 hp 9:00 m 1:00 hp 1:00 min Power output Fv 800 Â 9:81 N 1:58 hp min 746 J=s 60:0 s 1:58 hp output 0:408 40:87 Efficiency 3:86 hp input

27.9

The lights on a car are inadvertently left on. They dissipate 95.0 W. About how long will it take for the fully charged 12.0 V car battery to run down if the battery is rated at 150 ampere-hours A Á h?
As an approximation, assume the battery maintains 12.0 V until it goes dead. Its 150 A Á h rating means it can supply the energy equivalent of a 150 A current that ¯ows for 1.00 h (3600 s). Therefore, the total energy the battery can supply is Total output energy (power)(time) VIt 12:0 V Â 150 A3600 s 6:48 Â 106 J The energy consumed by the lights in a time t is Energy dissipated 95 Wt Equating these two energies and solving for t, we ®nd t 6:82 Â 104 s 18:9 h:

27.10 What is the cost of electrically heating 50 liters of water from 40 8C to 100 8C at 8:0 ==kW Á h? c
Heat gained by water mass Â (specific heat) Â (temperature rise) 50 kg Â 1000 cal=kg Á8C Â 60 8C 3:0 Â 106 cal 4:184 J 1 kW Á h 8:0 = c 28 = c Cost 3:0 Â 106 cal 1 cal 3:6 Â 106 J 1 kW Á h

Supplementary Problems
27.11 A heater is labeled 1600 W/120 V. How much current does the heater draw from a 120-V source? Ans. 13.3 A A bulb is stamped 40 W/120 V. What is its resistance when lighted by a 120-V source? Ans. 0.36 k

27.12 27.13

A spark of arti®cial 10.0-MV lightning had an energy output of 0.125 MW Á s. How many coulombs of charge ¯owed? Ans. 0.012 5 C

268

ELECTRICAL POWER

[CHAP. 27

27.14

A current of 1.5 A exists in a conductor whose terminals are connected across a potential dierence of 100 V. Compute the total charge transferred in one minute, the work done in transferring this charge, and the power expended in heating the conductor if all the electrical energy is converted into heat. Ans. 90 C, 9.0 kJ, 0.15 kW An electric motor takes 15.0 A at 110 V. Determine (a) the power input and (b) the cost of operating the motor for 8.00 h at 10:0 ==kW Á h: c Ans. (a) 1.65 kW; (b) $1.32 A current of 10 A exists in a line of 0:15 resistance. Compute the rate of production of thermal energy in watts. Ans. 15 W An electric broiler develops 400 cal/s when the current through it is 8.0 A. Determine the resistance of the broiler. Ans. 26 A 25.0-W, 120-V bulb has a cold resistance of 45:0 . When the voltage is switched on, what is the Ans. 2.67 A, 0.208 A instantaneous current? What is the current under normal operation? At a rated current of 400 A, a defective switch becomes overheated due to faulty surface contact. A millivoltmeter connected across the switch shows a 100-mV drop. What is the power loss due to the contact resistance? Ans. 40.0 W How much power does a 60 W/120 V incandescent light bulb dissipate on a voltage of 115 V? Neglect the bulb's decrease in resistance with lowered voltage. Ans. 55 W A house wire is to carry a current of 30 A while dissipating no more than 1.40 W of heat per meter of its Ans. 3.7 mm length. What is the minimum diameter of the wire if its resistivity is 1:68 Â 10À8 Á mc A 10.0- electric heater operates on a 110-V line. Compute the rate at which it develops thermal energy in W and in cal/s. Ans. 1.21 kW 290 cal/s An electric motor, which has 95 percent eciency, uses 20 A at 110 V. What is the horsepower output of the motor? How many watts are lost in thermal energy? How many calories of thermal energy are developed per second? If the motor operates for 3.0 h, what energy, in MJ and in kW Á h, is dissipated? Ans. 2.8 hp, 0.11 kW, 26 cal/s, 24 MJ 6:6 kW Á h An electric crane uses 8.0 A at 150 V to raise a 450-kg load at the rate of 7.0 m/min. Determine the eciency of the system. Ans. 43% What should be the resistance of a heating coil which will be used to raise the temperature of 500 g of water from 28 8C to the boiling point in 2.0 minutes, assuming that 25 percent of the heat is lost? The heater operates on a 110-V line. Ans. 7.2 Compute the cost per hour at 8:0 ==kW Á h of electrically heating a room, if it requires 1.0 kg/h of anthracite c coal having a heat of combustion of 8000 kcal/kg. Ans. 74 ==h c Power is transmitted at 80 kV between two stations. If the voltage can be increased to 160 kV without a change in cable size, how much additional power can be transmitted for the same current? What eect does the power increase have on the line heating loss? Ans. additional power original power, no eect A storage battery, of emf 6.4 V and internal resistance 0:080 , is being charged by a current of 15 A. Calculate (a) the power loss in internal heating of the battery, (b) the rate at which energy is stored in the battery, and (c) its terminal voltage. Ans. (a) 18 W; (b) 96 W; (c) 7.6 V

27.15

27.16

27.17

27.18

27.19

27.20

27.21

27.22

27.23

27.24

27.25

27.26

27.27

27.28

CHAP. 27]

ELECTRICAL POWER

269

27.29

A tank containing 200 kg of water was used as a constant-temperature bath. How long would it take to heat the bath from 20 8C to 25 8C with a 250-W immersion heater? Neglect the heat capacity of the tank frame and any heat losses to the air. Ans. 4.6 h

Chapter 28
Equivalent Resistance; Simple Circuits
RESISTORS IN SERIES: When current can follow only one path as it ¯ows through two or more resistors connected in line, the resistors are in series. In other words, when one and only one terminal of a resistor is connected directly to one and only one terminal of another resistor, the two are in series and the same current passes through both. A node is a point where three or more current-carrying wires or branches meet. There are no nodes between circuit elements (such as capacitors, resistors, and batteries) that are connected in series. A typical case is shown in Fig. 28-1(a). For several resistors in series, their equivalent resistance Req is given by Req R1 R2 R3 Á Á Á (series combination) where R1 ; R2 ; R3 ; F F F, are the resistances of the several resistors. Observe that resistances in series combine like capacitances in parallel (see Chapter 25). It is assumed that all connection wire is eectively resistanceless. In a series combination, the current through each resistance is the same as that through all the others. The potential drop (p.d.) across the combination is equal to the sum of the individual potential drops. The equivalent resistance in series is always greater than the largest of the individual resistances.

Fig. 28-1

RESISTORS IN PARALLEL: Several resistors are connected in parallel between two nodes if one end of each resistor is connected to one node and the other end of each is connected to the other node. A typical case is shown in Fig. 28-1(b), where points a and b are nodes. Their equivalent resistance Req is given by 1 1 1 1 ÁÁÁ Req R1 R2 R3 (parallel combination)

The equivalent resistance in parallel is always less than the smallest of the individual resistances. Connecting additional resistances in parallel decreases Req for the combination. Observe that resistances in parallel combine like capacitances in series (see Chapter 25). The potential drop V across each resistor in a parallel combination is the same as the potential drop across each of the others. The current through the nth resistor is In V=Rn and the total current entering the combination is equal to the sum of the individual branch currents. 270
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

271

Solved Problems
28.1 Derive the formula for the equivalent resistance Req of resistors R1 , R2 , and R3 (a) in series and (b) in parallel, as shown in Fig. 28-1(a) and (b).
(a) For the series network, Vad Vab Vbc Vcd IR1 IR2 IR3 since the current I is the same in all three resistors. Dividing by I gives Vad R1 R2 R3 I (b) or Req R1 R2 R3

since Vad =I is by de®nition the equivalent resistance Req of the network. The p.d. is the same for all three resistors, whence I1 Vab R1 I2 Vab R2 I3 Vab R3

Since the line current I is the sum of the branch currents, I I1 I2 I3 Dividing by Vab gives I 1 1 1 Vab R1 R2 R3 or 1 1 1 1 Req R1 R2 R3 Vab Vab Vab R1 R2 R3

since Vab =I is by de®nition the equivalent resistance Req of the network.

28.2

As shown in Fig. 28-2(a), a battery (internal resistance 1 ) is connected in series with two resistors. Compute (a) the current in the circuit, (b) the p.d. across each resistor, and (c) the terminal p.d. of the battery.

Fig. 28-2

The circuit is redrawn in Fig. 28-2(b) so as to show the battery resistance. We have Req 5 12 1 18 Hence the circuit is equivalent to the one shown in Fig. 28-2(c). Applying V IR to it, we have: a I V 18 V 1:0 A R 18

272

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

(b)

Since I 1:0 A, we can ®nd the p.d. from point b to point c as Vbc IRbc 1:0 A12 12 V and that from c to d as Vcd IRcd 1:0 A5 5 V Notice that I is the same at all points in a series circuit.

(c)

The terminal p.d. of the battery is the p.d. from a to e. Therefore, Terminal p.d.=Vbc Vcd 12 5 17 V Or, we could start at e and keep track of the voltage changes as we go through the battery from e to a. Taking voltage drops as negative, we have Terminal p.d. ÀIr e À1:0 A1 18 V 17 V

28.3

A 120-V house circuit has the following light bulbs turned on: 40.0 W, 60.0 W, and 75.0 W. Find the equivalent resistance of these lights.
House circuits are so constructed that each device is connected in parallel with the others. From P VI V 2 =R, we have for the ®rst bulb R1 V 2 120 V2 360 P1 40:0 W

Similarly, R2 240 and R3 192 . Because they are in parallel, 1 1 1 1 Req 360 240 192 or Req 82:3

As a check, we note that the total power drawn from the line is 40.0 W 60.0 W 75.0 W=175.0 W. Then, using P V 2 =R, we have Req V2 120 V2 82:3 total power 175:0 W

28.4

What resistance must be placed in parallel with 12 to obtain a combined resistance of 4 ?
From we have so 1 1 1 Req R1 R2 1 1 1 4 12 R2 R2 6

28.5

Several 40- resistors are to be connected so that 15 A ¯ows from a 120-V source. How can this be done?
The equivalent resistance must be such that 15 A ¯ows from 120 V. Thus, V 120 V 8 I 15 A The resistors must be in parallel, since the combined resistance is to be smaller than any of them. If the required number of 40- resistors is n, then we have 1 1 n or n5 80 40 Req

28.6

For each circuit shown in Fig. 28-3, determine the current I through the battery.

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

273

Fig. 28-3

(a)

The 3.0- and 7.0- resistors are in parallel; their joint resistance R1 is found from 1 1 1 10 or R1 2:1 R1 3:0 7:0 21 Then the equivalent resistance of the entire circuit is Req 2:1 5:0 0:4 7:5 and the battery current is I e 30 V 4:0 A Req 7:5

(b)

The 7.0-, 1.0-, and 10.0- resistors are in series; their joint resistance is 18.0 . Then 18.0 is in parallel with 6:0 ; their combined resistance R1 is given by 1 1 1 R1 18:0 6:0 or R1 4:5

Hence, the equivalent resistance of the entire circuit is Req 4:5 2:0 8:0 0:3 14:8 and the battery current is I (c) e 20 V 1:4 A Req 14:8

The 5.0- and 19.0- resistors are in series; their joint resistance is 24:0 . Then 24.0 is in parallel with 8.0 ; their joint resistance R1 is given by 1 1 1 R1 24:0 8:0 or R1 6:0

274

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

Now R1 6:0 is in series with 15:0 ; their joint resistance is 6:0 15:0 21:0 . Thus 21:0 is in parallel with 9:0 ; their combined resistance is found from 1 1 1 R2 21:0 9:0 or R2 6:3

Hence the equivalent resistance of the entire circuit is Req 6:3 2:0 0:2 8:5 and the battery current is I e 17 V 2:0 A Req 8:5

28.7

For the circuit shown in Fig. 28-4, ®nd the current in each resistor and the current drawn from the battery.
Notice that the p.d. from a to b is 40 V. Therefore, the p.d. across each resistor is 40 V. Then, 40 V 20 A 2:0 Because I splits into three currents. I2 I5 40 V 8:0 A 5:0 I8 40 V 5:0 A 8:0

I I2 I5 I8 20 A 8:0 A 5:0 A 33 A

Fig. 28-4

Fig. 28-5

28.8

In Fig. 28-5, the battery has an internal resistance of 0:7 . Find (a) the current drawn from the battery, (b) the current in each 15- resistor, and (c) the terminal voltage of the battery.
(a) For parallel group resistance R1 we have 1 1 1 1 3 R1 15 15 15 15 Then and or R1 5:0

Req 5:0 0:3 0:7 6:0 I e 24 V 4:0 A Req 6:0

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

275

(b)

Method 1 The three-resistor combination is equivalent to R1 5:0 . A current of 4.0 A ¯ows through it. Hence, the p.d. across the combination is IR1 4:0 A5:0 20 V This is also the p.d. across each 15- resistor. Therefore, the current through each 15- resistor is I15 Method 2 In this special case, we know that one-third of the current will go through each 15- resistor. Hence I15 4:0 A 1:3 A 3 V 20 V 1:3 A R 15

(c)

We start at a and go to b outside the battery: V from a to b À4:0 A0:3 À 4:0 A5:0 À21:2 V The terminal p.d. of the battery is 21.2 V. Or, we could write for this case of a discharging battery, Terminal p.d. e À Ir 24 V À 4:0 A0:7 21:2 V

28.9

Find the equivalent resistance between points a and b for the combination shown in Fig. 28-6(a).

Fig. 28-6

The 3.0- and 2.0- resistors are in series and are equivalent to a 5.0- resistor. The equivalent 5.0 is in parallel with the 6.0 , and their equivalent, R1 , is 1 1 1 0:20 0:167 0:367 À1 R1 5:0 6:0 or R1 2:73

The circuit thus far reduced is shown in Fig. 28-6(b). The 7:0 and 2.73 are equivalent to 9.73 . Now the 5.0 , 12.0 , and 9.73 are in parallel, and their equivalent, R2 , is 1 1 1 1 0:386 À1 R2 5:0 12:0 9:73 or R2 2:6

This 2.6 is in series with the 9.0- resistor. Therefore, the equivalent resistance of the combination is 9:0 2:6 11:6 :

276

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

28.10 A current of 5.0 A ¯ows into the circuit in Fig. 28-6 at point a and out at point b. (a) What is the potential dierence from a to b? (b) How much current ¯ows through the 12.0- resistor?
In Problem 28.9, we found that the equivalent resistance for this combination is 11.6 , and we are told the current through it is 5.0 A. a (b) Voltage drop from a to b IReq 5:0 A11:6 58 V The voltage drop from a to c is (5.0 A)(9.0 45 V. Hence, from part (a), the voltage drop from c to b is 58 V À 45 V 13 V and the current in the 12.0- resistor is I12 V 13 V 1:1 A R 12

28.11 As shown in Fig. 28-7, the current I divides into I1 and I2 . Find I1 and I2 in terms of I, R1 , and R2 .
The potential drops across R1 and R2 are the same because the resistors are in parallel, so I1 R1 I2 R2 But I I1 I2 and so I2 I À I1 . Substituting in the ®rst equation gives I1 R1 I À I1 R2 IR2 À I1 R2 Using this result together with the ®rst equation gives I2 R1 R1 I I R2 1 R1 R2 or I1 R2 I R1 R2

Fig. 28-7

Fig. 28-8

28.12 Find the potential dierence between points P and Q in Fig. 28-8. Which point is at the higher potential?
From the result of Problem 28.11, the currents through P and Q are 2 18 7:0 A 4:0 A 10 5 2 18 10 5 7:0 A 3:0 A IQ 10 5 2 18 IP

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

277

Now we start at point P and go through point a to point Q, to ®nd Voltage change from P to Q 4:0 A10 À 3:0 A2 34 V (Notice that we go through a potential rise from P to a because we are going against the current. From a to Q there is a drop.) Therefore, the voltage dierence between P and Q is 34 V, with Q being at the higher potential.

28.13 For the circuit of Fig. 28-9(a), ®nd (a) I1 I2 , and I3 ; (b) the current in the 12- resistor.

Fig. 28-9 (a) The circuit reduces at once to that shown in Fig. 28-9(b). There we have 24 in parallel with 12 , so the equivalent resistance below points a and b is 1 1 1 3 Rab 24 12 24 or Rab 8:0

Adding to this the 1.0- internal resistance of the battery gives a total equivalent resistance of 9:0 . To ®nd the current from the battery, we write I1 e 27 V 3:0 A Req 9:0

This same current ¯ows through the equivalent resistance below a and b, and so p.d. from a to b p.d. from c to d I1 Rab 3:0 A8:0 24 V Applying V IR to branch cd gives I2 Similarly; I3 Vcd 24 V 1:0 A Rcd 24 Vgh 24 V 2:0 A Rgh 12

(b)

As a check, we note that I2 I3 3:0 A I1 , as should be. Because I2 1:0 A, the p.d. across the 2:0- resistor in Fig. 28-9(b) is (1.0 A)2:0 2:0 V. But this is also the p.d. across the 12- resistor in Fig. 28-9(a). Applying V IR to the 12 gives I12 V12 2:0 V 0:17 A 12 R

278

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

28.14 A galvanometer has a resistance of 400 and de¯ects full scale for a current of 0.20 mA through it. How large a shunt resistor is required to change it to a 3.0 A ammeter?
In Fig. 28-10 we label the galvanometer G and the shunt resistance Rs . At full scale de¯ection, the currents are as shown.

Fig. 28-10

The voltage drop from a to b across G is the same as that across Rs . Therefore, 2:999 8 ARs 2:0 Â 10À4 A400 from which Rs 0:027 :

28.15 A voltmeter is to de¯ect full scale for a potential dierence of 5.000 V across it and is to be made by connecting a resistor Rx in series with a galvanometer. The 80.00- galvanometer de¯ects full scale for a potential of 20.00 mV across it. Find Rx :
When the galvanometer is de¯ecting full scale, the current through it is V 20:00 Â 10À3 V 2:500 Â 10À4 A R 80:00 When Rx is connected in series with the galvanometer, we wish I to be 2:500 Â 10À4 A for a potential dierence of 5.000 V across the combination. Hence, V IR becomes I 5:000 V 2:500 Â 10À4 A80:00 Rx from which Rx 19:92 k:

28.16 The currents in the circuit in Fig. 28-11 are steady. Find I1 , I2 , I3 , and the charge on the capacitor.
When a capacitor has a constant charge, as it does here, the current ¯owing to it is zero. Therefore I2 0, and the circuit behaves just as though the center wire were missing. With the center wire missing, the remaining circuit is simply 12 connected across a 15-V battery. Therefore, e 15 V 1:25 A R 12 In addition, because I2 0, we have I3 I1 1:3 A. To ®nd the charge on the capacitor, we ®rst ®nd the voltage dierence between points a and b. We start at a and go around the upper path. I1 Voltage change from a to b À5:0 I3 6:0 V 3:0 I2 À5:0 1:25 A 6:0 V 3:0 0 À0:25 V

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

279

Therefore b is at the lower potential and the capacitor plate at b is negative. To ®nd the charge on the capacitor, we write Q CVab 2 Â 10À6 F0:25 V 0:5 C

28.17 Find the ammeter reading and the voltmeter reading in the circuit in Fig. 28-12. Assume both meters to be ideal.

Fig. 28-11

Fig. 28-12

The ideal voltmeter has in®nite resistance and so its wire can be removed without altering the circuit. The ideal ammeter has zero resistance. It can be shown (see Chapter 29) that batteries in series simply add or subtract. The two 6.0-V batteries cancel each other because they tend to push current in opposite directions. As a result, the circuit behaves as though it had a single 8.0-V battery that causes a clockwise current. The equivalent resistance is 3:0 4:0 9:0 16:0 , and the equivalent battery is 8.0 V. Therefore, I e 8:0 V 0:50 A R 16

and this is what the ammeter will read. Adding up the voltage changes from a to b around the right-hand side of the circuit gives Voltage change from a to b À6:0 V 8:0 V À 0:50 A9:0 À2:5 V Therefore, a voltmeter connected from a to b will read 2.5 V, with b being at the lower potential.

Supplementary Problems
28.18 Compute the equivalent resistance of 4:0 and 8:0 (a) in series and (b) in parallel. 2:7 Ans. (a) 12 ; (b)

28.19

Compute the equivalent resistance of (a) 3:0 , 6:0 , and 9:0 in parallel; (b) 3:0 , 4:0 , 7:0 , 10:0 , and 12:0 in parallel; (c) three 33- heating elements in parallel; (d ) twenty 100- lamps in parallel. Ans. (a) 1.6 ; (b) 1.1 ; (c) 11 ; (d ) 5.0 What resistance must be placed in parallel with 20 to make the combined resistance 15 ? Ans. 60

28.20

280

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

28.21 28.22

How many 160- resistors (in parallel) are required to carry 5.0 A on a 100-V line?

Ans. 8

Three resistors, of 8:0 , 12 , and 24 , are in parallel, and a current of 20 A is drawn by the combination. Determine (a) the potential dierence across the combination and (b) the current through each resistance. Ans. (a) 80 V; (b) 10 A, 6.7 A, 3.3 A By use of one or more of the three resistors 3:0 , 5:0 , and 6:0 , a total of 18 resistances can be obtained. What are they? Ans. 0:70 , 1:4 , 1:9 , 2:0 , 2:4 , 2:7 , 3:0 , 3:2 , 3:4 , 5:0 , 5:7 , 6:0 , 7:0 , 7:9 , 8:0 , 9:0 , 11 , 14 Two resistors, of 4:00 and 12:0 , are connected in parallel across a 22-V battery having internal resistance 1:00 . Compute (a) the battery current, (b) the current in the 4.00- resistor, (c) the terminal voltage of the battery, (d ) the current in the 12.0- resistor. Ans. (a) 5.5 A; (b) 4.1 A; (c) 17 V; (d ) 1.4 A Three resistors, of 40 , 60 , and 120 , are connected in parallel, and this parallel group is connected in series with 15 in series with 25 . The whole system is then connected to a 120-V source. Determine (a) the current in the 25 , (b) the potential drop across the parallel group, (c) the potential drop across the 25 , (d ) the current in the 60 , (e) the current in the 40 . Ans. (a) 2.0 A; (b) 40 V; (c) 50 V; (d ) 0.67 A; (e) 1.0 A What shunt resistance should be connected in parallel with an ammeter having a resistance of 0.040 so that 25 percent of the total current will pass through the ammeter? Ans. 0.013 A 36- galvanometer is shunted by a resistor of 4.0 . What part of the total current will pass through the instrument? Ans. 1/10 A relay of resistance 6.0 operates with a minimum current of 0.030 A. It is required that the relay operate when the current in the line attains 0.240 A. What resistance should be used to shunt the Ans. 0.86 relay? Show that if two resistors are connected in parallel, the rates at which they produce thermal energy vary inversely as their resistances. For the circuit shown in Fig. 28-13, ®nd the current through each resistor and the potential drop across each resistor. Ans. for 20 , 3.0 A and 60 V; for 75 , 2.4 A and 180 V; for 300 , 0.6 A and 180 V

28.23

28.24

28.25

28.26

28.27 28.28

28.29

28.30

Fig. 28-13

CHAP. 28]

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

281

28.31

For the circuit shown in Fig. 28-14, ®nd (a) its equivalent resistance; (b) the current drawn from the power source; (c) the potential dierences across ab, cd, and de; (d ) the current in each resistor. Ans. (a) 15 ; (b) 20 A; (c) Vab 80 V, Vcd 120 V, Vde 100 V; (d ) I4 20 A, I10 12 A, I15 8 A, I9 11:1 A, I18 5:6 A, I30 3:3 A

Fig. 28-14

Fig. 28-15

28.32

It is known that the potential dierence across the 6.0- resistance in Fig. 28-15 is 48 V. Determine (a) the entering current I, (b) the potential dierence across the 8.0- resistance, (c) the potential dierence across the 10- resistance, (d ) the potential dierence from a to b. (Hint: The wire connecting c and d can be shrunk to zero length without altering the currents or potentials.) Ans. (a) 12 A; (b) 96 V; (c) 60 V; (d ) 204 V In the circuit shown in Fig. 28-16, 23.9 calories of thermal energy are produced each second in the 4.0- resistor. Assuming the ammeter and two voltmeters to be ideal, what will be their readings? Ans. 5.8 A, 8.0 V, 58 V

28.33

Fig. 28-16

Fig. 28-17

282

EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE; SIMPLE CIRCUITS

[CHAP. 28

28.34

For the circuit shown in Fig. 28-17, ®nd (a) the equivalent resistance; (b) the currents through the 5.0-, 7.0-, and 3.0- resistors; (c) the total power output of the battery. Ans. (a) 10 ; (b) 12 A, 6.0 A, 2.0 A; (c) 1.3 kW

28.35

In the circuit shown in Fig. 28-18, the ideal ammeter registers 2.0 A. (a) Assuming XY to be a resistance, ®nd its value. (b) Assuming XY to be a battery (with 2.0- internal resistance) that is being charged, ®nd its emf. (c) Under the conditions of part (b), what is the potential change from point Y to point X? Ans. (a) 5.0 ; (b) 6.0 V; (c) À10 V

Fig. 28-18

28.36

The Wheatstone bridge shown in Fig. 28-19 is being used to measure resistance X. At balance, the current through the galvanometer G is zero and resistances L, M, and N are 3.0 , 2.0 , and 10 , respectively. Find the value of X. Ans. 15

Fig. 28-19

Fig. 28-20

28.37

The slidewire Wheatstone bridge shown in Fig. 28-20 is balanced when the uniform slide wire AB is divided as shown. Find the value of the resistance X. Ans. 2

Chapter 29
Kirchhoff's Laws
KIRCHHOFF'S NODE (OR JUNCTION) RULE: The sum of all the currents coming into a node (i.e., a junction where three or more current-carrying leads attach) must equal the sum of all the currents leaving that node.

KIRCHHOFF'S LOOP (OR CIRCUIT) RULE: As one traces out a closed circuit, the algebraic sum of the potential changes encountered is zero. In this sum, a potential rise is positive and a potential drop is negative. Current always ¯ows from high to low potential through a resistor. As one traces through a resistor in the direction of the current, the potential change is negative because it is a potential drop. The positive terminal of a pure emf source is always the high-potential terminal, independent of the direction of the current through the emf source.

THE SET OF EQUATIONS OBTAINED by use of Kirchho's loop rule will be independent provided that each new loop equation contains a voltage change not included in a previous equation.

Solved Problems
29.1 Find the currents in the circuit shown in Fig. 29-1.
This circuit cannot be reduced further because it contains no resistors in simple series or parallel combinations. We therefore revert to Kirchho's rules. If the currents had not been labeled and shown by arrows, we would do that ®rst. No special care need be taken in assigning the current directions, since those chosen incorrectly will simply give negative numerical values. We apply the node rule to node b in Fig. 29-1: Current into b current out of b I1 I2 I3 0 Next we apply the loop rule to loop adba. In volts, À7:0 I1 6:0 4:0 0 or I1 10:0 A 7:0 12:0 A 5:0 1

(Why must the term 7:0 I1 have a negative sign?) We then apply the loop rule to loop abca. In volts, À4:0 À 8:0 5:0 I2 0 (Why must the signs be as written?) Now we return to Eq. (1) to ®nd I3 ÀI1 À I2 À 10:0 12:0 À50 À 84 À À3:8 A 7:0 5:0 35 or I2

The minus sign tells us that I3 is opposite in direction to that shown in the ®gure.

283
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

284

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS

[CHAP. 29

Fig. 29-1

Fig. 29-2

29.2

In Fig. 29-2, ®nd I1 , I2 , and I3 if switch S is (a) open and (b) closed.
(a) When S is open, I3 0, because no current can ¯ow through the open switch. Applying the node rule to point a gives I1 I3 I2 or I2 I1 0 I1

Applying the loop rule to loop acbda gives À12:0 7:0 I1 8:0 I2 9:0 0 1

To understand the use of signs, remember that current always ¯ows from high to low potential through a resistor. Because I2 I1 , (1) becomes 15:0 I1 3:0 or I1 0:20 A

Also, I2 I1 0:20 A. Notice that this is the same result that one would obtain by replacing the two batteries by a single 3.0-V battery. (b) With S closed, I3 is no longer known to be zero. Applying the node rule to point a gives I1 I3 I2 Applying the loop rule to loop acba gives À12:0 7:0 I1 À 4:0 I3 0 and to loop adba gives À9:0 À 8:0 I2 À 4:0 I3 0 4 3 2

Applying the loop rule to the remaining loop, acbda, would yield a redundant equation, because it would contain no new voltage change. We must now solve (2), (3), and (4) for I1 , I2 , and I3 . From (4), I3 À2:0 I2 À 2:25 Substituting this in (3) gives À12:0 7:0 I1 9:0 8:0 I2 0 Substituting for I3 in (2) also gives I1 À 2:0 I2 À 2:25 I2 or I1 3:0 I2 2:25 or 7:0 I1 8:0 I2 3:0

CHAP. 29]

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS

285

Fig. 29-3

Fig. 29-4

Substituting this value in the previous equation ®nally gives 21:0 I2 15:75 8:0 I2 3:0 Using this in the equation for I1 gives I1 3:0À0:44 2:25 À1:32 2:25 0:93 A Notice that the minus sign is a part of the value we have found for I2 . It must be carried along with its numerical value. Now we can use (2) to ®nd I3 I2 À I1 À0:44 À 0:93 À1:37 A or I2 À0:44 A

29.3

Each of the cells shown in Fig. 29-3 has an emf of 1.50 V and a 0.075 0- internal resistance. Find I1 , I2 , and I3 :
Applying the node rule to point a gives I1 I2 I3 Applying the loop rule to loop abcea gives, in volts, or Also, for loop adcea, or À0:075 0I3 1:50 À 0:075 0I3 1:50 À 3:00 I1 0 3:00 I1 0:150 I3 3:00 3:00 À 0:150 I3 0:150 I2 3:00 I1 2I2 and substituting this in Eq. (2) gives 6:00 I2 0:150 I2 3:00 Then, I3 I2 0:488 A and I1 2I2 0:976 A. or I2 0:488 A or I2 I3 3 À0:075 0I2 1:50 À 0:075 0I2 1:50 À 3:00 I1 0 3:00 I1 0:150 I2 3:00 2 1

We solve Eq. (2) for 3:00 I1 and substitute in Eq. (3) to get as we might have guessed from the symmetry of the problem. Then Eq. (1) yields

29.4

The currents are steady in the circuit of Fig. 29-4. Find I1 , I2 , I3 , I4 , I5 , and the charge on the capacitor.

286

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS

[CHAP. 29

The capacitor passes no current when charged, and so I5 0. Consider loop acba. The loop rule gives À8:0 4:0 I2 0 Using loop adeca gives À3:0 I1 À 9:0 8:0 0 Applying the node rule at point c results in I1 I5 I2 I3 and at point a, in I3 I4 I2 or I4 À0:33 A (We should have realized this at once, because I5 0 and so I4 I1 :) To ®nd the charge on the capacitor, we need the voltage Vfg across it. Applying the loop rule to loop dfgced gives À2:0 I5 Vfg À 7:0 9:0 3:0 I1 0 or 0 Vfg À 7:0 9:0 À 1:0 0 from which Vfg À1:0 V. The minus sign tells us that plate g is negative. The capacitor's charge is Q CV 5:0 F1:0 V 5:0 C or I3 1:67 A 1:7 A or I1 À0:33 A or I2 2:0 A

29.5

For the circuit shown in Fig. 29-5, the resistance R is 5.0 and e 20 V. Find the readings of the ammeter and the voltmeter. Assume the meters to be ideal.

Fig. 29-5

The ideal voltmeter has in®nite resistance and so it can be removed from the circuit with no eect. Let us write the loop equation for loop cdefc: ÀRI1 12:0 À 8:0 À 7:0 I2 0 which becomes 5:0 I1 7:0 I2 4:0 Next we write the loop equation for loop cdeac. It is or À5:0 I1 12:0 2:0 I3 20:0 0 5:0 I1 À 2:0 I3 32:0 I1 I3 I2 Substituting (3) in (1) gives 5:0 I1 7:0 I1 7:0 I3 4:0 2 3 1

But the node rule applied at e gives

CHAP. 29]

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS

287

We solve this for I3 and substitute in (2) to get

4:0 À 12:0 I1 32:0 5:0 I1 À 2:0 7:0

which yields I1 3:9 A, which is the ammeter reading. Then (1) gives I2 À2:2 A. To ®nd the voltmeter reading Vab , we write the loop equation for loop abca: Vab À 7:0 I2 À e 0 Substituting the known values of I2 and e, then solving, we obtain Vab 4:3 V. Since this is the potential dierence between a to b, point b must be at the higher potential.

29.6

In the circuit in Fig. 29-5, I1 0:20 A and R 5:0 . Find e.
We write the loop equation for loop cdefc: ÀRI1 12:0 À 8:0 À 7:0 I2 0 I1 I3 I2 Now we apply the loop rule to loop cdeac: À5:00:20 12:0 2:00:23 e 0 from which e À11:5 V. The minus sign tells us that the polarity of the battery is actually the reverse of that shown. or or À 5:00:20 12:0 À 8:0 À 7:0 I2 0 I3 I2 À I1 0:23 A from which I2 0:43 A. We can now ®nd I3 by applying the node rule at e:

Supplementary Problems
29.7 For the circuit shown in Fig. 29-6, ®nd the current in the 0.96- resistor and the terminal voltages of the batteries. Ans. 5.0 A, 4.8 V, 4.8 V For the network shown in Fig. 29-7, determine (a) the three currents I1 , I2 , and I3 , and (b) the terminal voltages of the three batteries. Ans. (a) I1 2 A, I2 1 A, I3 À3 A; (b) V16 14 V, V4 3:8 V, V10 8:5 V

29.8

Fig. 29-6

Fig. 29-7

288

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS

[CHAP. 29

29.9

Refer back to Fig. 29-5. If the voltmeter reads 16.0 V (with point b at the higher potential) and I2 0:20 A, ®nd e, R and the ammeter reading. Ans. 14.6 V, 0.21 , 12 A Find I1 , I2 , I3 , and the potential dierence between point b to point e in Fig. 29-8. 6.0 A, À13:0 V Ans. 2.0 A, À8:0 A,

29.10

Fig. 29-8

Fig. 29-9

29.11 29.12

In Fig. 29-9, R 10:0 and e 13 V. Find the readings of the ideal ammeter and voltmeter. Ans. 8.4 A, 27 V with point a positive In Fig. 29-9, the voltmeter reads 14 V (with point a at the higher potential) and the ammeter reads 4.5 A. Find e and R. Ans. e 0, R 3:2

Chapter 30
Forces in Magnetic Fields
A MAGNETIC FIELD ~ exists in an otherwise empty region of space if a charge moving B through that region can experience a force due to its motion (as shown in Fig. 30-1). Frequently, a magnetic ®eld is detected by its eect on a compass needle (a tiny bar magnet). The compass needle lines up in the direction of the magnetic ®eld.

MAGNETIC FIELD LINES drawn in a region provide a means for showing the direction in which a compass needle placed in the region will point. A method for determining the ®eld lines near a bar magnet is shown in Fig. 30-2. By tradition, we take the direction of the compass needle to be the direction of the ®eld.

Fig. 30-1

Fig. 30-2

A MAGNET may have two or more poles, although it must have at least one north pole and one south pole. Because a compass needle points away from a north pole (N in Fig. 30-2) and toward a south pole (S), magnetic ®eld lines exit north poles and enter south poles.

MAGNETIC POLES of the same type (north or south) repel each other, while unlike poles attract each other.

A CHARGE MOVING THROUGH A MAGNETIC FIELD experiences a force due to the ®eld, provided its velocity vector is not along a magnetic ®eld line. In Fig. 30-1, charges (q) are moving with velocity ~ in a magnetic ®eld directed as shown. The direction of the force ~ on each charge v F is indicated. Notice that the direction of the force on a negative charge is opposite to that on a positive charge with the same velocity.

THE DIRECTION OF THE FORCE acting on a charge q moving in a magnetic ®eld can be found from a right-hand rule (Fig. 30-3): 289
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

290

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 30

Fig. 30-3

Hold the right hand ¯at. Point its ®ngers in the direction of the ®eld. Orient the thumb along the direction of the velocity of the positive charge. Then the palm of the hand pushes in the direction of the force on the charge. The force direction on a negative charge is opposite to that on a positive charge. It is often helpful to note that the ®eld line through the particle and the velocity vector of the particle determine a plane (the plane of the page in Fig. 30-3). The force vector is always perpendicular to this plane. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE FORCE F on a charge moving in a magnetic ®eld depends upon the product of four factors: (1) q, the charge (in C) (2) v, the magnitude of the velocity of the charge (in m/s) (3) B, the strength of the magnetic ®eld (4) sin , where is the angle between the ®eld lines and the velocity ~. v

THE MAGNETIC FIELD AT A POINT is represented by a vector ~ that is variously called the B magnetic induction, the magnetic ¯ux density, or simply the magnetic ®eld. We de®ne the magnitude of ~ and its units by way of the equation B FM qvB sin where FM is in newtons, q is in coulombs, v is in m/s, and B is the magnetic ®eld in a unit called the tesla (T). For reasons we will see later, a tesla is also expressed as a weber per square meter: 1 T 1 Wb=m2 (see Chapter 32). Still encountered is the cgs unit for B, the gauss (G), where 1 G 10À4 T The Earth's magnetic ®eld is a few tenths of a gauss. Also note that 1 T 1 Wb=m2 1 N N 1 C Á m=s AÁ m

FORCE ON A CURRENT IN A MAGNETIC FIELD: Since a current is simply a stream of positive charges, a current experiences a force due to a magnetic ®eld. The direction of the force is found by the right-hand rule shown in Fig. 30-3, with the direction of the current used in place of the velocity vector.

CHAP. 30]

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

291

The magnitude ÁFM of the force on a small length ÁL of wire carrying current I is given by ÁFM IÁLB sin where is the angle between the direction of the current I and the direction of the ®eld. For a straight wire of length L in a uniform magnetic ®eld, this becomes FM ILB sin Notice that the force is zero if the wire is in line with the ®eld lines. The force is maximum if the ®eld lines are perpendicular to the wire. In analogy to the case of a moving charge, the force is perpendicular to the plane de®ned by the wire and the ®eld lines.

TORQUE ON A FLAT COIL in a uniform magnetic ®eld: The torque on a coil of N loops, each carrying a current I, in an external magnetic ®eld B is NIAB sin where A is the area of the coil, and is the angle between the ®eld lines and a perpendicular to the plane of the coil. For the direction of rotation of the coil, we have the following right-hand rule: Orient the right thumb perpendicular to the plane of the coil, such that the ®ngers run in the direction of the current ¯ow. Then the torque acts to rotate the thumb into alignment with the external ®eld (at which orientation the torque will be zero).

Solved Problems
30.1 A uniform magnetic ®eld, B 3:0 G, exists in the x-direction. A proton q e shoots through the ®eld in the y-direction with a speed of 5:0 Â 106 m/s. (a) Find the magnitude and direction of the force on the proton. (b) Repeat with the proton replaced by an electron.
(a) The situation is shown in Fig. 30-4. We have, after changing 3.0 G to 3:0 Â 10À4 T, FM qvB sin 1:6 Â 10À19 C5:0 Â 106 m=s3:0 Â 10À4 T sin 908 2:4 Â 10À16 N

Fig. 30-4

Fig. 30-5

292

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 30

The force is perpendicular to the xy-plane, the plane de®ned by the ®eld lines and~. The right-hand rule v tells us that the force is directed into the page, in the Àz-direction. (b) The magnitude of the force is the same as in (a), 2:4 Â 10À16 N. But, because the electron is negative, the force direction is reversed. The force is in the z-direction.

30.2

The charge shown in Fig. 30-5 is a proton q e, mp 1:67 Â 10À27 kg) with speed 5:0 Â 106 m/s. It is passing through a uniform magnetic ®eld directed out of the page; B is 30 G. Describe the path followed by the proton.
Because the proton's velocity is perpendicular to ~, the force on the proton is B qvB sin 908 qvB This force is perpendicular to~ and so it does no work on the proton. It simply de¯ects the proton and causes v it to follow the circular path shown, as you can verify using the right-hand rule. The force qvB is radially inward and supplies the centripetal force for the circular motion: FM qvB ma mv2 =r and mv 1 r qB For the given data, r 1:67 Â 10À27 kg5:0 Â 106 m=s 17 m 1:6 Â 10À19 C30 Â 10À4 T

Observe from Eq. (1) that the momentum of the charged particle is directly proportional to the radius of its circular orbit.

30.3

A proton enters a magnetic ®eld of ¯ux density 1.5 Wb/m2 with a velocity of 2:0 Â 107 m/s at an angle of 308 with the ®eld. Compute the force on the proton.
FM qvB sin 1:6 Â 10À19 C2:0 Â 107 m=s1:5 Wb=m2 sin 308 2:4 Â 10À12 N

30.4

A cathode ray beam (an electron beam; me 9:1 Â 10À31 kg, q Àe) is bent in a circle of radius 2.0 cm by a uniform ®eld with B 4:5 Â 10À3 T. What is the speed of the electrons?
To describe a circle like this, the particles must be moving perpendicular to ~. From Eq. (1) of Problem B 30.2, v rqB 0:020 m1:6 Â 10À19 C4:5 Â 10À3 T 1:58 Â 107 m=s 1:6 Â 104 km=s m 9:1 Â 10À31 kg

30.5

As shown in Fig. 30-6, a particle of charge q enters a region where an electric ®eld is uniform and directed downward. Its value E is 80 kV/m. Perpendicular to ~ and directed into the page is a E magnetic ®eld B 0:4 T. If the speed of the particle is properly chosen, the particle will not be de¯ected by these crossed electric and magnetic ®elds. What speed should be selected in this case? (This device is called a velocity selector.)
The electric ®eld causes a downward force Eq on the charge if it is positive. The right-hand rule tells us that the magnetic force, qvB sin 908, is upward if q is positive. If these two forces are to balance so that the particle does not de¯ect, then E 80 Â 103 V=m 2 Â 105 m=s B 0:4 T When q is negative, both forces are reversed, so the result v E=B still holds. Eq qvB sin 908 or v

CHAP. 30]

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

293

Fig. 30-6

30.6

In Fig. 30-7(a), a proton q e, mp 1:67 Â 10À27 kg is shot with speed 8:0 Â 106 m/s at an angle of 30:08 to an x-directed ®eld B 0:15 T. Describe the path followed by the proton.

Fig. 30-7 We resolve the particle velocity into components parallel to and perpendicular to the magnetic ®eld. The magnetic force in the direction of v is zero sin 0; the magnetic force in the direction of vc has no xcomponent. Therefore, the motion in the x-direction is uniform, at speed jj v 0:8668:0 Â 106 m=s 6:93 Â 106 m=s jj while the transverse motion is circular (see Problem 30.2), with radius r mvc 1:67 Â 10À27 kg0:500 Â 8:0 Â 106 m=s 0:28 m qB 1:6 Â 10À19 C0:15 T

The proton will spiral along the x-axis; the radius of the spiral (or helix) will be 28 cm. To ®nd the pitch of the helix (the x-distance traveled during one revolution), we note that the time taken to complete one circle is Period 2r 20:28 m 4:4 Â 10À7 s vc 0:5008:0 Â 106 m=s

294

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 30

During that time, the proton will travel an x-distance of Pitch v period 6:93 Â 106 m=s4:4 Â 10À7 s 3:0 m jj 30.7

Alpha particles m 6:68 Â 10À27 kg, q 2e are accelerated from rest through a p.d. of 1.0 kV. They then enter a magnetic ®eld B 0:20 T perpendicular to their direction of motion. Calculate the radius of their path.
Their ®nal KE is equal to the electric potential energy they lose during acceleration, Vq: r 2Vq 1 mv2 Vq or v 2 m By Problem 30.2, they follow a circular path in which s r mv m 2Vq 1 2Vm r qB qB m B q s 1 21000 V6:68 Â 10À27 kg 0:032 m 0:20 T 3:2 Â 10À19 C

30.8

In Fig. 30-8, the magnetic ®eld is out of the page and B 0:80 T. The wire shown carries a current of 30 A. Find the magnitude and direction of the force on a 5.0 cm length of the wire.
We know that ÁFM IÁLB sin 30 A0:050 m0:80 T1 1:2 N By the right-hand rule, the force is perpendicular to both the wire and the ®eld and is directed toward the bottom of the page.

Fig. 30-8

Fig. 30-9

30.9

As shown in Fig. 30-9, a loop of wire carries a current I and its plane is perpendicular to a uniform magnetic ®eld ~. What are the resultant force and torque on the loop? B
Consider the length ÁL shown. The force Á~ on it has the direction indicated. A point directly opposite F this on the loop has an equal, but opposite, force acting on it. Hence the forces on the loop cancel and the resultant force on it is zero. We see from the ®gure that the Á~'s acting on the loop are trying to expand it, not rotate it. Therefore F the torque on the loop is zero. Or, we can make use of the torque equation, NIAB sin where is the angle between the ®eld lines and the perpendicular to the plane of the loop. We see that 0. Therefore sin 0 and the torque is zero.

CHAP. 30]

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

295

30.10 The 40-loop coil shown in Fig. 30-10 carries a current of 2.0 A in a magnetic ®eld B 0:25 T. Find the torque on it. How will it rotate?
Method 1 NIAB sin 402:0 A0:10 m Â 0:12 m0:25 Tsin 908 0:24 N Á m (Remember that is the angle between the ®eld lines and the perpendicular to the loop.) By the right-hand rule, the coil will turn about a vertical axis in such a way that side ad moves out of the page.

Fig. 30-10 Method 2 Because sides dc and ab are in line with the ®eld, the force on each of them is zero, while the force on each vertical wire is FM ILB 2:0 A0:12 m0:25 T 0:060 N out of the page on side ab and into the page on side bc. If we take torques about side bc as axis, only the force on side ad gives a nonzero torque. It is 40 Â 0:060 N0:10 m 0:24 N Á m and it tends to rotate side ad out of the page.

30.11 In Fig. 30-11 is shown one-quarter of a single circular loop of wire that carries a current of 14 A. Its radius is a 5:0 cm. A uniform magnetic ®eld, B 300 G, is directed in the x-direction. Find the torque on the loop and the direction in which it will rotate.
The normal to the loop, OP, makes an angle 608 with the x-direction, the ®eld direction. Hence, NIAB sin 114 A Â 25 Â 10À4 m2 0:030 0 T sin 608 2:9 Â 10À3 N Á m The right-hand rule shows that the loop will rotate about the y-axis so as to decrease the angle labeled 608.

30.12 Two electrons, both with speed 5:0 Â 106 m/s, are shot into a uniform magnetic ®eld ~. The ®rst is B shot from the origin out along the x-axis, and it moves in a circle that intersects the z-axis at z 16 cm. The second is shot out along the y-axis, and it moves in a straight line. Find the magnitude and direction of ~: B

296

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 30

Fig. 30-11

Fig. 30-12

The situation is shown in Fig. 30-12. Because a charge experiences no force when moving along a ®eld line, the ®eld must be in either the y- or Ày-direction. Use of the right-hand rule for the motion shown in the diagram for the negative electron charge leads us to conclude that the ®eld is in the Ày-direction. To ®nd the magnitude of ~, we notice that r 8 cm. The magnetic force Bqv provides the needed B centripetal force mv2 =r, and so B mv 9:1 Â 10À31 kg5:0 Â 106 m=s 3:6 Â 10À4 T qr 1:6 Â 10À19 C0:080 m

30.13 At a certain place on the planet, the Earth's magnetic ®eld is 5:0 Â 10À5 T, directed 408 below the horizontal. Find the force per meter of length on a horizontal wire that carries a current of 30 A northward.

Fig. 30-13

Nearly everywhere, the Earth's ®eld is directed northward. (That is the direction in which a compass needle points.) Therefore, the situation is that shown in Fig. 30-13. The force on the wire is FM 30 AL5:0 Â 10À5 T sin 408 so that FM 9:6 Â 10À4 N L

The right-hand rule indicates that the force is into the page, which is west.

CHAP. 30]

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

297

Supplementary Problems
30.14 An ion q 2e enters a magnetic ®eld of 1.2 Wb/m2 at a velocity of 2:5 Â 105 m/s perpendicular to the ®eld. Determine the force on the ion. Ans. 9:6 Â 10À14 N Calculate the speed of ions that pass unde¯ected through crossed E and B ®elds for which E 7:7 kV/m and B 0:14 T. Ans. 55 km/s The particle shown in Fig. 30-14 is positively charged in all three cases. What is the direction of the force on it due to the magnetic ®eld? Give its magnitude in terms of B, q, and v. Ans. (a) into page, qvB; (b) out of page, qvB sin ; (c) in plane of page at angle 908, qvB

30.15

30.16

Fig. 30-14 What might be the mass of a positive ion that is moving at 1:0 Â 107 m/s and is bent into a circular path of radius 1.55 m by a magnetic ®eld of 0.134 Wb/m2 ? (There are several possible answers.) Ans. n3:3 Â 10À27 kg), where ne is the ion's charge An electron is accelerated from rest through a potential dierence of 3750 V. It enters a region where B 4:0 Â 10À3 T perpendicular to its velocity. Calculate the radius of the path it will follow. Ans. 5.2 cm An electron is shot with speed 5:0 Â 106 m/s out from the origin of coordinates. Its initial velocity makes an angle of 208 to the x-axis. Describe its motion if a magnetic ®eld B 2:0 mT exists in the x-direction. Ans. helix, r 0:49 cm, pitch 8:5 cm A beam of electrons passes unde¯ected through two mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic ®elds. If the electric ®eld is cut o and the same magnetic ®eld maintained, the electrons move in the magnetic ®eld in a circular path of radius 1.14 cm. Determine the ratio of the electronic charge to the electron mass if E 8:00 kV/m and the magnetic ®eld has ¯ux density 2.00 mT. Ans. e=me 175 GC/kg A straight wire 15 cm long, carrying a current of 6.0 A, is in a uniform ®eld of 0.40 T. What is the force on the wire when it is (a) at right angles to the ®eld and (b) at 308 to the ®eld? Ans. (a) 0.36 N; (b) 0.18 N What is the direction of the force, due to the Earth's magnetic ®eld, on a wire carrying current vertically downward? Ans. horizontally toward east Find the force on each segment of the wire shown in Fig. 30-15 if B 0:15 T. Assume the current in the wire to be 5.0 A. Ans. In sections AB and DE, the force is zero; in section BC, 0.12 N into page; in section CD, 0.12 N out of page

30.17

30.18

30.19

30.20

30.21

30.22

30.23

298

FORCES IN MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 30

Fig. 30-15 A rectangular coil of 25 loops is suspended in a ®eld of 0.20 Wb/m2 . The plane of the coil is parallel to the direction of the ®eld. The dimensions of the coil are 15 cm perpendicular to the ®eld lines and 12 cm parallel to them. What is the current in the coil if there is a torque of 5:4 N Á m acting on it? Ans. 60 A An electron is accelerated from rest through a potential dierence of 800 V. It then moves perpendicularly to a magnetic ®eld of 30 G. Find the radius of its orbit and its orbital frequency. Ans. 3.2 cm, 84 MHz A proton and a deuteron md % 2mp ; qd e are both accelerated through the same potential dierence and enter a magnetic ®eld along the same line. If the proton follows a path of radius Rp , what will be the radius of p the deuteron's path? Ans. Rd Rp 2

30.24

30.25 30.26

Chapter 31
Sources of Magnetic Fields
MAGNETIC FIELDS ARE PRODUCED by moving charges, and of course that includes electric currents. Figure 31-1 shows the nature of the magnetic ®elds produced by several current con®gurations. Below each is given the value of B at the indicated point P. The constant 0 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A is called the permeability of free space. It is assumed that the surrounding material is vacuum or air.

THE DIRECTION OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD of a current-carrying wire can be found by using a right-hand rule, as illustrated in Fig. 31-1(a): Grasp the wire in the right hand, with the thumb pointing in the direction of the current. The ®ngers then circle the wire in the same direction as the magnetic ®eld does. This same rule can be used to ®nd the direction of the ®eld for a current loop such as that shown in Fig. 31-1(b).

Fig. 31-1

299
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

300

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 31

FERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS, primarily iron and hance magnetic ®elds. Other materials in¯uence B-®elds contain domains, or regions of aligned atoms, that act within an object are aligned with each other, the object mains in permanent magnets is not easily disrupted.

the other transition elements, greatly enonly slightly. The ferromagnetic materials as tiny bar magnets. When the domains becomes a magnet. The alignment of do-

THE MAGNETIC MOMENT of a ¯at current-carrying loop (current I, area A) is IA. The magnetic moment is a vector quantity that points along the ®eld line perpendicular to the plane of the loop. In terms of the magnetic moment, the torque on a ¯at coil with N loops in a magnetic ®eld B is NIAB sin , where is the angle between the ®eld and the magnetic moment vector. MAGNETIC FIELD OF A CURRENT ELEMENT: The current element of length ÁL shown in Fig. 31-2 contributes Á~ to the ®eld at P. The magnitude of Á~ is given by the Biot±Savart B B Law: 0 I ÁL sin 4r2 where r and are de®ned in the ®gure. The direction of Á~ is perpendicular to the plane determined by B ÁL and r (the plane of the page). In the case shown, the right-hand rule tells us that Á~ is out of the B page. ÁB

Fig. 31-2

When r is in line with ÁL, then 0 and thus ÁB 0. This means that the ®eld due to a straight wire at a point on the line of the wire is zero.

Solved Problems
31.1 Compute the value of B in air at a point 5 cm from a long straight wire carrying a current of 15 A.
From Fig. 31-1(a), B 0 I 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A15 A 6 Â 10À5 T 2r 20:05 m

CHAP. 31]

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS

301

31.2

A ¯at circular coil with 40 loops of wire has a diameter of 32 cm. What current must ¯ow in its wires to produce a ®eld of 3:0 Â 10À4 Wb/m2 at its center?
From Fig. 31-1(b), B which gives I 1:9 A: 0 NI 2r or 3:0 Â 10À4 T 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A40I 20:16 m

31.3

An air-core solenoid with 2000 loops is 60 cm long and has a diameter of 2.0 cm. If a current of 5.0 A is sent through it, what will be the ¯ux density within it?
From Fig. 31-3(c), B 0 nI 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A 2000 5:0 A 0:021 T 0:60 m

31.4

In Bohr's model of the hydrogen atom, the electron travels with speed 2:2 Â 106 m/s in a circle r 5:3 Â 10À11 m about the nucleus. Find the value of B at the nucleus due to the electron's motion.
In Problem 26.17 we found that the orbiting electron corresponds to a current loop with I 1:06 mA. The ®eld at the center of the current loop is B 0 I 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A1:06 Â 10À3 A 13 T 2r 25:3 Â 10À11 m

31.5

A long straight wire coincides with the x-axis, and another coincides with the y-axis. Each carries a current of 5 A in the positive coordinate direction. (See Fig. 31-3.) Where is their combined ®eld equal to zero?

Fig. 31-3 Use of the right-hand rule should convince you that their ®elds tend to cancel in the ®rst and third quadrants. A line at 458 passing through the origin is equidistant from the two wires in these quadrants. Hence the ®elds exactly cancel along the line x y, the 458 line.

31.6

A long wire carries a current of 20 A along the axis of a long solenoid. The ®eld due to the solenoid is 4.0 mT. Find the resultant ®eld at a point 3.0 mm from the solenoid axis.

302

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 31

The situation is shown in Fig. 31-4. The ®eld of the solenoid, ~s , is directed parallel to the wire. The ®eld B of the long straight wire, ~w , circles the wire and is perpendicular to ~s . We have Bs 4:0 mT and B B Bw 0 I 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A20 A 1:33 mT 2r 23:0 Â 10À3 m

B B B Since ~s and ~w are perpendicular, their resultant ~ has magnitude

B

q 4:0 mT2 1:33 mT2 4:2 mT

Fig. 31-4

Fig. 31-5

31.7

As shown in Fig. 31-5, two long parallel wires are 10 cm apart and carry currents of 6.0 A and 4.0 A. Find the force on a 1.0 m length of wire D if the currents are (a) parallel and (b) antiparallel.
(a) This is the situation shown in Fig. 31-5. The ®eld at wire D due to wire C is directed into the page and has the value B 0 I 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A6:0 A 1:2 Â 10À5 T 2r 20:10 m

The force on 1 m of wire D due to this ®eld is FM ILB sin 4:0 A1:0 m1:2 Â 10À5 Tsin 908 48 N The right-hand rule applied to wire D tells us the force on D is toward the left. The wires attract each other. (b) If the current in D ¯ows in the reverse direction, the force direction will be reversed. The wires will repel each other. The force per meter of length is still 48 N:

31.8

Consider the three long, straight, parallel wires shown in Fig. 31-6. Find the force experienced by a 25-cm length of wire C.
The ®elds due to wires D and G at wire C are BD into the page, and BG 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A20 A 0:80 Â 10À4 T 20:050 m 0 I 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A30 A 2:0 Â 10À4 T 2r 20:030 m

CHAP. 31]

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS

303

Fig. 31-6

out of the page. Therefore, the ®eld at the position of wire C is B 2:0 Â 10À4 À 0:80 Â 10À4 1:2 Â 10À4 T into the page. The force on a 25-cm length of C is FM ILB sin 10 A0:25 m1:2 Â 10À4 Tsin 908 0:30 mN Using the right-hand rule at wire C tells us that the force on wire C is toward the right.

31.9

A ¯at circular coil with 10 loops of wire has a diameter of 2.0 cm and carries a current of 0.50 A. It is mounted inside a long solenoid that has 200 loops on its 25-cm length. The current in the solenoid is 2.4 A. Compute the torque required to hold the coil with its axis perpendicular to that of the solenoid.
Let the subscripts s and c refer to the solenoid and coil respectively. Then Nc Ic Ac Bs sin 908 But Bs 0 nIs 0 Ns =Ls Is , which gives 0 Nc Ns Ic Is r2 c Ls

4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A102000:50 A2:4 A0:010 m2 0:25 m 3:8 Â 10À6 N Á m

31.10 The wire shown in Fig. 31-7 carries a current of 40 A. Find the ®eld at point P:
Since P lies on the lines of the straight wires, they contribute no ®eld at P. A circular loop of radius r gives a ®eld of B 0 I=2r at its center point. Here we have only three-fourths of a loop, and so B at point P 3 0 I 34 Â 10À7 T Á m=A40 A 4 2r 420:020 m

9:4 Â 10À4 T 0:94 mT The ®eld is out of the page.

304

SOURCES OF MAGNETIC FIELDS

[CHAP. 31

Fig. 31-7

Supplementary Problems
31.11 31.12 31.13 31.14 Compute the ¯ux density in air at a point 6.0 cm from a long straight wire carrying a current of 9.0 A. Ans. 30 T A closely wound, ¯at, circular coil of 25 turns of wire has a diameter of 10 cm and carries a current of 4.0 A. Determine the value of B at its center. Ans. 1:3 Â 10À3 Wb/m2 An air-core solenoid 50 cm long has 4000 loops wound on it. Compute B in its interior when a current of 0.25 A exists in the winding. Ans. 2.5 mT A uniformly wound air-core toroid has 750 loops on it. The radius of the circle through the center of its windings is 5 cm. What current in the winding will produce a ®eld of 1.8 mT on this central circle? Ans. 0.6 A Two long parallel wires are 4 cm apart and carry currents of 2 A and 6 A in the same direction. Compute the force between the wires per meter of wire length. Ans. 6 Â 10À5 N/m, attraction Two long ®xed parallel wires, A and B, are 10 cm apart in air and carry 40 A and 20 A respectively, in opposite directions. Determine the resultant ®eld (a) on a line midway between the wires and parallel to them and (b) on a line 8.0 cm from wire A and 18 cm from wire B. (c) What is the force per meter on a third long wire, midway between A and B and in their plane, when it carries a current of 5.0 A in the same direction as the current in A? Ans. (a) 2:4 Â 10À4 T; (b) 7:8 Â 10À5 T; (c) 1:2 Â 10À3 N/m, toward A The long straight wires in Fig. 31-3 both carry a current of 12 A, in the directions shown. Find B at the point (a) x À5:0 cm, y 5:0 cm and (b) x À7:0 cm, y À6:0 cm. Ans. (a) 96 T, out; (b) 5:7 T, in A certain electromagnet consists of a solenoid (5.0 cm long with 200 loops) wound on a soft-iron core that intensi®es the ®eld 130 times. (We say that the relative permeability of the iron is 130.) Find B within the iron when the current in the solenoid is 0.30 A. Ans. 0.20 T A certain solenoid (50 cm long with 2000 loops) carries a current of 0.70 A and is in vacuum. An electron is shot at an angle of 108 to the solenoid axis from a point on the axis. (a) What must be the speed of the electron if it is to just miss hitting the inside of the 1.6 cm diameter solenoid? (b) What is then the pitch of the electron's helical path? Ans. (a) 1:4 Â 107 m/s; (b) 14 cm

31.15 31.16

31.17 31.18

31.19

Chapter 32
Induced EMF; Magnetic Flux
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF MATTER: Most materials have only a very slight eect on a steady magnetic ®eld, and that eect is best described in terms of an experiment. Suppose that a very long solenoid or a toroid is located in vacuum. With a ®xed current in the coil, the magnetic ®eld at a certain point inside the solenoid or toroid is B0 , where the subscript 0 stands for vacuum. If now the solenoid or toroid core is ®lled with a material, the ®eld at that point will be changed to a new value B. We de®ne: Relative permeability of the material kM B B0 Permeability of the material kM 0

Recall that 0 is the permeability of free space, 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A: Diamagnetic materials have values for kM slightly below unity (0.999 984 for solid lead, for example). They slightly decrease the value of B in the solenoid or toroid. Paramagnetic materials have values for kM slightly larger than unity (1.000 021 for solid aluminum, for example). They slightly increase the value of B in the solenoid or toroid. Ferromagnetic materials, such as iron and its alloys, have kM values of about 50 or larger. They greatly increase the value of B in the toroid or solenoid.

MAGNETIC FIELD LINES: A magnetic ®eld may be represented pictorially by lines, to which ~ is everywhere tangential. These magnetic ®eld lines are constructed in such a way that the numB ber of lines piercing a unit area perpendicular to them is proportional to the local value of B.

THE MAGNETIC FLUX ÈM through an area A is de®ned to be the product of Bc and A where Bc is the component of ~ perpendicular to the surface of area A: B ÈM Bc A BA cos where is the angle between the direction of the magnetic ®eld and the perpendicular to the area. The ¯ux is expressed in webers (Wb).

AN INDUCED EMF exists in a loop of wire whenever there is a change in the magnetic ¯ux through the area surrounded by the loop. The induced emf exists only during the time that the ¯ux through the area is changing.

FARADAY'S LAW FOR INDUCED EMF: Suppose that a coil with N loops is subject to a changing magnetic ¯ux through the coil. If a change in ¯ux ÁÈM occurs in a time Át, then the average emf induced between the two terminals of the coil is given by e ÀN ÁÈM Át

The emf e is measured in volts if ÁÈ=Át is in Wb/s. The minus sign indicates that the induced emf opposes the change which produces it, as stated generally in Lenz's Law. 305
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

306

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

[CHAP. 32

LENZ'S LAW: An induced emf always has such a direction as to oppose the change in magnetic ¯ux that produced it. For example, if the ¯ux is increasing through a coil, the current produced by the induced emf will generate a ¯ux that tends to cancel the increasing ¯ux. Or, if the ¯ux is decreasing through the coil, that current will produce a ¯ux that tends to restore the decreasing ¯ux. Lenz's Law is a consequence of Conservation of Energy. If this were not the case, the induced currents would enhance the ¯ux change that caused them to begin with and the process would build endlessly.

MOTIONAL EMF: When a conductor moves through a magnetic ®eld so as to cut ®eld lines, an induced emf will exist in it, in accordance with Faraday's Law. In this case, jej ÁÈM Át

The symbol jej means that we are concerned here only with the magnitude of the average induced emf; its direction will be considered below. The induced emf in a straight conductor of length L moving with velocity~ perpendicular to a ®eld ~ v B is given by jej BLv
B v where ~, ~, and the wire must be mutually perpendicular. In this case, Lenz's Law still tells us that the induced emf opposes the process. But now the opposition is produced by way of the force exerted by the magnetic ®eld on the induced current in the conductor. The current direction must be such that the force opposes the motion of the conductor. Knowing the current direction, we also know the direction of e.

Solved Problems
32.1 A solenoid is 40 cm long, has cross-sectional area 8.0 cm2 , and is wound with 300 turns of wire that carry a current of 1.2 A. The relative permeability of its iron core is 600. Compute (a) B for an interior point and (b) the ¯ux through the solenoid.
(a) From Fig. 31-1(c), B0 and so (b) 0 NI 4 Â 10À7 T Á m=A3001:2 A 1:13 mT L 0:40 m

B kM B0 6001:13 Â 10À3 T 0:68 T ÈM Bc A BA 0:68 T8:0 Â 10À4 m2 54 Wb

Because the ®eld lines are perpendicular to the cross-section of the solenoid,

32.2

The ¯ux through a certain toroid changes from 0.65 mWb to 0.91 mWb when the air core is replaced by another material. What are the relative permeability and the permeability of the material?
The air core is essentially the same as a vacuum core. Since kM B=B0 and ÈM Bc A, kM 0:91 mWb 1:40 0:65 mWb

CHAP. 32]

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

307

This is the relative permeability. The magnetic permeability is kM 0 1:404 Â 10À7 T Á m=A 5:6 Â 10À7 T Á m=A

32.3

The quarter-circle loop shown in Fig. 32-1 has an area of 15 cm2 . A magnetic ®eld with B 0:16 T exists in the x-direction. Find the ¯ux through the loop in each orientation shown.

Fig. 32-1

We know that È Bc A. a b c ÈM Bc A BA 0:16 T15 Â 10À4 m2 2:4 Â 10À4 Wb ÈM B cos 208A 2:4 Â 10À4 Wbcos 208 2:3 Â 10À4 Wb ÈM B sin 208A 2:4 Â 10À4 Wbsin 208 8:2 Â 10À5 Wb

32.4

A hemispherical surface of radius R is placed in a magnetic ®eld ~ as shown in Fig. 32-2. What is B the ¯ux through the hemispherical surface?

Fig. 32-2 The same number of ®eld lines pass through the curved surface as through the shaded cross-section. Therefore, Flux through curved surface ¯ux through ¯at surface Bc A where in this case Bc B and A R2 . Then ÈM BR2 :

308

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

[CHAP. 32

32.5

A 50-loop circular coil has a radius of 3.0 cm. It is oriented so that the ®eld lines of a magnetic ®eld are normal to the area of the coil. Suppose that the magnetic ®eld is varied so that B increases from 0.10 T to 0.35 T in a time of 2.0 milliseconds. Find the average induced emf in the coil.
ÁÈM Bfinal A À Binitial A 0:25 Tr2 0:25 T0:030 m2 7:1 Â 10À4 Wb 2 3 À4 ÁÈM 50 7:1 Â 10 Wb 18 V jej N Át 2 Â 10À3 s

32.6

The magnet in Fig. 32-3 induces an emf in the coils as the magnet moves toward the right or the left. Find the directions of the induced currents through the resistors when the magnet is moving (a) toward the right and (b) toward the left.

Fig. 32-3

(a)

Consider ®rst the coil on the left. As the magnet moves to the right, the ¯ux through the coil, which is directed generally to the left, decreases. To compensate for this, the induced current in the coil will ¯ow so as to produce a ¯ux toward the left through itself. Apply the right-hand rule to the loop on the left end. For it to produce ¯ux inside the coil directed toward the left, the current must ¯ow through the resistor from B to A. Now consider the coil on the right. As the magnet moves toward the right, the ¯ux inside the coil, also generally to the left, increases. The induced current in the coil will produce a ¯ux toward the right to cancel this increased ¯ux. Applying the right-hand rule to the loop on the right end, we ®nd that the loop generates ¯ux to the right inside itself if the current ¯ows from C to D through the resistor. In this case the ¯ux change caused by the magnet's motion is opposite to what it was in (a). Using the same type of reasoning, we ®nd that the induced currents ¯ow through the resistors from A to B and from D to C.

(b)

32.7

In Fig. 32-4(a) there is a magnetic ®eld in the x-direction, with B 0:20 T and a loop of wire in the yz-plane. The loop has an area of 5.0 cm2 and rotates about line CD as axis. Point A rotates toward positive x-values from the position shown. If the loop rotates through 508 from its indicated position, as shown in Fig. 32-4(b), in a time of 0.20 s, (a) what is the change in ¯ux through the coil, (b) what is the average induced emf in it, and (c) does the induced current ¯ow from A to C or C to A in the upper part of the coil?
a Initial flux Bc A BA 0:20 T5:0 Â 10À4 m2 1:0 Â 10À4 Wb Final flux B cos 508A 1:0 Â 10À4 Wbcos 508 0:64 Â 10À4 Wb ÁÈM 0:64 Â 10À4 Wb À 1:0 Â 10À4 Wb À0:36 Â 10À4 Wb À36 Wb

CHAP. 32]

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

309

Fig. 32-4 2 3 À4 ÁÈM 1 0:36 Â 10 Wb 1:8 Â 10À4 V 0:18 mV jej N 0:20 s Át The ¯ux through the loop from left to right decreased. The induced current will tend to set up ¯ux from left to right through the loop. By the right-hand rule, the current ¯ows from A to C. Alternatively, a torque must be set up that tends to rotate the loop back into its original position. The appropriate right-hand rule from Chapter 30 again gives a current ¯ow from A to C.

b (c)

32.8

A coil of 50 loops is pulled in 0.020 s from between the poles of a magnet, where its area intercepts a ¯ux of 3:1 Â 10À4 Wb, to a place where the intercepted ¯ux is 0:10 Â 10À4 Wb. Determine the average emf induced in the coil.
À4 ÁÈM 50 3:1 À 0:10 Â 10 Wb 0:75 V jej N Át 0:020 s

32.9

A copper bar 30 cm long is perpendicular to a ®eld of 0.80 Wb/m2 and moves at right angles to the ®eld with a speed of 0.50 m/s. Determine the emf induced in the bar. jej BLv 0:80 Wb=m2 0:30 m0:50 m=s 0:12 V

32.10 As shown in Fig. 32-5, a metal rod makes contact with a partial circuit and completes the circuit. The circuit is perpendicular to a magnetic ®eld with B 0:15 T. If the resistance is 3.0 , how large a force is needed to move the rod as indicated with a constant speed of 2.0 m/s? At what rate is energy dissipated in the resistor?
The induced emf in the rod causes a current to ¯ow counterclockwise in the circuit. Because of this current in the rod, it experiences a force to the left due to the magnetic ®eld. To pull the rod to the right with constant speed, this force must be balanced. Method 1 The emf induced in the rod is jej BLv 0:15 T0:50 m2:0 m=s 0:15 V and from which I jej 0:15 V 0:050 A R 3:0

FM ILB sin 908 0:050 A0:50 m0:15 T1 3:8 mN

310

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

[CHAP. 32

Fig. 32-5

Method 2 The emf induced in the loop is ÁÈM B ÁA BL Áx BLv jej N Át 1 Át Át

as before. Now proceed as in Method 1. To ®nd the power loss in the resistor, we can use P I 2 R 0:050 A2 3:0 7:5 mW Alternatively; P Fv 3:75 Â 10À3 N2:0 m=s 7:5 mW

32.11 The metal bar of length L, mass m, and resistance R shown in Fig. 32-6(a) slides without friction on a rectangular circuit composed of resistanceless wire on an inclined plane. There is a vertical magnetic ®eld ~. Find the terminal velocity of the bar (that is, the constant velocity it attains). B

Fig. 32-6

Gravity pulls the bar down the incline as shown in Fig. 32-6(b). Induced current ¯owing in the bar interacts with the ®eld so as to retard this motion.

CHAP. 32]

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

311

Because of the motion of the bar in the magnetic ®eld, an emf is induced in the bar: e Blvc BLv cos This causes a current I emf R BLv cos R

in the loop. A wire carrying a current in a magnetic ®eld experiences a force that is perpendicular to the plane de®ned by the wire and the magnetic ®eld lines. The bar thus experiences a horizontal force ~h (perpendicular F to the plane of ~ and the bar) given by B 2 3 B2 L2 v Fh BIL cos R and shown in Fig. 32-6(c). However, we want the force component along the plane, which is 2 3 B2 L2 v cos2 Fup plane Fh cos R When the bar reaches its terminal velocity, this force equals the gravitational force down the plane. Therefore, 2 3 B2 L2 v cos2 mg sin R from which the terminal velocity is v Rmg B2 L2 sin cos2

Can you show that this answer is reasonable in the limiting cases 0, B 0, and 908, and for R very large or very small?

32.12 The rod shown in Fig. 32-7 rotates about point C as pivot with the constant frequency 5.0 rev/s. Find the potential dierence between its two ends, which are 80 cm apart, due to the magnetic ®eld B 0:30 T directed into the page.

Fig. 32-7

Consider a ®ctitious loop CADC. As time goes on, its area and the ¯ux through it will increase. The induced emf in this loop will equal the potential dierence we seek.

312

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

[CHAP. 32

ÁÈM 1 B ÁA jej N Át Át It takes one-®fth second for the area to change from zero to that of a full circle, r2 . Therefore, jej B ÁA r2 0:80 m2 0:30 T 3:0 V B 0:20 s 0:20 s Át

32.13 A 5.0 coil, of 100 turns and diameter 6.0 cm, is placed between the poles of a magnet so that the ¯ux is maximum through its area. When the coil is suddenly removed from the ®eld of the magnet, a charge of 1:0 Â 10À4 C ¯ows through a 595- galvanometer connected to the coil. Compute B between the poles of the magnet.
As the coil is removed, the ¯ux changes from BA, where A is the coil area, to zero. Therefore, ÁÈM BA jej N Át N Át We are told that Áq 1:0 Â 10À4 C. But, by Ohm's Law, Áq R Át where R 600 , the total resistance. If we now equate these two expressions for jej and solve for B, we ®nd jej IR B R Áq 600 1:0 Â 10À4 C 0:21 T NA 100 Â 9:0 Â 10À4 m2

Supplementary Problems
32.14 A ¯ux of 9:0 Â 10À4 Wb is produced in the iron core of a solenoid. When the core is removed, a ¯ux (in air) of 5:0 Â 10À7 Wb is produced in the same solenoid by the same current. What is the relative permeability of the iron? Ans. 1:8 Â 103 In Fig. 32-8 there is a x-directed magnetic ®eld of 0.2 T. Find the magnetic ¯ux through each face of the box shown. Ans. Zero through bottom and rear and front sides; through top, 1 mWb; through left side, 2 mWb; through right side, 0.8 mWb.

32.15

Fig. 32-8

CHAP. 32]

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

313

32.16

A solenoid 60 cm long has 5000 turns on it and is wound on an iron rod of 0.75 cm radius. Find the ¯ux through the solenoid when the current in it is 3.0 A. The relative permeability of the iron is 300. Ans. 1.7 m/Wb A room has its walls aligned accurately with respect to north, south, east, and west. The north wall has an area of 15 m2 , the east wall has an area of 12 m2 , and the ¯oor's area is 35 m2 . At the site the Earth's magnetic ®eld has a value of 0.60 G and is directed 508 below the horizontal and 7:08 east of north. Find the ¯uxes through the north wall, the east wall, and the ¯oor. Ans. 0.57 mWb, 56 Wb, 1.6 mWb The ¯ux through the solenoid of Problem 32.16 is reduced to a value of 1.0 mWb in a time of 0.050 s. Find the induced emf in the solenoid. Ans. 67 V A ¯at coil with radius 8.0 mm has 50 loops of wire. It is placed in a magnetic ®eld B 0:30 T in such a way that the maximum ¯ux goes through it. Later, it is rotated in 0.020 s to a position such that no ¯ux goes through it. Find the average emf induced between the terminals of the coil. Ans. 0.15 V The square coil shown in Fig. 32-9 is 20 cm on a side and has 15 loops of wire. It is moving to the right at 3.0 m/s. Find the induced emf (magnitude and direction) in it (a) at the instant shown and (b) when the entire coil is in the ®eld region. The magnetic ®eld is 0.40 T into the page. Ans. (a) 3.6 V counterclockwise; (b) zero

32.17

32.18

32.19

32.20

Fig. 32-9

32.21

The magnet in Fig. 32-10 rotates as shown on a pivot through its center. At the instant shown, in what direction is the induced current ¯owing (a) in resistor AB? (b) in resistor CD? Ans. (a) B to A; (b) C to D

Fig. 32-10

314

INDUCED EMF; MAGNETIC FLUX

[CHAP. 32

32.22

A train is moving directly south with a speed of 10 m/s. If the downward vertical component of the Earth's magnetic ®eld is 0.54 G, compute the magnitude and direction of the emf induced in a rail car axle 1.2 m long. Ans. 0.65 mV from west to east A copper disk of 10 cm radius is rotating at 20 rev/s about its axis and with its plane perpendicular to a uniform ®eld with B 0:60 T. What is the potential dierence between the center and rim of the disk? (Hint: There is some similarity with Problem 32.12.) Ans. 0.38 V How much charge will ¯ow through a 200- galvanometer connected to a 400- circular coil of 1000 turns wound on a wooden stick 2.0 cm in diameter, if a magnetic ®eld B 0:0113 T parallel to the axis of the stick is decreased suddenly to zero? Ans. 5:9 C In Fig. 32-6, described in Problem 32.11, what is the acceleration of the rod when its speed down the incline is v? Ans. g sin À B2 L2 v=Rm cos2

32.23

32.24

32.25

Chapter 33
Electric Generators and Motors
ELECTRIC GENERATORS are machines that convert mechanical energy into electrical energy. A simple generator that produces an ac voltage is shown in Fig. 33-1(a). An external energy source (such as a diesel motor or a steam turbine) turns the armature coil in a magnetic ®eld ~. B The wires of the coil cut the ®eld lines, and an emf e 2NABf cos 2ft is induced between the terminals of the coil. In this relation, N is the number of loops (each of area A) on the coil, and f is the frequency of its rotation. Figure 33-1(b) shows the emf in graphical form. As current is drawn from the generator, the wires of its coil experience a retarding force because of the interaction between current and ®eld. Thus the work required to rotate the coil is the source of the electrical energy supplied by the generator. For any generator, (input mechanical energy) (output electrical energy) (friction and heat losses) Usually the losses are only a very small fraction of the input energy.

Fig. 33-1

ELECTRIC MOTORS convert electrical energy into mechanical energy. A simple dc motor (i.e., one that runs on a constant voltage) is shown in Fig. 33-2. The current through the armature coil interacts with the magnetic ®eld to cause a torque NIAB sin on the coil (see Chapter 30), which rotates the coil and shaft. Here, is the angle between the ®eld lines and the perpendicular to the plane of the coil. The split-ring commutator reverses I each time sin changes sign, thereby ensuring that the torque always rotates the coil in the same sense. For such a motor, Average torque (constant) jNIABj 315
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

316

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS

[CHAP. 33

Fig. 33-2

Because the rotating armature coil of the motor acts as a generator, a back (or counter) emf is induced in the coil. The back emf opposes the voltage source that drives the motor. Hence, the net potential dierence that causes current through the armature is Net p.d. across armature (line voltage) À (back emf) (line voltage) À (back emf) Armature current armature resistance The mechanical power P developed within the armature of a motor is P (armature current)(back emf) The useful mechanical power delivered by the motor is slightly less, due to friction, windage, and iron losses.

and

Solved Problems
ELECTRIC GENERATORS 33.1 An ac generator produces an output voltage of e 170 sin 377t volts, where t is in seconds. What is the frequency of the ac voltage?
A sine curve plotted as a function of time is no dierent from a cosine curve, except for the location of t 0. Since e 2NABf cos 2ft, we have 377t 2ft, from which we ®nd that the frequency f 60 Hz.

33.2

How fast must a 1000-loop coil (each with 20 cm2 area) turn in the Earth's magnetic ®eld of 0.70 G to generate a voltage that has a maximum value (i.e., an amplitude) of 0.50 V?
We assume the coil's axis to be oriented in the ®eld so as to give maximum ¯ux change when rotated. Then B 7:0 Â 10À5 T in the expression e 2NABf cos 2ft Because cos 2ft has a maximum value of unity, the amplitude of the voltage is 2NABf . Therefore, f 0:50 V 0:50 V 0:57 kHz 2NAB 2100020 Â 10À4 m2 7:0 Â 10À5 T

CHAP. 33]

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS

317

33.3

When turning at 1500 rev/min, a certain generator produces 100.0 V. What must be its angular speed if it is to produce 120.0 V?
Because the amplitude of the emf is proportional to the angular speed (or frequency) f , we have, for two speeds f1 and f2 , e1 f1 e 120:0 V or f2 f1 2 1500 rev=min 1800 rev=min e2 f2 e1 100:0 V

33.4

A certain generator has armature resistance 0:080 and develops an induced emf of 120 V when driven at its rated speed. What is its terminal voltage when 50.0 A is being drawn from it?
The generator acts like a battery with emf 120 V and internal resistance r 0:080 . As with a battery, Terminal p.d. emf À Ir 120 V À 50:0 A0:080 116 V

33.5

Some generators, called shunt generators, use electromagnets in place of permanent magnets, with the ®eld coils for the electromagnets activated by the induced voltage. The magnet coil is in parallel with the armature coil (it shunts the armature). As shown in Fig. 33-3, a certain shunt generator has armature resistance 0.060 and shunt resistance 100 . What power is developed in the armature when it delivers 40 kW at 250 V to an external circuit?

Fig. 33-3 From P VI, Current to external circuit Ix P 40 000 W 160 A V 250 V Vf 250 V Field current If 2:5 A 100 rf

Armature current Ia Ix If 162:5 A Total induced emf jej 250 V Ia ra drop in armature 250 V 162:5 A0:06 260 V Armature power Ia jej 162:5 A260 V 42 kW Alternative Method
2 Power loss in armature Ia ra 162:5 A2 0:06 1:6 kW

Power loss in field If2 rf 2:5 A2 100 0:6 kW Power developed (power delivered)+(power loss in armature)+(power loss in field) 40 kW 1:6 kW 0:6 kW 42 kW

318

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS

[CHAP. 33

ELECTRIC MOTORS 33.6 The resistance of the armature in the motor shown in Fig. 33-2 is 2.30 . It draws a current of 1.60 A when operating on 120 V. What is its back emf under these circumstances?
The motor acts like a back emf in series with an IR drop through its internal resistance. Therefore, or Line voltage back emf Ir Back emf 120 V À 1:60 A2:30 116 V

33.7

A 0.250-hp motor (like that in Fig. 33-2) has a resistance of 0.500 . (a) How much current does it draw on 110 V when its output is 0.250 hp? (b) What is its back emf?
(a) Assume the motor to be 100 percent ecient so that the input power VI equals its output power (0.250 hp). Then 110 VI 0:250 hp746 W=hp b or I 1:695 A

Back emf (line voltage) À Ir 110 V À 1:695 A0:500 109 V

33.8

In a shunt motor, the permanent magnet is replaced by an electromagnet activated by a ®eld coil that shunts the armature. The shunt motor shown in Fig. 33-4 has armature resistance 0.050 and is connected to 120 V mains. (a) What is the armature current at the starting instant, i.e., before the armature develops any back emf? (b) What starting rheostat resistance R, in series with the armature, will limit the starting current to 60 A? (c) With no starting resistance, what back emf is generated when the armature current is 20 A? (d ) If this machine were running as a generator, what would be the total induced emf developed by the armature when the armature is delivering 20 A at 120 V to the shunt ®eld and external circuit?

Fig. 33-4

Fig. 33-5

a

Armature current

impressed voltage 120 V 2:4 kA armature resistance 0:050 or 60 A 120 V 0:050 R

b

Armature current from which R 2:0 :

impressed voltage 0:050 R

c

Back emf (impressed voltage) À (voltage drop in armature resistance) 120 V À 20 A0:050 119 V 0:12 kV Induced emf (terminal voltage) (voltage drop in armature resistance) 120 V 20 A0:050 121 V 0:12 kV

d

CHAP. 33]

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS

319

33.9

The shunt motor shown in Fig. 33-5 has armature resistance of 0.25 and ®eld resistance of 150 . It is connected across 120-V mains and is generating a back emf of 115 V. Compute: (a) the armature current Ia , the ®eld current If , and the total current It taken by the motor; (b) the total power taken by the motor; (c) the power lost in heat in the armature and ®eld circuits; (d ) the electrical eciency of this machine (when only heat losses in the armature and ®eld are considered).
a (impressed voltage) À (back emf) 120 À 115 20 A armature resistance 0:25 impressed voltage 120 V 0:80 A If field resistance 150 It Ia If 20:80 A 21 A Ia Power input 120 V20:80 A 2:5 kW
2 Ia ra loss in armature 20 A2 0:25 0:10 kW

b c d

If2 rf loss in field 0:80 A2 150 96 W Power output (power input) À (power losses) 2496 À 100 96 2:3 kW Alternatively, Power output (armature current)(back emf) 20 A115 V 2:3 kW power output 2300 W Efficiency 0:921 927 power input 2496 W

Then

33.10 A motor has a back emf of 110 V and an armature current of 90 A when running at 1500 rpm. Determine the power and the torque developed within the armature.
Power (armature current)(back emf)=(90 A)(110 V)=9.9 kW From Chapter 10, power !: Torque power 9900 W 63 N Á m angular speed 2 Â 25 rad=s

33.11 A motor armature develops a torque of 100 N Á m when it draws 40 A from the line. Determine the torque developed if the armature current is increased to 70 A and the magnetic ®eld strength is reduced to 80 percent of its initial value.
The torque developed by the armature of a given motor is proportional to the armature current and to the ®eld strength (see Chapter 30): 70 0:80 0:14 kN Á m Torque 100 N Á m 40

Supplementary Problems
ELECTRIC GENERATORS
33.12 Determine the separate eects on the induced emf of a generator if (a) the ¯ux per pole is doubled, and (b) the speed of the armature is doubled. Ans. (a) doubled; (b) doubled

320

ELECTRIC GENERATORS AND MOTORS

[CHAP. 33

33.13

The emf induced in the armature of a shunt generator is 596 V. The armature resistance is 0.100 . (a) Compute the terminal voltage when the armature current is 460 A. (b) The ®eld resistance is 110 . Determine the ®eld current, and the current and power delivered to the external circuit. Ans. (a) 550 V; (b) 5 A, 455 A, 250 kW A dynamo (generator) delivers 30.0 A at 120 V to an external circuit when operating at 1200 rpm. What torque is required to drive the generator at this speed if the total power losses are 400 W? Ans. 31.8 N Á m A 75.0-kW, 230-V shunt generator has a generated emf of 243.5 V. If the ®eld current is 12.5 A at rated output, what is the armature resistance? Ans. 0.039 9 A 120-V generator is run by a windmill that has blades 2.0 m long. The wind, moving at 12 m/s, is slowed to 7.0 m/s after passing the windmill. The density of air is 1.29 kg/m3 . If the system has no losses, what is the largest current the generator can produce? (Hint: How much energy does the wind lose per second?) Ans. 77 A

33.14

33.15 33.16

ELECTRIC MOTORS
33.17 33.18 A generator has an armature with 500 loops, which cut a ¯ux of 8.00 mWb during each rotation. Compute the back emf it develops when run as a motor at 1500 rpm. Ans. 100 V The active length of each armature conductor of a motor is 30 cm, and the conductors are in a ®eld of 0.40 Wb/m2 . A current of 15 A ¯ows in each conductor. Determine the force acting on each conductor. Ans. 1.8 N A shunt motor with armature resistance 0.080 is connected to 120 V mains. With 50 A in the armature, what are the back emf and the mechanical power developed within the armature? Ans. 0.12 kV, 5.8 kW A shunt motor is connected to a 110-V line. When the armature generates a back emf of 104 V, the armature current is 15 A. Compute the armature resistance. Ans. 0.40 A shunt dynamo has an armature resistance of 0.120 . (a) If it is connected across 220-V mains and is running as a motor, what is the induced (back) emf when the armature current is 50.0 A? (b) If this machine is running as a generator, what is the induced emf when the armature is delivering 50.0 A at 220 V to the shunt ®eld and external circuit? Ans. (a) 214 V; (b) 226 V A shunt motor has a speed of 900 rpm when it is connected to 120-V mains and delivering 12 hp. The total losses are 1048 W. Compute the power input, the line current, and the motor torque. Ans. 10 kW, 83 A, 93 N Á m A shunt motor has armature resistance 0.20 and ®eld resistance 150 , and draws 30 A when connected to a 120-V supply line. Determine the ®eld current, the armature current, the back emf, the mechanical power developed within the armature, and the electrical eciency of the machine. Ans. 0.80 A, 29 A, 0.11 kV, 3.3 kW, 93% A shunt motor develops 80 N Á m of torque when the ¯ux density in the air gap is 1.0 Wb/m2 and the armature current is 15 A. What is the torque when the ¯ux density is 1.3 Wb/m2 and the armature current is 18 A? Ans. 0.13 kN Á m A shunt motor has a ®eld resistance of 200 and an armature resistance of 0.50 and is connected to 120-V mains. The motor draws a current of 4.6 A when running at full speed. What current will be drawn by the motor if the speed is reduced to 90 percent of full speed by application of a load? Ans. 28 A

33.19

33.20 33.21

33.22

33.23

33.24

33.25

Chapter 34
Inductance; R-C and R-L Time Constants
SELF-INDUCTANCE: A coil can induce an emf in itself. If the current in a coil changes, the ¯ux through the coil due to the current also changes. As a result, the changing current in a coil induces an emf in that same coil. Because an induced emf e is proportional to ÁÈM =Át and because ÁÈM is proportional to Ái, where i is the current that causes the ¯ux, e Àconstant Ái Át

Here i is the current through the same coil in which e is induced. (We shall denote a time-varying current by i instead of I.) The minus sign indicates that the self-induced emf e is a back emf and opposes the change in current. The proportionality constant depends upon the geometry of the coil. We represent it by L and call it the self-inductance of the coil. Then e ÀL Ái Át

For e in units of V, i in units of A, and t in units of s, L is in henries (H).

MUTUAL INDUCTANCE: When the ¯ux from one coil threads through another can be induced in either one by the other. The coil that contains the power source primary coil. The other coil, in which an emf is induced by the changing current in is called the secondary coil. The induced secondary emf es is proportional to the change of the primary current, Áip =Át: es M Áip Át

coil, an emf is called the the primary, time rate of

where M is a constant called the mutual inductance of the two-coil system.

ENERGY STORED IN AN INDUCTOR: Because of its self-induced back emf, work must be done to increase the current through an inductor from zero to I. The energy furnished to the coil in the process is stored in the coil and can be recovered as the coil's current is decreased once again to zero. If a current I is ¯owing in an inductor of self-inductance L, then the energy stored in the inductor is Stored energy 1 LI 2 2 For L in units of H and I in units of A, the energy is in J.

R-C TIME CONSTANT: Consider the R-C circuit shown in Fig. 34-1(a). The capacitor is initially uncharged. If the switch is now closed, the current i in the circuit and the charge q on the capacitor vary as shown in Fig. 34-1(b). If we call the p.d. across the capacitor vc , writing the loop rule for this circuit gives ÀiR À vc e 0 321
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

or

i

e À vc R

322

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

[CHAP. 34

Fig. 34-1

At the ®rst instant after the switch is closed, vc 0 and i e=R. As time goes on, vc increases and i decreases. The time, in seconds, taken for the current to drop to 1/2.718 or 0.368 of its initial value is RC, which is called the time constant of the R-C circuit. Also shown in Fig. 34-1(b) is the variation of q, the charge on the capacitor, with time. At t RC, q has attained 0.632 of its ®nal value. When a charged capacitor C with initial charge q0 is discharged through a resistor R, its discharge current follows the same curve as for charging. The charge q on the capacitor follows a curve similar to that for the discharge current. At time RC, i 0:368i0 and q 0:368q0 during discharge. R-L TIME CONSTANT: Consider the circuit in Fig. 34-2(a). The symbol represents a coil of self-inductance L henries. When the switch in the circuit is ®rst closed, the current in the circuit rises as shown in Fig. 34-2(b). The current does not jump to its ®nal value because the changing ¯ux through the coil induces a back emf in the coil, which opposes the rising current. After L/R seconds, the current has risen to 0.632 of its ®nal value iI . This time, t L=R, is called the time constant of the R-L circuit. After a long time, the current is changing so slowly that the back emf in the inductor, LÁi=Át, is negligible. Then i iI e=R:

Fig. 34-2

CHAP. 34]

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

323

EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS are used as follows to describe the curves of Figs 34-1 and 34-2: i i0 eÀt=RC q qI1 À e q qI e
Àt=RC

capacitor charging and discharging capacitor charging capacitor discharging inductor current buildup

Àt=RC

i iI1 À eÀt=L=R

where e 2:718 is the base of the natural logarithms. When t is equal to the time constant, the relations for a capacitor give i 0:368i0 and q 0:632qI for charging, and q 0:368qI for discharging. The equation for current in an inductor gives i 0:632iI when t equals the time constant. The equation for i in the capacitor circuit (as well as for q in the capacitor discharge case) has the following property: After n time constants have passed, i i0 0:368n and q qI 0:368n For example, after four time constants have passed, i i0 0:3684 0:018 3i0

Solved Problems
34.1 A steady current of 2 A in a coil of 400 turns causes a ¯ux of 10À4 Wb to link (pass through) the loops of the coil. Compute (a) the average back emf induced in the coil if the current is stopped in 0.08 s, (b) the inductance of the coil, and (c) the energy stored in the coil.
a b À4 ÁÈM 400 10 À 0 Wb 0:5 V jej N Át 0:08 s Ái eÁt 0:5 V0:08 s or L jej L Át Ái 2 À 0 A 0:02 H

c

Energy 1 LI 2 1 0:02 H2 A2 0:04 J 2 2

34.2

A long air-core solenoid has cross-sectional area A and N loops of wire on its length d. (a) Find its self-inductance. (b) What is its inductance if the core material has permeability ?
(a) We can write ÁÈM jej N Át Ái jej L Át

and

Equating these two expressions for jej gives

ÁÈM L N Ái

If the current changes from zero to I, then the ¯ux changes from zero to ÈM . Therefore, Ái I and ÁÈM ÈM in this case. The self-inductance, assumed constant for all cases, is then LN ÈM BA N I I

324

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

[CHAP. 34

But, for an air-core solenoid, B 0 nI 0 N=dI. Substitution gives L 0 N 2 A=d. (b) If the material of the core has permeability instead of 0 , then B, and therefore L, will be increased by the factor =0 . In that case, L N 2 A=d. An iron-core solenoid has a much higher self-inductance than an air-core solenoid has.

34.3

A solenoid 30 cm long is made by winding 2000 loops of wire on an iron rod whose crosssectional area is 1.5 cm2 . If the relative permeability of the iron is 600, what is the self-inductance of the solenoid? What average emf is induced in the solenoid as the current in it is decreased from 0.60 A to 0.10 A in a time of 0.030 s?
From Problem 34.2(b) with kM =0 , L and km 0 N 2 A 6004 Â 10À7 T Á m=A20002 1:5 Â 10À4 m2 1:51 H d 0:30 m Ái 0:50 A 25 V jej L 1:51 H Át 0:030 s

34.4

At a certain instant, a coil with a resistance of 0.40 and a self-inductance of 200 mH carries a current of 0.30 A that is increasing at the rate of 0.50 A/s. (a) What is the potential dierence across the coil at that instant? (b) Repeat if the current is decreasing at 0.50 A/s.
We can represent the coil by a resistance in series with an emf (the induced emf), as shown in Fig. 34.3. (a) Because the current is increasing, e will oppose the current and therefore have the polarity shown. We write the loop equation for the circuit: Vba À iR À e 0 Since Vba is the voltage across the coil, and since e LjÁi=Átj, we have Vcoil iR e 0:30 A0:40 0:200 H0:50 A=s 0:22 V (b) With i decreasing, the induced emf must be reversed in Fig. 34-3. This gives Vcoil iR À e 0:020 V.

Fig. 34-3

34.5

A coil of resistance 15 and inductance 0.60 H is connected to a steady 120-V power source. At what rate will the current in the coil rise (a) at the instant the coil is connected to the power source, and (b) at the instant the current reaches 80 percent of its maximum value?

CHAP. 34]

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

325

The eective driving voltage in the circuit is the 120 V power supply minus the induced back emf, LÁi=Át. This equals the p.d. in the resistance of the coil: Ái iR Át (This same equation can be obtained by writing the loop equation for the circuit of Fig. 34-2(a). In doing so, remember that the inductance acts as a back emf of value L Ái=Át: 120 V À L (a) At the ®rst instant, i is essentially zero. Then Ái 120 V 120 V 0:20 mA=s Át L 0:60 H (b) The current reaches a maximum value of (120 V)/R when the current ®nally stops changing (i.e., when Ái=Át 0). We are interested in the case when 120 V i 0:80 R Substitution of this value for i in the loop equation gives Ái 120 V 120 V À L 0:80 R Át R Ái 0:20120 V 0:20120 V from which 40 A=s Át L 0:60 H

34.6

When the current in a certain coil is changing at a rate of 3.0 A/s, it is found that an emf of 7.0 mV is induced in a nearby coil. What is the mutual inductance of the combination? es M Áip Át or M es Át 1:0 s 2:3 mH 7:0 Â 10À3 V Áip 3:0 A

34.7

Two coils are wound on the same iron rod so that the ¯ux generated by one passes through the other also. The primary coil has Np loops and, when a current of 2.0 A ¯ows through it, the ¯ux in it is 2:5 Â 10À4 Wb. Determine the mutual inductance of the two coils if the secondary coil has Ns loops.
ÁÈMs jes j Ns Át give and Áip jes j M Át

ÁÈMs 2:5 Â 10À4 À 0 Wb 1:3 Â 10À4 Ns H M Ns Ái Ns 2:0 À 0 A p

34.8

A 2000-loop solenoid is wound uniformly on a long rod with length d and cross-section A. The relative permeability of the iron is km . On top of this is wound a 50-loop coil which is used as a secondary. Find the mutual inductance of the system.
The ¯ux through the solenoid is ÈM BA kM 0 nIp A kM 0 Ip A 2000 d

This same ¯ux goes through the secondary. We have, then, ÁÈM Áip and jes j M jes j Ns Át Át

326

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

[CHAP. 34

from which

4 ÁÈM Ns ÈM À 0 50 kM 0 Ip A2000=d 10 Â 10 kM 0 A M Ns Ái Ip Ip À 0 d p

34.9

A certain series circuit consists of a 12-V battery, a switch, a 1.0-M resistor, and a 2.0-F capacitor, initially uncharged. If the switch is now closed, ®nd (a) the initial current in the circuit, (b) the time for the current to drop to 0.37 of its initial value, (c) the charge on the capacitor then, and (d ) the ®nal charge on the capacitor.
(a) The loop rule applied to the circuit of Fig. 34-1(a) at any instant gives 12 V À iR À vc 0 where vc is the p.d. across the capacitor. At the ®rst instant, q is essentially zero and so vc 0. Then 12 V À iR À 0 0 (b) or i 12 V 12 A 1:0 Â 106

The current drops to 0.37 of its initial value when t RC 1:0 Â 106 2:0 Â 10À6 F 2:0 s

(c)

At t 2:0 s the charge on the capacitor has increased to 0.63 of its ®nal value. (See (d ) below.) qfinal Cvc 2:0 Â 10À6 F12 V 24 C

(d ) The charge ceases to increase when i 0 and vc 12 V. Therefore,

34.10 A 5:0-F capacitor is charged to a potential dierence of 20 kV between plates. After being disconnected from the power source, it is connected across a 7.0-M resistor to discharge. What is the initial discharge current, and how long will it take for the capacitor voltage to decrease to 37 percent of the 20 kV?
The loop equation for the discharging capacitor is vc À iR 0 where vc is the p.d. across the capacitor. At the ®rst instant, vc 20 kV, so vc 20 Â 103 V 2:9 mA R 7:0 Â 106 The potential across the capacitor, as well as the charge on it, will decrease to 0.37 of its original value in one time constant. The required time is i RC 7:0 Â 106 5:0 Â 10À6 F 35 s

34.11 A coil has an inductance of 1.5 H and a resistance of 0.60 . If the coil is suddenly connected across a 12-V battery, ®nd the time required for the current to rise to 0.63 of its ®nal value. What will be the ®nal current through the coil?
The time required is the time constant of the circuit: L 1:5 H 2:5 s R 0:60 After a long time, the current will be steady and so no back emf will exist in the coil. Under those conditions, Time constant I e 12 V 20 A R 0:60

CHAP. 34]

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

327

34.12 A capacitor that has been charged to 2:0 Â 105 V is allowed to discharge through a resistor. What will be the voltage across the capacitor after ®ve time constants have elapsed?
We know (p. 323) that after n time constants, q qI0:368n . Because v is proportional to q (that is, v q=C), we may write vn5 2:0 Â 105 V0:3685 1:4 kV

34.13 A 2:0-F capacitor is charged through a 30-M resistor by a 45-V battery. Find (a) the charge on the capacitor and (b) the current through the resistor, both 83 s after the charging process starts.
The time constant of the circuit is RC 60 s. Also, qI V IC 45 V2:0 Â 10À6 F 9:0 Â 10À5 C a But Then substitution gives q 9:0 Â 10À5 C1 À 0:25 67 C 45 V eÀ1:383 0:38 A i i0 eÀt=RC 30 Â 106 q qI1 À eÀt=RC 9:0 Â 10À5 C1 À eÀ83=60 eÀ83=60 eÀ1:383 0:25

b

34.14 If, in Fig. 34-2, R 20 , L 0:30 H, and e 90 V, what will be the current in the circuit 0.050 s after the switch is closed?
The time constant for this circuit is L=R 0:015 s, and iI e=R 4:5 A. Then i iI 1 À eÀt=L=R 4:5 A1 À eÀ3:33 4:5 A1 À 0:0357 4:3 A

Supplementary Problems
34.15 An emf of 8.0 V is induced in a coil when the current in it changes at the rate of 32 A/s. Compute the inductance of the coil. Ans. 0.25 H A steady current of 2.5 A creates a ¯ux of 1:4 Â 10À4 Wb in a coil of 500 turns. What is the inductance of the coil? Ans. 28 mH The mutual inductance between the primary and secondary of a transformer is 0.30 H. Compute the induced emf in the secondary when the primary current changes at the rate of 4.0 A/s. Ans. 1.2 V A coil of inductance 0.20 H and 1.0- resistance is connected to a 90-V source. At what rate will the current in the coil grow (a) at the instant the coil is connected to the source, and (b) at the instant the current reaches two-thirds of its maximum value? Ans. (a) 0.45 kA/s; (b) 0.15 kA/s Two neighboring coils, A and B, have 300 and 600 turns, respectively. A current of 1.5 A in A causes 1:2 Â 10À4 Wb to pass through A and 0:90 Â 10À4 Wb to pass through B. Determine (a) the self-inductance of A, (b) the mutual inductance of A and B, and (c) the average induced emf in B when the current in A is interrupted in 0.20 s. Ans. (a) 24 mH; (b) 36 mH; (c) 0.27 V A coil of 0.48 H carries a current of 5 A. Compute the energy stored in it. Ans. 6J

34.16

34.17

34.18

34.19

34.20

328

INDUCTANCE; R-C AND R-L TIME CONSTANTS

[CHAP. 34

34.21

The iron core of a solenoid has a length of 40 cm and a cross-section of 5.0 cm2 , and is wound with 10 turns of wire per cm of length. Compute the inductance of the solenoid, assuming the relative permeability of the iron to be constant at 500. Ans. 0.13 H Show that (a) 1 N/A2 1 TÁ m=A 1 Wb=A Á m 1 H=m, and (b) 1 C2 =N Á m2 1 F=m: A series circuit consisting of an uncharged 2:0-F capacitor and a 10-M resistor is connected across a 100V power source. What are the current in the circuit and the charge on the capacitor (a) after one time constant, and (b) when the capacitor has acquired 90 percent of its ®nal charge? Ans. (a) 3:7 A, 0.13 mC; (b) 1:0 A, 0.18 mC A charged capacitor is connected across a 10-k resistor and allowed to discharge. The potential dierence across the capacitor drops to 0.37 of its original value after a time of 7.0 s. What is the capacitance of the capacitor? Ans. 0.70 mF When a long iron-core solenoid is connected across a 6-V battery, the current rises to 0.63 of its maximum value after a time of 0.75 s. The experiment is then repeated with the iron core removed. Now the time required to reach 0.63 of the maximum is 0.0025 s. Calculate (a) the relative permeability of the iron and (b) L for the air-core solenoid if the maximum current is 0.5 A. Ans. (a) 0:3 Â 103 ; (b) 0.03 H What fraction of the initial current still ¯ows in the circuit of Fig. 34-1 seven time constants after the switch has been closed? Ans. 0.000 91 By what fraction does the current in Fig. 34-2 dier from iI three time constants after the switch is ®rst closed? Ans. iI À i=iI 0:050 In Fig. 34-2, R 5:0 , L 0:40 H, and e 20 V. Find the current in the circuit 0.20 s after the switch is ®rst closed. Ans. 3.7 A The capacitor in Fig. 34-1 is initially uncharged when the switch is closed. Find the current in the circuit and the charge on the capacitor ®ve seconds later. Use R 7:00 M, C 0:300 F, and e 12:0 V. Ans. 159 nA, 3:27 C

34.22 34.23

34.24

34.25

34.26 34.27 34.28 34.29

Chapter 35
Alternating Current
THE EMF GENERATED BY A ROTATING COIL in a magnetic ®eld has a graph similar to the one shown in Fig. 35-1. It is called an ac voltage because there is a reversal of polarity (i.e., the voltage changes sign); ac voltages need not be sinusoidal. If the coil rotates with a frequency of f revolutions per second, then the emf has a frequency of f in hertz (cycles per second). The instantaneous voltage v that is generated has the form v v0 sin !t v0 sin 2ft where v0 is the amplitude (maximum value) of the voltage in volts, ! 2f is the angular velocity in rad/s, and f is the frequency in hertz. The frequency f of the voltage is related to its period T by T 1 f

where T is in seconds. Rotating coils are not the only source of ac voltages; electronic devices for generating ac voltages are very common. Alternating voltages produce alternating currents. An alternating current produced by a typical generator has a graph much like that for the voltage shown in Fig. 35-1. Its instantaneous value is i, and its amplitude is i0 . Often the current and voltage do not reach a maximum at the same time, even though they both have the same frequency.

Fig. 35-1

METERS for use in ac circuits read the eective, or root mean square (rms), values of the current and voltage. These values are always positive and are related to the amplitudes of the instantaneous sinusoidal values through v V Vrms p0 0:707v0 2 i0 I Irms p 0:707i0 2 It is customary to represent meter readings by capital letters V; I, while instantaneous values are represented by small letters v; i. 329
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

330

ALTERNATING CURRENT

[CHAP. 35

THE THERMAL ENERGY GENERATED OR POWER LOST by an rms current I in a resistor R is given by I 2 R:

FORMS OF OHM'S LAW: Suppose that a sinusoidal current of frequency f with rms value I ¯ows through a pure resistor R, or a pure inductor L, or a pure capacitor C. Then an ac voltmeter placed across the element in question will read an rms voltage V as follows: Pure resistorX Pure inductorX Pure capacitorX V IR V IXL V IXC

where XL 2fL is called the inductive reactance. Its unit is ohms when L is in henries and f is in hertz. where XC 1=2fC is called the capacitive reactance. Its unit is ohms when C is in farads.

PHASE: When an ac voltage is applied to a pure resistance, the voltage across the resistance and the current through it attain their maximum values at the same instant and their zero values at the same instant; the voltage and current are said to be in-phase. When an ac voltage is applied to a pure inductance, the voltage across the inductance reaches its maximum value one-quarter cycle ahead of the current, i.e., when the current is zero. The back emf of the inductance causes the current through the inductance to lag behind the voltage by one-quarter cycle (or 908), and the two are 908 out-of-phase. When an ac voltage is applied to a pure capacitor, the voltage across it lags 908 behind the current ¯owing through it. Current must ¯ow before the voltage across (and charge on) the capacitor can build up. In more complicated situations involving combinations of R, L, and C, the voltage and current are usually (but not always) out-of-phase. The angle by which the voltage lags or leads the current is called the phase angle.

THE IMPEDANCE Z of a series circuit containing resistance, inductance, and capacitance is given by q Z R2 XL À XC 2 with Z in ohms. If a voltage V is applied to such a series circuit, then a form of Ohm's Law relates V to the current I through it: V IZ The phase angle between V and I is given by tan XL À XC R or cos R Z

PHASORS: A phasor is a quantity that behaves, in many regards, like a vector. Phasors are used to describe series R-L-C circuits because the above expression for the impedance can be associated with the Pythagorean theorem for a right triangle. As shown in Fig. 35-2(a), Z is the hypotenuse of the right triangle, while R and XL À XC are its two legs. The angle labeled is the phase angle between the current and the voltage.

CHAP. 35]

ALTERNATING CURRENT

331

Fig. 35-2

A similar relation applies to the voltages across the elements in the series circuit. As shown in Fig. 35-2(b), it is
2 V 2 VR VL À VC 2

Because of the phase dierences a measurement of the voltage across a series circuit is not equal to the algebraic sum of the individual voltage readings across its elements. Instead, the above relation must be used.

RESONANCE occurs in a series R-L-C circuit when XL XC . Under this condition Z R is minimum, so that I is maximum for a given value of V. Equating XL to XC , we ®nd for the resonant (or natural) frequency of the circuit f0 1 p 2 LC

POWER LOSS: Suppose that an ac voltage V is impressed across an impedance of any type. It gives rise to a current I through the impedance, and the phase angle between V and I is . The power loss in the impedance is given by Power loss VI cos The quantity cos is called the power factor. It is unity for a pure resistor; but it is zero for a pure inductor or capacitor (no power loss occurs in a pure inductor or capacitor).

A TRANSFORMER is a device to raise or lower the voltage in an ac circuit. It consists of a primary and a secondary coil wound on the same iron core. An alternating current in one coil creates a continuously changing magnetic ¯ux through the core. This change of ¯ux induces an alternating emf in the other coil. The eciency of a transformer is usually very high. Thus, we may usually neglect losses and write Power in primary power in secondary V1 I1 V2 I2 The voltage ratio is the ratio of the numbers of turns on the two coils; the current ratio is the inverse ratio of the numbers of turns: V1 N1 V2 N2 and I1 N 2 I2 N 1

332

ALTERNATING CURRENT

[CHAP. 35

Solved Problems
35.1 A sinusoidal, 60.0-Hz, ac voltage is read to be 120 V by an ordinary voltmeter. (a) What is the maximum value the voltage takes on during a cycle? (b) What is the equation for the voltage?
a b where t is in s. v V p0 2 or v0 p p 2V 2120 V 170 V

v v0 sin 2ft 170 V sin 120t

35.2

A voltage v 60:0 V sin 120t is applied across a 20.0- resistor. What will an ac ammeter in series with the resistor read?
The rms voltage across the resistor is V 0:707v0 0:70760:0 V 42:4 V V 42:4 V 2:12 A I R 20:0

Then

35.3

A 120-V ac voltage source is connected across a 2:0-F capacitor. Find the current to the capacitor if the frequency of the source is (a) 60 Hz and (b) 60 kHz. (c) What is the power loss in the capacitor?
a Then (b) c XC 1 1 1:33 k 2fC 260 sÀ1 2:0 Â 10À6 F V 120 V 0:090 A I XC 1330

Now XC 1:33 , so I 90 A. Notice that the impedance eect of a capacitor varies inversely with the frequency. Power loss VI cos VI cos 908 0

35.4

A 120-V ac voltage source is connected across a pure 0.700-H inductor. Find the current through the inductor if the frequency of the source is (a) 60.0 Hz and (b) 60.0 kHz. (c) What is the power loss in the inductor?
a Then (b) c XL 2fL 260:0 sÀ1 0:700 H 264 V 120 V 0:455 A I XL 264

Now XL 264 Â 103 , so I 0:455 Â 10À3 A. Notice that the impedance eect of an inductor varies directly with the frequency. Power loss VI cos VI cos 908 0

35.5

A coil having inductance 0.14 H and resistance of 12 is connected across a 110-V, 25-Hz line. Compute (a) the current in the coil, (b) the phase angle between the current and the supply voltage, (c) the power factor, and (d ) the power loss in the coil.

CHAP. 35]

ALTERNATING CURRENT

333

a and so b

XL 2fL 2250:14 22:0 q q Z R2 XL À XC 2 122 22 À 02 25:1 I V 110 V 4:4 A Z 25:1 XL À XC 22 À 0 1:83 R 12 or 61:38

tan

The voltage leads the current by 618: c d Power factor cos cos 61:38 0:48 Power loss VI cos 110 V4:4 A0:48 0:23 kW Or, since power loss occurs only because of the resistance of the coil, Power loss I 2 R 4:4 A2 12 0:23 kW

35.6

A capacitor is in series with a resistance of 30 and is connected to a 220-V ac line. The reactance of the capacitor is 40 . Determine (a) the current in the circuit, (b) the phase angle between the current and the supply voltage, and (c) the power loss in the circuit.
a so b tan Z q q R2 XL À XC 2 302 0 À 402 50 I V 220 V 4:4 A Z 50 or À538

XL À XC 0 À 40 À1:33 30 R

The minus sign tells us that the voltage lags the current by 538. The angle in Fig. 35-2 would lie below the horizontal axis. (c) Method 1 Power loss VI cos 2204:4 cos À538 2204:4 cos 538 0:58 kW Method 2 Because the power loss occurs only in the resistor, and not in the pure capacitor, Power loss I 2 R 4:4 A2 30 0:58 kW

35.7

A series circuit consisting of a 100- noninductive resistor, a coil with a 0.10-H inductance and negligible resistance, and a 20-F capacitor is connected across a 110-V, 60-Hz power source. Find (a) the current, (b) the power loss, (c) the phase angle between the current and the source voltage, and (d ) the voltmeter readings across the three elements.
(a) For the entire circuit, Z q R2 XL À XC 2 , with R 100 XL 2fL 260 sÀ1 0:10 H 37:7 1 1 132:7 XC 2fC 260 sÀ1 20 Â 10À6 F from which Z q 1002 38 À 1332 138 V 110 V 0:79 A Z 138

and

I

334

ALTERNATING CURRENT

[CHAP. 35

(b)

The power loss all occurs in the resistor, so Power loss I 2 R 0:79 A2 100 63 W

c

tan

XL À XC À95 À0:95 R 100

or

À448

d

The voltage lags the current. VR IR 0:79 A100 79 V VC IXC 0:79 A132:7 0:11 kV VL IXL 0:79 A37:7 30 V Notice that VC VL VR does not equal the source voltage. From Fig. 35-2(b), the correct relationship is V q q 2 VR VL À VC 2 792 À752 109 V

which checks within the limits of rounding-o errors.

35.8

A 5.00- resistance is in a series circuit with a 0.200-H pure inductance and a 40.0-nF pure capacitance. The combination is placed across a 30.0-V, 1780-Hz power supply. Find (a) the current in the circuit, (b) the phase angle between source voltage and current, (c) the power loss in the circuit, and (d ) the voltmeter reading across each element of the circuit.
a XL 2fL 21780 sÀ1 0:200 H 2:24 k 1 1 2:24 k XC 2fC 21780 sÀ1 4:00 Â 10À8 F q Z R2 XL À XC 2 R 5:00 I V 30:0 V 6:00 A Z 5:00 tan XL À XC 0 R or 08

and Then

b c or d

Power loss VI cos 30:0 V6:00 A1 180 W Power loss I 2 R 6:00 A2 5:00 180 W VR IR 6:00 A5:00 30:00 V VC IXC 6:00 A2240 13:4 kV VL IXL 6:00 A2240 13:4 kV This circuit is in resonance because XC XL . Notice how very large the voltages across the inductor and capacitor become, even though the source voltage is low.

35.9

As shown in Fig. 35-3, a series circuit connected across a 200-V, 60-Hz line consists of a capacitor of capacitive reactance 30 , a noninductive resistor of 44 , and a coil of inductive reactance 90 and resistance 36 . Determine (a) the current in the circuit, (b) the potential dierence across each element, (c) the power factor of the circuit, and (d ) the power absorbed by the circuit.

CHAP. 35]

ALTERNATING CURRENT

335

Fig. 35-3 q q R1 R2 2 XL À XC 2 44 362 90 À 302 0:10 k V 200 V 2:0 A Z 100 p.d. across capacitor IXC 2:0 A30 60 V p.d. across resistor IR1 2:0 A44 88 V q q 2 Impedance of coil R2 XL 362 902 97 2 p.d. across coil 2:0 A97 0:19 kV c d or R 80 0:80 Z 100 Power used VI cos 200 V2 A0:80 0:32 kW Power factor cos Power used I 2 R 2 A2 80 0:32 kW

a so b

Z I

35.10 Calculate the resonant frequency of a circuit of negligible resistance containing an inductance of 40.0 mH and a capacitance of 600 pF. f0 1 1 p p 32:5 kHz 2 LC 2 40:0 Â 10À3 H600 Â 10À12 F

35.11 A step-up transformer is used on a 120-V line to furnish 1800 V. The primary has 100 turns. How many turns are on the secondary?
V1 N1 V2 N2 from which N2 1:50 Â 103 turns. or 120 V 100 turns 1800 V N2

35.12 A transformer used on a 120-V line delivers 2.0 A at 900 V. What current is drawn from the line? Assume 100 percent eciency.

336

ALTERNATING CURRENT

[CHAP. 35

Power in primary power in secondary I1 120 V 2:0 A900 V I1 15 A

35.13 A step-down transformer operates on a 2.5-kV line and supplies a load with 80 A. The ratio of the primary winding to the secondary winding is 20 : 1. Assuming 100 percent eciency, determine the secondary voltage V2 , the primary current I1 , and the power output P2 .
V2 1 V 0:13 kV 20 1 I1 1 I 4:0 A 20 2 P2 V2 I2 10 kW

The last expression is correct only if it is assumed that the load is pure resistive, so that the power factor is unity.

Supplementary Problems
35.14 A voltmeter reads 80.0 V when it is connected across the terminals of a sinusoidal power source with f 1000 Hz. Write the equation for the instantaneous voltage provided by the source. Ans. v 113 V sin 2000t for t in seconds An ac current in a 10 resistance produces thermal energy at the rate of 360 W. Determine the eective values of the current and voltage. Ans. 6.0 A, 60 V A 40.0- resistor is connected across a 15.0-V variable-frequency electronic oscillator. Find the current through the resistor when the frequency is (a) 100 Hz and (b) 100 kHz. Ans. (a) 0.375 A; (b) 0.375 A Solve Problem 35.16 if the 40.0- resistor is replaced by a 2.00-mH inductor. 11.9 mA Solve Problem 35.16 if the 40.0- resistor is replaced by 0:300-F capacitor. 2.83 A Ans. (a) 11.9 A; (b)

35.15

35.16

35.17

35.18

Ans. (a) 2.83 mA; (b)

35.19

A coil has resistance 20 and inductance 0.35 H. Compute its reactance and its impedance to an alternating current of 25 cycles/s. Ans. 55 , 59 A current of 30 mA is taken by a 4:0-F capacitor connected across an alternating current line having a frequency of 500 Hz. Compute the reactance of the capacitor and the voltage across the capacitor. Ans. 80 , 2.4 V A coil has an inductance of 0.100 H and a resistance of 12.0 . It is connected to a 110-V, 60.0-Hz line. Determine (a) the reactance of the coil, (b) the impedance of the coil, (c) the current through the coil, (d ) the phase angle between current and supply voltage, (e) the power factor of the circuit, and ( f ) the reading of a wattmeter connected in the circuit. Ans. (a) 37.7 ; (b) 39.6 ; (c) 2.78 A; (d ) voltage leads by 72:38; (e) 0.303; ( f ) 92.6 W A 10:0-F capacitor is in series with a 40.0- resistance, and the combination is connected to a 110-V, 60.0Hz line. Calculate (a) the capacitive reactance, (b) the impedance of the circuit, (c) the current in the circuit, (d ) the phase angle between current and supply voltage, and (e) the power factor for the circuit. Ans. (a) 266 ; (b) 269 ; (c) 0.409 A; (d ) voltage lags by 81:48; (e) 0.149

35.20

35.21

35.22

CHAP. 35]

ALTERNATING CURRENT

337

35.23

A circuit having a resistance, an inductance, and a capacitance in series is connected to a 110-V ac line. For the circuit, R 9:0 , XL 28 , and XC 16 . Compute (a) the impedance of the circuit, (b) the current, (c) the phase angle between the current and the supply voltage, and (d ) the power factor of the circuit. Ans. (a) 15 ; (b) 7.3 A; (c) voltage leads by 538; (d ) 0.60 An experimenter has a coil of inductance 3.0 mH and wishes to construct a circuit whose resonant frequency is 1.0 MHz. What should be the value of the capacitor used? Ans. 8.4 pF A circuit has a resistance of 11 , a coil of inductive reactance 120 , and a capacitor with a 120- reactance, all connected in series with a 110-V, 60-Hz power source. What is the potential dierence across each circuit element? Ans. VR 0:11 kV, VL VC 1:2 kV A 120-V, 60-Hz power source is connected across an 800- noninductive resistance and an unknown capacitance in series. The voltage drop across the resistor is 102 V. (a) What is the voltage drop across the capacitor? (b) What is the reactance of the capacitor? Ans. (a) 63 V; (b) 0.50 k A coil of negligible resistance is connected in series with a 90- resistor across a 120-V, 60-Hz line. A voltmeter reads 36 V across the resistance. Find the voltage across the coil and the inductance of the coil. Ans. 0.11 kV, 0.76 H A step-down transformer is used on a 2.2-kV line to deliver 110 V. How many turns are on the primary winding if the secondary has 25 turns? Ans. 5:0 Â 102 A step-down transformer is used on a 1650-V line to deliver 45 A at 110 V. What current is drawn from the line? Assume 100 percent eciency. Ans. 3.0 A A step-up transformer operates on a 110-V line and supplies a load with 2.0 A. The ratio of the primary and secondary windings is 1 : 25. Determine the secondary voltage, the primary current, and the power output. Assume a resistive load and 100 percent eciency. Ans. 2.8 kV, 50 A, 5.5 kW

35.24 35.25

35.26

35.27

35.28 35.29 35.30

Chapter 36
Reflection of Light
THE NATURE OF LIGHT: Light (along with all other forms of electromagnetic radiation) is a fundamental entity and physics is still struggling to understand it. On an observable level, light manifests two seemingly contradictory behaviors, crudely pictured via wave and particle models. Usually the amount of energy present is so large that light behaves as if it were an ideal continuous wave, a wave of interdependent electric and magnetic ®elds. The interaction of light with lenses, mirrors, prisms, slits, and so forth, can satisfactorily be understood via the wave model (provided we don't probe too deeply into what's happening on a microscopic level). On the other hand, when light is emitted or absorbed by the atoms of a system, these processes occur as if the radiant energy is in the form of minute, localized, well-directed blasts; that is, as if light is a stream of particles. Fortunately, without worrying about the very nature of light, we can predict its behavior in a wide range of practical situations.

LAW OF REFLECTION: A ray is a mathematical line drawn perpendicular to the wavefronts of a lightwave. It shows the direction of propagation of electromagnetic energy. In specular (or mirror) re¯ection, the angle of incidence equals the angle of re¯ection, as shown in Fig. 36-1. Furthermore, the incident ray, re¯ected ray, and normal to the surface all lie in the same plane, called the plane-of-incidence.

Fig. 36-1

PLANE MIRRORS form images that are erect, of the same size as the object, and as far behind the re¯ecting surface as the object is in front of it. Such an image is virtual; i.e., the image will not appear on a screen located at the position on the image because the light does not converge there.

SPHERICAL MIRRORS: The principal focus of a spherical mirror, such as the ones shown in Fig. 36-2, is the point F where rays parallel to and very close to the central or optical axis of the mirror are focused. This focus is real for a concave mirror and virtual for a convex mirror. It is located on the optical axis and midway between the center of curvature C and the mirror. 338
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 36]

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

339

Fig. 36-2

Concave mirrors form inverted real images of objects placed beyond the principal focus. If the object is between the principal focus and the mirror, the image is virtual, erect, and enlarged. Convex mirrors produce only erect virtual images of objects placed in front of them. The images are diminished (smaller than the object) in size.

MIRROR EQUATION for both concave and convex spherical mirrors: 1 1 2 1 so si R f where so si R f object distance from the mirror image distance from the mirror radius of curvature of the mirror focal length of the mirror R=2:

In addition,
. so is positive when the object is in front of the mirror. . si is positive when the image is real, i.e., in front of the mirror. . si is negative when the image is virtual, i.e., behind the mirror. . R and f are positive for a concave mirror and negative for a convex mirror.

THE SIZE OF THE IMAGE formed by a spherical mirror is given by Linear magnification

length of image image distance from mirror si length of object object distance from mirror so

Solved Problems
36.1 Two plane mirrors make an angle of 308 with each other. Locate graphically four images of a luminous point A placed between the two mirrors. (See Fig. 36-3.)
From A draw normals AA H and AB H to mirrors OY and OX, respectively, making AL LA H and AM MB H . Then A H and B H are images of A.

340

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 36

Fig. 36-3

Fig. 36-4

Next, from A H and B H draw normals to OX and OY, making A H N NA HH and B H P PB HH . Then A HH is the image of A H in OX and B HH is the image of B H in OY. The four images of A are A H , B H , A HH , B HH . Additional images also exist, for example, images of A HH and B HH :

36.2

A boy is 1.50 m tall and can just see his image in a vertical plane mirror 3.0 m away. His eyes are 1.40 m from the ¯oor level. Determine the vertical dimension and elevation of the shortest mirror in which he could see his full image.
In Fig. 36-4, let AB represent the boy. His eyes are at E. Then A H B H is the image of AB in mirror MR, and DH represents the shortest mirror necessary for the eye to view the image A H B H . Triangles DEC and DA H M are congruent and so CD DM 5:0 cm Triangles HRB H and HCE are congruent and so RH HC 70 cm The dimension of the mirror is HC CD 75 cm and its elevation is RH 70 cm.

36.3

As shown in Fig. 36-5, a light ray IO is incident on a small plane mirror. The mirror re¯ects this ray upon a straight scale SC which is 1 m distant and parallel to the unde¯ected mirror MM. When the mirror turns through an angle of 8:08 and assumes the position M H M H , across what distance on the scale will the spot of light move? (This device, called an optical lever, is useful in measuring small de¯ections.)
When the mirror turns through 8:08 the normal to it also turns through 8:08, and the incident ray makes an angle of 8:08 with the normal NO to the de¯ected mirror M H M H . Because the incident ray IO and the re¯ected ray OR make equal angles with the normal, angle IOR is twice the angle through which the mirror has turned, or 168. Then IR IO tan 168 1:0 m0:287 29 cm

36.4

The concave spherical mirror shown in Fig. 36-6 has radius of curvature 4 m. An object OO H , 5 cm high, is placed 3 m in front of the mirror. By (a) construction and (b) computation, determine the position and height of the image II H .
In Fig. 36-6, C is the center of curvature, 4 m from the mirror, and F is the principal focus, 2 m from the mirror.

CHAP. 36]

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

341

Fig. 36-5

Fig. 36-6

(a)

Two of the following three convenient rays from O will locate the image. (1) (2) (3) The ray OA, parallel to the principal axis. This ray, like all parallel rays, is re¯ected through the principal focus F in the direction AFA H . The ray OB, drawn as if it passed through the center of curvature C. This ray is normal to the mirror and is re¯ected back on itself in the direction BCB H : The ray OFD which passes through the principal focus F and, like all rays passing through F, is re¯ected parallel to the principal axis in the direction DD H .

(b)

The intersection I of any two of these re¯ected rays is the image of O. Thus II H represents the position and size of the image of OO H . The image is real, inverted, magni®ed, and at a greater distance from the mirror than the object. (Note: If the object were at II H , the image would be at OO H and would be real, inverted, and smaller.) By the mirror equation, 1 1 2 so si R or 1 1 2 3 si 4 or si 6 m

The image is real (since si is positive) and 6 m from the mirror. Also, Height of image si 6 m 2 or height of image 25 cm 0:10 m Height of object so 3 m

36.5

An object OO H is 25 cm from a concave spherical mirror of radius 80 cm (Fig. 36-7). Determine the position and relative size of its image II H (a) by construction and (b) by use of the mirror equation.
(a) Two of the following three rays from O locate the image. (1) (2) (3) A ray OA, parallel to the principal axis, is re¯ected through the focus F, 40 cm from the mirror. A ray OB, in the line of the radius COB, is normal to the mirror and is re¯ected back on itself through the center of curvature C. A ray OD, which (extended) passes through F, is re¯ected parallel to the axis. Because of the large curvature of the mirror from A to D, this ray is not as accurate as the other two.

342

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 36

Fig. 36-7 The re¯ected rays (AA H , BB H , and DD H ) do not meet, but appear to originate from a point I behind the mirror. Thus II H represents the relative position and size of the image of OO H . The image is virtual (behind the mirror), erect, and magni®ed. b 1 1 2 so si R or 1 1 2 25 si 80 or si À67 cm

The image is virtual (since si is negative) and 66.7 cm behind the mirror. Also, size of image si 66:7 cm 2:7 times Linear magnification size of object so 25 cm

36.6

As shown in Fig. 36-8, an object 6 cm high is located 30 cm in front of a convex spherical mirror of radius 40 cm. Determine the position and height of its image, (a) by construction and (b) by use of the mirror equation.

Fig. 36-8 (a) Choose two convenient rays coming from O: (1) (2) A ray OA, parallel to the principal axis, is re¯ected in the direction AA H as if it passed through the principal focus F. A ray OB, directed toward the center of curvature C, is normal to the mirror and is re¯ected back on itself.

The re¯ected rays, AA H and BO, never meet but appear to originate from a point I behind the mirror. Then II H represents the size and position of the image of OO H .

CHAP. 36]

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

343

in b

All images formed by convex mirrors are virtual, erect, and reduced in size, provided the object is front of the mirror (i.e., a real object). 1 1 2 so si R or 1 1 2 À 30 si 40 or si À12 cm

The image is virtual (si is negative) and 12 cm behind the mirror. Also, Height of image si 12 cm 0:40 or height of image 0:406:0 cm 2:4 cm Height of object so 30 cm

36.7

Where should an object be placed, with reference to a concave spherical mirror of radius 180 cm, to form a real image having half its linear dimensions?
The magni®cation is to be 1/2; hence si so =2. Then 1 1 2 so si R or 1 2 2 so so 180 or so 0:27 m from mirror

36.8

How far must a girl stand in front of a concave spherical mirror of radius 120 cm to see an erect image of her face four times its natural size?
The erect image must be virtual; hence si is negative, and si À4so . Then 1 1 2 so si R or 1 1 2 À so 4so 120 or so 45 cm from mirror

36.9

What kind of spherical mirror must be used, and what must be its radius, in order to give an erect image one-®fth as large as an object placed 15 cm in front of it?
An erect image produced by a spherical mirror is virtual; hence si Àso =5 À15=5 À3 cm. As the virtual image is smaller than the object, a convex mirror is required. Its radius is given by 1 1 2 so si R or 1 1 2 À 15 3 R or R À7:5 cm (convex mirror)

36.10 The diameter of the Sun subtends an angle of approximately 32 minutes (32 H ) at any point on the Earth. Determine the position and diameter of the solar image formed by a concave spherical mirror of radius 400 cm. Refer to Fig. 36-9.

Fig. 36-9 Since the sun is very distant, so is very large and 1=so is practically zero. So 1 1 2 so si R or 0 1 2 si 400

344

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 36

and si 200 cm. The image is at the principal focus F, 200 cm from the mirror. The diameter of the Sun and its image II H subtend equal angles at the center of curvature C of the mirror. From the ®gure, tan 16 H II H =2 CF or II H 2CF tan 16 H 22:00 m0:004 65 1:9 cm

36.11 A dental technician uses a small mirror that gives a magni®cation of 4.0 when it is held 0.60 cm from a tooth. What is the radius of curvature of the mirror?
Because jsi =so j 4 and so 0:60 cm, the mirror equation becomes (in cm) 1 1 2 2 or 1:667 Æ 0:417 0:60 Æ2:4 R R from which R 0:96 cm or R 1:6 cm. Both answers are positive and so the mirror must be concave. (This agrees with the fact that the image formed by a convex mirror is diminished, not magni®ed.) The plus sign (and R 0:96 cm) gives a real image, a situation that would not be convenient. (Why?) Hence the mirror has R 1:6 cm.

Supplementary Problems
36.12 If you wish to take a photo of yourself as you stand 3 m in front of a plane mirror, for what distance should you focus the camera you are holding? Ans. 6 m Two plane mirrors make an angle of 908 with each other. A point-like luminous object is placed between them. How many images are formed? Ans. 3 Two plane mirrors are parallel to each other and spaced 20 cm apart. A luminous point is placed between them and 5.0 cm from one mirror. Determine the distance from each mirror of the three nearest images in each. Ans. 5.0, 35, 45 cm; 15, 25, 55 cm Two plane mirrors make an angle of 908 with each other. A beam of light is directed at one of the mirrors, re¯ects o it and the second mirror, and leaves the mirrors. What is the angle between the incident beam and the re¯ected beam? Ans. 1808 A ray of light makes an angle of 258 with the normal to a plane mirror. If the mirror is turned through 6:08, making the angle of incidence 318, through what angle is the re¯ected ray rotated? Ans. 128 Describe the image of a candle ¯ame located 40 cm from a concave spherical mirror of radius 64 cm. Ans. real, inverted, 0.16 m in front of mirror, magni®ed 4 times Describe the image of an object positioned 20 cm from a concave spherical mirror of radius 60 cm. Ans. virtual, erect, 60 cm behind mirror, magni®ed 3 times How far should an object be from a concave spherical mirror of radius 36 cm to form a real image one-ninth its size? Ans. 0.18 m An object 7.0 cm high is placed 15 cm from a convex spherical mirror of radius 45 cm. Describe its image. Ans. virtual, erect, 9.0 cm behind mirror, 4.2 cm high What is the focal length of a convex spherical mirror which produces an image one-sixth the size of an object located 12 cm from the mirror? Ans. À2:4 cm

36.13

36.14

36.15

36.16

36.17

36.18

36.19

36.20

36.21

CHAP. 36]

REFLECTION OF LIGHT

345

36.22

It is desired to cast the image of a lamp, magni®ed 5 times, upon a wall 12 m distant from the lamp. What kind of spherical mirror is required, and what is its position? Ans. concave, radius 5.0 m, 3.0 m from lamp Compute the position and diameter of the image of the Moon in a polished sphere of diameter 20 cm. The diameter of the Moon is 3500 km, and its distance from the Earth is 384 000 km, approximately. Ans. 5.0 cm inside sphere, 0.46 mm

36.23

Chapter 37
Refraction of Light
THE SPEED OF LIGHT as ordinarily measured varies from material to material. Light (treated macroscopically) travels fastest in vacuum, where its speed is c 2:998 Â 108 m/s. Its speed in air is c/1.000 3. In water its speed is c/1.33, and in ordinary glass it is about c/1.5. Nonetheless, on a microscopic level light is composed of photons and photons exist only at the speed c. The apparent slowing down in material media arises from the absorption and re-emission as the light passes from atom to atom.

INDEX OF REFRACTION n:

The absolute index of refraction of a material is de®ned as speed of light in vacuum c speed of light in the material v

n

For any two materials, the relative index of refraction of material-1, with respect to material-2, is n Relative index 1 n2 where n1 and n2 are the absolute refractive indices of the two materials.

REFRACTION: When a ray of light is transmitted obliquely through the boundary between two materials of unlike index of refraction, the ray bends. This phenomenon, called refraction, is shown in Fig. 37-1. If nt > ni , the ray refracts as shown in the ®gure; it bends toward the normal as it enters the second material. If nt < ni , however, the ray refracts away from the normal. This would be the situation in Fig. 37-1 if the direction of the ray were reversed. In either case, the incident and refracted (or transmitted) rays and the normal all lie in the same plane. The angles i and t in Fig. 37-1 are called the angle of incidence and angle of transmission (or refraction), respectively.

Fig. 37-1

SNELL'S LAW: The way in which a ray refracts at an interface between materials with indices of refraction ni and nt is given by Snell's Law: ni sin i nt sin t 346
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 37]

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

347

where i and t are as shown in Fig. 37-1. Because this equation applies to light moving in either direction along the ray, a ray of light follows the same path when its direction is reversed.

CRITICAL ANGLE FOR TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION: When light re¯ects o an interface where ni < nt the process is called external re¯ection, when ni > nt it's internal re¯ection. Suppose that a ray of light passes from a material of higher index of refraction to one of lower index, as shown in Fig. 37-2. Part of the incident light is refracted and part is re¯ected at the interface. Because t must be larger than i , it is possible to make i large enough so that t 908. This value for i is called the critical angle c . For i larger than this, no refracted ray can exist; all the light is re¯ected.

Fig. 37-2

Fig. 37-3

The condition for total internal re¯ection is that i exceed the critical angle c where n ni sin c nt sin 908 or sin c t ni Because the sine of an angle can never be larger than unity, this relation con®rms that total internal re¯ection can occur only if ni > nt .

A PRISM can be used to disperse light into its various colors, as shown in Fig. 37-3. Because the index of refraction of a material varies with wavelength, dierent colors of light refract dierently. In nearly all materials, red is refracted least and blue is refracted most.

Solved Problems
37.1 The speed of light in water is (3/4)c. What is the eect, on the frequency and wavelength of light, of passing from vacuum (or air, to good approximation) into water? Compute the refractive index of water.
The same number of wave peaks leave the air each second as enter into the water. Hence the frequency is the same in the two materials. But because wavelength (speed)/(frequency), the wavelength in water is three-fourths that in air.

348

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 37

The (absolute) refractive index of water is n speed in vacuum c 4 1:33 speed in water 3=4c 3

37.2

A glass plate is 0.60 cm thick and has a refractive index of 1.55. How long does it take for a pulse of light incident normally to pass through the plate? t x 0:006 0 m 3:1 Â 10À11 s v 2:998 Â 108 =1:55 m=s

37.3

As is shown in Fig. 37-4, a ray of light in air strikes a glass plate n 1:50 at an incidence angle of 508. Determine the angles of the re¯ected and transmitted rays.
The law of re¯ection applies to the re¯ected ray. Therefore, the angle of re¯ection is 508, as shown. For the refracted ray, ni sin i nt sin t becomes, sin t from which t 318: ni 1:0 sin i sin 508 0:51 nt 1:5

Fig. 37-4

Fig. 37-5

37.4

The refractive index of diamond is 2.42. What is the critical angle for light passing from diamond to air?
We use ni sin i nt sin t to obtain 2:42 sin c 1 sin 90:0 8 from which sin c 0:413 and c 24:48.

37.5

What is the critical angle for light passing from glass n 1:54 to water n 1:33? ni sin i nt sin t from which sin c becomes ni sin c nt sin 908 or c 59:78

nt 1:33 0:864 ni 1:54

CHAP. 37]

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

349

37.6

A layer of oil n 1:45 ¯oats on water n 1:33. A ray of light shines onto the oil with an incidence angle of 40:08. Find the angle the ray makes in the water. (See Fig. 37-5.)
At the air±oil interface, Snell's Law gives nair sin 408 noil sin oil At the oil±water interface, we have (using the equality of alternate angles) noil sin oil nwater sin water Thus, nair sin 40:08 nwater sin water ; the overall refraction occurs just as though the oil layer were absent. Solving gives sin water nair sin 40:08 10:643 nwater 1:33 or water 28:98

37.7

As shown in Fig. 37-6, a small luminous body, at the bottom of a pool of water n 4=3 2:00 m deep, emits rays upward in all directions. A circular area of light is formed at the surface of the water. Determine the radius R of the circle of light.

Fig. 37-6

Fig. 37-7

The circular area is formed by rays refracted into the air. The angle c must be the critical angle, because total internal re¯ection, and hence no refraction, occurs when the angle of incidence in the water is greater than the critical angle. We have, then, sin c From the ®gure, R 2:00 m tan c 2:00 m1:13 2:26 m na 1 nw 4=3 or c 48:68

37.8

What is the minimum value of the refractive index for a 45:08 prism which is used to turn a beam of light by total internal re¯ection through a right angle? (See Fig. 37-7.)
The ray enters the prism without deviation, since it strikes side AB normally. It then makes an incidence angle of 45:08 with normal to side AC. The critical angle of the prism must be smaller than 45:08 if the ray is to be totally re¯ected at side AC and thus turned through 908. From ni sin c nt sin 908 with nt 1:00, Minimum ni 1 1:41 sin 45:08

350

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 37

37.9

The glass prism shown in Fig. 37-8 has an index of refraction of 1.55. Find the angle of deviation D for the case shown.
No de¯ection occurs at the entering surface, because the incidence angle is zero. At the second surface, i 308 (because its sides are mutually perpendicular to the sides of the apex angle). Then, Snell's Law becomes ni sin i nt sin t or sin t 1:55 sin 308 1

from which t 50:88. But D t À i and so D 218:

Fig. 37-8

Fig. 37-9

37.10 As in Fig. 37-9, an object is at a depth d beneath the surface of a transparent material of refractive index n. As viewed from a point almost directly above, how deep does the object appear to be?
The rays from A that are shown emerging into the air both appear to come from point B. Therefore, the apparent depth is CB. We have b b tan t tan i and CB CA If the object is viewed from nearly straight above, then angles t and i will be very small. For small angles, the sine and tangent are nearly equal. Therefore, CB tan i sin i % CA tan t sin t But n sin i 1 sin r, from which sin i 1 sin t n Hence, actual depth CA n The apparent depth is only a fraction 1=n of the actual depth d. Apparent depth CB

37.11 A glass plate 4.00 mm thick is viewed from above through a microscope. The microscope must be lowered 2.58 mm as the operator shifts from viewing the top surface to viewing the bottom surface through the glass. What is the index of refraction of the glass?

CHAP. 37]

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

351

We found in Problem 37.10 that the apparent depth of the plate will be 1=n as large as its actual depth. Hence, or (actual thickness)(1/n apparent thickness 4:00 mm1=n 2:58 mm

This yields n 1:55 for the glass.

37.12 As shown in Fig. 37-10, a ray enters the ¯at end of a long rectangular block of glass that has a refractive index of n2 . Show that all entering rays can be totally internally re¯ected only if n2 > 1:414:

Fig. 37-10

The larger 1 is, the smaller 3 will be. Therefore the ray is most likely to escape if 1 908. In that case, n1 sin 1 n2 sin 2 For the ray to just escape, 4 908. Then n2 sin 3 n1 sin 4 becomes sin 2 1 sin 3 But we see from the ®gure that sin 3 cos 2 , and so this becomes tan 2 1 Then, because n2 sin 2 1, we have 1 1:414 sin 45:008 This is the smallest possible value the index can have for total internal re¯ection of all rays that enter the end of the block. It is possible to obtain this answer by inspection. How? n2 or 2 45:008 n2 sin 3 11 We thus have two conditions to satisfy: n2 sin 2 1 and n2 sin 3 1. Their ratio gives becomes 11 n2 sin 2

Supplementary Problems
37.13 The speed of light in a certain glass is 1:91 Â 108 m/s. What is the refractive index of the glass? Ans. 1.57 What is the frequency of light which has a wavelength in air of 546 nm? What is its frequency in water n 1:33? Its speed in water? Its wavelength in water? Ans. 549 THz, 549 THz, 2:25 Â 108 m/s, 411 nm

37.14

352

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 37

37.15 37.16 37.17 37.18

A beam of light strikes the surface of water at an incidence angle of 608. Determine the directions of the re¯ected and refracted rays. For water, n 1:33. Ans. 608 re¯ected into air, 418 refracted into water The critical angle for light passing from rock salt into air is 40:58. Calculate the index of refraction of rock salt. Ans. 1.54 What is the critical angle when light passes from glass n 1:50 into air? Ans. 41:88

The absolute indices of refraction of diamond and crown glass are 5/2 and 3/2 respectively. Compute (a) the refractive index of diamond relative to crown glass and (b) the critical angle between diamond and crown glass. Ans. (a) 5/3; (b) 378 A pool of water n 4=3 is 60 cm deep. Find its apparent depth when viewed vertically through air. Ans. 45 cm In a vessel, a layer of benzene n 1:50 6 cm deep ¯oats on water n 1:33 4 cm deep. Determine the apparent distance of the bottom of the vessel below the upper surface of the benzene when viewed vertically through air. Ans. 7 cm A mirror is made of plate glass n 3=2 1.0 cm thick and silvered on the back. A man is 50.0 cm from the front face of the mirror. If he looks perpendicularly into it, at what distance behind the front face of the mirror will his image appear to be? Ans. 51.3 cm A straight rod is partially immersed in water n 1:33. Its submerged portion appears to be inclined 458 with the surface when viewed vertically through air. What is the actual inclination of the rod? Ans. arctan 1:33 538 The index of refraction for a certain type of glass is 1.640 for blue light and 1.605 for red light. When a beam of white light (one that contains all colors) enters a plate of this glass at an incidence angle of 408, what is the angle in the glass between the blue and red parts of the refracted beam? Ans. 0:538

37.19 37.20

37.21

37.22

37.23

Chapter 38
Thin Lenses
TYPES OF LENSES: As indicated in Fig. 38-1, converging, or positive, lenses are thicker at the center than at the rim and will converge a beam of parallel light to a real focus. Diverging, or negative, lenses are thinner at the center than at the rim and will diverge a beam of parallel light from a virtual focus. The principal focus (or focal point) of a thin lens with spherical surfaces is the point F where rays parallel to and near the central or optical axis are brought to a focus; this focus is real for a converging lens and virtual for a diverging lens. The focal length f is the distance of the principal focus from the lens. Because each lens in Fig. 38-1 can be reversed without altering the rays, two symmetric focal points exist for each lens.

Fig. 38-1

OBJECT AND IMAGE RELATION for converging and diverging lenses: 1 1 1 so si f where so is the object distance from the lens, si is the image distance from the lens, and f is the focal length of the lens. The lens is assumed to be thin, and the light rays paraxial (close to the principal axis). Then
. so is positive for a real object, and negative for a virtual object (see Chapter 39). . si is positive for a real image, and negative for a virtual image. . f is positive for a converging lens, and negative for a diverging lens.

Also;

Linear magnification

size of image image distance from lens si size of object object distance from lens so

Converging lenses form inverted real images of objects located outside the principal focus. When the object is between the principal focus and the lens, the image is virtual (on the same side of the lens as the object), erect, and enlarged. Diverging lenses produce only virtual, erect, and smaller images of real objects. LENSMAKER'S EQUATION:

1 1 1 n À 1 À f r1 r2 353

Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

354

THIN LENSES

[CHAP. 38

where n is the refractive index of the lens material, and r1 and r2 are the radii of curvature of the two lens surfaces. This equation holds for all types of thin lenses. A radius of curvature, r, is positive when its center of curvature lies to the right of the surface, and negative when its center of curvature lies to the left of the surface. If a lens with refractive index n1 is immersed in a material with index n2 , then n in the lensmaker's equation is to be replaced by n1 =n2 .

LENS POWER in diopters mÀ1 is equal to 1=f , where f is the focal length expressed in meters.

LENSES IN CONTACT: When two thin lenses having focal lengths f1 and f2 are in close contact, the focal length f of the combination is given by 1 1 1 f f1 f2 For lenses in close contact, the power of the combination is equal to the sum of their individual powers.

Solved Problems
38.1 An object OO H , 4.0 cm high, is 20 cm in front of a thin convex lens of focal length 12 cm. Determine the position and height of its image II H (a) by construction and (b) by computation.
(a) The following two convenient rays from O will locate the images (see Fig. 38-2). (1) A ray OP, parallel to the optical axis, must after refraction pass through the focus F. (2) A ray passing through the optical center C of a thin lens is not appreciably deviated. Hence ray OCI may be drawn as a straight line.

The intersection I of these two rays is the image of O. Thus II H represents the position and size of the image of OO H . The image is real, inverted, enlarged, and at a greater distance from the lens than the object. (If the object were at II H , the image at OO H , would be real, inverted, and smaller.) b 1 1 1 so si f or 1 1 1 20 cm si 12 cm or si 30 cm

The image is real (since si is positive) and 30 cm behind the lens. Height of image si 30 cm 1:5 or height of image 1:54:0 cm 6:0 cm Height of object so 20 cm

Fig. 38-2

CHAP. 38]

THIN LENSES

355

38.2

An object OO H is 5.0 cm in front of a convex lens of focal length 7:5 cm. Determine the position and magni®cation of its image II H (a) by construction and (b) by computation.
(a) Choose two convenient rays from O, as in Fig. 38-3. (1) A ray OP, parallel to the optical axis, is refracted so as to pass through the focus F. (2) A ray OCN, through the optical center of the lens, is drawn as a straight line. These two rays do not meet, but appear to originate from a point I. Thus II H represents the position and size of the image of OO H . When the object is between F and C, the image is virtual, erect, and enlarged, as shown. b 1 1 1 so si f or 1 1 1 5:0 cm si 7:5 cm or si À15 cm

Since si is negative, the image is virtual (on the same side of the lens as the object), and it is 15 cm in front of the lens. Also, size of image si 15 cm 3:0 Linear magnification size of object so 5:0 cm

Fig. 38-3

38.3

An object OO H , 9.0 cm high, is 27 cm in front of a concave lens of focal length À18 cm. Determine the position and height of its image II H (a) by construction and (b) by computation.
(a) Choose the two convenient rays from O shown in Fig. 38-4. (1) A ray OP, parallel to the optical axis, is refracted outward in the direction D as if it came from the principal focus F. (2) A ray through the optical center of the lens is drawn as a straight line OC: Then II H is the image of OO H . Images formed by concave or divergent lenses are virtual, erect, and smaller.

Fig. 38-4

356

THIN LENSES

[CHAP. 38

b

1 1 1 so si f

or

1 1 1 À 27 cm si 18 cm

or

si À10:8 cm À11 cm

Since si is negative, the image is virtual, and it is 11 cm in front of the lens. s 10:8 cm 0:40 or height of image 0:409:0 cm 3:6 cm Linear magnification i s 27 cm o

38.4

A converging lens f 20 cm is placed 37 cm in front of a screen. Where should the object be placed if its image is to appear on the screen?
We know that si 37 cm and f 20 cm. The lens equation gives 1 1 1 so 37 cm 20 cm and 1 0:050 cmÀ1 À 0:027 cmÀ1 0:023 cmÀ1 so

from which so 43:5 cm. The object should be placed 44 cm from the lens.

38.5

Compute the position and focal length of the converging lens which will project the image of a lamp, magni®ed 4 times, upon a screen 10.0 m from the lamp.
From so si 10:0 and si 4so , we ®nd so 2:0 m and si 8:0 m. Then 1 1 1 1 1 5 f so si 2:0 m 8:0 m 8:0 m or f 8:0 m 1:6 m 5

38.6

In what two positions will a converging lens of focal length 9:00 cm form images of a luminous object on a screen located 40.0 cm from the object?
Given so si 40:0 cm and f 9:00 cm, we have 1 1 1 so 40:0 cm À so 9:0 cm The use of the quadratic formula gives 40:0 Æ or s2 À 40:0so 360 0 o

p 1600 À 1440 2 from which so 13:7 cm and so 26:3 cm. The two lens positions are 13.7 cm and 26.3 cm from the object. so

38.7

A converging lens with 50 cm focal length forms a real image that is 2.5 times larger than the object. How far is the object from the image?
Because the magni®cation is 2.5, we have si 2:5so . Then 1 1 1 so 2:5so 50 cm or so 70 cm

This gives si 2:570 cm 175 cm. So the required distance is si so 70 cm 175 cm 245 cm 2:5 m

38.8

A lens of focal length f projects upon a screen the image of a luminous object magni®ed M times. Show that the lens distance from the screen is f M 1.
The image is real, since it can be shown on a screen, and so si > 0. We then have s 1 1 1 s À or si f M 1 M i si si i À1 so f si so f

CHAP. 38]

THIN LENSES

357

38.9

A lens has a convex surface of radius 20 cm and a concave surface of radius 40 cm and is made of glass of refractive index 1.54. Compute the focal length of the lens, and state whether it is a converging or a diverging lens.
First, notice that r1 > 0 and r2 > 0 because both surfaces have their centers of curvature to the right. Consequently, 1 1 1 1 1 0:54 n À 1 À or f 74 cm 1:54 À 1 À f r1 r2 20 cm 40 cm 40 cm Since f turns out to be positive, the lens is converging.

38.10 A double convex lens has faces of radii 18 and 20 cm. When an object is 24 cm from the lens, a real image is formed 32 cm from the lens. Determine (a) the focal length of the lens and (b) the refractive index of the lens material.
a b 1 1 1 1 1 7 96 cm or f 13:7 cm 14 cm f so si 24 cm 32 cm 96 cm 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 n À 1 n À 1 À or n 1:7 À or f r1 r2 13:7 18 cm À20 cm

38.11 A glass lens n 1:50 has a focal length of 10 cm in air. Compute its focal length in water n 1:33.
Using 1 f we get For air X For water X n1 1 1 À1 À r1 r2 n2 1 1 1 1:50 À 1 À 10 r1 r2 1 1:50 1 1 À1 À f 1:33 r1 r2

Divide one equation by the other to obtain f 5:0=0:128 39 cm:

38.12 Each face of a double convex lens has a radius of 20.0 cm. The index of refraction of the glass is 1.50. Compute the focal length of this lens (a) in air and (b) when it is immersed in carbon disul®de n 1:63:
We use n1 1 1 À1 À r1 r2 n2 1 1 1 1:50 À 1 À or f 20 cm À20 cm 1 1:50 1 1 À1 À or f 1:63 20 cm À20 cm 1 f

a b

f 20:0 cm f À125 cm

Here, the focal length is negative and so the lens is a diverging lens.

38.13 Two thin lenses, of focal lengths 9:0 and À6:0 cm, are placed in contact. Calculate the focal length of the combination.

358

THIN LENSES

[CHAP. 38

1 1 1 1 1 1 À À f f1 f2 9:0 cm 6:0 cm 18 cm

or

f À18 cm diverging

38.14 An achromatic lens is formed from two thin lenses in contact, having powers of 10:0 diopters and À6:0 diopters. Determine the power and focal length of the combination.
Since reciprocal focal lengths add, Power 10:0 À 6:0 4:0 diopters and focal length 1 1 25 cm power 4:0 mÀ1

Supplementary Problems
38.15 Draw diagrams to indicate qualitatively the position, nature, and size of the image formed by a converging lens of focal length f for the following object distances: (a) in®nity, (b) greater than 2f , (c) equal to 2f , (d ) between 2f and f , (e) equal to f , ( f ) less than f . Determine the nature, position, and linear magni®cation of the image formed by a thin converging lens of focal length 100 cm when the object distance from the lens is (a) 150 cm, (b) 75.0 cm. Ans. (a) real, inverted, 300 cm beyond lens, 2 : 1; (b) virtual, erect, 300 cm in front of lens, 4 : 1 In what two positions of the object will its image be enlarged 8.0 times by a lens of focal length 4:0 cm? Ans. 4.5 cm from lens (image is real and inverted), 3.5 cm from lens (image is virtual and erect) What are the nature and focal length of the lens that will form a real image having one-third the dimensions of an object located 9.0 cm from the lens? Ans. converging, 2:3 cm Describe fully the image of an object which is 10 cm high and 28 cm from a diverging lens of focal length À7:0 cm. Ans. virtual, erect, smaller, 5.6 cm in front of lens, 2.0 cm high Compute the focal length of the lens which will give an erect image 10 cm from the lens when the object distance from the lens is (a) 200 cm, (b) very great. Ans. (a) À11 cm; (b) À10 cm A luminous object and a screen are 12.5 m apart. What are the position and focal length of the lens which will throw upon the screen an image of the object magni®ed 24 times? Ans. 0.50 m from object, 0:48 m A plano-concave lens has a spherical surface of radius 12 cm, and its focal length is À22:2 cm. Compute the refractive index of the lens material. Ans. 1.5 A convexo-concave lens has faces of radii 3.0 and 4.0 cm, respectively, and is made of glass of refractive index 1.6. Determine (a) its focal length and (b) the linear magni®cation of the image when the object is 28 cm from the lens. Ans. (a) 20 cm; (b) 2.5 : 1 A double convex glass lens n 1:50 has faces of radius 8 cm each. Compute its focal length in air and when immersed in water n 1:33. Ans. 8 cm, 0:3 m Two thin lenses, of focal lengths 12 and À30 cm, are in contact. Compute the focal length and power of the combination. Ans. 20 cm, 5:0 diopters What must be the focal length of a third thin lens, placed in close contact with two thin lenses of 16 cm and À23 cm focal length, to produce a lens with À12 cm focal length? Ans. À9:8 cm

38.16

38.17

38.18

38.19

38.20

38.21

38.22

38.23

38.24 38.25

38.26

Chapter 39
Optical Instruments
COMBINATION OF THIN LENSES: To locate the image produced by two lenses acting in combination, (1) compute the position of the image produced by the ®rst lens alone, disregarding the second lens; (2) then consider this image as the object for the second lens, and locate its image as produced by the second lens alone. This latter image is the required image. If the image formed by the ®rst lens alone is computed to be behind the second lens, then that image is a virtual object for the second lens, and its distance from the second lens is considered negative.

THE EYE uses a variable-focus lens to form an image on the retina at the rear of the eye. The near point of the eye, represented by dn , is the closest distance to the eye from which an object can be viewed clearly. For the normal eye, dn is about 25 cm. Farsighted persons can see distinctly only objects that are far from the eye; nearsighted persons can see distinctly only objects that are close to the eye.

A MAGNIFYING GLASS is a converging lens used so that it forms an erect, enlarged, virtual image of an object placed inside its focal point. The magni®cation due to a magni®er with focal length f is dn =f 1 if the image it casts is at the near point. Alternatively, if the image is at in®nity, the magni®cation is dn =f :

A MICROSCOPE that consists of two converging lenses, an objective lens (focal length fo ) and an eyepiece lens fe , has dn qo Magnification 1 À1 fe fo where qo is the distance from the objective lens to the image it forms. Usually qo is close to 18 cm.

A TELESCOPE that has an objective lens (or mirror) with focal length fo and an eyepiece with focal length fe gives a magni®cation M fo =fe :

Solved Problems
39.1 A certain nearsighted person cannot see distinctly objects beyond 80 cm from the eye. What is the power in diopters of the spectacle lenses that will enable him to see distant objects clearly?
The image must be on the same side of the lens as the distant object (hence the image is virtual and si À80 cm), and nearer to the lens than the object (hence diverging or negative lenses are indicated). As the object is at a great distance, so is very large and 1=so is practically zero. Then 1 1 1 so si f or 0À 1 1 80 f or f À80 cm (diverging)

359
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

360

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

[CHAP. 39

and

Power in diopters

1 1 À1:3 diopters f in meters À0:80 m

39.2

A certain farsighted person cannot see clearly objects closer to the eye than 75 cm. Determine the power of the spectacle lenses which will enable her to read type at a distance of 25 cm.
The image must be on the same side of the lens as the type (hence the image is virtual and si À75 cm), and farther from the lens than the type (hence converging or positive lenses are prescribed). We have 1 1 1 À f 25 75 and Power or f 37:5 cm

1 2:7 diopters 0:375 m

39.3

A projection lens of focal length 30 cm throws an image of a 2.0 cm Â 3.0 cm slide onto a screen 10 m from the lens. Compute the dimensions of the image.
1 1 1 1 1 À 3:23 mÀ1 À so f si 0:30 10 s 10 m Linear magnification of image i s 1=3:23 m 32 o Size of image 32 Â 2:0 cm Â 32 Â 3:0 cm 64 cm Â 96 cm

and so

The length and width of the slide are each magni®ed 32 times, so

39.4

A camera gives a clear image of a distant landscape when the lens is 8 cm from the ®lm. What adjustment is required to get a good photograph of a map placed 72 cm from the lens?
When the camera is focused for distant objects (for parallel rays), the distance between lens and ®lm is the focal length of the lens, 8 cm. For an object 72 cm distant: 1 1 1 1 1 À À si f so 8 72 or si 9 cm

The lens should be moved farther away from the ®lm a distance of 9 À 8 cm 1 cm:

39.5

With a given illumination and ®lm, the correct exposure for a camera lens set at f =12 is (1/5) s. What is the proper exposure time with the lens working at f =4?
A setting of f =12 means that the diameter of the opening, or stop, of the lens is 1/12 of the focal length; f =4 means that it is 1/4 of the focal length. The amount of light passing through the opening is proportional to its area, and therefore to the square of its diameter. The diameter of the stop at f =4 is three times that at f =12, so 32 9 times as much light will pass through the lens at f =4, and the correct exposure at f =4 is 1=9exposure time at f =12 1:45 s

39.6

An engraver who has normal eyesight uses a converging lens of focal length 8.0 cm which he holds very close to his eye. At what distance from the work should the lens be placed, and what is the magnifying power (magni®cation) of the lens?
Method 1 When a converging lens is used as a magnifying glass, the object is between the lens and the focal point. The virtual erect, and enlarged image forms at the distance of distinct vision, 25 cm from the eye. We have

CHAP. 39]

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

361

1 1 1 so si f and Method 2 By the formula,

or

1 1 1 200 or so 6:06 cm 6:1 cm so À25 cm 8:0 cm 33 s 25 cm Magnifying power i s 6:06 cm 4:1 diameters o

Magnification

dn 25 1 4:1 1 8:0 f

39.7

Two positive lenses, having focal lengths of 2:0 cm and 5:0 cm, are 14 cm apart as shown in Fig. 39-1. An object AB is placed 3.0 cm in front of the 2:0 lens. Determine the position and magni®cation of the ®nal image A HH B HH formed by this combination of lenses.

Fig. 39-1 To locate image A H B H formed by the 2:0 lens alone: 1 1 1 1 1 1 À À si f so 2:0 3:0 6:0 or si 6:0 cm

The image A H B H is real, inverted, and 6.0 cm beyond the 2:0 lens. To locate the ®nal image A HH B HH : The image A H B H is 14 À 6:0 cm 8:0 cm in front of the 5:0 lens and is taken as a real object for the 5:0 lens. 1 1 1 À si 5:0 8:0 or si 13:3 cm

A HH B HH is real, erect, and 13 cm from the 5 lens. Then, Total linear magnification A HH B HH A H B H A HH B HH 6:0 13:3 Â H H Â 3:3 3:0 8:0 AB AB AB

Note that the magni®cation produced by a combination of lenses is the product of the individual magni®cations.

39.8

In the compound microscope shown in Fig. 39-2, the objective and eyepiece have focal lengths of 0:80 and 2:5 cm, respectively. The real image A H B H formed by the objective is 16 cm from the objective. Determine the total magni®cation if the eye is held close to the eyepiece and views the virtual image A HH B HH at a distance of 25 cm.

362

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

[CHAP. 39

Fig. 39-2

Method 1 Let soO object distance from the objective siO real-image distance from objective 1 1 1 1 1 19 À cmÀ1 À soO fO siO 0:80 16 16 and so the objective produces the linear magni®cation siO 16 cm 19 cmÀ1 19 s 16 oO The magnifying power of the eyepiece is siE siE 1 À 1 siE À 1 s fE siE fE oE À25 2:5 À 1 11

Therefore, the magnifying power of the instrument is 19 Â 11 2:1 Â 102 diameters. Alternatively, under the conditions stated, the magnifying power of the eyepiece can be found as 25 25 1 1 11 fE 2:5 Method 2 By the formula, with siO 16 cm, Magnification 25 16 1 À 1 2:1 Â 102 2:5 0:8

39.9

The telephoto lens shown in Fig. 39-3 consists of a converging lens of focal length 6:0 cm placed 4.0 cm in front of a diverging lens of focal length À2:5 cm. (a) Locate the image of a very distant object. (b) Compare the size of the image formed by this lens combination with the size of the image that could be produced by the positive lens alone.
(a) If the negative lens were not employed, the image AB would be formed at the focal point of the 6:0 lens, 6.0 cm distant from the 6:0 lens. The negative lens decreases the convergence of the rays refracted by the positive lens and causes them to focus at A H B H instead of AB: The image AB (that would have been formed by the 6:0 lens alone) is 6:0 À 4:0 2:0 cm beyond the À2:5 lens and is taken as the (virtual) object for the À2:5 lens. Then so À2:0 cm (negative because AB is virtual), and

CHAP. 39]

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

363

Fig. 39-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 À À si f so 2:5 cm 2:0 cm 10 cm

or

si 10 cm

The ®nal image A H B H is real and 10 cm beyond the negative lens. A H B H si 10 cm b Linear magnification by negative lens s 2:0 cm 5:0 AB o so the diverging lens increases the magni®cation by a factor of 5.0.

39.10 A microscope has two interchangeable objective lenses (3.0 mm and 7.0 mm) and two interchangeable eyepieces (3.0 cm and 5.0 cm). What magni®cations can be obtained with the microscope, if the distance between the eyepiece and objective is 17 cm.
Because the image formed by the objective lens lies very close to the eyepiece, siO 17 cm. Then the magni®cation formula for a microscope, with dn 25 cm, gives the following possibilities for M: For fE 3 cm; fO 0:3 cm X For fE 3 cm; fO 0:7 cm X For fE 5 cm; fO 0:3 cm X For fE 5 cm; fO 0:7 cm X M 9:3356:6 528 5:3 Â 102 M 9:3324:2 226 2:3 Â 102 M 556:6 283 2:8 Â 102 M 524:2 121 1:2 Â 102

39.11 Compute the magnifying power of a telescope, having objective and eyepiece lenses of focal lengths 60 and 3:0 cm respectively, when it is focused for parallel rays.
Magnifying power focal length of objective 60 cm 20 diameters focal length of eyepiece 3:0 cm

39.12 Re¯ecting telescopes make use of a concave mirror, in place of the objective lens, to bring the distant object into focus. What is the magnifying power of a telescope that has a mirror with 250 cm radius and an eyepiece whose focal length is 5.0 cm?
As for a refracting telescope (one with two lenses), M fO =fE where, in this case, fO R=2 125 cm and fE 5:0 cm. Thus, M 25:

39.13 As shown in Fig. 39-4, an object is placed 40 cm in front of a converging lens that has f 8:0 cm. A plane mirror is 30 cm beyond the lens. Find the positions of all images formed by this system.

364

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

[CHAP. 39

For the lens 1 1 1 1 1 4 À À si f so 8:0 40 40 This is image A H B H in the ®gure. It is real and inverted. or si 10 cm

Fig. 39-4 A H B H acts as an object for the plane mirror, 20 cm away. A virtual image CD is formed 20 cm behind the mirror. Light re¯ected by the mirror appears to come from the image at CD. With CD as object, the lens forms an image of it to the left of the lens. The distance si from the lens to this latter image is given by 1 1 1 1 1 À À 0:105 si f so 8 50 or si 9:5 cm

The real images are therefore located 10 cm to the right of the lens and 9.5 cm to the left of the lens. (This latter image is upright.) A virtual inverted image is found 20 cm behind the mirror.

Supplementary Problems
39.14 A farsighted woman cannot see objects clearly that are closer to her eye than 60.0 cm. Determine the focal length and power of the spectacle lenses that will enable her to read a book at a distance of 25.0 cm. Ans. 42:9 cm, 2:33 diopters A nearsighted man cannot see objects clearly that are beyond 50 cm from his eye. Determine the focal length and power of the glasses that will enable him to see distant objects clearly. Ans. À50 cm, À2:0 diopters A projection lens is employed to produce 2:4 m Â 3:2 m pictures from 3:0 cm Â 4:0 cm slides on a screen Ans. 31 cm that is 25 cm from the lens. Compute its focal length. A camera gives a life-size picture of a ¯ower when the lens is 20 cm from the ®lm. What should be the distance between lens and ®lm to photograph a ¯ock of birds high overhead? Ans. 10 cm What is the maximum stop rating of a camera lens having a focal length of 10 cm and a diameter of 2.0 cm? If the correct exposure at f =6 is (1/90) s, what exposure is needed when the diaphragm setting is changed to f =9? Ans. f =5, (1/40) s

39.15

39.16

39.17

39.18

CHAP. 39]

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

365

39.19

What is the magnifying power of a lens of focal length 2:0 cm when it used as a magnifying glass (or simple microscope)? The lens is held close to the eye, and the virtual image forms at the distance of distinct vision, 25 cm from the eye. Ans. 14 When the object distance from a converging lens is 5.0 cm, a real image is formed 20 cm from the lens. What magni®cation is produced by this lens when it is used as a magnifying glass, the distance of most distinct vision being 25 cm? Ans. 7.3 In a compound microscope, the focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece are 0:50 cm and 2:0 cm respectively. The instrument is focused on an object 0.52 cm from the objective lens. Compute the magnifying power of the microscope if the virtual image is viewed by the eye at a distance of 25 cm. Ans. 3:4 Â 102 A refracting astronomical telescope has a magnifying power of 150 when adjusted for minimum eyestrain. Its eyepiece has a focal length of 1:20 cm. (a) Determine the focal length of the objective lens. (b) How far apart must the two lenses be so as to project a real image of a distant object on a screen 12.0 cm from the eyepeice? Ans. (a) 180 cm; (b) 181 cm The large telescope at Mt Palomar has a concave objective mirror diameter of 5.0 m and radius of curvature 46 m. What is the magnifying power of the instrument when it is used with an eyepiece of focal length 1.25 cm? Ans. 1:8 Â 103 An astronomical telescope with an objective lens of focal length 80 cm is focused on the moon. By how much must the eyepiece be moved to focus the telescope on an object 40 meters distant? Ans. 1.6 cm A lens combination consists of two lenses with focal lengths of 4:0 cm and 8:0 cm, which are spaced 16 cm apart. Locate and describe the image of an object placed 12 cm in front of the 4:0-cm lens. Ans. 40 cm beyond 8:0 lens, real, erect Two lenses, of focal lengths 6:0 cm and À10 cm, are spaced 1.5 cm apart. Locate and describe the image of an object 30 cm in front of the 6:0-cm lens. Ans. 15 cm beyond negative lens, real, inverted, 5/8 as large as the object. A telephoto lens consists of a positive lens of focal length 3:5 cm placed 2.0 cm in front of a negative lens of focal length À1:8 cm. (a) Locate the image of a very distant object. (b) Determine the focal length of the single lens that would form as large an image of a distant object as is formed by this lens combination. Ans. (a) real image 9.0 cm in back of negative lens; (b) 21 cm An opera glass has an objective lens of focal length 3:60 cm and a negative eyepiece of focal length À1:20 cm. How far apart must the two lenses be for the viewer to see a distant object at 25.0 cm from the eye? Ans. 2.34 cm Repeat Problem 39.13 if the distance between the plane mirror and the lens is 8.0 cm. (real) and 24 cm (virtual) to the right of the lens Ans. at 6.0 cm

39.20

39.21

39.22

39.23

39.24 39.25

39.26

39.27

39.28

39.29 39.30

Solve Problem 39.13 if the plane mirror is replaced by a concave mirror with a 20 cm radius of curvature. Ans. at 10 cm (real, inverted), 10 cm (real, upright), À40 cm (real, inverted) to the right of the lens

Chapter 40
Interference and Diffraction of Light
COHERENT WAVES are waves that have the same form, the same frequency, and a ®xed phase dierence (i.e., the amount by which the peaks of one wave lead or lag those of the other wave does not change with time). THE RELATIVE PHASE of two coherent waves traveling along the same line together speci®es their relative positions on the line. If the crests of one wave fall on the crests of the other, the waves are in-phase. If the crests of one fall on the troughs of the other, the waves are 180 8 (or one-half wavelength) out-of-phase. INTERFERENCE EFFECTS occur when two or more coherent waves overlap. If two coherent waves of the same amplitude are superposed, total destructive interference (cancellation, darkness) occurs when the waves are 180 8 out-of-phase. Total constructive interference (reinforcement, brightness) occurs when they are in-phase. DIFFRACTION refers to the deviation of light from straight-line propagation. It usually corresponds to the bending or spreading of waves around the edges of apertures and obstacles. Diffraction places a limit on the size of details that can be observed optically. SINGLE-SLIT DIFFRACTION: When parallel rays of light of wavelength j are incident normally upon a slit of width D, a diraction pattern is observed beyond the slit. Complete darkness is observed at angles m H to the straight-through beam, where m H j D sin m H Here, m H 1; 2; 3; F F F, is the order number of the diraction dark band. LIMIT OF RESOLUTION of two objects due to diraction: If two objects are viewed through an optical instrument, the diraction patterns caused by the aperture of the instrument limit our ability to distinguish the objects from each other. For distinguishability, the angle subtended at the aperture by the objects must be larger than a critical value cr , given by sin cr 1:22 where D is the diameter of the circular aperture. DIFFRACTION GRATING EQUATION: A diraction grating is a repetitive array of apertures or obstacles that alters the amplitude or phase of a wave. It usually consists of a large number of equally spaced, parallel slits or ridges; the distance between slits is the grating spacing a. When waves of wavelength j are incident normally upon a grating with spacing a, maxima are observed beyond the grating at angles m to the normal, where mj a sin m 366
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

j D

CHAP. 40]

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

367

Here, m 1; 2; 3; F F F, is the order number of the diracted image. This same relation applies to the major maxima in the interference patterns of even two and three slits. In these cases, however, the maxima are not nearly so sharply de®ned as for a grating consisting of hundreds of slits. The pattern may become quite complex if the slits are wide enough so that the singleslit diraction pattern from each slit shows several minima.

THE DIFFRACTION OF X-RAYS of wavelength j by re¯ection from a crystal is described by the Bragg equation. Strong re¯ections are observed at grazing angles m (where is the angle between the face of the crystal and the re¯ected beam) given by mj 2d sin m where d is the distance between re¯ecting planes in the crystal, and m 1; 2; 3; F F F, is the order of re¯ection.

OPTICAL PATH LENGTH: In the same time that it takes a beam of light to travel a distance d in a material of index of refraction n, the beam would travel a distance nd in air or vacuum. For this reason, nd is de®ned as the optical path length of the material.

Solved Problems
40.1 Figure 40.1 shows a thin ®lm of a transparent material of thickness d and index nf where n2 > nf > n1 . For what three smallest gap thicknesses will re¯ected light rays 1 and 2 interfere totally (a) constructively and (b) destructively? Assume the light has a wavelength in the ®lm of 600 nm.
(a) Ray 2 travels a distance of roughly 2d farther than ray 1. The rays reinforce if this distance is 0, j, 2j, 3j, F F F, mj, where m is an integer. Hence for reinforcement, mj 2d (b) or d 1 m600 nm 300m nm 2

The three smallest values for d are 0, 300 nm, and 600 nm. The waves cancel if they are 1808 out-of-phase. This occurs when 2d is 1 j, j 1 j, 2j 1 j; F F F, 2 2 2 mj 1 j; F F F, with m an integer. Therefore, for cancellation, 2 2d mj 1 j 2 or d 1 m 1j m 1300 nm 2 2 2 The three smallest values for d are 150 nm, 450 nm, and 750 nm.

Fig. 40-1

Fig. 40-2

368

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 40

40.2

Two narrow horizontal parallel slits (a distance a 0:60 mm apart) are illuminated by a beam of 500-nm light as shown in Fig. 40-2. Light that is diracted at certain angles reinforces; at others, it cancels. Find the three smallest values for at which (a) reinforcement occurs and (b) cancellation occurs. (See Fig. 40-3.)
The dierence in path lengths for the two beams is r1 À r2 . From the ®gure, sin (a) r1 À r2 a

For reinforcement, r1 À r2 0, j, 2j, F F F . The corresponding three smallest values for are found from sin 0 0 500 Â 10À9 m sin 1 8:33 Â 10À4 6 Â 10À4 m 2500 Â 10À9 m sin 2 16:7 Â 10À4 6 Â 10À4 m or or or 0 0 1 0:0488 2 0:0958

(b)

For cancellation, r1 À r2 1 j, j 1 j, 2j 1 j; F F F . The corresponding three smallest values for 2 2 2 are found from 250 nm or 1 0:0248 sin 1 4:17 Â 10À4 600 000 nm 750 nm or 2 0:0728 0:001 25 sin 2 600 000 nm 1250 nm or 3 0:128 sin 3 0:002 08 600 000 nm

40.3

Monochromatic light from a point source illuminates two narrow, horizontal parallel slits. The centers of the two slits are a 0:80 mm apart, as shown in Fig. 40-3. An interference pattern forms on the screen, 50 cm away. In the pattern, the bright and dark fringes are evenly spaced. The distance y shown is 0.304 mm. Compute the wavelength j of the light.

Fig. 40-3

Notice ®rst that Fig. 40-3 is not to scale. The rays from the slit would actually be nearly parallel. We can therefore use the result of Problem 40.2 with r1 À r2 mj at the maxima (bright spots), where m 0; 1; 2; F F F . Then sin r1 À r2 a becomes mj a sin m

Or, alternatively, we could use the grating equation, since a double slit is simply a grating with two lines. Both approaches give mj a sin m .

CHAP. 40]

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

369

We know that the distance from the central maximum to the ®rst maximum on either side is 0.304 mm. Therefore, from Fig. 40-3, sin 1 Then, for m 1, mj a sin m becomes 1j 0:80 Â 10À3 m6:08 Â 10À4 from which j 486 nm, or to two signi®cant ®gures 0:49 Â 103 nm. 0:030 4 cm 0:000 608 50 cm

40.4

Repeat Problem 40.1 for the case in which n1 < nf > n2 or n1 > nf < n2 .
Experiment shows that, in this situation, cancellation occurs when a is near zero. This is due to the fact that light often undergoes a phase shift upon re¯ection. The process is generally rather complicated, but for incident angles less than about 308 it's fairly straightforward. Then there will be a net phase dierence of 1808 introduced between the internally and externally re¯ected beams. Thus when the ®lm is very thin compared to j and d % 0, there will be an apparent path dierence for the two beams of 1 j and cancellation 2 will occur. (This was not the situation in Problem 40.1, because there both beams were externally re¯ected.) Destructive interference occurs for d 0, as we have just seen. When d 1 j cancellation again occurs. 2 The same thing happens at d 1 j 1 j. Therefore cancellation occurs at d 0, 300 nm, and 600 nm. 2 2 Reinforcement occurs when d 1 j, because then beam 2 acts though it had traveled an additional 4 1 j 21 j j. Reinforcement again occurs when d is increased by 1 j and by j. Hence, for reinforcement, 2 4 2 d 150 nm, 450 nm, and 750 nm.

40.5

When one leg of a Michelson interferometer is lengthened slightly, 150 dark fringes sweep through the ®eld of view. If the light used has j 480 nm, how far was the mirror in that leg moved?
Darkness is observed when the light beams from the two legs are 1808 out of phase. As the length of one leg is increased by 1 j, the path length (down and back) increases by j and the ®eld of view changes from dark 2 to bright to dark. When 150 fringes pass, the leg is lengthened by an amount 1501 j 150240 nm 36 000 nm 0:036 0 mm 2

40.6

As shown in Fig. 40-4, two ¯at glass plates touch at one edge and are separated at the other edge by a spacer. Using vertical viewing and light with j 589:0 nm, ®ve dark fringes (D) are obtained from edge to edge. What is the thickness of the spacer?
The pattern is caused by interference between a beam re¯ected from the upper surface of the air wedge and a beam re¯ected from the lower surface of the wedge. The two re¯ections are of dierent nature in that re¯ection at the upper surface takes place at the boundary of a medium (air) of lower refractive index, while re¯ection at the lower surface occurs at the boundary of a medium (glass) of higher refractive index. In such

Fig. 40-4

Fig. 40-5

370

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 40

cases, the act of re¯ection by itself involves a phase displacement of 1808 between the two re¯ected beams. This explains the presence of a dark fringe at the left-hand edge. As we move from a dark fringe to the next dark fringe, the beam that traverses the wedge must be held back by a path-length dierence of j. Because the beam travels twice through the wedge (down and back up), the wedge thickness changes by only 1 j as we move from fringe to fringe. Thus, 2 Spacer thickness 41 j 2589:0 nm 1178 nm 2

40.7

In an experiment used to show Newton's rings, a plano-convex lens is placed on a ¯at glass plate, as in Fig. 40-5. (The curvature is vastly exaggerated.) When the lens is illuminated from directly above, a top-side viewer sees a series of bright and dark rings centered on the contact point, which is dark. Find the air-gap thickness at (a) the third dark ring and (b) the second bright ring. Assume 500 nm light is being used.
(a) The gap thickness is zero at the central dark spot. It increases by 1 j as we move from a position of 2 darkness to the next position of darkness. (Why 1 j?) Therefore, at the third dark ring, 2 Gap thickness 31 j 3250 nm 750 nm 2 (b) The gap thickness at the ®rst bright ring must be large enough to increase the path length by 1 j. Since 2 the ray traverses the gap twice, the thickness there is 1 j. As we go from one bright ring to the next, the 4 gap thickness increases by 1 j. Therefore, at the second bright ring, 2 Gap thickness 1 j 1 j 0:750500 nm 375 nm 4 2

40.8

What is the least thickness of a soap ®lm which will appear black when viewed with sodium light j 589:3 nm) re¯ected perpendicular to the ®lm? The refractive index for soap solution is n 1:38.
The situation is shown in Fig. 40-6. Ray b has an extra equivalent path length of 2nd 2:76d. In addition, there is a relative phase shift of 1808, or 1 j, between the beams because of the re¯ection process, as 2 described in Problems 40-4 and 40-6. Cancellation (and darkness) occurs if the retardation between the two beams, is 1 j, or 3 j, or 5 j, and so 2 2 2 on. Therefore, for darkness, 2:76d 1 j m1 j 2 2 When m 1, this gives d 0. For m 3, we have d j 589:3 nm 214 nm 2:76 2:76 where m 1; 3; 5; F F F

as the thinnest possible ®lm other than zero.

Fig. 40-6

Fig. 40-7

CHAP. 40]

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

371

40.9

A single slit of width D 0:10 mm is illuminated by parallel light of wavelength 600 nm, and diraction bands are observed on a screen 40 cm from the slit. How far is the third dark band from the central bright band? (Refer to Fig. 40-7.)
For a single slit, the locations of dark bands are given by the equation m H j D sin m H . Then sin 3 3j 36:00 Â 10À7 m 0:018 D 0:10 Â 10À3 m or 1:08

From the ®gure, tan y=40 cm, and so y 40 cmtan 40 cm0:018 0:72 cm

40.10 Red light falls normally on a diraction grating ruled 4000 lines/cm, and the second-order image is diracted 34:08 from the normal. Compute the wavelength of the light.
From the grating equation mj a sin , 1 cm 0:559 a sin 2 4000 6:99 Â 10À5 cm 699 nm j 2 2

40.11 Figure 40-8 shows a laboratory setup for grating experiments. The diraction grating has 5000 lines/cm and is 1.00 m from the slit, which is illuminated with sodium light. On either side of the slit, and parallel to the grating, is a meterstick. The eye, placed close to the grating, sees virtual images of the slit along the metersticks. Determine the wavelength of the light if each ®rst-order image is 31.0 cm from the slit.

Fig. 40-8 tan 1 31:0=100 so j or 1 17:28

a sin 1 0:000 200 cm0:296 592 Â 10À7 cm 592 nm 1 1

40.12 Green light of wavelength 540 nm is diracted by a grating ruled with 2000 lines/cm. (a) Compute the angular deviation of the third-order image. (b) Is a 10th-order image possible?
a b sin 3 3j 35:40 Â 10À5 cm 0:324 a 5:00 Â 10À4 cm or 18:98

sin 10

10j 105:40 Â 10À5 cm 1:08 impossible a 5:00 Â 10À4 cm

Since the value of sin cannot exceed 1, a 10th-order image is impossible.

372

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

[CHAP. 40

40.13 Show that, in a spectrum of white light obtained with a grating, the red jr 700 nm) of the second order overlaps the violet jv 400 nm of the third order.
2jr 2700 1400 a in nm a a a 3j 3400 1200 For the violet: sin 3 v a a a As sin 2 > sin 3 , 2 > 3 . Thus the angle of diraction of red in the second order is greater than that of violet in the third order. For the red: sin 2

40.14 A parallel beam of X-rays is diracted by a rock salt crystal. The ®rst-order strong re¯ection is obtained when the glancing angle (the angle between the crystal face and the beam) is 6850 H . The Ê distance between re¯ection planes in the crystal is 2.8 A. What is the wavelength of the X-rays? (1 angstrom 1 A 0:1 nm.)
Note that the Bragg equation involves the glancing angle, not the angle of incidence. j
2d sin 1 22:8 A 0:119 0:67 A 1 1

40.15 Two point sources of light are 50 cm apart, as shown in Fig. 40-9. They are viewed by the eye at a distance L. The entrance opening (pupil) of the viewer's eye has a diameter of 3.0 mm. If the eye were perfect, the limiting factor for resolution of the two sources would be diraction. In that limit, how large could we make L and still have the sources seen as separate entities?

Fig. 40-9 In the limiting case, c , where sin c 1:22j=D. But, we see from the ®gure that sin c is nearly equal to s=L, because s is so much smaller than L. Substitution of this value gives L% sD 0:50 m3:0 Â 10À3 m 2:5 km % 1:22j 1:225:0 Â 10À7 m

We have taken j 500 nm, about the middle of the visible range.

Supplementary Problems
40.16 Two sound sources send identical waves of 20 cm wavelength out along the x-axis. At what separations of the sources will a listener on the axis beyond them hear (a) the loudest sound and (b) the weakest sound? Ans. (a) m(20 cm), where m 0; 1; 2; F F F ; (b) 10 cm m (20 cm) In an experiment such as that described in Problem 40.1, brightness is observed for the following ®lm thicknesses: 2:90 Â 10À7 m, 5:80 Â 10À7 m, and 8:70 Â 10À7 m. (a) What is the wavelength of the light being used? (b) At what thicknesses would darkness be observed? Ans. (a) 580 nm; (b) 1451 2m nm

40.17

CHAP. 40]

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT

373

40.18

A double-slit experiment is done in the usual way with 480-nm light and narrow slits that are 0.050 cm apart. At what angle to the straight-through beam will one observe (a) the third-order bright spot and (b) the second minimum from the central maximum? Ans. (a) 0:178; (b) 0:0838 In Problem 40.18, if the slit-to-screen distance is 200 cm, how far from the central maximum are (a) the third-order bright spot and (b) the second minimum? Ans. (a) 0.58 cm; (b) 0.29 cm Red light of wavelength 644 nm, from a point source, passes through two parallel and narrow slits which are 1.00 mm apart. Determine the distance between the central bright fringe and the third dark interference fringe formed on a screen parallel to the plane of the slits and 1.00 m away. Ans. 1.61 mm Two ¯at glass plates are pressed together at the top edge and separated at the bottom edge by a strip of tinfoil. The air wedge is examined in yellow sodium light (589 nm) re¯ected normally from its two surfaces, and 42 dark interference fringes are observed. Compute the thickness of the tinfoil. Ans. 12:4 m A mixture of yellow light of wavelength 580 nm and blue light of wavelength 450 nm is incident normally on an air ®lm 290 nm thick. What is the color of the re¯ected light? Ans. blue Repeat Problem 40.1 if the ®lm has a refractive index of 1.40 and the vacuum wavelength of the incident light is 600 nm. Ans. (a) 0, 214 nm, 429 nm; (b) 107 nm, 321 nm, 536 nm Repeat Problem 40.6 if the wedge is ®lled with a ¯uid that has a refractive index of 1.50 instead of air. Ans. 785 nm -

40.19

40.20

40.21

40.22

40.23

40.24

40.25

A single slit of width 0.140 mm is illuminated by monochromatic light, and diraction bands are observed on a screen 2.00 m away. If the second dark band is 16.0 mm from the central bright band, what is the wavelength of the light? Ans. 560 nm Green light of wavelength 500 nm is incident normally on a grating, and the second-order image is diracted 32:08 from the normal. How many lines/cm are marked on the grating? Ans. 5:30 Â 103 lines/cm A narrow beam of yellow light of wavelength 600 nm is incident normally on a diraction grating ruled 2000 lines/cm, and images are formed on a screen parallel to the grating and 1.00 m distant. Compute the distance along the screen from the central bright line to the ®rst-order lines. Ans. 12.1 cm Blue light of wavelength 4:7 Â 10À7 m is diracted by a grating ruled 5000 lines/cm. (a) Compute the angular deviation of the second-order image. (b) What is the highest-order image theoretically possible with this wavelength and grating? Ans. (a) 288; (b) fourth Determine the ratio of the wavelengths of two spectral lines if the second-order image of one line coincides with the third-order image of the other line, both lines being examined by means of the same grating. Ans. 3 : 2 A spectrum of white light is obtained with a grating ruled with 2500 lines/cm. Compute the angular separation between the violet jv 400 nm) and red jr 700 nm) in the (a) ®rst order and (b) second order. (c) Does yellow (jy 600 nm) in the third order overlap the violet in the fourth order? Ans. (a) 4820 H ; (b) 8857 H ; (c) yes A spectrum of the Sun's radiation in the infrared region is produced by a grating. What is the wavelength being studied, if the infrared line in the ®rst order occurs at an angle of 25:08 with the normal, and the fourth-order image of the hydrogen line of wavelength 656.3 nm occurs at 30:08? Ans. 2:22 Â 10À6 m How far apart are the diracting planes in a NaCl crystal for which X-rays of wavelength 1:54 A make a glancing angle of 15854 H in the ®rst order? Ans. 2:81 A

40.26

40.27

40.28

40.29

40.30

40.31

40.32

Chapter 41
Relativity
A REFERENCE FRAME is a coordinate system relative to which physical measurements are taken. An inertial reference frame is one which moves with constant velocity, i.e., one which is not accelerating. THE SPECIAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY was proposed by Albert Einstein (1905) and is concerned with bodies that are moving with constant velocity. The theory is predicated on two postulates: (1) The laws of physics are the same in all inertial reference frames. Therefore, all motion is relative. The velocity of an object can only be given relative to some other object. (2) The speed of light in free space, c, has the same value for all observers, independent of the motion of the source (or the motion of the observer). These postulates lead to the following conclusions.

THE RELATIVISTIC LINEAR MOMENTUM of a body of mass m and speed v is m~ v ~ q m~ p v 1 À v=c2

q where 1= 1 À v=c2 and > 1. Some physicists prefer to associate the with the mass and introduce a relativistic mass mR
m. That allows you to write the momentum as p mR v, but mR is then speed dependent. Here we will use only one mass, m, which is independent of its speed, just like the two other fundamental properties of particles of matter, charge and spin. LIMITING SPEED: When v c, the momentum of an object becomes in®nite. We conclude that no object can be accelerated to the speed of light c, and so c is an upper limit for speed. RELATIVISTIC ENERGY: where total energy kinetic energy rest energy or E KE E0 When a body is at rest 1, KE 0 and the rest energy E0 is given by E0 mc2 The rest energy includes all forms of energy internal to the system. The kinetic energy of a body of mass m is KE mc2 À mc2 374
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

The total energy of a body of mass m is given by E mc2 CHAP. 41]

RELATIVITY

375

If the speed of the object is not too large, this reduces to the usual expression KE 1 mv2 2 v ( c

Using the expression p mv, the total energy of a body can be written as E 2 m 2 c 4 p2 c 2

TIME DILATION: Time is relative, it ¯ows at dierent rates for dierently moving observers. Suppose a spaceship and a planet are moving with respect to one another at a relative speed v and each carries an identical clock. The ship's pilot will see an interval of time ÁtS pass on her clock, with respect to which she is stationary. An observer on the ground will also see a time interval pass on the ship's clock, which is moving with respect to him. He, however, will see that interval to take a time (measured via his clock) of ÁtM where ÁtM T ÁtS . The observer on the ground will see time running more slowly on board the ship: ÁtM ÁtS Similarly the pilot will see time running more slowly on the ground. The time taken for an event to occur, as recorded by a stationary observer at the site of the event, is called the proper time, ÁtS . All observers moving past the site record a longer time for the event to occur. Hence the proper time for the duration of an event is the smallest measured time for the event.

SIMULTANEITY: Suppose that for an observer two events occur at dierent locations but at the same time. The events are simultaneous for this observer, but in general they are not simultaneous for a second observer moving relative to the ®rst.

LENGTH CONTRACTION: Suppose an object is measured to have an x-component length LS when at rest (LS is called the proper length). The object is then given an x-directed speed v, so that it is moving with respect to an observer. That observer will see the object to have been shortened in the x-direction (but not in the y- and z-directions). Its x-length as measured by the observer with respect to whom it is moving LM will then be q LM LS 1 À v=c2 where LS > LM .

VELOCITY ADDITION FORMULA: Figure 41-1 shows a coordinate system S H moving at a speed vO H O with respect to a coordinate system S. Now consider an object at point P moving in the x-direction at a speed vPO H relative to point O H . The speed of the object with respect to O is not the classical value of vPO H vO H O , but instead vPO vPO H vO H O v Hv H 1 PO 2 O O c

Notice that even when vPO H vO H O c the value of vPO c.

376

RELATIVITY

[CHAP. 41

Fig. 41-1

Solved Problems
41.1 How fast must an object be moving if its corresponding value of is to be 1.0 percent larger than is when the object is at rest? Give your answer to two signi®cant ®gures. q Use the de®nition 1= 1 À v=c2 to ®nd that at v 0, 1:0. Hence the new value of 1:011:0, and so 2 1 2 1À v 0:980 c 1:01

Solving gives v 0:14c 4:2 Â 107 m/s.

41.2

Compute the value of for a particle traveling at half the speed of light. Give your answer to three signi®cant ®gures.
1 1 1 1 1:15 q q p 2 2 0:750 0:866 1 À v=c 1 À 0:500

41.3

If 1.00 g of matter could be converted entirely into energy, what would be the value of the energy so produced, at 10.0 cents per kW Á h?
We make use of ÁE0 Ámc2 to ®nd Energy gained (mass lost) c2 1:00 Â 10À3 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s2 8:99 Â 1013 J 1 kW Á h 6 0:10 6 2:50 Â 106 Value of energy 8:99 Â 1013 J 3:600 Â 106 J kW Á h

41.4

A 2.0 kg object is lifted from the ¯oor to a tabletop 30 cm above the ¯oor. By how much did the mass of the system consisting of the Earth and the object increase because of this increased PEG ?
We use ÁE0 Ámc2 , with ÁE0 mgh. Therefore, Ám ÁE0 mgh 2:0 kg9:81 m=s2 0:30 m 2 6:5 Â 10À17 kg c2 c 2:998 Â 108 m=s2

CHAP. 41]

RELATIVITY

377

41.5

An electron is accelerated from rest through a potential dierence of 1.5 MV and thereby acquires 1.5 MeV of energy. Find its ®nal speed.
Using KE mc2 À mc2 and the fact that KE ÁPEE we have KE 1:5 Â 106 eV1:6 Â 10À19 J=eV 2:4 Â 10À13 J Then m À m KE 2:4 Â 10À13 J 2:67 Â 10À30 kg 2 c 2:998 Â 108 m=s2

But m 9:11 Â 10À31 kg and so m 3:58 Â 10À30 kg. q To ®nd its speed, we use 1= 1 À v=c2 , which gives us 2 2 0:912 1 m 1 À v m 0:064 6 c 3:58
2 p from which v c 1 À 0:064 6 0:967c 2:9 Â 108 m=s

41.6

Determine the energy required to give an electron a speed 0.90 that of light, starting from rest.
P Q P Q m 1 T U T U KE m À mc2 Rq À mSc2 mc2 Rq À 1S 2 2 1 À v=c 1 À v=c P Q 1 T U 9:11 Â 10À31 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s2 Rq À 1S 1:06 Â 10À13 J 0:66 MeV 2 1 À 0:90

41.7

Show that KE m À mc2 reduces to KE 1 mv2 when v is very much smaller than c. 2
P2 3À1=2 Q m v2 T U 2 2R KE m À mc Rq À mSc mc 1À 2 À1S c 1 À v=c2
2

P

Q

Let b Àv2 =c2 and expand 1 bÀ1=2 by the binomial theorem: À1=2À3=2 2 1 v2 3 v4 b ÁÁÁ 1 ÁÁÁ 1 bÀ1=2 1 À1=2b 23 2 c2 8 c4 42 3 5 1 v2 3 v4 1 3 v2 KE mc2 1 Á Á Á À 1 mv2 mv2 2 Á Á Á 2 4 2 c 8 c 2 8 c

Then

If v is very much smaller than c, the terms after 1 mv2 are negligibly small. 2

41.8

An electron traveling at relativistic speed moves perpendicularly to a magnetic ®eld of 0.20 T. Its path is circular, with a radius of 15 m. Find (a) the momentum, (b) the speed, and (c) the kinetic energy of the electron. Recall that, in nonrelativistic situations, the magnetic force qvB furnishes the centripetal force mv2 =r. Thus, since p mv it follows that p qBr and this relation holds even when relativistic eects are important.
First ®nd the momentum using p qBr a p 1:60 Â 10À19 C0:20 T15 m 4:8 Â 10À19 kg Á m=s

378

RELATIVITY

[CHAP. 41

(b)

p Because p mv= 1 À v2 =c2 with m 9:11 Â 10À31 kg, we have mcv=c 4:8 Â 10À19 kg Á m=s p 1 À v2 =c2 Squaring both sides and solving for v=c2 give v2 1 2 1 3:23 Â 10À7 c or v 1 p c 1 3:23 Â 10À7

p Most hand calculators cannot handle this. Accordingly, we make use of the fact that 1= 1 x % 1 À 1 x 2 for x ( 1. Then v=c % 1 À 1:61 Â 10À7 0:999 999 84 4 5 1 2 2 KE m À mc m c p À 1 1 À v2 =c2 But we already found v=c2 1=1 3:23 Â 10À7 . If we use the approximation 1=1 x % 1 À x for x ( 1, we have v=c2 % 1 À 3:23 Â 10À7 . Then 1 KE mc2 p À 1 mc2 1:76 Â 103 3:23 Â 10À7 Evaluating the above expression yields KE 1:4 Â 10À10 J 9:0 Â 108 eV An alternative solution method would be to use E2 p2 c2 m2 c4 and recall that KE E À mc2

c

41.9

The Sun radiates energy equally in all directions. At the position of the Earth r 1:50 Â 1011 m, the Sun's radiation is 1.4 kW/m2. How much mass does the Sun lose per day because of the radiation?
The area of a spherical shell centered on the Sun and passing through the Earth is Area 4r2 41:50 Â 1011 m2 2:83 Â 1023 m2 Through each square meter of this area, the Sun radiates an energy per second of 1.4 kW/m2. Therefore the Sun's total radiation per second is Energy=s area1400 W=m2 3:96 Â 1026 W The energy radiated in one day (86 400 s) is Energy=day 3:96 Â 1026 W86 400 s=day 3:42 Â 1031 J=day Because mass and energy are related through ÁE0 Ámc2 , the mass loss per day is Ám ÁE0 3:42 Â 1031 J 3:8 Â 1014 kg 2 c 2:998 Â 108 m=s2

For comparison, the Sun's mass is 2 Â 1030 kg.

41.10 A beam of radioactive particles is measured as it shoots through the laboratory. It is found that, on the average, each particle ``lives'' for a time of 2:0 Â 10À8 s; after that time, the particle changes to a new form. When at rest in the laboratory, the same particles ``live'' 0:75 Â 10À8 s on the average. How fast are the particles in the beam moving?
Some sort of timing mechanism within the particle determines how long it ``lives''. This internal clock, which gives the proper lifetime, must obey the time-dilation relation. We have ÁtM ÁtS where the observer with respect to whom the particle (clock) is moving sees a time interval of ÁtM 2:0 Â 10À8 s. Hence

CHAP. 41]

RELATIVITY

379

2:0 Â 10À8 s
0:75 Â 10À8 s

or

q 0:75 Â 10À8 2:0 Â 10À8 1 À v=c2

Squaring both sides of the equation and solving for v gives v 0:927c 2:8 Â 108 m/s.

41.11 Two twins are 25.0 years old when one of them sets out on a journey through space at nearly constant speed. The twin in the spaceship measures time with an accurate watch. When he returns to Earth, he claims to be 31.0 years old, while the twin left on Earth knows that she is 43.0 years old. What was the speed of the spaceship?
The spaceship clock as seen by the space-twin reads the trip time to be ÁtS which is 6.0 years long. The Earth bound twin sees her brother age 6.0 years but her clocks tell her that a time ÁtM 18:0 years has actually passed. Hence ÁtM ÁtS becomes q 6 18 1 À v=c2 from which v=c2 1 À 0:111 or v 0:943c 2:83 Â 108 m=s

41.12 Two cells that subdivide on Earth every 10.0 s start from the Earth on a journey to the Sun 1:50 Â 1011 m away) in a spacecraft moving at 0.850c. How many cells will exist when the spacecraft crashes into the Sun?
According to Earth observers, with respect to whom the cells are moving, the time taken for the trip to the Sun is the distance traveled x over the speed v, ÁtM x 1:50 Â 1011 m 588 s v 0:8502:998 Â 108 m=s

Because spacecraft clocks are moving with respect to the planet, they appear from Earth to run more slowly. The time these clocks read is q ÁtS ÁtM = ÁtM 1 À v=c2 and so ÁtS 310 s

The cells divide according to the spacecraft clock, a clock that is at rest relative to them. They therefore undergo 31 divisions in this time, since they divide each 10.0 s. Therefore the total number of cells present on crashing is 231 2:1 Â 109 cells

41.13 A person in a spaceship holds a meterstick as the ship shoots past the Earth with a speed v parallel to the Earth's surface. What does the person in the ship notice as the stick is rotated from parallel to perpendicular to the ship's motion?
The stick behaves normally; it does not change its length, because it has no translational motion relative to the in the spaceship. However, an observer on Earth would measure the stick to be q observer (1 m) 1 À v=c2 long when it is parallel to the ship's motion, and 1 m long when it is perpendicular to the ship's motion.

41.14 A spacecraft moving at 0.95c travels from the Earth to the star Alpha Centauri, which is 4.5 light years away. How long will the trip take according to (a) Earth clocks and (b) spacecraft clocks? (c) How far is it from Earth to the star according to spacecraft occupants? (d ) What do they compute their speed to be?

380

RELATIVITY

[CHAP. 41

A light year is the distance light travels in 1 year, namely 1 light year 2:998 Â 108 m=s3:16 Â 107 s 9:47 Â 1015 m Hence the distance to the star (according to earthlings) is de 4:59:47 Â 1015 m 4:3 Â 1016 m a (b) Áte de 4:3 Â 1016 m 1:5 Â 108 s v 0:952:998 Â 108 m=s

Because clocks on the moving spacecraft run slower, q Átcraft Áte 1 À v=c2 1:51 Â 108 s0:312 4:7 Â 107 s For the spacecraft occupants, the Earth±star distance is moving past them with speed 0.95c. Therefore that distance is shortened for them; they ®nd it to be q dcraft 4:3 Â 1016 m 1 À 0:952 1:3 Â 1016 m dcraft 1:34 Â 1016 m 2:8 Â 108 m=s Átcraft 4:71 Â 107 s

(c)

(d ) For the spacecraft occupants, their relative speed is v

which is 0.95c. Both Earth and spacecraft observers measure the same relative speed.

41.15 As a rocket ship sweeps past the Earth with speed v, it sends out a pulse of light ahead of it. How fast does the light pulse move according to people on the Earth?
Method 1 With speed c (by the second postulate of Special Relativity). Method 2 Here vO H O v and vPO H c. According to the velocity addition formula, the observed speed will be (since u c in this case) vPO vPO H vO H O vc v cc c v Hv H cv 1 PO 2 O O 1 v=c c

Supplementary Problems
41.16 41.17 41.18 At what speed must a particle move for to be 2.0? Ans. 2:6 Â 108 m/s Ans. 7.1

A particle is traveling at a speed v such that v=c 0:99. Find for the particle.

Compute the rest energy of an electron, i.e., the energy equivalent of its mass, 9:11 Â 10À31 kg. Ans. 0:512 MeV 820 pJ Determine the speed of an electron having a kinetic energy of 1:0 Â 105 eV or equivalently 1:6 Â 10À14 J. Ans. 1:6 Â 108 m/s A proton m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg is accelerated to a kinetic energy of 200 MeV. What is its speed at this energy? Ans. 1:70 Â 108 m/s

41.19

41.20

CHAP. 41]

RELATIVITY

381

41.21 41.22

Starting with the de®nition of linear momentum and the relation between mass and energy, prove that p E2 p2 c2 m2 c4 . Use this relation to show that the translational KE of a particle is m2 c4 p2 c2 À mc2 . A certain strain of bacteria doubles in number each 20 days. Two of these bacteria are placed on a spaceship and sent away from the Earth for 1000 Earth-days. During this time, the speed of the ship is 0.9950c. How many bacteria are aboard when the ship lands on the Earth? Ans. 64 A certain light source sends out 2 Â 1015 pulses each second. As a spaceship travels parallel to the Earth's surface with a speed of 0.90 c, it uses this source to send pulses to the Earth. The pulses are sent perpendicular to the path of the ship. How many pulses are recorded on Earth each second? Ans. 8:7 Â 1014 pulses/s The insignia painted on the side of a spaceship is a circle with a line across it at 458 to the vertical. As the ship shoots past another ship in space, with a relative speed of 0.95c, the second ship observes the insignia. What angle does the observed line make to the vertical? Ans. tan 0:31 and 178 As a spacecraft moving at 0.92c travels past an observer on Earth, the Earthbound observer and the occupants of the craft each start identical alarm clocks that are set to ring after 6.0 h have passed. According to the Earthling, what does the Earth clock read when the spacecraft clock rings? Ans. 15 h Find the speed and momentum of a proton m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg that has been accelerated through a potential dierence of 2000 MV. (We call this a 2 GeV proton.) Give your answers to three signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 0.948c, 1:49 Â 10À18 kg Á m=s

41.23

41.24

41.25

41.26

Chapter 42
Quantum Physics and Wave Mechanics
QUANTA OF RADIATION: All the various forms of electromagnetic radiation, including light, have a dual nature. When traveling through space, they act like waves and give rise to interference and diraction eects. But when electromagnetic radiation interacts with atoms and molecules, the beam acts like a stream of energy corpuscles called photons or light-quanta. The energy (E) of each photon depends upon the frequency f (or wavelength j) of the radiation: hc j J Á s is a constant of nature called Planck's constant. E hf

where h 6:626 Â 10À34

PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT: When electromagnetic radiation is incident on the surface of certain metals electrons may be ejected. A photon of energy hf penetrates the material and is absorbed by an electron. If enough energy is available, the electron will be raised to the surface and ejected with some kinetic energy, 1 mv2 . Depending on how deep in the material they are, elec2 trons having a range of values of KE will be emitted. Let be the energy required for an electron to break free of the surface, the so-called work function. For electrons up near the surface to begin with, an amount of energy hf À will be available and this is the maximum kinetic energy that can be imparted to any electron. Accordingly, Einstein's photoelectric equation is
2 1 2 mvmax

hf À

The energy of the ejected electron may be found by determining what potential dierence must be applied to stop its motion; then 1 mv2 V e. For the most energetic electron, s 2 hf À V e s where V is called the stopping potential. s For any surface, the radiation must be of short enough wavelength so that the photon energy hf is large enough to eject the electron. At the threshold wavelength (or frequency), the photon's energy just equals the work function. For ordinary metals the threshold wavelength lies in the visible or ultraviolet range. X-rays will eject photoelectrons readily; far-infrared photons will not. THE MOMENTUM OF A PHOTON: since E hf Because E2 m2 c4 p2 c2 , when m 0, E pc. Hence, and p hf h c j

E p c hf The momentum of a photon is p h=j:

COMPTON EFFECT: A photon can collide with a particle having mass, such as an electron. When it does so, the scattered photon can have a new energy and momentum. If a photon of initial wavelength ji collides with a free, stationary electron of mass me and is de¯ected through an angle , then its scattered wavelength is increased to js , where js ji h 1 À cos me c 382
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 42]

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

383

The fractional change in wavelength is very small except for high-energy radiation such as X-rays or
-rays.

DE BROGLIE WAVES: A particle of mass m moving with momentum p has associated with it a de Broglie wavelength j h h p mv

A beam of particles can be diracted and can undergo interference phenomena. These wavelike properties of particles can be computed by assuming the particles to behave like waves (de Broglie waves) having the de Broglie wavelength.

RESONANCE OF DE BROGLIE WAVES: A particle that is con®ned to a ®nite region of space is said to be a bound particle. Typical examples of bound-particle systems are a gas molecule in a closed container and an electron in an atom. The de Broglie wave that represents a bound particle will undergo resonance within the con®nement region if the wavelength ®ts properly into the region. We call each possible resonance form a (stationary) state of the system. The particle is most likely to be found at the positions of the antinodes of the resonating wave; it is never found at the positions of the nodes.

QUANTIZED ENERGIES for bound particles arise because each resonance situation has a discrete energy associated with it. Since the particle is likely to be found only in a resonance state, its observed energies are discrete (quantized). Only in atomic (and smaller) particle systems are the energy dierences between resonance states large enough to be easily observable.

Solved Problems
42.1 Show that the photons in a 1240 nm infrared light beam have energies of 1.00 eV.
E hf hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 1:602 Â 10À19 J 1:00 eV j 1240 Â 10À9 m

42.2

Compute the energy of a photon of blue light of wavelength 450 nm.
E hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 4:42 Â 10À19 J 2:76 eV j 450 Â 10À9 m

42.3

To break a chemical bond in the molecules of human skin and thus cause sunburn, a photon energy of about 3.50 eV is required. To what wavelength does this correspond? j hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 354 nm E 3:50 eV1:602 Â 10À19 J=eV

Ultravoilet radiation causes sunburn.

384

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

[CHAP. 42

42.4

The work function of sodium metal is 2.3 eV. What is the longest-wavelength light that can cause photoelectron emission from sodium?
At threshold, the photon energy just equals the energy required to tear the electron loose from the metal, namely the work function : hc j

2 3 1:602 Â 10À19 J 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 2:3 eV 1:00 eV j j 5:4 Â 10À7 m

42.5

What potential dierence must be applied to stop the fastest photoelectrons emitted by a nickel surface under the action of ultraviolet light of wavelength 200 nm? The work function of nickel is 5.01 eV.
E hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 9:95 Â 10À19 J 6:21 eV j 2000 Â 10À10 m 6:21 eV À 5:01 eV 1:20 eV Hence a negative retarding potential of 1.20 V is required. This is the stopping potential.

Then, from the photoelectric equation, the energy of the fastest emitted electron is

42.6

Will photoelectrons be emitted by a copper surface, of work function 4.4 eV, when illuminated by visible light?
As in Problem 42.4, Threshold j hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 282 nm 4:41:602 Â 10À19 J

Hence visible light (400 nm to 700 nm) cannot eject photoelectrons from copper.

42.7

A beam j 633 nm from a typical laser designed for student use has an intensity of 3.0 mW. How many photons pass a given point in the beam each second?
The energy that is carried past the point each second is 0.0030 J. Because the energy per photon is hc=j, which works out to be 3:14 Â 10À19 J, the number of photons passing the point per second is Number=s 0:003 0 J=s 9:5 Â 1015 photon=s 3:14 Â 10À19 J=photon

42.8

In a process called pair production, a photon is transformed into an electron and a positron. A positron has the same mass as the electron, but its charge is e. To three signi®cant ®gures, what is the minimum energy a photon can have if this process is to occur? What is the corresponding wavelength?
The photon must have the energy equivalent of the mass into which it transforms, which is mc2 29:11 Â 10À31 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s2 1:64 Â 10À13 J 1:02 MeV Then, because this energy must equal hc=j, hc 1:21 Â 10À12 m 1:64 Â 10À13 J This wavelength is in the very short X-ray region, the region of rays. j

CHAP. 42]

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

385

42.9

What wavelength must electromagnetic radiation have if a photon in the beam is to have the same momentum as an electron moving with a speed of 2:00 Â 105 m/s?
The requirement is that mvelectron h=jphoton . From this, j h 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s 3:64 nm mv 9:11 Â 10À31 kg2:00 Â 105 m=s

This wavelength is in the X-ray region.

42.10 Suppose that a 3.64-nm photon moving in the x-direction collides head-on with a 2 Â 105 m/s electron moving in the Àx-direction. If the collision is perfectly elastic, ®nd the conditions after collision.
From the law of conservation of momentum, momentum before momentum after h h À mv0 À mv j0 j But, from Problem 42.9, h=j0 mv0 in this case. Hence, h=j mv. Also, for a perfectly elastic collision, KE before KE after hc 1 2 hc 1 2 mv mv j0 2 0 j 2 Using the facts that h=j0 mv0 and h=j mv, we ®nd v0 c 1 v0 vc 1 v 2 2 Therefore v v0 and the electron moves in the x-direction with its original speed. Because h=j mv mv0 , the photon also ``rebounds,'' and with its original wavelength.

42.11 A photon j 0:400 nm strikes an electron at rest and rebounds at an angle of 1508 to its original direction. Find the speed and wavelength of the photon after the collision.
The speed of a photon is always the speed of light in vacuum, c. To obtain the wavelength after collision, we use the equation for the Compton eect: js ji h 1 À cos mc

js 4:00 Â 10À10 m

6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s 1 À cos 1508 9:11 Â 10À31 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s

js 4:00 Â 10À10 m 2:43 Â 10À12 m1 0:866 0:405 nm

42.12 What is the de Broglie wavelength for a particle moving with speed 2:0 Â 106 m/s if the particle is (a) an electron, (b) a proton, and (c) a 0.20 kg ball?
We make use of the de®nition of the de Broglie wavelength: j h 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s 3:31 Â 10À40 m Á kg 6 m=s mv m2:0 Â 10 m

Substituting the required values for m, one ®nds that the wavelength is 3:6 Â 10À10 m for the electron, 2:0 Â 10À13 m for the proton, and 1:7 Â 10À39 m for the 0.20-kg ball.

42.13 An electron falls from rest through a potential dierence of 100 V. What is its de Broglie wavelength?

386

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

[CHAP. 42

Its speed will still be far below c, so relativistic eects can be ignored. The KE gained, 1 mv2 , equals the 2 electrical PE lost, Vq. Therefore, r s 2Vq 2100 V1:60 Â 10À19 C v 5:927 Â 106 m=s m 9:11 Â 10À31 kg and j h 6:626 Â 10À34 J Á s 0:123 nm mv 9:11 Â 10À31 kg5:927 Â 106 m=s

42.14 What potential dierence is required in an electron microscope to give electrons a wavelength of Ê 0.500 A?
2 1 1 h h2 KE of electron mv2 m 2 2 mj 2mj2 where use has been made of the de Broglie relation, j h=mv. Substitution of the known values gives the KE as 9:66 Â 10À17 J. But KE Vq, and so V KE 9:66 Â 10À17 J 600 V q 1:60 Â 10À19 C

42.15 What are the KE and wavelength of a thermal neutron?
By de®nition, a thermal neutron is a free neutron in a neutron gas at about 20 8C (293 K). From Chapter 17, the thermal energy of a gas molecule is 3kT=2, where k is Boltzmann's constant 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K. Then KE 3 kT 6:07 Â 10À21 J 2 This is a nonrelativistic situation for which we can write 1 m2 v2 p2 KE mv2 2 2m 2m Then j or p2 2mKE

h h 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s p p 0:147 nm p 2mKE 21:67 Â 10À27 kg6:07 Â 10À21 J

42.16 Find the pressure exerted on a surface by the photon beam of Problem 42.7 if the cross-sectional area of the beam is 3.0 mm2 . Assume perfect re¯ection at normal incidence.
Each photon has a momentum h 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s 1:05 Â 10À27 kg Á m=s j 633 Â 10À9 m When a photon re¯ects, it changes momentum from p to Àp, a total change of 2p. Since (from Problem 42.7) 9:5 Â 1015 photons strike the surface each second, we have p Momentum change/s 9:5 Â 1015 =s21:05 Â 10À27 kg Á m=s 2:0 Â 10À11 kg Á m=s2 From the impulse equation (Chapter 8), Impulse Ft change in momentum we have Then F momentum change/s 1:99 Â 10À11 kg Á m=s2 Pressure F 1:99 Â 10À11 kg Á m=s2 6:6 Â 10À6 N=m2 A 3:0 Â 10À6 m2

CHAP. 42]

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

387

42.17 A particle of mass m is con®ned to a narrow tube of length L. Find (a) the wavelengths of the de Broglie waves which will resonate in the tube, (b) the corresponding particle momenta, and (c) the corresponding energies. (d ) Evaluate the energies for an electron in a tube with L 0:50 nm.
(a) The de Broglie waves will resonate with a node at each end of the tube because the ends are impervious. A few of the possible resonance forms are shown in Fig. 42-1. They indicate that, for resonance, L 1 j1 , 21 j2 , 31 j3 , F F F, n1 jn ; F F F or 2 2 2 2 jn (b) 2L n nh 2L n2 h2 8L2 m n 1; 2; 3; F F F

Because the de Broglie wavelengths are jn h=pn , the resonance momenta are pn n 1; 2; 3; F F F

(c)

As shown in Problem 42.15, p2 2m(KE), and so KEn n 1; 2; 3; F F F

Notice that the particle can assume only certain discrete energies. The energies are quantized. (d ) With m 9:1 Â 10À31 kg and L 5:0 Â 10À10 m, substitution gives KEn 2:4 Â 10À19 n2 J 1:5n2 eV

Fig. 42-1

42.18 A particle of mass m is con®ned to an orbit with radius R. For resonance of its de Broglie wave on this orbit, what energies can the particle have? Evaluate for an electron with R 0:50 nm.
To resonate on a circular orbit, a wave must circle back on itself in such a way that crest falls upon crest and trough falls upon trough. One resonance possibility (for an orbit circumference that is four wavelengths long) is shown in Fig. 42-2. In general, resonance occurs when the circumference is n wavelengths long, where n 1; 2; 3; F F F . For such a de Broglie wave we have njn 2R and pn h nh jn 2R

388

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

[CHAP. 42

Fig. 42-2

As in Problem 42.17, KEn p2 n2 h2 n 2 2 2m 8 R m

The energies are obviously quantized. Placing in the values requested gives KEn 2:4 Â 10À20 n2 J 0:15n2 eV

Supplementary Problems
42.19 Compute the energy of a photon of blue light j 450 nm, in joules and in eV. 2:76 eV What is the wavelength of light in which the photons have an energy of 600 eV? Ans. 4:41 Â 10À19 J

42.20 42.21

Ans. 2.07 nm

A certain sodium lamp radiates 20 W of yellow light j 589 nm. How many photons of the yellow light are emitted from the lamp each second? Ans. 5:9 Â 1019 What is the work function of sodium metal if the photoelectric threshold wavelength is 680 nm? Ans. 1.82 eV Determine the maximum KE of photoelectrons ejected from a potassium surface by ultraviolet radiation of wavelength 200 nm. What retarding potential dierence is required to stop the emission of electrons? The photoelectric threshold wavelength for potassium is 440 nm. Ans. 3.38 eV, 3.38 V With what speed will the fastest photoelectrons be emitted from a surface whose threshold wavelength is 600 nm, when the surface is illuminated with light of wavelength 4 Â 10À7 m? Ans. 6 Â 105 m/s

42.22

42.23

42.24

CHAP. 42]

QUANTUM PHYSICS AND WAVE MECHANICS

389

42.25

Electrons with a maximum KE of 3.00 eV are ejected from a metal surface by ultraviolet radiation of wavelength 150 nm. Determine the work function of the metal, the threshold wavelength of the metal, and the retarding potential dierence required to stop the emission of electrons. Ans. 5.27 eV, 235 nm, 3.00 V What are the speed and momentum of a 500-nm photon? Ans. 2:998 Â 108 m/s, 133 Â 10À27 kg Á m=s

42.26 42.27

An X-ray beam with a wavelength of exactly 5:00 Â 10À14 m strikes a proton that is at rest m 1:67 Â 10À27 kg. If the X-rays are scattered through an angle of 1108, what is the wavelength of the scattered X-rays? Ans. 5:18 Â 10À14 m An electron-positron pair, each with a kinetic energy of 220 keV, is produced by a photon. Find the energy and wavelength of the photon. Ans. 1.46 MeV, 8:49 Â 10À13 m Show that the p de Broglie wavelength of an electron accelerated from rest through a potential dierence of V volts is 1:226= V nm. Compute the de Broglie wavelength of an electron that has been accelerated through a potential dierence of 9.0 kV. Ignore relativistic eects. Ans. 1:3 Â 10À11 m What is the de Broglie wavelength of an electron that has been accelerated through a potential dierence of 1.0 MV? (You must use the relativistic mass and energy expressions at this high energy.) Ans. 8:7 Â 10À13 m It is proposed to send a beam of electrons through a diraction grating. The electrons have a speed of 400 m/s. How large must the distance between slits be if a strong beam of electrons is to emerge at an angle of 258 to the straight-through beam? Ans. n4:3 Â 10À6 m, where n 1; 2; 3; F F F :

42.28 42.29 42.30 42.31

42.32

Chapter 43
The Hydrogen Atom
THE HYDROGEN ATOM has a diameter of about 0.1 nm; it consists of a proton as the nucleus (with a radius of about 10À15 m) and a single electron. ELECTRON ORBITS: The ®rst eective model of the atom was introduced by Niels Bohr in 1913. Although it has been surpassed by quantum mechanics, many of its simple results are still valid. The earliest version of the Bohr model pictured electrons in circular orbits around the nucleus. The hydrogen atom was then one electron circulating around a single proton. For the electron's de Broglie wave to resonate or ``®t'' (see Fig. 42-2) in an orbit of radius r, the following must be true (see Problem 42.18): nh 2 where n is an integer. The quantity mvn rn is the angular momentum of the electron in its nth orbit. The speed of the electron is v, its mass is m, and h is Planck's constant, 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s: The centripetal force that holds the electron in orbit is supplied by Coulomb attraction between the nucleus and the electron. Hence, F ke2 =r2 ma mv2 =rn and n mvn rn mv2 e2 n k 2 rn r Simultaneous solution of these equations gives the radii of stable orbits as rn 0:053 nmn2 . The energy of the atom when it is in the nth state (i.e., with its electron in the nth orbit con®guration) is 13:6 eV n2 As in Problems 42.17 and 42.18, the energy is quantized because a stable con®guration corresponds to a resonance form of the bound system. For a nucleus with charge Ze orbited by a single electron, the corresponding relations are 2 3 n2 13:6Z 2 rn 0:053 nm eV and En À Z n2 En À where Z is called the atomic number of the nucleus. ENERGY-LEVEL DIAGRAMS summarize the allowed energies of a system. On a vertical energy scale, the allowed energies are shown by horizontal lines. The energy-level diagram for hydrogen is shown in Fig. 43-1. Each horizontal line represents the energy of a resonance state of the atom. The zero of energy is taken to be the ionized atom, i.e., the state in which the atom has in®nite orbital radius. As the electron falls closer to the nucleus, its potential energy decreases from the zero level, and thus the energy of the atom is negative as indicated. The lowest possible state, n 1, corresponds to the electron in its smallest possible orbit; it is called the ground state. EMISSION OF LIGHT: When an isolated atom falls from one energy level to a lower one, a photon is emitted. This photon carries away the energy lost by the atom in its transition to the lower energy state. The wavelength and frequency of the photon are given by hf hc energy lost by the system j 390
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 43]

THE HYDROGEN ATOM

391

Fig. 43-1

The emitted radiation has a precise wavelength and gives rise to a single spectral line in the emission spectrum of the atom. It is convenient to remember that a 1240 nm photon has an energy of 1 eV, and that photon energy varies inversely with wavelength.

THE SPECTRAL LINES emitted by excited isolated hydrogen atoms occur in series. Typical is the series that appears at visible wavelengths, the Balmer series shown in Fig. 43-2. Other series exist; one, in the ultraviolet, is called the Lyman series; there are others in the infrared, the one closest to the visible portion of the spectrum being the Paschen series. Their wavelengths are given by simple formulas: Lyman: Balmer: Paschen: 1 1 1 R 2À 2 j 1 n 1 1 1 R 2À 2 j 2 n 1 1 1 R 2À 2 j 3 n n 2; 3; F F F n 3; 4; F F F n 4; 5; F F F

where R 1:097 4 Â 107 mÀ1 is called the Rydberg constant.

ORIGIN OF SPECTRAL SERIES: The Balmer series of lines in Fig. 43-2 arises when an electron in the atom falls from higher states to the n 2 state. The transition from n 3 to n 2 gives rise to a photon energy ÁE3;2 1:89 eV, which is equivalent to a wavelength of 656 nm, the ®rst line of the series. The second line originates in the transition from n 4 to n 2. The series limit line represents the transition from n I to n 2. Similarly, transitions ending in the n 1 state give rise to the Lyman series; transitions that end in the n 3 state give lines in the Paschen series.

392

THE HYDROGEN ATOM

[CHAP. 43

Fig. 43-2

ABSORPTION OF LIGHT: An atom in its ground state can absorb a photon in a process called resonance absorption only if that photon will raise the atom to one of its allowed energy levels.

Solved Problems
43.1 What wavelength does a hydrogen atom emit as its excited electron falls from the n 5 state to the n 2 state? Give your answer to three signi®cant ®gures.
Since En À13:6=n2 eV, we have E5 À0:54 eV and E2 À3:40 eV The energy dierence between these states is 3:40 À 0:54 2:86 eV. Because 1240 nm corresponds to 1.00 eV in an inverse proportion, we have, for the wavelength of the emitted photon,

j

1:00 eV 1240 nm 434 nm 2:86 eV

43.2

When a hydrogen atom is bombarded, the atom may be raised into a higher energy state. As the excited electron falls back to the lower energy levels, light is emitted. What are the three longest-

CHAP. 43]

THE HYDROGEN ATOM

393

wavelength spectral lines emitted by the hydrogen atom as it returns to the n 1 state from higher energy states? Give your answers to three signi®cant ®gures.
We are interested in the following transitions (see Fig. 43-1): n23n1X n33n1X n43n1X ÁE2;1 À3:4 À À13:6 10:2 eV ÁE3;1 À1:5 À À13:6 12:1 eV ÁE4;1 À0:85 À À13:6 12:8 eV

To ®nd the corresponding wavelengths we can proceed as in Problem 43.1, or we can use ÁE hf hc=j. For example, for the n 2 to n 1 transition, j hc 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s2:998 Â 108 m=s 1:22 nm ÁE2;1 10:2 eV1:60 Â 10À19 J=eV

The other lines are found in the same way to be 102 nm and 96.9 nm. These are the ®rst three lines of the Lyman series.

43.3

The series limit wavelength of the Balmer series is emitted as the electron in the hydrogen atom falls from the n I state to the n 2 state. What is the wavelength of this line (to three signi®cant ®gures)?
From Fig. 43-1, ÁE 3:40 À 0 3:40 eV. We ®nd the corresponding wavelength in the usual way from ÁE hc=j: The result is 365 nm.

43.4

What is the greatest wavelength of radiation that will ionize unexcited hydrogen atoms?
The incident photons must have enough energy to raise the atom from the n 1 level to the n I level when absorbed by the atom. Because EI À E1 13:6 eV, we can use EI À E1 hc=j to ®nd the wavelength as 91.2 nm. Wavelengths shorter than this would not only remove the electron from the atom, but would add KE to the removed electron.

43.5

The energy levels for singly ionized helium atoms (atoms from which one of the two electrons has been removed) are given by En À54:4=n2 eV. Construct the energy-level diagram for this system.
See Fig. 43-3.

Fig. 43-3

394

THE HYDROGEN ATOM

[CHAP. 43

43.6

What are the two longest wavelengths of the Balmer series for singly ionized helium atoms?
The pertinent energy-level diagram is shown in Fig. 43-3. Recall that the Balmer series corresponds to transitions from higher states to the n 2 state. From the diagram, the two smallest-energy transitions to the n 2 states are n33n2 n43n2 ÁE3;2 13:6 À 6:04 7:6 eV ÁE4;2 13:6 À 3:4 10:2 eV

Using the fact that 1 eV corresponds to 1240 nm, we ®nd the corresponding wavelengths to be 163 nm and 122 nm; both wavelengths are in the far ultraviolet or long X-ray region.

43.7

Unexcited hydrogen atoms are bombarded with electrons that have been accelerated through 12.0 V. What wavelengths will the atoms emit?
When an atom in the ground state is given 12.0 eV of energy, the most these electrons can supply, the atom can be excited no higher than 12.0 eV above the ground state. Only one state exists in this energy region, the n 2 state. Hence the only transition possible is n 2 3 n 1X The only emitted wavelength will be j 1240 nm ÁE2;1 13:6 À 3:4 10:2 eV 1:00 eV 122 nm 10:2 eV

which is the longest-wavelength line in the Lyman series.

43.8

Unexcited hydrogen gas is an electrical insulator because it contains no free electrons. What maximum-wavelength photon beam incident on the gas can cause the gas to conduct electricity?
The photons in the beam must ionize the atom so as to produce free electrons. (This is called the atomic photoelectric eect.) To do this, the photon energy must be at least 13.6 eV, and so the maximum wavelength is 1:00 eV j 1240 nm 91:2 nm 13:6 eV which is the series limit for the Lyman series.

Supplementary Problems
43.9 One spectral line in the hydrogen spectrum has a wavelength of 821 nm. What is the energy dierence between the two states that gives rise to this line? Ans. 1.51 eV What are the energies of the two longest-wavelength lines in the Paschen series for hydrogen? What are the corresponding wavelengths? Give your answers to two signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 0.66 eV and 0.97 eV, 1:9 Â 10À6 m and 1:3 Â 10À6 m What is the wavelength of the series limit line for the hydrogen Paschen series? Ans. 821 nm

43.10

43.11 43.12

The lithium atom has a nuclear charge of 3e. Find the energy required to remove the third electron from a lithium atom that has already lost two of its electrons. Assume the third electron to be initially in the ground state. Ans. 122 eV

CHAP. 43]

THE HYDROGEN ATOM

395

43.13

Electrons in an electron beam are accelerated through a potential dierence V and are incident on hydrogen atoms in their ground state. What is the maximum value for V if the collisions are to be perfectly elastic? Ans. < 10:2 V What are the three longest wavelengths that singly ionized helium atoms (in their ground state) will absorb strongly? (See Fig. 43-3.) Ans. 30.4 nm, 25.6 nm, 24.3 nm How much energy is required to remove the second electron from a singly ionized helium atom? What is the maximum wavelength of an incident photon that could tear this electron from the ion? Ans. 54.4 eV, 22.8 nm In the spectrum of singly ionized helium, what is the series limit for its Balmer series? Ans. 91 nm

43.14 43.15

43.16

Chapter 44
Multielectron Atoms
A NEUTRAL ATOM whose nucleus carries a positive charge of Ze has Z electrons. When the electrons have the least energy possible, the atom is in its ground state. The state of an atom is speci®ed by the quantum numbers for its individual electrons.

THE QUANTUM NUMBERS that are used to specify the parameters of an atomic electron are as follows:
. The principal quantum number n speci®es the orbit, or shell, in which the electron is to be found. In the hydrogen atom, it speci®es the electron's energy via En À13:6=n2 eV. . The orbital quantum number ` speci®es the angular momentum L of the electron in its orbit: h p L `` 1 2

where h is Planck's constant, and ` 0; 1; 2; F F F ; n À 1. . The magnetic quantum number m` describes the orientation of the orbital angular momentum vector relative to the z direction, the direction of an impressed magnetic ®eld: h Lz m` 2 where m` 0, Æ1, Æ2, F F F, Æ`: . The spin quantum number ms has allowed values of Æ 1. 2

THE PAULI EXCLUSION PRINCIPLE maintains that no two electrons in the same atom can have the same set of quantum numbers. In other words, no two electrons can be in the same state.

Solved Problems
44.1 Estimate the energy required to tear an n 1 (i.e., inner-shell) electron from a gold atom Z 79.
Because an electron in the innermost shell of the atom is not much in¯uenced by distant electrons in outer shells, we can consider it to be the only electron present. Then its energy is given approximately by an appropriately modi®ed version of the energy formula of Chapter 43 that takes into consideration the charge Ze of the nucleus. With n 1, that formula, En À13:6Z 2 =n2 , gives E1 À13:6792 À84 900 eV À84:9 keV To tear the electron loose (i.e., remove it to the EI 0 level), we must give it an energy of about 84.9 keV.

44.2

What are the quantum numbers for the electrons in the lithium atom Z 3 when the atom is in its ground state? 396

Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

CHAP. 44]

MULTIELECTRON ATOMS

397

The Pauli Exclusion Principle tells us that the lithium atom's three electrons can take on the following quantum numbers: Electron 1: Electron 2: Electron 3: n 1; n 1; n 2; ` 0; ` 0; ` 0; m` 0; m` 0; m` 0; ms 1 2 ms À1 2 ms 1 2

Notice that, when n 1, ` must be zero and m` must be zero (why?). Then there are only two n 1 possibilities, and the third electron has to go into the n 2 level. Since it is in the second Bohr orbit, it is more easily removed from the atom than an n 1 electron. That is why lithium ionizes easily to Li .

44.3

Why is sodium Z 11 the next univalent atom after lithium?
Sodium has a single electron in the n 3 shell. To see why this is necessarily so, notice that the Pauli Exclusion Principle allows only two electrons in the n 1 shell. The next eight electrons can ®t in the n 2 shell, as follows: n 2; n 2; n 2; n 2; ` 0; ` 1; ` 1; ` 1; m` 0; m` 0; m` 1; m` À1; ms Æ 1 2 ms Æ 1 2 ms Æ 1 2 ms Æ 1 2

The eleventh electron must go into the n 3 shell, from which it is easily removed to yield Na .

44.4

(a) Estimate the wavelength of the photon emitted as an electron falls from the n 2 shell to the n 1 shell in the gold atom Z 79. (b) About how much energy must bombarding electrons have to excite gold to emit this emission line?
(a) As noted in Problem 44.1, to a ®rst approximation the energies of the innermost electrons of a large-Z atom are given by En À13:6Z 2 =n2 eV. Thus, we have ÁE2;1 13:6792 1 À 1 63 700 eV 1 4 This corresponds to a photon with 1 eV 1240 nm 63 700 eV (b) 0:019 5 nm

It is clear from this result that inner-shell transitions in high-Z atoms give rise to the emission of X-rays. Before an n 2 electron can fall to the n 1 shell, an n 1 electron must be thrown to an empty state of large n, which we approximate as n I (with EI 0. This requires an energy ÁE1;I 0 À À13:6Z 2 13:6792 84:9 keV 1 n2

The bombarding electrons must thus have an energy of about 84.9 keV.

44.5

Suppose electrons had no spin, so that the spin quantum number did not exist. If the Exclusion Principle still applied to the remaining quantum numbers, what would be the ®rst three univalent atoms?
The electrons would take on the following quantum numbers:

398

MULTIELECTRON ATOMS

[CHAP. 44

Electron Electron Electron Electron Electron Electron

1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6:

n 1; n 2; n 2; n 2; n 2; n 3;

` 0; ` 0; ` 1; ` 1; ` 1; ` 0;

m` m` m` m` m` m`

0 univalent 0 univalent 0 1 À1 0 univalent

Each electron marked ``univalent'' is the ®rst electron in a new shell. Since an electron is easily removed if it is the outermost electron in the atom, atoms with that number of electrons are univalent. They are the atoms with Z 1 (hydrogen), Z 2 (helium), and Z 6 (carbon). Can you show that Z 15 (phosphorus) would also be univalent?

44.6

Electrons in an atom that have the same value for ` but dierent values for m` and ms are said to be in the same subshell. How many electrons exist in the ` 3 subshell?
Because m` is restricted to the values 0, Æ1, Æ2, Æ3, and ms Æ 1 only, the possibilities for ` 3 are 2 m` ; ms 0; Æ 1; 1; Æ 1; À1; Æ 1; 2; Æ 1; À2; Æ 1; 3; Æ 1; À3; Æ 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 which gives 14 possibilities. Therefore, 14 electrons can exist in this subshell.

44.7

An electron beam in an X-ray tube is accelerated through 40 kV and is incident on a tungsten target. What is the shortest wavelength emitted by the tube?
When an electron in the beam is stopped by the target, the photons emitted have an upper limit for their energy, namely, the energy of the incident electron. In this case, that energy is 40 keV. The corresponding photon has a wavelength given by 1:0 eV 1240 nm 0:031 nm 40 000 eV

Supplementary Problems
44.8 44.9 44.10 If there were no m` quantum number, what would be the ®rst four univalent atoms? Ans. H, Li, N, Al Helium has a closed (completely ®lled) outer shell and is nonreactive because the atom does not easily lose an electron. Show why neon Z 10 is the next nonreactive element. It is desired to eject an electron from the n 1 shell of a uranium atom Z 92 by means of the atomic photoelectric eect. Approximately what is the longest-wavelength photon capable of doing this? Ans. 0.010 8 nm Show that the maximum number of electrons that can exist in the `th subshell is 22` 1.

44.11

Chapter 45
Nuclei and Radioactivity
THE NUCLEUS of an atom is a positively charged entity at the atom's center. Its radius is roughly 10À15 m, which is about 10À5 as large as the radius of the atom. Hydrogen is the lightest and simplest of all the atoms. Its nucleus is a single proton. All other nuclei contain both protons and neutrons. Protons and neutrons are collectively called nucleons. Although the positively charged protons repel each other, the much stronger, short-range nuclear force (which is a manifestation of the more fundamental strong force) holds the nucleus together. The nuclear attractive force between nucleons decreases rapidly with particle separation and is essentially zero for nucleons more than 5 Â 10À15 m apart. NUCLEAR CHARGE AND ATOMIC NUMBER: Each proton within the nucleus carries a charge e, whereas the neutrons carry no electromagnetic charge. If there are Z protons in a nucleus, then the charge on the nucleus is Ze. We call Z the atomic number of that nucleus. Because normal atoms are neutral electrically, the atom has Z electrons outside the nucleus. These Z electrons determine the chemical behavior of the atom. As a result, all atoms of the same chemical element have the same value of Z. For example, all hydrogen atoms have Z 1, while all carbon atoms have Z 6. ATOMIC MASS UNIT (u): A convenient mass unit used in nuclear calculations is the atomic mass unit (u). By de®nition, 1 u is exactly 1/12 of the mass of the common form of carbon atom found on the Earth. It turns out that 1 u 1:660 5 Â 10À27 kg 931:494 MeV=c2 Table 45-1 lists the masses of some common particles and nuclei, as well as their charges.
Table 45-1 Particle Proton Neutron Electron Positron Deuteron Alpha particle Symbol p; H n; 1 n 0 eÀ , À , e , ,
0 À1 e 0 1 e 1 1

Mass, u 1.007 276 1.008 665 0.000 548 6 0.000 548 6 2.013 55 4.001 5

Charge e 0 Àe e e 2e

d; 2 H 1 ; 4 He 2

THE MASS NUMBER A of an atom is equal to the number of nucleons (neutrons plus protons) in the nucleus of the atom. Because each nucleon has a mass close to 1 u, the mass number A is nearly equal to the nuclear mass in atomic mass units. In addition, because the atomic electrons have such small mass, A is nearly equal to the mass of the atom in atomic mass units. 399
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

400

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

[CHAP. 45

ISOTOPES: The number of neutrons in the nucleus has very little eect on the chemical behavior of all but the lightest atoms. In nature, atoms of the same element (same Z) often exist that have unlike numbers of neutrons in their nuclei. Such atoms are called isotopes of each other. For example, ordinary oxygen consists of three isotopes that have mass numbers 16, 17, and 18. Each of the isotopes has Z 8, or eight protons in the nucleus. Hence these isotopes have the following numbers of neutrons in their nuclei: 16 À 8 8, 17 À 8 9, and 18 À 8 10: It is customary to represent the isotopes in the following way: 16 O, 17 O, 18 O, or simply as 16 O, 17 O, and 8 8 8 18 O, where it is understood that oxygen always has Z 8. In keeping with this notation, we designate the nucleus having mass number A and atomic number Z by the symbolism A Z (CHEMICAL SYMBOL)

BINDING ENERGIES: The mass of an atom is not equal to the sum of the masses of its component protons, neutrons, and electrons. Imagine a reaction in which free electrons, protons, and neutrons combine to form an atom; in such a reaction, you would ®nd that the mass of the atom is slightly less than the combined masses of the component parts, and that a tremendous amount of energy is released when the reaction occurs. The loss in mass is exactly equal to the mass equivalent of the released energy, according to Einstein's equation ÁE0 Ámc2 . Conversely, this same amount of energy, ÁE0 would have to be given to the atom to separate it completely into its component particles. We call ÁE0 the binding energy of the atom. A mass loss of Ám 1 u is equivalent to 1:66 Â 10À27 kg2:99 Â 108 m=s2 1:49 Â 10À10 J 931 MeV of binding energy. The percentage ``loss'' of mass is dierent for each isotope of any element. The atomic masses of some of the lighter isotopes are given in Table 45-2. These masses are for neutral atoms and include the orbital electrons.
Table 45-2 Neutral atom
1 1H 2 1H 3 1H 4 2 He 6 3 Li 7 3 Li

Atomic mass, u 1.007 83 2.014 10 3.016 04 4.002 60 6.015 13 7.016 00

Neutral atom
7 4 Be 9 4 Be 12 6C 14 7N 16 8O

Atomic mass, u 7.016 93 9.012 19 12.000 00 14.003 07 15.994 91

RADIOACTIVITY: Nuclei found in nature with Z greater than that of lead, 82, are unstable or radioactive. Many arti®cially produced elements with smaller Z are also radioactive. A radioactive nucleus spontaneously ejects one or more particles in the process of transforming into a dierent nucleus. The stability of a radioactive nucleus against spontaneous decay is measured by its half-life t1=2 . The half-life is de®ned as the time in which half of any large sample of identical nuclei will undergo decomposition. The half-life is a ®xed number for each isotope.

CHAP. 45]

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

401

Radioactive decay is a random process. No matter when one begins to observe a material, only half the material will remain unchanged after a time t1=2 ; after a time t1=2 only 1 Â 1 1 of the material will 2 2 4 remain unchanged. After n half-lives have passed, only 1n of the material will remain unchanged. 2 A simple relation exists between the number N of atoms of radioactive material present and the number ÁN that will decay in a short time Át. It is ÁN lN Át where l, the decay constant, is related to the half-life t1=2 through lt1=2 0:693 The quantity ÁN=Át, which is the rate of disintegrations, is called the activity of the sample. It is equal to lN, and therefore it steadily decreases with time. The SI unit for activity is the becquerel (Bq), where 1 Bq 1 decay/s.

NUCLEAR EQUATIONS: In a balanced equation the sum of the subscripts (atomic numbers) must be the same on the two sides of the equation. The sum of the superscripts (mass numbers) must also be the same on the two sides of the equation. Thus the equation for the primary radioactivity of radium is
226 88 Ra

3

222 86 Rn

4 He 2

Many nuclear processes may be indicated by a condensed notation, in which a light bombarding particle and a light product particle are represented by symbols in parentheses between the symbols for the initial target nucleus and the ®nal product nucleus. The symbols n, p, d, , eÀ , and are used to represent neutron, proton, deuteron 2 H, alpha, particle, electron, and gamma rays (photons), respec1 tively. Here are three examples of corresponding long and condensed notations:
14 7N 27 13 Al

1H 3 1 1n 3 0 2 H3 1

11 6C

4 He 2 1H 1 21 n 0

14 27 55

Np; a11 C Aln; p27 Mg

27 12 Mg 55 26 Fe

55 25 Mn

Mnd; 2n55 Fe

The slow neutron is a very ecient agent in causing transmutations, since it has no positive charge and hence can approach the nucleus without being repelled. By contrast, a positively charged particle such as a proton must have a high energy to cause a transformation. Because of their small masses, even very high-energy electrons are relatively inecient in causing nuclear transmutations.

Solved Problems
45.1 The radius of a carbon nucleus is about 3 Â 10À15 m and its mass is 12 u. Find the average density of the nuclear material. How many more times dense than water is this?
water m m 12 u1:66 Â 10À27 kg=u 1:8 Â 1017 kg=m3 3 V 4r =3 43 Â 10À15 m3 =3 1:8 Â 1017 2 Â 1014 1000

45.2

In a mass spectrograph, the masses of ions are determined from their de¯ections in a magnetic ®eld. Suppose that singly charged ions of chlorine are shot perpendicularly into a magnetic ®eld B 0:15 T with a speed of 5:0 Â 104 m/s. (The speed could be measured by use of a velocity

402

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

[CHAP. 45

selector.) Chlorine has two major isotopes, of masses 34.97 u and 36.97 u. What would be the radii of the circular paths described by the two isotopes in the magnetic ®eld? (See Fig. 45-1.)

Fig. 45-1 The masses of the two isotopes are m1 34:97 u1:66 Â 10À27 kg=u 5:81 Â 10À26 kg m2 36:97 u1:66 Â 10À27 kg=u 6:14 Â 10À26 kg Because the magnetic force qvB must provide the centripetal force mv2 =r, we have r mv m5:0 Â 104 m=s m2:98 Â 1024 m=kg qB 1:6 Â 10À19 C0:105 T

Substituting the values for m found above gives the radii as 0.17 m and 0.18 m.

45.3

How many protons, neutrons, and electrons are there in (a) 3He, (b)
(a)

12

C, and (c)

206

Pb?

The atomic number of He is 2; therefore the nucleus must contain 2 protons. Since the mass number of this isotope is 3, the sum of the protons and neutrons in the nucleus must equal 3; therefore there is 1 neutron. The number of electrons in the atom is the same as the atomic number, 2. The atomic number of carbon is 6; hence the nucleus must contain 6 protons. The number of neutrons in the nucleus is equal to 12 À 6 6. The number of electrons is the same as the atomic number, 6. The atomic number of lead is 82; hence there are 82 protons in the nucleus and 82 electrons in the atom. The number of neutrons is 206 À 82 124:
12

(b) (c)

45.4

What is the binding energy of
12

C?

One atom of C consists of 6 protons, 6 electrons, and 6 neutrons. The mass of the uncombined protons and electrons is the same as that of six 1H atoms (if we ignore the very small binding energy of each proton-electron pair). The component particles may thus be considered as six 1H atoms and six neutrons. A mass balance may be computed as follows. Mass of six 1 H atoms 6 Â 1:007 8 u Mass of six neutrons 6 Â 1:008 7 u Total mass of component particles Mass of
12

6:046 8 u 6:052 2 12:099 0 12:000 0 0:099 0 92 MeV u u u u

C atom

Loss in mass on forming 12 C Binding energy 931 Â 0:099 0 MeV

CHAP. 45]

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

403

45.5

Cobalt-60 (60Co) is often used as a radiation source in medicine. It has a half-life of 5.25 years. How long after a new sample is delivered will its activity have decreased (a) to about one-eighth its original value? (b) to about one-third its original value? Give your answers to two signi®cant ®gures.
The activity is proportional to the number of undecayed atoms ÁN=Át lN. (a) (b) In each half-life, half the remaining sample decays. Because 1 Â 1 Â 1 1, three half-lives, or 16 years, 2 2 2 8 are required for the sample to decay to one-eighth its original strength. Using the fact that the material present decreased by one-half during each 5.25 years, we can plot the graph shown in Fig. 45-2. From it, we see that the sample decays to 0.33 its original value after a time of about 8.3 years.

Fig. 45-2

45.6

Solve Problem 45.5(b) by using the exponential function.
The curve in Fig. 45-2 is an exponential decay curve and it is expressed by the equation N eÀlt N0 where l is the decay constant, and N=N0 is the fraction of the original N0 particles that remain undecayed after a time t. Inasmuch as lt1=2 0:693, l 0:693=t1=2 0:132=year and N=N0 0:333. Thus, 0:333 eÀ0:132t=year Take the natural logarithm of each side to ®nd ln 0:333 À0:132t=year from which t 8:3 years.

404

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

[CHAP. 45

45.7

For the situation described in Problem 45.5, what is N=N0 after 20 years?
As in the previous problem, N eÀlt eÀ0:13220 eÀ2:64 N0 from which N=N0 0:071: In this and the previous problem, we used t in years because l was expressed in (years)À1 . More often, l would be expressed in sÀ1 and t would be in seconds. Be careful that the same time units are used for t and l:

45.8

Potassium found in nature contains two isotopes. One isotope constitutes 93.4 percent of the whole and has an atomic mass of 38.975 u; the other 6.6 percent has a mass of 40.974 u. Compute the atomic mass of potassium as found in nature.
The atomic mass of the material found in nature is obtained by combining the individual atomic masses in proportion to their abundances, Atomic mass 0:93438:975 u 0:06640:974 u 39:1 u

45.9

The half-life of radium is 1:62 Â 103 years. How many radium atoms decay in 1.00 s in a 1.00 g sample of radium? The atomic weight of radium is 226 kg/kmol.
A 1.00 g sample is (0.001 00/226) kmol and so it contains 0:001 00 atoms kmol 6:02 Â 1026 2:66 Â 1021 atoms N 226 kmol The decay constant is l Then 0:693 0:693 1:36 Â 10À11 sÀ1 t1=2 1620 y3:156 Â 107 s=y

ÁN lN 1:36 Â 10À11 sÀ1 2:66 Â 1021 3:61 Â 1010 sÀ1 Át is the number of disintegrations per second in 1.00 g of radium. The above result leads to the de®nition of the curie (Ci) as a unit of activity: 1 Ci 3:7 Â 1010 disintegrations=s Because of its convenient size, we shall sometimes use the curie in subsequent problems, even though the ocial SI unit of activity is the becquerel.

45.10 Technetium-99 99 Tc has an excited state that decays by emission of a gamma ray. The half-life 43 of the excited state is 360 min. What is the activity, in curies, of 1.00 mg of this excited isotope?
The activity of a sample is lN. In this case, l 0:693 0:693 3:21 Â 10À5 sÀ1 t1=2 21 600 s

We also know that 99.0 kg of Tc contains 6:02 Â 1026 atoms. A mass m will therefore contain m=99:0 kg6:02 Â 1026 atoms. In our case, m 1:00 Â 10À6 kg, and so 2 3 1:00 Â 10À6 kg À5 À1 Activity lN 3:21 Â 10 s 6:02 Â 1026 99:0 kg 1:95 Â 1014 sÀ1 1:95 Â 1014 Bq

45.11 How much energy must a bombarding proton possess to cause the reaction 7Lip; n7 Be? Give your answer to three signi®cant ®gures.

CHAP. 45]

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

405

The reaction is as follows:
7 3 Li

1 H 3 7 Be 1 n 1 4 0

where the symbols represent the nuclei of the atoms indicated. Because of the masses listed in Table 45-2 include the masses of the atomic electrons, the appropriate number of electron masses me must be subtracted from the values given.
7 3 Li 1 1H TOTAL

Reactants 7:016 00 À 3me 1:007 83 À 1me ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ 8:023 83 À 4me

7 4 Be 1 0n TOTAL

Products 7:016 93 À 4me 1:008 66 ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ 8:025 59 À 4me

Subtracting the total reactant mass from the total product mass gives the increase in mass as 0.001 76 u. (Notice that the electron masses cancel out. This happens frequently, but not always.) To create this mass in the reaction, energy must have been supplied to the reactants. The energy corresponding to 0.001 76 u is 931 Â 0:001 76 MeV 1:65 MeV. This energy is supplied as KE of the bombarding proton. The incident proton must have more than this energy because the system must possess some KE even after the reaction, so that momentum is conserved. With momentum conservation taken into account, the minimum KE that the incident particle must have can be found with the formula m 1 1:65 MeV M where M is the mass of the target particle, and m that of the incident particle. Therefore, the incident particle must have an energy of at least 1 11:65 MeV 1:89 MeV 7

45.12 Complete the following nuclear equations: (a) (b) (c)
(a)
14 4 7 N 2 He 3 9 4 4 Be 2 He 3 9 4 Bep; ? 17 8O 12 6C

? ?

(d ) 30 P 3 30 Si ? 15 14 (e) 3 H 3 3 He ? 1 2 ( f ) 43 Ca; c46 Sc 20 21

The sum of the subscripts on the left is 7 2 9. The subscript of the ®rst product on the right is 8. Hence the second product on the right must have a subscript (net charge) of 1. Also, the sum of the superscripts on the left is 14 4 18. The superscript of the ®rst product is 17. Hence the second product on the right must have a superscript (mass number) of 1. The particle with nuclear charge 1 and mass number 1 is the proton, 1 H. 1 The nuclear charge of the second product particle (its subscript) is 4 2 À 6 0. The mass number of the particle (its superscript) is 9 4 À 12 1. Hence the particle must be the neutron, 1 n: 0

(b) (c)

The reactants 9 Be and 1 H have a combined nuclear charge of 5 and a mass number of 10. In addition to 4 1 the alpha particle, a product will be formed of charge 5 À 2 3 and mass number 10 À 4 6. This is 6 3 Li:

(d ) The nuclear charge of the second product particle is 15 À 14 1. Its mass number is 30 À 30 0. 0 Hence the particle must be a positron, 1 e. (e) The nuclear charge of the second product particle is 1 À 2 À1. Its mass number is 3 À 3 0. Hence 0 the particle must be a beta particle (an electron), À1 e.

( f ) The reactants, 43 Ca and 4 He, have a combined nuclear charge of 22 and mass number of 47. The ejected 20 2 product will have charge 22 À 21 1, and mass number 47 À 46 1. This is a proton and should be represented in the parentheses by p. In some of these reactions a neutrino and/or a photon are emitted. We ignore them for this discussion since the mass and charge for both are zero.

406

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

[CHAP. 45

45.13 Uranium-238 238 U is radioactive and decays by emitting the following particles in succession 92 before reaching a stable form: , , , , , , , , , , , , , and ( stands for ``beta particle,'' eÀ ). What is the ®nal stable nucleus?
The original nucleus emitted 8 alpha particles and 6 beta particles. When an alpha particle is emitted, Z decreases by 2, since the alpha particle carries away a charge of 2e. A beta particle carries away a charge of À1e, and so as a result the charge on the nucleus must increase to Z 1e. We then have, for the ®nal nucleus, Final Z 92 6 À 28 82 Final A 238 À 60 À 84 206 The ®nal stable nucleus is
206 82 Pb:

45.14 The half-life of uranium-238 is about 4:5 Â 109 years, and its end product is lead-206. We notice that the oldest uranium-bearing rocks on Earth contain about a 50 : 50 mixture of 238 U and 206 Pb. About what is the age of these rocks?
Apparently about half the 238 U has decayed to 206 Pb during the existence of the rock. Hence the rock must have been formed about 4.5 billion years ago.

45.15 A 5.6-MeV alpha particle is shot directly at a uranium atom Z 92. About how close will it get to the center of the uranium nucleus?
At such high energies, the eects of the atomic electrons can be ignored. We also assume the uranium atom to be so massive that it does not move appreciably. Then the original KE of the alpha particle will be changed into electrostatic potential energy. This energy, for a charge q H at a distance r from a point charge q, is (Chapter 25) qq H Potential energy q H V k r Equating the KE of the alpha particle to this potential energy, we ®nd that 5:6 Â 106 eV1:60 Â 10À19 J=eV 8:99 Â 109 where e 1:60 Â 10À19 C. We ®nd from this that r 4:7 Â 10À14 m: 2e92e r

45.16 Neon-23 beta-decays in the following way:
23 10 Ne 0 3 23 Na À1 e 0 v 11 0

where v is an antineutrino, a particle with no charge and no mass. Depending on circumstances, the energy carried away by the antineutrino can range from zero to the maximum energy 0 available from the reaction. Find the minimum and maximum KE that the beta particle À1 e 23 23 can have. Pertinent atomic masses are 22.994 5 u for Ne, and 22.989 8 u for Na. The mass of the beta particle is 0.000 55 u.
Before we begin, note that the given reaction is a nuclear reaction, while the masses are those of neutral atoms. To calculate the mass lost in the reaction, we must subtract the mass of the atomic electrons from the atomic masses given. We have the following nuclear masses:
23 10 Ne

Reactant 22:994 5 À 10me

23 11 Na 0 À1 e

Products 22:989 8 À 11me me 0 ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ 22:989 8 À 10me

TOTAL

________________ 22:994 5 À 10me

0 0v TOTAL

CHAP. 45]

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

407

which gives a mass loss of 22:994 5 À 22:989 8 0:004 7 u. Since 1.00 u corresponds to 931 MeV, this mass loss corresponds to an energy of 4.4 MeV. The beta particle and antineutrino share this energy. Hence the energy of the beta particle can range from zero to 4.4 MeV.

45.17 A nucleus

M n P,

the parent nucleus, decays to a daughter nucleus D by positron decay:
M nP 0 3 D 1 e 0 v 0

where v is a neutrino, a particle that has zero mass and charge. (a) What are the subscript and superscript for D? (b) Prove that the mass loss in the reaction is Mp À Md À 2me , where Mp and Md are the atomic masses of the parent and daughter.
(a) (b) To balance the subscripts and superscripts, we must have The table of masses for the nuclei involved is
M nP M nÀ1 D.

Reactant Mp À nme

M nÀ1 D 0 1e 0 0v TOTAL

Products Md À n À 1me me 0 ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ Md À nme 2me

TOTAL

___________ Mp À nme

Subtraction gives the mass loss: Mp À nme À Md À nme 2me Mp À Md À 2me Notice how important it is to keep track of the electron masses in this and the previous problem.

Supplementary Problems
45.18 45.19 How many protons, neutrons, and electrons does an atom of
235 92 U

possess?

Ans. 92, 143, 92

By how much does the mass of a heavy nucleus change as it emits a 4.8-MeV gamma ray? Ans. 5:2 Â 10À3 u 8:6 Â 10À30 kg Find the binding energy of 107 Ag, which has an atomic mass of 106.905 u. Give your answer to three 47 signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 915 eV The binding energy per nucleon for elements near iron in the periodic table is about 8.90 MeV per nucleon. What is the atomic mass, including electrons, of 56 Fe? Ans. 55.9 u 26 What mass of 60 Co has an activity of 1.0 Ci? The half-life of cobalt-60 is 5.25 years. 27 Ans. 8:8 Â 10À7 kg

45.20

45.21

45.22 45.23

An experiment is done to determine the half-life of a radioactive substance that emits one beta particle for each decay process. Measurements show that an average of 8.4 beta particles are emitted each second by 2.5 mg of the substance. The atomic mass of the substance is 230. Find the half-life of the substance. Ans. 1:7 Â 1010 years The half-life of carbon-14 is 5:7 Â 103 years. What fraction of a sample of 14 C will remain unchanged after a period of ®ve half-lives? Ans. 0.031 Cesium-124 has a half-life of 31 s. What fraction of a cesium-124 sample will remain after 0.10 h? Ans. 0.000 32

45.24

45.25

408

NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY

[CHAP. 45

45.26 45.27

A certain isotope has a half-life of 7.0 h. How many seconds does it take for 10 percent of the sample to decay? Ans. 3:8 Â 103 s By natural radioactivity 238 U emits an -particle. The heavy residual nucleus is called UX1. UX1 in turn emits a beta particle. The resultant nucleus is called UX2. Determine the atomic number and mass number for (a) UX1 and (b) UX2. Ans. (a) 90, 234; (b) 91, 234 Upon decaying 239 Np emits a beta particle. The residual heavy nucleus is also radioactive, and gives rise to 93 235 U by the radioactive process. What small particle is emitted simultaneously with the formation of uranium-235? Ans. alpha particle Complete the following equations. (See Appendix H for a table of the elements.) (a) (b) (c)
23 11 Na 64 29 Cu 106

45.28

45.29

4 He 3 26 Mg c 2 12 3
0 1 e 106

(d ) (e) (f)

c (c)
0 À1 e;

Ag 3
1 1 H;

Cd c
64 28 Ni;

10 4 13 5 B 2 He 3 6 N 105 0 48 Cd À1 e 3 c 238 234 92 U 3 90 Th c 105 47 Ag;

c

Ans. (a) 45.30

(b)

(d ) 1 n; (e) 0

( f ) 4 He 2

Complete the notations for the following processes. (a) (b) (c) (d )
24 26 40 12

Mgd; ? Mgd; p? Ar; p? Cd; n?
22

(e) (f) ( g)
27

130 55 59

Ted; 2n?

Mnn;
?

Con; ? K; (d )
13

Ans. (a) 45.31 45.32

Na; (b)

Mg; (c)

43

N; (e)

130

I; ( f )

56

Mn; ( g)

56

Mn
3 1H

How much energy is released during reactions (a) Ans. (a) 17.4 MeV; (b) 17.6 MeV

1 1H

7 Li 3 24 He and (b) 3 2

2 H 3 4 He 1 n? 1 2 0

In the 14 Nn; p14 C reaction, the proton is ejected with an energy of 0.600 MeV. Very slow neutrons are used. Calculate the mass of the 14 C atom. Ans. 14.003 u

Chapter 46
Applied Nuclear Physics
NUCLEAR BINDING ENERGIES dier from the atomic binding energies discussed in Chapter 45 by the relatively small amount of energy that binds the electrons to the nucleus. The binding energy per nucleon (the total energy liberated on assembling the nucleus, divided by the number of protons and neutrons) turns out to be largest for nuclei near Z 30 A 60. Hence the nuclei at the two ends of the table of elements can liberate energy if they are in some way transformed into middle-sized nuclei.

FISSION REACTION: A very large nucleus, such as the nucleus of the uranium atom, liberates energy as it is split into two or three middle-sized nuclei. Such a ®ssion reaction can be induced by striking a large nucleus with a low- or moderate-energy neutron. The ®ssion reaction produces additional neutrons, which, in turn, can cause further ®ssion reactions and more neutrons. If the number of neutrons remains constant or increases in time, the process is a self-perpetuating chain reaction.

FUSION REACTION: In a fusion reaction, small nuclei, such as those of hydrogen or helium, are joined together to form more massive nuclei, thereby liberating energy. This reaction is usually dicult to initiate and sustain because the nuclei must be fused together even though they repel each other with the Coulomb force. Only when the particles move toward each other with very high energies do they come close enough for the strong force to bind them together. The fusion reaction can occur in stars because of the high densities and high thermal energies of the particles in these extremely hot objects.

RADIATION DOSE is de®ned as the quantity of radiant energy absorbed in a unit mass of substance. A material receives a dose of 1 gray (Gy) when 1 J of radiation is absorbed in each kilogram of the material: Dose in Gy energy absorbed in J mass of absorber in kg

so a gray is 1 J/kg. Although the gray is the SI unit for radiation dose, another unit is widely used. It is the rad (rd), where 1 rd 0:01 Gy.

RADIATION DAMAGE POTENTIAL: Each type (and energy) of radiation causes its own characteristic degree of damage to living tissue. The damage also varies among types of tissue. The potential damaging eects of a speci®c type of radiation are expressed as the quality factor QF of that radiation. Arbitrarily, the damage potential is determined relative to the damage caused by 200-keV X-rays: QF biological effect of 1 Gy of the radiation biological effect of 1 Gy of 200 ke-V X-rays

For example, if 10 Gy of a particular radiation will cause 7 times more damage than 10 Gy of 200-keV X-rays, then the QF for that radiation is 7. Quite often, the unit RBE (relative biological eectiveness) is used in place of quality factor. The two are equivalent. 409
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

410

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

[CHAP. 46

EFFECTIVE RADIATION DOSE is the radiation dose modi®ed to express radiation damage to living tissue. Its SI unit is the sievert (Sv). It is de®ned as the product of the dose in grays and the quality factor of the radiation: Effective dose (Sv) (QF)(dose in Gy) For example, suppose a certain type of tissue is subjected to a dose of 5 Gy of a radiation for which the quality factor is 3. Then the dose in sieverts is 3 Â 5 15 Sv. While the sievert is the SI unit, another unit, the rem (radiation equivalent, man), is very widely used. The two are related through 1 rem 0:01 Sv.

HIGH-ENERGY ACCELERATORS: Charged particles can be accelerated to high energies by causing them to follow a circular path repeatedly. Each time a particle (of charge q) circles the path, it is caused to fall through a potential dierence V. After n trips around the path, its energy is qnV. Magnetic ®elds are used to supply the centripetal force required to keep the particle moving in a circle. Equating magnetic force qvB to centripetal force mv2 =r gives mv qBr In this expression, m is the mass of the particle that is traveling with speed v on a circle of radius r perpendicular to a magnetic ®eld B.

THE MOMENTUM OF A PARTICLE is related to its KE. From Chapter 41, since the total energy of a particle is the sum of its kinetic energy plus its rest energy, E KE mc2 , and with E2 m2 c4 p2 c2 it follows that q KE p2 c2 m2 c4 À mc2

Solved Problems
46.1 The binding energy per nucleon for 238 U is about 7.6 MeV, while it is about 8.6 MeV for nuclei of half that mass. If a 238 U nucleus were to split into two equal-size nuclei, about how much energy would be released in the process?
There are 238 nucleons involved. Each nucleon will release about 8:6 À 7:6 1:0 MeV of energy when the nucleus undergoes ®ssion. The total energy liberated is therefore about 238 MeV or 2:4 Â 102 MeV.

46.2

What is the binding energy per nucleon for the 238 U nucleus? The atomic mass for 92 238.050 79 u; also mp 1:007 276 u and mn 1:008 665 u.
The mass of 92 protons plus 238 À 92 146 neutrons is 921:007 276 u 1461:008 665 u 239:934 48 u The mass of the
238

238

U is

U nucleus is 238:050 79 À 92me 238:050 79 À 920:000 549 238:000 28 u

The mass lost in assembling the nucleus is then Ám 239:934 48 À 238:000 28 1:934 2 u

CHAP. 46]

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

411

Since 1.00 u corresponds to 931 MeV, we have Binding energy 1:934 2 u931 MeV=u 1800 MeV 1800 MeV 7:57 MeV Binding energy per nucleon 238

and

46.3

When an atom of 235 U undergoes ®ssion in a reactor, about 200 MeV of energy is liberated. Suppose that a reactor using uranium-235 has an output of 700 MW and is 20 percent ecient. (a) How many uranium atoms does it consume in one day? (b) What mass of uranium does it consume each day?
(a) Each ®ssion yields 200 MeV 200 Â 106 1:6 Â 10À19 J of energy. Only 20 percent of this is utilized eciently, and so Usable energy per fission 200 Â 106 1:6 Â 10À19 0:20 6:4 Â 10À12 J Because the reactor's usable output is 700 Â 106 J/s, the number of ®ssions required per second is Fissions=s and (b) 7 Â 108 J=s 1:1 Â 1020 sÀ1 6:4 Â 10À12 J

Fissions=day 86 400 s=d1:1 Â 1020 sÀ1 9:5 Â 1024 dÀ1

There are 6:02 Â 1026 atoms in 235 kg of uranium-235. Therefore the mass of uranium-235 consumed in one day is 2 3 9:5 Â 1024 Mass 235 kg 3:7 kg 6:02 Â 1026

46.4

Neutrons produced by ®ssion reactions must be slowed by collisions with moderator nuclei before they are eective in causing further ®ssions. Suppose an 800-keV neutron loses 40 percent of its energy on each collision. How many collisions are required to decrease its energy to 0.040 eV? (This is the average thermal energy of a gas particle at 358C.)
After one collision, the neutron energy is down to (0.6)(800 keV). After two, it is (0.6)(0.6)(800 keV); after three, it is (0.6)3(800 keV). Therefore, after n collisions, the neutron energy is 0:6n (800 keV). We want n large enough so that 0:6n 8 Â 105 eV 0:040 eV Taking the logarithms of both sides of this equation gives n log 0:6 log8 Â 105 log 0:04 nÀ0:222 5:903 À1:398 from which we ®nd n to be 32.9. So 33 collisions are required.

46.5

To examine the structure of a nucleus, pointlike particles with de Broglie wavelengths below about 10À16 m must be used. Through how large a potential dierence must an electron fall to have this wavelength? Assume the electron is moving in a relativistic way.
The KE and momentum of the electron are related through q KE p2 c2 m2 c4 À mc2

412

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

[CHAP. 46

Because the de Broglie wavelength is h=p, this equation becomes s hc 2 KE m2 c4 À mc2 Using 10À16 m, h 6:63 Â 10À34 J Á s, and m 9:1 Â 10À31 kg, we ®nd that KE 1:99 Â 10À9 J 1:24 Â 1010 eV The electron must be accelerated through a potential dierence of about 1010 eV.

46.6

The following fusion reaction takes place in the Sun and furnishes much of its energy:
0 41 H 3 4 He 21 e energy 1 2 0 where 1 e is a positron electron. How much energy is released as 1.00 kg of hydrogen is con0 sumed? The masses of 1H, 4He, and 1 e are, respectively, 1.007 825, 4.002 604, and 0.000 549 u, where atomic electrons are included in the ®rst two values.

The mass of the reactants, 4 protons, is 4 times the atomic mass of hydrogen (1H), less the mass of 4 electrons: Reactant mass 41:007 825 u À 4me 4:031 300 u À 4me where me is the mass of the electron (or positron). The reaction products have a combined mass Product mass (mass of 4 He nucleus 2me 2 4:002 604 u À 2me 2me 4:002 604 u The mass loss is therefore (reactant mass) À (product mass) 4:031 3 u À 4me À 4:002 6 u Substituting me 0:000 549 u gives the mass loss as 0.026 5 u. But 1.00 kg of 1H contains 6:02 Â 1026 atoms. For each four atoms that undergo fusion, 0.026 5 u is lost. The mass lost when 1.00 kg undergoes fusion is therefore Mass loss/kg 0:026 5 u6:02 Â 1026 =4 3:99 Â 1024 u 3:99 Â 1024 u1:66 Â 10À27 kg=u 0:006 63 kg Then, from the Einstein relation, ÁE Ámc2 0:006 63 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s2 5:96 Â 1014 J

46.7

Lithium hydride, LiH, has been proposed as a possible nuclear fuel. The nuclei to be used and the reaction involved are as follows:
6 3 Li

6:015 13

2:014 10

2 1H

3

24 He 2 4:002 60

the listed masses being those of the neutral atoms. Calculate the expected power production, in megawatts, associated with the consumption of 1.00 g of LiH per day. Assume 100 percent eciency.

CHAP. 46]

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

413

The change in mass for the reaction must be computed ®rst:
6 3 Li 2 1H TOTAL

Reactants 6:015 13 u À 3me 2:014 10 u À 1me ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ 8:029 23 u À 4me

2 4 He 2

Products 24:002 60 u À 2me ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ 8:005 20 u À 4me

TOTAL

We ®nd the loss in mass by subtracting the product mass from the reactant mass. In the process, the electron masses drop out and the mass loss is found to be 0.024 03 u. The fractional loss in mass is 0:024 0=8:029 2:99 Â 10À3 . Therefore, when 1.00 g reacts, the mass loss is 2:99 Â 10À3 1:00 Â 10À3 kg 2:99 Â 10À6 kg This corresponds to an energy of ÁE Ámc2 2:99 Â 10À6 kg2:998 Â 108 m=s2 2:687 Â 1011 J Then Power energy 2:687 Â 1011 J 3:11 MW time 86 400 s

46.8

Cosmic rays bombard the CO2 in the atmosphere and, by nuclear reaction, cause the formation of the radioactive carbon isotope 14 C. This isotope has a half-life of 5730 years. It mixes into the 6 atmosphere uniformly and is taken up in plants as they grow. After a plant dies, the 14 C decays over the ensuing years. How old is a piece of wood that has a 14 C content which is only 9 percent as large as the average 14 C content of new-grown wood?
During the years, the
14

C has decayed to 0.090 its original value. Hence (see Problem 45.6), becomes 0:090 eÀ0:693t=5730 years

N eÀt N0

After taking the natural logarithms of both sides, we have ln 0:090 from which À0:693t 5730 years 5730 years t À2:41 1:99 Â 104 years À0:693

The piece of wood is about 20 000 years old.

46.9

Iodine-131 has a half-life of about 8.0 days. When consumed in food, it localizes in the thyroid. Suppose 7.0 percent of the 131 I localizes in the thyroid and that 20 percent of its disintegrations are detected by counting the emitted gamma rays. How much 131 I must be ingested to yield a thyroid count rate of 50 counts per second?
Because only 20 percent of the disintegrations are counted, there must be 50=0:20 250 disintegrations per second. From Chapter 45, ÁN 0:693N N Át t1=2 or 250 sÀ1 0:693N 8:0 d3600 s=h24 h=d

from which N 2:49 Â 108 . However, this is only 7.0 percent of the ingested 131 I. Hence the number of ingested atoms is N=0:070 3:56 Â 109 . And, since 1.00 kmol of 131 I is approximately 131 kg, this number of atoms represents 2 3 3:56 Â 109 atoms 131 kg=kmol 7:8 Â 10À16 kg 6:02 Â 1026 atoms=kmol which is the mass of
131

I that must be ingested.

414

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

[CHAP. 46

46.10 A beam of gamma rays has a cross-sectional area of 2.0 cm2 and carries 7:0 Â 108 photons through the cross-section each second. Each photon has an energy of 1.25 MeV. The beam passes through a 0.75 cm thickness of ¯esh 0:95 g=cm3 and loses 5.0 percent of its intensity in the process. What is the average dose (in Gy and in rd) applied to the ¯esh each second?
The dose in this case is the energy absorbed per kilogram of ¯esh. We have Number of photons absorbed/s 7:0 Â 108 sÀ1 0:050 3:5 Â 107 sÀ1 Energy absorbed/s 3:5 Â 107 sÀ1 1:25 MeV 4:4 Â 107 MeV=s We need the mass of ¯esh in which this energy was absorbed, which is Mass V 0:95 g=cm3 2:0 cm2 0:75 cm 1:43 g We than have Dose=s energy=s 4:4 Â 107 MeV=s1:6 Â 10À13 J=MeV 4:9 mGy=s 0:49 rd=s mass 1:43 Â 10À3 kg

46.11 A beam of alpha particles passes through ¯esh and deposits 0.20 J of energy in each kilogram of ¯esh. The QF for these particles is 12 Sv/Gy. Find the dose in Gy and rd, as well as the eective dose in Sv and rem. absorbed energy 0:20 J=kg 0:20 Gy 20 rd mass Effective dose QFdose 12 Sv=Gy0:20 Gy 2:4 Sv 2:4 Â 102 rem Dose

46.12 A tumor on a person's leg has a mass of 3.0 g. What is the minimum activity a radiation source can have if it is to furnish a dose of 10 Gy to the tumor in 14 min? Assume each disintegration within the source, on the average, provides an energy 0.70 MeV to the tumor.
A dose of 10 Gy corresponds to 10 J of radiation energy being deposited per kilogram. Since the tumor has a mass of 0.003 0 kg, the energy required for a 10 Gy dose is (0.0030 kg)(10 J/kg) 0:030 J. Each disintegration provides 0.70 MeV, which is 0:70 Â 106 eV1:60 Â 10À19 J=eV 1:12 Â 10À13 J To provide 0.030 J, we need 0:030 J 2:68 Â 1011 disintegrations 1:12 Â 10À13 J=disintegration They are to occur in 14 min (or 840 s), and so we require 2:68 Â 1011 disintegrations 3:2 Â 108 disintegrations=s: 840 s Hence the source activity must be at least 3:2 Â 108 Bq. Since 1 Ci 3:70 Â 1010 Bq, the source activity must be at least 8.6 mCi.

46.13 A beam of 5.0 MeV alpha particles q 2e has a cross-sectional area of 1.50 cm2 . It is incident on ¯esh 950 kg=m3 and penetrates to a depth of 0.70 mm. (a) What dose (in Gy) does the beam provide to the ¯esh in a time of 3.0 s? (b) What eective dose does it provide? Assume the beam to carry a current of 2:50 Â 10À9 A and to have QF 14:
We ®rst ®nd the number of particles deposited in the ¯esh in 3.0 s: Number in 3.0 s It 2:50 Â 10À9 C=s3:0 s 2:34 Â 1010 particles a 3:2 Â 10À19 C

CHAP. 46]

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

415

Each deposits an energy of 5:0 Â 106 eV1:60 Â 10À19 J=eV 8:0 Â 10À13 J. Therefore, Dose energy 2:34 Â 1010 8:0 Â 10À13 J 188 Gy 1:9 Â 102 Gy mass 950 kg=m3 0:070 Â 1:5 Â 10À6 m3

Effective dose QFdose 14188 2:6 Â 103 Sv

Supplementary Problems
46.14 Consider the following ®ssion reaction: 1:008 7
1 0n

235:043 9

235 92 U

3

137:905 0

138 56 Ba

92:906 0

93 41 Nb

5 1n 0 1:008 7

0 5 À1 e 0:000 55

where the neutral atomic masses are given. How much energy is released when (a) 1 atom undergoes this type of ®ssion, and (b) 1.0 kg of atoms undergoes ®ssion? Ans. (a) 182 MeV; (b) 7:5 Â 1013 J 46.15 It is proposed to use the nuclear fusion reaction
4 3 2 2H 1 2 He 2:014 102 4:002 604

to produce industrial power (neutral atomic masses are given). If the output is to be 150 MW and the energy of the reaction will be used with 30 percent eciency, how many grams of deuterium fuel will be needed per day? Ans. 75 g/day 46.16 One of the most promising fusion reactions for power generation involves deuterium (2H) and tritium (3H): 2:014 10
2 1H

3:016 05

3 1H

3

4:002 60

4 2 He

1:008 67

1 0n

where the atomic masses including electrons are as given. How much energy is produced when 2.0 kg of 2H fuses with 3.0 kg of 3H to form 4He? Ans. 1:7 Â 1015 J 46.17 What is the average KE of a neutron at the center of the Sun, where the temperature is about 107 K? Give your answer to two signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 1.3 keV Find the energy released when two deuterons (2 H, atomic mass 2:014 10 u) fuse to form 3 He (atomic 1 2 mass 3:016 03 u) with the release of a neutron. Give your answer to three signi®cant ®gures. Ans. 3.27 MeV The tar in an ancient tar pit has a 14 C activity that is only about 4.00 percent of that found for new wood of the same density. What is the approximate age of the tar? Ans. 26:6 Â 103 years Rubidium-87 has a half-life of 4:9 Â 1010 years and decays to strontium-87, which is stable. In an ancient rock, the ratio of 87Sr to 87Rb is 0.005 0. If we assume all the strontium came from rubidium decay, about how old is the rock? Repeat if the ratio is 0.210. Ans. 3:5 Â 108 years, 1:35 Â 1010 years The luminous dial of an old watch gives o 130 fast electrons each minute. Assume that each electron has an energy of 0.50 MeV and deposits that energy in a volume of skin that is 2.0 cm2 in area and 0.20 cm thick. Find the dose (in both Gy and rd) that the volume experiences in 1.0 day. Take the density of skin to be 900 kg/m3. Ans. 42 Gy, 4.2 mrd

46.18

46.19

46.20

46.21

416

APPLIED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

[CHAP. 46

46.22

An alpha-particle beam enters a charge collector and is measured to carry 2:0 Â 10À14 C of charge into the collector each second. The beam has a cross-sectional area of 150 mm2, and it penetrates human skin to a depth of 0.14 mm. Each particle has an initial energy of 4.0 MeV. The QF for such particles is about 15. What eective dose, in Sv and in rem, does a person's skin receive when exposed to this beam for 20 s? Take 900 kg/m3 for skin. Ans. 0.63 Sv, 63 rem

Appendix A
Significant Figures
INTRODUCTION: The numerical value of every observed measurement is an approximation. Consider that the length of an object is recorded as 15.7 cm. By convention, this means that the length was measured to the nearest tenth of a centimeter and that its exact value lies between 15.65 and 15.75 cm. If this measurement were exact to the nearest hundredth of a centimeter, it would have been recorded as 15.70 cm. The value 15.7 cm represents three signi®cant ®gures (1, 5, 7), while the value 15.70 represents four signi®cant ®gures (1, 5, 7, 0). A signi®cant ®gure is one which is known to be reasonably reliable. Similarly, a recorded mass of 3.406 2 kg means that the mass was determined to the nearest tenth of a gram and represents ®ve signi®cant ®gures (3, 4, 0, 6, 2), the last ®gure (2) being reasonably correct and guaranteeing the certainty of the preceding four ®gures. In elementary measurements in physics and chemistry, the last ®gure is estimated and is also considered as a signi®cant ®gure.

ZEROS may be signi®cant or they may merely serve to locate the decimal point. We will take zeros to the left of the normal position of the decimal point (in numbers like 100, 2500, 40, etc.) to be signi®cant. For instance the statement that a body of ore weighs 9800 N will be understood to mean that we know the weight to the nearest newton: there are four signi®cant ®gures here. Alternatively, if it was weighed to the nearest hundred newtons, the weight contains only two signi®cant ®gures (9, 8) and may be written exponentially as 9:8 Â 103 N. If it was weighed to the nearest ten newtons, it should be written as 9:80 Â 103 N, displaying the three signi®cant ®gures. If the object was weighed to the nearest newton, the weight can also be written as 9:800 Â 103 N (four signi®cant ®gures). Of course, if a zero stands between two signi®cant ®gures, it is itself signi®cant. Zeros to the immediate right of the decimal are signi®cant only when there is a signi®cant ®gure to the text of the decimal. Thus the numbers 0.001, 0.001 0, 0.001 00, and 1.001 have one, two, three, and four signi®cant ®gures, respectively.

ROUNDING OFF: A number is rounded o to the desired number of signi®cant ®gures by dropping one or more digits to the right. When the ®rst digit dropped is less than 5, the last digit retained should remain unchanged; when it is 5 or more, 1 is added to the last digit retained.

ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION: The result of adding or subtracting should be rounded o, so as to retain digits only as far as the ®rst column containing estimated ®gures. (Remember that the last signi®cant ®gure is estimated.) In other words, the answer should have the same number of ®gures to the right of the decimal point as does the least precisely known number being added or subtracted. Examples: (a) Add the following quantities expressed in meters. (b) 58.0 0.003 8 0.000 01 58.003 81 58:0 m (Ans.) (c) 4.20 1.652 3 0.015 5.867 3 5:87 m (Ans.) (d ) 415.5 3.64 0.238 419.378 419:4 m (Ans.) 25.340 5.465 0.322 31.127 m (Ans.)

417
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

418

SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

[APPENDIX A

MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION: Here the result should be rounded o to contain only as many signi®cant ®gures as are contained in the least exact factor. There are some exceptional cases, however. Consider the division 9:84 Ä 9:3 1:06, to three places. By the rule given above, the answer should be 1.1 (two signi®cant ®gures). However, a dierence of 1 in in the last place of 9.3 9:3 Æ 0:1 results in an error of about 1 percent, while a dierence of 1 in the last place of 1.1 1:1 Æ 0:1 yields an error of roughly 10 percent. Thus the answer 1.1 is of much lower percentage accuracy than 9.3. Hence in this case the answer should be 1.06, since a dierence of 1 in the last place of the least exact factor used in the calculation (9.3) yields a percentage of error about the same (about 1 percent) as a dierence of 1 in the last place of 1.06 1:06 Æ 0:01. Similarly, 0:92 Â 1:13 1:04: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS: As a rule, the values of sines, cosines, tangents, and so forth, should have the same number of signi®cant ®gures as their arguments. For example, sin 358 0:57 whereas sin 35:08 0:574:

Exercises
1 How many signi®cant ®gures are given in the following quantities? (a) (b) (c) Ans. Ans. Ans. Ans. 2 454 g 2.2 N 2.205 N (a) (b) (c) (d ) 3 2 4 4 (e) 0.035 3 m (i ) 1:118 Â 10À3 V j 1030 kg/m3 k 125 000 N
7

( f ) 1.008 0 hr ( g) 14.0 A (h) (e) (f) ( g) (h) 3 5 3 2 9:3 Â 10 km (i ) 4 j 4 k 6

(d ) 0.393 7 s

Add: (a) 703 h (b) 18.425 cm 7 h 7.21 cm 0.66 h 5.0 cm

(c) 0.003 5 s 0.097 s 0.225 s

(d ) 4.0 N 0.632 N 0.148 N

Ans. (a) 711 h, (b) 30.6 cm, (c) 0.326 s, (d ) 4.8 N 3 Subtract: (a) 7.26 J 0.2 J (b) 562.4 m (c) 34 kg 16.8 m 0.2 kg

Ans. (a) 7.1 J, (b) 545.6 m, (c) 34 kg 4 Multiply: (a) 2:21 Â 0:3 (d ) 107:88 Â 0:610 (b) 72:4 Â 0:084 (e) 12:4 Â 84:0 (c) 2:02 Â 4:113 ( f ) 72:4 Â 8:6 (d ) 65.8 (e) 1:04 Â 103 ( f ) 6:2 Â 102

Ans. (a) 0.7 Ans. (b) 6.1 Ans. (c) 8.31 5 Divide: (a)

97:52 14:28 0:032 9:80 (b) (c) (d ) 2:54 0:714 0:004 9:30 Ans. (a) 38.4, (b) 20.0, (c) 8, (d ) 1.05

Appendix B
Trigonometry Needed for College Physics
FUNCTIONS OF AN ACUTE ANGLE: The trigonometric functions most often used are the sine, cosine, and tangent. It is convenient to put the de®nitions of the functions of an acute angle in terms of the sides of a right triangle. In any right triangle: The sine of either acute angle is equal to the length of the side opposite that angle divided by the length of the hypotenuse. The cosine of either acute angle is equal to the length of the side adjacent to that angle divided by the length of the hypotenuse. The tangent of either acute angle is equal to the length of the side opposite that angle divided by the length of the side adjacent to that angle. If and are the acute angles of any right triangle and A, B, and C are the sides, as shown in the diagram, then opposite B hypotenuse C adjacent A cos hypotenuse C opposite B tan adjacent A sin opposite A hypotenuse C adjacent B cos hypotenuse C opposite A tan adjacent B sin

Note that sin cos ; thus the sine of any angle equals the cosine of its complementary angle. For example, sin 308 cos908 À 308 cos 608 cos 508 sin908 À 508 sin 408

As an angle increases from 08 to 908, its sine increases from 0 to 1, its tangent increases from 0 to in®nity, and its cosine decreases from 1 to 0.

LAW OF SINES AND OF COSINES: These two laws give the relations between the sides and angles of any plane triangle. In any plane triangle with angles , , and and sides opposite A, B, and C, respectively, the following relations apply: Law of Sines A B C sin sin sin or Law of Cosines A2 B2 C 2 À 2BC cos B2 A2 C 2 À 2AC cos C 2 A2 B2 À 2AB cos If the angle is between 908 and 1808, as in the case of angle C in the above diagram, then sin sin1808 À and 419
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

A sin B sin

B sin C sin

C sin A sin

cos À cos 1808 À

420

TRIGONOMETRY NEEDED FOR COLLEGE PHYSICS

[APPENDIX B

Thus

sin 1208 sin1808 À 1208 sin 608 0:866 cos 1208 À cos1808 À 1208 À cos 608 À0:500

Solved Problems
1 In right triangle ABC, given A 8, B 6, 908. Find the values of the sine, cosine, and tangent of angle and of angle .
C p p 8:02 6:02 100 10 sin B=C 6:0=10 0:60 cos A=C 8:0=10 0:80 tan B=A 6:0=8:0 0:75

sin A=C 8:0=10 0:80 cos B=C 6:0=10 0:60 tan A=B 8:0=6:0 1:3

2

Given a right triangle with one acute angle 40:08 and hypotenuse 400. Find the other sides and angles. sin 40:08 A 400 and cos 40:08 B 400

Using a calculator, we ®nd that sin 40:08 0:642 8 and cos 40:08 0:766 0. Then a 400 sin 40:08 4000:642 8 257 b 400 cos 40:08 4000:766 0 306 B 90:08 À 40:08 50:08

3

Given triangle ABC with 64:08, 71:08, B 40:08. Find A and C.

180:08 À 180:08 À 64:08 71:08 45:08 By the law of sines, A B sin sin so and A C and C B sin sin

B sin 40:0 sin 64:08 40:00:898 8 38:0 sin sin 71:08 0:945 5 B sin 40:0 sin 45:08 40:00:707 1 29:9 sin sin 71:08 0:945 5

4

(a) If cos 0:438, ®nd to the nearest degree. (b) If sin 0:800 0, ®nd to the nearest tenth of a degree. (c) If cos 0:712 0, ®nd to the nearest tenth of a degree.
(a) (b) (c) On your calculator use the inverse and cosine keys to get 648; or if you have a cosÀ1 key use it. Enter 0.800 0 on your calculator and use the inverse and sine keys to get 53:18. Use your calculator as in (a) to get 44:68.

APPENDIX B]

TRIGONOMETRY NEEDED FOR COLLEGE PHYSICS

421

5

Given triangle ABC with 130:88, A 525, C 421. Find B, , and
.
sin 130:88 sin 1808 À 130:88 sin 49:28 0:757 Most hand calculators give sin 130:88 directly. C sin 421 sin 30:88 4210:757 0:607 A 525 525 from which 37:48: For X sin For X For B X 1808 À 1808 À 37:48 130:88 11:88 B A sin 525 sin 11:88 5250:204 142 sin sin 130:88 0:757

6

Given triangle ABC with A 14, B 8:0, 1308. Find C, , and : cos 1308 À cos 1808 À 1308 À cos 508 À0:64 For C: By the law of cosines, C2 A2 B2 À 2AB cos 1308 142 8:02 À 2148:0À0:643 404 p and C 404 20: For : By the law of sines, sin and 328: For : 1808 À
1808 À 328 1308 188 A sin 140:766 0:533 C 20:1

Exercises
7 Solve each of the following right triangles ABC, with 908: (a) (b) (c) Ans. Ans. Ans. 8 23:38, C 346 49:28, B 222 66:68, A 113 (a) 66:78, A 137, B 318 (b) 40:88, A 192, C 293 (c) 23:48, B 48:9, C 123 (d ) 33:68, 56:48, C 45:9 (e) 40:78, 49:38, A 579 (d ) A 25:4, B 38:2 (e) B 673, C 888

Solve each of the following oblique triangles ABC. (a) (b) (c) Ans. Ans. Ans. Ans. A 125, 54:68, 65:28 B 321, 75:38, 38:58 B 215, C 150, 42:78 48:88 (a) (b) (c) (d ) (e) B 50:4, C 33:3, 118:58 ( f ) B 120, C 270, 118:78 ( g) A 24:5, B 18:6, C 26:4 (h) A 6:34, B 7:30, C 9:98 (e) (f) ( g) (h) A 25:1, 26:08, 35:58 A 344, 17:88, 43:58 63:28, 42:78, 74:18 39:38, 46:98, 93:88

(d ) A 512, B 426,

B 139, C 133, 60:28 A 339, C 218, 66:28 A 300, 109:18, 28:28 C 680, 38:88, 92:48

Appendix C
Exponents
POWERS OF 10: 100 1 101 10 102 10 Â 10 100 103 10 Â 10 Â 10 1000 104 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 10 000 105 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 100 000 106 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 Â 10 1 000 000 In the expression 105 , the base is 10 and the exponent is 5. MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION: a3 Â a5 a35 a8 102 Â 103 1023 105 10 Â 10 1011 102 a5 a5À3 a2 a3 102 102À5 10À3 105 In multiplication, exponents of like bases are added: 107 Â 10À3 107À3 104 4 Â 104 2 Â 10À6 8 Â 104À6 8 Â 10À2 2 Â 105 3 Â 10À2 6 Â 105À2 6 Â 103 8 Â 102 8 Â 1026 4 Â 108 2 Â 10À6 2 5:6 Â 10À2 5:6 Â 10À2À4 3:5 Â 10À6 1:6 1:6 Â 104 10À3 10À4 The following is a partial list of powers of 10. (See also Appendix E.) 10À1 10À2 1 0:1 10 1 1 0:01 2 100 10 1 1 0:001 103 1000 1 1 0:000 1 104 10 000

In division, exponents of like bases are subtracted:

SCIENTIFIC NOTATION: Any number may be expressed as an integral power of 10, or as the product of two numbers one of which is an integral power of 10. For example, 2806 2:806 Â 103 22 406 2:240 6 Â 104 454 4:54 Â 102 0:454 4:54 Â 10À1 OTHER OPERATIONS:
0

0:045 4 4:54 Â 10À2 0:000 06 6 Â 10À5 0:003 06 3:06 Â 10À3 0:000 000 5 5 Â 10À7

A nonzero expression with an exponent of zero is equal to 1. Thus, 100 1 3 Â 100 1 8:2 Â 100 8:2

a 1

A power may be transferred from the numerator to the denominator of a fraction, or vice versa, by changing the sign of the exponent. For example, 10À4 1 104 5 Â 10À3 5 103 7 7 Â 102 10À2 422
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

À 5aÀ2 À

5 a2

APPENDIX C]

EXPONENTS

423

The meaning of the fractional exponent is illustrated by the following: p p p p p 3 103=2 103 101=2 10 43=2 43 64 8 102=3 102 To take a power to a power, multiply exponents: 103 2 103Â2 106 10À2 3 10À2Â3 10À6 a3 À2 aÀ6 To extract the square root, divide the exponent by 2. If the exponent is an odd number it should ®rst be increased or decreased by 1, and the coecient adjusted accordingly. To extract the cube root, divide the exponent by 3. The coecients are treated independently. Thus, p p p 4:9 Â 10À5 49 Â 10À6 7:0 Â 10À3 9 Â 104 3 Â 102 p p p p 3 3 3:6 Â 107 36 Â 106 6:0 Â 103 1:25 Â 108 125 Â 106 5:00 Â 102 Most hand calculators give square roots directly. Cube roots and other roots are easily found using the y x key.

Exercises
1 Express the following in powers of 10. (a) 326 (d ) 36 000 008 (b) 32 608 (c) 1006 Ans. Ans. Ans. 2 (e) 0.831 ( f) 0.03 (d ) 3:600 000 8 Â 107 (e) 8:31 Â 10À1 ( f ) 3 Â 10À2 ( g) 2 Â 10À6 (h) 7:06 Â 10À4 (i ) 9:0 Â 10À3 j 3:0 Â 10À2 ( g) 0.000 002 (h) 0.000 706 p 0:000 081 p 3 j 0:000 027 (i )

(a) 3:26 Â 102 (b) 3:260 8 Â 104 (c) 1:006 Â 103

Evaluate the following and express the results in powers of 10. p p 1:728 Â 17:28 3 3 (i ) 2:7 Â 107 1:25 Â 10À4 (a) 1500 Â 260 (e) 0:000 172 8 (b) (c) 220 Â 35 000 40 Ä 20 000 (f) ( g) 16 0000:000 21:2 20000:0060:000 32 0:004 Â 32 000 Â 0:6 6400 Â 3000 Â 0:08 j 1 Â 10À3 2 Â 105 2 k 3 Â 102 3 2 Â 10À5 2 3:6 Â 10À8

(d ) 82 800 Ä 0:12 Ans. Ans. Ans. Ans. (a) (b) (c) (d ) 3:90 Â 105 7:70 Â 106 2:0 Â 10À3 6:9 Â 105

p p (h) 14 400 0:000 025 (e) (f) ( g) (h) 1:728 Â 105 1 Â 103 5 Â 10À5 6:0 Â 10À1 (i ) j k l

l 82 Â 10À2 À3 1:5 Â 101 4 Â 107 3 Â 105 1 Â 106

Appendix D
Logarithms
THE LOGARITHM TO BASE 10 of a number is the exponent or power to which 10 must be raised to yield the number. Since 1000 is 103 , the logarithm to base 10 of 1000 (written log 1000) is 3. Similarly, log 10 000 4, log 10 1, log 0:1 À1, and log 0:001 À3. Most hand calculators have a log key. When a number is entered into the calculator, its logarithm to base 10 can be found by pressing the log key. In this way we ®nd that log 50 1:698 97 and log 0:035 À1:455 93. Also, log 1 0, which re¯ects the fact that 100 1.

NATURAL LOGARITHMS are taken to the base e 2:718, rather than 10. They can be found on most hand calculators by pressing the ln key. Since e0 1, we have ln 1 0. Examples: log 971 2:987 2 log 9:71 0:987 2 log 0:097 1 À1:012 8 Exercises: (a) 454 (b) 5280 (c) 96 500 (d ) 30.48 (e) 1.057 Ans. (a) (b) (c) (d ) (e) ln 971 6:878 3 ln 9:71 2:273 2 ln 0:097 1 À2:332 0

Find the logarithms to base 10 of the following numbers. ( f ) 0.621 ( g) 0.946 3 (h) 0.035 3 (i ) 0.002 2 j 0.000 264 5 2.657 1 3.722 6 4.984 5 1.484 0 0.024 1 (f) ( g) (h) (i ) j À0:206 9 À0:023 97 À1:452 2 À2:657 6 À3:577 6

ANTILOGARITHMS: Suppose we have an equation such as 3:5 100:544 ; then we know that 0.544 is the log to base 10 of 3.5. Or, inversely, we can say that 3.5 is the antilogarithm (or inverse logarithm) of 0.544. Finding the antilogarithm of a number is simple with most hand calculators: Simply enter the number; then press ®rst the inverse key and then the log key. Or, if the base is e rather than 10, press the inverse and ln keys. Exercises: (a) 3.156 8 (b) 1.693 4 (c) 5.693 4 (d ) 2.500 0 (e) 2.043 6 Find the numbers corresponding to the following logarithms. ( f ) 0.914 2 ( g) 0.000 8 (h) À0:249 3 (i ) À1:996 5 j À2:799 4 424
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

APPENDIX D]

LOGARITHMS

425

Ans. (a) (b) (c) (d ) (e)

1435 49.37 4:937 Â 105 316.2 110.6

(f) ( g) (h) (i ) j

8.208 1.002 0.563 2 0.010 08 0.001 587

BASIC PROPERTIES OF LOGARITHMS: ponents are also properties of logarithms. log ab log a log b

Since logarithms are exponents, all properties of ex-

(1) The logarithm of the product of two numbers is the sum of their logarithms. Thus, log 5280 Â 48 log 5280 log 48 (2) The logarithm of the quotient of two numbers is the logarithm of the numerator minus the logarithm of the denominator. For example, log a log a À log b b log an n log a p 1 n log a log a n log 536 log 536 À log 24:5 24:5

(3) The logarithm of the nth power of a number is n times the logarithm of the number. Thus, log 4:283 3 log 4:28 p 1 3 log 792 log 792 3

(4) The logarithm of the nth root of a number is 1/n times the logarithm of the number. Thus, p 1 log 32 log 32 2

Solved Problem
1 Use a hand calculator to evaluate (a) (5.2)0:4 , (b) (6.138)3, (c) (a) (b) (c) p 3 5, (d ) 7:25 Â 10À11 0:25 :

Enter 5.2; press yx key; enter 0.4; press key. The displayed answer is 1.934. Enter 6.138; press yx key; enter 3; press key. The displayed answer is 231.2. Enter 5; press yx key; enter 0.333 3; press key. The displayed answer is 1.710.

(d ) Enter 7:25 Â 10À11 ; press yx key; enter 0.25; press key. The displayed answer is 2:918 Â 10À3 :

Exercises
2 Evaluate each of the following. (1) 28:32 Â 0:082 54 (2) 573 Â 6:96 Â 0:004 81 79:28 63:57 65:38 (4) 225:2 (3) 1 239 0:572 Â 31:8 (6) 96:2 779 273 (7) 47:5 Â Â 760 300 (5) (8) 8:6422

426

LOGARITHMS

[APPENDIX D

(9) 0:086 422 (10) 11:723 (11) 0:052 3 p (12) 9463 p (13) 946:3 (14) (15)
3

(20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25)

p 0:006 61 p 3 1:79

8:5 Â 10À45 1:6 Â 10À22 p 2:54 Â 106 p 9:44 Â 105 p 7:2 Â 10À13 p 3 7:3 Â 10À14 s 1:1 Â 10À23 6:8 Â 10À2 1:4 Â 10À24

(26) 2:04 log 97:2 (27) 37 log 0:029 8 (28) 6:30 log 2:95 Â 103 (29) 8:09 log 5:68 Â 10À16 (30) 2:000:714 (25) 0.73
5

p 4 (16) 0:182 p (17) 643 Â 1:913 (18) 8:73 Â 10À2 7:49 Â 106 (19) 3:8 Â 10À5 2 1:9 Â 10À5 Ans. (1) 2.337 (2) 19.2 (3) 1.247 (4) 0.290 2 (5) 0.004 18 (6) 0.189 (7) 44.3 (8) 74.67 (9) 0.007 467 (10) 1611 (11) 0.000 143 (12) 97.27 (13) 30.76 (14) 0.081 3 (15) 1.21 (16) 0.653 (17) 177

(18) 6:54 Â 10 (20) 5:3 Â 10

(26) 4.05 (27) À56 (28) 21.9 (29) À123 (30) 1.64

(19) 2:7 Â 10À14
À23

(21) 1:59 Â 103 (22) 9:72 Â 10
2

(23) 8:5 Â 10À7 (24) 4:2 Â 10À5

Appendix E
Pre®xes for Multiples of SI Units Multiplication Factor 1012 109 106 103 102 10 10À1 10À2 10À3 10À6 10À9 10À12 10À15 10À18 Pre®x tera giga mega kilo hecto deka deci centi milli micro nano pico femto atto Symbol T G M k h da d c m n p f a

The Greek Alphabet A B À Á E Z alpha beta gamma delta epsilon zeta H Â I K Ã M l eta theta iota kappa lambda mu N Ä O Å P Æ o nu xi omicron pi rho sigma T Y È X É ! tau upsilon phi chi psi omega

427
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

Appendix F
Factors for Conversions to SI Units
Acceleration Area 1 ft/s2 0:304 8 m/s2 g 9:807 m/s2 1 acre 4047 m2 1 ft2 9:290 Â 10À2 m2 1 in.2 6:45 Â 10À4 m2 1 mi2 2:59 Â 106 m2 1 g/cm3 103 kg/m3 1 Btu 1054 J 1 calorie (cal) 4:184 J 1 electron volt (eV) 1:602 Â 10À19 J 1 foot pound ft Á lb)=1.356 J 1 kilowatt hour kW Á h 3:60 Â 106 J 1 dyne 10À5 N 1 lb 4:44 8 N Ê 1 angstrom (A) 10À10 m 1 ft 0:304 8 m 1 in. 2:54 Â 10À2 m 1 light year 9:461 Â 1015 m 1 mile 1069 m 1 atomic mass unit (u) 1:660 6 Â 10À27 kg 1 gram 10À3 kg 1 Btu/s 1054 W cal/s 4:184 W ft Á lb=s 1:356 W horsepower (hp) 746 W atmosphere (atm) 1:013 Â 105 Pa 1 bar 105 Pa 1 cmHg 1333 Pa 1 lb/ft2 47:88 Pa 1 lb/in.2 (psi) 6895 Pa 1 N/m2 1 pascal (Pa) 1 torr 133:3 Pa 1 ft/s (fps) 0:304 8 m/s 1 km/h 0:277 8 m/s 1 mi/h (mph) 0:447 04 m/s TKelvin TCelsius 273:15 TKelvin 5 TFahrenheit 459:67 9 TKelvin 5 TRankine 9 1 day 86 400 s 1 year 3:16 Â 107 s 1 ft3 2:832 Â 10À2 m3 1 gallon 3:785 Â 10À3 m3 1 in.3 1:639 Â 10À5 m3 1 liter 10À3 m3 TCelsius 5 TFahrenheit À 32 9 1 1 1 1

Pressure

Density Energy

Speed

Force Length

Temperature

Time Volume

Mass

Power

428
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

Appendix G
Physical Constants
Speed of light in free space . . . . . . . . Acceleration due to gravity (normal) . Gravitational constant . . . . . . . . . . . Coulomb constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Density of water (maximum). . . . . . . Density of mercury (S.T.P.) . . . . . . . Standard atmosphere . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume of ideal gas at S.T.P. . . . . . . Avogadro's number . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal gas constant . . . . . . . . . . . Ice point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical equivalent of heat . . . . . . Stefan±Boltzmann constant . . . . . . . . Planck's constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faraday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boltzmann's constant . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratio of electron charge to mass . . . . Electron rest mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proton rest mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neutron rest mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alpha particle rest mass . . . . . . . . . . Atomic mass unit (1/12 mass of 12C) . Rest energy of 1 u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c g G k0 2:997 924 58 Â 108 m=s 9:807 m/s2 6:672 59 Â 10À11 N Á m2 =kg2 8:988 Â 109 N Á m2 =C2 0:999 972 Â 103 kg=m3 13:595 Â 103 kg=m3 1:013 2 Â 105 N=m2 22:4 m3 =kmol 6:022 Â 1026 kmolÀ1 8314 J=kmol Á K 273:15 K 4:184 J=cal 5:67 Â 10À8 W=m2 Á K4 6:626 Â 10À34 J Á s 9:648 5 Â 104 C=mol 1:602 2 Â 10À19 C 1:38 Â 10À23 J=K 1:758 8 Â 1011 C=kg 9:109 Â 10À31 kg 1:672 6 Â 10À27 kg 1:674 9 Â 10À27 kg 6:645 Â 10À27 kg 1:660 6 Â 10À27 kg 931:5 MeV

NA R

h F e kB e=me me mp mn u

429
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

Appendix H
Table of the Elements
The masses listed are based on 12 C 12 u. A value in parentheses is the mass number of the most stable 6 (long-lived) of the known isotopes.

Element Actinium Aluminum Americium Antimony Argon Arsenic Astatine Barium Berkelium Beryllium Bismuth Boron Bromine Cadmium Calcium Californium Carbon Cerium Cesium Chlorine Chromium Cobalt Copper Curium Dysprosium Einsteinium Erbium Europium Fermium Fluorine Francium Gadolinium Gallium Germanium Gold Hafnium Helium Holmium Hydrogen Indium Iodine Iridium Iron Krypton Lanthanum Lawrencium Lead Lithium Lutetium

Symbol Ac Al Am Sb Ar As At Ba Bk Be Bi B Br Cd Ca Cf C Ce Cs Cl Cr Co Cu Cm Dy Es Er Eu Fm F Fr Gd Ga Ge Au Hf He Ho H In I Ir Fe Kr La Lr Pb Li Lu

Atomic Number Z 89 13 95 51 18 33 85 56 97 4 83 5 35 48 20 98 6 58 55 17 24 27 29 96 66 99 68 63 100 9 87 64 31 32 79 72 2 67 1 49 53 77 26 36 57 103 82 3 71

Average Atomic Mass, u (227) 26.981 5 (243) 121.75 39.948 74.921 6 (210) 137.34 (247) 9.012 2 208.980 10.811 79.904 112.40 40.08 (251) 12.011 2 140.12 132.905 35.453 51.996 58.933 2 63.546 (247) 162.50 (254) 167.26 151.96 (257) 18.998 4 (223) 157.25 69.72 72.59 196.967 178.49 4.002 6 164.930 1.008 0 114.82 126.904 4 192.2 55.847 83.80 138.91 (257) 207.19 6.939 174.97

430
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

APPENDIX H]

TABLE OF THE ELEMENTS

431

Table of the Elements (Continued) Element Magnesium Manganese Mendelevium Mercury Molybdenum Neodymium Neon Neptunium Nickel Niobium Nitrogen Nobelium Osmium Oxygen Palladium Phosphorus Platinum Plutonium Polonium Potassium Praseodymium Promethium Protactinium Radium Radon Rhenium Rhodium Rubidium Ruthenium Samarium Scandium Selenium Silicon Silver Sodium Strontium Sulfur Tantalum Technetium Tellurium Terbium Thallium Thorium Thulium Tin Titanium Tungsten Uranium Vanadium Xenon Ytterbium Yttrium Zinc Zirconium Symbol Mg Mn Md Hg Mo Nd Ne Np Ni Nb N No Os O Pd P Pt Pu Po K Pr Pm Pa Ra Rn Re Rh Rb Ru Sm Sc Se Si Ag Na Sr S Ta Tc Te Tb Tl Th Tm Sn Ti W U V Xe Yb Y Zn Zr Atomic Number Z 12 25 101 80 42 60 10 93 28 41 7 102 76 8 46 15 78 94 84 19 59 61 91 88 86 75 45 37 44 62 21 34 14 47 11 38 16 73 43 52 65 81 90 69 50 22 74 92 23 54 70 39 30 40 Average Atomic Mass, u 24.312 54.938 0 (256) 200.59 95.94 144.24 20.183 (237) 58.71 92.906 14.006 7 (254) 190.2 15.999 4 106.4 30.973 8 195.09 (244) (209) 39.102 140.907 (145) (231) (226) 222 186.2 102.905 85.47 101.07 150.35 44.956 78.96 28.086 107.868 22.989 8 87.62 32.064 180.948 (97) 127.60 158.924 204.37 232.038 1 168.934 118.69 47.90 183.85 238.03 50.942 131.30 173.04 88.905 65.37 91.22

This page intentionally left blank.

Index
Absolute humidity, 186 Absolute potential, 243 Absolute temperature, 166, 179 and molecular energy, 179 Absolute zero, 171 Absorption of light, 392 ac circuits, 329 ±337 ac generator, 329 Acceleration, 13 angular, 99 centripetal, 100 due to gravity, 14 and force, 28 radial, 100 in SHM, 127 tangential, 100 Accelerator, high energy, 410 Action±Reaction Law, 28 Activity, nuclear, 401 Actual mechanical advantage, 80 Addition of vectors, 1 Adiabatic process, 199 Alpha particle, 399 Alternating voltage, 329 ±337 Ammeter, 279 Ammeter±voltmeter method, 256 Ampere (unit), 256 Amplitude of vibration, 126, 213 Analogies, linear and rotational motion, 99, 112 Angular acceleration, 99 and torque, 111 Angular displacement, 99 Angular frequency, 129 Angular measure, 99 Angular momentum, 112 conservation of, 112, 121 Angular motion, 99 ±110 equations for, 99, 100 Angular velocity, 99 Antinode, 215 Apparent depth in refraction, 350 Archimedes' principle, 146 Armature, 315 Astronomical telescope, 359 Atmospheric pressure, 146 Atomic mass, 400 Atomic mass unit, 399 Atomic number, 390, 399 Atomic photoelectric eect, 394 Atomic table, 430 Atwood's machine, 39 Avogadro's number, 179 Axis for torque, 56, 57 Back emf, 316 Ballistic pendulum, 90 Balmer series, 391 Banking of curves, 107 Battery, 256 ampere-hour rating, 267 Beats, 224 Becquerel (unit), 401 Bernoulli's equation, 158 Beta particle, 399 Binding energy, 400, 409 Biot±Savart Law, 300 Blackbody, 194 Bohr model, 234, 261, 301, 390 Boltzmann's constant, 179 Boyle's Law, 171 Bragg equation, 367 British thermal unit, 185 Bulk modulus, 139 Buoyant force, 146 Calorie (unit), 185 nutritionist's, 185 Calorimetry, 185 Capacitance, 244 Capacitive reactance, 330 Capacitors, 244, 285, 321 in ac circuit, 330±332 charging of, 323 energy of, 244 in parallel, 244 in series, 244 Carbon dating, 413 Carnot cycle, 199 Celsius temperature, 166 Center of gravity, 57 Center of mass, 88 Centigrade temperature (see Celsius temperature) Centipoise (unit), 157 Centripetal acceleration, 100 Centripetal force, 100 Chain hoist, 84, 85 Chain reaction, 409 Charge: conservation of, 232 of electron, 232 Charge motion in ~ ®eld, 290±293 B Charge quantum, 232 Charles' Law, 171 Coherent waves, 366 Collisions, 87 Component method, 3 Components of a vector, 2 Compressibility, 139 Compressional waves, 213±214, 218±223 Compton eect, 382 Concave mirror, 339 ray diagram for, 343 Concurrent forces, 47 Conduction of heat, 193 Conductivity, thermal, 193 Conical pendulum, 105 Conservation: of angular momentum, 112, 121 of charge, 232 of energy, 70 of linear momentum, 87 Constants, table of, 429 Continuity equation, 157 Convection of heat, 194 Conversion factors, 29, 428 Convex mirror, 339 ray diagram for, 342 Coplanar forces, 56 Coulomb (unit), 232 Coulomb force, 232 Coulomb's Law, 232 Counter emf, 316 Crest of wave, 213 Critical angle, 347 Curie (unit), 404 Current, electric, 256 Current loop, torque on, 291 Dalton's Law of partial pressures, 172 Daughter nucleus, 407 de Broglie wavelength, 383 de Broglie waves, resonance, 383, 387 Decay constant, 401 Decay law, radioactivity, 403 Decibel (unit), 224 Density, 138 Deuteron, 399 Dew point, 186 Diamagnetism, 305 Dielectric constant, 232, 244 Dierential pulley, 84, 85 Diraction, 366 and limit of resolution, 366 by single slit, 366 of X-rays, 367 Diraction grating, 366 Dimensional analysis, 29 Diopter (unit), 354 Direct current circuits, 256±288 Discharge rate, ¯uids, 157

433
Copyright 1997, 1989, 1979, 1961, 1942, 1940, 1939, 1936 The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click Here for Terms of Use.

434

INDEX

Disorder, 209 Displacement, angular, 99 Displacement vector, 1 Domain, magnetic, 300 Doppler eect, 224 Dose, of radiation, 409, 410 Double-slit interference, 368 Earth, age of, 406 magnetic ®eld of, 290 Eective radiation dose, 410 Eective values of circuits, 329 Eciency, 80, 199 Elastic collision, 88 Elastic limit, 139 Elasticity, 138 Electric current, 256 Electric ®eld, 233 of parallel plates, 238, 244 of point charge, 233 related to potential, 244 Electric ®eld strength, 233 Electric generator, 315±320 Electric motor, 315±320 Electric potential, 243 Electric potential energy, 243 Electric power, 265±269 Electromotive force (see emf) Electron, 232, 399 Electron volt (unit), 244 emf (electromotive force), 256 counter, 316 induced, 305±314 motional, 306 Emission of light, 390 Emissivity, 194 Energy, 69 in a capacitor, 244 conservation of, 70 electric potential, 243 gravitational potential, 69 heat, 191, 198 in an inductor, 321 internal, 198 kinetic, 69 quantization of, 383 relativistic, 374, 375, 381 rotational kinetic, 111 in SHM, 127 in a spring, 127 of vibration, 127 Energy-level diagram, 390 helium ion, 393 hydrogen, 391 Entropy, 209 ±212 Equation of continuity, 157 Equations: nuclear, 40 uniform motion, 13 Equilibrant, 11

Equilibrium, 47±55 under concurrent forces, 47 ®rst condition for, 47 of rigid body, 56±68 second condition for, 56 thermal, 198 Equivalent capacitance, 244 Equivalent optical path length, 367 Equivalent resistance, 270 Erg (unit), 69 Exclusion principle, 396 Explosions, 87 Exponential decay, 403 Exponential functions, in R-C circuit, 323 Exponents, math review, 422 Eye, 359 ~ m~ 28 F a; f stop of lens, 360 Fahrenheit temperature, 166 Farad (unit), 244 Faraday's Law, 305 Farsightedness, 360 Ferromagnetism, 300, 305 Field: electric, 233 magnetic, 299 Field lines, 233, 289 First condition for equilibrium, 47 First Law of Thermodynamics, 198 Fission, nuclear, 409 Five motion equations, 13 Flow and ¯ow rate, 157 Fluid pressure, 146 Fluids: in motion, 157±165 at rest, 146±156 Flux: magnetic, 305 Focal length: lens, 353 mirror, 338 Focal point: lens, 353 mirror, 338 Foot-pound (unit), 69 Force, 28 and acceleration, 28 centripetal, 100 on current, 290 on moving charge, 290 nuclear, 399 restoring, 126 Free-body diagram, 47 Free fall, 14, 19 Frequency and period, 99, 126, 128 Frequency of vibration, 213 Friction force, 47 Fundamental frequency, 215 Fusion, heat of, 185 Fusion, nuclear, 409

Galvanometer, 278, 312 Gamma ray, 401 Gas, speed of molecules in, 179 Gas constant, 171 Gas Law, 171 Gas-Law problems, 172 Gauge pressure, 172 Gauss (unit), 290 Gay-Lussac's Law, 171 Generator, electric, 315, 329 Graphing of motion, 14 Grating equation, 366 Gravitation, Law of, 28 Gravitational potential energy, 69 Gravity: acceleration due to, 14 center of, 57 Gray (unit), 409 Greek alphabet, 427 Ground state, 396 Gyration radius, 111 Half-life, 400 Heat: conduction of, 193 convection of, 194 of fusion, 185 radiation of, 194 in resistors, 265 of sublimation, 185 transfer of, 193±197 of vaporization, 185 Heat capacity, 185 Heat conductivity, 193 Heat energy, 191, 198 Heat engine eciency, 199 Helium energy levels, 393 Henry (unit), 321 Hertz (unit), 126 High-energy accelerators, 410 Hookean spring, 127 Hooke's Law, 127, 128, 138 Horsepower (unit), 70 House circuit, 272 Humidity, 186 Hydraulic press, 148 Hydrogen atom, 390±395 energy levels of, 391 Hydrostatic pressure, 146 Ideal gas, 171±178 mean-free path, 180 pressure of, 180 Ideal Gas Law, 171 Ideal mechanical advantage, 80 Image size, 339, 353 Imaginary image (see Virtual image) Impedance, 330 Impulse, 87 angular, 112 Index of refraction, 346

INDEX

435

Induced emf, 305±314 motional, 306 Inductance, 321±328 energy in, 321 mutual, 321 self, 321 of solenoid, 323 Inductive reactance, 330 Inelastic collision, 88 Inertia, 27 moment of, 111 Inertial reference frame, 374 Infrasonic waves, 223 In-phase vibrations, 214, 224 Instantaneous velocity, 14 Intensity: of sound, 223 Intensity level, 224 Interference, 366 double-slit, 368 of sound waves, 224 thin ®lm, 368±369 Internal energy, 198 Internal resistance, 256 Isobaric process, 198 Isothermal process, 198 Isotope, 400 Isotropic material, 166 Isovolumic process, 198 Jackscrew, 84 Joule (unit), 69 Junction rule, 283 Kelvin scale, 166, 179 and molecular energy, 179 Kilogram (unit), 27 Kilomole (unit), 171 Kilowatt-hour (unit), 265 Kinetic energy, 69 of gas molecule, 179 rotational, 111 translational, 69 Kinetic theory of gases, 179 ±184 Kirchho's Laws, 283 Large calorie, 185 Law: of cosines, 419 of re¯ection, 338 of sines, 419 of universal gravitation, 28 Length contraction, 375 Lens(es): combinations of, 359 in contact, 354 equation for, 353 power of, 354 ray diagrams for, 354±355 Lensmaker's equation, 353 Lenz's Law, 305 Lever arm, 56

Levers, 81 Light: absorption of, 392 diraction of, 366 emission of, 390 interference of, 366 re¯ection of, 338±345 refraction of, 346±352 speed of, 346 Light quantum, 382 Limit of resolution, 366 Limiting speed, relativity, 374 Line of propagation, 213 Linear momentum, 87±98 Logarithms, 424 Longitudinal waves, 213, 215 resonance of, 218±220 speed of, 223 Loop rule, 283 Loudness level, 224 Loudness of sound, 224 Lyman series, 391 Machines, 80±86 Magnet, 289 Magnetic ®eld, 289 charge motion in, 291, 293 of Earth, 290 lines of, 289 of long straight wire, 299 of magnet, 289 sources of, 299 ±304 torque due to, 291 Magnetic ®eld strength, 290 Magnetic ¯ux, 305 Magnetic ¯ux density, 290 Magnetic force: on current, 290 on magnet, 289 on moving charge, 290±293 Magnetic induction, 290 Magnetic moment of coil, 300 Magnetic permeability, 305 Magnetic quantum number, 396 Magni®cation, 339, 353, 359 ±361 Magnifying glass, 359 Manometer, 150 Mass, 27 of atoms and molecules, 179, 181 relativistic, 320 and weight, 28 Mass center, 88 Mass density, 138 Mass number, 399 Mass spectrograph, 401 Mean free path, 180 Mechanical advantage, 80 Meters, ac, 329 Metric pre®xes, 427 Michelson interferometer, 369 Microscope, 359, 361

Mirrors, 338 equations for, 339 ray diagrams for, 340±342 Modulus of elasticity, 139 ±140 Mole (unit), 171 Molecular mass, 171, 179 Molecular speeds, 150 Molecular weight, 171 Moment arm (see Lever arm) Moment of inertia, 111 of various objects, 112 Momentum: angular, 112 linear, 87±98 relativistic, 377, 381, 410 Motion, linear, 13±26 ®ve equations for, 13 relative, 9 Motion, rotational, 99 ±125 equations for, 99, 100 Motional emf, 306 Motor, 315 Multielectron atoms, 396±398 Mutual inductance, 321 Natural frequency (see Resonance frequency) Nearpoint of eye, 359 Nearsightedness, 359 Neutrino, 406 Neutron, 399 Neutron star, 125 Newton (unit), 27 Newton's Law of Gravitation, 28 Newton's Laws of Motion, 27±46 Newton's rings, 370 Node, 215 Node rule, 283 Normal force, 47 Nuclear equations, 401 Nuclear ®ssion, 409 Nuclear force, 399 Nuclear fusion, 409 Nuclear physics, 399 ±416 Nucleon, 399 Nucleus of atom, 399 Nutritionist's calorie, 185 Ohm (unit), 256 Ohm's Law, 256 ac circuit forms, 330 Opera glass, 365 Optical instruments, 359 ±365 Optical path length, 315 Orbital quantum number, 396 Order number, 366, 367 Out-of-phase vibrations, 214, 224 Overtones, 214 Pair production, 384 Parallel-axis theorem, 112 Parallel plates, 244

436

INDEX

Parallelogram method, 1 Paramagnetism, 305 Parent nucleus, 407 Partial pressure, 172 Particle in a tube, 387 Pascal (unit), 138 Pascal's principle, 146 Paschen series, 391 Path length, optical, 367 Pauli exclusion principle, 396 Pendulum, 129 ballistic, 90 conical, 105 energy in, 75 seconds, 137 Perfectly elastic collision, 88 Period, 126, 213 and frequency, 126 in SHM, 128 Permeability: of free space, 299, 305 magnetic, 305 relative, 304, 305 Permittivity, 232 Phase, 214, 224 in ac circuits, 330 change upon re¯ection, 369 in light waves, 366 Photoelectric eect, 382 atomic, 394 Photoelectric equation, 382 Photon, 382 Physical constants, table of, 429 Pipes, resonance of, 220 Planck's constant, 382 Plane mirror, 338±339 Point charge: ®eld of, 233 potential of, 243 Poise (unit), 157 Poiseuille (unit), 157 Poiseuille's Law, 157 Pole of magnet, 289 Polygon method, 1 Positron, 399 Postulates of relativity, 374 Potential, absolute, 243 Potential dierence, 243 related to E, 244 and work, 243 Potential, electric, 243 Potential energy: electric, 243 gravitational, 69 spring, 127 Power, 70 ac electrical, 332±333 dc electrical, 265±269 of lens, 354 in rotation, 112 Power factor, 332 Pre®xes, SI, 427

Pressure, 146 due to a ¯uid, 146 of ideal gas, 179, 180 standard, 146 and work, 157 Principal axis, 338 Principal focus, 338, 353 Principal quantum number, 396 Prism, 347 Probability and entropy, 209, 211 Projectile motion, 15 and range, 23±26 Proper length, 375 Proper time, 375 Proton, 399 Pulley systems, 82, 83 dierential, 84, 85 Quality factor, radiation, 409 Quantized energies, 383 Quantum numbers, 396 Quantum physics, 382 Quantum of radiation, 382 R value, 193 Rad (unit), 409 Radial acceleration, 100 Radian measure, 99 Radiation damage, 409 Radiation dose, 410 Radiation of heat, 194 Radioactivity, 400 Radium, 404 Radius of gyration, 111 Range of projectile, 23, 26 Ray diagrams: lenses, 354±355 mirrors, 340±342 RBE, 409 R-C circuit, 321 current in, 322 time constant of, 321 Reactance, 330 Real image, 339 Recoil, 89 Reference circle, 128 Reference frame, 374 Re¯ection, Law of, 338 Refraction, 346±352 Refractive index, 346 Relative humidity, 186 Relative motion, 9 Relative permeability, 304, 305 Relativistic mass, 374 Relativity, 346±352 energy in, 374±375 length in, 375 linear momentum in, 374, 377±378 mass in, 374 time in, 375 velocity addition in, 375

Rem (unit), 410 Resistance, 256 temperature variation of, 257 Resistivity, 257 Resistors: in parallel, 270 power loss in, 265 in series, 270 Resolution, limit of, 366 Resonance, 215 of de Broglie waves, 382, 387 of L-C circuit, 331 Resonance frequency, 215 Rest energy, 374 Restitution coecient, 88 Restoring force, 126 Resultant, 2 Reversible change, 209 Reynolds number, 158 Right-hand rule: force on moving charge, 289 force on wire, 291 magnetic ®eld of wire, 299 torque on coil, 291 Rigid-body rotation, 111±125 R-L circuit, 322 Rocket propulsion, 96, 97 Root mean square (rms) values, 329 Rotation of rigid bodies, 111±125 Rotational kinetic energy, 111 Rotational momentum, 112 Rotational motion: in a plane, 99 ±110 of rigid bodies, 111±125 and translation, 111 Rotational power, 112 Rotational work, 111 Rydberg constant, 392 Scalar, 1 Scienti®c notation, 422 Screw jack, 84 Second Law of Thermodynamics, 209 ±212 Seconds pendulum, 137 Self-inductance, 321 Series connection, 270 Series limit, 391 Shear modulus, 139 Shear rate, 157 Shunt resistance, 278 SI pre®xes, 427 Sievert (unit), 410 Signi®cant ®gures, 417 Simple harmonic motion (SHM), 126±137 acceleration in, 127 energy interchange in, 127 velocity in, 128 Simple machines, 80±86 Simultaneity in relativity, 375

INDEX

437

Single-slit diraction, 366, 371 Sinusoidal motion, 127 Slip ring, 315 Snell's Law, 346 Solenoid: ®eld of, 299 self-inductance of, 323 Sound, 223-231 intensity of, 223 resonance of, 218±220 speed of, 223 Sources of magnetic ®elds, 299 ± 304 Special Theory of Relativity, 374 Speci®c gravity, 138 Speci®c heat capacity, 185 of gases, 199 Spectral line, 391 Spectral series, 391 Specular re¯ection, 338 Speed, 13 of compressional waves, 223 of gas molecules, 179 of light, 346 limiting, 374 of sound, 223, 225 of waves on a string, 214, 215 Spherical mirror, 338 Spin quantum number, 396 Spring: constant of, 127 energy of, 127 Hookean, 127 period of, 128 vibration of, 126±137 Standard atmospheric pressure, 146 Standard conditions for a gas, 171 Standing waves, 214 State variables, 209 Stationary state, 383 Stefan±Boltzmann Law, 194 Stopping potential, 382 Strain, 138 Stress, 138 Sublimation, heat of, 185 Subtraction of vectors, 2 Sun, energy source of, 412 Superposition principle, 233 Tangential quantities, 100 Telephoto lens, 362 Telescope, 359, 363, 365

Temperature: coecient of resistance, 257 gradient of, 193 molecular basis for, 179 Temperature scales, 166, 179 Tensile force, 47 Terminal potential, 256 Tesla (unit), 290 Test charge, 232 Thermal conductivity, 193 Thermal expansion, 166±170 Thermal neutron, 385 Thermal resistance, 193 Thermodynamics, 198±208 First Law of, 198 Second Law of, 209 Zeroth Law of, 198 Thin lens formula, 353 Thin lenses, 353±358 types of, 353 Threshold wavelength, 382 Time constant: R-C, 321 R-L, 322 Time dilation, 375 Toroid, ®eld of, 299 Torque, 56 and angular acceleration, 111 axis for, 57 on current loop, 291 and power, 112 work done by, 111 Torr (unit), 146 Torricelli's theorem, 158 Total internal re¯ection, 347 Transfer of heat, 193±197 Transformer, 331 Transverse wave, 213, 214 Trigonometric functions, 2 review of, 419 ±421 Trough of a wave, 213 Twin paradox, 379 Ultrasonic waves, 223 Uniformly accelerated motion, 13±26 Unit vectors, 3 Units, operations with, 29 Universal gas constant, 171 Uranium-262, 411 Uranium-266, 406 Vaporization, heat of, 185

Vector addition: component method, 2 graphical method, 1 parallelogram method, 2 polygon method, 1 Vector notation, 1 Vector quantity, 1 Vector subtraction, 2 Vectors in ac circuits, 330 Velocity, 13 angular, 99 of gas molecules, 179 instantaneous, 14 in SHM, 127 Velocity addition, relativistic, 375 Velocity selector, 292 Venturi meter, 163 Vibratory motion, 126 Virtual image, 339 Viscosity, 156 Volt (unit), 243 Voltmeter, 278 Water equivalent, 185 Watt (unit), 70 Wave mechanics, 382 Wave motion, 213±222 Wave terminology, 213 Wavelength, 214 relation to velocity and frequency, 214 Weber (unit), 305 Weight, 28, 47 and mass, 28 Wheatstone bridge, 282 Wheel and axle, 83 Work, 70 against gravity, 71 electrical, 243, 265 of expansion, 157 in machines, 80 and P-V area, 199 and rotation, 111 and torque, 111 Work-energy theorem, 70 Work function, 382 X-ray diraction, 367 Young's double slit, 368, 369 Young's modulus, 139 Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, 198

Similar Documents

Free College Essays-The Physics Of Basketball

Science Essay

Marketer

Ford Pinto

Why Not

Albert Einstein

Isaac Newton Research Paper

Questionnaire

Ernest Rutherford Research Paper

Research Paper On Max Planck

Finches, Einstein's Wife, And Other Myths, By Alberto A. Martinez

Arthur Holmes Accomplishments

Isaac Newton Research Paper

Hiiiiiiiiiiiiii

Mike

Popular Essays